Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX7000/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .F-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[ i ] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i -1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . J-1
For how to unpacking and installation,

refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX7000/I1E)
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G-1
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . .K-1

[L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . L-1
[M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION . . . . . . . . . .S-1
[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . . T-1
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION .E-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
2. Newly employed technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
3. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2. Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the
status of toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- 1
- 2
- 5
- 6
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual (00ZMX7000/I1E)
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . 5 - 1
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT

1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
[B] OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . B - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
[C] DSPF SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCCC-
1
7
8
39
[D] SCANNER SECTION

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDDD-
1
2
3
10
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EEEE-
1
2
2
10
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .F
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F
[7] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- 1
- 3
- 10
- 111
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE

1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 12
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 43
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 4
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 6
1
5
6
23
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GGGG-
1
6
6
20
[H] DUPLEX SECTION

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HHHH-
1
2
2
17
[ i ] LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . i
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[J]
1
2
3
10
1
4
5
15
KKKK-
1
2
2
5
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . J
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .L
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L
[M] TRANSFER SECTION
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
2
13
MMMM-
1
2
3
18
CONTENTS
[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR

SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . N - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 4
[O] FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . O 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O -
1
2
3
24
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . P 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P -
1
2
2
7
[Q] DRIVE SECTION

1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 32
[R] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R - 1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 9
[T]
SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION

1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T - 1
MX-7000N
NOTE
FOR SERVICING
4)
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
following points.
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious

danger to life or a serious injury could result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or
a damage to properties could result.
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a

grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5)
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
1. Precautions for servicing

1)
When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,

the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2)
There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an

extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
3)
There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
4)
Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective

material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
5)
When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to

squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
6)
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

6)
Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
7)
Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which

may drop inside the machine.
8)
With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
3. Note for installing site

Do not install the machine at the following sites.
1)
Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.

Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7)
Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink

excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8)
The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to

damage fingers when servicing.
9)
Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,

toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
2)
Place of much vibrations

It may cause a breakdown.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to

it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2. Warning for servicing

1)
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2)
If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal

smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3)
Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage

occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
3)
Poorly ventilated place

An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,

grounding must be made.
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
4)
Place of direct sunlight.

Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5)
Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6)
Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7)
Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30 cm
(11-13/16")
30 cm
(11-13/16")
8)
45 cm
(17-23/32")
Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
MX-7000N
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Product features
No.
1
Features
High-speed color output by tandem process
High-volume paper feed, Paper exit option
Color document duplex simultaneous scan

(DSPF)
Improved usability by the large-type color LCD

panel
Content
Color output: 41 sheets/min
Monochrome output: 70 sheets/min [MX-7000N]
62 sheets/min [MX-6200N]
55 sheets/min [MX-5500N]
* When A4/8.5 x 11 paper is used.
Standard paper feed capacity: 3,100 sheets
Max. paper feed capacity: 6,600 sheets
Paper feed option: A4LCC, Large LCC
Paper exit option: 4K finisher, 4K saddle finisher
Single surface scan
Monochrome: 65 sheets/min
Color: 35 sheets/min
Duplex scan
Monochrome: 65 pages/min
Color: 35 pages/min
The color VGA LCD panel (10.4") is employed to improve
visibility and operability.
The mode keys are arranged on the LCD panel. The
number of mode keys is increased or decreased
depending on the installation of option units. Linked with
the user authentication.
User's frequently used features can be concentrated on
the home screen, allowing quick selection of a desired
function with less key operations.
Employed technology
Print by the 2-beam LSU, paper
transport by the full grip short path
(Monochrome print only)
Content
Simultaneous writing with 2-beam allows high speed
monochrome printing.
The full grip short path is used for the paper transport
system to stabilize paper transport.
Remark
Resolution: 600dpi
Color duplex document is scanned by

one scan.
2. Newly employed technology

No.
1
2
Item
2-beam LSU employed
Full grip short path
MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1
3. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
Saddle staple cartridge

(For saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC3
Paper pass unit

MX-RBX2
Saddle stitch finisher

MX-FNX4
Large capacity tray

MX-LCX2
Punch module
MX-PNX2A
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
Finisher
MX-FNX3
Inserter
MX-CFX1
Digital full color multifunctional system

(Copier/Printer/Scanner)
MX-5500N/6200N/7000N
Large capacity tray

MX-LCX3
Staple cartridge
(For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC2
Data security kit
Data security kit

(Authentication version)
MX-FRX3
Expansion kit (Software, ROM)
FAX system
Barcode font kit

AR-PF1
Facsimile expansion kit

MX-FXX1
Expansion kit (Software)
Fiery option
Data security kit

(Commercial version)
MX-FRX3U
PS3 expansion kit
MX-PKX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit

MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
Application integration
module
MX-AMX1
Application communication
module
MX-AMX2
External account module
MX-AMX3

MX-US50
MX-USA0
Internet Fax expansion kit

MX-FWX1
Fiery print controller

MX-PEX2
B. Machine configuration
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB)
Printer memory (System memory) (MB)
Copier
PCL printer
PS printer
Main body LCD
FAX
Scanner
Filing
HDD
DSPF
Automatic duplex
Security
Internet Fax
1GB
896MB
Standard provision
Standard provision
Option (Product key target.)
Color VGA 10.4"
Option (No support for some areas.)
Standard provision
Standard provision
Standard provision
Standard provision
Standard provision
C. Combination of options list

Section
Paper feed system
Paper exit system
Data security kit
Expansion kit
(Software, ROM)
Expansion kit
(Software)
FAX system
Fiery option
Name
Large capacity tray
Large capacity tray
Paper pass unit
Inserter
Model name
MX-LCX2
MX-LCX3
MX-RBX2
MX-CFX1
Finisher
Saddle stitch finisher
Punch module
MX-FNX3
MX-FNX4
MX-PNX2A
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
AR-SC2
Staple cartridge
(For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
Saddle staple cartridge
(For saddle stitch finisher)
Data security kit
(Commercial version)
Data security kit
(Authentication version)
Barcode font kit
PS3 expansion kit
Application integration module
Application communication module
Facsimile expansion kit
AR-SC3
Remarks
(A4)
(A3)
Required when the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is installed.
The finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is required.
When combining the finisher with the inserter, the punch unit is required.
Simultaneous installation with the saddle stitch finisher is inhibited.
Simultaneous installation with the finisher is inhibited.
Requires the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher and the paper pass unit.
Staple section
Saddle stitch section
MX-FRX3U
MX-FRX3
AR-PF1
MX-PKX1
MX-FWX1
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-FXX1
MX-PEX2
No support for some areas.
MX-7000N
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
(3)
Engine composition
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Copying method
Developing system
A. Base engine
(1)
Type
Type
Color support
(2)
Charging system
Transfer system
Cleaning system
Fusing system
Waste toner disposal
Console
Full color
Engine speed (ppm)
a. Tray 1 4 (Main unit), LCC

Paper size
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
Extra
Black and white

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
31
37
30
33
38
35
38
44
55
62
70
Color
18
19
22
41
40
44
51
26
30
31
37
18
Toner supply during

operation
(4)
Engine resolution
Resolution
Smoothing
function
Gradation
b. Large LCC
Paper size
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
Black and white

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
31
37
30
33
38
35
38
44
55
62
70
40
44
51
Color
18
19
22
41
26
c. Manual (Main unit)
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
OHP (Other)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper
(B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper
(Postcard HIGH) *1
Heavy paper
(Postcard LOW) *1
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R,
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
16KR)
Heavy paper
(Other sizes)
(5)
Color
13
14
15
27
40
42
49
17
23
18
13
29
29
23
23
18
13
30
30
23
23
18
13
35
35
23
19
12
9
13
13
19
23
23
23
19
13
13
13
18
18
18
12
13
13
13
(7)
360 sec or less

Yes
Approx.
60 sec
After leaving the machine with the door open

for 60sec, in the standard condition and the
polygon stop conditions.
Printable area
A3W *1
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
7.25 x 10.5
Postcard
297 x 420mm
293 x 413mm
253 x 357mm
206 x 290mm
178 x 250mm
144 x 203mm
180 x 260mm
96 x 141mm
12 x 18 *1
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5
8K
16K
279 x 432mm
275 x 425mm
212 x 349mm
212 x 323mm
212 x 272mm
136 x 209mm
266 x 383mm
191 x 263mm
*1: When the PLC6/5c or the PS driver is used to print on A3W

(12 x 18) paper, the maximum print area is 299mm x 450mm
(11-49/64 x 17-45/64).
* The printable area with the printer is the area excluding 4.2mm
(5/32) from the each edge of paper.
(8)
Void area
Void area
Image loss
(9)
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
[Writing]
Black and white:
2 levels (1bit) * 256 levels equivalent
Color:
PCL/PS3: Each color 2 levels (1bit)
Each color 16 levels (4bits) * 256 levels equivalent
FIERY:
Each color 64 levels (6bits) * 256 levels equivalent
Jam recovery time
With the door

open
Black and white
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
30
35
30
32
37
35
36
42
55
62
70
[Writing]
600 x 600dpi
1200 x 600dpi (Black and white print only. Rotation
output inhibited. The PS extension is required.)
None
Warmup
Warmup time
Pre-heat
(6)
* 8K and 16K are for China only.
Paper size
OPC (Drum diameter: Black; I80mm,

Color; I30mm x 3)
Electronic photo (Laser)
Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
development
Charged saw-tooth method
Intermediate transfer belt
Counter blade
Heat roller
No toner recycling system (With waste
toner box)
Available (Black only)
Photoconductor kind
1. Basic specifications
Top: 4 mm or less
Bottom: 4 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
Power source
Voltage / Current
Frequency
Power source
code
Power switch
MX-7000N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
100V type
100 127V, 16A
50/60Hz
Fixed type (direct)
200V type
220 240V, 8A
Inlet type
2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover;

Seconday switch: the operation panel)
(10) Power consumption
Tray 3
100V type
1.8kW
Maximum rated power

consumption
200V type
1.84kW
* An option (finisher, inserter, punch unit, paper pass unit) is not

included.
(11) Noise
In action
Black and white

Color
Black and white/Color
Standby (Standby
mode)
Changing of paper
size
Paper type setting
Default paper size
setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
7.3B or less
6.8B or less
5.5B or less
(12) Dimensions
Outer dimensions
Footprint
795 (W) x 715 (D) x 1225 (H) mm

(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) x 48-7/32 (H) inch)
795 (W) x 715 (D) mm
(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch)
Paper capacity
(13) Weight
Main unit
Main unit + Developer + Toner cartridge
Approx. 209 kg (460 lbs)

Approx. 214 kg (471 lbs)
Paper type
(14) Dimensions occupied by Machine

Dimensions occupied by machine
(with multi bypass extended)
1130 (W) x 715 (D) mm

(44-31/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch
B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton

(1)
Paper feed section
Form
Heater (Engine part)
(2)
Standard: Fourfold feeder tray + multi bypass

Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray (serial LCC + 2
trays) + multi bypass + large capacity feeder tray
(Normal or large)
Service parts
Paper size
detection
Paper feed tray
a. Tray 1/Tray 2
Paper size
Changing of paper
size
Paper type setting
Default paper size
setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
Paper type
Paper size detection

Detection of
remaining paper
Tray rising/falling
time
Tray 1
Tray 2
A4, 8.5 x 11
A4, 8.5 x 11
Guide adjustment and size setting by serviceman
Yes
Inch system: 8.5 x 11
AB system: A4
Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 - 28lbs)
800 sheets
1200 sheets
(80g/m2, 21lbs)
(80g/m2, 21lbs)
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored paper
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
No
100%, 33%, 6%, none
100%, 50%, 9%, none
Detection of
remaining paper
(3)
Paper size
Changing of
paper size
Paper type setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Rising: Within 12 seconds

* Time required from tray insertion to empty
detection without paper.
Falling: Self-weight falling
Tray 3
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
Special size (uncertain
paper size) inhibited.
Yes
Maximum width of paper guide
Plain paper:
Plain paper:
60 105g/m2
60 105g/m2
(16 - 28lbs)
(16 28lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including Heavy paper 1 (including
gloss paper):
gloss paper):
106 209g/m2
106 209g/m2
(28 - 56lbs)
(28 56lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Plain paper:
Plain paper:
500 sheets
500 sheets
(80g/m2, 21lbs)
(80g/m2, 21lbs)
OHP: 40 sheets
Heavy paper: 80 sheets
Tab paper: 40 sheets
Gloss paper: 40 sheets
Other special paper:
1 sheet
Plain paper, pre-printed
Plain paper, pre-printed
paper (not including
paper (not including
backing paper), recycled backing paper), recycled
paper, letter head, prepaper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored
punched paper, colored
paper, heavy paper 1
paper, heavy paper 1,
* Users can set up all of
label paper, OHP,
tab paper
these paper types.
* Users can set up all of
these paper types.
AB auto detection:
AB auto detection:
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13
B5, B5R, 8.5 x 13
Inch auto detection:
Inch auto detection:
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
Level detection
(3 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, none)
Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
b. Tray 3/Tray 4
Paper size
Tray 4
By users
Tray 4
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope
(Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Western 2 / Western 4)
* For Western type 2 with the inserter installed,
paper feed is inhibited.
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Guide adjustment by users
Yes
Thin paper: 55 59g/m2 (15 16 lbs)
Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including gloss paper):
106 209g/m2 (28 56 lbs)
Heavy paper 2 : 210 256g/m2 (56 68 lbs)
Envelope: 75 90g/m2 (20 24 lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Gloss paper
Plain paper: 100 sheets (80g/m2)

Envelope: 20 sheets
OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
Tab paper: 20 sheets
Gloss paper: 20 sheets *
Other special paper: 1 sheet
* The gloss paper is sucked under a high humidity
environment to cause double feed or misfeed. In
such a case, manually supply paper sheet by
sheet (Select heavy paper).
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (excluding back print
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper 1, heavy paper 2,
thin paper, label paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
AB auto
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
detect
A5R, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Inch auto
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
detect
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5
For China
A3W, A3, A4, A4R, B5R, A5R, 8K,
(AB auto
16K, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
detect)
For China
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
(Inch auto
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
detect)
A3, B4, A4, B5
Yes or No only
Paper capacity
Paper type
Paper size
detection
Detection of
remaining paper
(4)
Double-sided
Method
Paper size
Non-Stack
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Heavy paper 1: 106-209g/m2 (28-56 lbs)
For paper such as letterhead paper with frontback attributes, the engine control must be cared
for printing side.
Paper weight
(for duplex operation)
Logo paper support
(5)
Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Exit location/method
Exit capacity
Exit paper size/type
Exit tray full
detection
(6)
Face down in the main unit

250 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
All feedable paper
Yes
Transmission
resolution (dpi)
Image
process
Exposure lamp
Scan levels
Output levels
PC-Fax/
PC-Internet
Fax
Network
75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN
400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Xenon
10bits
Fax mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black and white: 1bit
Gray scale: 8bit
Full color: Each color RGB 8bit
(2)
Original cover
Scan range
Original cover
standard
location
Detection
Detection size
Manual
detection size
Heater
(Scanner part)
(3)
Ejected paper size/

type
Full tray detection
Installation
Yes
Auto detect
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
AB-3
B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Yes
Service parts
Form
Scan speed
Copy
Exit tray unit

Center standard
External ejection from the right face of the main unit
/ face-down ejection
100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
Any feedable paper except heavy paper 2 (210
256g/m2 (56 68 lbs)), envelope and tab paper.
Yes (Detection on the main unit)
Installation by service personnel.
Fax
C. Scanner section
(1)
297 x 432mm (12 x 17)

Left back as standard
Duplex single pass feeder
Paper exit tray unit (Right tray)
Form
Transport standard
Ejecting location/
method
Tray capacity
Scanner
Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)
Scan
resolution (dpi)
Original
Cover
DSPF
Copy mode
Black and white
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Scanner)
100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Fax)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
Color
600 x 600dpi
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
(Default)
Internet
Fax
Document set
orientation
DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)

Black and white
Color
(A4/8.5 x 11)
(A4/8.5 x 11)
1-sided:
1-sided: 65 sheets/min
35 sheets/min
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
(600 x 600dpi,
2-sided: 65 pages/min
4bit)
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
2-sided:
35 pages/min
(600 x 600dpi,
4bit)
(203.2 x 97.8dpi
(Standard), 1bit)
(203.2 x 97.8dpi
(Standard), 1bit)
1-sided:
35 sheets/min
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi,
8bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(when in full color)
2-sided:
35 pages/min
(200 x 200dpi,
8bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Up standard
Document standard
location
Document
transportation method
Document sizes
Document
weights
1-side
2-side
Document carrying
capacity
Types of document that
may not be transported
Paper detection
Paper detection size
Paper feeding direction

Simultaneous doublesided scanning
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for

random feeding)
Seat through method
Inch-1
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,

8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
AB-2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330
AB-3
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x
330
Long
800mm (31-1/2)
paper
(Black and white 2 levels only)
Mixed feeding (same type / same width)
possible
Random feeding (feeding of different types /
different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and
B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch.
Thin
35 49g/m2 (9 13 lbs)
paper
Plain
50 128g/m2 (13 34 lbs)
paper
50 128 g/m2 (13 34 lbs)
Maximum: 150 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or
Maximum thickness: 19.5 mm, 3/4 inch or less
The following documents are NOT allowed:
OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken
/ torn document, document with cuts and
pastes, documents printed by an ink ribbon,
and perforated document (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Yes
Auto detection (Switching one type of detection
unit through system setting)
Inch-1
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
AB-2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330
AB-3
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x
330
Right hand feeding
Enable for either of B/W (black and white) and
color.
D. Fuser section
(1)
Type
System
Heat roller attachment system
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1)
Copy speed (Continuous copy speed) (cpm)
a. Tray 1 - 4, LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)

Paper size
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
Extra
Black and white

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
31
37
30
33
38
35
38
44
55
62
70
Color
18
19
22
41
40
44
51
26
30
31
37
18
b. Large LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)

Paper size
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
Black and white

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
31
37
30
33
38
35
38
44
55
62
70
40
44
51
Color
18
19
22
41
26
* 8K and 16K are for China only.

c. Manual feed (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
Paper size
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
OHP (Other)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper
(B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper
(Postcard HIGH) *1
Heavy paper
(Postcard LOW) *1
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R,
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
16KR)
Heavy paper
(Other sizes)
Black and white

MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
29
30
35
30
32
37
35
36
42
55
62
70
Color
13
14
15
27
40
42
49
17
23
18
13
29
29
23
23
18
13
30
30
23
23
18
13
35
35
23
19
12
9
13
13
19
23
23
23
19
13
13
13
18
18
18
12
13
13
13
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(2)
First copy time
Platen
/
DSPF
Platen
DSPF
MX-5500N
Black
and
Color
white
4.5 sec
8.4 sec
9.0 sec
15.5
sec
MX-6200N
Black
and
Color
white
4.5 sec
8.4 sec
9.0 sec
15.5
sec
MX-7000N
Black
and
Color
white
4.0 sec
8.4 sec
9.0 sec
15.0
sec
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 paper from the main unit tray 2

* Polygon in rotation
* Auto Color Selection OFF/Auto Color for color OFF
* Document tray lift-up complete state when the DSPF is used.
(3)
Job speed
(10) Color adjustment
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode)
S to S
MX-5500N
Black
and
Color
white
55cpm
35cpm
(100%)
(85.4%)
MX-6200N
Black
and
Color
white
62cpm
35cpm
(100%) (85.4%)
MX-7000N
Black
and
Color
white
65cpm
35cpm
(92.9%)
(85.4%)
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including the first copy)
Black and white: 600 x 300dpi
Color: 600 x 600dpi (default)
(4)
(6)
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
Auto power shutoff
Normal:
AB series:
1:1r0.8%
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
129% , 200%, 400%
25 400% (25 200% for DSPF)
4
Yes
Density, copy image quality processing
Exposure mode
Copy document
mode
Color emphasis
Manual steps
Toner save mode
(9)
Max. A3 (11 x 17)

Sheet/Book original
Copy magnification ratio
Zoom
Preset
magnification ratio
XY zoom
(8)
Electronic sort
Job reservation
Program call/
registration
Preheat function
Copy document
Copy
magnification ratio
Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black and white:

Character AE)
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo,
Photo, Map, Pale-color document.
Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo
mode.
Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo,
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode.
9 steps
Black and white: Yes
Color: Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or copy document
Color copy mode
Auto Color
selection copy
Full color mode
2-color mode
Single color mode

Black and white
copy mode
Automatic paper
selection
Automatic
magnification selection
Paper type select
Auto tray switching
Rotated copy
Resolution
Document
Document type
(7)
Function
999 sheets
Scan resolution
Writing resolution
Copy mode automatically discerning color/black and

white.
Enforced full color mode
Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/
C/M/Y
Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Enforced black and white copy mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Allowed by system setting
Allowed by system setting
(11) Copy functions
Continuous copy
Multi max. number
(5)
RGB adjustment
Color balance
Saturation adjustment
Brightness adjustment
Contrast adjustment
Sharpness adjustment
Background removal
Auto color calibration
Registration adjustment
Special
function
User authentication
Indeterminate
document paper size
input
Indeterminate paper
size input
2-sided copy direction
switch
Margin shift
Edge/center erase
Dual page copy
Tandem copy
Cover/insertion
Tab paper insertion
OHP insertion
Tab copy
Centering
2in1/4in1
Pamphlet
Card shot
Book copy
Large capacity
document mode
Black-white inversion
Multi-page
Enlargement
Mirror image
Photo repeat
Date print
Character print
Stamp
Page printing
Proof copy
Mixed document
feeder
Document control
Yes (Mixed/random size feeding

supported)
Yes
Yes
(Type setting allowed)
Yes
Yes
Large rotated copy exceeding A4
supported
Yes
Yes
Yes (Program name registration to
be examined)
Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
1000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
color copy not allowed upon setup
Not ready)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
Yes (with Data Security Kit
equipped)
B. Image send function

(1)
Scanner
Fax
Internet
Fax
(2)
Item
Density
adjustment
Mode
Scan to E-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to E-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Fax to Fax (manual)
Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Fax to / FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
Internet Fax to Internet Fax (manual)
Internet Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Internet Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
* Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
a. Support system
Scanner
SMTP
FTP(TCP/IP)
SMB
Internet Fax
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
b. Support image
Item
File format
Compression
method
Specified pages
per size (number
of page(s)
specification
allowed)
Scanner
Black and white:
TIFF, PDF, Encrypted
PDF
Color: Gray scale, color
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
[Black and white]
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Huffman)
G4
= MMR (Modified
MR)
[Color/Gray scale]
JPEG (High, middle,
low)
Yes
Internet Fax
Black and white:
TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Fax
---
Halftone
reproduction
100 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi

300 x 300 dpi
---
MH, MR,
MMR,
JBIG
---
Scanner
Internet Fax
black and white
Full color, gray
scale, black and
white
--Color start key:
Auto
(judge as color:
Full color, judge
as black and
white:
Monochrome/gray
scale)
Full color black and
white start key:
Monochrome
Gray scale
Equivalent of 256 steps
Moire
reduction
mode
DSPF duplex
simultaneous
scanning
Notes'
security
feature
600 x 600 dpi

Yes
Fax
---
Half tone (Black and white only)

ON/OFF
200 x 100dpi Standard
(Half tone
(203.2 x 97.8dpi)
not allowed)
(middle tone not
allowed)
200 x 200dpi Fine
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
200 x 400dpi Super
(203.2 x 391dpi)
400 x 400dpi Ultra
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
600 x 600dpi -----
Yes (Black and white)

Yes (Color)
--Yes
Yes
---
d. Specification of Addresses
Item
Address
specification
c. Image processing
Item
Original
scanning
color
Auto color
selection
Selection of
image quality
Resolution
(depends on
file format/
transmission
method)
When selecting
"Manual":
Text/printed photo
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Printed photo
Map
---
400 x 400 dpi

MH, MMR
Internet Fax
Auto + 5 steps
Color key enabled

When selecting
"Auto":
Text/printed photo
Text/photo
Text
Image send function

(Push send from the main unit)
Item
Corresponding
server/protocol
Scanner
Auto + 5 steps
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same
as that of "Manual =
3" when selecting
full color/gray scale.)
Black and white
enabled
Auto
Manual
Fax
Setting of default
address *1
Number of Onetouch address
key registration
Number of
Group (1 key)
address
registtation
Program
Direct entry of
addresses
Chain dial
Resend
Shortcut for
address
selection (quick
key)
CC/BCC sending
Scanner
Internet Fax
Fax
Specification by one-touch/group/direct address entry.
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Input from the externally connected keyboard
Yes
--Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Number of Group (1 key) address registration :

maximum 500
Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
address number included in /999 key)
48
Input from the soft keyboard and
Entry by 10-key,
the externally connected keyboard
# key, * key
--Yes (pause key)
Call up nearest 8 addresses which are specified as a
single destination. *2
Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
addresses.
Yes
---
Item
Subjet
File name
Return mail
address
Transmission
message
(message body)
Mail footer
preset *3
Inhibition of
address
registration from
the main unit
Inhibition of
address
registration from
a Web screen
Inhibition of
registration from
the network
scanner tool
Inhibition of
"Resend" in the
FAX/image send
mode
Inhibition of
selection from an
address book
Inhibition of
direct input
Inhibition of send
from the PC
Internet Fax
Inhibition of send
of PC-Fax
Scanner
Internet Fax
Selective/direct entry from the list
Selective/direct entry from the list
--Selective/direct
(1 default
entry from the
address fixed
list/selection
as sender
from LDAP
name)
server
Selective/direct entry from the list.
(Number of characters: Maximum
of 1800 half-size characters (900
full size characters))
Yes
Fax
---
Item
Scaled transmission
--Recall
mode
Busy
--Long original
transmission
--Change of the
number of pages for
each file
Restriction on
transmission size
Large capacity
original mode
Scanning of thin
paper
Mixed originals
feeder
Default date sender
transmission
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scanner
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a fixed
size to another. Reduction may be done on the
receiver side with Internet Fax sending.
----Yes
----Number/time
to be set up
through
system setup
Yes
Maximum of 800mm (single side only/black and
white 2 values only)
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
---
Item
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
*3: Function to set up a text message that will be added

automatically to the message body upon mail transmission.
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses
Scanner
Yes (500 destinations)
(E-mail/FTP/Desktop
allowed)
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes (500 destinations)
* Broadcast transmission by Scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is

allowed. (Black and white (2 value))
f. Transmission function
Automaticallyreduced
transmission
Rotated
transmission
Internet Fax
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory reception
Fixed size reduced
reception
Rotated reception
Setting of received data
print condition
*2: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory and Broadcast.
Item
Memory
transmission
On-hook
Quick online
transmission
Direct transmission
Yes (ON only)
g. Reception function
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address.

To transmit data, users only have to set the original and press
the start key.
Item
Broadcast
---
Scanner
Internet Fax
94 destinations in all
Fax
-----
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
(Switching:
Memory
transmission
l Direct
transmission)
Yes
---
---
Yes
2-sided reception
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
A3
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
letter
Address/Domainspecified reception
allowed
Address/Domainspecified reception not
allowed. (To be
rejected)
Reception from a
specific number not
allowed. (To be
rejected)
External phone
connection remote
Received data bypass
output
Reception confirmation
cycle setting
POP3 communications
timeout setting
Body text print select
setting
Transfer function upon
disabling of output.
Fax
Yes
Switching from manual
reception to automatic
reception. (France only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Equal size print

(partition not allowed)
Equal size print
(partition allowed)
Equal or reduced size
print
Condition setting through system setting
Yes
Yes
(North America only) (North America,
Philippine only)
Yes
Yes
(except North
(except North America,
America only)
Philippine only)
Yes (50 domains)
---
Yes (50 domains)
---
---
Specified numbers only

(50 numbers /20 digits)
---
Yes
Yes
Setting by 0-8 hours
(Each minute)
Setting by 30-300
seconds (Every 30
seconds)
Yes
-----
---
Yes (1 receiver (of transfer) registration)
Item
Rooting function
Internet Fax/
Fax to E-mail (Transfer
of Internet Fax/Fax
reception data to
E-mail, inbound routing)
Exit tray setting
Setting set of received
data
Staple function of
received data
Auto wake up print
Received data print
hold function
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
Item
Center erase
2 in 1
Background
removal
Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes
Card scan
Yes
Yes
Confirm
transmission
h. Report/list function
Item
Image sending
activity report
Transaction report
Address/phone
number table
Group table
Program table
Memory box table
(F code)
Communication
original contents print
List of rejected
reception numbers
List of addresses
allowed or not
allowed for reception
Inbound routing table
list
Document Admin list
Scanner
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Always print/Upon error/no print
---
Time
specification
Polling reception
Bulletin board
transmission
Own number
sending
Own name select
Page number
print
Date print
Yes
No
Polling protection
function
Page partition
transmission
Confidential
(receiver unit)
Relay broadcast
instructions
Fax to E-mail
(F code) *
Edge erase
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
Yes
Up to 100
registrations allowed
with bulletin board,
confidential and
relay broadcast all
combined. (Free
area: 1 registration)
Setting of the
number of
transmission: 1 / no
limit.
-----
Yes
Yes (Date can be expressed
alternatively)
Yes
---
Internet Fax
293mm (11-17/32)
A3 A5 (11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5)
Fax
l. F code communication
Item
Sub-address
Password
Fax
Yes (20 digits)
Yes (20 digits)
m. Registration-related settings
Item
One-touch/group *1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Item
Maximum record width
Record size
Yes
---
Fax
2 seconds level (Super G3 / JBIG)
6 seconds level (G3 ECM)
Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps o 2.4kbps
Super G3 / G3
General membership telephone line (PSTN),
independent business line (PBX), F net.
R-key for PBX setting: Germany, France
1 line only
k. Record size
Yes
---
---
Modem speed
Intercommunication
Communication
line
Maximum number
of lines
ECM
---
Yes
-----
---
j. Transmission method
Yes
---
Scanner
Yes
* E-mail address can be set for the F-code relay broadcast.
Item
Transmission time
Yes
Yes
---
i. Other Functions
Item
Forward data
transmission/
reception
Scanner
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes
No
Yes
(Allowed for
Fax /Internet
Fax broadcast)
Yes
--(Only color
and gray
scale)
Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper width.
The maximum enlargement is not allowed to exceed
200%)
--Yes
--Timeout time
Setting for 1
minute 240
hours/each
minute
Yes
Default address
setup
Desktop
registration
Program
Yes
(F code method)
Yes
(F code method)
Yes
Yes
Scanner
Internet
Fax
Fax
999 destinations (Max. 200 items for FTP, Desktop,
and SMB)
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for each group dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 halfsize characters)
Fax only:
One-touch dial receiver number registration: within
64 digits for receiver number + sub-address +
passcode (including /).
Yes
----Yes
Registration by
using Web or
NST (network
scanner tool)
Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in one
set is allowed. (48 of them)
Item
Number of memory
boxes
Reply-To
registration
Number of sender
registration
Number of sender
selection
registration
Registration of
polling approval
number
Quick key (short
cut registration) *3
Retrieving/
scanning of
registered data to
other model
Import/export of
address book
Scanner
Internet
Fax
Fax
---
Total 100 can be

registered
including bulletin
board /
confidential / relay
broadcast.
Registration
name: 9 full-size
characters (18
half-size
characters)
1000 (user
registration
from Web) *2
E-mail only
---
---
Item
Sound volume
setting
Sound pattern
Time setting for
communication
ending sound
Communication
Sound volume
error sound
setting
Sound setting
Sound volume
for end of
setting
original reading
(image send)
Transmission
and reception
error sound
Scanner
---
Internet Fax
Yes *3
Yes *5
-----
Yes *2
--Yes *1
*1: Large/middle/small. Setup by the system settings.
1 (20
characters)
---
1 (default) with
20 characters
Total: 18
registrations (20
characters)
(Sender selection:
In addition to
default, 18
registrations
allowed)
10 numbers / 20
digits
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Setup by the system settings.

Different sound should be selectable for each of reception /
transmission success/transmission and reception error.
*4: Setup by the system settings. 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds.
*5: Setup by the system settings. 2-steps setting for every 0.3 or
0.7 second.
p. Others
Item
PC-Fax
PC-Internet Fax
FAST
Scanner
-------
Internet Fax
Yes
Yes (001 999)

Yes (By address book conversion utility)
Distinctive ring
detection
---
Trial mode
Scanner: Yes
(Standard)
Meta data: Yes
Yes (By storage backup)
*1: Since Scanner/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address

book, the number of addresses allowed for registration is the
sum total of all modes.
*2: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
(1)
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
OS
n. Telephone functions
Fax
Yes
Yes (1-15 seconds)
No (External telephone transmission
allowed)
Availability of setting (10 / 20 / TONE /
auto detection) and their default values
are different depending on destination.
o. Sound settings
Scanner
---
Internet Fax
Fax
Yes *1
---
Yes *2
---
Yes *2
---
Yes *1
Yes *2
-----
Yes *3
Yes *2
-----
Yes *3
Yes *4
No
Fax
Yes
--Yes
(U.S.A only)
Setting for
each
destination
---
C. PC-Fax functions
*3: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the

registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
Item
On-hook sound
Sound volume
setting
Sound volume
Sound volume
for calling
setting
Line monitor
Sound volume
sound
setting
Reception
Sound volume
sound
setting
Sound pattern
Transmission
Sound volume
success sound
setting
Sound pattern
Time setting for
communication
ending sound
---
*2: 14 levels and no sound. Setup by the system settings.
---
Item
On-hook function
Setting of pause time
Telephone transmission
during power outage
Tone pulse switching
Fax
Yes *2
PC
CPU
Monitor
Memory
HDD
Interface
Communications
protocol
(2)
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5)
IE4.0 or more
Windows 2000
Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional
Windows Server 2003
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Pentium II 300MHz or more
640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
256 or more of colors
64MB or more
Free space of 50MB or more
USB2.0
10/100BASE-TX
LPR/lp, Port9100(RAW), IPP, USB2.0
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions
PC-Fax Send
PC-Internet Fax Send
Resolution
Transmission original
sizes
Compression method
Braodcast transmission
Yes (with Fax equipped)

Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including
sub-address and passcode)
Yes (Necessary options: Internet Fax
expansion kit)
Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
200 x 100 dpi/200 x 200 dpi/
200 x 400 dpi/400 x 400 dpi
A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/
8.5 x 11/5.5 x 8.5/8K/16K
MH/MMR
Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible.
Maximum of 500)
F code transmission
Yes
Sub-address
Passcode
Phone book
registration/
transmission function
Attach a cover sheet
function
Create cover sheets
function
Own number send
Preview function
Transmission
confirmation (Notice to
PC by NJR)
Document filing function
PC-Fax Transmission
log
User authentication
R-KEY (Germany/
France only)
Yes maximum of
20 digits
Yes maximum of
20 digits
Yes
2-sided scan
Color modes
Resolutions
Scanning ranges
Preview function
Zoom preview function
Rotated scan
Brightness/contrast
adjustment
Gamma adjustment
Color matching
Edge emphasis
Black-white inversion
Selection of illuminant
color
Selection of threshold
value
Addition of void area
Save of setup contents
Save of preview image
Display unit of
scanning range
Notes's security
function
Image acquision
method from the main
unit
Platform
IBM PC/AT compatible machine

Macintosh
(2)
Support OS
Custom
PCL5c/6
Yes
Yes (Always printed)
Yes
Yes
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later *1
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9, x 10.4
Custom
PS
Filing
Yes
Quick File Yes
Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
PPD
Yes
Yes
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification
OS's
WHQL validated OS's
Hardware environment
(1)
Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN)

Interfaces
E. Printer function
LAN
Yes
USB
No
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
Windows 2000/XP
System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of
colors must be available.
Other: Network port
Yes
Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Gray scale/
Full Color
75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
A3/A4/A4R/A5/A5R/B4/B5/B5R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R/7.25 x 10.5/
7.25 x 10.5R/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5R/8K/16K/
16KR/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix).
"Auto (Mixed size)" means random.
Yes
Yes
Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Auto/manual (-100 +100)
Yes
None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Yes
Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
Auto/manual (1 254)
Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
Yes
Yes
Pixel/mm/inch
Yes
Non-compression
*1: The driver for Windows NT is not bundled in the CD-ROM

included in the package.
(3)
Command system
PCL5c compatible
PCL6 compatible
BMLinkS
PS3 compatible
Fiery controller Adobe
PostScript3
(4)
PCL5c/PCL6
Option
PCL5c/PCL6
PS3
Roman outline fonts = 80 types

Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type
Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be provided
by the flash ROM kit as well)
Roman outline fonts = 136 types
Support print channel
USB
PSERVER/
RPRINT for
NetWare
environment
LPR
IPP
PAP:
EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
FTP
NetBEUI
Port9100
HTTP
POP3
(6)
No
Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
Option (Fiery print controller: MX-PEX2)
Installed fonts
Standard
(5)
Standard
USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only

USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used in
netware environment
UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel

Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment
Equipped with the function to print data received via

built-in FTP server
Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
Web Submit Print supported
E-Mail To Print supported
Command compatibility
PCL5c
compatibility
PCL XL
compatibility
PostScript3
compatibility
PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet

4600.
PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4200.
PCL CXL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet.
Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
(7)
Environmental settings
Setting item
Initial setting
PCL seting
PS setting
(8)
Overview
Basic settings for printer use such as number of copies
or printing direction.
Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
Print functions
Function
Multiple Pamphlet
Bar code font
Network tandem print
Content
Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet.
JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation
Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout.
Windows Cluster Print
When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and executes the suspended
print job.
* There may be color differences between machine types
PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver.
1) Printing of e-mail attachment file
2) Printing from FTP server
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail.
Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct printing).
Performs direct print by data transfer from the client PC to the MFP server.
Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page.
Encryption PDF/PDF/TIFF/
JPEG direct print
E-Mail To Print
Pull print from front panel
FTP push print
Print by file setup on Web
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function
ROPM
Multi-access
Paper direction setting for
2-sided printing of
letterhead paper and prepunched paper.
Enable detection of
selected paper type in
bypass tray
Setting environmental
control under terminal
server control
Driver delivery function
Form overlay
Planet Press
Management of password
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list
Bonjour for Macintosh
environment
Document control print
Object judgement (screen
change/color change)
CMYK Simulation
PCL6/5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS (Option)
Yes
No
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes (No for

encrypted
PDF/PDF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients.

The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained data only, and
inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout.
Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms (DL
beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address becomes known.
Yes
Yes
(PCL5c only)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font.
Yes
(PCL5c only)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (Option)
Yes (Option)
PCL6: Yes
PCL5c: No
No
Yes
The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job even if the
unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the application assuming
printout on continuous pages.
The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP processing.
RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed during scanning.
Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed correctly in
front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not match with
those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of the driver regardless of
the setup values on the main unit side.
Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print create
environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is possible
without user setting.
When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy is embedded in
printing.
In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic text) is
judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed automatically.
Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows.
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America, China, Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe, Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use DIC authorization profile. Use SWOP profile in Japan.
Yes
Yes
Function
ICC Profile
Pantone color
(9)
Content
<Source Profile>
Choice of source profile is as follows.
1) sRGB
2) AppleRGB
3) Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload of profile
supported by service. The tool can be set on the Web (service setting). The concrete method of
profile making is to be considered separately.
For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting.
Windows driver function
*2: Cannot be used in Windows NT.
a. Image Quality
*4: Cannot be used in PCL5c.
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method *1
Rendering Intent *1
ICC Profile
Selection *1
Print Priority *1
Contrast
Brightness
Saturation *1
Color Balance
(RGB) *1
Text To Black *3
Vector To Black *3
Toner Save (1bit
only)
Screen Setting *1
Pure Black Print *1

Black Over Print *1
CMYK Simulation *1
Bitmap
Compression
Image Type
Neutral Grays *1
1200x600dpi (black and white

only)
600x600dpi
300x300dpi
Auto
Color (CMYK)
Monochrome (K only)
OFF
System (Windows ICM).
Effective only when Color
Options is Custom.
Printer
When ICM Method is anything
other than Custom: Default
Default
When ICM Method is Custom:
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
When Windows ICM is off:
None
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
1 bit
4 bit
0-100
0-100
0-100
0-100
PS (Option)
Yes
No
Yes
*1: Cannot be specified with the black and white mode.
PS: Option (Installation of the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) are

required.)
Function
PCL6/5c
Yes
PCL6/
PCL5c
No
b. Image Layout
PS
Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes *2
Yes
Yes *2
Yes
Yes
*3: Can be specified only with the black and white mode.
Yes
Yes
Paper Size
Orientation
Rotate 180 degrees
N-Up Printing
Black N-Up Border
N-Up Order
Yes
Yes
Fit To Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Poster
On / Off
On / Off
On / Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pamphlet *1
Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
On / Off
On / Off
On (Default/Custom) / Off
None
Very High Quality
High Quality
Medium Quality
Draft
Standard / Graphics / Photo /
CAD / Custom
Black Only
4-Color
Yes
Yes
Margin Shift *2
No
No
No
Yes *4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Zoom
Poster Dash Border

Poster Overlap
Duplex
Mirror Image
A2 (Fit To Page)
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 /
A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 / Monarch /
Custom Paper
Portrait / Landscape
On / Off
1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up / 6-Up /
8-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up
On / Off
[2-Up]:
Left to Right / Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Right, and Down /
Down, and Right
Left, and Down /
Down, and Left
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 /
A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 /Monarch /
Custom Paper
2x2
3x3
4x4
On / Off
On / Off
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
2-Up Pamphlet
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple 2-Up Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
None / 10mm (0.4inch) /
20mm (0.8inch) /
30mm (1.2inch)
25 % - 400 %
X-Y Zoom
No Mirror Image
Vertical
Horizontal
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes *3
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes *3
Yes *3
Yes *3
Yes *3
Yes *3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware.

*2: Margin Shift processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS
h. Job Handling
c. Watermark / Overlay
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Transparent Text
Overwrite Text
Outline Text
Image Stamp
Create Overlay
Load Overlay
Delete
Query Page Overlay
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
PS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Different Paper
Transparency
Inserts
Tab Printing
Output Tray
Paper Source
Paper Type
Tray Status
Cover Page
Last Page
Other Page
Blank / Printed
Image Shift
Tab Paper Printing
Center Tray
Right Tray
Offset Tray
Saddle Stitch Tray
Document Filing
Job ID
d. Paper Control
Paper Selection
Retention
User Authentication
Function
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
PS
Notify Job End

Auto Job Control
Review
Tandem Print
On / Off
Function
Auto Configuration
Set Tray Status
Paper Type Name
(USER TYPE 1 - 7)
Font Substitution
Set Tandem Print
Input Tray Options
Large Capacity
Tray
e. Finishing
Staple
Punch
Binding Edge
No Offset
None
1-Staple
2-Staples
Yes
No
Top
Left
Right
On / Off
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS
Output Tray
Options
Punch Module
Right Tray
Copies *1
Collate
Carbon Copy
1-999
On / Off
Top Copy
Carbon Copy
Download Font
Type
Graphics Mode
PS Pass Through
PS Error Printing
Job Compression
Set Paper Size

Set Paper Type
Display Name
IP Address (Slave Machine)

Four Trays
Large Capacity Tray
(A3W/12x18)
Large Capacity Tray
(A4/8.5x11)
None
Finisher
Saddle Stitch Finisher
None / 2 Holes / 3 Holes /
4 Holes / 4 Holes (Wide)
On / Off
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method
ColorSync *1
Rendering
Intent *1
Resident Font
Download Font
TrueType(Type 42)
Bitmap(Type 3)
Adobe(Type 1)
As Graphics
Vector
Raster
On / Off
On / Off
None / Fastest / Fast /
Medium / Best Compression
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS
Macintosh PPD
g. Object Control
Font Source
Yes
a. Image Quality
*1: Copy processing by MFP/Printer firmware
Function
Yes
PS
(10) Windows PPD, Macintosh driver functions
f. Copies
Function
Yes
i. Configuration
Function
Hold Only
Hold After Print
Sample Print
Password
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
On / Off
On / Off
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
PCL6/
PCL5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS
ICC Profile
Selection *1
Print Priority
Brightness *4
Saturation *4
600x600 dpi
Auto
Color(CMYK)
Monochrome(K only)
OFF
System
Printer
[Mac OS]
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
[Windows]
Graphics
Pictures
Proof
Match
Source Profile
(Monitor Profile)
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
1 bit
4 bit
0-100
0-100
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes *2
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
*3
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Macintosh PPD
Function
Toner Save
(1bit only)
Screen Setting
Pure Black
Print
Black Over
Print
CMYK
Simulation
Image Type
Neutral Grays
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
c. Watermark
Macintosh PPD
Function
On / Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
On / Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* Specification depending on OS.
On / Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
d. Paper Control
Off
Default
Custom
Standard / Graphic /
Photo / CAD / Custom
Black Only
4-Color
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Transparent Text
Overwrite Text
Outline Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper
Selection
Different Paper
Transparency
Inserts
Output Tray
*1: Specification depending on OS.

*3: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3.
*4: Some OS may not allow one-number-to-next specification for
setup values.
b. Image Layout
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Macintosh PPD
Function
Yes
Windows
PPD
Auto Select
Paper Source
Paper Type
Cover Page
Blank / Printed
Center Tray
Right Tray
Offset Tray
Saddle Stitch Tray
e. Finishing
Macintosh PPD
Function
Paper Size
Setting *1
Orientation
Rotate 180
degrees
(Landscape
only)
N-Up Printing
*2
Black N-Up
Border *2
N-Up Order *2
Duplex
Pamphlet *5
Margin Shift
Zoom
Mirror *2
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 / A3
/ A4 / A5 / B4 / B5 /
11 x 17 / 8.5 x 11 /
8.5 x 14 / 7.25 x 10.5 /
8.5 x 13 / 5.5 x 8.5 /
8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 / Monarch /
Custom Paper
Portrait
Landscape
On / Off
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Macintosh PPD
Function
Staple
Punch
Binding Edge
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No Offset
None
1-Staple
2-Staples
Yes
No
Top
Left
Right
On / Off
f. Copies
Macintosh PPD
1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up /

6-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up
On / Off
[2-Up]:
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
2-Sided (Long)
2-Sided (Short)
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled
Pamphlet
None / 10mm / 20mm /
30mm
25 % - 400 %
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Yes *3
*4
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Function
Copies *1
Collate
1-999
On / Off

g. Object Control
Macintosh PPD
Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Download Font Type *1

PS Error
On / Off
Printing

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
*1: Some OS may not support a custom size setting.
h. Job Handling
Macintosh PPD
Function
Retention

*4: Windows 9x: 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up.
*5: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
Document
Filing
Hold Only
Hold After Print
Sample Print
Pass Code
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Macintosh PPD
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Windows
PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Auto Configuration
No
Yes
No
Set Tandem
Print
Input Tray
Options
Large Capacity
Tray
No
No
No
Yes
*1
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Function
User
Authentication
Job ID
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
On / Off
Tandem Print
i. Configuration
G. Safety and environmental protection

standards
(1)
Safety standards
Safety
standard
EMC
Macintosh PPD
Function
Output Tray
Options
Punch Module
Right Tray
IP Address
(Slave Machine)
Four Trays
Large Capacity Tray
(A3W/12x18)
Large Capacity Tray
(A4/8.5x11)
None
Finisher
Saddle Stitch Finisher
None / 2 Holes /
3 Holes / 4 Holes /
4 Holes(Wide)
On / Off
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Maximum number of
user folder
Number of users
allowed for registration
(2)
The Eco Mark Program

New Blue Angel
Nordic Swan
Basic function
Pages or files for

allowed for filing
Environmental Readiness
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
F. Document filing function
Capacity for document

filing
(2)
FCC part 68
ICCS-03
PSTN01 (Taiwan)
200V type
EN60950-1
IEC60825 (Laser)
GB4943 (China)
EN55022 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
(SABS: Class B)
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
EN55024
AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A
(Australia)
GB9254, GB17625.1, GB/
T17618 Class A (China)
TS 103 021, EG 201 120,
EG 201 121 (Europe)
AS/ACIF S002 (Australia)
GB/T 3382.1-2003,
GB/T 3382.2-2003,
YD/T 514-1998,
YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993,
YD/T 965-1998,
YD/T 993-1998 (China)
International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA)
*1: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3.
(1)
Line
standard
(for Fax
expansion)
100V type
UL60950, 21CFR (Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
VCCI Class A
FCC Class Part 15 Class A
ICES-003 Class A
(Canada)
CNS 13438 Class B
(Taiwan)
European ROHS regulations

Main folder
30GB
Custom folder
Quick file
10GB
folder
Main folder
4,200 pages or 3,000 files
Custom folder
(SHARP standard document)
Quick file
1,400 pages or 1,000 files
folder
(SHARP standard document)
Maximum of 500 folders
Chinese ROHS
WEEE
Taiwan green mark
3. Ambient conditions
A. Environmental conditions for use of the main
unit
Temperature: 10qC to 35qC, Humidity: 20 to 85%RH
Depends on the number of user registrations.

(Maximum of 1000 users)
Air pressure: 590 to 1013hPa (height: 0 to 2000m)
(Humidity)
Data saving for each function
85%
Job
Copy
Printer
Direct print (FTP)
Direct print (e-mail)
Direct print (Web)
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Scan to SMB
Scan to USB
memory
Fax reception
Fax transmission
Internet Fax
reception
Internet Fax
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet
Fax transmisson
Scan to HDD
Quick File Folder

Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Main/Custom Folder
Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
60%
20%
(Temperature)
B. Environmental conditions for transit of the

main unit
20qC to 45qC (No condensation)
(Humidity)
90%
60%
20%
(Temperature)
C. Standard environmental conditions for

supplies
Valid use period under the environmental conditions of use
1)
Photoconductor drum kit
2)
Photoconductor drum unit
3)
Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
36 months from the production month

D. Environmental conditions for use of supplies

(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
(Temperature)
E. Environmental conditions for transit of

supplied
F. Environmental conditions for store of supplies

(sealed)
MX-7000N
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No.
1
Item
Toner cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip
x1
Life
42K *1
Model name
MX-70NTBA
Toner cartridge (Cyan)
Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70NTCA
Toner cartridge (Magenta)
x1
32K *1
MX-70NTMA
Toner cartridge (Yellow)
Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC

chip
Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70NTYA
5
6
7
8
Developer (Black)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum (Black) I80mm
Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) I30mm
Developer (Black)
OPC drum
OPC drum
x1
x1
x1
x1
300K
100K
300K
100K (Color)
MX-70NVBA
MX-70NVSA
MX-70NRBA
MX-27NRSA
Remarks
Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
42K *1
Model name
MX-70GTBA
x1
32K *1
MX-70GTCA
x1
32K *1
MX-70GTMA

chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70GTYA
5
6
7
8
Developer (Black)
Drum (Black) I80mm
Developer (Black)
OPC drum
OPC drum
x1
x1
x1
x1
300K
100K
300K
100K (Color)
MX-70GVBA
MX-70GVSA
MX-70GRBA
MX-27GRSA
Remarks
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
C. Asia/Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
42K *1
Model name
MX-70ATBA
x1
32K *1
MX-70ATCA
x1
32K *1
MX-70ATMA

chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70ATYA
5
6
7
8
Developer (Black)
Drum (Black) I80mm
Developer (Black)
OPC drum
OPC drum
x1
x1
x1
x1
300K
100K
300K
100K (Color)
MX-70AVBA
MX-70AVSA
MX-70ARBA
MX-27ARSA
Remarks
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
42K *1
Model name
MX-70FTBA
x1
32K *1
MX-70FTCA
x1
32K *1
MX-70FTMA

chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70FTYA
5
6
7
8
Developer (Black)
Drum (Black) I80mm
Developer (Black)
OPC drum
OPC drum
x1
x1
x1
x1
300K
100K
300K
100K (Color)
MX-70FVBA
MX-70FVSA
MX-70FRBA
MX-27FRSA
MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1
Remarks
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
E. China
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
42K *1
Model name
MX-70CTBA
x1
32K *1
MX-70CTCA
x1
32K *1
MX-70CTMA

chip
x1
32K *1
MX-70CTYA
5
6
7
8
Developer (Black)
Drum (Black) I80mm
Developer (Black)
OPC drum
OPC drum
x1
x1
x1
x1
300K
100K
300K
100K (Color)
MX-70CVBA
MX-70CVSA
MX-70CRBA
MX-27CRSA
Remarks
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
coverage 5%
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
2
3
Upper heat roller kit

Primary transfer kit
Secondary transfer kit
Filter kit
Filter kit
7
8
9
Web cleaning kit

External heating unit
Waste toner box kit
10
DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
11
DV seal kit
(For color)
12
Main charger kit

(For monochrome)
13
Main charger kit

(For color)
14
15
16
17
18
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
Content
Upper separation pawl
Upper thermistor sub
Lower heat roller unit
Lower separation pawl
Separation pawl/spring
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Upper heat roller unit
Primary transfer blade
PS paper dust removal unit
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Charger wire PTC
Charger cleaner
Charger cleaner B
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary transfer idle gear
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Toner filter (Main unit)
Ozone filter
Web unit
Waste toner box unit
x6
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Sub blade
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Toner stirring sheet
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit (For service rotation)
Secondary transfer belt unit (For service rotation)
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 120V)
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
Life
300K
Model name
MX-700HK
200K
300K
MX-700UH
MX-700Y1
300K
MX-700Y2
300K
MX-700FL
300K
MX-700FLN
200K
300K
100K
MX-700WC
MX-700EF
MX-700HB
300K
MX-700DL
100K
MX-270DS
300K
MX-700MC
100K
MX-700MK
5000 times x 3
2000 times x 3
AR-SC2
AR-SC3
MX-700U1
MX-700U2
MX-700FU1
MX-700FU
Remarks
For North America/South

and Central America
For Asia/Agencies
Each color 5% coverage,

color ratios 30%
For staple section

For saddle section
Product for service rotation
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
No.
1
2
Item
Upper thermistor kit
Lower heat roller kit
Primary transfer belt kit
Primary transfer roller kit
6
7
Secondary transfer belt kit

Secondary transfer roller kit
Filter kit
9
10
11
Web cleaning kit

Waste toner box kit
12
DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
13
DV seal kit
(For color)
14
Main charger kit

(For monochrome)
15
Main charger kit

(For color)
16
17
18
19
20
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Fusing unit
Content
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Charger wire PTC
Charger cleaner
Charger cleaner B
Belt drive gear
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Web unit
x1
x6
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Sub blade
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
Life
200K
300K
Model name
MX-700UH
MX-700UR
300K
MX-700LH
300K
MX-700B1
300K
MX-700X1
300K
300K
MX-270B2
MX-700X2
300K
MX-700FL
200K
300K
100K
MX-700WC
MX-700EF
MX-700HB
300K
MX-700DL
100K
MX-270DS
300K
MX-700MC
100K
MX-700MK
5000 times x 3
2000 times x 3
AR-SC2
AR-SC3
MX-700U1
MX-700U2
MX-700FU
MX-700FU2
Remarks
For Europe/Oceania

color ratios 30%
For staple section

For saddle section
C. Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
2
3

Primary transfer kit
Secondary transfer kit
Filter kit
6
7
8
Web cleaning kit

Waste toner box kit
DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
10
DV seal kit
(For color)
11
Main charger kit

(For monochrome)
12
Main charger kit

(For color)
13
14
15
16
17
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Fusing unit
Content
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
PS paper dust removal unit
Belt drive gear
Charger wire PTC
Charger cleaner
Charger cleaner B
Ozone filter
Web unit
x6
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Sub blade
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
Life
Model name
MX-700HK
200K
300K
MX-700UH
MX-700Y1
300K
MX-700Y2
300K
MX-700FLN
200K
300K
100K
MX-700WC
MX-700EF
MX-700HB
300K
MX-700DL
100K
MX-270DS
300K
MX-700MC
100K
MX-700MK
5000 times x 3
2000 times x 3
AR-SC2
AR-SC3
MX-700U1
MX-700U2
MX-700FU
300K
Remarks
For Asia/Agencies

color ratios 30%
For staple section

For saddle section
3. Production number identification
Indicates the production day.
A. Photoconductor drum
(1)
5/6: Number
7: Number or X, Y, or Z
Photoconductor drum (black)
Indicates the packing month.

X means October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the packing day.
10: Alphabet
Production place code.
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
1
10
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following

content.
This number is printed on the inside wall of the tube.
1: Number
2 for this mode.

2: Alphabet
3: Number
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Indicates the production month.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
5/6: Number
3/4: Number
5/6: Number
Indicates the packing month.
7: Hyphen
8/9: Number
8: Number
Indicates the packing day.
Indicates the production lot.
10: Alphabet
Production place code.
C. Toner cartridge
Photoconductor drum (color)
This number is printed on the right lower section of the back surface of the developer bag.
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
The lot number is in 8 digits, and each digit indicates the following
content.
Indicates the model code. It is C for this model.
(2)
The label with the management number on it is attached to the side

of the toner cartridge.
10
Part name
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following

content.
This number is printed on the flange in the front side.
Toner color
1: Number
2 for this mode.
Production site
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model code. H for this model.
A1MX70JTBA
Destination
BK 19
H 20060307
00974 B Production year, month, day
Version
3: Number
Serial production number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.

(Example) Produced on March 7th, 2006, 974th item.

4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the status of toner cartridge
A. Black toner
(1)
Change in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is used first and Bk2 remains full.
Definition
Close to Near End

Near End
Indication of remaining toner amount

1st (Bk1)
2nd (Bk2)
100-75%
100-75%
75-50%
100-75%
50-25%
100-75%
25-0%
100-75%
0%
100-75%
Message
Pop-up message
Toner supply is low. (Bk1)

Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
UI
Ready to scan for copy.

* The above chart shows the toner amount in case an originally packaged black toner cartridge is inserted into Bk1. (It can be inserted into
Bk2.)
(2)
Changes in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is depleted and Bk2 is in use.
Definition

1st (Bk1)
2nd (Bk2)
0%
100-75%
Message
Pop-up message
0%
75-50%
0%
50-25%
Close to Near End
0%
25-0%
Toner End
0%
0%

UI
B. Color Toner
Definition
Close to Near End

100-75%
75-50%
50-25%
25-0%
Message
Pop-up message
Toner supply is low. ()
Near End
0%
Change the toner cartridge. ()
Toner End
0%
* The icon for applicable color toner (Y/M/C) will go to ( ) in the table above.
UI

Toner supply is low. ()
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
1
3 4
7 8
10
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
When a finisher
is installed
11
No.
1
Name
Finisher / saddle stitch finisher
2
3
Punch module
Inserter
Automatic document feeder
Upper front cover
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Front cover (lower)

Operation panel
Right Tray
Output tray (center tray)
Toner cover
Tray 1 (left side)
Tray 2 (right side)
Tray 3
14
15
Tray 4
Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray
(MX-LCX2) is installed)
Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray
(MX-LCX3) is installed)
16
12 13 14
15
Function/Operation
This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch finisher can automatically staple
output at the center line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
This is used to punch holes in output.
Paper loaded in the inserter can be inserted into output from the machine as covers and
inserts.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals
can be automatically scanned.
Open this to replace a toner cartridge or clear a paper misfeed from the paper pass unit.
Open this to switch the main power on and off.
This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
Output can be delivered to this tray.
Output is delivered to this tray.
Open this to replace a toner cartridge.
This holds paper. Up to 1200 sheets of paper can be loaded.
This holds paper. Transparency film, tab paper, and other special media can also be
loaded. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of paper
can be loaded.
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3000
sheets of paper can be loaded.
MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1
16
Remark
Option
Option
Option
When a paper pass

unit (option) installed.
Option
Option
B. Internal structure
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
8
No.
1
2
Name
Paper pass unit
Toner cartridges
Function/Operation
This transfers output to the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a
cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must be
replaced.
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the
paper.
During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four
colors on each of the photoconductive drums are combined
together on the transfer belt.
During black and white printing, only the black toner image is
transferred onto the transfer belt.
Open this cover to operate the fusing unit pressure adjusting
lever and to remove a misfeed.
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this
cover to remove a paper misfeed.
Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension.
This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
Fusing unit
Transfer belt
Right side cover
Paper reversing section cover
Bypass tray
Main power switch
Waste toner box
10
Waste toner box compartment cover
11
Right side cover release lever
10
11
Remark
Option
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn

yourself when removing a paper misfeed.
Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This
may cause a defective image.
Your service technician will collect the waste

toner box.
Open this to remove a paper misfeed from trays 1 to 4, or to

replace the waste toner box.
To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open
the right side cover.
C. Auto document feeder and document cover
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Document feeding area cover
Original guides
Document feeder tray
Original exit tray
Scanning area
Original size detector
Document glass
Function/Operation
Open to remove a misfeed original.
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
D. Connectors
1
2
3
4
5
No.
1
Name
USB connector (A type)
USB connector (B type)
LAN connector
Service-only connector
Power plug
Function/Operation
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
E. Operation panel
1
HOME
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
READY
PRINT
DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
LOGOUT
JOB STATUS
6 7
No.
1
Touch panel
Name
[HOME] key
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
4
5
6
Numeric keys
[CLEAR] key
PRINT mode indicators
IMAGE SEND mode indicators
[JOB STATUS] key
[LOGOUT] key
10
[#/P] key
11
[CLEAR ALL] key
12
13
14
[STOP] key
[BLACK & WHITE START] key
[COLOR START] key
15
[POWER SAVE] key / indicator
16
17
[POWER] key
Main power indicator
10 11
12
13
14
15 16 17
Function/Operation
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform
an operation.
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values.
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image
in scan mode.
DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This
lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel
jobs.
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also
be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used
when dialing.
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state.
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in color.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
F. Print and send status (Job status)
"Complete"
job screen
1
Print Job
Scan to
Job Queue
No.
1
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Sets / Progress
Status
Spool
Copy
020 / 001
Copying
Job Queue
Copy
002 / 000
Paper Empty
Computer01
002 / 000
Waiting
0312345678
001 / 000
Waiting
Name
Mode select tabs
Job list
Job status screen selector key
"Paper Empty" display
5
6
[p] [n] keys

[Detail] key
[Priority] key
[Stop/Delete] key
[Call] key
Spool
Complete
Complete
Job Queue
4
5
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
Detail
Call
Function/Operation
Use these tabs to select print mode, scan mode, fax mode, or Internet fax mode.
The [Print Job] tab shows copy, print, received fax, received Internet fax, and self print jobs.
The [Scan to] tab shows transmission jobs that use the scanner function.
The [Fax Job] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the fax and PC-Fax functions.
The [Internet Fax] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the Internet fax and PC Internet Fax functions.
This shows jobs that are reserved and in progress (job queue), and jobs that have been completed.
When the [Print Job] tab is touched in the mode select tabs, the job status screen selector key changes and the
"Spool" list appears.
A brief description of each job and its status appears in the list.
The "Spool" screen shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. To move an
encrypted PDF job from the spool list to the job queue, touch the key of the job and enter the job password.
This switches the job list display between spooled jobs, the job queue, and completed jobs.
"Spool": This shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. "Spool" appears when print
jobs are displayed.
"Job Queue": This shows reserved jobs and the job in progress.
"Complete": This shows completed jobs.
Add paper.
When the status is "Paper Empty", the specified size of paper for the job is not loaded in any of the trays. In this case, the
job will be held until the required size of paper is loaded. Other jobs that are waiting will be printed (if possible) ahead of
the held job. (However, other jobs will not be printed if the paper ran out while printing was in progress.)
If you need to change the paper size because the specified paper size is not available, touch the key of the job in the job
list (2) to select it, touch the [Detail] key described in (6), and select a different paper size.
These change the page of the displayed job list.
This shows detailed information on a selected job.
When a job has been stored using Quick File or File in document filing mode, or when a broadcast transmission has
been performed in image send mode, the job appears as a key in the completed jobs screen. You can touch the [Detail]
key to show details on the completed job, and you can also touch the [Call] key to reprint or resend the job.
A reserved job in the "Job Queue" screen can be printed ahead of all other reserved jobs by selecting the job and then
touching this key.
In the print job queue, select the print or copy job to which you wish to give priority and touch this key. The job in progress
stops and printing of the selected job begins. When the selected job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
Use this key to cancel the job currently in progress or a selected reserved job. Note that printing of received faxes and
received Internet faxes cannot be canceled.
A job that appears in the completed jobs screen as a key can be touched followed by the [Call] key to reprint or resend
the job. This is the same [Call] key that appears when the [Detail] key is touched.
G. Sensors
SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SPRDMD STUD
SPPD2
STLD
SPPD3
SPED2
SPPD5
SPLS2
SPLS1
SPWS
SPOD
SOCD
SLCOV
SPPD4
OCSW
MHPS
PO_TMP
POD2
TFD
TFD_R
POD3
POD1
APPD1
WEB_INL
HTCS_Y
HTCS_M
WEB_END
PCS_CL/
PCS_K/
REG_F/
REG_R
HTCS_C
TBLTC
DHPD_Y
TCS_Y
TBLTB
HTCS_K
DHPD_M
TCS_M
DSW_ADU
THPS
PTCM_HP
TCS_C
DHPD_C
DHPD_K
APPD2
PPD2
MPED
CCHP
TCS_K
TH2
MPFD
CCMD PPD1
TH1
T1PPD2
LPPD
T1PPD1
T2PPD
T1LUD/T1PED
T2LUD/T2PED
MTOP2
MPWS
MPLD1
MTOP1
HUD_M/
TH_M
DSW_D
VTOD
T1SPD
T2SPD
TANSET
T2
C3LUD
C3SS1
C3SS3
C4SS1
C4SS3
C3SS2
C3SS4
C4SS2
C4SS4
C3PFD
C3PED
C3SPD
C3PWD
C4LUD
TBBOX
C4PFD
C4PED
C4SPD
TNFD
Signal
name
APPD1
ADU transport path detection 1
Photo interrupter
APPD2
Photo interrupter
C3LUD
Tray 3 upper limit detection

(Lift HP detection)
Tray 3 paper empty detection
Tray 3 paper entry detection
Tray 3 width detection
Tray 3 remaining quantity
detection
Tray 3 rear edge detection 1
Photo interrupter
C3PED
C3PFD
C3PWD
C3SPD
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
Name
Type
Photo interrupter
Reflection type
Volume resistor
Photo interrupter
Tact switch
Tact switch
Tact switch
Tact switch
Function/Operation
Active condition
Note
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream

paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
paper pass.
Tray 3 paper pass detection
Tray 3 paper width detection
Tray 3 paper remaining quantity
detection
Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is
detected to detect tray insertion.
The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
PWB unit
Signal
name
C4LUD
Name
Type
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
CCHP
Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift

HP detection)
detection
Charger cleaner HP detection
Tact switch
Tact switch
Tact switch
Tact switch
Photo interrupter
CCMD
CCM rotation detection
Photo interrupter
DHPD_C
DHPD_K
DHPD_M
DHPD_Y
DSW_ADU
C phase detection
K phase detection
M phase detection
Y phase detection
ADU transport open/close
detection
Right lower door open/close
sensor
Hopper remaining quantity sensor
C
K
M
Y
Temperature/humidity sensor
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
C4PED
C4PFD
C4SPD
DSW_D
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
HTCS_M
HTCS_Y
HUD_M/
TH_M
LPPD
MHPS
MPED
MPFD
MPLD1
MPWS
MTOP1
LCC paper entry sensor

Scanner home position sensor
Manual paper feed paper empty
detection
Manual paper feed paper entry
detection
Manual feed paper length detector
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
Photo interrupter
Reflection type
Photo interrupter

Tray 4 paper pass detection
Tray 4 paper remaining quantity
detection
Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is
detected to detect tray insertion.
Photo interrupter
Charger cleaner position detection (in

the process unit)
Detects rotation of the charger
cleaner motor.
C phase detection
K phase detection
M phase detection
Y phase detection
Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
close.
Detects open/close of the right lower
door.
PWB unit
PWB unit
PWB unit
PWB unit
Vibration sensor
Temperature/
humidity sensor
Reflection type
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Volume resistor
Photo interrupter
OCSW
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
PO_TMP
Original cover SW
Process control sensor PWB
POD1
POD2
POD3
PPD1
Fusing after-detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Registration pre-detection (PPD1)
Photo interrupter
Toner density
sensor
Temperature
sensor
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
PPD2
Registration detection (PPD2)
Reflection type
PTCM_HP
REG R
REG_F
SCOV
Sensor inside of the PTC unit

Resist sensor PWB R
Resist sensor PWB F
DSPF upper door open/close
sensor
DSPF lower door open/close
sensor
DSPF open/close sensor
DSPF document upper limit
sensor
DSPF document empty sensor
SPED2
PWB unit
Vibration sensor
Photo interrupter
SOCD
SPED1
Note
Vibration sensor
Manual paper feed tray pull-out

position detector 2
SLCOV
Active condition
Vibration sensor
MTOP2
Paper exit temperature detection
Function/Operation
Photo interrupter
Detects temperature and humidity.

Detects paper entry from LCC.
Detects the scanner home position.
Detects the manual paper feed paper
empty.
Manual paper feed tray paper entry
detection
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper length.
paper width.
paper pull-out position (storing
position).
paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
Document size detection trigger.
Toner patch density detection
PWB unit
Detects temperature.
Leaf switch
Reflection type
Reflection type
Transmission type
Detects paper from the fusing section.

Detects the paper from paper exit.
Detects the paper exit to right tray.
Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
Detects PTC cleaner HP
Detects toner patch (R side)
Detects toner patch (F side)
Detects open/close of the upper door.
L when the upper door is open.
Micro switch
Detects open/close of the lower door.
L when the lower door is open.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.

Detects the upper limit of the DSPF
document.
Detects document empty in the paper
feed tray.
L when the DSPF unit is open.

L when paper is detected.
Transmission type
PWB unit
PWB unit
Signal
name
SPLS1
Name
Type
SPOD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPRDMD
SPWS
DSPF document width sensor
Volume resistor
STLD
Transmission type
T1LUD/
T1PED
T1PPD1
DSPF paper feed tray lower limit

sensor
DSPF paper feed tray upper limit
sensor
Tandem tray 1 sensor
Photo interrupter
Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1
Reflection type
T1PPD2
Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1
Reflection type
Detects Tandem tray 1 paper pass at

the transport roller.
T1SPD
Tandem tray 1 paper remaining

quantity detector
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Tandem tray 2 transport detection
Reflection type
Photo interrupter
TANSET

quantity detector
Tandem tray installation detection
TBBOX
TBLTB
TBLTC
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD
TFD_R
TH1
Waste toner box sensor

Transfer belt separation sensor BK
Transfer belt separation sensor CL
Toner density detection C (ATC)
Toner density detection K (ATC)
Toner density detection M (ATC)
Toner density detection Y (ATC)
Main unit paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
LSU thermistor 1
TH2
LSU thermistor 2
THPS
Secondary transfer separation

drive sensor
Waste toner full detection
Right transfer unit open/close
sensor
Web end detection sensor
Web presence detection
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Permeable sensor
Permeable sensor
Permeable sensor
Permeable sensor
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Temperature
sensor
Temperature
sensor
Photo interrupter

quantity detection
Tandem tray 2 lift-up and paper
presence detection
Detects paper pass from tandem tray
2.
quantity detection
Tandem tray insertion/removal
detection
Waste toner box installation detection
Transfer belt separation BK detection
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Detects the toner density (C).
Detects the toner density (K).
Detects the toner density (M).
Detects the toner density (Y).
Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
Detects right tray paper exit full.
Detects the LSU temperature.
SPLS2
STUD
T2LUD/
T2PED
T2PPD
T2SPD
TNFD
VTOD
WEB_END
WEB_INL
Transmission type
Function/Operation
DSPF document length detection

short sensor
long sensor
DSPF paper exit sensor
DSPF paper pass sensor 1
DSPF document random sensor
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Mechanical switch
Mechanical switch
Detects the document length of the

paper feed tray upper.
Detects the document length of the
Detects paper exit of the document.
Detects pass of the paper.
Detects the paper size in random
paper feed.
Detects the document width of the
Detects the lower limit of the paper
feed tray.
Detects the upper limit of the paper
feed tray.
Tandem tray 1 lift-up and paper
presence detection
Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection
Active condition
Note
H when paper is detected.

H when paper is detected.
H when the lower limit of the

paper feed tray is detected.
L when the upper limit of the
paper feed tray is detected.
Detects the LSU temperature.

Secondary transfer separation
detection
Detects open/close of the right
transfer unit.
Detects the web end.
Detects presence of web.
Immediately
after T1
paper feed
Immediately
before T2
interflow
H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW
DSW-FD
DSW-FL
Signal name
DSW-FD
DSW-FL
DSW-R
MSW
PWRSW
Name
Front door upper open/close switch
Front door lower open/close switch
Right door open/close switch
Main SW
Operation panel power switch
Type
Micro switch
Micro switch
Micro switch
Seesaw switch
Push switch
Function/Operation
Detects front door upper open/close.
Detects front door lower open/close.
Detects right door open/close.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
I. Clutches and solenoids
STRC
STRRC
SPFC STRRBC
ADUGS
LSS_CL
PCSS
BLTCL
BLTCL_R
LSS_BK
MPGS
RRC2
RRC
MPFS
MPUC
SRRC
SRRBC
T1PUS
T1PFC
TANCL
TRC1 T2PFC
T2PUS
LPFC
C4PUS
C3PUS
C3PFC
C4PFC
TRC2
Signal
name
ADUGS
BLTCL
BLTCL_R
C3PFC
C3PUS
C4PFC
C4PUS
LPFC
LSS_BK
LSS_CL
MPFS
MPGS
MPUC
Name
Type
Function/Operation
ADU gate solenoid

Belt separation clutch (normal)
Belt separation clutch (reverse)
Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3)
LCC transport clutch
LSU shutter solenoid BK
LSU shutter solenoid CL
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Manual paper feed clutch
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic clutch
PCSS
RRC
RRC2
SPFC
SRRBC
SRRC
STRC
STRRBC
STRRC
T1PFC
Process control shutter solenoid

PS clutch
PS clutch 2
DSPF paper feed clutch
DSPF No. 2 resist roller brake clutch
DSPF No. 2 resist roller clutch
DSPF transport roller clutch
DSPF No. 1 resist roller brake clutch
Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
T1PUS
T2PFC
Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)

T2PUS
TANCL
TRC1
TRC2

Tandem tray transport clutch
Vertical transport clutch upper
Vertical transport clutch lower
Controls the ADU gate.

Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller in the LCC transport section.
Opens/closes the LSU (BK) shutter.
Opens/closes the LSU (CL) shutter.
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Controls open/close of the shutter of the process control register sensor.
Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.
Performs braking of resist roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the paper feed section.
Performs braking of No. 2 resist roller.
Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
Performs braking of No. 1 resist roller.
Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed
section.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 2 paper feed
section.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transfer roller in the tandem tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.
J. Drive motors
SPOM
SPFM
SLUM
SPUM
HTM_C
TM_C
HTM_M
TM_M
TM_K2
HTM_K
TM_K1
MIM
WEBM
PTMH_1
PTMH_2
POM
FEXM
ADUH
FUM
BTM
PTCCM
TURM
CCM
PFM
ADUL
RRM
WTM
LCCM
T2LUM
TM_Y
HTM_Y
DM_Y
DM_M
DVCM
POLYM
DM_C
DVKM
DM_K
T1LUM
CPFM
C3LUM
C4LUM
Signal
name
ADUH
ADUL
BTM
C3LUM
C4LUM
CCM
CPFM
DM_C
DM_K
DM_M
DM_Y
DVCM
DVKM
ADU motor upper

ADU motor lower
Transfer drive motor
Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3)
Charger cleaner motor
Paper feed motor
Drum motor (C)
Drum motor (K)
Drum motor (M)
Drum motor (Y)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Developing drive motor (K)
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Brush motor
Brush motor
Brush motor
DC brushless motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
DC brushless motor
DC brushless motor
FEXM
FUM
HTM_C
HTM_K
HTM_M
HTM_Y
LCCM
MIM
PFM
POLYM
POM
PTCCM
PTMH_1
PTMH_2
RRM
SLUM
External variable motor

Fusing motor
Hopper motor C
Hopper motor K
Hopper motor M
Hopper motor Y
LCC transport motor
Scanner motor
PS front transport motor
Polygon motor
Paper exit motor
PTC cleaner motor
Intermediate hopper motor
Stirring motor
PS motor
DSPF lift motor
Stepping motor
DC brushless motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
DC brushless motor
Stepping motor
Brush motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
DC brushless motor
PM step motor
Name
Type
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Drives the transfer belt.
Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
Cleans the main charger.
Drives the paper feed section.
Drives the cyan OPC drum unit.
Drives the black OPC drum unit.
Drives the magenta OPC drum unit.
Drives the yellow OPC drum unit.
Drives the developing section (CL).
Drives the developing section (K) and the primary transfer belt separation
operation.
Separates the external heating roller in the fusing unit.
Drives the fusing unit.
Transports toner.
Transports toner.
Transports toner.
Transports toner.
Drives the LCC transport roller.
Scanner (reading) section
Drives the transport roller.
Scans the laser beams.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Cleans the PTC.
Transports toner.
Stirs toner.
Lifts up or moves down the paper feed tray.
Signal
name
SPFM
SPOM
SPUM
DSPF transport motor

DSPF paper exit motor
DSPF paper feed motor
Hybrid step motor

PM step motor
Hybrid step motor
T1LUM
T2LUM
TM_C
TM_K1
TM_K2
TM_M
TM_Y
TURM
WEBM
WTM
Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1)

Toner motor C
Toner motor K1
Toner motor K2
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Secondary transfer separation drive motor
Fusing web cleaning motor
Waste toner drive motor
Brush motor
Brush motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Brush motor
Synchronous motor
DC brushless motor
Name
Type
Function/Operation
Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the paper feed
section.
Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Separates the secondary transfer.
Drives fusing web cleaning paper.
Transports waste toner.
K. Lamps
CLI
DSPF COPY
LUMP
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
HL_US
HL_LM
HL_EX
DL_K
HL_UM
Signal name
CLI
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
DSPF COPY LUMP
HL_EX
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
Name
Scanner lamp
Discharge lamp (C)
Discharge lamp (K)
Discharge lamp (M)
Discharge lamp (Y)
DSPF copy lamp
Heater lamp external
Lower heater roller
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
Type
Xenon lamp
LED
Sub miniatua lamp
LED
LED
Xenon lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Function/Operation
Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
Discharges the photoconductor.
Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.
Heats the external roller.
Heats the lower heat roller.
Heats the upper heat roller. (main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (sub)
L. Fans and filters
SPFFAN
1
POFM_F
POFM_U
LSUFM
DTBFM
5
VFM_R
FUFM_R
HDDFM
OZFM3
OZFM1
2
4
CFM
CONFM
3
FCFM
OZFM2
VFM_C
PSFM
Signal name
CFM
CONFM
DTBFM
FCFM
FUFM_R
HDDFM
LSUFM
OZFM1
OZFM2
OZFM3
POFM_F
POFM_U
PSFM
SPFFAN
VFM_C
VFM_R
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Charger suction fan motor
MFP cooling fan motor
Bottle cooling fan motor
Fusing cooling fan
Fusing exhaust fan
HDD cooling fan motor
LSU cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor 1
Ozone fan motor 2
Ozone fan motor 3 (Individual control)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (center)
Power cooling fan motor
DSPF cooling fan motor
Main inside ventilation fan motor (center)
Machine ventilation fan motor (right)
Name
Toner filter (CL)

Ozone filter
Toner filter (BK)
Dust filter
Paper exit filter
Type
Sirocco fan
Axial-flow fan
Sirocco fan
Sirocco fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Sirocco fan
Sirocco fan
Sirocco fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Axial-flow fan
Sirocco fan
Function/Operation
Supplies air to the charging unit of the OPC drum unit (BK).
Cools the MFP PWB.
Cools the toner bottle.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the HDD.
Cools the polygon motor.
Exhausts ozone.
Exhausts ozone.
Exhausts ozone.
Cools the power unit.
Cools the motors and the clutches.
Discharges air from the machine.
Discharges air from the machine.
Function/Operation
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Absorbs dusts in sucked air.
Deodorizes odor generated in the fusing unit.
M. PWB
8
12
Drum
37
38
1
11
5
3
2
13
14
15
17
18
10
9
40
7
16
20
21
DV
DV (BK)
35
19
6
41
36
42
25
30
31
LSU
23
32
22
28
39
29
27 26 24
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Name
DSPF CCD PWB
DSPF flash PWB
DSPF control PWB
DSPF driver PWB
DSPF CL inverter PWB
RD I/F PWB
CCD PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Power_SW_PWB
MFP OPE-JPWB
CL inverter PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
DSPF memory PWB
Scanner control PWB
1TC PWB
HL PWB
PCU PWB
DRIVER PWB
MC PWB
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
DOCC PWB
Mother PWB
MFP cnt PWB
AC power source PWB
SUB power source PWB
C3SS PWB
C4SS PWB
DC power source PWB
2TC PWB
Function/Operation
Scans document images.
Program ROM PWB for DSPF
Control PWB for DSPF
Driver PWB for DSPF
Drives the copy lamp.
Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
Scans the document images.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
Outputs the key operation signal.
Drives the xenon lamp.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
Temporary storage of back surface image data
Controls the scanner section.
Outputs the primary transfer voltage.
Controls the heater lamp.
Controls the engine section.
Drives the motor and related sections.
Generates a high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias
voltage.
Recognizes the document control pattern.
Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
Controls images and the whole machine.
Controls the power source on the primary side.
Supplies the power of the controller.
Outputs the secondary side voltage.
Outputs the secondary transfer voltage.
34
33
Note
No.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Name
LSU CNT PWB
LD PWB1
LD PWB2
Thermistor PWB 2
Thermistor PWB 1
BD PWB
Drum phase detection PWB
Tandem sensor PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD INV PWB
PTC PWB
Paper exit temperature detection PWB
Memory PWB
DVK DRIVER PWB
Function/Operation
Controls the LSU.
Controls laser lighting. (1 beam)
Controls laser lighting. (2 beams)
Detects the temperature in the LSU.
Detects the temperature in the LSU.
Detects the laser sync signal.
Detects the phase of each color drum.
Detects the tandem tray YES/NO and detects paper.
Outputs the LCD display signal.
Drives the LCD backlight.
Outputs the pre-transfer voltage.
Detects the temperature of the paper exit unit.
Note
MFP cnt is the source of output.
Controls the toner mixing motor.
N. Gate
1
2
No.
1
2
Name
ADU reverse gate
Right paper exit gate
Function/Operation
Selects the paper route among the path to the inner tray and the path to the right tray and the path to the
duplex (ADU) section.
Selects the paper route between the path to the duplex (ADU) section and the path to the right tray.
O. Fuse/Thermostat
11
1
5
4
3
200V
21
20
6
7
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
19
8
9
120V
26
22
23
24
28
25
27
15
16
17
18
12
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Signal name
TS_EX
TS_EX
TS_LM
TS_UM
TS_US
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F208
F205
F206
F207
F201
F202
F203
F204
F2
F3
F1
F61
F2
F1
F101
F102
F103
F301
Name
External thermostat sub
External thermostat main
Lower thermostat
Upper thermostat main
Upper thermostat sub
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Specifications
Function/Operation
Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller
Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller
Prevention against overheating of the lower heat roller
Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller main
Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller sub
20A 125V
20A 125V
T2AH250V
T2AH250V
1.25A 250V
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 6.3A
250V 3.15A
250V 5A
250V 8A
250V 2A
250V 5A
250V 5A
250V 1A
125V 20A
250V 8A
250V 5A
Section
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
AC power source PWB
AC power source PWB
AC power source PWB
AC power source PWB
CL inverter PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
DC power source PWB
P. Rollers
11
13 2
4 5 3 1 15 16
40 41
37 38 39
42
6
8
9
10
12
14
43
44
45
46
47 48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
17
18
25
26
27
19
20
21
22
23
24
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
28
29
30
31
32
33
68
69
34
35
36
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
No. 1 resist roller (Drive)
No. 1 resist roller (Idle)
6
7
Transport roller 1 (Drive)

Transport roller 1 (Idle)
No. 2 resist roller (Idle)
10
Platen roller
11
12

13
14

72
73
66
67
70
71
Function/Operation
Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
Performs resist of document transport.
Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
Transports paper from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
of the transport roller to paper.
Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start
position.
Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
Applies a pressure to paper to prevent against fluctuations on operation of
paper.
Transports paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
Note
No.
15
16
Name
Paper exit roller (Drive)
Paper exit roller (Idle)
17
18

19
20
21
22

23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray)

Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 3 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 3 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 3 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 4 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 4 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 4 paper feed tray)
Paper exit roller 1 (Idle)
38
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
39
40
41
42
43

Paper exit roller 2 (Idle)
44
45
46
47

Upper heat roller
48
49
Lower heat roller

Resist roller (Idle)
50
Resist roller (Drive)
51
52
53
54

55
56
57
58
59
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)

Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
60
61
62

63
64
Function/Operation
Discharges paper.
of the paper exit roller to paper.
Transports paper to the resist roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 6 and the transport roller 13 to the
transport roller 8.
Transports paper from the transport roller 12 to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the tandem tray 2 to the transport roller 13.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport force
Discharges paper. /Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transports
paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. /
Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Transports paper from the upper/lower heat roller to the paper exit roller 1.
Discharges paper.
Heats and presses toner on the paper to fuse paper.
Applies a pressure to the upper heat roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide a transport force of
the transport roller to paper.
Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls transport timing of paper and
adjust the relative relations between images and paper.
Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 7. /
Transports paper from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from LCC to the transport roller 15.
Transports paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 2 to the
transport roller 7.
Note
After P5
After P5
Before P5
Before P5
Tandem 2-2
Tandem 2-2
Tandem 2-1
Tandem 2-1
Paper exit
Paper exit
After fusing
ADU paper entry
ADU paper entry
After fusing
Right paper exit
Right paper exit
Fusing
ADU1
ADU1
Fusing
PS
PS
After manual feed
ADU2
ADU2
After manual feed
LCC2
LCC1
LCC1
LCC2
Tandem 2,
Casette 3, 4
Tandem 2,
Casette 3, 4
Cassette 3, 4-2
No.
65
66
Name
67
68
69

70
71
72
73

Function/Operation
Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and 3 to the transport roller 5.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
Note
Cassette 3, 4-2
Cassette 3, 4-1
Cassette 3, 4-1
Cassette 3
Cassette 3
Cassette 4-2
Cassette 4-2
Cassette 4-1
Cassette 4-1
MX-7000N
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would

not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No.
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 3
ADJ 4
ADJ 5
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
ADJ 8
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
ADJ 16
ADJ 17
ADJ 18
ADJ 19
ADJ 20
ADJ 21
ADJ 22
Adjustment item list

Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For color)
Developing doctor gap adjustment (For black)
Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For black)
Toner density control reference value setting
High voltage adjustments
6A
Main charger grid voltage adjustment
6B
Developing bias voltage adjustment
6C
Transfer voltage adjustment
Image density sensor, image
7A
Color image density sensor calibration
registration sensor adjustment
7B
Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
Image registration adjustment
12A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Print engine section)
(Auto adjustment)
12B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
12C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Scan image distortion adjustment
13A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
13B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
Scan image focus adjustment
14A Scan image focus adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
(CCD unit position adjustment)
14B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
DSPF parallelism adjustment
15A DSPF levelness adjustment
15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)
15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)
Scan image magnification ratio
16A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction)
adjustment (Document table mode,
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
DSPF front surface mode)
16B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
Scan image magnification ratio
17A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction)
adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
(DSPF back surface mode)
17B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
Scan image off-center adjustment
18A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
18B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
Copy image position, image loss
20A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode)
adjustment
20B Original scan position adjustment
20C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (DSPF mode)
Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section)
Copy color balance/density adjustment 22A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy mode)
22B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF document copy mode)
22C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
22D
Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
22E
Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment)

(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
22F
22G
22H
MX-7000N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Simulation
25-2
8-2
8-1
8-6
44-13
44-2
61-4
50-22
50-10
50-10
50-22
50-20
50-21
48-1
64-1
64-1
48-1
48-1
48-1
48-1/48-5
50-12
50-12
50-10/50-1
50-1 (50-2)
53-8
50-6 (50-7)
50-5
63-3 (63-5)
63-3
46-24/44-21/
44-26
46-21/44-21/
44-26/63-7/
63-8
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
Job No.
ADJ 22
ADJ 23
Copy color balance/density adjustment
Printer color balance/density

adjustment
22I
22J
22K
22L
22M
23A
23B
23C
ADJ 24
ADJ 25
ADJ 26
ADJ 27
ADJ 28
ADJ 29
ADJ 30
Adjustment item list

Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section (Normally not required)
Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally not required)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto adjustment
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode
Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting
Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment
Fusing paper guide position adjustment

Document size sensor adjustment
25A Document size sensor detection point adjustment
25B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment
Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
DSPF paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
Touch panel coordinate setting
Image loss, void area, image off29A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
center, image magnification ratio auto
29B Image off-center automatic adjustment
adjustment with SIM50-28
29C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
29D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)
Shading adjustment
Simulation
46-27
46-25
26-53
46-33
46-33
67-24/44-26
67-25/44-26/
67-27/67-28
26-54
41-1
41-2
40-2
53-6
65-1
50-28
50-28
50-28
50-28
63-2
3. Details of adjustment
3)
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap

adjustment (For color)
Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm between 40mm 70mm

from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
40mm
* When the developing unit is disassembled.

* When the print image density is low.
70mm
* When there is a blur on the print image.
40mm
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.

* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
4)
2)
Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
5)
Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.40 r 0.05mm.
6)
Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing

screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the

developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
40mm
70mm
40mm
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole

position comes to the specified range.
7)
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole

position adjustment (For color)
After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller

main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate with the fixing screw.
ADJ 3 Developing doctor gap

adjustment (For black)

1)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a correct position.)
4)
Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the

needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)

1)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
23mm
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 r
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
A
37.8 + 0.5mm
37.8 + 0.5mm
3)
Insert a thickness gauge of 0.45mm between 40mm 70mm

from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
40mm

1)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a correct position.)
4)
Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the

needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
70mm
40mm
23mm
4)
Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 62.1 r
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
62.1 + 0.5mm
5)
Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.45 r 0.05mm.
62.1 + 0.5mm
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the

developing doctor and the developing roller.
6)
70mm
40mm
Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing

screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
70mm
40mm
ADJ 4 Developing roller main pole

position adjustment (For black)
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole

position comes to the specified range.
7)
After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller

main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate with the fixing screw.

ADJ 5 Toner density control reference

value setting
2)
Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4)
When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed.

* When developer is replaced.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is

replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1)
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation

is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment operation is completed or not.
With the front cover (lower) open, enter SIM25-2.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT

AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 128
AT DEVEVO_L_Y
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : 128
AT DEVE VO_M_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : 128
AT DEVE VO_M_C :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128
AT DEVE VO_M_M :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K : 128
AT DEVE VO_M_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C : 128
AT DEVE VO_H_K :
128
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed

mode, the middle speed mode and the high speed mode, and
the reference toner density control value is set for each of
them.
NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected (enabled).
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M : 128

AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y : 128
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K : 128

AT DEVEVO_L_K
: 128
AT DEVEVO_L_C
: 128
AT DEVEVO_L_M
: 128
Close the front cover (lower).
3)
EXECUTE
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
1/1
EXECUTE
Error
display
EE-EL
or process interrupt
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
Error name
Detail of error
Remark
EL
abnormality
(1) The sensor output level is less

than 0.5V in 1min after execution
of SIM25-02.
(2) The sensor output level is less
than 1.5V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
exceeds 8.0V.
(1) The sensor output level
exceeds 4.5V in 1min after
execution of SIM25-02.
The sensor output level exceeds
3.45V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
is less than 2.0V.
The sensor output level after the
adjustment for each speed is not
2.5V r 0.2V.
When either
of (1) or (2)
is satisfied.

TCD_K
45
TCD_C
50
TCD_M
50
TCD_Y
45
TCV_K
45
TCV_C
50
TCV_M
50
TCV_Y
50
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
185
AT DEVEVO_L_Y
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_K :
185
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
185
AT DEVE VO_M_C :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_M :
185
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K :
185
AT DEVE VO_M_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_H_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M :
185
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K :
185
AT DEVEVO_L_K
185
AT DEVEVO_L_C
128
AT DEVEVO_L_M
185
TEST
EE-EC
EC
abnormality
When either
of (1) or (2)
is satisfied.
5)
Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
6)
Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
NOTE:
Abnormal end
EU
abnormality
1/1
Adjustment completed
TEST
EE-EU
1)
When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors

of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2)
After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure

to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
may not be performed correctly.
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
ADJ 6 High voltage adjustments

6-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
TCD_K
EE-EL
TCD_C
50
TCD_M
EE-EL
45
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
TCD_Y
TCV_K
* When U2 trouble occurs.
TCV_C
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
TCV_M
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
TCV_Y
EXECUTE
1/1
1)
Enter SIM8-2 mode.

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
TEST
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A:
XXX
230
850
MIDDLE
A : 583
MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
LOW/HIGH
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
TEST
OK
A:
XXX
230
850
MIDDLE
A : 500
MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D : 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
LOW/HIGH
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Item
MIDDLE
A
B
C
D
LOW/
HIGH
A
B
C
D
E
Mode
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
LOW SPEED
GB_K
LOW SPEED
GB_C
LOW SPEED
GB_M
LOW SPEED
GB_Y
HIGH SPEED
GB_K
Main charger grid voltage

(Middle speed mode)
C Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
M Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Y Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
K Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
C Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
M Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
Y Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
K Main charger grid voltage
(High speed mode)
Adjustment value
Adjustment
Default value
range
230 850
583
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Monitor voltage
Pin
Connector
(Specified value)
No.
54.1 r 1.62V
CNMON
8
Actual
voltage
620V
230 850
635
55.5 r 1.67V
CNMON
635V
230 850
635
55.5 r 1.67V
CNMON
635V
230 850
635
55.5 r 1.67V
CNMON
635V
230 850
552
50.9 r 1.53V
CNMON
585V
230 850
600
52.3 r 1.57V
CNMON
600V
230 850
600
52.3 r 1.57V
CNMON
600V
230 850
600
52.3 r 1.57V
CNMON
600V
230 850
604 (70-sheets machine)

598 (62/55-sheets
machine)
60.5 r 1.82V
CNMON
690V
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is

normally outputted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed

mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
GBK:XXX
GBC:XXX
GBM:XXX
GBY:XXX
1)
Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover.
6-B Developing bias voltage adjustment

* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.
1)
Enter SIM8-1 mode.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
A:
XXX
0
700
2)
Open the PWB holder.
3)
Enter SIM8-2 mode.
4)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and

the scroll key.
5)
Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector

CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the

MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
MIDDLE
A : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
LOW/HIGH
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
A:
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum

and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
XXX
0
700
A : 500
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D : 450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.

If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MIDDLE
Developing unit
EXECUTE
OK
2)

the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle

speed mode and press [OK] key.
MC/DV high voltage PWB

PCU PWB
LOW/HIGH
OPC drum unit

High voltage circuit electrode
Item
MIDDLE
LOW/
HIGH
Mode
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
LOW SPEED DVB_K
LOW SPEED DVB_C
LOW SPEED DVB_M
LOW SPEED DVB_Y
HIGH SPEED DVB_K
Developing bias voltage (Middle

speed mode)
speed mode)
speed mode)
speed mode)
Developing bias voltage (Low
speed mode)
speed mode)
speed mode)
speed mode)
Developing bias voltage (High
speed mode)
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
0 700
450
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Monitor voltage
Pin
Connector
(Specified value)
No.
12.0 r 0.36V
CNMON
7
Actual
voltage
450V
0 700
450
12.0 r 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.0 r 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.0 r 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
420
11.1 r 0.33V
CNMON
420V
0 700
420
11.1 r 0.33V
CNMON
420V
0 700
420
11.1 r 0.33V
CNMON
420V
0 700
420
11.1 r 0.33V
CNMON
420V
0 700
450
12.0 r 0.36V
CNMON
450V
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is

normally outputted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the

MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7)
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec.

If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
DVK:XXX
DVC:XXX
DVM:XXX
OPC drum unit
DVY:XXX
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed

mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
High voltage circuit electrode
6-C Transfer voltage adjustment

To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, then adjust the other mode.
* When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the

modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1)

1)
Enter SIM8-6 mode.

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A:
Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover.
XXX
0
255
A : 78
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
B : 78
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
C : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
D : 68
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
E : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
F : 68
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
G : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
H: 68
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
I : 78
TC1
J : 78
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
LOW SPEED BW K
K : 130
TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
L : 132
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE
2
TEST
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
2)
Open the PWB frame.
3)
Enter SIM8-1 mode.
4)
5)
A:
XXX
0

the scroll key.
Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
CNMON
1
255
A: 200
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
B : 78
C : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
D: 68
E : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
F : 68
G: 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
H: 68
I : 78
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
J : 78
K: 130
TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
L : 132
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3)
Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.

By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY CL DPX
TC2 HEAVY BW SPX
TC2 HEAVY BW DPX
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
PTC LOW SPEED CL
PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
PTC LOW SPEED BK
PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
PTC HIGH SPEED BK
VCASE LOW SPEED CL
VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL
VCASE LOW SPEED BK
VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK
VCASE HIGH SPEED BK
Content
Primary
transfer bias
reference value
Color
K
C
M
Y
Secondary
transfer bias
reference value
Black and white
Color
Normal
paper
Black and white

Color
Black and white
Secondary
transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
PTC current
reference value
PTC case
voltage
reference value
Heavy
paper
Lower speed
Middle speed
Lower speed
Middle speed
Lower speed
Middle speed
Lower speed
Middle speed
Lower speed
Middle speed
High speed
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Color
OHP
Black and white
Color
Envelope
Black and white
Cleaning process
Printing at low speed
Printing at middle speed
Printing at high speed
Cleaning
Color
Lower speed
Middle speed
Black and white
Lower speed
Middle speed
High speed
Color
Lower speed
Middle speed
Black and white
Lower speed
Middle speed
High speed
ADJ 7 Image density sensor, image

registration sensor adjustment
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
* When the image density sensor is replaced.
Set
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
78
78
68
68
68
68
68
68
78
78
130
132
132
184
184
88
88
79
79
72
72
149
149
72
72
100
114
156
119
119
119
119
119
0
0
0
0
0
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
50V - 1500V
50V - 1500V
50V - 1500V
50V - 1500V
0/100PA - 700PA
0/100PA - 700PA
0/100PA - 700PA
0/100PA - 700PA
0/100PA - 700PA
0/200V - 1000V
0/200V - 1000V
0/200V - 1000V
0/200V - 1000V
0/200V - 1000V
Actual output
value of the
initial value
15PA
15PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
15PA
15PA
40PA
25PA
25PA
40PA
40PA
12.5PA
12.5PA
10PA
10PA
8PA
8PA
30PA
30PA
8PA
200V
400V
500V
800V
300PA
300PA
300PA
300PA
300PA
0
0
0
0
0
NOTE:
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following
items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
* When the image resist sensor is replaced.

The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the
adjustment jig) SIM44-13
* Color/black image density sensor and the image registration sensor adjustment SIM44-2
7-A Color image density sensor calibration

1)
Open the front cover (lower).
2)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
7)
Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT

PCS CL CARB OUT :
108
PCS CL DARK
PCS CL LED ADJ
21
EXECUTE
1/1
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or when the color sensor

adjustment is completed
NOTE:
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
3)
4)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT

PCS CL CARB OUT :
108
Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
PCS CL DARK
Open the process front cover, loosen the screw, and pull out
the primary transfer belt unit.
PCS CL LED ADJ
21
OK
EXECUTE
1/1
8)
Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
9)
10) Press [EXECUTE] key.

Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Display/Item
5)
Remove the developing unit (BK) and the OPC drum unit (BK).
6)
Install the image density sensor calibration jig (UKOG0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section.
Engage the pawl (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it
to the rear frame side.
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
Content
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
dark-voltage level
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
Adjustment
value range
1 255
Default
value
108
0 255
1 255
21
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
A
A
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low temperature, low humidity and dark place.
7-B Color image density sensor, black image

density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
1)
Enter SIM44-2 mode.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT

PCS_CL LED ADJ
21
PCS_K LED ADJ
21
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
27
REG_R LED ADJ
27
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX :
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
EXECUTE
2)
1/2

The color image density sensor, the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
PROCON
REGIST
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL LED ADJ
B
PCS _K LED ADJ
C
PCS_CL DARK
D
PCS_K DARK
E
PCS_K GRND
F
PCS_K BELT MAX
G
PCS_K BELT MIN
H
PCS_K BELT DIF
I
REG_F LED ADJ
J
REG_R LED ADJ
K
REG_F DARK
L
REG_R DARK
M REG_F GRND
N
REG_R GRND
O
REG_F BELTMAX
P
REG_F BELT MIN
Q
REG_F BELT DIF
R
REG_R BELT MAX
S
REG_R BELT MIN
T
REG_R BELT DIF
U
REG_F PATCH (K)
V
REG_F PATCH (C)
W REG_F PATCH (M)
X
REG_F PATCH (Y)
Y
REG_R PATCH (K)
Z
REG_R PATCH (C)
AA REG_R PATCH (M)
AB REG_R PATCH (Y)
Content
Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color image sensor dark voltage
Black image density sensor dark voltage
Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.)
Belt base detection level (Min.)
Belt base detection level difference (Item E, Item F)
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Image registration sensor dark voltage F
Image registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.) F
Belt base detection level (Min.) F
Belt base detection level difference (Item O, Item P)
Belt base detection level (Max.) R
Belt base detection level (Min.) R
Belt base detection level difference (Item R, Item S)
Patch detection level F (K)
Patch detection level F (C)
Patch detection level F (M)
Patch detection level F (Y)
Patch detection level R (K)
Patch detection level R (C)
Patch detection level R (M)
Patch detection level R (Y)
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality.
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* Black image density sensor
* Image registration sensor
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
* Transfer belt cleaner
Adjustment value range

1 255
1 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
1 255
1 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 256
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
27
27
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(Method 1)
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross

point of the outside cross pattern.
(LSU (writing) unit)

* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.

* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(Required depending on the cases.)
Diagonal line D
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color

balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
Diagonal line C
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.

* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
1)
Enter SIM61-4 mode.
F
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C

and D of the diagonal lines.
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
A:
XXX
1
A:
MULTICOUNT
B:
PAPER : CS3
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in

the following range.
999
C D = r 0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range,
there is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
EXECUTE
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
OK
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
R
Comparison line
TEST
0.5 mm or less
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
A:
XXX
1
A:
MULTICOUNT
B:
PAPER : CS3
Direction A
Direction B
999
Reference line
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by

changing the value of set item B.
3)
The cross patterns in a row
b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern

on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
The check pattern is printed out.

4)
Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for
judgment of good or no good.
NOTE:
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5)
Open the front cover (lower).
6)
Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any

skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the

adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
8)
Execute procedures 3) 4).
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
(Repeat procedures 5) 8) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.)
9)
7)
If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten

the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is

skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of
B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
Repeat procedures 11) 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment

(Auto adjustment)
*B
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Direction A

NOTE: This machine is provided with the manual photoconductor
phase adjustment function (SIM 44-31), which, however, is
rather difficult to perform. Therefore, it is advisable to use
SIM 50-22 to perform the automatic adjustment.
*A
Direction B
* When the OPC drum is replaced.

* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
*B
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.

* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
F
*A: Rough adjustment pattern
*B: Fine adjustment pattern

* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front

frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within r 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
1)
Enter SIM50-22 mode.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
ADJ 10 Print engine image

magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
105.0(+0.2)
110.0(-0.1)
103.0(+0.4)
100.0(+0.0)
99.0(-0.2)
99.0(+0.2)
98.0(+0.3)
98.0(+0.1)
105(+0.0)
START POINT
AMP
1(2)
0(1)
CL
1(2)
0(1)
PHASE
AMP
1(2)
0.0(0.1)
1(2)
0.0(0.1)


1)
0.0(0.1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
REGIST
DRUM POS
1/1
A:
EXECUTE
TEST
EXECUTE
ALL
Normal end
XXX
60
140
A : 100
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22

NOW EXECUTING...
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
EXECUTE
TEST
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
10-key
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START

ERRORTONNER EMPTY 01
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
end of print
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
2)
Press [ALL] key.
A : 50
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration

adjustment are executed automatically.
K:
DUPLEX : NO
A:
(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/

image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
XXX
60
140
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration

adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] key and
[DRUM POS] key. Since, however, the image registration
adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
3)
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and

[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment
result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2)
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
3)
Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
4)

The check pattern is printed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.

Example: This time 90q, previous time 45q: 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
5)
Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
r 0.5mm.
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
A:
XXX
60
140
A : 100
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures

below.
6)
10-key
Change the set value of set item A.
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed

by 0.1mm.
End of print
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification

ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10

A : 50
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO
A:
Repeat procedures 2) 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
XXX
60
140
ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment

* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment) is performed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
EXECUTE
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
2)
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.

Display/Item
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.

* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
BK-MAG
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
MULTI COUNT

(Caution)
Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item.
* Check to insure that the Print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
(Manual adjustment) has been properly adjusted.
OK
Content
Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment
value (Manual feed tray)
value (Paper feed tray 1)
value (LCC)
value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment
items A G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
Print quantity
Set
range
60 140
Default
value
100
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 999
Display/Item
J
PAPER
MFT
Content
Paper feed
tray select
CS 1
CS 2
CS 3
CS 4
DUPLEX
LCC
YES
Duplex
print select
Manual paper
feed tray
Paper feed
tray 1
Paper feed
tray 2
Paper feed
tray 3
Paper feed
tray 4
LCC
Selected
Set
range
16 1
Default
value
2 (CS 1)
8)
Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2

pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
2
3
4
5
01
6
0
1 (NO)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
5)
Check the adjustment pattern image position.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
ADJ 12 Image registration adjustment

* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
RV: REAR VOID AREA
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum,

the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
FV: FRONT VOID AREA

RV + FV d 4.0mm
* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment

(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment) is performed.
RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the procedures below.
6)
Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B H) to be

adjusted with the scroll key.
7)
Change the adjustment value.

Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments

must have been completed.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is

printed.
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.

Note before adjustment
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)

(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is

changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
12-A Image registration adjustment (Main

scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
R
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main

scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are executed simultaneously and automatically.
1)
Content
C

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
105.0(+0.2)
110.0(-0.1)
103.0(+0.4)
100.0(+0.0)
99.0(-0.2)
99.0(+0.2)
98.0(+0.3)
98.0(+0.1)
105(+0.0)
START POINT
AMP
1(2)
0(1)
CL
1(2)
0(1)
PHASE
AMP
1(2)
0.0(0.1)
1(2)
0.0(0.1)
SUB
0.0(0.1)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Yellow)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
Default
value
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.

REGIST
DRUM POS
EXECUTE
ALL
( ): Difference from the previous value.
1/1
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
EXECUTE
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
Normal end
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image

registration adjustment mode below.
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
NOW EXECUTING...
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual

adjustment) (SIM50-21)
EXECUTE
12-B Image registration adjustment (Main

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Abnormal end
1)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION

ERRORTONNER EMPTY 01
A:
1
A : 100
CYAN(FRONT)
XXX
B : 100
CYAN(REAR)
199
C : 100
MAGENTA(FRONT)
D : 100
MAGENTA(REAR)
E : 100
YELLOW(FRONT)
F : 100
YELLOW(REAR)
G:
MULTICOUNT
H:
PAPER : CS3
I:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
2)
3)
Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
EXECUTE
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
F
Content
C
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
Image registration
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
EXECUTE
Default
value
100
TEST
1.0 199.0
End of print
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
A:
1.0 199.0
EXECUTE
10-key
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
OK
A : 50
CYAN(FRONT)
XXX
B : 100
CYAN(REAR)
199
C : 100
MAGENTA(FRONT)
D : 100
MAGENTA(REAR)
E : 100
YELLOW(FRONT)
F : 100
YELLOW(REAR)
G:
MULTICOUNT
H:
PAPER : CS3
I:
DUPLEX : NO
100
100
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by

changing the value of set item H.
3)

The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scanning direction is printed.
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 r 1)
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount.
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at

the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0

r 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item
A
CYAN
(FRONT)
CYAN
(REAR)
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA
(REAR)
YELLOW
(FRONT)
YELLOW
(REAR)
Content
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 199
Default
value
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of

the adjustment value)
a)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
Measurement of the shift amount

* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern

The measurement value of the figure is "7."

* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern

The visually highest color density section is regarded as

the center, and used as the measurement value.
-20
(Example)
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.

(Example)

In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the

plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.

Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment

shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the
minus polarity.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27.
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position

is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
F.
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
20

Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift

amount (correction value)

(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

b)
Adjustment value calculation

Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Yellow
E

Magenta
C

Cyan
A

(Example)
Previous value before adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
D: 98
E: 102
F: 96
New adjustment value

A: 93 (= 100 7)
B: 100 (= 112 12)
C: 96 (= 95 + 1)
D: 109 (= 98 + 11)
E: 109 (= 102 + 7)
F: 118 (= 96 + 22)
12-C Image registration adjustment (Sub

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
A:
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the

other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
XXX
1
199
A : 100
CYAN
B : 100
MAGENTA
C : 100
YELLOW
D:
MULTICOUNT
E:
PAPER : CS1
F:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
TEST
OK
or end of print
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
A:
XXX
1
199
A : 150
CYAN
B : 100
MAGENTA
C : 100
YELLOW
D:
MULTICOUNT
E:
PAPER : CS1
F:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
3)

The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pattern is printed.

C: Adjustment range
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color.
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
Rough adjustment
Fine adjustment
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
A
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at

the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.

If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode

adjustment item A C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item
A
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Content
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)
Default
value
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the

adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)
Measurement of the shift amount

Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
a)

(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of

0 r 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
Adjustment
value range
1 199

-20
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern

Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
The visually highest color density section is regarded as

the center, and used as the measurement value of the
shift amount.
(Example)

20
The measurement value of the figure is "7."

* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.

B



C: Adjustment range

The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line

mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line
mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.

b)
Adjustment value calculation

Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

Previous adjustment value

A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
New adjustment value

A: 73 (= 100 27)
B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 110 (= 95 + 15)
ADJ 13 Scan image distortion

adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
13-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [D]-3.)
1)
Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame (the
top surface of the mylar), and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on

the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If not, perform the following procedures.

3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
13-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1)
Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.

(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
L
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
13-C Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1)
Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular

with four right angles.)
L = 10mm
L
3)
Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
Lb
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4)
Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image

distortions on the right and the left.
Lc
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld
5)
6)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left

image distortions.
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) 6) until the condition of the procedure

3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner).
5)
Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side.
ADJ 14 Scan image focus adjustment

(CCD unit position adjustment)
14-A Scan image focus adjustment (Document
table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1)
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
TEST
7)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
Repeat the procedures 2) 5) until the difference between the

image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
A:
XX
1
Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side, change the overall height.
99
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a

copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the
main scanning direction is within the specified range.
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main

scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner).
13-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole

scanner)
OK
2)
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure

below.
4)
Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be

adjusted with ADJ 13A, ADJ 13B, and ADJ 13C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2)
Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the left edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the mechanical
distortion of the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is
adjusted.
1)
Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the

copy mode, and make a copy.
5)
Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6)
Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main

scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
100mm scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
110
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
110
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7)
Remove the document table glass.
8)
Remove the dark box cover.
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
14-B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back

surface mode)
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly

adjusted.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1)
Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2)
Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3)
Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
* Never loosen the screws marked with .

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
4)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
ADJ 15 DSPF parallelism adjustment

15-A DSPF levelness adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
5)
1)
Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
2)
Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less

and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with .

Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjustments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.
6)
1mm
or less
Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 4).
0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3.

3)
Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear

frame horizontal level.
A
L
R
7)
Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 4) 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):

Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 until an acceptable result is obtained.
4)
After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projection on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit.
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
0 - 1.0mm
15-B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface

mode)
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the

back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."

* When replacing the DSPF unit.
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.

1)
Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the selfprint pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
3)
Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
Paper pass direction
B
2)
4)
Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
5)
Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right

side of the DSPF rear frame.
Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b|
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d|
1 mm
1 mm
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the

left]
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew

adjusting screw.
right]
0 - 1.0mm
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.

15-C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface

mode)
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1)
Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the selfprint pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the

front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the

procedures of step 3) or later.
3)
Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
4)
Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to

adjust.
B
2)
Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b|
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d|
1 mm
1 mm
D
* When the adjustment screw is turned 180 degrees, a change
of about 0.5mm is made.

left]
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper

balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turning the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjustment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
5)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.

NOTE: Since turning the adjustment screw too much may cause
the optical axis trouble, turn in less than one turn clockwise
or counterclockwise.
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface
mode)
Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification

ratio is within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
16-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface mode)
1)

below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
16-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface mode)
1)
2)

TEST

below.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
A:
XX
1
99
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
OK
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
2)
Copy magnification ratio

(Original dimension Copy dimension)
x 100 [%]
=
Original dimension

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
A:
XX
1
99
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
Scale
(Original)
10
10
20
20
90
90
100
100
110
110
OK
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

4)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
4)
10
20
90
100
110
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100

r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5)
5)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
A:
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
XX
1
99
OK
ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (DSPF back surface
mode)
17-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (DSPF back
surface mode)
6)
Select the SPFB(MAIN) with scroll key.
7)
Enter the image magnification adjustment value with the 10key.
8)
Press [OK] key.

Pressing the [OK] key starts copy operation as well as applying
the adjustment value.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.

* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direction.
1)
On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated

below.
17-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Sub scanning direction) (DSPF back
surface mode)
* Images are not correctly magnified in the sub-scanning direction.
A4 size

1)

below.
10mm
(both sides)
10mm
10mm
2)
Make a normal duplex copy on A4 paper.
3)
Measure the lengths of the copied image (back surface) and

the original image.
original
10mm
copy
10
50
100
150
A4 size
2)
Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
3)
Measure the lengths of the copied image and the original

image.
250
200
10
50
10
50
100
150
200
250
100
10
200
200
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100

0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following
steps.
150
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
100
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original

dimension x 100
150
Determine the image magnification factor using the following

formula:
50
4)
copy
original
4)
Determine the image magnification factor using the following

formula:
ADJ 18 Scan image off-center

adjustment
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original

dimension x 100
5)
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100

0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following
steps.
* When the DSPF unit is installed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
A:
XX
1
99
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
18-A Scan image off-center adjustment

(Document table mode, DSPF front surface
mode)
1)
Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the

adjustment mode (document table or DSPF).
OK
6)
Select the SPFB(SUB) with scroll key.

This adjustment items is intended to adjust the image magnification in the sub-scanning direction in DSPF mode. (SPFB
(SUB))
7)
8)
Press [OK] key.
A=B

obtained.
NOTE: After adjusting the image magnification in the sub-scanning
direction through Simulation 48-1, do the following steps if
making a copy at a different magnification factor fails to
produce a correctly scaled copy.
1)
2)
Check the copy image center position.

If A B = r 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-05
A'
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
A:
XX
1
99
A:
50
MR(HI)
B:
50
MR(MID)
C:
50
MR(LO)
D : 50
DSPF(HI)
E:
50
DSPF(MID)
F:
50
DSPF(LO)
A' - B' =
1.0mm
(100%)
B'
OK
2)
Select the item corresponding to be adjusted with scroll key.
3)

Make adjustments by changing the adjustment value for high
revolution mode if the copy magnification is not correct for
microcopies; or the adjustment value for low revolution mode if
the copy magnification is not correct for blowbacks.
4)
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
3)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-12
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
A:
XX
1
99
A : 50
OC
B : 50
SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50
SPF(SIDE2)
Press [OK] key.

This applies the adjustment value.
OK
4)
Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
3)
Enter the scanned image off-center position adjustment value

with the 10-key.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1mm.)
(When the adjustment is increased, the print image is shifted
to the front side.)
4)
Press [OK] key.

5)
Check the off-center of the printed image.
The entered value is set.

When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6)
Repeat the procedures of 2) 6) until the above condition is
satisfied.
18-B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF

back surface mode)

obtained.
ADJ 19 Print area (Void area)

adjustment (Print engine
section)

* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
* When the paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
(Adjustment mode selection)
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
1)
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-12
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
A:
XX
1
99
A : 50
OC
B : 50
SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50
SPF(SIDE2)
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.

* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 10 Print
engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) in advance.
OK
1)
(UNIT: 0.1mm/STEP When the value is increased, the image is

shifted to the front side.)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
A
B
C
2)
3)
OC
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Item
OC mode adjustment
DSPF front surface adjustment
DSPF back surface adjustment
Set range
0 99
Default
50
A:
XXX
60
140
Using the scroll key, select the adjustment item SPF(SIDE2),

which is intended to adjust the off-center in DSPF back surface
mode.
Press [OK] key.
(Scan off-center adjustment)

1)
2)
A : 100
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO

below.
EXECUTE
Press [START] key.

Since the front side and back side images are copied onto separate sheets, check the off-center of the back side image.
If the off-center is 0 r 2.7 mm, no adjustment is required.
TEST
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
original
copy
A:
XXX
60
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

140
A : 50
BK-MAG
B : 50
MFT
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
3)
4)
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below

are in the range of the standard values.
Content
Lead edge void area
Rear edge void area
FRONT/REAR void area
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/
Item
X
Y
Z1/Z2
6)
Standard adjustment value

3.0 r 1.0mm
2.0 r 1.0mm
2.0 r 2.0mm
DENA
Content
Void are
amount
adjustment
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Z1
2.02.0mm
Lead edge
void area
adjustment
Rear edge
void area
adjustment
FRONT/
REAR void
area
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
1 99
30
3.0 r
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0 r
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0 r
2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
X
3.01.0mm
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Y
2.01.0mm
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area

After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Z2
2.02.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
5)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
A:
XX
0
99
A : 50
RRCA
B : 50
RRCB-CS12
C : 50
RRCB-CS34
D : 50
RRCB-LCC
E : 50
RRCB-MFT
F : 50
RRCB-ADU
G : 30
LEAD
H : 20
SIDE
I:
30
DENA
J:
20
DENB
K : 20
FRONT/REAR
Display
item
RRCBCS12
RRCBCS34
RRCBLCC
RRCBMFT
RRCBADU
Adjustment
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 99
50
LCC
1 99
50
Manual
feed
ADU
1 99
50
1 99
50
Content
Image lead
edge
position
adjustment
value
Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ADJ 20 Copy image position, image

loss adjustment
20-A Copy image position, image loss
adjustment (Document table mode)
OK

10-key
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
OK
TEST

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
A:
XX
0
99
A : 60
RRCA
B : 50
RRCB-CS12
C : 50
RRCB-CS34
D : 50
RRCB-LCC
E : 50
RRCB-MFT
F : 50
RRCB-ADU
G : 30
LEAD
H : 20
SIDE
I:
30
DENA
J:
20
DENB
K : 20
FRONT/REAR

NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 19 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.
OK
1)

below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
2)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
A:
XX
0
99
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
A : 50
RRCA
B : 50
RRCB-CS12
C : 50
RRCB-CS34
D : 50
RRCB-LCC
E : 50
RRCB-MFT
F : 50
RRCB-ADU
G : 30
LEAD
H : 20
SIDE
I:
30
DENA
J:
20
DENB
K : 20
FRONT/REAR
OK
10-key
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
A:
XX
0
99
A : 60
RRCA
B : 50
RRCB-CS12
C : 50
RRCB-CS34
D : 50
RRCB-LCC
E : 50
RRCB-MFT
F : 50
RRCB-ADU
G : 30
LEAD
H : 20
SIDE
I:
30
DENA
J:
20
DENB
K : 20
FRONT/REAR
OK
3)
Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
4)
Display item
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Content
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
Resist motor ON timing
Standard cassette
adjustment
Image lead edge position

adjustment value
Image loss adjustment

Void area amount adjustment
Adjustment range
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
0 99
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
LCC
Manual feed
ADU
Lead edge image loss adjustment
Side image loss adjustment
Lead edge void area adjustment
Rear edge void area adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.

Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
mode.
Paper lead
edge
Scale image 3.0mm position
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge

image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
100%
5mm 10mm
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
20
30
20
20
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
200%
5mm
10mm
5)
Image loss adjustment
2)
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state.
If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a

desired value, change these adjustment items.
A : 50
A:
ADJUST VALUE
XX
Paper lead edge
Copy area
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
TEST
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
99
Maginification ratio: 400%
10mm
5mm
OK
3)
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

Display/
Item
LEAD
SIDE
Content
Image loss
adjustment
value
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss
adjustment
Adjustment
range
Default
value
0 99
30
0 99
Standard
adjustment
value
3.0 r
1.0mm
2.0 r
1.0mm
20
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is
changed by 0.1mm.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.

obtained.
20-C Copy image position, image loss

adjustment (DSPF mode)
20-B Original scan position adjustment


Papar lead edge
Papar tail edge

No Image
Void (RV)

10
LIL = 1.5 mm
LV = 3.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm
FV+RV= 7.0 mm
20

This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in
DSPF mode front face scan.
Image loss (LIL)
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position

from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated
by DSPF (front surface) mode scan.
1)
Make a copy in DSPF (front surface) mode, and make sure

that the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image
is free from shadows.
No Image
Void (TV)
No Image
No Image
Void (FV)
Void (LV)
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-06
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
Papar lead edge
A:
Image area
A : 50
SIDE1
XX
B : 50
SIDE2
99
C : 20
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
D : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
E : 30
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
F : 30
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
G : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
H : 20
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Shadow image of SPF
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image

contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following
steps.
OK
Item
A
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image loss
amount
setting:
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
E
F
G
Image loss
amount
setting:
SIDE2
Front surface document

scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
Back surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
Front surface lead edge
image loss amount setting
Front surface side image
loss amount setting
Front surface rear edge
Back surface lead edge
Back surface side image
loss amount setting
Back surface rear edge
Default
50
50
20
Image area
Image loss (TIL)
30
Void (TV)
30
No Image
20
20
Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss (LEAD_
EDGE) for the front and back sides as follows:
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.

2)
Repeat the process of changing the TRAIL_EDGE adjustment

value and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an acceptable level.
obtained.
(Standard setting)
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1): 15
F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2): 15
Set the front surface/back surface (FRONT_REAR) adjustment

value to 20 by entering "20" into the FRONT_REAR adjustment
value field and then pressing the [OK] key.
* Set the adjustment value for "C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)" and

"F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)" to 15 by entering "15" into the
(LEAD_EDGE) adjustment value field and then pressing the
[OK] key.
2)
TIL = 1.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm
20
(Leading edge image loss adjustment)

1)
Papar trail edge
In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,

and make sure that the leading edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6).
Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
in the front/rear frame direction.
ADJ 21 Print lead edge image position

adjustment (Printer mode)
Papar lead edge

TIL = 1.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm

Image area

(Caution)
Image loss (TIL)
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge

void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer
mode.
Void (TV)
No Image
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
3)
Repeat the process of changing the SIDE1 & SIDE2 adjustment values and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an
acceptable level.
SIDE1: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF front side mode.
SIDE2: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF back side mode.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1 mm.)
(The timing in which to start reading the image should be
determined based on the timing in which detector SPPD4
detects the leading edge of the original.)

(Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
1)
In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,

and make sure that the trailing edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6).
1)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
TEST
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
A:
XX
1
99
A : 30
DEN-C
B : 20
DEN-B
C : 20
FRONT/REAR
D:
MULTI COUNT
E:
PAPER : CS1
F:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
A:
XX
1
99
A : 40
DEN-C
B : 20
DEN-B
C : 20
FRONT/REAR
D:
MULTI COUNT
E:
PAPER : CS1
F:
DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
A
D
E
Display/Item
DEN-C
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
Content
Printer print image lead edge adjustment
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Select
3)
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Adjustment range
1 99
1 999
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
01
0
Standard adjustment value

3.0 r 2.0mm
1 (NO)
5)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
6)
Change the adjustment value.
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r 2.0mm
Default value
30
1
2 (CS1)
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.

printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
3.02.0mm
Repeat the procedures 4) 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density
3)
adjustment
The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be

set to ENABLE (default).
Display
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density

adjustment
HV
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/

density adjustment must be executed.
HT
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/

density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
TC
MD VG
MD LD
The importance levels of them are shown below.

(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execution of the image quality adjustments.)
MD EV
1)
MD DL
The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
Job
No
ADJ
7
ADJ
8
ADJ
9
ADJ
12
Image density
sensor, image
registration
sensor
adjustment

calibration
7B
Color image density sensor,
black image density sensor,
image registration sensor
adjustment
Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
44-13
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
50-22
Image
registration
adjustment
(Print engine
section)
7A
12A
12B
12C
2)
Simulation
to be used
Adjustment item
44-2

(Main scanning direction, sub
scanning direction) (Auto
adjustment)
(Main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
(Sub scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
Adjustment/setting item
AU
AL
AO
AO
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
61-4
50-22
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_PROCON
TN_ENV
50-20
50-21
The set values of the following simulations must be set to the

default values.
SIM No
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
MD DL EV
Default value
50
50
500
500
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
DM_PHASE
SENSITIVITY
PRT_HT
Content
Set range
Normal operation high-density

process control YES/NO setting
Normal operation half-tone
process control YES/NO setting
Transfer output correction YES/
NO setting
Membrane decrease grid voltage
correction YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease laser power
voltage correction YES/NO
setting
Membrane decrease
environment grid voltage
Membrane decrease discharge
light quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Membrane decrease
environment discharge light
quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Toner density humidity correction
YES/NO setting
Toner density area correction
YES/NO setting
Toner density life correction
YES/NO setting
Toner density print rate
Toner density process control
Toner density environment
Toner density correction,
unconditional supply YES/NO
setting
Toner compulsory consumption
mode YES/NO setting
1Pixel half-tone process control
Auto resist adjustment YES/NO
setting
Error check YES/NO setting
during auto resist adjustment
Drum phase alignment YES/NO
setting
Toner density correction YES/NO
setting
Half tone process control printer
correction feedback Enable/
Disable setting
Normal
(Inhibit: 1:
NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0:
YES)
Default
value
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density

adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
1)
(Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy

color balance/density adjustment)
Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
The following items must be adjusted properly.
Job
No
ADJ
1
ADJ
2
ADJ
6
ADJ
14
Simulation
to be used
Adjustment item
Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment

procedures depending on the actual conditions.
Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
There are following four, major cases.

1)
Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For

color)
High voltage
6A Main charger grid voltage
adjustment
adjustment
6B Developing bias voltage
adjustment
6C Transfer voltage adjustment
Scan image
14A Scan image focus adjustment
focus
(Document table mode,
adjustment
DSPF front surface mode)
(CCD unit
14B Scan image focus adjustment
position
adjustment)
8-2
8-1
When installing the machine.
2)
When the periodic maintenance is performed.
3)
When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.

(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4)
When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.

(Without replacement of a consumable part)
8-6
48-1
(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures

START
JOB No
Work item
OPC drum counter clear
When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

When in
After
After
After cleaning
After
After
install/repair/check
replacing
scanner
replacement
replacing
replacing
(without replacing
developer
of the image
(reading)
transfer belt
OPC drum
consumable parts)
drum
section
density sensor
Simulation
24-7
Developer counter clear
24-5
ADJ 7A

calibration
44-13
ADJ 9
OPC drum phase adjustment

(Auto adjustment)
Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
50-22
61-4

50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
ADJ 8
ADJ 12
The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
Process correction is forcibly
performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance/density.

(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
Are the copy

color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the CCD replaced?
Set the ST chart

(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
No
Check the copy color balance/density.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
(to Next page)
Perform ADJ 22A

CCD gamma adjustment.
SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
(to Next page)
Enter the SIM 63-03

mode and press the
EXECUTE key.
: Standard adjustment flow
Perform ADJ 22C copy color balance/

density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
(from Previous page)
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select

A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
Press the EXECUTE key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern
on the original table, select
the FACTORY mode, and
press the EXECUTE key.
3
Can the
copy color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Yes
No
No
Are the
color balance
and density at the
satisfactory
levels?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 22D

copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21)
Yes
Perform the initial setup of half tone

image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Execute the half tone image correction.

(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
1
*1
The number of
times is limited
to 3 times
Check the copy color balance and the density.

(Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
(Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)
Is the
automatic adjustment
repeated?
Use SIM 46-21 to

print the color
balance check
sheet, and check
the patch color
balance of process
black.
/Check the copy
color balance and
density.
Check in the
(Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo
mode. (Use the
test chart
UKOG-0317FCZZ/
11.)
No
Yes
Press the REPEAT key.
Can be
repeated
max. 3 times.

Set the adjustment pattern
on the original table, and
press the EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM 46-24.
No
Were all
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Are the copy

at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
Change the color balance/density

adjustment factory targets.
(SIM 63-11)
No
Yes
No
Were the
copy color balance and
density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
Yes
Make the factory color balance target

(when adjusting the copy color
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
No
Auto color balance adjustment

service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
Perform the initial setup of half tone

image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Press the SETUP key.
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.

Check the copy color balance and density.

Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)
No
Press the OK key.
*1
The number of
times is limited to
3 times
Cancel SIM 63-7.
Is the color balance/

density adjustment performed
for each copy mode ?
(Does the user request
that ?)
Yes
Are the
copy color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
Perform ADJ 22G copy color

balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode separately.
(SIM 46-10)
No
The copy color
balance and
density adjustment
completed.
Perform the printer color balance
adjustment.
*1: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density

cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
adjustment from the beginning again.
(3) Copy color balance and density check

(Note)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to execute the following jobs.
22-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)

(Normal document copy mode)
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)

forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Method)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and a copy

of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11), and check
that they are proper.
(1) Note before adjustment
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/11). Set the copy density level to "3" in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
2)
Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of

the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user

adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
(2) Adjustment procedures
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
1)
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density

To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ).
Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual).
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user

adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ)]
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is
slightly copied.
1
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

3
10
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
NOTE:
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

3
10
Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or

UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

2)
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11)]

In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.

The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
TEST
OC
(Color copy)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
#1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18:
#19:
The densities of patches 1 6 of

each color are properly balanced.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
5, #20:
8,
4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89
G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89
B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
DSPF
OC
1/2
NOTE:
2)
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by

sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03

OC
22-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)

(DSPF document copy mode)
#1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18:
#19:
5, #20:
8,
4, #22: 2, #:24: 2

C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89
G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89
B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4

(1) Note before adjustment
1)
2)
Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the SPF scanning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
3)
DSPF
1/2
OC
When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the

selected color is displayed.
TEST
If they are dirty, clean them.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
OC
NOTE:
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.
#1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18:
#19:
5, #20:
2, #:24:
8,
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12:
M#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
G#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12:
Y#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
B#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12:
4)
4, #22:
DSPF
1/2
OC
When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color

automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.63-03
CLOSE
(2) Adjustment procedures

1)
SET THE CHART ON DSPF AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray.
EXECUTE
5)
1/1
Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto

adjustment is executed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.63-03
CLOSE

NOW CHART PATCH READING...
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
EXECUTE
1/1
6)
After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed

in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is displayed.

When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the
sub number entry screen.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 4624 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24

is used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program

mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
SCANNER MOTOR IS NOT READY
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to

reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
EXECUTE
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the

machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
1/1
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the

serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error

patch numbers are displayed.
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial
screen. (The previous value is displayed)
TEST
b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
SAMPRING DATA UNFIT

#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
RESULT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
SCANNER
COLOR
1)
The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2)
The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly.
3)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4)
Before execution of the image quality check and the image

quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following corrections forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
1/1
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)
TEST
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully

understood.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
1)
BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
COMPLETE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTIONAND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11"
17" SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
EXECUTE
RESULT
1/1
22-C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically

selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
5)
Press [REPEAT] key.

The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is displayed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24

CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
, PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
OK
REPEAT
6)

TEST
4)
Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
TEST
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
7)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the

procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
8)
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE

THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
,
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically performed,

and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
*LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
9)
Press [OK] key.

TEST
FACTORY
SERVICE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
EXECUTE
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed

to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24

,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to determine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9).
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depending on the machine status.
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
REPEAT
OK
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
NOTE:
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
TEST

COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be

selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
CLOSE
10) Check the color balance and density.

There are three methods to check the color balance and the
density.
(Method 1)
11) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch

image is within the following specifications.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.44-26
CLOSE
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
Fig. 1 PG image
Low density
High density
EXECUTE
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
C
Bk
(Normal end (Auto transition))

A
O Max
TEST
SIMULATION NO.44-26
CLOSE
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
1) The max. density

section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
EXECUTE
1/1
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
Patch B may not be copied.

Patch A must not be copied.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.44-26
CLOSE
(Method 2)
[S_VALUE]
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21

and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
Low density
#1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
High density
Y
M
EXECUTE
1/1
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
A
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
O Max
1) The max. density


12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the

Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures.
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
(Method 3)
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance
and density check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
22D).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
22D).
14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)

(SIM44-26)
15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
Repeat the procedures 13) 15) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified
level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
cause.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 22D) (Manual
adjustment).
22-D Copy color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
2)

selected.)
3)
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color

balance is satisfactory.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is

replaced.
If not, execute the following procedures.
* When the CCD is replaced.

Low density
High density
Bk
a. General
CMY
mixed
color
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to

adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required.
O Max
1) The max. density


In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.

not be reversed.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)

level.
1)
The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2)
The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly.
3)
Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document

table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
4)
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a

request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
5)
Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment,

be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image
forming section to the optimum state.
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
1)
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A:
XXX
245
755
A : 500
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high

and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
EXECUTE
6)
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
7)
Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
or self print end
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
A:
XXX
245
755
A : 400
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
TEST
SIMULATION NO.44-21
CLOSE
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK

TEST

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST

RESULT
RESULT
COMPLETE
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
RESULT
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
9)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21

RESULT
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the specified range.
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times.

RESULT
EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.

This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 22D (Color balance adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
When ADJ 22C (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started.
8)
Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.

(Forcible execution)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
EXECUTE
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
There are following three kinds of the target.

Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 46-21).

RESULT
COMPLETE

RESULT
EXECUTE

* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Kind
Factory color
balance
(gamma) target
Service color
balance
(gamma) target
User color
balance
(gamma) target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired level.
In advance, the users unique color balance must
be registered as the service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is changed,
this color balance target is also changed
accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3)

target (DEF1)
Service color balance

target

target (one of DEF1 3)

target (Unique)


target
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment

target
Factory setting
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the

optional color balance, and
use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Execute SIM 63-8.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color balance target (DEF2)
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
+a*
Direction
of Red
Direction
of Green
DEF1
Factory color balance target

(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Color balance with emphasis on color

reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3
Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Default
Direction of Blue


SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered

immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1)
Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual

adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
2)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-07
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE

#B:
91,
#G:
28935,
#L: 169731,
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#M: 195950,
#N: 201249,
#E:
5822,
#J: 122678,
#F:
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the

color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
8600
#K: 151198
#:O: 207112
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
1)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-08
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
1/1
SETUP
3)
Press [SETUP] key.
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly

adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 22D) on the document
table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
5)

TEST
ARE
SURE?
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
YES
NO
EXECUTE
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
22-E Copy density adjustment (Each color copy

mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
1)
CLOSE
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP SERVICE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-01
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[COPY]
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE].
A : 50
AUTO
XX
B : 50
TEXT
99
C : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
E : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
F : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
G : 50
MAP
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image

(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
H : 50
LIGHT
I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
K : 50
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
L : 50
TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT)
A:
1
EXECUTE
6)
YOU
TEST
CLOSE
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE

OK
10-key
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-01
EXECUTE
A : 45
AUTO
XX
B : 50
TEXT
99
C : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
E : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
F : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
G : 50
MAP
Press [OK] key.
H : 50
LIGHT
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
K : 50
L : 50
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
7)
A:
1
OK
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item (Copy mode)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Q
R
S
T
U
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Adjustment
value range
1 99
1 99
1 99
1)
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Light document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
1 99
50
1 99
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A:
1
A : 50
AUTO1
XX
B : 50
AUTO2
99
C : 50
TEXT
D : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
E : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
F : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
G : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50
MAP
I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
K : 50
L : 50
LIGHT
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
OK
10-key
OK
Text/Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 99
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph (Color
tone enhancement)
1 99
Map (Color tone

enhancement)
Single color
Single color (Copy
document)
Two-color (Red/
Black) copy
Two-color (Red/
Black) copy (Copy
document)
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
TEST
A:
50
1 99
A : 45
AUTO1
XX
B : 50
AUTO2
99
C : 50
TEXT
D : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
E : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
F : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
G : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50
MAP
I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
K : 50
L : 50
LIGHT
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
1 99
50
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
OK
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Adjustment
value range
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Test/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
1 99
50
1 99
50
Display/Item (Copy mode)
3)
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
A
B
C
D
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
E
F
G
H
I
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the

normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Auto 1
Auto 2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
22-F Copy density adjustment (Each

monochrome copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
adjust)
3)
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.

Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the

normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally

individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.

M
22-G Copy color balance adjustment (Color

balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not
required)
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
3)
Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color

key.
4)
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll

key.

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
1)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
5)
EXECUTE
A:
XXX
245
755
A : 500
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H: 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
EXECUTE
22-H Monochrome copy density adjustment

(Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
not required)
OK
OK

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
XXX
245
755
A : 300
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H: 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12

This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
or end of print
TEST
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.
10-key
A:
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
A:
XXX
245
755
A : 300
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H: 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500

printed out.
TEST
Default value
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected

with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
density point can be adjusted collectively.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
Adjustment
value range
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
1/1
TEXT
TEST
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
EXECUTE
OK
1)

TEST
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is

required in the following cases.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
A:
XXX
373
627

ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG

A : 500
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
1)
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP

F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
A:
1
99
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
EXECUTE
TEST
XX
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or self print end
A : 50
BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
B : 50
BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C : 50
COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D : 50
COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
E : 50
ED TEXT (SLOPE)
F : 50
ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
OK
OK
10-key
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
A:
XXX
373
627
A : 450
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
F : 500
G : 500
;
;
;
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
A:
XX
1
POINT5
99
A : 80
BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
B : 50
C : 50
COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D : 50
E : 50
ED TEXT (SLOPE)
F : 50
ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
POINT6
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
OK
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll

key.
3)
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
printed out.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a cop and check it.
22-I Gamma/density adjustment in the text

image edge section (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
2)
Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
B
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
3)
Content
Black text edge area
engine J curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Black text edge area
coefficient (density) setting
Color text edge area
Color text edge area
Error diffusion edge area
Error diffusion edge area
Adjustment
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
The black text edge/color text edge adjustment is enabled only in

the Text/Printed Photo mode and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the

image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
The error diffusion edge adjustment is enabled only in the 2-color

copy mode.
4)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
6)
Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual),

and check the copy.
5)
Press [OK] key.
6)
Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
7)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27

mode and change the adjustment value.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode

and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures
until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
22-J Copy color balance adjustment (Single

color copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
color.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
22-K Auto color balance adjustment by the user

(Copy color balance auto adjustment
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.

a. Adjustment procedures
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP

A:
A:
XXX
0
255
RED
B : 255
GREEN
C : 255
BLUE

1)
D:
YELLOW
E:
MAGENTA
F : 255
CYAN

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION

A:
A:
0
C
(1:YES 0:NO)
X
1
OK
10-key
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
A:
XXX
0
255
A : 255
RED
B : 255
GREEN
C : 255
BLUE
OK
10-key
OK
D:
YELLOW
E:
MAGENTA
F : 255
CYAN
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53

A:
A:
0
C
Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3)
Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
4)
A
B
C
D
E
F
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
Adjustment
value
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
(1:YES 0:NO)
OK
2)
Display/Item
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
OK
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
1)
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).

TEST
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).

3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-33
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not displayed in the user program mode.
A:
X
0
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))

Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
4DIGIT UNDER)
A: 7
THCLMK_1
B: 2
THCLBK_1
C: 0
ACSMSK_1
D: 7
THCLMK_2
E: 2
THCLBK_2
F:
ACSMSK_2
G: 7
THCLMK_3
H: 2
THCLBK_3
1)
Enter the system setting mode.
I:
ACSMSK_3
2)
Enter the copy setting mode.
J:
THCLMK_4
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
K: 2
THCLBK_4
4)
BACK
System settings
2)
Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key.
3)
Select the setting mode with the scroll key.

Display/Item
COLOR
AE

5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
Black
Content
SW_
MODE1
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE2
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE3
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE4
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE5
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE6
ON
OFF
G SW_
MODE7
ON
OFF
Yellow
Red
Blue
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment

is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
TH_MAX_
MONO
TH_MAX_
COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_
SCR1
SW_MODE_
SCR2
22-L Background process condition setting in

the color auto copy mode
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment
value, this adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the user request for the adjustment.
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of
the background depending on the document image kind and state.
The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode.
NEXT
M SW_MODE_
MIX
Auto mode: Text

document
background
detection
Auto mode: Text
mesh document
background
detection
Auto mode: Texton-mesh
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Mesh
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Photo
document
background
detection
Auto mode: text
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Other
document
background
detection
Monochrome
background
detection
threshold value
Color background
detection
threshold value
Newspaper
background
forcible delete
switch
Mesh area
background
judgment switch
Mesh area
background delete
select switch
Auto other
document
background
detection switch
OK
Adjustment
range
Default
value
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0 32
17
0 32
17
01
13
01
12
Display/Item
COLOR
AE
SW_HOSEI
O AE
ON
COLOR OFF
TABLE
P BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (OC)
Q BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (RSPF)
R
BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (DSPF
SIDE1)
BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (DSPF
SIDE2)
BG_REMOVE_
ADJ
TH_MODE_
SCR
TH_SITAJI_
SCR
Content
Correction table
correction
Selection of color
correction table in
color AE
Background
removal level
change (OC)
Background
removal level
change (RSPF)
Background
removal level
change (DSPF
front surface)
Background
removal level
change (DSPF
back surface)
Background
judgment
correction value
Mesh ratio
threshold value
Background mesh
threshold value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
08
(4 +4)
01
4
1
17
Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):

Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
Increase the set value.
To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
Decrease the set value.
Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
key to save the entered value to the memory.
17
17
17
0 100
0 10000
3000
0 10000
3000
(NOTE)
Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
item J (SW_NEWS) only.
Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
market. Set them to the default values.
22-M Color document identification level (ACS

operation) setting
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed
from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following
cases.
Set item A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7):
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function

for various kinds of documents.
* When the user requests for the adjustment.
When the value of the set item corresponding to the document

kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the document kind is enabled.
To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to
OFF (0).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a

document.
The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the
device and this setting.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a monochrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
color auto copy mode.
1)

TEST
Set to the range of 0 16.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-33
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase

the set value.
4DIGIT UNDER)
A: 7
THCLMK_1
B: 2
THCLBK_1
C: 0
ACSMSK_1
D: 7
THCLMK_2
E: 2
THCLBK_2
Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
F:
ACSMSK_2
Used to set the density level at which the background delete

function is enabled for color background documents.
G: 7
THCLMK_3
H: 2
THCLBK_3
I:
ACSMSK_3
J:
THCLMK_4
K: 2
THCLBK_4
A:
To delete the background of dark-density documents:

X
0
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
Set to the range of 0 16.

To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value.
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
BACK
NEXT
OK
2)
Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
Set item J (SW_NEWS):
3)
Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome)

background delete function.
When a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the set value.
It is not affected by the set item H.

For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid.
When a color document is not recognized as a color document, decrease the set value.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment reference value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
Large hue area
Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
Area level 5
ACS color judgment setting
Area level 4
Area level 3
Area level 2
Area level 1
Can be set optionally. About 10mm 5mm About 5mm 5mm About 3mm 4mm About 1mm 3mm
(30000 pixel)
(30000 pixel or more)
(15000 pixel)
(7000 pixel)
(1875 pixel)
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Strong hue
Weak hue
Hue level 5
Hue level 4
Hue level 3
Hue level 2
C
C
B
A
Hue level 1
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set
value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome]
1m2m3o4o5
[Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)

Weak hue [Monochrome] l [Color] Strong hue
XC
XB
XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting

(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.
Large hue area
Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting
Area level 5
Area level 4
Area level 3
Area level 2
Area level 1
Can be set optionally. About 10mm 5mm About 5mm 5mm About 3mm 4mm About 1mm 3mm
(1875 pixel)
(30000 pixel)
(30000 pixel or more)
(15000 pixel)
(7000 pixel)
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Strong hue
Hue level 5
Hue level 4
Hue level 3
Weak hue
Hue level 2
Hue level 1
(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of

device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the market. Set it to the default value.
ADJ 23 Printer color balance/density

adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been completed properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color
balance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures
Printer color balance/density adjustment
START
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5.)
Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance

check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.
Are the copy

at satisfactory
levels?
No
Yes
(to Next page)
(to Next page)
Perform ADJ 23A printer color balance/

density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select

A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
3
Can the
printer color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
No
Set the adjustment pattern on the

original table, select the FACTORY
mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
No
Yes
4
Is PCL mode
supported?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 23B

printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25)
Yes
Yes
No
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black.
No

Set the adjustment pattern on the

original table, and press the
EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM 67-24.
No
Are
the color
balance and density at
the satisfactory
levels?
Yes
Are the printer
at satisfactory
levels?
Were
all the three kinds
of color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Yes
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Yes
No
No
Change the color balance/
density adjustment factory
targets. (SIM 67-26)
Were the
printer color balance
and density
customized?
Can be
repeated
max. 3 times.
Use SIM 67-25 to print

the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance

check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black./Check the
printer color balance and density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
No
Yes
Use SIM 67-25 to print

the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black./Check the
printer color balance
and density.
(Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5)
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Is the
repeated?
Make the factory printer balance target

(when adjusting the printer color
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM67-28)
Press the SETUP key.
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Set the color patch image (adjustment

pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Yes
Check the printer color balance/density.

(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Press the OK key.

Are the
printer color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
Cancel SIM 67-27.
No
Yes
Is the printer
color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
The printer color

balance and density
adjustment completed.
No
(3) Printer color balance/density check

(Note)
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
a. When the PCL mode is supported:
23-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
a. General
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust

the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(Procedure)
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments

of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes of the automatic color balance
adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24

I used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program

is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
1)
2)
3)

state.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed

properly.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
1)

TEST
Fig. 1 PG image
PRINTER CALIBRATION
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Low density
High density
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.

Y
17" SIZE PAPER
C
Bk
EXECUTE
A
O Max
1) The max. density

2)

selected.)

3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed

on the document table.
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper

so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.

For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 67-27.
5)
Press [REPEAT] key.

The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is displayed.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24

PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
OK
REPEAT
6)

TEST
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color

balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" x 17" SIZE PAPER

EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
7)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the

procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
8)

The print color balance adjustment is automatically performed,

and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
,
9)
Press [OK] key.

TEST
FACTORY
SERVICE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24

The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed

to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to determine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9).
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depending on the machine status.
Remark:
REPEAT
OK
NOTE:
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24

COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
QUIT
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color

balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-26.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
THIS
MODE.
CLOSE
10) Check the color balance and density.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
23B).
There are two methods.

(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
Fig. 1 PG image
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the

auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
23B).
11) Cancel SIM 67-25.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low density
High density
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
12) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
M
C
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
Bk

A
O Max
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
1) The max. density


EXECUTE

not be reversed.

level.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

[S_VALUE]
(Method 2)
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25

and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137

#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low density
High density
EXECUTE
1/1
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
TEST
A
O Max
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

[S_VALUE]
1) The max. density


(Method 3)
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
and the print test pattern is printed out.
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the procedures from 1).
EXECUTE
1/1
13) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.

14) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed out.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B).
23-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
1)

TEST
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.

Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density
adjustment.
A:
* After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
XX
1
99
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
(CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain
the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when
the user requests to change (customize) the color balance.
In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the
above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
specified result.
When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
A : 50
POINT1
B : 50
POINT2
C : 50
POINT3
D : 50
POINT4
E : 50
POINT5
F : 50
POINT6
G : 50
POINT7
H : 50
POINT8
I : 50
POINT9
J : 50
POINT10
K : 50
POINT11
L : 50
POINT12
The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed

properly.
2)
When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the

document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
patch image adjustment pattern.
3)
4)
EXECUTE
OK
10-key
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
XX
1
99

state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
A : 67
POINT1
B : 50
POINT2
C : 50
POINT3
D : 50
POINT4
E : 50
POINT5
F : 50
POINT6
G : 50
POINT7
H : 50
POINT8
I : 50
POINT9
J : 50
POINT10
K : 50
POINT11
L : 50
POINT12
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or self print end

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
XX
1
2)
99
A : 67
POINT1
B : 50
POINT2
C : 50
POINT3
D : 50
POINT4
E : 50
POINT5
F : 50
POINT6
G : 50
POINT7
H : 50
POINT8
I : 50
POINT9
J : 50
POINT10
K : 50
POINT11
L : 50
POINT12
EXECUTE
OK

selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
3)
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired

color balance is obtained.
8)
If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.

PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low density
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
TEST
High density
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

M
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
EXECUTE
O Max
1) The max. density


TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

not be reversed.
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137

level.
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260

When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
EXECUTE
1/1
The adjustment value is set in the range of 1 99 (1 255).

When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26

[S_VALUE]

Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high

and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
6)
7)
EXECUTE
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each

process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
9)
Cancel SIM 67-25.
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
1/1
After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.

NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure cannot be used.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
the color balance as the service target.
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target

gamma setting)
Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
Kind
Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
There are following three kinds of the target.

Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
Service color
balance (gamma)
target
User color
balance (gamma)
target
User color balance (gamma) target

In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired
level. In advance, the users unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
target (DEF1)
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3)

target (DEF1)

target


target (Unique)


target

Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment

target
Factory setting
Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the

optional color balance, and
use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Execute SIM 67-28.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28

+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM67-28
Hue
Factory color balance target

(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction of Green
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1
Color balance with emphasis on color

reproduction (factory setting)
Default
DEF2
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3
Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Direction of Blue


SIM67-28
Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-28).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 67-26.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in

the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was

made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and

the purpose of registration)
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as

the service color balance target)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is

customized with SIM 67-25.
1)

required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual

adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
2)
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with

SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.

#B:
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
91,
#C
#G: 28935,
#H:
#L: 169731,
2944, #D:
54344,
3227,
#I: 86968,
#E:
5822, #F:
#J: 122678,
8600
#K: 151198
#M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it

from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
SETUP
1/1
3)
Press [SETUP] key.
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly

adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B) on the document
table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another

machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
5)
3)
Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with

SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target
data.
23-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user

(Printer color balance auto adjustment
a. General
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the printer color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-54.

NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
EXECUTE
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the

operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.

6)
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image

(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST

BASE:8800
#B:
227,
#C:
624,
#G:
3298,
#H:
18951,
#L: 184155,
#D:
#I:
#M: 189254,
908,
#E:
1249,
76117,
#J: 128495,
#N: 194377,
#:O: 197276
#F:
2074
#K: 165225
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-54
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER

A:
A:
K
REPEAT
OK
1/1
(1:YES 0:NO)
X
1
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
7)
OK
Press [OK] key.

The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the

color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 6726, be sure to execute this procedure.
1)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-28
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE
ARE YOU SURE?
2)
YES
NO
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
Remark:
This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
1)
Enter the system setting mode.
2)
Enter the printer setting mode.
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
4)
EXECUTE

ADJ 25 Document size sensor
System settings
adjustment
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
* When the document size sensor section is replaced.
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
Black

25-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
1)

TEST
Yellow
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-01
PD SENSOR CHECK
Red
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
Blue
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1/1
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment, the display returns to the original operation screen.
ADJ 24 Fusing paper guide position
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
32 r 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
adjustment
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
edge section.
1)
Loosen the fixing screw C.
2)
Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up

and down direction).
32+
-0.5mm
1.5mm
1.5mm
C
C
B
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.

Change the position depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction B).
1)
25-B Document size sensor sensitivity

adjustment
1)

TEST
Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
MAXPOSITION
PRESS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP

WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
EXECUTE
MAXPOSITION
ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST

SET AN A3-SIZE(11 17) COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE
,
AND WITH THE OC OPEND, TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
EXECUTE
TEST
EXECUTE
P1(A4)POSITION
Adjustment completed
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
Adjustment failed
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02

DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO- SENSOR
LEVEL
EXECUTE
IS
ADJUSTED.
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.
EXECUTE
TEST
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
PHOTO-SENSOR
ERROR
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
. COMPLETE
POSITION
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
2)
2)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
3)
Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press

[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 26 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal

display.

The maximum width position detection level of the manual

paper feed guide is recognized.
4)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5)

display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
7)
8)
9)
3)

display.

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4)
Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual

5)

The A4R width detection level is recognized.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
6)
Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7)

8)
Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual

9)

The minimum width detection level is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR"

display is highlighted.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the

"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

display.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are

saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ADJ 27 DSPF paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
ADJ 28 Touch panel coordinate setting

* When the operation panel is replaced.
* The paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The paper feed tray unit has been replaced.

1)
2)
Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.

* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
1)

TEST
SIMULATION NO.53-06
CLOSE
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT

TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
EXECUTE
2)
Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds

and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 29 Image loss, void area, image

off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 16/17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 19 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 20 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
6)
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
Display/Item
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT
ADJ
RESULT
DATA
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
PLEASE
ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
WAIT
EXECUTING
EXECUTE
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio
7)
Press [OK] key.

The adjustment result becomes valid.
AUTO
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
IMAGE
POSITION
ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
BK-MAG
TEST
POSITION
REPRINT
29-A Print image main scanning direction image

magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1)
IMAGE
NOW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
REPRINT
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
OK
29-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

1)
1/1
TEST
2)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the touch panel key.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel
key. (Any paper size will do.)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA

MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
1/1
2)
Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the touch panel key.
3)
Select [ALL] with the touch panel key.

TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
AUTO
POSITION
LEAD
4)
5)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
IMAGE
ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
OFFSET
ALL
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document

guide.
1/1
(NOTE)
2)
Select [OC ADJ] with the touch panel key.
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can

be executed individually.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel
key. (Any paper size will do.)
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are

executed simultaneously.
4)
MFT
IMAGE
POSITION
CS2
CS3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CS1
CS4
Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
AUTO
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
MFT
CS
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
5)
6)
1/1
4)
5)

guide.

guide.
6)

TEST
7)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT: SERVICE

PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE OC
The following items are automatically adjusted.
THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment

* Print image off-center adjustment
8)
Press [OK] key.

REPRINT
The following items are automatically adjusted.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
29-C Copy lead edge image reference position

adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
1)

TEST
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image

off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
7)
Press [OK] key.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE

OC
LEAD: ** (**)
OFFSET: **(**)
SUB**: (**)
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
REPRINT
1/1
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
OK
29-D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service

installation adjustment)
4)
Self-print of the SPF adjustment pattern is performed.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
NOW EXECUTING...

EXECUTE
5)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
This adjustment is used to adjust the DSPF (front/back) document

lead edge, off-center, sub operation magnification ratio.
1)
After completion of printing, the SPF adjustment start screen is

displayed.
PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE SPF

THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
Enter the simulation mode 50-28 to select [SPF ADJ].

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
REPRINT
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
EXECUTE
6)
Load the SPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and scanning of the SPF adjustment

pattern selected in step 2) is started.
1/1
2)
Select an adjustment item (front, back, both).
<List of adjustment items>

Item
Content
SIDE1
SPF adjustment front surface
SIDE2
SPF adjustment back surface
ALL
SPF adjustment front/back surface
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
SIDE1
SIDE2
TEST
ALL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE

PLEASE WAIT
NOW EXECUTING
1/1
3)
The display shows the tray select screen for printing the SPF
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for SPF adjustment printing.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28

MFT
CS1
CS2
REPRINT
EXECUTE
8)
When [ALL] is selected, load the SPF adjustment pattern on

the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back surface in the similar procedures.
9)
The adjustment result screen is displayed.

The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).
CS3
CS4
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
EXECUTE
SPF (SIDE1)
LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
SPF (SIDE2)
LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
1/1
REPRINT
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
OK
* When [REPRINT] key is pressed, the display returns to the

cassette select screen to allow self-print of the SPF adjustment pattern (front, back) again.
2)
3)
Select, [DSPF SHADING].
* When [RESCAN] key is pressed, the SPF adjustment pattern (front, back) is scanned again.
TEST
* When [RETRY] key is pressed, the adjustment value is not

saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu
screen.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CLOSE

SIMULATION COMPLETE
CLOSE
SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
* When [DATA] key is pressed, the data used in execution of

the adjustment are displayed.
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved in
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the end
screen.
SIMULATION NO.63-02
SHADING EXECUTION
OC SHADING
4)
DSPF SHADING
EXECUTE
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading

is started.
* When the operation is executed, the document is transported by about 25mm, and shading data are obtained during transport.
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
PLEASE PUSH CA KEY
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the

operation is interrupted.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is displayed.
1/1
<Descriptions of keys>
ADJ 30 Shading adjustment

1)
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other

than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
Open the lower door, and insert the white reference sheet
DSPF (PSHEP5668FCZZ). Close the lower door.
Display
OC
SHADING
DSPF
SHADING
Content
OC analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (SPF mode)
<Result display>
Display
COMPLETE
ERROR
INCOMPLETE
* When inserting the white reference sheet DSPF, insert it

straight along the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of
the white reference sheet DSPF comes at the root of the
actuator as shown in the mark {.
Content
Normal completion
Abnormal completion
Incomplete, interruption
MX-7000N
[7]
SIMULATION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improvements in servicing.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
Setting of the specifications and functions
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
Counters check, setting, clear
6)
Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data

check, clear
7)
Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data

transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the

operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1)
Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode

1)
Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON

o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON (Ready for input of a
main code of simulation)
2)
Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON
3)
Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected

item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1)
Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when
the machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode,
a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the
main power source.
Before entering the simulation mode, check to insure that neither
print data nor FAX data are receiving.
MX-7000N SIMULATION 7 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.

Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Standby for entry of

SIM code.
Enter the main code of
SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM
is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES
Standby for entry of SIM

sub code
YES
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
Is there a sub code ?

NO
Enter SIM sub code with

the 10-key.
Select the mode and the

item with the scroll key
and the item key.
Press the START button.
NO
YES
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
NO
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Press the EXECUTE button

and OK button.
The display is made according to

the selected some and the item.
YES
Data clear ?
NO

and OK button.
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?
NO
The changed content

is stored.
YES
Enter the new

setting and
;'5
adjustment values.
The simulation mode

is canceled.

and OK button.
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES

and OK button.
YES
Press the clear all key.
2. List of simulation codes

Main
1
Sub
1
13
14
15
16
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control
circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor in the scanning (read) section and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control
circuit.
Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the
control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic
document feeder unit and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder
unit and the control circuits.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the inserter
and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the inserter and the control
circuit.
Used to set the adjustment value of the inserter paper width detection level.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the large
capacity tray (LCC) and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray (LCC)
and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the clutch (LTRC) in the LCC and the
monitor.
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and
control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads (clutches and solenoids) in the
paper transport system and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the control
circuit.
Used to check the operations of the PTC and the MC cleaner.
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
Used to set a color in the color mode printing. (Used to check the print in the
color mode.)
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each
print mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
Used to check and adjust the operations of the main charger grid voltage in
each printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the
control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex
section and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operation of the load (motor) in the process section and
the related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no toner bottle installed.
Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the
control circuit.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/U2/LCC/PF" troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12, F3-22 (large capacity paper feed
tray, paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
17
21
Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.

Used to set the maintenance cycle.
2
5
2
1
2
3
2
3
10
30
31
32
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
6
8
9
1
6
9
2
3
10
Purpose
Operation test/Check
Section
Optical (Image scanning)
DSPF
DSPF
DSPF
Finisher
Adjustment
Finisher
Finisher
Inserter
Inserter
Setting (Adjustment)
Inserter
Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation panel
Fusing
Process
Paper transport/paper exit
Other
Process (Transfer)
Setting
Setting
Operation display
Other
Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Process (Developing)
Process (Charging)
Process (Transfer)
Duplex
Duplex
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)

LCC

Setting
MFPcnt PWB /
PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Main
22
Sub
1
2
3
4
5
6
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).

Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX
soft switch, counters).
Used to check the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan
(reading).
Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.
10
Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11
19
Used to check the use frequency of FAX (send/receive). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
Used to check the misfeed position in the DSPF and the number of misfeed
of each position. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, it may lead
to the decision for repair.)
Used to check the running time of the process section. (OPC drum, DV unit,
toner bottle).
Used to check each counter value related the network scanner.
90
Used to output the list of various set data.
Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to
repair.)
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed
and transport section.
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed
section.
Used to clear the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and scan
(reading).
The maintenance counter and the print counters of the transfer unit and the
fusing unit are cleared. (After completion of maintenance, the counters are
cleared.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, this
counter is cleared.)
Used to clear the copy counter value.
Used to clear the OPC drum counter value. (After replacement of the OPC
drum, this counter is cleared.)
Used to clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print
counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only when FAX is installed.)
Used to clear various counters in the scan mode related to image send.
Used to initialize the administrator password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
12
13
23
80
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
25
26
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the print count value in each section and operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number
of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each
position.
* The trouble position can be troubleshooted according to this data.
Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
10
15
30
31
1
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
output/Check
check
check
check
Other
check
check
check
check
check
check
Section
Paper feed, ADU, LCC
FAX
DSPF
check
check
check
check
Paper feed, transport
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Used to make the initial setting of the toner density when replacing
developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Setting
Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size
in software.)
Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Setting must be made according to
the auditor use conditions.)
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance
counter.
Used to set the specifications according to the destination. (Paper, fixed
magnification ratios, etc.)
Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the
Japan and the UK versions.)
Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe
safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Setting
Process (Developing
section)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Paper feed
Setting
Auditor
3
5
6
10
18
30
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Main
26
Sub
35
38
41
49
50
52
53
54
65
67
69
27
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
30
1
2
33
40
2
7
12
1
41
2
3
43
1
4
20
21
22
23
24
31
32
Function (Purpose)
Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same
trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one
trouble and display as several series of troubles.
Used to set whether printing is continued or stopped when the developer life
is expired or when the fusing wed ends.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select
function (AMS) in the center binding mode.
Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and white highlight function and the
2-color/Single display function.
Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion paper, cover, etc.) is counted
or not.
Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration.
Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Used to set the summer time timing and the time zone.
Used to set the display of spare toner preparation and near end when the
toner quantity reaches 25%.
Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC
Used to set the FSS function (sender registration number, host server
telephone number).
Used to set the FSS function (initial, call, toner order automatic send).
Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to
check the machine tag No.)
Used to set the FSS function (manual service call).
Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert call).
Paper transport time between sensors / Gain adjustment retry number
setting
Used to clear the history information of trouble prediction
Used to check the serial communication retry number history and the
scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
Used to check the error history of high density, half tone process control,
and automatic registration adjustment.
Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors.
Used to set the FSS function connection mode. (Only "Disable o Enable" is
allowed.)
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than
the paper feed section and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control
circuit.
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector detection level adjustment
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray width detection level.
Used to perform the tray 3 paper width detection level adjustment.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control
circuit.
Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control
circuit.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
Used to perform the fusing temperature setup 2 in each operation mode.
(Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting in each mode (SIM 43-1).
Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper
mode.
Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1
and 43-4.
Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor and the
control circuit.
Used to set the compulsory operation of fusing web cleaning at job end.
Purpose
Section
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data clear
Other
Other
Other
Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Setting
Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Paper feed
Paper feed
Paper feed
Main
44
Sub
1
Function (Purpose)
Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming
(process) section.
2
4
Image density sensor gain adjustment

Used to set the target density level in the image density correction.
6
9
Used to execute the high density process correction compulsorily.

Used to check data of correction results in the image forming section.
12
Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image
density correction.
(Do not use in the market.)
13
14
Used to adjust the color image sensor.

Used to check the output level of the temperature/humidity sensor.
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment, setting, operation data
check
16
21
22

Adjustment/Setting
54
Used to check the toner density control data.

Used to set the half tone process control.
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone
image forming section correction (process correction).
Used to display the process control result.
Used to set the initial conditions of the process control half tone correction.
Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily.
Used to clear the half tone process correction value.
Used to set the process control execution timing.
Used to select the half tone correction during a job.
Used to adjust the phase of the photoconductor.
Used to perform the image density correction setting.
Used to check installation of the developing unit and the current state.
Used to check the image density level of each color toner patch in 1-pixel
half tone correction.
The 1-pixel half tone correction result is displayed.
56
The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed compulsorily.
57
The 1-pixel half tone correction value is cleared.
1
2
Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.

4
5
Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode.

Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode.
8
9
10
16
Used to adjust the scanner color balance RGB.

Used to adjust the engine color balance manually.
Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (monochrome,
all modes).
Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode.
Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (color, all
modes).
Used to perform the half tone highest density correction.
Used to perform the engine half tone auto density adjustment.
Used to perform the color balance adjustment in the single color mode.
Used to perform the default setting of color balance in the single color mode.
Used to perform the engine/gamma calculation formula coefficient setting.
Used to check Auto exposure/Document auto recognition/Line number
recognition (color mode).
Used to perform the color auto mode adjustment.
2-color (red/black) copy adjustment
Used to perform the black/white image generation adjustment.
Used to perform the image send sharpness adjustment.
Used to perform the collective adjustment of all the FAX exposure modes.
Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (normal character).
Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (small character).
Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (fine).
Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment. (Super fine)
Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (600dpi).
Used to perform the JPEG compression rate setting in copying and
scanning.
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
37
43
52
46
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
Purpose
Setting
Adjustment/Setting
(Do not use this function unless
specially required.)
Adjustment

Adjustment/Setting
Data clear
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
(This simulation should not be
executed unless specially required.)
Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Adjustment (Monochrome copy
mode)
Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Adjustment (Monochrome scanner
mode)
Adjustment (DSPF mode)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setting
(This simulation should not be used
unless specially required.)
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Section
Cleaning)
Process
Cleaning)
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing)
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing)
Process
Process
Process
Main
48
Sub
1
6
7
8
1
Function (Purpose)
Used to perform the copy magnification ratio (main scanning, sub scanning
direction) adjustment.
Used to perform the copy magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning
direction). When the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio is
adjusted with SIM 48-1 and a satisfactory copy image is not obtained when
copying by specifying a different copy magnification ratio, perform this
adjustment.
Used to perform the rotation speed adjustment of each motor.
Used to perform the firmware update.
Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-5 and SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document table mode))
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-1. This simulation. However, is simpler.)
Printer print lead edge adjustment
Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
Used to adjust the print image off-center position. (Adjustment is made
separately for each paper feed section.)
Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The
adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
Used to perform the main scanning direction manual registration adjustment.
Used to perform the sub scanning direction manual registration adjustment.
Used to perform the main/sub scanning auto registration adjustment.
Used to display the auto registration adjustment result (SIM 50-22).
Used to perform the image loss adjustment of the scanned image in the
FAX or scanner mode
Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK main scanning direction
magnification ration correction, the DSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment.
Used to perform the transfer voltage and the separation bias voltage ON/OF
timing adjustment.
Used to perform the paper contact pressure adjustment for each section
resist roller (main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper fed, DSPF paper
feed). (When there is a considerable fluctuation in the print image position
on print paper or a paper jam occurs, this adjustment is required.)
Used to perform the DSPF size width detection level adjustment.
Used to perform the DSPF size width adjustment value setting.
Used to perform the DSPF document scanning start position adjustment.
Used to perform the engine control operation specification setting.
Used to perform the scanner control operation specification setting.
Used to perform the controller operation specification setting.
56
1
2
60
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
6
7
8
Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.)

Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) in the
EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the main unit into the USB memory
and to transfer the data.
Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP control (SDRAM).
Used to set the onboard SDRAM.
Used to check the polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection.
Used to set the laser power. (for printer FIERY)
Used to set the laser power.
Used to perform self printing of the LSU position adjustment pattern.
Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the operation manual area.)
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation
manual area)
Used to delete the job log data.
Used to delete the document filing data.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
49
50
6
1
3
1
5
6
10
12
20
21
22
24
27
28
51
1
2
53
55
61
62
10
11
12
13
Purpose
Section
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner section
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
DSPF
Adjustment
DSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Backup
Backup
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Data clear
Data clear
Setting
LSU
Main
63
Sub
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
65
1
2
66
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
25
26
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the shading correction result.
Used to perform shading.
Used to perform scanner color balance and color coefficient auto
adjustment.
Used to perform the scanner color balance and the color coefficient auto
adjustment.
Used to perform the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern setting.
Used to perform the auto density setting of the engine auto adjustment
scanner target value. (Servicing)
Used to perform the initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value. (Servicing)
Used to set the reference scanner target value for the engine auto density
adjustment.
Used to perform the self print. (Color mode)
Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Used to perform self print (monochrome mode).
Used to perform the printer self print.
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not displayed.
Used to perform the printer self print (PCL).
Used to perform the printer self print (PS).
Used to perform the touch panel (LCD display) detection position
adjustment.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display) detection position adjustment
result.
Used to check the operation panel key input.
Used to change and check the soft switch setting.
Used to clear the soft switch and set the default value.
Used to check the operation (read/write) of the FAX PWB memory.
Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
Used to print the confidential pass code.
Used to output the image memory data (memory send and receive).
* The confidential receive contents are also outputted.
Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation check) of the
various audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation) of various
audio signals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
Used to clear all the data (memory receive and send) of the image memory.
* The confidential receive data are cleared simultaneously.
Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3
mode 300bps. Send level: MAX
Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3
mode 300bps. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
Used to set the number for the FAX dial signal output test. (In the dial signal
output test with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set with this simulation is
outputted.)
Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (10PPS) and to
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM66-13 is outputted.)
Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (20PPS) and to
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial
mode. (The signal of the dial number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
The send level can be set to an optional level.
mode. Send level: MAX
mode. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
Used to backup the address book data stored in the HDD. (Backup to the
Flash ROM)
Used to transfer the address book data stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer
to HDD)
Used to print information abut FAX (various registrations, communication
management, file management, system errors, protocols).
Used to clear the FAST memory data.
Used to register a FAX number for MODEM dial-in.
Used to register an external telephone number for MODEM dial-in.
Purpose
check
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setting
Section
Scanner
Scanner
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment
Operation panel section
Operation check/test
Setting
Data clear
Operation test, check
Operation check, test
FAX
FAX
FAX
User data output, check

FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
Data clear
FAX
FAX
FAX
Setting
FAX
Setting/Operation test, check
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
Backup
Data transfer
Adjustment, setting, operation data
check
Clear
Setting
Setting
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
Main
66
Sub
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
39
42
43
67
17
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
33
Function (Purpose)
Used to clear the data related to the address book (one-touch registration,
FTP/ Desktop extension, group extension, program registration, interface
memory box, meta data, Inbound Routing, Document Admin table).
Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU status.
Used to set the TEL/LIU output port.
Used to check the received data (fixed data) from the line.
Used to detect the line signals (BUSY TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF).
Used to measure the communication time of the send test image data.
Used to perform the interface check between the MFP controller and the
MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
Used to set the destination.
Used to rewrite the power control program again to the FAX BOX.
Used to write the adjustment value of the power control program to the FAX
BOX.
Used to set the printer controller memory clear and default value.
Used to perform the printer setting of auto color calibration.
Used to perform the manual correction setting of the printer engine color
balance.
Used to perform the reference scanner target value setting of the printer
engine auto density adjustment.
Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine
auto density adjustment.
Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine
auto adjustment.
Used to perform delivery setting of the main unit calibration data and the
process correction data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Used to perform the screen/color select function setting for each object.
Used to perform the gamma correction (for PCL) between printer screens.
Used to perform gamma correction (for GDI) between printer screens.
Purpose
Section
Data clear

Operation check
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
Setting
Setting
Setting
FAX
FAX
FAX
Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Data clear
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Adjustment/Setting
3. Details of simulation
1-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control circuit.
1-1
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control circuit.
Section
1)
Select the operation mode and the magnification ratio with the
touch panel key.
2)

The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode.
Operation/Procedure
1)
touch panel key.
2)

The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode.
Key
display
50
100
200
TEST
Scan
magnification ratio
50%
100%
200%
Selectable magnification
ratios
Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
Black and white (High speed):
100%, 200%
Black and white (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
Key
display
50
100
200
TEST
Scan
magnification ratio
50%
100%
200%
Default
value
100%
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-05
SCANNER CHECK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-01
ratios
Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
100%, 200%
50%, 100%, 200%
25
100
50
ZOOM
300
150
200
100
400
%
SCANNER CHECK
400
25
100
50
ZOOM
300
100
150
200
BLACK(FAST)
COLOR
BLACK(SLOW)
EXECUTE
2
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(SLOW)
COLOR
EXECUTE
2-1
Purpose
1-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor in

the scanning (read) section and the related
circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.

* When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home
position.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.01-02
CLOSE
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the control
circuit.
1)
touch panel key.
2)

The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit operations according to the operation mode.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Key
display
50
100
200
MHPS
DSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Scan
magnification ratio
50%
100%
200%
ratios
Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
100%, 200%
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-01
DSPF AGING
25
1/1
50
100
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(SLOW)
100
400
%
ZOOM
300
150
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
2-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and the control circuits.
TEST

DSPF No. 1 resist roller break clutch
DSPF transport clutch
Stamp solenoid (only when installed)
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted.
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SLCOV
SPED1
SPED2
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
SPRDMD
SPLS1
SPLS2
STLD
STUD
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
DSPF installation detection

DSPF open/close detection
DSPF cover SW
DSPF lower door open/close detection
DSPF document empty detection
DSPF document detection
DSPF document pass detection 1
DSPF paper exit detection
DSPF random feed paper size detection
DSPF document length detection short
DSPF document length detection long
DSPF document tray lower limit detection
DSPF document tray upper limit detection
DSPF stamp unit installation detection
DSPF guide plate position
DSPF document detection volume output
SOCD
SCOV
SLCOV
SPED1
SPED2
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
SPRDMD
SPLS1
SPLS2
STLD
STUD
STMPU
STRRC
STRRBC
STRC
STMPS
1/1
Section
Finisher

<4K finisher>
DSPF
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
2)

The selected load is operated.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.
DSPF lift motor
DSPF fan motor
DSPF resist roller clutch
DSPF resist roller break clutch
SRRBC
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads

in the automatic document feeder unit and
the control circuits.
SPUM
SPFM
SPOM
SLUM
SPFFAN
SPFC
SRRC
SRRBC
SPFC
SRRC
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and

detector in the finisher and the control circuits.
2-3
Section
SLUM
3-2
1/1
Purpose
SPOM
SPFFAN
Purpose
DSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN : **** SWD_AD : ***

SSET
SPFM
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-02
SPUM
EXECUTE
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-03
DSPF OUTPUT CHECK
DSPF
Section
STRRC
STRRBC
STRC
STMPS
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FAED1
FAED2
FAED3
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FBED1
FBED2
FCCD
FSLD1
FPDD1
FSLD2
FASHPD
FSWHPD
FSWOPD
FSTPD
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSTD
FFANLK
FSJOGD
FSAD
FSSUC
FSHTD
FCD
FFDD
F24V
FPSW1
FPSW2
FPSW3
Interface transport unit entry port detection

Interface transport unit exit port detection
Interface transport unit cover detection
Entry port paper detection
Tray 1 area detection 1
Alignment plate HP detection front
Alignment plate HP detection rear
Tray 1 paper detection
Tray 2 paper detection
Tray approaching detection
Tray 1 paper surface detection
Tray 2 paper surface detection
Rear edge assist HP detection
Oscillation guide HP detection
Oscillation guide open detection
Staple tray paper detection
Staple drive HP detection
Staple shift HP detection
Staple empty detection
Needle lead edge position detection
Fan motor lock detection
Stapler alignment interference detection
Staple safety SW
Saddle staple unit detection
Shutter open detection
Upper door open detection
Front cover open detection
24V output interruption detection
PUSHSW1 detection
PUSHSW2 detection
PUSHSW3 detection
FAED21
FAED22
FAED23

TEST
<4K finisher DIPSW>

FDSW1
FDSW2
FDSW3
FDSW4
FDSW5
FDSW6
FDSW7
FDSW8
DIPSW1 detection
DIPSW2 detection
DIPSW3 detection
DIPSW4 detection
DIPSW5 detection
DIPSW6 detection
DIPSW7 detection
DIPSW8 detection
FSPPHPC
FSLGTC
FSINDD
FSEJDD
FSINDSW
FSFDSW
FSEJDSW
FSPSW1
FSBHPC
Saddle entry port paper detection

Saddle paper exit detection
Saddle tray paper detection
Saddle paper detection 1
Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
Paper pushing plate HP detection
Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
Paper folding motor lock detection
Paper folding HP detection
Paper positioning plate HP detection
Paper positioning plate paper detection
Alignment plate HP detection
Stitcher storage detection
Vertical path paper detection
Semi-circular roller phase detection
Guide HP detection
Stitch operation HP detection 1
Stitch operation HP detection 2
Saddle needle presence detection 1
Saddle needle presence detection 2
Alignment HP sensor connector connection detection
Paper folding HP sensor connector connection detection
Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection
Front door open/close sensor connector connection
detection
Paper positioning plate HP sensor connector connection
detection
Paper pushing plate lead edge sensor connector
connection detection
Inlet port cover open detection
Paper exit cover open detection
Saddle inlet port door detection
Front door open detection SW
Paper exit door open detection SW
S-PUSHSW detection
Paper pushing plate HP sensor connector connection
detection
S-DIPSW1 detection
S-DIPSW2 detection
S-DIPSW3 detection
S-DIPSW4 detection
S-DIPSW5 detection
S-DIPSW6 detection
S-DIPSW7 detection
S-DIPSW8 detection
<4K finisher/4K saddle finisher punch unit>

FPE
FPUC
FPHPD
FPSHPD
FPFDD
FPDD
FPUDSW
FJPDD
FED
FAED2
FAED3
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FBED1
FBED2
FCCD
FSLD1
FPDD1
FSLD2
FASHPD
FSWHPD
FSWOPD
FSTPD
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSTD
FFANLK
FSJOGD
FSAD
FSSUC
FSHTD
FCD
FFDD
F24V
FPSW1
FPSW2
FPSW3
FAED21
FAED22
1/1
3-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in

the finisher and the control circuit.
Section
Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

<4K finisher>
FINRPS
FJPM
FJFM
FFM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FTLM1
FTLM2
FFSM
FSWM
FASM
FINRRS
FBRRS
FFDRRS
FBES
FSHC
FAORC
Entry port reverse path solenoid

Interface transport motor
Interface transport fan motor
Entry port transport motor
Bundle paper exit motor
Alignment motor front
Alignment motor rear
Staple shift motor
Tray 1 lift motor
Tray 2 lift motor
Staple motor
Oscillation motor
Rear edge assist motor
Inlet port roller separation solenoid
Buffer roller separation solenoid
Paper exit roller separation solenoid
Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
Shutter open/close clutch
Bundle exit lower roller clutch
<4K saddle finisher saddle section>
<4K saddle finisher DIPSW>

FSDSW1
FSDSW2
FSDSW3
FSDSW4
FSDSW5
FSDSW6
FSDSW7
FSDSW8
FJPOD
FAED1
FAED23
<4K saddle finisher>

FSPIND
FSPDD
FSDTPD
FS1PD
FS2PD
FS3PD
FSLGE
FSLGHPD
FSLGTD
FSFOE
FSFOHPD
FSPPHPD
FSPPPD
FSAHPD
FSSIND
FSVPPD
FSCRPD
FSGHPD
FSSHP1
FSSHP2
FSSD1
FSSD2
FSAHPC
FSFOHPC
FSEJDC
FSFDC
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-02
FIN SENSOR CHECK

FJPID
Punch motor lock detection

Punch unit connection detection
Punch HP detection
Punch horizontal resist HP detection
Punch front door open detection
Punch dust detection
Punch upper cover open/close detection SW
FSIFM
FSFM
FSFOM
FSGM
FSJM
FSFSTM
FSRSTM
FSLGM
FSFS
FS1DFS
FS2DFS
FSFCS
FPPM
Saddle entry port transport motor

Saddle transport motor
Paper folding motor
Guide motor
Saddle alignment motor
Stitch motor front
Stitch motor motor rear
Paper holding motor
Saddle flapper solenoid
Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
Transport plate contact solenoid
Paper positioning motor
<External punch unit>

FPNM
FPSM
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-03
TEST
TEST
FIN LOAD CHECK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-10
FINISHER ADJUSTMENT
FJPM
FINRPS
FJFM
FFM
A:
FFJM
FAM
FRJM
FSM
FTLM1
FTLM2
FFSM
FSWM
FASM
FINRRS
FBRRS
FFDRRS
FBES
FSHC
FAORC
10
0
20
A : 10
FRONT ADJUST
B : 100
STAPLE REAR
C : 100
STAPLE FRONT
D : 50
PUNCH CENTER
E : 50
PUNCH HOLE
OK
EXECUTE
1/1
3-30
Purpose
3-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the inserter and the
control circuits.
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section
Finisher
Section
Inserter
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with

[n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
<4K finisher>
Item
A
B
Display
FRONT
ADJUST
STAPLE
REAR
STAPLE
FRONT
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Item
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one position
at the rear)
in front)
Punch center adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
Set
range
0 - 20
Default
value
10
94 - 106
100
94 - 106
100
30 - 70
50
46 - 52
50
TH_SEN
TS_SEN
T_SEN
EMP_SEN
REG_SEN
TIM_SEN
JCK_SEN
H_SEN
HI_SEN
HYK_SEN
P_ST_SW
P_MO_SW
P_PN_SW
SET_SW
TEST
<4K saddle finisher>

Item
A
B
C
D
F
G
Display
SADDLE
POSITION
FOLDING
POSITION
FRONT
ADJUST
STAPLE
REAR
STAPLE
FRONT
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Inserter sub tray pull-out detection

Inserter sub tray storage detection
Inserter tray paper length detection
Inserter tray empty detection
Inserter resist detection
Inserter timing detection
Inserter JAM cover open/close detection
Inserter reverse detection
Inserter paper exit detection
Inserter reverse unit open/close detection
Inserter start SW
Inserter staple mode select SW
Inserter punch select SW
Inserter set SW
Item
Saddle binding position
adjustment
Saddle folding position
adjustment
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
at the rear)
in front)
Punch center adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
Set
range
197 - 203
Default
value
200
192 - 208
200
0 - 20
10
94 - 106
100
94 - 106
100
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-30
FIN SENSOR CHECK

TH_SEN
TS_SEN
T_SEN
EMP_SEN
REG_SEN
TIM_SEN
JCK_SEN
H_SEN
HI_SEN
HYK_SEN
P_ST_SW
P_MO_SW
P_PN_SW
SET_SW
1/1
3-31
30 - 70
46 - 52
50
50
Purpose

in the inserter and the control circuit.
Inserter
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

K_MOT
Y_MOT
H_MOT
F_SOL
Inserter paper feed motor

Inserter horizontal transport motor
Inserter reverse motor
Inserter flapper solenoid
R_CL
P_LED
Operation/Procedure
Inserter resist clutch

Inserter operation panel upper LED
TEST

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-31
INSERTER LOAD CHECK

K_MOT
Y_MOT
H_MOT
F_SOL
R_CL
P_LED
<A4 LCC>
EXECUTE
LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LTOD
1/1
3-32
Setting (Adjustment)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the

inserter paper width detection level.
Inserter
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with

[n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
2)
3)
Item
Display
MAX. POSITION
Item
POSITION 1
POSITION 2
MIN. POSOTION
TEST
Inserter tray width detection

adjustment value (Max. width)
adjustment value (Adjustment
position 1)
adjustment value (Adjustment
position 2)
adjustment value (Min. width)
Set
range
0 - 1023
LCC transport sensor

LCC tray upper limit detection
LCC tray lower limit detection
LCC tray paper empty detection
LCC tray insertion detection
LCC upper open/close detection SW
LCC lift motor encoder detection
LCC 24V power monitor
LCC upper limit SW
LCC main unit connection detection
<A3 LCC>
LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LPUSW
LRRSW
LTLSW
LTLD
LIPSW
LTOD
TEST

LCC tray upper limit detection
LCC tray lower limit detection
LCC tray paper empty detection
LCC tray insertion detection
LCC upper open/close detection SW
LCC lift motor encoder detection
LCC 24V power monitor
LCC upper limit SW
LCC paper upper surface detection SW
LCC reverse winding detection SW
LCC tray lift SW
LCC tray lock sensor
LCC illegal paper detection SW
LCC main unit connection sensor
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.04-02
LCC SENSOR CHECK

LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LTOD
0 - 1023
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-32
INSERTER TRAY VALUE SETTING
A:
72
0
1023
A : 72
MAX. POSITION
B : 200
POSITION1
C : 10
POSITION2
D : 100
MIN. POSITION
1/1
4-3
Purpose

in the large capacity tray (LCC) and the
control circuit.
Section
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)


<A4 LCC>
4-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the large capacity tray
(LCC) and the control circuit.
Section
LPFM
LLM
LPFC
LPFS
LTRC
LCC transport motor

LCC lift motor
LCC paper feed clutch
LCC paper feed solenoid
<A3 LCC>
LPFM
LLM
LPFC
LPFS
LTRC
LTLED
LTLC
LFAN
LCC transport motor

LCC lift motor
LCC paper feed solenoid
LCC tray LED lamp
LCC tray lock clutch
LCC separation auxiliary fan
TEST
TEST
SIMULATION NO.05-01
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.04-03
LCC LOAD CHECK

LLM
LPFM
LPFC
LPFS
After 6.0sec
LTRC
TEST
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.05-01
1/1
4-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the clutch

(LTRC) in the LCC and the monitor.
Section
5-2
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater

lamp and the control circuit.
1)
Press LTRC key to check the sync signal.
2)
Press the highlighted LTRC key to check the sync signal.
Operation/Procedure
When normal: OFF
1)
2)
When normal: ON
TEST
When abnormal: OFF

When abnormal: ON
SIMULATION NO.04-05
CLOSE
The selected heater lamp performs ON/OFF operation.
LCC SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK

LTRC
Fusing
Section
LTRC OFF
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
HL_EX
HL_ALL
TEST

Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp external EX1
Heater lamp external EX2
All heater lamps ON
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05-02
HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP
1/1
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
HL_EX
HL_ALL
5
5-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,

LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Section
Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to Max. o
Min. o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
EXECUTE
1/1
5-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the copy

lamp and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
OC copy lamp
DSPF copy lamp
CLOSE
COPY LAMP CHECK
DSPF COPY LAMP
EXECUTE
1/1
5-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit.
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

The target lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
DL_K
DL_C
DL_M
DL_Y
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
TEST
Same control
DL_C
1)
Select a target for the operation check with [n] and [p] keys.
2)

CPFM
LCCM
PFM
RRM
FPCM
FUM
POMF
POMR
WTM
TRC1
TRC2
TANCL
LPFC
RRC
RRC2
PCSS
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
T1PUS
T2PUS
C3PUS
C4PUS
T1PFC
T2PFC
C3PFC
C4PFC
T1LUM
T2LUM
C3LUM
C4LUM
LSS_BK
LSS_CL
Paper feed motor

LCC transport motor
PS front motor
Resist motor
Pressure change motor
Fusing motor
Paper exit motor normal rotation
Paper exit motor reverse rotation
Tandem transport clutch
PS clutch
PS clutch 2
Manual paper feed take-up solenoid
Tandem tray 1 pick-up solenoid
Tandem tray 2 pick-up solenoid
Cassette 3 pick-up solenoid
Cassette 4 pick-up solenoid
Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
Cassette 4 paper feed clutch
Tandem tray 1 lift-up motor
Tandem tray 2 lift-up motor
Cassette 3 lift-up motor
Cassette 4 lift-up motor
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05-04
TEST
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK

DL_K
Paper transport/paper exit
SIMULATION NO.05-03
OC COPY LAMP

(clutches and solenoids) in the paper transport system and the control circuits.
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Section
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec.
OC COPY LAMP
DSPF COPY LAMP
6-1
Purpose
DL_M
DL_Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.06-01
FEED OUTPUT CHECK
EXECUTE
1/1
CPFM
LCCM
PFM
RRM
FPCM
FUM
POMF
POMR
WTM
TRC1
TRC2
TANCL
LPFC
RRC
RRC2
PCSS
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
T1PUS
T2PUS
C3PUS
C4PUS
T1PFC
T2PFC
C3PFC
C4PFC
T1LUM
T2LUM
C3LUM
C4LUM
LSS_BK
EXECUTE
1/2
6-2
TEST
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.06-03
TRANSFER LOAD CHECK

POSITION
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan

motor and its control circuit.
Other
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

NORMAL
POFM
OZFM
PSFM
LSUFM
FUFM
CFM
CONFM
VFM_C
VFM_R
TEST
Paper exit cooling fan motor 1

Paper exit cooling fan motor 2
Ozone exhaust fan motor 1
Power cooling fan motor 1
Fusing exhaust fan motor
Fusing fan cooling motor
Charger cooling fan motor
Controller cooling fan motor / HDD cooling fan motor
Main inside ventilation fan motor (center)
Main inside ventilation fan motor (right)
EXECUTE
1/1
6-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the PTC

and the MC cleaner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.06-04
PTC/MC CLEANING
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.06-02
REVERSE
MC COUNT
PTC COUNT
FAN LOAD SETUP
POFM
OZFM
PSFM
LSUFM
FUFM
CFM
CONFM
VFM_C
MC
PTC
ALL
EXECUTE
VFM_R
7-1
Purpose
ALL
EXECUTE
1/1
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of

aging.
Section
6-3
Other
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target to be set with the touch panel key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary

transfer unit and the control circuit.
2)
Purpose
Section
Afterward, the operation mode is kept until the power is tuned

off or resetting is made.
Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
Select [NORMAL] or [REVERSE] and press [EXECUTE] key.
The load operation is started. (Separation operation is changed in
the sequence of BLACK o COLOR o FREE, and the operation is
halted for 5 sec at each position. For REVERSE. However, the
operation is reversed.)
During this period, the current position is displayed.
BLACK
COLOR
NORMAL
FREE
BLACK
FREE
REVERSE
COLOR
Black mode
position
Color mode
position
Drum
separation
position
Black mode
position
Drum
separation
position
Color mode
position
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
Aging operation setup

Intermittent setup
JAM detection enable/disable setup
Fusing operation enable/disable setup
Warm-up disable setup
DV unit detection enable/disable setup
Shading disable setup
CCD gain adjustment free setup
Black mode position

Color mode position
The operation
is repeated.
TEST
Drum separation position
Black mode position
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-01
AGING TEST SETTING
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
Drum separation position The operation

is repeated.
Color mode position
EXECUTE
1/1
7-6
Setting
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-09
TEST
PRINTING COLOR SELECT(COLOR MODE)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
2)
Press [OK] key.

The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time can be set in the range of 1 to 900sec.

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-06
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP

A:
A:
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
1
1
900
8-1
Purpose
OK
7-8
Section
Operation display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of

the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also
adjusted simultaneously.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch

panel.
Operation/Procedure
2)
Select an adjustment item with [n] and [p] keys.
3)
Section
Counting of the warm-up time is started.
* When U or V key is pressed, the set value of each item is

increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-08
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY SETTING

0
SECONDS
4)

The voltage entered in step 2 is outputted for 30sec and the
set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the output is interrupted.
Key
Item
MIDDLE
EXECUTE
7-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set a color in the color mode printing. (Used to check the print in the color
mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a color for print with the touch panel.
2)

Printing is started in the selected color.
LOW/
HIGH
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors.

C
K
C
M
Y
Setup/cancel of black
Setup/cancel of cyan
Setup/cancel of magenta
Setup/cancel of yellow
Display
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
SPEED
DVB_K
LOW
SPEED
DVB_C
LOW
SPEED
DVB_M
LOW
SPEED
DVB_Y
HIGH
SPEED
DVB_K
Content
K developing bias
set value at middle
speed
C developing bias
set value at middle
speed
M developing bias
set value at middle
speed
Y developing bias
set value at middle
speed
K developing bias
set value at low
speed
C developing bias
set value at low
speed
M developing bias
set value at low
speed
Y developing bias
set value at low
speed
K developing bias
set value at high
speed
Set
range
0 - 700
Default
value
450
0 - 700
450
0 - 700
450
0 - 700
450
0 - 700
420
0 - 700
420
0 - 700
420
0 - 700
420
0 - 700
450
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
TEST
A:
450
0
700
MIDDLE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT
A450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D450
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
A:
583
230
LOW/HIGH
OK
EXECUTE
8-2
850
MIDDLE
A 583
MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D 635
MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
LOW/HIGH
EXECUTE
OK
8-6
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of

the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also
adjusted simultaneously.
Section
Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of

the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
Section
Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch

panel.
The current set voltage is outputted for 30 sec, and the set
value is saved.
2)
3)
1)

4)

The voltage entered in step 3 is outputted for 30sec and the
set value is saved.
Key
Item
MIDDLE
LOW/
HIGH
Display
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
SPEED
GB_K
LOW
SPEED
GB_C
LOW
SPEED
GB_M
LOW
SPEED
GB_Y
HIGH
SPEED
GB_K
Content
K charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
high speed
Set
range
230 - 850
Default
value
583
230 - 850
635
230 - 850
635
230 - 850
635
230 - 850
552
230 - 850
600
230 - 850
600
230 - 850
600
230 - 850
604
598*
* 65/55-sheets machine
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY CL DPX
TC2 HEAVY BW SPX
TC2 HEAVY BW DPX
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
V
W
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
PTC LOW SPEED CL
PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
PTC LOW SPEED BK
PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
PTC HIGH SPEED BK
VCASE LOW SPEED CL
VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL
VCASE LOW SPEED BK
VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK
VCASE HIGH SPEED BK
K
C
Primary
transfer bias
reference value
Color
M
Y
Black and
white
Color
Black and
white
Color
Secondary
transfer bias
reference value
Secondary
transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
PTC current
reference value
PTC case
voltage
reference value
Black and
white
Color
Black and
white
Color
Black and
white
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
OHP
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
78
78
68
68
68
68
68
68
78
78
130
132
132
184
184
88
88
79
79
72
72
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 100PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
Actual output
value of the
initial value
15PA
15PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
10PA
15PA
15PA
40PA
25PA
25PA
40PA
40PA
12.5PA
12.5PA
10PA
10PA
8PA
8PA
Normal
paper
Heavy
paper
Envelope
51 - 255
51 - 255
149
149
2PA - 60PA
2PA - 60PA
30PA
30PA
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
72
72
100
114
156
119
119
119
119
119
0
0
0
0
0
2PA - 60PA
-50V - -1500V
-50V - -1500V
-50V - -1500V
-50V - -1500V
0/-100PA - -700PA
0/-100PA - -700PA
0/-100PA - -700PA
0/-100PA - -700PA
0/-100PA - -700PA
0/-200V - -1000V
0/-200V - -1000V
0/-200V - -1000V
0/-200V - -1000V
0/-200V - -1000V
8PA
-200V
-400V
-500V
-800V
-300PA
-300PA
-300PA
-300PA
-300PA
0
0
0
0
0
Lower speed
Medium speed
Lower speed
Medium speed
Lower speed
Medium speed
Lower speed
Medium speed
Lower speed
Medium speed
High speed
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Cleaning process
Printing at low speed
Printing at middle speed
Printing at high speed
Cleaning
Lower speed
Color
Medium speed
Lower speed
Black and white
Medium speed
High speed
Lower speed
Color
Medium speed
Lower speed
Black and white
Medium speed
High speed
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
Set
range
Content
A:
78
0
255
A : 78
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
B : 78
C : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
Purpose
D : 68
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
9-2
E : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
F : 68
G : 68
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
H: 68
I : 78
TC1
J : 78
K : 130
TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
L : 132
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
Duplex
Section
Operation/Procedure
LOW SPEED BW K
EXECUTE
OK
DSW_ADU
APPD1
APPD2
ADU transport open/close detection

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.09-02
FIN SENSOR CHECK

DSW_ADU
APPD1
APPD2
PHTM_K
HTM_K*
HTM_C
HTM_M
HTM_Y
Vertical transport motor K

Hopper motor K
Hopper motor C
Hopper motor M
Hopper motor Y
This key operates both the hopper motor K and the intermediate
hopper stirring motor.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.10-01
TEST
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION
1/1
TM_K1
TM_C
TM_M
TM_Y
TM_K2
PHTM_K
HTM_K
HTM_C
HTM_M
HTM_Y
9-3
Purpose

in the duplex section and the control circuits.
EXECUTE
ALL
1/1
Duplex
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
10-2
2)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner

remaining quantity sensor and the control
circuit.

ADMH
ADML
ADUGS
TEST
ADU 1 motor (H)

ADU 2 motor (L)
Gate solenoid
CLOSE
ADU LOAD CHECK

ADML
Section
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.09-03
ADMH
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the toner motor is driven for 10

sec and the toner remaining quantity in the toner hopper is displayed.
No toner remaining: Normal display
Toner remaining: Highlighted display
ADUGS
HTCS_K
HTCS_C
HTCS_M
HTCS_Y
TEST
EXECUTE
Hopper remaining quantity sensor K

Hopper remaining quantity sensor C
Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.10-02
TONER HOPPER SENSOR CEHCK
1/1
HTCS_K
HTCS_C
HTCS_M
HTCS_Y
10
10-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load

(motor) in the process section and the
related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no
toner bottle installed.
Section
EXECUTE
1/1
13
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
13--
The selected load is operated for 10 sec.
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
TM_K1
TM_C
TM_M
TM_Y
TM_K2
Toner motor K1
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Toner motor K2
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.13
U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.16
TEST
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Purpose
NO
EXECUTE
17
14-Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/

U2/LCC/PF" troubles.
Section
17-Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
2)

TEST
YES
ARE YOU SURE?
14
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.14
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
TROUBLE CANCELLATION(OTHER)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.17
TEST
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
YES
ARE YOU SURE?
15
NO
EXECUTE
21
15-21-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12,

F3-22 (large capacity paper feed tray,
paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble.
LCC
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.

Section
1)
1)
2)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.15
Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys on the touch
panel.
2)
3)
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION
A
B
Maintenance timing display

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
COUNTER (TOTAL)
counter (Total)
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
COUNTER (COLOR)
counter (Color)
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Default value
300K
100K
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.21-01
TEST
ARE YOU SURE?
Setting
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Purpose
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP
A:
300
0
A ; 300
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
TOTAL)
B ; 100
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
COLOR)
999
16
16-Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.

Section
MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB

OK
22
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-01
COUNTER
DISPLAY
TOTAL OUT (BW) :
00000000
DOC FIL (COL)
00000000
TOTAL OUT (COL) :
00000000
DOC FIL (2COL)
00000000
TOTAL (BW)
00000000
DOC FIL (SGL COL) :
00000000
TOTAL (COL)
00000000
OTHER (BW)
00000000
TOTAL (2COL)
00000000
OTHER (COL)
00000000
TOTAL (SGL_COL) :
00000000
MAINTENANCE ALL :
00000000
COPY (BW)
00000000
MAINTENANCE COL :
00000000
COPY (COL)
00000000
TC1 BELT
00000000
COPY (2COL)
00000000
TC1 BELT RANGE
00000000
Operation/Procedure
COPY (SGL_COL)
00000000
TC1 BELT DAY
000
Select a display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
PRINT (BW
00000000
TC2 BELT
00000000
PRINT (COL)
00000000
TC2 BELT RANGE
00000000
DOC FIL
00000000
TC2 BELT DAY
000/740
22-1
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/

Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each

section and operation mode. (Used to
check the maintenance timing.)
Section
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.

TOTAL OUT(BW)
TOTAL OUT(COL)
TOTAL(BW)
TOTAL(COL)
TOTAL(2COL)
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
COPY(BW)
COPY(COL)
COPY(2COL)
COPY(SGL_COL)
PRINT(BW)
PRINT(COL)
DOC FIL(BW)
DOC FIL(COL)
DOC FIL(2COL)
DOC FIL(SGL COL)
OTHER(BW)
OTHER(COL)
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY
TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT(U)
FUSER UNIT(E&L)
FUSER DAY(U)
FUSER DAY(E&L)
FUSER WEB SEND
FUSER WEB UNIT
FUSER WEB DAY
DRUM LIFE(K)
DRUM LIFE(C)
DRUM LIFE(M)
DRUM LIFE(Y)
DEVE LIFE(K)
DEVE LIFE(C)
DEVE LIFE(M)
DEVE LIFE(Y)
Total output quantity of black and white

Total output quantity of color
Total use quantity of black and white
Total use quantity of color
Total use quantity of 2-color
Total use quantity of single color
Black and white copy counter
Color copy counter
2-color copy counter
Single color copy counter
Black and white print counter
Color print counter
Black and white document filing print counter
Color document filing print counter
2-color document filing print counter
Single-color document filing print counter
Black and white other counter
Color other counter
Maintenance counter (Total)
Maintenance counter (Color)
Primary transfer unit print counter
Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
Secondary transfer unit print counter
Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
Fusing unit print counter
(Heat roller external and lower)
Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
Fusing unit use day
(Heat roller external and lower)
Fuser web cleaning send counter
Fusing web print counter
Use day of fuser web unit (Day)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (K)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (C)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (M)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (M)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y)
(BW)
1/2
22-2
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed

and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-02
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY

MACHINE JAM
00000000
DSPF JAM
00000000
TROUBLE
00000000
1/1
22-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed positions and

the number of misfeed at each position.
* The trouble position can be troubleshooted according to this data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTTERS.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.22-03
CLOSE
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY

PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
MFT
PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
APPD3_S
DPFD2_S4
LCC
PPD2_PRI
CPID2_S2
CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1
PPD2_PRI
TRAY3
APPD3_S
TRAY2
MFT
MFT
CPID2_S2
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N1
MFT
APPD3_S
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY3
CPID2_S2
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY3
1/1
22-4
TEST
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-05
S/N : **********
ICU(MAIN)
: 00.00.00
SADDLE
: 00.00.00
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
ICU(BOOT)
: 00.00.00
PUNCH
: 00.00.00
LANGUAGE
: 00.00.00
INSERTER
: 00.00.00
Section
GRAPHIC
: 00.00.00
NIC
: 00.00.00
FIERY
: 00.00.00
Operation/Procedure
IMG DATA ROM : 00.00.00
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.

(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
COLOR PROFILE : 00.00.00
POWER-CON
: 00.00.00
PCU
: 00.00.00
E-MANUAL
: 00.00.00
SCU
: 00.00.00
SPF
: NONE
* For the list of the trouble codes, refer to "2. Trouble code list" in
[8] SELF DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLE CODES.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.22-04
CLOSE
FAX(MAIN)
: NONE
LCC
: 00.00.00
FINISHER
: 00.00.00
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY

F9-20
F2-39
F1-50
L4-02
F2-39
F1-50
F1-50
L4-02
F1-61
F1-50
E7-23
H5-01
1/1
L4-31
F1-50
F2-39
L4-31
L8-02
L8-02
L4-02
U5-12
F2-39
L1-00
F9-20
PF-00
PC-
F2-81
E7-23
U2-22
F2-39
22-6
Purpose
PF-00
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of the setting and

adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
switch, counters).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1/1
22-5
Purpose
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print

the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1)
Select the print mode with 10-key.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1.
1. List print
Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each

unit (section).
Section
TEST
Operation/Procedure
2. Lit print (Sim 50-24)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-06
DATA PRINT MODE
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
A:
A:
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to

check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
DATA PATTERN
1
1

S/N
ICU(MAIN)
ICU(BOOT)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
IMG DATA ROM
COLOR PROFILE
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX(MAIN)
LCC
FINISHER
SADDLE
PUNCH
INSERTER
NIC
FIERY
POWER-CON
E-MANUAL
Serial No.
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
ImageASIC FlashROM data
Color profile
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX (main section)
Side LCC
Finisher
Saddle unit
Punch unit
Inserter
NIC
FIERY option
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
EXECUTE
OK
22-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
DSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC_OPEN
DSPF_OPEN
INSERTER
INSERTER OFFLINE
OC LAMP TIME
DSPF LAMP TIME
Document feed quantity

Number of scans
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
OC open/close counter
DSPF open/close counter
Inserter counter
Inserter offline counter
Overall lighting time of the lamp in the OC section
(Hour, minute)
Overall lighting time of the lamp in the DSPF
section (Hour, minute)
DSPF
: 00000000
SCAN
: 00000000
STAPLER
: 00000000
PUNCHER
: 00000000
STAMP
: 00000000
SADDLE STAPLER
: 00000000
OC_OPEN
: 00000000
DSPF_OPEN
: 00000000
INSERTER
: 00000000
MACHINE
DSPF
STAMP
LCC
PUNCHER
FINISHER
INSERTER OFFLINE : 00000000

OC LAMP TIME
: 00000000
DSPF LAMP TIME
: 00000000
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MX-RPX1
AR-SU1
MX-LCX2
MX-LCX3
MX-PNX2A
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
MX-FNX3
MX-FNX4
MX-CFX1
MX-FXX1
MX-MMX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FRX3U
MX-FRX3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-08
TEST
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY
1/1
INSERTER
FAX1
FAX MEMORY
PS
SECURITY
22-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print

quantity) of each paper feed section.
Paper feed, ADU, LCC
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.

TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
TEST
Tray 1 paper feed counter

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
ADU paper feed counter
SIMULATION NO.22-09
AIM
SDRAM (SYS)
SDRAM (ICU)
HDD
NIC
BARCODE
FONT
INTERNETFAX
FIERY
ACM
EAM
TEST
Main unit
Document feed unit
Finish stamp
Punch unit
Finisher
MX-AMX1
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
STANDARD
AR-PF1
AR-PF3
MX-FWX1
Inserter
FAX kit
FAX extension memory
PS3 expansion kit
Security kit (DSK) commercial version
Security kit (DSK) authentication
version
Application expansion module
SDRAM capacity
SDRAM capacity
Hard disk capacity
NIC
Barcode font
Kanji font (Japan only)
MX-PEX2
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3

Application communication module
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-10
MACHINE SYSTEM
MACHINE
: MX-5500N
SDRAM(ICU)
0MB
DSPF
: MX-RPX1
HDD
0MB
STAMP
: AR-SU1
NIC
: STANDARD
LCC
: NONE
BARCODE
: AR-PF1
PUNCHER
: MX-PNX2A
FONT
: AR-PF3
FINISHER
: MX-FNX3
INTERNET-FAX
: MX-FWX1
INSERTER
: MX-CFX1
FIERY
: MX-PEX2
FAX1
: MX-FXX1
CLOSE
PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY

TRAY 1
TRAY 2
: 00000000
: 00000000
TRAY 3
: 00000000
TRAY 4
: 00000000
MFT TOTAL
: 00000000
MFT HEAVY
: 00000000
MFT OHP
: 00000000
MFT ENV
: 00000000
LCC
: 00000000
ADU
: 00000000
FAX MEMORY
: MX-MMX1
PS
: MX-PKX1
SECURITY
: MX-FRX3U
AIM
: MX-AMX1
SDRAM(SYS)
0MB
1/1
22-11
Purpose
1/1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency of FAX

(send/receive). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of FAX send and receive are displayed.
22-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration

(option, internal hardware).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the
installed devices and the options are displayed.)

FAX OUTPUT
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
FAX print quantity counter

FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix attached communications
TEST
SIMULATION NO.22-11
CLOSE
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY

FAX OUTPUT
00000000
FAX SEND
00000000
FAX RECEIVED
00000000
SEND IMAGES
00000000
SEND TIME
00000000:00:0
RECEIVED TIME
00000000:00:0
ACR SEND
00000000
DRUM RANGE M
DRUM RANGE Y
DEVE CTRG K
DEVE CTRG C
DEVE CTRG M
DEVE CTRG Y
DEVE RANGE K
DEVE RANGE C
DEVE RANGE M
1/1
22-12
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed position in the

DSPF and the number of misfeed of each
position. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, it may lead to the decision
for repair.)
DSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
DEVE RANGE Y
TONER MOTOR K
TONER MOTOR
K2
TONER MOTOR C
TONER MOTOR M
TONER MOTOR Y
TONER TURN K
TONER TURN K2
TONER TURN C
TONER TURN M
TONER TURN Y
TEST
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance

(cm) (M)
(cm) (Y)
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (K)
(cm) (C)
(cm) (M)
(cm) (Y)
Toner motor print counter (K)
Toner motor print counter (K2)
Toner motor print counter (C)
Toner motor print counter (M)
Toner motor print counter (Y)
Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K)
Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K2)
Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (C)
Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (M)
Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (Y)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-13
PROCESS CARTRIDGE DISPLAY
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTTERS.
DRUM CTRG K
: 00000000
DEVE RANGE K
: 00000000
DRUM CTRG C
: 00000000
DEVE RANGE C
: 00000000
DRUM CTRG M
: 00000000
DEVE RANGE M
: 00000000
DRUM CTRG Y
: 00000000
DEVE RANGE Y
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE K
: 00000000
TONER MOTOR K
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE C
: 00000000
TONER MOTOR K2
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE M
: 00000000
TONER MOTOR C
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE Y
: 00000000
TONER MOTOR M
: 00000000
DEVE CTRG K
: 00000000
TONER MOTOR Y
: 00000000
DEVE CTRG C
: 00000000
TONER TURN K
: 00000000
DEVE CTRG M
: 00000000
TONER TURN K2
: 00000000
DEVE CTRG Y
: 00000000
TONER TURN C
: 00000000
TEST
SIMULATION NO.22-12
CLOSE
SPF JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
1/2
22-19
Purpose
1/1
Function (Purpose) Used to check each counter value related

the network scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
22-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the running time of the process section. (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
bottle).
Section
The counter value related to the network scanner is displayed.

Select the display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
NET SCN ORG_B/W
Operation/Procedure
NET SCN ORG_CL
The rotating time of the process section and the print quantity are
displayed.
NET SCN ORG_2CL

DRUM CTRG K
DRUM CTRG C
DRUM CTRG M
DRUM CTRG Y
DRUM RANGE K
DRUM RANGE C
NET SCN ORG_SGL
Drum cartridge print counter (K)

Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
(cm) (K)
(cm) (C)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT

INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
Network scanner document read quantity

counter (Black and white scan job)
counter (Color scan job)
counter (2-color scan job)
counter (Single scan job)
Internet FAX output quantity
Internet FAX send quantity
Number of internet FAX receive
Number of internet FAX send
Number of E-Mail send
Number of FTP send
Numeric SMB send
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B/C
Number of USB save

Trial mode counter (Black and white, color
scan job)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Black and
white)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Color)
Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
TEST
NET SCN ORG_B/W
00000000
NET SCN ORG_CL
00000000
NET SCN ORG_2CL
00000000
NET SCN ORG_SGL
00000000
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
00000000
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
00000000
00000000
INTERNET FAX SEND
00000000
MAIL COUNTER
00000000
FTP COUNTER
00000000
SMB SEND
00000000
USB CNT
00000000
TRIAL MODE_B&C
00000000
PCL SYMBOL SET LIST

PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
EXECUTE
23-2
22-90
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble history of paper

jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
and troubles is considerably great, it may
be judged as necessary to repair.)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of various set data.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the display with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
2)
Select a list to be printed.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing.
All setting list

Printer test page
Destination registration list

(*)
Document filing list

System setting list
Receive rejection number

table
Receive rejection address/
domain table
Table list of transfer to
email
Transfer list to
administrator
WEB setting list
Meta data set list
1/2
23
1/2
Purpose
ALL CUSTOM SETTING

PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-19
NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-90
TEST
LIST PRINT
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-02
JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST

PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
EXECUTE
23-80
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Paper feed, transport
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to start list printing.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-80
DATA PRINT MODE (PAPER FEED)
PAPER FEED TIME LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST

INBOUND ROUTING LIST
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
EXECUTE
(*): Disabled when the data list print inhibit setting is enabled in a
DSK support model.
1/1
24-3
24
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and scan (reading).
24-1
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
Machine JAM counter

DSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-01
TEST
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR

MACHINE
DSPF
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

The target counter is cleared.

MACHINE
DSPF
TROUBLE
Section
Operation/Procedure
TROUBLE
DSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
INSERTER
INSERTER OFFLINE
OC_OPEN
DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
DSPF LAMP TIME
TEST
DSPF counter
Scan counter
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
Inserter counter
Inserter offline counter
OC open/close counter
DSPF open/close counter
OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF section lamp total lighting time
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-03
ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
DSPF
SCAN
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
INSERTER
INSERTER OFFLINE
OC_OPEN
DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
DSPF LAMP TIME
STAPLER
PUNCHER
1/1
24-2
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
Section
24-4
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) The maintenance counter and the print

counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit are cleared. (After completion of maintenance, the counters are cleared.)
Data clear
Section
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
TEST

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
ADU paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-02
TC1 BELT DAY

TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR

TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
TC2 BELT DAY

FUSER UNIT (U)
FUSER UNIT (E&L)
FUSER DAY (U)
FUSER DAY (E&L)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
FUSER WEB SEND
Maintenance counter (Total)

Primary transfer unit print counter
Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
Secondary transfer unit print counter
Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller external and
lower)
Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
Fusing unit use day (Heat roller external and
lower)
Fusing web send counter
FUSER WEB
FUSER WEB DAY
MC CLEANER
PTC CLEANER
Fusing web print counter

Fusing web unit use day
MC cleaner cleaning operation counter
PTC cleaner cleaning operation counter
COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2 COLOR
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-04
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-06
TEST
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR
MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR

MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT DAY
TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT (U)
FUSER UNIT (E&L)
FUSER DAY (U)
FUSER DAY (E&L)
FUSER WEB SEND
FUSER WEB
FUSER WEB DAY
MC CLEANER
TC1 BELT RANGE
PTC CLEANER
ARE YOU SURE?
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.

(After replacement of developer,
this
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
M
Y
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

Drum cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
K
C
M
Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-07
TEST
DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR

K
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-05
TEST
1/1
Data clear
Purpose
Developer cartridge print counter (K)

Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
EXECUTE
24-7

K
NO
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter value.

(After replacement of the OPC drum, this
24-5
Purpose
YES
DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR

K
ARE YOU SURE?
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
Purpose
NO
EXECUTE
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer mode print counter

and the self print mode print counter.
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter value.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
3)
Press [YES] key.

COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2COLOR
Copy counter (Black and white)

Copy counter (Color)
Single color
2-color
1/1
24-9
Purpose
24-6
YES
PRINT BW
PRINT COL
OTHER BW
OTHER COL
Printer counter (Black and white)

Printer counter (Color)
Other counter (Black and white)
Other counter (Color)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-09
PRINT/OTHER COUNTER CLEAR

PRINT BW
PRINT COL
OTHER BW
NET SCN ORG_SGL
Network scanner document read

quantity counter (Single scan job)
Internet FAX output quantity
Internet FAX send quantity
Number of internet FAX receive
Number of internet FAX send
Number of E-Mail send
Number of FTP send
Numeric SMB send
Number of USB save
Trial mode counter (Black and white,
color scan job)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Black
and white)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Color)
Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Single
color)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT

INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
OTHER COL
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
24-10
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only

when FAX is installed.)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-15
TEST
NETWORK SCANNER COUTNER DATA CLEAR
Section
Operation/Procedure
NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
1)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
2)
INTERNET FAX SEND
3)
Press [YES] key.
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL

FAX OUTPUT
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
TEST
FAX print quantity counter

FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix attached communications
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-10
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR

FAX OUTPUT
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
24-30
SEND IMAGES
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator password.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The administrator password is initialized.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-30
ADMIN PASSWORD INITIALIZE
24-15
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear various counters in the scan

mode related to image send.
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Section
Operation/Procedure
24-31
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL

NET SCN ORG_2CL
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode password.

Section

quantity counter (Black and white
scan job)
quantity counter (Color scan job)
quantity counter (2-color scan job)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The service mode password is initialized.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-31
SERVICE PASSWORD INITIALIZE
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the

reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is not set normally.
(Default value: 128)
Automatic developer adjustment value at low
speed
ARE
YES
YOU SURE?
NO
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K
EXECUTE
Automatic developer adjustment value at middle

speed
25
25-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the developing section.

Section
Process (Developing section)
1)
Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] or [HIGH]

keys.
2)

The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is displayed.
TEST
Automatic developer adjustment control voltage at

high speed
Toner density sensor K

Toner density sensor C
Toner density sensor M
Toner density sensor Y
Toner density control voltage K
Toner density control voltage C
Toner density control voltage M
Toner density control voltage Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-01
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_C :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_M :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_M_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_H_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_K
128
AT DEVE VO_L_C
128
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
128
K
TCS_C
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
26-2
TCV_Y
Purpose
LOW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR

TCS_K
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
AT DEVE VO_H_K

middle speed
Operation/Procedure
TCS_K
TCS_C
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
Automatic developer adjustment value at high

speed
low speed
EXECUTE
1/1
26
HIGH
MIDDLE
EXECUTE
1/1
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large

capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
25-2
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of the toner

density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Section
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
2)
Paper feed
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-02
SIZE SETUP
TRAY1
8.5x11
A4
B5
LCC
8.5x11
A4
B5
G/LBS SET
GRAM
LBS
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected
level is displayed.
When the developer motor stops, the average value of the
toner density sampling result is set as the reference toner density control level.
1/1
26-3
26-5
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Setting must be made according to the auditor
use conditions.)
Auditor
Section
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total

counter and the maintenance counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] keys.
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
P10
EC1
NONE
P VENDOR1
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
P OTHER
DOC ADJ
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
VENDOR
MODE (*)
COUNTUP
TIMING
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
FUSER_IN
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT
Built-in auditor mode (standard mode)

operation (Default)
EC1 mode operation
Normal operation (Default)
Old coin vendor mode (Copy mode
management)
Vendor mode for an external auditor
connected to the coin vendor I/F
Document filing function enabled
Document filing function disabled (Default)
Continuous paper feed is performed.
Continuous paper feed is not performed.
(Default)
Vendor mode 1
Vendor mode 2
Vendor mode 3 (Default)
When the paper lead edge passes the
fusing rear sensor.
When the paper rear edge passes the
fusing rear sensor.
When the paper rear edge passes the
paper exit sensor in the main unit, the right
tray, and the after process unit. (Default)
1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2
The set value in step 2 is saved.

A
B
C
D
E
F
TOTAL (B/W)
TOTAL (COL)
MAINTENANCE (B/W)
MAINTENANCE (COL)
DEV (B/W)
DEV (COL)
TEST
Total counter (Black and white)

Total counter (Color)
Maintenance counter (Black and white)
Developer counter (Black and white)
Developer counter (Color)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-05
A3(11x17) COUNTUP
A:
2
1
A:
TOTAL(B/W)
B:
TOTAL(COL)
C:
MAINTENANCE(B/W)
D: 2
MAINTENANCE(COL)
E:
DEV(B/W)
F:
DEV(COL)
OK
(*) Details of the vendor mode

Completion
of the
specified
quantity
(money
remaining)
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Insufficient money during

copy job
Black and
Color
white or color
(money
(no money
remaining)
remaining)
Condition 2
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 2
Completion
of the
specified
quantity
(no money
remaining)
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear.

Default is 60 sec, which can be changed in the
system setting.
Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-03
AUDITOR SETUP
BUILT-IN AUDITOR :
P10
EC1
OUTSIDE AUDITOR :
NONE
P VENDOR1
ON
OFF
P OTHER
DOC ADJ
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR MODE
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
FUSER_IN
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT
COUNTUP TIMING :
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications according to

the destination. (Paper, fixed magnification
ratios, etc.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

The selected set content is saved.
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.
TEST
26-6
Purpose
U.S.A.
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
TEST
United States of America

Canada
Inch series, other destinations
Japan
AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Europe
United Kingdom
Australia
AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
China
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-06
DESTINATION SETUP
1/1
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS
AB_A
CHINA
EXECUTE
1/1
26-10
26-30
Setting
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
Section
TEST
A:
TRIAL MODE(0:YES 1:NO)
1
0
2)
Press [OK] key.
1: Control inhibited

CLOSE
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP
A:
1)
0: Control allowed
0: Trial mode setting

1: Trial mode cancel (Default)
SIMULATION NO.26-10
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure

TRIAL MODE
(0: YES 1: NO)
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network

scanner.
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
TEST
1 (CE not supported)

EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-30
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING

A:
A:
(0:YES 1:NO)
1
0
OK
26-18
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner

save mode operation. (For the Japan and
the UK versions.)
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-35
1)
Purpose
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4

trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.

A
COPY
PRINTER
TEST
0:
1:
0:
1:
Copy toner save mode is inhibited. (Default)

Copy toner save mode is allowed
Printer toner save mode is inhibited. (Default)
Printer toner save mode is allowed.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
TONER SAVE MODE SETUP
A:
0
0
A:
COPY (1:YES 0:NO)
B:
PRINTER (1:YES 0:NO)

0: Display as one trouble
1: Display as series of several troubles
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-18
Setting
2)
Press [OK] key.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-35
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETUP

A:
A:
(0:ONCE 1:ANY)
0
0
OK
OK
26-38
26-49
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether printing is continued or

stopped when the developer life is expired
or when the fusing wed ends.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
Section
TEST

A: MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER
TEST
POSTCARD
0:
1:
0:
1:
B: FUSER WEB END
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-49
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP

LOW
HIGH
Print continue
Print stop
Print continue
Print stop
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-38
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING
A:
0
0
A:
MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)
B:
FUSER WEB END(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)
1/1
26-50
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and

white highlight function and the 2-color/Single display function.
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
26-41
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: AMS Disable
panel.
2)
3)
BW REVERSE
(0: NO 1: YES)
COLOR MODE
(*1) B COLOR MODE
1: AMS Enable
TEST
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 (Enable)
1 (Enable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-41
Mode inhibit
Single
2-color
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Set value

U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
0: Black and white reverse inhibited

1: Black and white reverse allowed
(*1) 0 - 7 Refer to the table below.
OFF: Displayed
2-color/Single
counter disable
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON: Not displayed
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING.

A:
A:
TEST
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-50
FUNCTION SETTING
A:
1
0
A:
; BW REVERSE : YES
B:
; COLOR MODE
OK
OK
26-52
TEST
Setting
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-54
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER

A:
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion paper, cover, etc.) is counted or not.
A:
0
Section
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
1
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: Counts up.
1: Does not count up.

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-52
OK
A BLANK PAPER COUNT MODE SETUP

A:
A:
(0:YES 1:NO)
1
0
26-65
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.

Section
Operation/Procedure
LIMIT COPIES
ON
OFF
OK
TEST
26-53
Staple limit copies ON (Default)

Staple limit copies OFF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-65
FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)

LIMIT COPIES
Setting
Purpose
ON
OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: NO
1: YES (Default)

1/1
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53

A:
A:
26-67
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the summer time timing and the
time zone.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a mode to be set with the touch panel.
2)
[TIME ZONE] [SUMMER TIME]

OK
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.

26-54
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: NO
1: YES (Default)
GMT r
B
C
D
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
INTERNET
AUTO SUMMER
TIME ADJ
TIME
ZONE
SUMMER
TIME
0
1
0 - 13
0 - 59
0
1
0
0 - 23
0 - 59
GMT hour
GMT minute
Internet clock YES
Internet clock NO
Automatic summer time
adjustment ON
Automatic summer time
adjustment OFF
Adjustment time: Hour
Adjustment time: Minute
1 - 12
Start time: Month
1 - 31
1-5
Start time: Day

Start time: Week
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 - 23
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
Start time: Hour
0 - 59
Start time: Minute
1
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
START TIME
HOUR
START TIME
MINUTE
START MODE
START UTC
END TIME
MONTH
END TIME DAY
END TIME WEEK
END TIME A DAY
OF THE WEEK
M
N
O
P
Q
TEST
ADJ TIME HOUR

ADJ TIME
MINUTE
START TIME
MONTH
START TIME DAY
START TIME
WEEK
START TIME A
DAY OF THE
WEEK
END TIME HOUR

END TIME
MINUTE
END MODE
END UTC
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
0
1
; AUTO SUMMER TIME ADJ : OFF
; AUTO TIME HOUR
C:
; AUTO TIME MINUTE
D:
; START TIME MONTH : YES
E:
; START TIME DAY
TONER END
1:
TH COUNT (CL) *2
2:
3:
4:
5:
CONTINUOUS TH
COUNT (BK) *2
4:
5:
*1: Enable when the set item B is set to "0." The numbers of
printable quantity on the table above are estimated with A4
paper and the print rate of 5%.
The toner near end message is displayed. When the printing
quantity set in item D is reached, it is judged as "Toner end."
During this operation, insufficient density, thin spot, or improper
color balance may occur depending on the user's status of use.
To avoid this symptom, set the set item D to "1."
TEST
; START TIME WEEK
G:
; START TIME A DAY OF THE WEEK : MONDAY
0
1
A:
TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1:NO)
B:
TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1:NO)
C:
NEAR END
D:
TH COUNTER(CL)
E:
CONTINUOUS TH COUNT(BK)
; START TIME HOUR
I :
; START TIME MINUTE
J :
; START MODE : DAY
K:
; START UTC : YES
L:
; END TIME MONTH
SUMMER TIME
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-69
TONER NEAR END SETTING
TIME ZONE
Toner ready message, icon display

(Default)
The toner preparation message is not
displayed.
Toner near end message display (Default)
The toner near end message is not
displayed.
Cartridge motor operation enabled at
NEAR END (Setting disable)
Cartridge motor operation disabled at
NEAR END (Setting disable)
Cartridge motor operation disabled at
NEAR END
Toner end detection in 0 sheet after toner
near end
Toner end detection in 25 sheets after
toner near end *1
Toner end detection in 50 sheet after toner
near end *1
toner near end *1
toner near end *1
Cover open detection (recognition) in
120sec after toner cover open
*2: The output quantity in items D and E are based on A4 paper

with print ratio of 5%.
F:
1:
3:
A:
H:
1:
2:
CLOSE
0:
1:
DAY
WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK
YES
NO
A:
TONER NEAR
END
End time: Day

End time: Week
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
End time: Hour
End time: Minute
B:
3:
1 - 31
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 - 23
0 - 59
0
1
0:
2:
0
1
1 - 12
0
1
TONER
PREPARATION
1:
DAY
WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK
YES
NO
End time: Month
SIMULATION NO.26-67
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display of spare toner preparation and near end when the toner quantity reaches 25%.
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT
A:
26-69
OK
EXECUTE
OK
27
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

27-1
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: Non-detection
FSS MODE
B
C
D
RETRY
TIMER (MINUTE)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
Toner order automatic
send time (K)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
send time (C)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (M)
send time (K)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (Y)
send time (K)
1: Detection

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-01
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE

A: 0
A:
0:
1:
Exclusive for send in the NE-B mode

For send and receive in the NE-F
mode (Default)
0 - 15 : Resend number (2: default)
1 - 15 : Resend timer (min) (3: default)
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
; DISABLE : YES
0
0
OK
27-2
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (sender registration number, host server telephone number).
TEST
A:
Section
1
0
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with touch panel.

[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
2)
3)
Press [SET] key.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-04
FSS FUNCTION SETUP

A:
FSS MODE: NEB2
B :
RETRY
C :
TIMER (MINUTE)
D:
TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)
E :
TONER ORDER TIMING (C): 3 (49% - 25%)
F :
TONER ORDER TIMING (M): 3 (49% - 25%)
G:
TONER ORDER TIMING (Y): 3 (49% - 25%)

OK
USER FAX_NO.
SERVA TEL_NO.
TEST
Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-02
0000000000000001
NEW :
USER FAX_NO.
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.)
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (INPUT)

PRESENT :
27-5
Purpose
SET
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Section
SERVA TEL_NO.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. The set value is
displayed in NEW.
2)
Press [SET] key.

PAUSE
1/1
TEST
SIMULATION NO.27-05
TAG# SETTING
27-4
Purpose
PRESENT :
Setting
NEW :
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (initial, call,

toner order automatic send).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

11111111
CLOSE
27-6
27-9
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (manual service call).
Function (Purpose) Paper transport time between sensors /

Gain adjustment retry number setting
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
1)
0: YES (Default)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
1: NO
Press [OK] key.

TEST

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-06
FEED TIME 1
0 - 100:
FEED TIME 2
0 - 100:
GAIN ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
1 - 100:
JAM ALERT
1 - 100:
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP

A: 0
A:
0:YES, 1:NO
0
0
TEST
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-09
FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT
A:
27-7
50
0
Purpose
Threshold value of the paper

transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(DSPF) (50: Default)
Threshold value of the gain
adjustment retry number (50:
Default)
Threshold value of the continuous
JAM alert judgment (10: Default)
100
Setting
A : 50
; FEED TIME1
B : 50
; FEED TIME2
C : 50
; GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
D : 10
; JAM ALERT
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert

call).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
OK

A
FUNCTION
ALERT
0:
1:
0:
1:
27-10
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the history information of
trouble prediction
*1: The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
*2: Alert send timing
No alert cause
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collection
request
TEST
Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

When the maintenance timing is reached.
When pressing Service call.
When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Revision of the toner installation date (only for a
new product)
1
0
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Target history
Serial communication retry number history

High density process control error history
Medium density process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-07
TEST
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION)
A:
Data clear
Purpose
FSS function enable

FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
Alert call disable
A:
FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
B:
ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-10
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?
OK
YES
NO
EXECUTE
27-11
Other
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication

retry number history and the scanner gain
adjustment retry number history.
TEST
Section
Serial communication retry number

history display
Scanner gain adjustment retry history

display
DSPF gain adjustment retry history

display
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
INSERTER1
INSERTER2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
DSPF1
DSPF2
SCAN GAIN ADJ1
SCAN GAIN ADJ2
SCAN GAIN ADJ3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4
SCAN GAIN ADJ5
DSPF GAIN ADJ1
DSPF GAIN ADJ2
DSPF GAIN ADJ3
DSPF GAIN ADJ4
DSPF GAIN ADJ5
DATE
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
LSU2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DESK1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DESK2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
INSERTER1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
INSERTER2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
FINISHER1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
FINISHER2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DSPF1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DESK2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999999
99:99:99
9999
HV_ERR2
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
HV_ERR3
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
HV_ERR4
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
HV_ERR5
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
H_TONE ERR1
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
H_TONE ERR2
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
H_TONE ERR3
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
H_TONE ERR4
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
H_TONE ERR5
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
AUTO REG ADJ1
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
AUTO REG ADJ2
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
AUTO REG ADJ3
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
AUTO REG ADJ4
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
AUTO REG ADJ5
: 99/99/99
99:99:99
9999
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the display with [n] and [p] keys.
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
FEED TIME3
FEED TIME4
FEED TIME5
FEED TIME6
FEED TIME7
FEED TIME8
1/2
FEED TIME9
FEED TIME10
27-12
Other
FEED TIME1(DSPF)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the error history of high density, half tone process control, and automatic registration adjustment.
Section
FEED TIME2(DSPF)
FEED TIME3(DSPF)
Operation/Procedure
FEED TIME4(DSPF)
The high density error history, the half tone error history, and the
automatic registration adjustment error history are displayed.
FEED TIME5(DSPF)
High density error history 1

Half tone error history 1
Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport

time between sensors.
RETRY
LSU1
: 99/99/99
27-13
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-11
ERROR CODE
HV_ERR1
1/1
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT
HV_ERR1
HV_ERR2
HV_ERR3
HV_ERR4
HV_ERR5
H_TONE ERR1
H_TONE ERR2
H_TONE ERR3
H_TONE ERR4
H_TONE ERR5
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-12
DATE
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner

gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Purpose
Automatic registration adjustment error history 1

TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
Operation/Procedure
TEST
AUTO REG ADJ1

AUTO REG ADJ2
AUTO REG ADJ3
AUTO REG ADJ4
AUTO REG ADJ5
FEED TIME6(DSPF)
FEED TIME7(DSPF)
FEED TIME8(DSPF)
FEED TIME9(DSPF)
FEED TIME10(DSPF)
History 1 of paper transport time between

sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
History 1 of paper transport time between DSPF
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
<Cord between sensors>

Sensors A
Sensors B
PPD1
PPD2
PPD2
POD1
POD1
POD2
POM
reverse
rotation
APPD1
POD3
APPD2
APPD2
PPD1
CPUC1
CPFD1
CPFD1
PPD1
Status
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Cord between sensors

Bk
Color
Heavy
paper
0
40
80
1
41
81
2
42
82
3
43
83
4
44
84
5
45
85
6
46
86
FSS TEST MODE SETUP

A:
A:
CONNECTION TEST MODE(1:ON 0:OFF)
0
0
OK
CPUC2
CPFD2
CPFD2
CPFD1
MPUC
SPPD2
PPD1
SPPD3
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPPD5
SPOD
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
On o On
Off o Off
0E
0F
10
11
12
14
15
16
18
19
1A
4E
4F
50
51
52
54
55
56
58
59
5A
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
8E
8F
90
91
92
94
95
96
98
99
9A
CLOSE
SENSOR CODE
PASS TIME
FEED TIME1
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME2
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME3
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME4
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME5
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME6
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME7
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME8
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME9
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME10
: 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME1(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
STANDARD TIME
99999
FEED TIME2(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
FEED TIME3(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME4(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME5(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME6(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED TIME7(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
1/2
27-14
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection

mode. (Only "Disable o Enable" is
allowed.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Section
PPD1
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD
TFD_R
DSW_R
DSW_D
DSW_FU
DSW_FL
VTOD
DHPD_K
DHPD_C
DHPD_M
DHPD_Y
TNFD
TBBOX
CCHP
CCM_ROT
LPPD
T2PPD
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
FUEXD
WEB_INL
WEB_END
PTCM_HP
TBLTC
TBLTB
THPS
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
0: Disable (Default)
SIMULATION NO.27-13
Purpose
30-1
Purpose
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME)

DATE
30
Operation/Procedure
* Sensor A and sensor B On o On : Possibly caused by slip in

paper transport.
Off o Off: The sensor actuator response trouble can be
detected.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-14
TEST
1: Enable
Registration pre-detection
Registration detection
Fusing after-detection
Main unit paper exit detection
Main unit paper exit full detection
Right door open/close detection
Front cover open/close detection D
Front cover open/close detection U
Front cover open/close detection L
Vertical transport path open/close detection
K phase detection
C phase detection
M phase detection
Y phase detection
Waste toner installation detection
Charger cleaner rotation detection
Tray 2 transport detection
Tray 1 transport detection 1
Tray 1 transport detection 2
Fusing external variation sensor
Fusing web initial detection
Fusing web end detection
PTC cleaner HP detection
Secondary transfer separation home position sensor 1
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30-01
FIN SENSOR CHECK

PPD1
33
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD
TFD_R
DSW_R
33-1
DSW_D
DSW_FU
DSW_FL
VTOD
Purpose
DHPD_K
DHPD_C
DHPD_M
DHPD_Y
TNFD
TBBOX
CCHP
COM LOT
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card

reader sensor and the control circuit.
LPPD
T2PPD
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
FUEXD
WEB_INL
WEB_END
PTCM_HP
TBLTC
TBLTB
THPS
Section
Operation/Procedure
1/1

CARD
DATA
CLOCK
30-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
TEST
Card presence detection

Card number signal detection
Reference clock signal detection
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.33-01
CARD READER SENSOR CHECK

CARD
DATA
CLOCK
Section
Operation/Procedure
MPED
MPLD1
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPFD
TANSET
T1SPD
T1LUD
T1PED
T2SPD
T2LUD
T2PED
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
C3SPD
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
C4PFD
C4LUD
C4PED
C4SPD
TRAY3 LEN
TRAY3 AD
TEST
Manual paper feed paper empty detection

Manual feed paper length detection 1
Manual feed tray reduction detection
Manual feed tray extension detection
Manual paper feed paper entry detection
Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector
Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector
Tandem tray 1 paper presence
Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector
Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector
Tandem tray 2 paper presence
Tray 3 lift HP detection
Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 4 lift HP detection
Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 3 guide plate position
Tray 3 paper width detection volume output
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN)

MPED
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30-02
TRAY3_LEN: ****
MPLD1
MTOP1
TRAY3_AD: ***
MPFD
TANSET
T1SPD
T1LUD
T2SPD
T2LUD
T2PED
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
C3SPD
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
C4PFD
C4LUD
C4PED
C4SPD
40
40-2
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width detector detection level adjustment
Section
Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width

(MAX).
2)
3)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the P1 width (A4).
4)
5)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the P2 width (A4R).
6)
7)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width (MIN).
8)
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.

If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MTOP2
T1PED
1/1
MAX POSITION
P1 (A4) POSITION
P2 (A4R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
1/1
Manual feed maximum width

Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Manual feed P2 position width
Manual feed minimum width
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-12
TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
40-7
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray

width detection level.
Section
Paper feed
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Item
MAX POSITION
P1 (A4) POSITION
C
D
P2 (A4R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
TEST
Manual feed maximum width

(A4)
Manual feed minimum width
Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
value
241
231
140
19

OCSW
Document cover status
PD1 - 7
Document detection
sensor status
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-07
TEST
241
0
255
Open: Normal display

Close: Highlighted
No document: Normal display
Document present: Highlighted
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-01
PD SENSOR CHECK
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
A:
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
A
B
41-1
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
41
A : 241
MAX POSITION
B : 231
P1(A4) POSITION
C : 140
P2(A4R) POSITION
D : 19
MIN POSITION
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
OK
40-12
Purpose
41-2
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the tray 3 paper width

detection level adjustment.
Section
Paper feed
1)
Set the tray 3 paper guide to the maximum width (MAX).
2)
Close the tray 3.
3)

Set the tray 3 paper guide to the minimum width (MIN).
Close the tray 3.
6)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor

detection level.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without

any document on the document table.
2)
Set an A3 (11 x 17) paper on the document table, and press

[EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized.

5)
Adjustment
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
4)
1/1
The sensor level with a document is recognized.

When the above operation is completed, it is displayed.
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.

If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.41-02
CLOSE
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE

KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
EXECUTE
41-3
Item
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER CL
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output levels (A/D value) of OCSW and the document detection sensors (PD1 to PD7) are displayed in real time.
The range of PD1 to PD7 light reception (A/D value) is 1 to 255.
(128: Default)
TEST
PD SENSOR DISPLAY
:
OCSW
PD1[
PD2[
PD3[
PD4[
PD5[
PD6[
PD7[
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-03
O
P
WARMUP
FUMON HL_EX
TEMP
WARMUP
FUMOFF TIME
WARM UP END
TIME
HL_UM
HEAVY1
PAPER BW
HL_LM HEAVY1
PAPER BW
1/1
43
43-1
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each

mode.
HL_US HEAVY1
PAPER BW
HL_EX HEAVY1
PAPER BW
HL_UM
HEAVY1
PAPER CL
HL_LM HEAVY
1 PAPER CL
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
HL_US HEAVY1
PAPER CL
HL_EX HEAVY1
PAPER CL
HL_UM
HEAVY2
PAPER BW
HL_LM HEAVY2
PAPER BW
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item
A
HL_UM READY
HL_LM READY
HL_US READY
HL_EX READY
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER BW
Upper thermistor main

set value when ready
standby
Lower thermistor main
set value when ready
standby
Upper thermistor sub set
value when ready
standby
External thermistor set
value when ready
standby
Black and white plain
paper upper thermistor
main set value
paper lower thermistor
main set value
sub set value
paper external
thermistor set value
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
180
185
135
140
165
165
205
205
185
190
150
155
175
180
220
220
HL_US HEAVY2
PAPER BW
AA
HL_EX HEAVY2
PAPER BW
AB
HL_UM
HEAVY2
PAPER CL
HL_LM HEAVY2
PAPER CL
AC
AD
HL_US HEAVY2
PAPER CL
AE
HL_EX HEAVY2
PAPER CL
AF
HL_UM OHP
PAPER
HL_LM OHP
PAPER
HL_US OHP
PAPER
AG
AH
Color plain paper upper

thermistor main set
value
Color plain paper lower
thermistor main set
value
Color plain paper upper
thermistor sub set value
Color plain paper
external thermistor set
value
Fusing motor front
rotation start external
Fusing motor front
rotation continuation
time thermistor set value
Warm up completion
time
Black and white heavy
paper 1 upper thermistor
main set value
paper 1 lower thermistor
main set value
sub set value
paper 1 external
Color heavy paper 1
upper thermistor main
set value
Color heavy paper 1
lower thermistor main
set value
Color heavy paper 1
upper thermistor sub set
value
Color heavy paper 1
value
main set value
paper 2 lower thermistor
main set value
sub set value
paper 2 external
Color heavy paper 2
set value
Color heavy paper 2
set value
Color heavy paper 2
value
Color heavy paper 2
value
OHP upper thermistor
main set value
OHP lower thermistor
main set value
OHP upper thermistor
sub set value
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
175
175
120
120
175
175
205
205
170
175
10
250
250
185
185
130
130
175
175
220
220
185
185
130
130
175
175
205
205
185
185
140
140
185
185
220
220
185
185
140
140
185
185
210
210
180
180
130
130
180
180
Item
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
HL_EX OHP
PAPER
HL_UM ENV
PAPER
HL_LM ENV
PAPER
HL_US ENV
PAPER
HL_EX ENV
PAPER
HL_UM E-STAR
HL_US E-STAR
HL_EX E-STAR
HL_UM PREJOB
AR
HL UM THIN
PAPER BW
AS
HL LM THIN
PAPER BW
AT
HL US THIN
PAPER BW
AU
HL EX THIN
PAPER BW
HL UM THIN
PAPER CL
AV
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL
AX
HL US THIN
PAPER CL
HL EX THIN
PAPER CL
HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
AY
AZ
BA
HL UM REC
PAPER BW
BB
HL LM REC
PAPER BW
BC
HL US REC
PAPER BW
BD
HL EX REC
PAPER BW
BE
HL UM REC
PAPER CL
BF
HL LM REC
PAPER CL
BG
HL US REC
PAPER CL
BH
HL EX REC
PAPER CL
OHP external thermistor

set value
Envelope upper
thermistor main set
value
Envelope lower
thermistor main set
value
Envelope upper
Envelope external
set value when
preheating
Preheating upper
Preheating external
set value when
recovering from
preheating
Black and white thin
main set value
main set value
sub set value
Black and white external
Color thin paper upper
thermistor main set
value
Color thin paper lower
thermistor main set
value
Color thin paper upper
Color thin paper external
Thin paper ready upper
thermistor main set
value
Black and white recycled
main set value
main set value
sub set value
paper external
thermistor main set
value
Color recycled paper
set value
set value
value
value
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
220
220
190
150
Item
BI
HL UM REC
PAPER READY
BJ
COOL DOWN
CTRL
190
220
173
178
A:
70
180
180
A : 180
HL_UM READY
180
B : 135
HL_LM READY
230
C : 165
HL_US READY
D : 205
HL_EX READY
E : 185
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
F : 150
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW
G : 175
HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW
H : 220
HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW
I : 175
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL
J : 120
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL
K : 175
HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL
L : 205
HL_EX PLAIN PAPER CL
195
185
165
130
130
OK
43-4
Purpose
165
165
195
195
165
120
120
165
165
195
195
165
170
175
180
140
145
165
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-01
165
165
165
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
190
220
163
150
TEST
190
Recycled paper reed

temperature value
Cool down YES/NO
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
175
180
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the fusing temperature

setup 2 in each operation mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item
A
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
170
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
220
220
HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
E
165
165
130
130
PLAIN PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
165
165
195
195
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP

paper duplex upper
thermistor main set
value
paper duplex lower
thermistor main set
value
paper duplex upper
paper duplex external
Color plain paper
duplex upper thermistor
main set value
Color plain paper
duplex lower thermistor
main set value
Color plain paper
sub set value
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
185
190
150
155
175
180
220
220
170
170
140
140
165
165
Item
I
HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP APP CNT
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_EX HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HEAVY PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
Color plain paper

duplex external
Color plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets
paper duplex upper
thermistor main set
value
paper duplex lower
thermistor main set
value
paper duplex upper
paper duplex applicable
number of sheets
Color heavy paper
main set value
Color heavy paper
duplex lower thermistor
main set value
Color heavy paper
sub set value
Color heavy paper
duplex external
Color heavy paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets.
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HL_EX HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HEAVY PAPER
CL DUP APP CNT
TEST
Default value
55/6270-sheet
sheet
machine
machine
205
205
180
180
130
3)
Press [OK] key.

Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1qC change

Item
A
HL_UM READY
LL
HL_LM READY
LL
HL_US READY
LL
HL_EX READY
LL
130
180
180
HL_UM PLAIN
BW LL
220
220
HL_LM PLAIN
BW LL
HL_US PLAIN
BW LL
170
170
HL_EX PLAIN
BW LL
120
120
HL_UM PLAIN
CL LL
170
170
HL_LM PLAIN CL
LL
200
200
HL_US PLAIN CL
LL
HL_EX PLAIN CL
LL
WARMUP
FUMON HL_EX
TEMP LL
WARMUP
FUMOFF TIME
LL
WARMUP END
TIME LL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-04
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
A:
70
A :185
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
185
B : 150
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
230
C : 175
HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
D : 220
HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
E:
PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
F : 170
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
G : 140
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
H :165
HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
I : 205
HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
J:
PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT
K : 180
HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
L : 130
HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
OK
43-20
Purpose
HL_UM HEAVY1
BW LL
HL_LM HEAVY1
BW LL
HL_US HEAVY1
BW LL
HL_EX HEAVY1
BW LL
HL UM HEAVY1
CL LL
HL LM HEAVY1
CL LL
HL US HEAVY1
CL LL
HL EX HEAVY1
CL LL
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction

under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting in each
mode (SIM 43-1).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Correction value for upper thermistor

main set value when ready under LL
environment
Correction value for LL environment
ready standby lower thermistor main
set value
sub set value when ready under LL
environment
Correction value for external
thermistor set value when ready
under LL environment
Correction value for black and white
plain paper upper thermistor main set
value under LL environment
black and white plain paper lower
thermistor main set value
plain paper upper thermistor sub set
plain paper external thermistor set
Correction value for color plain paper
upper thermistor main set value
color plain paper lower thermistor
main set value
upper thermistor sub set value under
LL environment
external thermistor set value under
LL environment
fusing motor front rotation start
external thermistor set value
fusing motor front rotation
continuation time
Correction value for warm-up
completion time under LL
environment
black and white heavy paper 1 upper
black and white heavy paper 1 lower
black and white heavy paper 1
heavy paper 1 upper thermistor main
set value
color heavy paper 1 lower thermistor
main set value
heavy paper 1 upper thermistor sub
set value
color heavy paper 1 external
Default
value
65
65
65
60
65
65
65
50
60
60
60
50
40
80
75
65
65
65
50
60
65
60
65
Item
X
HL UM HEAVY2
BW LL
HL LM HEAVY2
BW LL
HL US HEAVY2
BW LL
AA
HL EX HEAVY2
BW LL
AB
HL UM HEAVY2
CL LL
AC
HL LM HEAVY2
CL LL
AD
HL US HEAVY2
CL LL
AE
HL EX HEAVY2
CL LL
AF
HL_UM OHP LL
AG
HL_LM OHP LL
AH
HL_US OHP LL
AI
AJ
HL_EX OHP LL
HL_UM
ENVELOPE LL
AK
HL_LM
ENVELOPE LL
AL
HL_US
ENVELOPE LL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
HL_EX
ENVELOPE LL
HL_UM E-STAR
LL
HL_US E-STAR
LL
HL_EX E-STAR
LL
HL_UM PREJOB LL
HL UM THIN
PAPER BW LL
HL LM THIN
PAPER BW LL
AT
HL US THIN
PAPER BW LL
AU
HL EX THIN
PAPER BW LL
AV
HL UM THIN
PAPER CL LL

set value
main set value
set value
Correction value for OHP upper
thermistor main set value under LL
environment
OHP lower thermistor mains et value
thermistor sub set value under LL
environment
Correction value for OHP external
thermistor set value under LL
environment
Correction value for envelope upper
thermistor main set value under LL
environment
envelope lower thermistor main set
value
Correction value for envelope upper
thermistor sub set value under LL
environment
Correction value for envelope
LL environment
main set value when preheating
preheating upper thermistor sub set
value
preheating external thermistor set
value
main set value when recovering from
preheating under LL environment
black and white thin paper upper
black and white thin paper lower
black and white thin paper external
color thin paper upper thermistor
main set value
Default
value
65
Item
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL LL
65
AX
HL US THIN
PAPER CL LL
65
AY
HL EX THIN
PAPER CL LL
50
AZ
65
BA
HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
LL
HL UM REC
PAPER BW LL
65
BB
HL LM REC
PAPER BW LL
65
BC
HL US REC
PAPER BW LL
60
BD
HL EX REC
PAPER BW LL
65
BE
HL UM REC
PAPER CL LL
65
BF
HL LM REC
PAPER CL LL
BG
HL US REC
PAPER CL LL
BH
HL EX REC
PAPER CL LL
BI
HL UM REC
PAPER READY
LL

color thin paper lower thermistor
main set value
color thin paper upper thermistor sub
set value
color thin paper external thermistor
set value
thin paper ready upper thermistor
main temperature value
black and white recycled paper upper
black and white recycled paper lower
black and white recycled paper
color recycled paper upper
color recycled paper lower thermistor
main set value
color recycled paper external
recycled paper ready upper
thermistor main temperature value
65
50
60
60
TEST
60
Default
value
55
55
50
55
55
55
55
50
55
55
55
50
55
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-20
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)
A:
65
50
1
99
60
60
55
60
A : 65
HL_UM READY LL
B : 65
HL_LM READY LL
C : 65
HL_US READY LL
D : 60
HL_EX READY LL
E : 65
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
F : 65
HL_LM PLAIN BW LL
G : 65
HL_US PLAIN BW LL
H : 50
HL_EX PLAIN BW LL
I : 60
HL_UM PLAIN CL LL
J : 60
HL_LM PLAIN CL LL
K : 60
HL_US PLAIN CL LL
L : 50
HL_EX PLAIN CL LL
OK
55
43-21
55
55
50
55
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction

under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Item

X
HL UM HEAVY2
BW HH
HL LM HEAVY2
BW HH
HL US HEAVY2
BW HH
AA
HL EX HEAVY2
BW HH
AB
HL UM HEAVY2
CL HH
AC
HL LM HEAVY2
CL HH
AD
HL US HEAVY2
CL HH
AE
HL EX HEAVY2
CL HH
AF
HL_UM OHP HH
AG
HL_LM OHP HH
AH
HL_US OHP HH
AI
HL_EX OHP HH
AJ
HL_UM
ENVELOPE HH
AK
HL_LM
ENVELOPE HH
AL
HL_US
ENVELOPE HH
50
AM
HL_EX
ENVELOPE HH
50
AN
HL_UM E-STAR
HH
50
AO
HL US E-STAR
HH
50
AP
HL EX E-STAR
HH
50
AQ
HL_UM PREJOB HH
50
AR
HL UM THIN
PAPER BW HH
50
AS
HL LM THIN
PAPER BW HH
50
AT
HL US THIN
PAPER BW HH
50
AU
HL EX THIN
PAPER BW HH
50
AV
HL UM THIN
PAPER CL HH

Item
A
HL_UM READY
HH
HL_LM READY
HH
HL_US READY
HH
HL_EX READY
HH
HL_UM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_LM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_US PLAIN
BW HH
HL_EX PLAIN
BW HH
HL_UM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_LM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_US PLAIN
CL HH
HL_EX PLAIN CL
HH
WARMUP
FUMON HL_UM
T HH
WARMUP
FUMOFF HL_EX
TEMP HH
WARMUP END
TIME HH
HL_UM HEAVY1
BW HH
HL_LM HEAVY1
BW HH
HL_US HEAVY1
BW HH
HL_EX HEAVY1
BW HH
HL UM HEAVY1
CL HH
HL LM HEAVY1
CL HH
HL US HEAVY1
CL HH
HL EX HEAVY1
CL HH

main set value when ready standby
under HH environment
Correction value for HH environment
ready standby lower thermistor main
set value
sub set value when ready standby
Correction value for external
thermistor set value when ready
plain paper upper thermistor main set
value under HH environment
black and white plain paper lower
plain paper upper thermistor sub set
plain paper external thermistor set
upper thermistor main set value
color plain paper lower thermistor
main set value
HH environment
HH environment
Correction value for fusing motor
previous rotation start external
thermistor set value under HH
environment
fusing motor front rotation
continuation time
Correction value for warm-up
completion time under HH
environment
set value
main set value
set value
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

set value
main set value
set value
thermistor main set value under HH
environment
OHP lower thermistor mains et value
thermistor sub set value under HH
environment
Correction value for OHP external
environment
Correction value for enveloper upper
thermistor main set value under HH
environment
envelope lower thermistor main set
value
Correction value for enveloper upper
thermistor sub set value under HH
environment
Correction value for envelope
HH environment
main set value when preheating
preheating upper thermistor sub set
value
preheating external thermistor set
value
main set value when recovering from
preheating under HH environment
black and white thin paper lower
black and white thin paper external
color thin paper upper thermistor
main set value
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
45
45
45
45
45
Item
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL HH
AX
HL US THIN
PAPER CL HH
AY

color thin paper lower thermistor
main set value
color thin paper upper thermistor sub
set value
color thin paper external thermistor
set value
thin paper ready upper thermistor
main temperature value
black and white recycled paper lower
black and white recycled paper
color recycled paper lower thermistor
main set value
color recycled paper external
recycled paper ready upper
thermistor main temperature value
HL EX THIN
PAPER CL HH
AZ
HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
HH
HL UM REC
PAPER BW HH
BA
BB
HL LM REC
PAPER BW HH
BC
HL US REC
PAPER BW HH
BD
HL EX REC
PAPER BW HH
BE
HL UM REC
PAPER CL HH
BF
HL LM REC
PAPER CL HH
BG
HL US REC
PAPER CL HH
BH
HL EX REC
PAPER CL HH
BI
HL UM REC
PAPER READY
HH
TEST
Default
value
45
Press [OK] key.


Item
45
A
HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_EX PLAIN
BW DUP LL
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT LL
HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN
CL DUP LL
HL_EX PLAIN
CL DUP LL
PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT LL
HL_UM HEAVY
BW DUP LL
HL_LM HEAVY
BW DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY
BW DUP LL
HL_EX HEAVY
BW DUP LL
HEAVY BW
DUP APP CNT
LL
HL_UM HEAVY
CL DUP LL
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-21
3)
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH)
A:
50
1
99
A : 50
HL_UM READY HH
B : 50
HL_LM READY HH
C : 50
HL_US READY HH
D : 50
HL_EX READY HH
E : 50
HL_UM PLAIN BW
F : 50
HL_LM PLAIN BW HH
G : 50
HL_US PLAIN BW HH
HH
H : 50
HL_EX PLAIN BW HH
I : 50
HL_UM PLAIN CL HH
J : 50
HL_LM PLAIN CL HH
K: 50
HL_US PLAIN CL HH
L:
HL_EX PLAIN CL HH
50
HL_LM HEAVY
CL DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY
CL DUP LL
HL_EX HEAVY
CL DUP LL
HEAVY CL DUP
APP CNT LL
OK
43-22
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting

under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

plain paper duplex upper thermistor
main set value under LL environment
black and white plain paper duplex
lower thermistor main set value
plain paper duplex upper thermistor
sub set value under LL environment
plain paper duplex external thermistor
set value under LL environment
plain paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under LL environment
duplex upper thermistor main set value
color plain paper duplex lower
duplex upper thermistor sub set value
duplex external thermistor set value
duplex applicable number of sheets
heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
main set value under LL environment
black and white duplex lower thermistor
main set value
sub set value under LL environment
heavy paper duplex external thermistor
set value under LL environment
heavy paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under LL environment
Correction value for color heavy paper
duplex upper thermistor main set value
black and white heavy paper duplex
Default
value
60
60
60
50
50
55
55
55
50
50
60
60
60
50
50
65
65
65
65
50
TEST
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL:DUP)
A:
60
1
99
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-22
A : 60
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
B : 60
HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL
C : 60
HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL
D : 50
HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP LL
E : 50
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
F : 55
HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL
G : 55
HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL
H : 55
HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL
I : 50
HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP LL
J : 50
PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL
K : 60
HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL
L : 60
HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY
BW DUP HH
HL_EX HEAVY
BW DUP HH
HEAVY BW DUP
APP CNT HH
HL_UM HEAVY
CL DUP HH
HL_LM HEAVY
CL DUP HH
HL_US HEAVY
CL DUP HH
HL_EX HEAVY
CL DUP HH
HEAVY CL DUP
APP CNT HH

sub set value under HH environment
heavy paper duplex external
environment
heavy paper duplex applicable
number of sheets under HH
environment
duplex upper thermistor main set
black and white heavy paper duplex
OK
43-23
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting

under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
TEST
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
A:
50
1
99

Item
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP HH
HL_EX PLAIN
BW DUP HH
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT HH
HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP HH
HL_EX PLAIN CL
DUP HH
PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT HH
HL_UM HEAVY
BW DUP HH
HL_LM HEAVY
BW DUP HH
50
50
50
50
50
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-23
HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
50
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH: DUP)
1)
Default
value
50

upper thermistor main set value under
HH environment
black and white plain paper duplex
HH environment
plain paper duplex external thermistor
set value under HH environment
plain paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under HH environment
duplex upper thermistor main set
color plain paper duplex lower
main set value under HH environment
black and white duplex lower
Default
value
50
50
A : 50
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
B : 50
HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
C : 50
HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH
D : 50
HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP HH
E : 50
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH
F : 50
HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH
G 50
HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH
H 50
HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH
I : 50
HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP HH
J : 50
PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH
K : 50
HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH
L : 50
HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH
OK
50
50
43-24
Purpose
50
50
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 434.
Section
Operation/Procedure
50
50
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

50
50
50
50
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
NN_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
NN_120_ WUP_HL_LM
NN_120_WUP_HL_EX
LL_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
LL_120_ WUP_HL_LM
LL_120_WUP_HL_EX
HH_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
HH_120_ WUP_HL_LM
HH_120_WUP_HL_EX
ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
ON_120_WUP_HL_US
ON_120_WUP_HL_EX
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
NN_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
NN_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_LM
NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX
LL_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX
HH_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
HH_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_LM
HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
COOL_DOWN_OHP
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
WUP DUP TIME
AC
AD
FUS MOTOR
BW JOB TH_UM TEMP
AE
CL JOB TH_UM TEMP
AF
AM
ACS (COL-BW) FUN TH

TEMP
ACS (BW-COL) FUN TH
TEMP
ACS (BW-COL) UN TH
TEMP
TH_EX CORRELATION
(TH_UM)
TH_EX CORRELATION
(TH_US)
BW JOB ELECTRICITY SET
COL JOB ELECTRICITY
SET
JOB ELECTRICITY TEMP
AN
POWER SET
AO
TH_EX TWO_WAY SET
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Warm-up completion
temperature correction
value
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
NN environment
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
LL environment
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
HH environment
Temperature
correction value during
temperature correction
immediately after
completion of warm-up
Fusing temperature
correction value
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
NN environment
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
LL environment
When power
booting at lower
than 120qC under
HH environment
Upper heater lamp main/

sub
Lower heater lamp main
External heater lamp main
sub
External heater lamp
Upper heater lamp main
Default value
100V series
200V series
55/6255/6270-sheet
70-sheet
sheet
sheet
machine
machine
machine
machine
60
55
60
55
60
50
60
55
50
60
60
50
60
55
50
60
60
45
60
60
45
55
60
45
60
60
45
55

Lower heater lamp
60
50
50
50
50
55
50
50
50
50
60
50
50
50
50
55
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

sub
sub
50
55
50
55
50
55
50
55
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
0
0
0
15
30
40
1
50
0
0
0
15
30
40
1
50
0
0
0
15
30
40
1
50
0
0
0
15
30
40
1
6
80
6
80
6
80
6
80
50
50
50
50
45
45
45
45
65
65
65
65
45
45
45
45
40
40
40
40

Under NN environment
Under LL environment
Under HH environment
Cool-down time
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Temperature correction duration time immediately after completion of
warm-up
Fusing web motor operation interval
Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when
starting a BW job
Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when
starting a BW job
FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set
value when ACS (COL o BW)
FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set
value when ACS (BW o COL)
Upper thermistor main judgment temperature set value when ACS (shifting
BW o COL)
Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor main
0: NO, 1: YES
Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor sub
0: NO, 1: YES
Compulsory conduction when starting a BW job. 0: No, 1: Yes
Compulsory conduction when starting a COL job. 0: No, 1: Yes
Fusing duplex paper
exit count
Correction value of temperature for executing compulsory conduction

when starting a job
Power voltage setting
1: 100V
2: 110V
3: 115V
4: 120V
5: 127V
6: 210V
7: 220V
8: 230V
9: 240V
External thermistor reciprocating control
Default value
100V series
200V series
55/6255/6270-sheet
70-sheet
sheet
sheet
machine
machine
machine
machine
45
45
40
40
50
50
50
50
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
6
6
4
4
6
6
10
10
0
0
0
0
Item
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AV
TH_EX TWO_WAY MIN

TH_EX TWO_WAY MAX
READY ROTATION SET
BPP SET
HL_LM CYCLE
HL_LM TIME
LL INTERVAL SET
TEST
Lower temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control

Upper temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control
Slow rotation execution when ready, 0: NO, 1: YES
BPP control, 1: NO, 1:YES
Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting cycle (sec)
Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting time (100msec)
Intermittent drive interval setting in LL (0: No drive, in sec, rotation time
5sec)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-24
JOB END COMP

ACT CHECK
Fusing web motor

compulsory operation
conditions
JOB END COMP

ACT INTERVAL
JOB END COMP

ACT CNT
Print quantity interval of

fusing web motor compulsory
operation
Number of fusing web motor
compulsory operations
FUSER TEMP RESET
A:
60
1
99
A 60
NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
B 60
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_EX
D 60
LL_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
E 60
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
F 45
LL_120_WUP_HL_EX
G 60
HH_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
H 60
HH_120_WUP_HL_LM
I 50
HH_120_WUP_HL_EX
TEST
0: Allow
1: Inhibit
(Default)
1 - 230
(100: Default)
1 - 20
(1: Default)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-32
JOB END WEB CLEANING COMPULSORY CHECK
J 50
ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
K 50
ON_120_WUP_HL_US
L 50
ON_120_WUP_HL_EX
A:
A:
1
0
JOB END COMP ACT CHECK
B : 100
JOB END COMP ACT INTERVAL
C:
JOB END COMP ACT CNT
OK
43-31
OK
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing

web cleaning motor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
44
44-1
Setting
Purpose
The fusing web cleaning motor is operated.

* Remove the fusing unit, and check the rotation of the motor with
the door open.
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
Process
(Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Section
TEST
SIMULATION NO.43-31
CLOSE
Operation/Procedure
FUSER WEB CLEANING CHECK
1)
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. (The selected

item is highlighted.)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item
HV
HT
EXECUTE
1/1
MD VG
43-32
Purpose
TC
Adjustment/Setting
MD LD
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compulsory operation of

fusing web cleaning at job end.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
High-density process control of normal

operation
Half tone process control of normal
operation
Transfer output, transfer high voltage
output voltage correction
correction
correction
Membrane decrease environment grid
voltage correction
Membrane decrease discharge light
quantity correction
membrane decrease environment
discharge light quantity correction
Toner density humidity correction
Toner density area correction
Toner density life correction
Default
value
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Item
TN_COV
TN_PROCON
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
DM_PHASE
TN_SENSITIVITY
AR_PHASE
PRT_HT
Toner density print rate correction

Toner density process control correction
Toner density environment correction
Toner density correction unconditional
supply
Toner compulsory consumption mode
1-pixel half tone process control correction
Automatic registration adjustment
Error check during execution of automatic
registration adjustment
Drum phase alignment
Toner sensitivity correction
Phase between colors and motor
modulation readjustment when resist
adjustment automatic execution after
turning on the power
Half tone process control printer correction
feedback *1
Default
value
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
*1: Not displayed when an option FIERY is installed.

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-01
TEST
MODE SETTING
HV
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_PROCON
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
DM_PHASE
TN_SENSITIVITY
AR_PHASE
PRT_HTY
Item
M
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELTMAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
U
V
W
REG_F PATCH(K)
REG_F PATCH(C)
REG_F PATCH(M)
X
Y
REG_F PATCH(Y)
REG_R PATCH(K)
REG_R PATCH(C)
AA
REG_R PATCH(M)
AB
REG_R PATCH(Y)
TEST
1/1
44-2
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Image density sensor gain adjustment

Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
PCS_CL LED ADJ
21
PCS_K LED ADJ
21
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
27
REG_R LED ADJ
27
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX :
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
44-4
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Purpose
Item
PCS_K LED ADJ
C
D
E
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
F
G
H
PCS_K BELT MAX

PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
REG_R LED ADJ
K
L
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
Color sensor light emitting quantity

adjustment value
Black sensor light emitting quantity
adjustment value
Color dark voltage
Black dark voltage
Belt surface when the item B
Belt surface input max. value
Belt surface input min. value
Belt surface input difference (Item
E, Item F)
Resist sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value F
Resist sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value R
Resist sensor dark voltage F
Resist sensor dark voltage R
Default
value
21
EXECUTE
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is displayed.
PCS_CL LED ADJ
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed automatically.
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
Purpose
Belt surface when the item I

Belt surface when the item J
Belt surface input max. value (F
side)
Belt surface input min. value (F
side)
O, Item P)
Belt surface input max. value (R
side)
Belt surface input min. value (R
side)
R, Item S)
Patch light reception potential F (K)
Patch light reception potential F (C)
Patch light reception potential F
(M)
Patch light reception potential F (Y)
Patch light reception potential R
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
Default
value
0
1/2
(Do not use this function unless specially

required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target density level in the

image density correction.
Section
21
0
0
0
Operation/Procedure
Item
A
B
C
PCS_CL TARGET
PCS_K TARGET
LED_CL OUTPUT
LED_K OUTPUT
27
27
PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
BELT GROUND DIF
0
0
0
0
0
Color sensor target value

Black sensor target value
Color sensor light emitting
quantity
Black sensor light emitting
quantity
Sensor adjustment target limit
value
Effective difference between
upper/loser values of belt oneround surface
Default
value
98
155
21
21
4
255
Default
value
0
Item
G
BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
BIAS_BW
STANDARD DIF
BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
BIAS_PATCH BW
INTERVAL
Y_PAT TARGET ID
M_PAT TARGET ID
C_PAT TARGET ID
K_PAT TARGET ID
BW_PAT TARGET
ID
HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
H
I
J
K
TEST
Bias (for color) reference

calculation difference
Bias (for black) reference
calculation difference
Reference calculation difference
in high speed mode
Patch bias output interval
0
0
60
BW patch bias output interval
45
Patch density standard value

(yellow)
(magenta)
(cyan)
(black)
BW process control execution BK
target
Surface light reception effective
area value at the patch position
115
44-9
Function (Purpose) Used to check data of correction results in
the image forming section.
Operation/Procedure
Mode
CPY/
PRN
120
7
CPY/
PRN
29
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-04
PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP
A:
1
A : 98
PCS_CL TARGET
98
B : 155
PCS_K TARGET
255
C : 21
LED_CL OUTPUT
D : 21
LED_K OUTPUT
E:
POS ADJUSTMENT LIMIT
F : 255
BELT GROUND DIF
G:
BIAS_CL STANDARD DIF
H:
BIAS_BK STANDARD DIF
I:
BIAS_BW STANDARD DIF
J:
60
BIAS PATCH INTERVAL
K : 45
BIAS_PATCH BW INTERVAL
L : 115
Y_PAT TARGET ID
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Section
130
Purpose
OTHER
BLACK_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
CYAN_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
BLACK_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
CYAN_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
BLACK_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
CYAN_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
BLACK_H: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
TN HUD AREA
TN HUD DATA
OK
TC TMP AREA
TC TMP DATA
44-6
TC HUD AREA
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process

correction compulsorily.
TC HUD DATA
Section
MD HUD AREA
Operation/Procedure
MD HUD DATA

In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed. (Refer
to the table below.)
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
K_HV_ERR
C_HV_ERR
M_HV_ERR
Y_HV_ERR
TIMEOUT_ERR
TEST
Color sensor adjustment abnormality

Black sensor adjustment abnormality
K high density process control abnormality
C high density process control abnormality
M high density process control abnormality
Y high density process control abnormality
Time out
SIMULATION NO.44-06
CLOSE
PROCON COMPULSORY EXECUTION

Default
value
Item
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG):
L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
EXECUTE
High density process

control
GB/DV data
GB: 620 (K)

635 (CMY)
DV: 450
High density normal

(Medium speed)
GB/DV data
GB: 620 (K)

635 (CMY)
DV: 450
High density normal

(Low speed)
GB/DV data
GB: 585 (K)

600 (CMY)
DV: 420
High density normal

(High speed)
GB/DV data
Toner concentration
humidity area
Toner concentration
humidity AD value
Transfer temperature
area
Transfer temperature
AD value
Transfer humidity
area
Transfer humidity AD
value
Membrane decrease
humidity area
Membrane decrease
humidity AD value
Drum membrane
decrease correction
STEP
GB: 690
DV: 450
Drum travelling
distance
Drum membrane
decrease grid voltage
correction
9
0
4
0
4
0
9
0
0
Mode
OTHER
Item
MD K REVISE(LD):
L *** M *** H ***
MD C REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV):
L *** M *** H ***
MD C REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(CP):
L *** M *** H ***
MD C REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE BW (DL):
L *** M *** H ***
MD K REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE BW
(DL EV): L *** M *** H ***
DESTINATION
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CRUM DEST_K2
PROCON COUNT HV
PROCON COUNT HT
Drum membrane
decrease laser power
voltage correction
Default
value
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-09
PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON / NORMAL(M) / NORMAL(L) / NORMAL(H))

BLACK_P
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/620
BLACK_N
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/620
CYAN_P
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635
CYAN_N
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
MAGENTA_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635

YELLOW_P
High density
membrane decrease
environment GB
correction
Drum membrane
decrease
environment grid
voltage correction
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635
YELLOW_N
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
BLACK_L
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/585
CYAN_L
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
MAGENTA_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
CPY/PRN
YELLOW_L
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
BLACK_H
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
1/1
OTHER
44-12
Purpose
Drum membrane
decrease discharge
light quantity
correction
MAGENTA_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
70
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sampling toner image

patch density data in the image density correction.
Section
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
Operation/Procedure
Item
80
Drum membrane
decrease
environment
discharge light
quantity correction
CARB DATA
SEAL ADJ DATA
ADK_SL(K)
Calibration plate sensor value

Jig patch seal sensor value
Developing characteristics gradient
coefficient
Developing characteristics intercept
coefficient
Sensor target value set value
Color sensor target set value
ADK_INT(K)
ID(K)
ID(CMY)
TEST
Default
value
108
108
0
0
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-12
PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY

CARB DATA
Main unit side

destination
Main unit model type
CRUM destination
High density process

control execution
number
Half tone process
control execution
number
: 108
SEAL ADJ DATA : 108
ADK_SL(K)
: 0.00
ADK_INT(K)
: 0.0
TARGET(K)
: 0.00
TARGET(C)
: 0.00
TARGET(M)
: 0.00
TARGET(Y)
: 0.00
TARGET
PATCH
1/1
44-13
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image sensor.

Section
Operation/Procedure
For details of the procedures, refer to [ADJ 7A] in [6] ADJUSTMENTS.
Item
A
B
C
PCS_CL CARB OUT

PCS_CL DARK
PCS_CL LED ADJ
Calibration plate sensor value

Color dark voltage
Color sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value
Default
value
108
0
21
Operation/Procedure
PATCH
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
TEST
SEAL
ADJUSTMENT
PCS CL CARB OUT
108
PCS CL DARK
PCS CL LED ADJ
21
Item
TONER DEN_LT
(M)
TONER DEN_ST
(M)
OK
EXECUTE
1/1
C: Standard value 60 r 10 after adjustment

44-14
ALL (M)
Adjustment, setting, operation data check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output level of the temperature/humidity sensor.
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine

temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
TH_UM
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
TH_LM
TH_US
TH_EX1
TH_EX2
TH_M
HUD_M
TH1_LSU
DV_HUM
DV_TH
TEST
Fusing upper thermistor main A/D value (differential)

(temperature qC)
Fusing upper thermistor main compensation sensor
temperature value/AD value (compensation)
(temperature qC)
Fusing upper thermistor main sensor AD value
(detection)
Fusing lower thermistor main A/D value (temperature
qC)
Fusing upper thermistor sub A/D value (temperature qC)
Fusing external thermistor A/D value (temperature qC)
Fusing external thermistor 2 A/D value (temperature qC)
Manual feed temperature sensor A/D value
(temperature qC)
Manual feed humidity sensor A/D value (humidity %)
LSU thermistor 1 A/D value (temperature qC)
Developing tank humidity detection
Developing tank temperature detection
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-14
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR

TH_UM
255deg / XXX
TH_UM_AD1
255.0deg / XXX
TH_UM_AD2
XXX
TH_LM
255deg / XXX
TH_US
255deg / XXX
TH_EX1
255deg / XXX
TH_EX2
255deg / XXX
TH_M
60.0deg / XXX
HUD_M
90.0% / XX
TH1_LSU
60.0deg / XX
DV_HUM
90.0% / XXX
DV_TH
60.0deg / XX
ALL (L)
AUTO DEVE (H)

ALL (H)
AREA
HUD
PRINT RATE
PROCON
LIFE
SENSITIVITY
AUTO DEVE VO
(M)
ALL VO (M)
AUTO DEVE VO
(L)
ALL VO (L)
AREA VO
HUD VO
PRINT RATE VO
PROCON VO
LIFE VO
SENSITIVITY VO
44-16
ENV VO
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner density control

data.
Section
AUTO DEVE (L)
AUTO DEVE VO
(H)
ALL VO (H)
1/1
Purpose
TONER DEN_LT
(L)
TONER DEN_ST
(L)
TONER DEN_LT
(H)
TONER DEN_ST
(H)
AUTO DEVE (M)
AUTO DEVE
AREA
AREA
Medium speed toner density sensor

output value (final value) (KCMY)
Medium speed toner density reference
value (including the correction value)
(KCMY)
Low speed toner density sensor output
value (final value) (KCMY)
Low speed toner density reference value
(including the correction value) (KCMY)
High speed toner density sensor output
value (final value) (K)
High speed toner density reference value
(including the correction value) (K)
Automatic development adjustment value
(middle speed)
All correction reference value (middle
speed) for automatic development
adjustment value (KCMY)
(low speed)
All correction reference value (low
speed) for automatic development
(high speed)
All correction reference value (high
speed) for the automatic development
Correction value for environment area
(KCMY)
Correction value for humidity change
(KCMY)
Correction value for document print ratio
(KCMY)
Correction value for high density process
control result (KCMY)
Correction value for developer life
(KCMY)
Correction for toner density sensor
sensitivity
Automatic development adjustment
control voltage value (middle speed)
Control voltage correction reference
value (middle speed) (KCMY) for
automatic development adjustment value
control voltage adjustment (low speed)
value (low speed) (KCMY) for the
automatic development adjustment value
control voltage value (high speed)
value (high speed) (K) for the automatic
development adjustment value
Control voltage correction value for the
environment area
Humidity change control voltage
correction value (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
for the document print rate
for the high density process control result
Control voltage correction voltage
(KCMY) for the developer life
for the toner density sensor sensitivity
under high humidity environment
Humidity change (KCMY) in automatic
development adjustment
Current humidity display (KCMY)
Default
value
129
128
129
128
129
128
128
500
128
500
0
8
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.44-16
TEST
CLOSE
TONER CONTROL DATA DISPLAY

:
129
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-24
TEST
TONER DEN_LT(M)
HALF TONE PROCON RESULT DISPLAY
TONER DEN_ST(M)
128
[RIZE]
TONER DEN_LT(L)
129
[EX-LOW]
A:
0.0
TONER DEN_ST(L)
128
[LOW]
A:
TONER DEN_LT(H)
129
[CONNECT]
A:
TONER DEN_ST(H)
128
[MID]
A:
0.014
, B:
-2.598
[HIGH]
A:
-0.120
, B:
-35.708
16
[SATURATE]
NEXT
[STEP]
100.0
-0.013
, B:
-0.569
0.0
, B:
0.0
[CONNECT POINT] #1:100,
109
, B:
#2:
86,
#3:
86,
#4:
9.3
, C:
107.444
, C:
139.245
25
1/1
K
NEXT
1/1
44-21
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control.
Purpose
Process
Section
44-25
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial conditions of the process control half tone correction.
Operation/Procedure
The process control reference value is registered.
Section
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST

Item
A
1ST PATCH
2ND PATCH
3RD PATCH
4TH PATCH
5TH PATCH
EXECUTE
44-22
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correction).
TEST
60
80
100
255
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-25
HALF TONE PROCON INITIAL VALUE DISPLAY
A:
Section
40
0
255
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Half tone process control 1ST step No. 1

patch print gradation
Default
value
40
A : 40
1ST PATCH
B:
60
2ND PATCH
C:
80
3RD PATCH
D : 100
4TH PATCH
E : 255
5TH PATCH
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-22
HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT

PTM
PTY
ID 1 :
PTK/BASE PTC
255/255
255
255
255
ID 2 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 4 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255/255
255
255
255
OK
44-26
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily.
1ST STEP
2ND STEP
Process
Section
1/1
Operation/Procedure
The process control is started compulsorily.
44-24
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the process control result.

Section
For the result of the process control compulsory execution, refer to

the table below.
COMPLETE
INTERRUPTION
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
[YMCK]
CONNECTION_ERR
Normal completion
Compulsory interruption
Color sensor adjustment abnormality
Black sensor adjustment abnormality
High density process control [YMCK] abnormality
Communication abnormality
TEST
SIMULATION NO.44-26
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-27
TEST
HALF TONE PROCON ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
EXECUTE
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
44-27
Purpose
Data clear
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the half tone process correction value.
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution

timing.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Item
A
SW ON
When the power is supplied (when sleep is canceled.)
24H
When 24 hours or more passed with READY (sleep setting)
HUM
REV1
REC2
INITIAL
When a change in temperature/humidity for each Item I is

greater than item K when compared with the previous
process control execution
When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after supplying
the power.
When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after execution
of the previous density correction
Warm-up after clearing counter of photoconductor and
developer unit
PIX
When the toner consumption counter reaches the specified

accumulated count.
HUM_LIMIT
The setting condition of item C is added to items A to G.
BK ONLY
Monochrome print continuation BK process control execution

inhibit/allow setting and number of repetitions
BW_HV
Monochrome speed high density process control execution

setting
HUM HOUR
L
M
HUM_DIF
BK_RATIO
Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval

(h: hour)
Item C area difference specified value
Item E BK photoconductor specified accumulated rotation
distance value
Intermittent print for every 3
Default
value
0
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Inhibit
0:
1:
Allow
Inhibit
0:
1:
Allow
Inhibit
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
0:
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Inhibit
Allow: Five times
Allow: Once
Allow: Twice
Allow: Three times
Allow: Four times
Allow: Five times
Inhibit
BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BW process control execution
when a certain condition is satisfied
1: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BW process control execution
3: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BK process control execution,
continuous BW process control execution
4: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, 4-color process control
execution, continuous BW process control execution
6: BKpr inhibit/BWpr allow, only BK process control inhibit
7: BKpr allow/BWpr inhibit, only BW process control inhibit
1 - 24
1-9
1 - 999
10: Equivalent to every 80
0
0
0
1
1
5
2
2
20
Default
value
20
Item
N
M_RATIO
Item E M photoconductor specified accumulated rotation

distance value
Intermittent print for every 3
O
P
PIX_RATIO
COLOR BORDER
HT_DIF
BW_RATIO
2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME1
2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME2
2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME3
Item G toner consumption count specified accumulated value

M photoconductor traveling distance upper limit when
executing BK process control
HT process control execution judgment bias change value
difference value
BW process control BK photoconductor traveling distance
magnification ratio setting (%)
Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment
threshold value 1 (Unit: Sheet of paper)
T
U
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-28
0
0
A:
; SW ON : YES
B:
; 24H : YES
C:
; HUM : YES
D:
; REV1 : YES
E:
; REV2 : YES
F:
; INITIAL : YES
40
1 - 999
20
1 - 999
200
1 - 999
300
1 - 999
500
44-31
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the phase of the photoconductor.

Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Since it is rather difficult to perform the manual photoconductor phase adjustment with this simulation, use SIM 5022 to perform the automatic adjustment.
G:
; PIX : NO
H:
; HUM_LIMIT : NO
I:
; BK ONLY
J:
; BW_HV
K:
; HUM HOUR
L:
; HUM_DIF
Item
A
PRINT
MODE
Print mode
BASE
COLOR
Print color select
PHASE (C)
C tandem phase
setting
Y sensor reference C
phase state is
changed up to 355q for
every 5q.
PHASE (M)
M tandem phase
setting
Y sensor reference M
phase state is
changed up to 355q for
every 5q.
START
POINT (CL)
Color modulation
timing delay setting
Y sensor reference
color modulation start
timing is changed up
to 355q for every 5q.
AMPLITUDE
(CL)
Color modulation
amplitude correction
value setting
OK
44-29
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to select the half tone correction during a job.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
A
B
C
D
COPY
PRINTER
FAX
SELF PRINT
TEST
Copier
Printer
FAX
Self print
0-4
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
No execution
HV only
HV o PHT
HV o HT
HV o PHT o HT
Default
value
4
2
2
4
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-29
HALF TONE SETTING
A:
4
0
100
20
1 - 255
Purpose
PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT
A:
1 - 999
1 - 999
1 - 999
A:
COPY : HV
PHT
B:
PRINTER : HV
C:
FAX : HV
D:
SELF PRINT : HV
PHT
HT
PHT
4
PHT
HT
OK
1: Deflection
check pattern
print for every
45q (8-sheet
print)
2: Deflection
check pattern
print for every
90q (4-sheet
print)
3: Check pattern
print at the set
value (1-sheet
print)
1: BK
2: C
3: M
4: Y
0: 0q
1: 5q
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
0: 0q
1: 5q
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
0: 0q
1: 5q
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
0 - 15
Default
value
3
Default
value
0
Item
G
START
POINT (BK)
AMPLITUDE
(BK)
PAPER
MULTI
COUNT
PAPER
TYPE
BK modulation timing
delay setting
BK sensor reference
BK modulation start
timing is changed up
to 355q for every 5q.
BK modulation
amplitude correction
value setting
Tray selection
Print quantity
Paper type
0: 0q
1: 5q
TEST
A:
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
0 - 15
3
1
1: Manual feed
2: Tray 1
3: Tray 2
4: Tray 3
5: Tray 4
6: LCC
1 - 999
1:
2:
3:
4:
Normal paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
DRUM POSITION SETTING

A: 3
PRINT MODE : SET VALUE
B: 1
BASE COLOR : K
C: 0
PHASE(C) : 0DEG
D: 0
PHASE(M) : 0DEG
E: 0
START POINT (CL) : 0DEG
F: 0
AMPLITUDE (CL)
G: 0
START POINT(BK) : 0DEG
H: 0
AMPLITUDE (BK)
I:
PAPER : CS1
J:
MULTI COUNT
K: 1
PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
EXECUTE
OK
44-37
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image density correction setting.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Button
K
Select a target color for setting with touch panel.
2)
Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys.
3)
4)
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3
DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1
M
N
O
DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_1
Q
R
S
DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_1
DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_2
DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_3
DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_4
Color print developing bias correction data 1 (low speed)

Color print developing bias correction data 1 (Medium speed)
Black and white print developing bias correction data 1 (High speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10[s] low speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10[s], less than 60 [s] low
speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60[s], less than 240 [s] low
speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (less than 240 [s] low speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle
speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle
speed)
Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed)
Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] high speed)
Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60
[s] high speed)
Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240
[s] high speed)
Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] high speed)
Default
value
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
3
1
1
4
3
1
1
4
3
1
1
Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed)

Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed)
Developing bias correction start position data (less than 10 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data (more than 240 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed)
Default
value
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
3
1
1
4
3
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
3
1
1
4
Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed)

Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed)
Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed)
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
3
1
1
4
3
1
1
Button
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_1
DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_
1
2
3
4
DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_1
DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_1
L
M
N
Y
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-37
Purpose
IMAGE DENSITY(DVB) ADJUSTMENT SETTING
A:
2
0
A :
B :
C :
D :
E :
F :
G :
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1
H:
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2
I :
DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3
J :
K :
L :
44-43
Function (Purpose) Used to check installation of the developing

unit and the current state.
Section
Operation/Procedure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
DVCH KIND K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH KIND Y
DVCH_AD_K
DVCH_AD_C
DVCH_AD_M
DVCH_AD_Y
OK
K color developing tank kind

C color developing tank kind
M color developing tank kind
Y color developing tank kind
K color developing tank AD value
C color developing tank AD value
M color developing tank AD value
Y color developing tank AD value
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-43
44-56
(This simulation should not be executed
Purpose
DEVELOPER UNIT AD MONITOR

DVCH KIND K :
DVCH KIND C :
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed

compulsorily.
DVCH KIND M :
DVCH KIND Y :
DVCH AD K
DVCH AD C
DVCH AD M
DVCH AD Y
Section
Operation/Procedure
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-56
1 PIXEL HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

1/1
EXECUTE
44-52
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the image density level of

each color toner patch in 1-pixel half tone
correction.
44-57
Purpose
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction value is

cleared.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-52
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT

PTK
PTC
PTM
PTY
PTK
PTC
PTM
PTY
ID 1
255
255
255
255
ID 12 :
255
255
255
255
ID 2
255
255
255
255
ID 13 :
255
255
255
255
ID 3
255
255
255
255
ID 14 :
255
255
255
255
ID 4
255
255
255
255
ID 15 :
255
255
255
255
ID 5
255
255
255
255
ID 16 :
255
255
255
255
ID 6
255
255
255
255
ID 7
255
255
255
255
ID 8
255
255
255
255
ID 9
255
255
255
255
ID 10 :
255
255
255
255
ID 11 :
255
255
255
255
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-57
1 PIXEL HALF TONE ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
ARE
YOU
YES
SURE?
NO
EXECUTE
46
46-1
1/1
Purpose
Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy

mode.
Section
44-54
Purpose
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction result is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item of the adjustment with [n] and [p] keys on
the touch panel.
2)

Section
Operation/Procedure
TEST
3)
SIMULATION NO.44-54
Item
1 PIXEL HALF TONE RESULT DISPLAY

[EX-LOW]
A:
01.000
B:
100.000
[LOW]
A:
-10.000
B:
-200.000
[CONNECT] A:
10.000
B:
-150.000
[MID]
A:
05.000
B:
200.000
[HIGH]
A:
05.000
B:
150.000
[CONNECT
SENSOR]
#1: 255,
#2: 255,
#3: 255,
C:
C:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
200.000
150.000
#4: 255
EXECUTE
1/1
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY
TO COPY)
Automatic
Text
Text/Print
Text/Photograph
Printed photo
Photograph
Map
Light document
Text (Copy document)
Text/Print (Copy
document)
Print photo (Copy
document)
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
L
TEXT (COLOR TONE

ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR (COPY TO
COPY)
TWO COLOR
TWO COLOR (COPY TO
COPY)
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
Text (Color enhancement)

Text/Print (Color
enhancement)
Default
value
50
TEST
A:
50
Text/Photograph (Color
enhancement)
Printed photo (Color
enhancement)
Photo (Color
enhancement)
Map (Color enhancement)
Single color
Single color (Copy
document)
2-color (red/black) copy
2-color (red/black) copy
(copy document)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
A : 50
AUTO1
50
B : 50
AUTO2
99
C : 50
TEXT
D : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
E : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
F : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
G : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50
MAP
I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
K : 50
L : 50
LIGHT
50
50
50
50
50
50
OK
50
50
46-4
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-01
A:
1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner

mode.
A : 50
AUTO
50
B : 50
TEXT
99
C : 50
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
Operation/Procedure
E : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
1)
F : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
the touch panel.
G : 50
MAP
2)
H : 50
LIGHT
Section

I:
50
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J:
50
K : 50
L : 50
3)
OK
46-2
Purpose
Item
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Text
Text/Print
Text/Photograph
Printed photo
Photo
Map
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-04
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[SCANNER]
Section
A:
Operation/Procedure
2)
A
B
C
D
E
F

mode.
1)
Purpose
the touch panel.
A : 50
TEXT
50
B : 50
EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
99
C : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
D : 50
PTINTED PHOTO
E : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
F : 50
MAP

3)

Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY
TO COPY)
LIGHT
Automatic 1
Automatic 2
Text
Text/Print
Text/Photograph
Printed photo
Photo
Map
Text (Copy document)
Text/Print (Copy document)
Print photo (Copy
document)
Light document
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
OK
46-5
Purpose
Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner

mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)

50
3)
Default
value
50
50
50
Item
A
B
C
AUTO TEXT
AUTO TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D
E
F
G
H
I
TEXT
TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEST
Automatic/Text
Automatic/Text/Print
Automatic/Text/
Photograph
Text
Text/Print
Text/Photograph
Printed photo
Photo
Map
46-9
mode.
Section
50
50
50
50
50
50
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with [ON] and [DSPF] keys

on the touch panel.
2)
the touch panel.
3)

CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-05
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
A:
1
A : 50
AUTO TEXT
50
B : 50
AUTO EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
99
C : 50
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D : 50
TEXT
E : 50
TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
F : 50
TEXT/PHOTO
G : 50
PRINTED PHOTO
H : 50
PHOTOGRAPH
I:
MAP
4)

Item
50
Adjustment (DSPF mode)
Purpose
OC
COPY SIDEA: LOW
SCAN SIDEA: LOW
FAX SIDEA: LOW
COPY SIDEA: HIGH
SCAN SIDEA: HIGH
FAX SIDEA: HIGH
OK
46-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner color balance

RGB.
DSPF
COPY SIDEB: LOW
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.
2)
the touch panel.
3)
4)

Item
A
B
LOW DENSITY POINT

HIGH DENSITY POINT
TEST
Low density correction amount

High density correction amount
Default
value
50
50
50
1
SCAN SIDEB: LOW
FAX SIDEB: LOW
COPY SIDEB: HIGH
SCAN SIDEB: HIGH
FAX SIDEB: HIGH
G
H
I
BALANCE SIDEB: R
BALANCE SIDEB: G
BALANCE SIDEB: B
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-08
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT (COLOR SCANNER MODE)
A:
A : 50
LOW DENSITY POINT
B : 50
HIGH DENSITY POINT
99
TEST
DSPF copy mode

exposure adjustment (low
density)
DSPF scanner mode
density)
DSPF FAX mode
density)
DSPF copy mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF FAX mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF copy mode
density)
DSPF scanner mode
density)
DSPF FAX mode
density)
DSPF copy mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF FAX mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
DSPF color balance R
DSPF color balance G
DSPF color balance B
Default
value
42
42
42
53
53
53
45
45
45
50
50
50
50
50
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-09
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
A:
42
1
99
OK
OC
A : 42
COPY SIDEA : LOW
B : 42
SCAN SIDEA : LOW
C : 42
FAX SIDEA : LOW
D : 53
COPY SIDEA : HIGH
E : 53
SCAN SIDEA : HIGH
F : 53
FAX SIDEA : HIGH
DSPF
OK
Operation/Procedure
46-10
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the engine color balance

manually.
1)
the touch panel.
2)

Section
Operation/Procedure
3)
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2)
Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the

touch panel.
3)
the touch panel.
4)

A-O
TEST
A:
500
373
627
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Printed photo
Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
Map
Light document
Copy document
A : 500
POINT1
B : 500
POINT2
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO{TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
500: Default value

5)
POINT1 - 15
EXECUTE
OK

TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
46-19
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode.

Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
EXECUTE
A-O
TEST
POINT1 - 15
1/1
AE_MODE
Auto exposure mode
AE_STOP_COPY
Auto exposure Stop

(for copy)
Auto exposure Stop
(for FAX)
Auto exposure Stop
(for scanner)
Auto exposure filter
setting
CLOSE
245
Item
500: Default value
SIMULATION NO.46-10
A:
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is

saved.
A : 500
POINT1
500
B : 500
POINT2
755
C : 500
POINT3
D: 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
F : 500
POINT6
G: 500
POINT7
H: 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K: 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
AE_FILTER
AE_WIDTH
TEST
ON
ON/OFF
ON
ON/OFF
ON
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
FULL
PART
NORMAL
FULL
SIMULATION NO.46-19
EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)

AE_MODE
AE exposure width
MODE1,
MODE2
ON/OFF
Default
value
MODE1
EXECUTE
OK
MODE1
MODE2
AE_STOP COPY :
OFF
ON
AE_STOP FAX
OFF
ON
AE_STOP SCAN :
OFF
ON
46-16
AE_FILTER
SOFT
NORMAL
Purpose
AE_WIDTH
FULL
PART
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine color balance

manual adjustment (monochrome, all
modes).
Section
SHARP
1/1
Operation/Procedure
46-21
1)
Adjustment
Purpose

manual adjustment (color, all modes).
Section

The half tone auto density adjustment is performed and self
print is outputted.
2)
Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and
select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on
the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
1)

touch panel.
3)
2)
the touch panel.
4)
Press [OK] key.
3)
The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted.

The correction value is saved and the reference value is registered.

4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST

A-O
POINT1 - 15
500: Default value
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" 17" SIZE PAPER

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
A:
A : 500
POINT1
500
B : 500
POINT2
755
C : 500
POINT3
D : 500
POINT4
E : 500
POINT5
245
EXECUTE
CLOSE
TEST

F : 500
POINT6
G : 500
POINT7
H : 500
POINT8
I : 500
POINT9
J : 500
POINT10
K : 500
POINT11
L : 500
POINT12

,
FACTORY
EXECUTE
SERVICE
EXECUTE
OK
46-25
46-23
Adjustment
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the half tone highest density correction.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color balance adjustment in the single color mode.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the

touch panel.
2)
the touch panel.
1)
2)
0: Allow
TEST
1: Inhibit
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-23
3)
4)
ENGINE MAXIMUM DENSITY ADJUSTMENT MODE

A:
A:
(0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
Item
0
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
OK
46-24
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine half tone auto

density adjustment.
Section
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25

A:
A:
0
0
255
RED
B : 255
GREEN
C : 255
BLUE
D:
YELLOW
E:
MAGENTA
F : 255
CYAN
OK
46-26
Item
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the default setting of color

balance in the single color mode.
A
B
Section
C
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
The color balance setting in the single color mode is returned

to the default value.
TEST
E
F
CLOSE
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Black text edge area engine gamma

curve calculation coefficient (slope)
Black text edge area engine gamma
curve calculation coefficient (intercept)
Color text edge area engine gamma
Color text edge area engine gamma
Error diffusion edge area engine gamma
Error diffusion edge area engine gamma
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
SINGLE COLOR MODE STANDARD RATE SETUP
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
A:
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
50
1
EXECUTE
99
46-27
Purpose
A : 50
BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
B : 50
C : 50
COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D : 50
E : 50
ED TEXT (SLOPE)
F : 50
ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine/gamma calculation formula coefficient setting.
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
46-28
Purpose
(This simulation should not be used unless

Function (Purpose) Used to check Auto exposure/Document

auto recognition/Line number recognition
(color mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
ACS (color document/
RESULT (judgment
monochrome document
result)
auto RESULT (judgment STATISTICS
result)
COLOR AE (color auto
RESULT (judgment
exposure)
result)
STATISTICS (image
process statistic amount)
ORG RECOG
(document type auto
judgment)
RESULT (judgment
result)
Display
ACSCONT
Content
Color
Black and white
ACS judgment counter value
SITAJI_JUDGE
Background division detection result
RATE_SCR
SHITAJI
BEAT_JUDGE
SUM_SITAJI_SCR
ORIGINAL
TXT
TXT/HT
HT
TXT/PIC
PIC
TXT ON HT
OHT
BACKGROUND
GR
WH
NE
WH_GR
WH_NE
WH_CO
CO
IM
MESH
IMAGE
BASE
HTFE
HIGH
LOW
Dot ratio
Background number judgment result
Background judgment result
Background area dot number
Document
Auto text
Auto text dot
Auto dot
Auto text photo
Auto photo
Text on auto dot
Auto other
Background
None
Gray
White
Newspaper
White gray
White newspaper
White color
Color
Image
Dot
No dot
Image dot
Background dot (non-image dot)
Line type
High line number
Low line number
COL/MONO
Document type
ORG RECOG
(document type auto
judgment)
Item
STATISTICS
(Image process statistic
amount)
Display
HTCNT
PHOTOCNT
STRCNT
FLATCNT
PREHTCNT
HTXTCNT
SUMF
SUMM_L
SUMM_H
SUMFM_L
SUMFM_H
FHSTDR
FHSTDG
FHSTDB
HTHSTDR
HTHSTDG
HTHSTDB
LHSTD
MDHSTD
OHSTDR
OHSTDG
OHSTDB
SUM_BETA_RGB
EREA_BETA RGB
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB
RATE_BETA
SHITAJI
BETA_JUDGE
RATE_SCR
RATE_SCR2
RATE_TSCR
HTFE_JUDGE
SCR_HIST_JUDGE
SCR_CNT_JUDGE
TSCR_JUDGE
SCR_JUDGE
RATE_OTHER
TEXT_JUDGE
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE
OTHER_JUDGE
PHOTO_JUDGE
TH_BETAQ
TH_BETA_PHT2
SCR RECOG (dot line

number recognition)
RESULT (judgment
result)
STATISTICS (image
process statistic amount)
TEST
TH_SCR2
TH_SCR_CNT2
TH_TSCR_CNT2
TH_TEXT2
TH_PHOTO2
ALLCNT
HTFE RESULT
HIGH2
HIGH1
LOW1
LOW2
REVERSE AVE
REVERSE AVE (FLAT)
FLAT SELECT
Content
Dot counter value
Photographic paper counter value
Text counter value
Background counter value
Document judgment dot counter value
Text-on-dot counter value
Average dot counter value
Gross of max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
Gross of max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
Background pixel histogram value (RED)
Background pixel histogram value (GREEN)
Background pixel histogram value (BLUE)
Dot pixel histogram value (RED)
Dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
Dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
Other-than-dot L component histogram value
Other-than-dot max. difference histogram value
Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (RED)
Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
Number of all divisions of background pixel histogram high level
number
Number of areas (backgrounds) of background pixel histogram high
level number
Number of areas (photographic paper) of background pixel
histogram high level number
Background ratio
Background number judgment result
Background judgment result
Dot ratio
Dot judgment ratio
Text-on-dot ratio
Line number judgment result
Dot histogram judgment result
Dot counter value judgment result
Text-on-dot counter value judgment result
Dot judgment result
Other ratio
Test judgment result
Photographic paper pixel counter value judgment result
Other pixel counter value judgment result
Photographic paper judgment result
Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value
Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value (Photographic paper)
Dot high level number threshold value
Threshold value for the dot counter value
Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value
Text judgment threshold value
Photographic paper judgment threshold value
Total number of pixels of the judgment area
Dot line number
High line number 2 (htfe_out=3)
High line number 1 (htfe_out=2)
Low line number 1 (htfe_out=1)
Low line number 2 (htfe_out=0)
Max. reverse rotation average
Flat part max. reverse rotation average
Flat part dot pixel
flatr>Thflatr
comparison
Other than flatrTHflatr>
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
AUTO EXPOSURE/ ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN START
EXECUTE
46-33
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color auto mode

adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the other items than the following items should be set to default values. Only for the following items, change the set value according to necessity.
COLOR AE (SW MODE1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO /
TH MAX COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS (SIM LEVEL)
Category
ACS
Setting 4th digit and below
COLOR AE
Setting 5th digit and above

Select a target category to be set with [NEXT] [BACK] keys on

the touch panel.
2)
Select a target item with [n] and [p] keys on the touch panel.
3)
4)
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
A
A
THCLMK_1
THCLBK_1
ACSMSK_1
THCLMK_2
THCLBK_2
ACSMSK_2
THCLMK_3
THCLBK_3
ACSMSK_3
THCLMK_4
THCLBK_4
ACSMSK_4
THCLMK_5
THCLBK_5
ACSMSK_5
SIM_LEVEL
TH_ACS5_RT
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
SW_MODE1
SW_MODE2
SW_MODE3
SW_MODE4
SW_MODE5
SW_MODE6
SW_MODE7
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
TH_MAX_MONO
TH_MAX_COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_SCR1
SW_MODE_SCR2
SW_MODE_MIX
SW_HOSEI
AE COLOR TABLE
BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(OC)
BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(RSPF)
BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(DSPF SIDE1)
BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(DSPF SIDE2)
BG_REMOVE_ADJ
TH_MODE_SCR
TH_SITAJI_SCR
Q
R
S
1)
T
A
B
Pixel judgment threshold value (1)

Final pixel judgment threshold value (1)
ACS mask size select (1)
ACS judgment select switch (density difference)
TH_ACS5: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
ACS judgment threshold value 5 (For enlargement)
Auto text document background
1: ON
detection
0: OFF
Auto text dot document
1: ON
background detection
0: OFF
Auto text-on-dot document
1: ON
0: OFF
Auto dot document background
1: ON
detection
0: OFF
Auto photo document background
1: ON
detection
0: OFF
Auto text photo document
1: ON
0: OFF
Auto other document background
1: ON
detection
0: OFF
Monochrome background detection threshold value
Color background detection threshold value
Newspaper background compulsory removal switch
Dot area background judgment switch
Dot area background removal select switch
Auto other document background detection switch
Correction table correction
Selection of color correction table
1: ON
in color AE
0: OFF
Background removal level change (OC)
Default
value
7
2
0
7
2
0
7
2
0
7
2
0
7
2
0
2
50
30000
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
17
17
0
3
0
2
4
1
4
Background removal level change (RSPF)
Background removal level change (DSPF front surface)
Background removal level change (DSPF back surface)
Background judgment correction value

Dot ratio threshold value
Background dot threshold value
0
3000
3000
Category
ORG RECOG
SCR RECOG
Item
A
B
C
D
MVSTRSEL REDUCE
MVSTRSEL ENLARGE
PSEL1 REDUCE
PSEL1 ENLARGE
PSEL2 REDUCE
PSEL2 ENLARGE
G
H
BUSYSEL REDUCE
BUSYSEL ENLARGE
HTSEL REDUCE
HTSEL ENLARGE
K
L
M
N
O
ASEL REDUCE
ASEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL REDUCE
HSTSEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL2 REDUCE
HSTSEL2 ENLARGE
TH_SUM_BETARGB
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
TH_BETA_SUB
TH_WHITE_BETA
TH_GRAY_BETA1
TH_GRAY_BETA2
TH_NOISE REDUCE
TH_NOISE ENLARGE
SW_SCR1
SW_SCR2
TH_HTFE
SW_TSCR
TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
A
TH_BETA_RT
TH_SCR_RT
TH_SCR_CNT_RT
TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT
TH_TEXT_RT
TH_PHOTO_RT
TH_BETA_PHT_RT
TH_BETA ENLARGE
B
C
D
E
F
G
TH_SCR ENLARGE
TH_SCR_RATE
TH_SCR_CNT EL
TH_MANSEN_RATE
TH_TSCR_RATE
TH_TSCR_CNT EL
H
I
J
K
TH_TEXT ENLARGE
TH_PHOTO ENLARGE
TH_BETA_RATE
TH_BETA_PHT_EL
L
A
B
TH_OTHER
THBAVEM1 REDUCE
THBAVEM1 ENLARGE
C
D
THBAVEM2 REDUCE
THBAVEM2 ENLARGE
E
F
THBAVEM3 REDUCE
THBAVEM3 ENLARGE
G
H
CMSUB1 REDUCE
CMSUB1 ENLARGE
Text pixel judgment result select register (reduction)

Text pixel judgment result select register (enlargement)
Photographic paper judgment result select register (reduction)
Photographic paper judgment result select register
(enlargement)
Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register
(reduction)
Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register
(enlargement)
Complication level comparison value select register (reduction)
Complication level comparison value select register
(enlargement)
Dot judgment select (reduction)
0: AREA
1: ORG
Dot judgment select (enlargement) 0: AREA
1: ORG
Overall judgment priority level select register (reduction)
Overall judgment priority level select register (enlargement)
Histogram division fluctuation register (reduction)
Histogram division fluctuation register (enlargement)
Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register
(reduction)
Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register
(enlargement)
Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high
label number (background)
Monochrome background judgment threshold value
White background number judgment threshold value
Gray background judgment threshold value 1
Gray background judgment threshold value 2
Dot noise threshold value (reduction)
Dot noise threshold value (enlargement)
Dot ratio judgment switch
Dot judgment switch
High line number threshed value
Text-on-dot judgment switch
Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high
level number (photographic paper)
TH_BETA: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_SCR: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_SCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_TSCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_TEXT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_PHOTO: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
TH_BETA_PHT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio
Background pixel histogram high level number division
detection value (background) (enlargement)
Dot high level number threshold value (enlargement)
Threshold value related to dot ratio
Threshold value for dot counter value (enlargement)
Ten-thousand line/print area judgment threshold value
Threshold value for text-on-dot ratio
Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value
(enlargement)
Text judgment threshold value (enlargement)
Photographic paper judgment threshold value (enlargement)
Background ratio threshold value
Background pixel histogram high level number division
detection value (photographic paper) (enlargement)
Other judgment threshold value
Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction)
Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value
(enlargement)
(enlargement)
(enlargement)
13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (reduction)
13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (enlargement)
Default
value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
16
16
0
0
3
3
7
6
27
18
25
10
10
0
0
0
1
15
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1000000
20000
4500
800000
1500
300
10000
50000
50000
3000
100000
7000
170
170
105
105
50
50
55
55
Category
SCR RECOG
SEGMENT
Item
Setting 4th
digit and
below
Text-on-dot ON/
OFF (auto/
manual mode)
Print document
text detection
level
Chromatic/
achromatic
judgment level
Color auto
document
recognition filter
enhancement
setting
Specified mode
area separation
ON/OFF setting
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
CMSUB2 REDUCE
CMSUB2 ENLARGE
MREVSEL REDUCE
MREVSEL ENLARGE
MSDSEL REDUCE
MSDSEL ENLARGE
THAVEFM1 REDUCE
THAVEFM1 ENLARGE
THAVEFM2 REDUCE
THAVEFM2 ENLARGE
THAVEFM3 REDUCE
THAVEFM3 ENLARGE
THAVEM1 REDUCE
THAVEM1 ENLARGE
THAVEM2 REDUCE
THAVEM2 ENLARGE
THAVEM3 REDUCE
THAVEM3 ENLARGE
MESH_TXT ON HT
MESH_TXT/HT1
MESH_TXT/HT2
MESH_TXT/PR
PR_TXT ON HT
PR_TXT/HT1
PR_TXT/HT2
PR_TXT/PR
PR_CHECK1
13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (reduction)

13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (enlargement)
High line number judgment method select (reduction)
High line number judgment method select (enlargement)
When MREVSEL=3, output select (reduction)
When MREVSEL=3, output select (enlargement)
THAVEFM1 reduction
THAVEFM1 enlargement
THAVEFM2 reduction
THAVEFM3 reduction
THAVEM1 reduction
THAVEM1 enlargement
THAVEM2 reduction
THAVEM2 enlargement
THAVEM3 reduction
THAVEM3 enlargement
(Auto) Text-on-dot
0: THROUGH
(Auto) text dot (low 1, line 1)
1: OFF
(Auto) text dot (low 2, line 1)
2: ON1
(Manual) Text print
3: ON2
(Auto) Text-on-dot
0: THROUGH
(Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2)
1: ON1
(Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2)
2: ON2
(Manual) Text print
3: ON3
Check button for consideration
1: ON
((Auto) text-on-dot)
0: OFF
1: ON
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2))
0: OFF
1: ON
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2))
0: OFF
1: ON
((Manual) text print)
0: OFF
THWMIN (Print document text detection level)
THWMIN (Print document text detection level)
Print system mode
0: THROUGH
1: OFF
Photographic paper system mode
2: ON1
3: ON2
1: ON
(print system mode)
0: OFF
1: ON
(photographic paper system mode) 0: OFF
THILVC (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
THACOLL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
THACOLH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
THILVG (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
THAGRYL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
THAGRYH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
Filter enhancement setting
1: H (High enhancement)
2: L (Low enhancement)
3: AUTO (Auto)
PR_CHECK2
PR_CHECK3
PR_CHECK4
M
N
O
THWMAX
THWMIN
COLOR_PRINT MODE
COLOR_PHOTO MODE
COLOR_CHECK1
COLOR_CHECK2
THILVC
THACOLL
THACOLH
THILVG
THAGRYL
THAGRYH
SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
SEG_ACT_A_OTR
(Auto) Other mode
AA
SEG_ACT_M_PRT1
(Manual) Print document mode

(Text)
AB
SEG_ACT_M_PRT2
(Manual) Print document mode

(Text/Print)
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
Default
value
0
0
0
0
0
0
65
96
54
80
48
70
65
96
54
80
48
70
0
0
0
0
0
220
153
0
0
0
166
21
18
118
14
20
2
1
1
1
Category
SEGMENT
Setting 4th
digit and
below
Item
INDEX direct
specification
Detection
amount
adjustment
Text-on-dot blur
adjustment
Setting 5th
digit and
above
TEST
Text-on-dot ON/
OFF (auto/
manual mode)
SEG_DS_A_TOH
SEG_DS_M_TPP
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL
SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR
SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL
SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR
SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2
SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL
SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR
SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH
BKUCR_ACTM
(- 99%)
AU
BKUCR_ACTM
(100% - 199%)
AV
BKUCR_ACTM
(200% -)
AW
BKUCR_ACTA
(- 99%)
AX
BKUCR_ACTA
(100% - 199%)
AY
BKUCR_ACTA
(200% -)
AZ
BA
BB
A
WBGLV_TPP
WBGLV_TP
WBGLV_OTR
MESH_CHECK1
MESH_CHECK2
MESH_CHECK3
MESH_CHECK4
E
F
THED3A
THED3B
A:
7
9
(Auto) Text-on-dot
(Manual) Text print
Text print system Black text 1
Text print system Black text 2
Text print system Color text
Text print system Chromatic/achromatic
Text print system Dot
Text system Black text 1
Text system Black text 2
Text system Color text
Text system Chromatic/achromatic
Text system Dot
Other Black text 1
Other Black text 2
Other Color text
Other Chromatic/achromatic
Other Dot
- 99%
0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
100% - 199%
0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
200% 0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
- 99%
0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
100% - 199%
0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
200% 0: THROUGH
1: OFF
2: ON
Text print, Text system
Text Photographic paper system
Other system
1: ON
((Auto) text-on-dot)
0: OFF
1: ON
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1))
0: OFF
1: ON
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1))
0: OFF
1: ON
((Auto) Text print)
0: OFF
THED3A (Text-on-dot ON/OFF)
THED3B (Text-on-dot ON/OFF)
THCLMK_1
B: 2
THCLBK_1
Purpose
C: 0
ACSMSK_1
D: 7
THCLMK_2
256
256
256
0
0
0
0
1000
1000
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) 2-color (red/black) copy adjustment

Section
Operation/Procedure
E: 2
THCLBK_2
F:
ACSMSK_2
G: 7
THCLMK_3
H: 2
THCLBK_3
I:
ACSMSK_3
3)
4)
J:
46-36
4DIGIT UNDER)
A: 7
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-33
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
Default
value
0
0
10
10
13
12
10
10
10
13
12
10
10
10
13
12
10
0
THCLMK_4
K: 2
THCLBK_4
BACK
NEXT
1)
Select a target category for the adjustment with [RANGE] and

[COEFFICIENT] keys on the touch panel.
2)
the touch panel.
OK
Default value
M
Y
3
3
3
0
255
255
255
0
255
255
255
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
0
255
Item
RANGE (red judgment range)
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
COEFFICIENT (output color coefficient)
PARAMETER O
PARAMETER M
PARAMETER INTENSITY
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
3
0
A:
PARAMETER O
B:
PARAMETER M
C:
PARAMETER INTENSITY
200 x 400 [DPI] OFF

200 x 400 [DPI] ON
400 x 400 [DPI] OFF
400 x 400 [DPI] ON
600 x 600 [DPI] OFF
600 x 600 [DPI] ON
TEST
RANGE
OK
COEFFICIENT
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the black/white image generation adjustment.

Section
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
Press [YES] key. (The set value is saved.)
A
B
Item
Gray generation setting (R/G)
Gray generation setting (B/G)
R/G
B/G
TEST
CLOSE
A:
35
0
B:
; B/G
200x100 [DPI] OFF
B:
200x200 [DPI] OFF
C:
200x200 [DPI] ON
D:
200x400 [DPI] OFF
E:
200x400 [DPI] ON
F:
400x400 [DPI] OFF
G:
400x400 [DPI] ON
H:
600x600 [DPI] OFF
I:
600x600 [DPI] ON
OK
46-40
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT

; R/G
A:
Default value
35
0
SIMULATION NO.46-37
A : 35
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-39
46-37
1)
200 x 400 half tone OFF

200 x 400 half tone ON
IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT
A:
Purpose
Default
value
1
1
1
1
1
1
Item
D
E
F
G
H
I
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
A:
Red adjustment coefficient O

Red adjustment coefficient M
Chromatic enhancement coefficient
R output color
G output color
B output color
C output color
M output color
Y output color
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-36
TEST
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the collective adjustment

of all the FAX exposure modes.
Section
99
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
Default
value
50
Item
DEFAULT
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
46-39
Purpose
EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
TEST
Adjustment/Setting
Exposure data value

(collective)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-40
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ALL)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image send sharpness

adjustment.
Section
A : 50
A:
EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
50
1
99
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item
A
B
C
200 x 100 [DPI] OFF

200 x 200 [DPI] OFF
200 x 200 [DPI] ON

Default
value
1
1
1
EXECUTE
OK
46-41
Item
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (normal character).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
EXP2
TEST
Automatic
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print mode
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
EXP3
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
Item
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE MODE
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-41
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : NORMAL)

A : 50
A:
50
1
99
AUTO
EXP1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Small character/Exposure 4/
Half tone
Half tone
Print
1: Small character/
mode Automatic
2: Small character/
Exposure 1
3: Small character/
Exposure 2
4: Small character/
Exposure 3
5: Small character/
Exposure 4
6: Small character/
Exposure 5
7: Small character/
Automatic/half tone
8: Small character/
Exposure 1/Half tone
9: Small character/
10: Small character/
TEST
Default
value
50
50
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-42
AUTO
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FINE)

B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
E : 50
EXPOSURE4
F : 50
EXPOSURE5
G:
A:
50
1
99
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
E : 50
EXPOSURE4
F : 50
EXPOSURE5
G : 50
AUTO H_TONE
H : 50
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
I:
50
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J : 50
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
L : 50
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE MODE : AUTO
EXECUTE
OK
46-42
Purpose
A : 50
Adjustment/Setting
EXECUTE
OK
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (small character).
46-43
Section
Adjustment/Setting
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (fine).
2)
3)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
Small character/Automatic
Small character/Exposure 1
Small character/Automatic/half
tone
Half tone
Half tone
Half tone
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1)
2)
3)

Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
Fine/Automatic
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Automatic/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
J
K
L
M
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
TEST

Print
1: Fine/Automatic
mode 2: Fine/Exposure 1
3: Fine/Exposure 2
4: Fine/Exposure 3
5: Fine/Exposure 4
6: Fine/Exposure 5
7: Fine/Automatic/
Half tone
8: Fine/Exposure 1/
Half tone
9: Fine/Exposure 2/
Half tone
10: Fine/Exposure 3/
Half tone
Half tone
Half tone
Default
value
50
50
50
1
Item
L
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A:
50
1
99
A : 50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
E : 50
EXPOSURE4
F : 50
EXPOSURE5
G : 50
AUTO H_TONE
H : 50
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
I:
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J:
50
50
TEST
ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)
A:
50
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-44
EXPOSURE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
L : 50
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
99
A : 50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
E : 50
EXPOSURE4
F : 50
EXPOSURE5
G : 50
AUTO H_TONE
H : 50
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
I:
50
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J:
OK
46-44
50
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
L : 50
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
Adjustment/Setting
EXECUTE
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment. (Super fine)
Section
1)
2)
3)
Item
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (600dpi).

Section
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
OK
46-45
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50
Purpose
AUTO
EXP1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
Super fine/Exposure 5/Half

tone
Print
1: Super fine/
mode Automatic
2: Super fine/
Exposure 1
3: Super fine/
Exposure 2
4: Super fine/
Exposure 3
5: Super fine/
Exposure 4
6: Super fine/
Exposure 5
7: Super fine/Auto/
Half tone
8: Super fine/
9: Super fine/
10: Super fine/
11: Super fine/
12: Super fine/
Default
value
50
Super fine/Automatic
Super fine/Exposure 1
Super fine/Automatic/Half tone
tone
tone
tone
tone
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
4)

Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
600 dpi/Automatic
600 dpi/Exposure 1
600 dpi/Exposure 2
600 dpi/Exposure 3
600 dpi/Exposure 4
600 dpi/Exposure 5
600 dpi/Automatic/Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 2 /Half tone
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Default
value
50
50
1
Item
K
L
M
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
TEST

Print
600 dpi/Automatic
mode 600 dpi/Exposure 1
600 dpi/Exposure 2
600 dpi/Exposure 3
600 dpi/Exposure 4
600 dpi/Exposure 5
600 dpi/Auto/Half
tone
600 dpi/Exposure 1/
Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 2/
Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 3/
Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 4 /
Half tone
600 dpi/Exposure 5 /
Half tone
Default
value
0
Item
D
SCAN (G)
gray
0: MIDDLE1
Medium compression mode 1

compression, Q table for
decompression
decompression
decompression
1: MIDDLE2
2: MIDDLE3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-47
TEST
COPY
SCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT
A:
0
0
A:
COPY(C) : LOW
B:
COPY(G) : LOW
C:
SCAN(C) : MIDDLE 1
D:
SCAN(G) : MIDDLE 1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-45
OK
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX: 600DPI)
A:
50
1
99
A : 50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
K EXPOSURE3
E : 50
EXPOSURE4
F : 50
EXPOSURE5
G : 50
48
48-1
Purpose
AUTO H_TONE
H : 50
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
I : 50
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J : 50
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
Section
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
OK
46-47
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

The set value is saved.
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification

ratio (main scanning, sub scanning direction) adjustment.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the JPEG compression

rate setting in copying and scanning.
Section
Item
A
CCD(MAIN)
CCD(SUB)
SPF(MAIN)
SPF(SUB)
SPFB(MAIN)
SPFB(SUB)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
4)

Item
COPY (C)
color
COPY (G)
gray
SCAN (C)
color
0: LOW
1: MIDDLE
2: HIGH
0: LOW
1: MIDDLE
2: HIGH
0: MIDDLE1
1: MIDDLE2
2: MIDDLE3
Low compression
Medium compression
High compression
Low compression
Medium compression
High compression
decompression
decompression
decompression
Default
value
0
TEST
SCAN main scan magnification ratio

adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scan magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
DSPF document front surface
magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
DSPF document front surface
magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
DSPF document back surface
magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
DSPF document back surface
magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
A:
50
1
99
A : 50
CCD(MAIN)
B : 50
CCD(SUB)
C : 50
SPF(MAIN)
D : 50
SPF(SUB)
E : 50
SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50
SPFB(SUB)
OK
48-5
TEST
Adjustment
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-05
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification

ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction).
When the sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio is adjusted with SIM 481 and a satisfactory copy image is not
obtained when copying by specifying a different copy magnification ratio, perform this
adjustment.
A:
50
1
99
A:
50
MR(HI)
B:
50
MR(MID)
C:
50
MR(LO)
D : 50
DSPF(HI)
E:
50
DSPF(MID)
F:
50
DSPF(LO)
Scanner section
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
OK
the touch panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
48-6
Purpose
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
MR (HI)
MR (MID)
MR (LO)
DSPF (HI)
DSPF (MID)
DSPF (LO)
Scanner motor (High speed)

Scanner motor (Reference speed)
Scanner motor (Low speed)
DSPF motor (High speed)
DSPF motor (Reference speed)
DSPF motor (Low speed)
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the rotation speed adjustment of each motor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode to be set with [COLOR], [MONO], and

[HEAVY] keys on the touch p panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item
Color
A
Monochrome
A
Heavy paper
A
RRM
Resist motor correction value
BLTM
Belt motor correction value
DMBK
Drum K motor correction value
DMCMY
Drum CL motor correction value
DVMK
Developing K motor correction value
DVMC
Developing CL motor correction value
FUM
Fusing motor correction value
H
I
LCCM
PFM
LCC motor correction value

PS front motor correction value
J
K
L
CPFM
POM
FUSER SETTING
Paper feed motor correction value

Paper exit motor correction value
Fusing speed select timing
Default value
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
Color
Heavy paper
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
COLOR
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
COLOR
COLOR
Color
Monochrome
Heavy paper
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
50
50
51
54
54
54
51
51
51
51
51
50
50
50
50
50
50
35
35
40
50
55
55
55
50
50
50
60
50
<Error display for abnormal completion>

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-06
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT
A : 50
A:
1
COLOR
RRM
50
B : 54
BLTM
99
C : 51
DMBK
D : 51
DMCMY
E : 50
DVMK
F : 50
DVMC
G : 35
FUM
H : 50
LCCM
I : 55
PFM
J : 50
CPFM
K : 50
POM
MONO
HEAVY
OK
49
49-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Save the firmware to a USB memory.
2)
Insert the USB memory to the machine.
3)
Select the target firmware to be updated with the touch panel.
4)
Select the target model for the firmware update.
5)
6)
Press [YES] key.
Display
CONF
ICUM
ICUBM
ICUBS
LANG
GRAPH
SLIST
PCUB
PCUM
LCC4B
LCC4M
FINB
FINM
SDLB
SDLM
FIN4B
FIN4M
LCC3B
LCC3M
SCUB
SCUM
DSPFB
DSPFM
FAXB
FAXM
FXOPB
FXOPM
ESCP
PDL
ANIME
IMGDT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00
The selected firmware is updated.
<DIR> FOLDER1
FILE1
FILE2
<DIR> FOLDER2
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
CONFIG
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOTM)
ICU (BOOTS)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
PCU (BOOT)
PCU (MAIN)
A4LCC (BOOT)
A4LCC (MAIN)
FIN (BOOT)
FIN (MAIN)
SADDLE (BOOT)
SADDLE (MAIN)
4KFIN (BOOT)
4KFIN (MAIN)
A3LCC (BOOT)
A3LCC (MAIN)
SCU (BOOT)
SCU(MAIN)
DSPF (BOOT)
DSPF (MAIN)
FAX (BOOT)
FAX (MAIN)
FAX OPTION (BOOT)
FAX OPTION (MAIN)
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
IMAGE_DATA
COLOR PROFILE
Content
Configuration data
ICU main
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language data program
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU BOOT
PCU main
LCC(A4) BOOT
LCC (A4) main
Inner finisher BOOT
Inner finisher main
Saddle unit boot section
Saddle unit main section
4K finisher BOOT
4K finisher main
LCC (A3) BOOT
LCC (A3) main
SCU BOOT
SCU main
DSPF BOOT
DSPF main
FAX1 BOOT
FAX1 main
FAX2 BOOT
FAX2 main
ESC/P font
PDL font
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Configuration data
ICU main
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language data program
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU BOOT
PCU main
LCC (A4) BOOT
LCC (A4) main
Inner finisher BOOT
Inner finisher main
Saddle unit boot section
Saddle unit main section
4K finisher BOOT
4K finisher main
LCC(A3) BOOT
LCC (A3) main
SCU BOOT
SCU main
DSPF BOOT
DSPF main
FAX1 BOOT
FAX1 main
FAX2 BOOT
FAX2 main
ESC/P font
PDL font
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Color profile
..
1/1
49-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Save the operation manual data to a USB memory.
2)
3)
Select the update target data of the operation manual with the
touch panel.
4)
5)
Press [YES] key.

The selected data of the operation manual is updated.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
TEST
50-2
Adjustment
Purpose
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1
<DIR> FOLDER2
<DIR> FOLDER3
<DIR> MANUAL1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on

print paper and the void area (image loss)
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment
can be performed also with SIM 50-1. This
simulation. However, is simpler.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
1/1
..
50
1)
Set L1 of item A and L2 of item B to 0.
2)
3)
Place a ruler on the left edge of the document table, and make
a black and white copy at the magnification ratio of 400%.
4)
Measure the distance L1 and L2 in the copied image in the unit

of 0.1mm. (Refer to the figure below.) Multiple the measure
values (in the unit of 0.1mm) with 10, and input the products.
Be sure to input both of L1 and L2 as a set.
50-1
Purpose
Adjustment
L1: Distance from the copy image lead edge to the scale of
10mm.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on

print paper and the void area (image loss)
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment
can be performed also with SIM 50-5 and
SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document
table mode))
L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
edge
L1
Section
Paper lead
edge
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)

Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Lead edge
adjustment
Image loss
amount set
value
Void
amount
setting
RRCA
Document lead edge

reference position (OC)
Resist
Standard
motor ON
cassette
timing
LCC
adjustment
Manual feed
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
ADU
Lead edge image loss
amount setting
Side image loss amount
setting
Print lead edge adjustment
Sub scanning direction print
range adjustment
FRONT/ REAR void amount
adjustment
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
TEST
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
6)
Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the

rear edge void.
Item
30
20
20
400% enlargement copy
5)
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
L2
C
D
E
F
Actual
measurement
value
L1
L2
Image loss
amount set value
Void amount
setting
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
A:
50
0
99
A : 50
RRCA
B : 50
RRCB-CS12
C : 50
RRCB-CS34
D : 50
RRCB-LCC
E : 50
RRCB-MFT
F : 50
RRCB-ADU
G : 30
FRONT/
REAR
TEST
Distance from the image

lead edge to 10mm (platen
400%, 0.1mm unit)
Distance from the paper
lead edge to the image
lead edge (0.1mm unit)
Lead edge image loss
Side image loss
Print lead edge adjustment
Sub scanning direction
print range adjustment
FRONT/ REAR void
amount adjustment
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-02
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)
A:
60
LEAD
999
A : 60
L1
B:
L2
C : 30
LEAD
H : 20
SIDE
D : 20
SIDE
I:
30
DENA
E : 30
DENA
J:
20
DENB
F : 20
DENB
K : 20
FRONT/REAR
G : 20
FRONT/REAR
OK
Default
value
EXECUTE
30
20
30
20
20
50-5
50-6
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer print lead edge adjustment

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
4)
Used to measure the void area size on the printed adjustment

pattern in the right and the left frame directions, and to check
to confirm that the sizes are as shown below.
If DEN-C=4.0 r 2.0mm or DEN-B=4.0 r 2.0mm, there is no
need to adjust. If not, go to the procedure 5.
Change the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DENC) and the adjustment item B (DEN-B).
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DEN-C)
is decreased by 1, the print star position in the sub scanning
direction is shifted to the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B (DEN-B)
is decreased by 1, the print range in the paper transport direction is increased toward the rear edge side by 0.1mm.
6)
Repeat procedures 1 - 5 until the condition of procedure 4 is

satisfied.
Default
value
30
20
Item
A
B
DEN-C
DEN-B
C
D
FRONT/REAR
MULTI
COUNT
PAPER
DUPLEX
TEST
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead

edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
adjustment can be performed with SIM 507 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section
5)
Printer print lead edge adjustment

Sub scanning direction print range
adjustment (paper rear edge void
amount)
FRONT/ REAR void amount adjustment
Print quantity
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
0:
1:
DSPF
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)

Item
SIDE 1
SIDE 2
Image loss
amount
setting
SIDE 1
D
E
F
Image loss
amount
setting
SIDE 2
G
H
20
1
TEST
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Duplex print
select
Adjustment
Purpose
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Select
Not selected
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
50
20
20
30
30
20
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-06
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
A:
50
1
99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
Front surface document

scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
Back surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
Front surface lead edge
Front surface side image
loss amount setting
Front surface rear edge
Back surface lead edge
Back surface side image
loss amount setting
Back surface rear edge
Default
value
50
A : 50
SIDE1
B : 50
SIDE2
C : 20
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
D : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
E : 30
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
F : 30
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
G : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
H : 20
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
A:
30
1
99
A : 30
DEN-C
B : 20
DEN-B
C : 20
FRONT/REAR
D:
MULTI COUNT
E:
PAPER: CS1
F:
DUPLEX: NO
OK
50-7
Purpose
EXECUTE
OK
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead

edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
adjustment can be performed with SIM 507 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section
DSPF
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
1)
the touch panel.
2)
Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
3)
Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] and

[BW] key to make a print.
4)
Measure the printed image, and input the distance a (DSPF) to

L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm.
L4: Distance a (DSPF surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
[DSPF front surface]
5)
A
B
BK-MAG
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
G
H
LCC
ADU
I
J
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX YES
NO
Distance a
Item
C
D
E
F
G
H
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
2

TEST
Main scan print magnification ratio BK

Print off-center adjustment value
(manual feed)
(Cassette 1)
(Cassette 2)
(Cassette 3)
(Cassette 4)
Print off-center adjustment value (LCC)
(ADU)
Print quantity
Cassette
1: Manual feed
selection
2: Cassette 1
3: Cassette 2
4: Cassette 3
5: Cassette 4
6: LCC
Duplex print
0: Select
select
1: Not selected
[DSPF back surface]
Distance a
Default
value
100
50
Item
L4
L5
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
TEST
Distance of up to 10mm from

the front surface image lead
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit)
Distance of up to 10mm from
the back surface image lead
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit)
Image loss amount setting
SIDE 1
Image loss amount setting
SIDE 2
Default
value
-
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
A:
60
A : 100
BK-MAG
100
B : 50
MFT
140
C : 50
CS1
D : 50
CS2
E : 50
CS3
F : 50
CS4
G : 50
LCC
H : 50
ADU
I:
MULTICOUNT
J:
PAPER : CS1
K:
DUPLEX : NO
20
20
30
30
20
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-07
EXECUTE
OK
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).
A:
0
0
999
A:
L4
B:
L5
C : 20
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
D : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
E : 30
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
F : 30
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
G : 20
FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
H : 20
TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
50-12
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center

position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
the touch panel.
2)
3)
50-10
Purpose
Item
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print image off-center

position. (Adjustment is made separately
for each paper feed section.)
Section
A
B
OC
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
OC document off-center adjustment

DSPF front surface document off-center
adjustment
DSPF back surface document off-center
adjustment
Default
value
50
50
50
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-12
A:
50
1
99
50-21
Adjustment
Purpose

A : 50
OC
B : 50
SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50
SPF(SIDE2)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the sub scanning direction

manual registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
OK
50-20
Purpose
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
D
E
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
F
Default
value
100
Item
A
CYAN (FRONT)
CYAN (REAR)
C
D
Registration adjustment value main

scanning direction F side (Cyan)
scanning direction R side (Cyan)
scanning direction F side (Magenta)
scanning direction R side Magenta)
scanning direction F side (Yellow)
scanning direction R side (Yellow)
Print quantity
Cassette
1: Manual feed
selection
2: Cassette 1
3: Cassette 2
4: Cassette 3
5: Cassette 4
6: LCC
Duplex print
0: Select
select
1: Not selected
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA (REAR)
YELLOW (FRONT)
YELLOW (REAR)
G MULTICOUNT
H PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
I DUPLEX
YES
NO
TEST
100
1
199
A : 100
CYAN(FRONT)
B : 100
CYAN(REAR)
C : 100
MAGENTA(FRONT)
D : 100
MAGENTA(REAR)
E : 100
YELLOW(FRONT)
F : 100
YELLOW(REAR)
G:
MULTICOUNT
H:
PAPER : CS3
I:
DUPLEX : NO
100
100
1
2
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
A:
100
100
1
199
100
100
A : 100
CYAN
B : 100
MAGENTA
C : 100
YELLOW
D:
MULTICOUNT
E:
PAPER : CS1
F:
DUPLEX : NO
100
1
4
EXECUTE
OK
50-22
Purpose
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
TEST
100
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main/sub scanning

auto registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
A:
Registration adjustment value sub

scanning direction CYAN
scanning direction MAGENTA
scanning direction YELLOW
Print quantity
Cassette
Manual feed
selection
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print
Select
select
Not select
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main scanning direction manual registration adjustment.
Default
value
100
Item
1)
Select a target item for the adjustment with [REGIST], [DRUM

POS], and [ALL] keys on the touch panel.
2)

All the drum motors are operated to start the adjustment.
EXECUTE
OK
Item
ALL (Auto
registration
adjustment,
auto phase
adjustment)
REGIST (Auto
registration
adjustment
execution)
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
DRUM POS (Auto

phase adjustment
execution)
START
POINT
C
M
Y
C
M
Y
C
M
Y
K
CL
AMP
K
CL
PHASE
AMP
C
M
Y
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan F side)

Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow R side)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Cyan drum o Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Magenta drum o Cyan drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Yellow drum o Magenta drum)
Pulse modulation start timing
0: 0q
Changes up to 355q in the increment of 5q.
1: 5q
0 - 71
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
Pulse modulation start timing
0: 0q
1: 5q
0 - 71
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
Pulse modulation deflection amount
Pulse modulation deflection amount (C/M/Y average value of linearity deflection
amount)
Phase adjustment C o Y
0: 0q
1: 5q
0 - 71
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
Phase adjustment M o Y
0: 0q
1: 5q
0 - 71
:
:
70: 350q
71: 355q
Linearity deflection amount
<Error display for abnormal completion>
Compulsory
end error
Error
code
Basic error
1
2
4
7
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
10
11
15
16
20
21
Error display
SUSPENDED
SUSPENDED
TONNER
EMPTY 01
BEFORE
BEHAVIOR 02
SENSOR
CALIBRATION
04
TIME OVER 05
PROCESS
CONTROL 07
SUB BLACK
FRONT 10
SUB BLACK
FRONT 11
SUB BLACK
REAR 15
SUB BLACK
REAR 16
SUB CYAN
FRONT 20
SUB CYAN
FRONT 21
Error content
Door open during operation
CA button push during
operation
Unconfirmed operation during
operation (power OFF)
BK or all color toner EMPTY
detection
Other conditions
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
After 3-time retries of F or R,

the target is not reached.
Data is not acquired for 90sec
from the latest data
acquisition.
Process control error detection
The pitch data number is not
the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the
specified allowable range.
The pitch data number is not in
the specified allowable range.
Error
code
22
Error display
SUB CYAN
FRONT 22
23
SUB CYAN
FRONT 23
25
SUB CYAN
REAR 25
SUB CYAN
REAR 26
SUB CYAN
REAR 27
26
27
28
SUB CYAN
REAR 28
30
SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 30
SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 31
SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 32
31
32
33
SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 33
Default
value
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Error content
The calculation result value is
not in the specified allowable
range.
The amount of change in the
calculation result value is not
in the specified allowable
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
Error
code
35
36
37
SUB MAGENTA
REAR 35
SUB MAGENTA
REAR 36
SUB MAGENTA
REAR 37
38
SUB MAGENTA
REAR 38
40
SUB YELLOW
FRONT 40
SUB YELLOW
FRONT 41
SUB YELLOW
FRONT 42
41
42
43
SUB YELLOW
FRONT 43
45
SUB YELLOW
REAR 45
SUB YELLOW
REAR 46
SUB YELLOW
REAR 47
46
47
Main
scanning
adjustment
error
Error display
48
SUB YELLOW
REAR 48
50
MAIN BLACK
FRONT 50
MAIN BLACK
FRONT 51
MAIN BLACK
REAR 55
MAIN BLACK
REAR 56
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 60
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 61
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 62
51
55
56
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
70
71
72
73
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 63
MAIN CYAN
REAR 65
MAIN CYAN
REAR 66
MAIN CYAN
REAR 67
MAIN CYAN
REAR 68
MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 70
MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 71
MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 72
MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 73
Error content
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
The pitch data number is not in
the specified allowable range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
Main
scanning
adjustment
error
Error
code
75
76
77
MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 78
80
MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 80
MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 81
MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 82
82
83
MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 83
85
MAIN YELLOW
REAR 85
MAIN YELLOW
REAR 86
MAIN YELLOW
REAR 87
86
87
Error content
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
range.
The rib cannot be detected
either in the phase pattern or
in the sub pattern.
in the sub pattern.
in the sub pattern.
in the sub pattern.
Other errors
Phase number error
78
81
Other errors
Phase
adjustment
error
Error display
MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 75
MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 76
MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 77
88
MAIN YELLOW
REAR 88
91
RIB BLACK 91
92
RIB CYAN 92
93
RIB MAGENTA
93
94
RIB YELLOW 94
99
110
OTHER 99
PHASE BLACK
FRONT 110
PHASE BLACK
FRONT 111
PHASE BLACK
REAR 115
PHASE BLACK
REAR 116
PHASE CYAN
FRONT 120
PHASE CYAN
FRONT 121
PHASE CYAN
REAR 125
PHASE CYAN
REAR 126
PHASE
MAGENTA
FRONT 130
PHASE
MAGENTA
FRONT131
PHASE
MAGENTA
REAR 135
PHASE
MAGENTA
REAR 136
111
115
116
120
121
125
126
130
131
135
136
Phase pitch error

Phase number error
Phase pitch error
Phase number error
Phase pitch error
Phase number error
Phase pitch error
Phase number error
Phase pitch error
Phase number error
Phase pitch error
Error
code
140
Phase
adjustment
error
141
145
146
TEST
Error display
PHASE YELLOW
FRONT 140
PHASE YELLOW
FRONT 141
PHASE YELLOW
REAR 145
PHASE YELLOW
REAR 146
4)
Error content
Phase number error
Item
FAX
mode
Phase pitch error
Phase number error
Image loss
amount
setting OC
LEAD_
EDGE (OC)
Phase pitch error
FRONT_
REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
C
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
MAIN F
MAIN R
105.0(+0.2)
110.0(-0.1)
103.0(+0.4)
SUB
100.0(+0.0)
99.0(-0.2)
99.0(+0.2)
98.0(+0.3)
98.0(+0.1)
Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
105(+0.0)
F
START POINT
AMP
1(2)
0(1)
CL
1(2)
0(1)
PHASE
AMP
1(2)
0.0(0.1)
1(2)
0.0(0.1)
0.0(0.1)
REGIST
DRUM POS
EXECUTE
ALL
FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
1/1
50-24
LEAD_EDGE
(OC)
FRONT_
REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
Section
Operation/Procedure
E
CLOSE
Image loss
amount
setting OC
Function (Purpose) Used to display the auto registration adjustment result (SIM 50-22).
TEST
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
Scanner
mode
Purpose
Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
AUTO REGISTRATION DATA DISPLAY
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
000.0 ( )
START POINT
AMP
0()
00.0 ( )
CL
0()
00.0 ( )
PHASE
AMP
00 ( )
00.0 ( )
00 ( )
00.0 ( )
Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
00.0 ( )
TEST
K
BACK
NEXT
1/1
Purpose
20
(2mm)
20
(2mm)
20
(2mm)
20
(2mm)
30
(3mm)
30
(3mm)
20
(2mm)
20
(2mm)
0
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-27
SCANNER/FAX-SEND ALL EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
A:
30
0
50-27
OC lead edge
image loss
amount
OC side image
loss amount
OC rear edge
image loss
amount
Front surface
lead edge image
loss amount
Front surface
side image loss
amount
Front surface
rear edge image
loss amount
Back surface
lead edge image
loss amount
Back surface
side image loss
amount
Back surface
rear edge image
loss amount
OC lead edge
image loss
amount
OC side image
loss amount
OC rear edge
image loss
amount
Front surface
lead edge image
loss amount
Front surface
side image loss
amount
Front surface
rear edge image
loss amount
Back surface
lead edge image
loss amount
Back surface
side image loss
amount
Back surface
rear edge image
loss amount
Default
value
30
(3mm)
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment

of the scanned image in the FAX or scanner mode
Section
100
A : 30
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
B : 20
FRONT_REAR(OC)
C : 20
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
D : 20
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
E : 20
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
F:
30
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
G : 30
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
H : 20
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
I:
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
20
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode for the adjustment with [FAX] and

[SCANNER] key on the touch panel.
2)
the touch panel.
3)
FAX
SCANNER
OK
(4) Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex unit) adjustment
50-28
Purpose
Adjustment
1)
Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK

main scanning direction magnification
ration correction, the DSPF adjustment,
and the print position adjustment.
2)
Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
for self printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
3)
Section
Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position

adjustment pattern.
4)
Set the print position adjustment pattern on the OC.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position

adjustment pattern.
6)
When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved.
Operation/Procedure
<Adjustment item>
Adjustment item
(1) OC ADJ
(2)
(3)
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
(4)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
(5)
(6)
RESULT
DATA
General
OC document lead edge, off-center, sub
scanning direction magnification ratio
adjustment
BK main scanning direction magnification
ration adjustment
DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, offcenter, sub scanning direction magnification
ration adjustment
Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print offcenter (each paper feed tray, duplex unit)
adjustment
Adjustment result content display
Data used in execution of the adjustment are
displayed.
(5) Adjustment result content display

(6) Data used in execution of the adjustment are displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
(1) OC document lead edge, off-center, sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
1)
Select [OC ADL] on the touch panel.
2)
Select the tray for the OC adjustment pattern self print.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the OC adjustment pattern.
4)
Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC by the corner reference, and cover the OC adjustment pattern with the black
background chart.
* Set the adjustment pattern in landscape (A4). Check to confirm that there is no clearance between the adjustment pattern and the document guide.
* Black chart kind and size
Prepare in 310 x 470, equivalent to cutting sheet No. 791
(black).
5)
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning the OC adjustment

pattern.
1/1
51
51-1
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the transfer voltage and

the separation bias voltage ON/OF timing
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)
(2) BK main scanning direction magnification ration adjustment
Item
1)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
TC2 ON TIMING
2)
Select the tray for printing the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
TC2 OFF TIMING
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
4)
Set the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern on the OC.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
6)
TEST
Secondary transfer voltage ON timing

setting
Secondary transfer voltage OFF
timing setting
Default
value
40
60
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.51-01
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
A:
40
1
A : 40
TC2 ON TIMING
B : 50
TC2 OFF TIMING
99
(3) DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, off-center, sub

scanning direction magnification ration adjustment
1)
Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
2)
Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
for self printing of the DSPF adjustment pattern.
3)
Press [EXECUTE]
adjustment pattern.
4)
Set the DSPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the DSPF adjustment pattern.
6)
key to start self printing of the DSPF

OK
51-2
Item
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
ENGIN
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the paper contact pressure

adjustment for each section resist roller
(main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper
fed, DSPF paper feed). (When there is a
considerable fluctuation in the print image
position on print paper or a paper jam
occurs, this adjustment is required.)
TRAY1 (S)
TRAY2 (S)
TRAY3 PLAIN
PAPER (S)
TRAY3 PLAIN
PAPER (L)
TRAY3
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
TRAY3
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
TRAY4 PLAIN
PAPER (S)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with [REGI1] and [REGI2]

keys on the touch panel.
2)
3)
4)

Item
REGI1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
REGI2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
NORMAL_
PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_
PLAIN_MID
NORMAL_
PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL_
THIN_HIGH
NORMAL_
THIN_MID
NORMAL_
THIN_LOW
RANDOM_
PLAIN_HIGH
RANDOM_
PLAIN_MID
RANDOM_
PLAIN_LOW
RANDOM_
THIN_HIGH
RANDOM_
THIN_MID
RANDOM_
THIN_LOW
NORMAL_
PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_
PLAIN_MID
NORMAL_
PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL_
THIN_HIGH
NORMAL_
THIN_MID
NORMAL_
THIN_LOW
RANDOM_
PLAIN_HIGH
RANDOM_
PLAIN_MID
RANDOM_
PLAIN_LOW
RANDOM_
THIN_HIGH
RANDOM_
THIN_MID
RANDOM_
THIN_LOW
Item content (mode,

document, paper feed speed)
DSPF warp adjustment value 1
(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
(normal, plain paper, MID)
(normal, plain paper, LOW)
(normal, thin paper, HIGH)
(normal, thin paper, MID)
(normal, thin paper, LOW)
(random, plain paper, HIGH)
(random, plain paper, MID)
(random, plain paper, LOW)
(random, thin paper, HIGH)
(random, thin paper, MID)
(random, thin paper, LOW)
(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
(normal, plain paper, MID)
(normal, plain paper, LOW)
(normal, thin paper, HIGH)
(normal, thin paper, MID)
(normal, thin paper, LOW)
(random, plain paper, HIGH)
(random, plain paper, MID)
(random, plain paper, LOW)
(random, thin paper, MID)
(random, thin paper, LOW)
Default
value
50
50
50
TRAY4 PLAIN
PAPER (L)
TRAY4
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
TRAY4
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
MANUAL
PLAIN PAPER
(S)
MANUAL
PLAIN PAPER
(L)
MANUAL
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
MANUAL
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
MANUAL OHP
MANUAL ENV
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
U
V
ADU PLAIN
PAPER (S)
ADU PLAIN
PAPER (L)
ADU HEAVY
PAPER (S)
ADU HEAVY
PAPER (L)
A4LCC
A3LCC (S)
50
A3LCC (L)
50
A3LCC
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
A3LCC
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
50
50
50
50
R
S
T
50
50
50
50
50
Item content (mode,

document, paper feed speed)
Main unit tray 3, warp
adjustment value (plain paper,
small size)
large size)
adjustment value (heavy paper,
small size)
large size)
small size)
large size)
small size)
large size)
Manual feed tray, warp
small size)
large size)
small size)
large size)
adjustment value (OHP)
adjustment value (envelope)
ADU, warp adjustment value
(plain paper, small size)
(plain paper, large size)
(heavy paper, small size)
(heavy paper, large size)
A4LCC, warp adjustment value
A3LCC warp adjustment value
(plain paper, small size)
(plain paper, large size)
(heavy paper, small size)
Default
value
40

(heavy paper, large size)
25
40
40
40
25
25
40
40
25
25
40
40
25
25
25
40
40
40
30
30
40
40
40
25
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.51-02
TEST
A:
1
REGI1
53-7
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
REGIST ROLLER ADJUSTMENT

A : 50
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
50
B : 50
NORMAL_PLAIN_MID
99
C : 50
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
D : 50
NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
Operation/Procedure
E : 50
NORMAL_THIN_MID
1)
F : 50
NORMAL_THIN_LOW
G : 50
RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH
2)
H : 50
RANDOM_PLAIN_MID
3)
I:
50
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
J:
50
RANDOM_THIN_HIGH
K : 50
NORMAL_THIN_MID
L : 50
RANDOM_THIN_LOW
REGI2
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width

adjustment value setting.
Section
ENGIN
the touch panel.
A
B
C
D
OK
Item
Max. width position
A4R width position
A5R width position
Min. width position
AD_MAX
AD_P1
AD_P2
AD_MIN
Default value
66
438
699
893
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-07
TEST
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
53
A:
66
0
1023
53-6
Purpose
A : 66
AD_MAX
B : 438
AD_P1
C : 699
AD_P2
D : 893
AD_MIN
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width

detection level adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
2)
3)
Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A4R width.
53-8
4)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF document scanning start position adjustment.
OK
The maximum width detection level is recognized.

Adjustment
5)
Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A5R width.
6)
Section
Operation/Procedure
7)
Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
1)
8)
2)
The minimum width detection level is recognized.

When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Item
A
ADJUST VALUE
TEST
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Tray size volume maximum value

Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Tray size volume A4R size adjustment value
SIMULATION NO.53-06
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
TEST
1
2
3
4
DSPF scanning position adjustment
Default
value
50
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT

A : 50
A:
ADJUST VALUE
50
1
99
CLOSE
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT

TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
OK
EXECUTE
55
56
55-1
56-1
Purpose

required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine control operation specification setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target content of data transfer.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.

Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1 is executed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-01

ENGINE SOFT SW. SETTING.

SW NO.
DATA
Backup
(SW No.1-16)
ALL o HDD
HDD o ALL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
EEPROM o HDD
HDD o EEPROM
SRAM o HDD
EXECUTE
HDD o SRAM
55-2
required.)
Purpose
Section
DATA
HDD
ENABLE
HDD
ALL
DISABLE
HDD
DISABLE
EEPROM
DISABLE
HDD
CLOSE
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING.

SW NO.
ALL
EEPROM
Operation/Procedure
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56-01
TEST
COPY DATA
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner control operation specification setting.
SIMULATION NO.55-02
All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD.

The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Transfer from SRAM or HDD (including the FAX
memory)
Transfer from HDD to SRAM (including the FAX
memory)
SRAM
HDD
DISABLE
HDD
SRAM
DISABLE
(SW No.1-16)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ARE
YOU SURE?
55-3
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the controller operation

specification setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING.

SW NO.
DATA
1/1
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) in the
EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the
main unit into the USB memory and to
transfer the data.
Section
SIMULATION NO.55-03
EXECUTE
Backup
Purpose
TEST
NO
56-2
EXECUTE
Purpose
YES
2)
Select a target item for transfer with the touch panel.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.

Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 2 is executed.
(SW No.1-16)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56-02
EXPORT/IMPORT FILING DATA
EXECUTE
HDD EXPORT
HDD IMPORT
EEPROM&SRAM EXPORT
EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
Operation/Procedure
60
60-1
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
The test is started.
TEST
Select a target mode for check with [COLOR] and [MONO] key
on the touch panel.
2)

When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)

of the MFP control (SDRAM).
1)
1)
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG CL

LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG
BW
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K CL
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K BW
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL
LSU check polygon mirror abnormality
LSU check K color LD light emitting

abnormality
LSU check C color LD light emitting
abnormality
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.60-01
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-01
LSU TEST
EXECUTE
60-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the onboard SDRAM.

Section
Operation/Procedure
COLOR
Item
SETTING ENABLE
NUMBER OF ROW
NUMBER OF COLUMN
TWR SETTING VALUE
TRAS SETTING VALUE
TRC SETTING VALUE
TRCD SETTING VALUE
TRP SETTING VALUE
TFRC SETTING VALUE
CAS LATENCY
TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR
NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Default value
0
2
2
1
2
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
MONO
EXECUTE
1/1
61-2
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power. (for printer

FIERY)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
the touch panel.
2)
3)

Default value
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.60-02
Item
SDRAM SETTING
A:
0
0
A:
SETTING ENABLE : DISABLE
B:
NUMBER OF ROW : 13BIT
C:
NUMBER OF COLUMN : 10BIT
D:
TWR SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
E:
TRAS SETTING VALUE : 6CLOCK
F:
TRC SETTING VALUE : 9CLOCK
G:
TRCD SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
H:
TRP SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
I:
TFRP SETTING VALUE : 10CLOCK
A
B
C
D
E
J:
TRCD ABSOLUTE VALUE : CL=2.5
K:
TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR : 128MBYTE
L:
NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK : 1CHIP SELECT
F
G
OK
H
I
61
J
K
61-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the polygon motor rotation

and the BD signal detection.
Section
LSU
LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (K)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (C)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (M)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (Y)
LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (K)
LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (C)
LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (M)
LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (Y)
LASER POWER
HIGH FIERY (B/W)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (B/W)
LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (B/W)
LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (K)
LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (C)
Laser power setting

middle speed, black
Laser power setting
middle speed, cyan
Laser power setting
middle speed, magenta
Laser power setting
middle speed, yellow
Laser power setting
low speed, black
Laser power setting
low speed, cyan
Laser power setting
low speed, magenta
Laser power setting
low speed, yellow
Laser power setting
high speed, B/W
Laser power setting
middle speed, B/W
Laser power setting
low speed, B/W
Laser LUT select
middle speed, black
Laser LUT select
middle speed, cyan
55/62sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
96
107
118
118
77
77
Default value
Default value
Item
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
LASER LUT MIDDLE

FIERY (M)
LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (Y)
LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (K)
LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (C)
LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (M)
LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (Y)
LASER LUT HIGH
FIERY (B/W)
LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (B/W)
LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (B/W)
55/62sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
Laser LUT select

middle speed, magenta
Laser LUT select
middle speed, yellow
Laser LUT select low
speed, black
speed, cyan
speed, magenta
speed, yellow
Laser LUT select high
speed, B/W
Laser LUT select
middle speed, B/W
speed, B/W
Q
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-02
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP[FIERY]
A:
58
A : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (K)
110
B : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (C)
236
C : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (M)
D : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (Y)
E : 77
LASER POWER LOW FIERY (K)
F : 77
LASER POWER LOW FIERY (C)
G : 77
LASER POWER LOW FIERY (M)
H : 77
LASER POWER LOW FIERY (Y)
I : 96
LASER POWER HIGH FIERY (B/W)
J : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (B/W)
K : 77
LASER POWER LOW FIERY (B/W)
L:
LASER LUT MIDDLE FIERY (K)
S
T
U
V
W
A
B
OK
61-3
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] and [PRINT/

FAX] on the touch panel.
2)
the touch panel.
3)
4)

Default value
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LASER POWER
MIDDLE (K)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE (C)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE (M)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE (Y)
LASER POWER
LOW (K)
LASER POWER
LOW (C)
LASER POWER
LOW (M)
Laser power setting middle

speed, black
speed, cyan
speed, magenta
speed, yellow
Laser power setting low
speed, black
speed, cyan
speed, magenta
55/62sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
77
77
77
77
77
77
55/62sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
77
77
96
107
118
118
77
77
50
50
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
77
77
Laser power setting (for

printer) low speed, cyan
77
77

printer) low speed,
magenta
printer) low speed, yellow
77
77
77
77

printer) high speed, B/W
96
107

printer) middle speed, B/W
118
118

printer) low speed, B/W
77
77
Laser LUT select (for

printer) middle speed,
black
cyan
Item
LASER POWER
LOW (Y)
LASER POWER
HIGH (B/W)
LASER POWER
MIDDLE (B/W)
LASER POWER
LOW (B/W)
LASER POWER
DIFF (K2)
LASER LUT
MIDDLE (K)
LASER LUT
MIDDLE (C)
LASER LUT
MIDDLE (M)
LASER LUT
MIDDLE (Y)
LASER LUT LOW
(K)
LASER LUT LOW
(C)
LASER LUT LOW
(M)
LASER LUT LOW
(Y)
LASER LUT HIGH
(BW)
LASER LUT
MIDDLE (BW)
LASER LUT
LOW(BW)
LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (K)
LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (C)
LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (M)
LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (Y)
LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(K)
LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(C)
LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(M)
LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(Y)
LASER POWER
PRINTER HIGH
(B/W)
LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (B/W)
LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(B/W)
LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (K)
LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (C)

speed, yellow
Laser power setting high
speed, B/W
speed, B/W
speed, B/W
K2 beam difference value
K (Difference for K1 beam)
Laser LUT select middle
speed, black
speed, cyan
speed, magenta
speed, yellow
speed, black
speed, cyan
speed, magenta
speed, yellow
Laser LUT select high
speed, B/W
speed, B/W
speed, B/W
black
cyan
magenta
yellow
printer) low speed, black
Default value
LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (M)
LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (Y)
LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (K)
LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (C)
LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (M)
Q
R
S
T
U
LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (Y)
LASER PRINTER
LUT HIGH (BW)
LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE
(BW)
LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (BW)
70-sheet
machine

magenta
yellow
printer) low speed, black
printer) low speed, cyan
printer) low speed,
magenta
printer) low speed, yellow
printer) high speed, B/W
printer) middle speed, B/W

printer) low speed, B/W
CLOSE
118
58
236
MULTICOUNT
B:
PAPER : CS3
999
EXECUTE
62-1
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
the operation manual area.)
Section
A : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE (K)
B : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE (C)
C : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE (M)
D : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y)
E : 77
LASER POWER LOW (K)
F : 77
LASER POWER LOW (C)
G : 77
LASER POWER LOW (M)
H : 77
LASER POWER LOW (Y)
I : 96
LASER POWER HIGH (B/W)
J : 118
LASER POWER MIDDLE (B/W)
K : 77
LASER POWER LOW (B/W)
L : 50
LASER POWER DIFF (K2)
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Formatting the hard disk is started.
TEST
PRINT/FAX
OK
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(partial).
61-4
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self printing of the LSU

position adjustment pattern.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
2)
Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
Read/write is executed.
1)
2)
A
B
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-01
HDD FORMAT
Purpose
3)
OK
62
ARE
COPY
A:
Operation/Procedure
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP
A:
A:
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
Purpose
SIMULATION NO.61-03
TEST
TEST
55/62sheet
machine
Item
TEST
Press [EXECUTE] key. Printing is started.
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Item
Print quantity
Cassette
1:
selection
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-02
HDD R/W TEST(PART)
Default value
1
4
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(all areas).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
2)
Press [YES] key.

Read/write is executed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-03
TEST
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
ARE YOU
62-6
SURE?
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the

hard disk.
Purpose
EXECUTE
Data clear
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item of the self diagnostics.
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Delete of the job log data is started.
The self diagnostics is started.
TEST
NO
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section
SHORT S.T
EXTENDED S.T
YES
62-10
Purpose
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-08
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
HDD R/W TEST(ALL)
TEST
Partial check
All areas check
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-10
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR(WITH JOB LOG DATA)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-06
SMART OFFLINE TEST
SHORT S.T
ENABLE
EXTENDED S.T
DISABLE
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-11
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.

Section
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
1/1
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Delete of the document filing data is executed.
62-7
Purpose
TEST
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics

error log.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-11
DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Printing the error log is started.

TEST
SIMULATION NO.62-07
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
CLOSE
62-12
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT
Purpose
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE SMART ERROR PRINT
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format

in a hard disk trouble.
Section
EXECUTE
62-8
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

A
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding

the system area and the operation manual
area)
0: Enable
1: Disable (Default)
Section
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-12
TEST
DSPF
AUTO FORMAT SETTING (HDD TROUBLE)

A:
A:
(0:YES 1:NO)
1
0
GAIN ODD
GAIN_EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
Gain adjustment value (odd number)

Gain adjustment value (Even number)
Offset value (odd number)
Offset value (even number)
Reference plate sampling average
value (ODD)
value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code
First scan DSPF back surface white
reference level
Second scan DSPF back surface
white reference level
SMP AVE EVEN

TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
DSPF BACK WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
DSPF BACK WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
OK
TEST
62-13
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-01
SHADING DATA DISPLAY
Purpose
GAIN ODD
147
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the

operation manual area)
GAIN EVEN
143
OFFSET ODD
Section
OFFSET EVEN
Operation/Procedure
SMP AVE ODD
1)
SMP AVE EVEN
Press [YES] key.
TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 1ST
DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 2ND
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-13
TEST
HDD FORMAT(MANUAL AREA ONLY)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
OC
DSPF
1/1
63-2
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.

Section
63
Operation/Procedure
63-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the shading correction

result.
Scanner
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode for execution with [OC SHADING] and

[DSPF SHADING] on the touch panel.
2)

Shading is executed.
OC SHADING
DSPF SHADING
1)
Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel.
2)
Select the display target mode from [OC] and [DSPF].
TEST
OC analog level correction and shading correction

data making (Document table mode)
DSPF analog level correction and shading correction
data making (DSPF mode)
SIMULATION NO.63-02
CLOSE
SHADING EXECUTION
OC
GAIN ODD
GAIN_EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE EVEN
TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
DSPF FACE WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
DSPF FACE WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Gain adjustment value (odd number)

Gain adjustment value (Even number)
Offset value (odd number)
Offset value (even number)
value (ODD)
value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code
First scan DSPF front surface white
reference level
Second scan DSPF front surface
white reference level
SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
OC SHADING
DSPF SHADING
EXECUTE
63-3
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner color balance and

color coefficient auto adjustment.
Section
Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] on the touch panel.
2)
Select a target mode with [OC] and [DSPF].
3)
4)
The color auto adjustment is executed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
OC
#4:148,
#5:117,
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE CHART READING
#1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#6:110,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18:
#19:
5, #20:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-06
TEST
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
8,
4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
EXECUTE
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89
R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89
G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89
B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
63-7
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the auto density setting of

the engine auto adjustment scanner target
value. (Servicing)
B
DSPF
OC
1/2
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
2)
Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner color balance

and the color coefficient auto adjustment.
3)
Section
4)
Press [OK] key.
Sampling is executed.
63-5
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Sampling of each patch is executed.

The displayed sampling result is saved as the target value.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target of the initial value reset with [SIDE A(OC)]

[SIDE B (DSPF)] on the touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
The initial value is saved.

SIDE A
(OC)
SIDE B
(DSPF)
TEST
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient

TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-05
STANDARD SCANNER GAMMA SETUP

SIDE A(OC)
SIDE B(DSPF)
Point B target value

Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Background sampling value
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE

#B:
91,
#G:
28935,
#L: 169731,
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#M: 195950,
#N: 201249,
#E:
5822,
#J: 122678,
#F:
8600
#K: 151198
#:O: 207112
1/1
63-6
Purpose
#C
SETUP
Adjustment/Setting
1/1

auto adjustment pattern setting.
63-8
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the initial value reset of the

engine auto adjustment scanner target
value. (Servicing)
1)
Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table.
2)
3)
The sampling value of each patch is displayed.
Adjustment/Setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-08
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
TARGET TBL
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-11
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
NO
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
EXECUTE
63-11
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the reference scanner target

value for the engine auto density adjustment.
1/1
Section
64
Operation/Procedure
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.
Target value table

select
Item
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
64-1
DEF1 mode setting
DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 mode setting
Default value
DEF 1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self print. (Color mode)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target color for self print with [K] [C] [M] [Y] on the
touch panel.
2)
Select a target item to print with [n] and [p] keys.
3)
4)

Self printing is started.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19)

DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11)
DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11)
DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9)
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19)
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY *
OHP
ENVELOPE
Print pattern specification

Print dot number setting
Empty dot number setting
Print gradation setting
Print quantity
Specification of the
1:
exposure mode.
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Tray selection
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Duplex print select
0:
1:
Paper type
1:
2:
3:
4:
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)
No process (through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Manual feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Select
Not selected
Normal paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Default value
1
1
254
255
1
8
1
1
<Item A print pattern>

Pattern generating
section
LSU-ASIC
Pattern
1
Grid pattern
2
9
Dot print
Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10
11
14
8-color belt print

4-point dot print
256 gradations: Sub scan
15
16
17
18
19
16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan

16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan
All background (half tone)
256 gradation pattern (Other dither)
256 gradation pattern (Text dither)
TEST
Remark
For the print width of 100 or more, when all colors are selected, print is
made in three colors of CMY.
Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
Input process
(IMG-ASIC
previous process)
IMG-ASIC
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC afterprocess)
Each print is printed for /4 of the sub scan paper size.

When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
gradations.
In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction. (16 x 16
patch print)
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
gradations.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-01
TEST
A:
1
1
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-02
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE PATCH PRINT MODE
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE

A:
PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9
B:
DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
11, 14
C : 254
DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
D : 255
DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9)
E:
MULTI COUNT
F:
EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2
G:
PAPER : CS1
H:
DUPLEX : NO
I:
PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
19)
A:
1
1
8 IF A : 14
A:
COPIES
B:
PROC ADJ:NO
999
19)
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK
OK
64-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self print (monochrome

mode).
64-2
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
2)
Operation/Procedure
3)
1)
4)
2)
3)

Printing the pattern is started.
Item
A
B
COPIES
PROC ADJ
Print quantity
0: Adding of the half tone process control
correction amount is made.
1: Adding of the half tone process control
correction amount is not made.
Default
value
1
1
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19)

DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11)
DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11)
DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9)
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19)
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY *
OHP
ENVELOPE

Print dot number setting
Empty dot number setting
Print gradation setting
Print quantity
Specification of the
exposure mode.
Paper feed tray select
Duplex print select

Paper type select
1: No process (through)
2: Text/Printed Photo
3: Text/Photograph
4: Text
5: Printed photo
6: Photograph
7: Map
8: Dither without correction
1: Manual feed
2: Tray 1
3: Tray 2
4: Tray 3
5: Tray 4
6: LCC
0: Select
1: Not selected
Normal paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Default value
1
1
254
255
1
8
1
1
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)

Pattern generating section
LSU-ASIC
1
2
9
Grid pattern
Dot print
10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10
11
14
8-color belt print

4-point dot print
256 gradations: Sub scan
15
16
17
18
19
16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan

16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan
All background (half tone)
256 gradation pattern (Other dither)
256 gradation pattern (Text dither)
TEST
Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).

Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC afterprocess)
Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction.

Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-03
SELF PRINT(BW) : SERVICE
A:
1
1
20
A:
PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9
B:
DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
C : 254
DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
D : 255
DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9)
E:
MULTI COUNT
F:
EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2
G:
PAPER : CS1
H:
DUPLEX : NO
I:
PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
11, 14
Printing is made for every 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
Input process
(IMG-ASIC
previous process)
IMG-ASIC
19)
2)
3)
4)

Item
8 IF A : 14
A
B
C
D
19)
EXECUTE
PRINT PATTERN
DENSITY
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
MFT
OK
HALFTONE
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print.

BIT DEPTH
Section
DITHER
64-4
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
touch panel.
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
PHOTO
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
CAD
1BIT
4BIT
STRAIGHT
CALIB

Print gradation specification
Print quantity
Paper feed
1: Manual
tray select
feed
2: Tray 1
3: Tray 2
4: Tray 3
5: Tray 4
6: LCC
Half tone
0: Photo
1: Text/
Image
2: Design
Number of
0: 1bit
bits
1: 4bit
Dither
1: Straight
correction
2: Calibration
specification
Default
value
3
128
1
2
1
2

1
256 gradation pattern

(COLOR)
256 gradation pattern (B/W)
256 gradation pattern
(COLOR) (Y-M-C-K
continuous)
Half tone pattern (Color)
Half tone pattern (B/W)
2
3
TEST
Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/ M&Y
Black only
Four sheets of continuous print in
monochrome of Y, M, C, K.
Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/M&Y/
C&M&Y
Black only
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-04
PRINTER SELF PRINT

A:
A:
1
PRINT PATTERN
B : 128
DENSITY
C:
MULTI COUNT
D:
PAPER : CS2
E:
HALFTONE
F:
INTENT
SHARP COLOR
Rendering
intent
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
GRAY COMPENSATION
K
Gray
compensation
KCMY
TONER SAVE MODE
ON
Toner save
mode
OFF
TEST
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
0: K only
1: KCMY
0: ON
1: OFF
CLOSE
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PCL)
A:
A:
PRINT PATTERN
B:
DITHER : CALIB
C:
MULTI COUNT
D:
PAPER : CS1
E:
HALFTONE : PHOTO
F:
BIT DEPTH : 4BIT
G:
INTENT : PERCEPTUAL
H:
GRAY COMPENSATION : K
I:
TONER SAVE MODE : OFF
BIT DEPTH
DITHER
EXECUTE
OK
64-5
Purpose
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
SIMULATION NO.64-05
1
G:
Default
value
Item
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PCL).

EXECUTE
OK
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
touch panel.
2)
3)
4)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
C
D
PRINT PATTERN
DITHER
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
HALFTONE
PHOTO
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
CAD
BIT DEPTH
1BIT
4BIT
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PS).

64-6
Purpose
Print pattern
specification
1: Used to
perform the PCL
inspection pattern
(COLOR).
2: PCL inspection
pattern (B/W)
3: PCL inspection
pattern (COLOR/
B/W continuous)
Dither
correction
specification
Print quantity
1: Straight
2: Calibration
Paper feed
tray select
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Half tone
Default
value
3
0: Photo
1: Text/Image
0: 1bit
1: 4bit
2)
3)
4)
Item
A
PRINT PATTERN
DITHER
STRAIGHT
CALIB
2
C
D
0
E
2: Design
Number of
bits
touch panel.
1
Manual feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
1)
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
HALFTONE
PHOTO
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
CAD
Print pattern
specification
1: PC inspection
pattern (COLOR)
2: PS inspection
pattern (B/W)
Dither
correction
specification
Print quantity
1: Straight
2: Calibration
Paper feed
tray select
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Half tone
Photo
Text/Image
Default
value
1
1
Manual feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Design
Default
value
Item
F
BIT DEPTH
1BIT
Number of
bits
4BIT
INTENT
SHARP COLOR
Rendering
intent
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
GRAY COMPENSATION
K
Gray
compensation
KCMY
INK SIMULATION
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
TEST
1bit
4bit
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
K only
KCMY
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
65-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the touch panel (LCD display) detection position adjustment result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates (X= horizontal, Y=Vertical) of the point being
touched are displayed in real time.
40
40
X:
Ink simulation
Y:
130
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-06
600
20
40
120
220
420
320
520
620
240
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PS)
A:
1
A:
PRINT PATTERN
B:
DITHER : CALIB
C:
MULTI COUNT
D:
PAPER : CS1
E:
HALFTONE : PHOTO
F:
BIT DEPTH : 4BIT
350
40
G:
INTENT : PERCEPTUAL
H:
GRAY COMPENSATION : K
I:
INK SIMULATION : OFF
600
440
440
460
65-5
Purpose
K
EXECUTE
OK
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key

input.
Section
Operation/Procedure
65
Press the keys displayed on the screen sequentially.

TEST
65-1
Purpose
SIMULATION NO.65-05
CLOSE
OPERATION PANEL KEY CHECK

PLEASE PUSH HOME KEY
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the touch panel (LCD display) detection position adjustment.
Section
Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When all the four points are touched and OK, the sampled correction value is saved.
66
66-1
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to change and check the soft switch

setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [SW No.] key.
2)
Enter the soft switch number to be checked or changed with

10-key.
3)
Press [DATA] key.
4)
Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with

10-key.
5)
The current setting status is displayed.
For details, refer to "4-A. Soft switches."

The setting content is saved.
TEST
If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,

"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMLATION NO.66-01
FAX SOFT SW. SETTING.

SW No.
DATA
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is

found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
12345678
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXECUTE
66-2
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX soft switch and set
the default value.
All Memory Device Check (once)
MFP SRAM(once)
MFP SRAM (repeat)
MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(once)
MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat)
MODEM EEPROM<1>(once)
MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat)
MODEM SDRAM<1>(once)
Enter the country code with 10-key.

* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the country code list is
displayed.
When [BACK] key is pressed on the destination code list
screen, the display returns to the destination code entry
screen.
2)
Press [SET] key.
3)
4)
Press [YES] key.
TEST
00000000
10110101
00001001
10110100
00111101
00000100
10100101
01111110
00100110
10011100
11111110
11111101
11111100
11111011
00111100
NORWAY
DENMARK
NETHERLANDS
ITALY
SWITZERLAND
AUSTRIA
INDONESIA
THAILAND
MALAYSIA
INDIA
PHILIPPINES
HONGKONG
RUSSIA
SOUTHAFRICA
10000010
00110001
01111011
01011001
10100110
00001010
01010100
10101001
01101100
01010011
10001001
01010000
10111000
10011111
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-02
FAX SOFT SW.CLEAR - JAPAN

PRESENT :
00000000
SET
NEW :
DEST CODE
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)
66-4
Clearing the soft switch is executed.

JAPAN
U.S.A.
AUSTRALIA
U.K.
FRANCE
GERMANY
SWEDEN
NEWZEALAND
CHINA
SINGAPORE
TW
OTHER1
OTHER2
OTHER3
FINLAND
Purpose
1)
Select the display screen with [n] and [p] keys.
2)
Select an output target mode with the touch panel key.
3)

A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be
stopped.
NOSIGNAL
26.4 V34
16.8 V34
7.2 V34
12.0 V33
7.2 V17
2.4 V27t
0.3 V21
DP MAKE
EXECUTE
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item of the memory operation check with the

touch panel.
2)
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation (read/write) of

the FAX PWB memory.
Section
Operation check, test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation

(MODEM operation) of data signal in each
data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
66-3
Purpose
CLOSE
FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK
Operation/Procedure
1)
Check all the items once.

Check only once.
Repeat checking.
Check only once.
Repeat checking.
Check only once.
Repeat checking.
Check only once.
Repeat checking.
SIMULATION NO.66-03
TEST
FAX
Section
All Memory Device Check (once)

MFP SRAM (once)
MFP SRAM (repeat)
MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH (once)
MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat)
MODEM EEPROM<1>(once)
MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat)
MODEM SDRAM<1>(once)
MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)
The operation check of the selected memory is executed.
33.6 V34
24.0 V34
14.4 V34
4.8 V34
14.4 V17
9.6 V29
0.3 FLG
ANSam
DP BRK
31.2 V34
21.6 V34
12.0 V34
2.4 V34
12.0 V17
7.2 V29
CED 2100
RINGER
No MSG
28.8 V34
19.2 V34
9.6 V34
14.4 V33
9.6 V17
4.8 V27t
CNG 1100
No RBT
Operation/Procedure
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-04
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (LEVEL MAX)

NOSIGNAL
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.

* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-06
PASS CODE PRINT OUT.
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
0.3 FLG
CED 2100
CNG 1100
0.3 V21
ANSam
RINGER
EXECUTE
66-7
Purpose
No RBT
EXECUTE
1/2
Function (Purpose) Used to output the image memory data

(memory send and receive).
* The confidential receive contents are also
outputted.
Section
66-5
Purpose

(MODEM operation) of data signal in each
data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft
switch setting
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.

* If there is no image memory, no output is made.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-07
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT.
FAX
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the display screen with [n] and [p] keys.
2)
3)
EXECUTE
A signal is outputted at the send level set with the soft switch.
stopped.
NOSIGNAL
26.4 V34
16.8 V34
7.2 V34
12.0 V33
7.2 V17
2.4 V27t
0.3 V21
DP MAKE
TEST
33.6 V34
24.0 V34
14.4 V34
4.8 V34
14.4 V17
9.6 V29
0.3 FLG
ANSam
DP BRK
31.2 V34
21.6 V34
12.0 V34
2.4 V34
12.0 V17
7.2 V29
CED 2100
RINGER
No MSG
Section
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
0.3 FLG
CED 2100
CNG 1100
1)
Select an output target model with the touch panel key.
2)

CLOSE
33.6 V34
FAX
Operation/Procedure

stopped.
NONE
PAUSE
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
MESSAGE6
ALARM
RINGER
EXT.TEL.RINGER
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (SOFT SW.)

NOSIGNAL
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio

output IC operation check) of the various
audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
28.8 V34
19.2 V34
9.6 V34
14.4 V33
9.6 V17
4.8 V27t
CNG 1100
No RBT
SIMULATION NO.66-05
66-8
Purpose
TEST
Mute
Pause melody
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Message 5
Message 6
Alarm
Ringer (Speaker)
External telephone ringer
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-08
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX)
0.3 V21
ANSam
RINGER
No RBT
EXECUTE
66-6
Purpose
NONE
PAUSE
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
MESSAGE6
ALARM
RINGER
EXT.TEL.RINGER
1/2
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential pass code.

Section
FAX
EXECUTE
2)
66-9
Purpose

stopped.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio

output IC operation) of various audio signals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-11
TEST
FAX
Section
300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (LEVEL MAX.)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
NO SIGNAL
11111
010101
00001
11110
00000
stopped.
NONE
PAUSE
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
MESSAGE6
ALARM
RINGER
EXT.TEL.RINGER
TEST
Mute
Pause melody
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Message 5
Message 6
Alarm
Ringer (Speaker)
External telephone ringer
EXECUTE
66-12
Purpose

(MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
300bps. Send level: Set with the soft
switch.
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-09
1)
Select an output target mode with the touch panel.
2)

MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.)

NONE
PAUSE
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
MESSAGE6
ALARM
RINGER
EXT.TEL.RINGER

stopped.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-12
300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (SOFT SW.)

NO SIGNAL
11111
010101
00001
11110
00000
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
66-10
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear all the data (memory receive

and send) of the image memory.
* The confidential receive data are cleared
simultaneously.
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
66-13
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the number for the FAX dial signal output test. (In the dial signal output test
with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set
with this simulation is outputted.)
1)
Section
2)
Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
The image memory is cleared.
1)
TEST
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR.
Enter the set value with 10-key.

Enter with 10-key (0 - 9), [*] key, and [#] key. The upper limit is
20 digits.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-10
FAX
2)
Press [SET] key.

Setting is saved.
TEST
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
PRESENT :
NEW :
66-11
Purpose

(MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
300bps. Send level: MAX
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-13
DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTING.

0123456789#
SET
66-14
66-16
Purpose
FAX
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (10PPS) and to execute the dial
signal output test. (The signal of the dial
number set with SIM66-13 is outputted.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial mode. (The
signal of the dial number set with SIM 6613 is outputted.) The send level can be set
to an optional level.
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Enter the set value of make time with 10-key. (0 - 15)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set with the above
procedure.
2)
Enter the set value of the send level with 10-key. (0 - 15)
3)

The dial signal is outputted at the send level set in the above
procedure.

stopped.

stopped.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-14
TEST
Select a target item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
DIAL TEST(10PPS)
A :
A:
MAKE TIME [+29ms]
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-16
TEST
DIAL TEST(DTMF)
15
A:
EXECUTE
4
0
A:
HIGH(dB)
B:
HIGH-LOW
15
OK
EXECUTE
OK
66-15
66-17
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (20PPS) and to execute the dial
signal output test. (The signal of the dial
number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
Section
FAX
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
level: MAX
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value of the make time with 10-key. (0 - 15)
1)
2)
2)
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set in the above
procedure.
stopped.

stopped.
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX)
DIAL TEST(20PPS)
A :
A:
MAKE TIME [+9ms]
4
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-17
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-15
TEST
15
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK
66-18
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
level: Set with the soft switch.
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
66-21
stopped.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-18
TEST
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.)

2
Adjustment, setting, operation data check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print information abut FAX (various

registrations, communication management, file management, system errors, protocols).
1)
Select a print target item with the touch panel key.
2)

Printing is started.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-21
TEST
FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT.

REGISTERED
MANAGEMENT
FILE MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM ERROR LINE
PROTOCOL LINE
EXECUTE
66-19
Purpose
Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the address book data

stored in the HDD. (Backup to the Flash
ROM)
EXECUTE
66-24
Section
Clear
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST memory data.
2)
Press [YES] key.
Section
The address book data in the HDD are saved to the Flash
ROM.
Operation/Procedure
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-19
FAX
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The FAST memory data are cleared.
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-24
FAST MEMORY CLEAR.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
ARE
66-20
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Data transfer
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to transfer the address book data

stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer to HDD)
Section
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
66-25
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to register a FAX number for MODEM

dial-in.
Operation/Procedure
FAX
Section
The address book data are transferred from the Flash ROM to
the HDD.
TEST
YOU
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-20
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter a MODEM dial-in FAX number (0 - 9, *, #) with 10-key.

The upper limit is 20 digits.
2)
Press [SET] key.

The MODEM dial-in FAX number is registered.
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-25
M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]
PRESENT :
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
--------------------
NEW :
SET
66-26
TEST
Setting
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-30
TEL/LIU SENSOR CHECK

HS1
Function (Purpose) Used to register an external telephone

number for MODEM dial-in.
HS2
RHS
EXHS
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter a MODEM dial-in external telephone number (0 - 9, *, #)

with 10-key. The upper limit is 20 digits.
2)
Press [SET] key.

The MODEM dial-in external telephone number is registered.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-26
Purpose
--------------------
FAX
Section
1)
Select the port to be turned ON with the touch panel key.

(ON: Highlighted display)
2)
SET
NEW :
Operation check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the TEL/LIU output port.

Operation/Procedure
M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]
PRESENT :
66-31
The setting is reflected.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be
stopped.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-31
TEL/LIU SETTING.
66-29
CION
MR
EC
S.
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the data related to the

address book (one-touch registration, FTP/
Desktop extension, group extension, program registration, interface memory box,
meta data, Inbound Routing, Document
Admin table).
EXECUTE
66-32
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the received data (fixed

data) from the line.
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
Section
The data related to the address book are cleared.
Operation/Procedure
TEST
1)
2)
When the check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed.

When an error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-29
FAX ADDRESS DATA CLEAR.
FAX
The fixed data received from the line are checked.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be

stopped.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
TEST
SIMULATION NO.66-32
CLOSE
RECEIVED DATA CHECK

CHECKING...
66-30
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU status.

Section
EXECUTE
FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-33
The TEL/LIU status is displayed.

(Signal detected: Highlighted display, Signal not-detected: Normal
display)
HS1
HS2
RHS
EXHS
Polarity reversal signal

Polarity reversal signal
Handset hook SW
External telephone hook SW
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to detect the line signals (BUSY

TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF).
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Select a target item for signal detection check with the touch panel
key.
The detected signal is highlighted.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-33
66-39
Setting
Purpose
SIGNAL DETECT CHECK.

FNET
Function (Purpose) Used to set the destination.

FAX
Section
BT/CNG/CED/DT
Operation/Procedure
Select a destination with the touch panel key.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-39
FAX DESTINATION SETUP

JAPAN
U.S.A/CANADA
CHINA
ASIA&OTHERS
EUROPE
AUSTRALIA
66-34
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to measure the communication time

of the send test image data.
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
The send test is performed and the send time is measures and displayed. (Unit: ms)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-34
66-42
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the power control program

again to the FAX BOX.
COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY.

####[ms]
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

When writing the program is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. When writing is failed, "NG" is displayed.
66-36
Purpose
TEST
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the interface check

between the MFP controller and the
MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
Section
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-42
POWER CONTROL PROGRAM RELOAD
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item for the operation check with the touch
panel key.
2)

If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,
"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is displayed.
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is
found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
MFP m MDMC (DATA once)

MFP o MDMC (DATA once)
MFP m MDMC (DATA repeat)
MFP o MDMC (DATA repeat)
MFP m MDMC (CMD once)
MFP o MDMC (CMD once)
MFP m MDMC (CMD repeat)
MFP o MDMC (CMD repeat)
TEST
MFP<-MDMC (DATA once)
MFP->MDMC (DATA once)
MFP<-MDMC (DATA repeat)
MFP->MDMC (DATA repeat)
MFP<-MDMC (CMD once)
MFP->MDMC (CMD once)
MFP<-MDMC (CMD repeat)
MFP->MDMC (CMD repeat)
YES
NO
EXECUTE
66-43
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value of the

power control program to the FAX BOX.
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2)
Enter a set value with 10-key.
3)

When writing the adjustment value is completed normally,
"OK" is displayed. When it fails, "NG" is displayed.
CLOSE
MFP-MDMC I/F CHECK.
YOU SURE?
Section
Data line once only

Data line once only
Data lien repeat
Data line repeat
Command line once only
Command line once only
Command line repeat
Command line repeat
SIMULATION NO.66-36
ARE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Item
CI_LEVEL_JUDGE
CI_CYCLE_MIN
CI_CYCLE_MAX
CI_COUNT
POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE
EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
SON_TIMEOUT
EXECUTE
Set range
2 - 15
1 - 254
2 - 255
2 - 15
2 - 15
2 - 255
2 - 15
1 - 127
Default
3
10
142
3
15
240
2
20
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-43
TEST
TEST
POWER CONTROL ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.

A:
A:
CI_LEVEL_JUDGE
B 10
CI_CYCLE_MIN
C 142
CI_CYCLE_MAX
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24

17" SIZE PAPER
15
CI_COUNT
E 15
D
POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE
F 240
EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
G
RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
H 20
SON_TIMEOUT
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24

EXECUTE
OK
,
67
FACTORY
67-17
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer controller memory
clear and default value.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the manual correction setting of the printer engine color balance.
Section
Used to clear the printer controller memory and to set the

default values.
If setting is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
TEST
EXECUTE
67-25
Setting
Purpose
SERVICE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-17
PRINTER CONTROLLER MEMORY CLEAR
Operation/Procedure
1)

touch panel.
2)
3)
4)

TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
50
1
99
67-24
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer setting of auto

color calibration.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

The high density process control operation is started to make
self print.
2)
Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and
select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on
the touch panel.
A : 50
POINT1
B : 50
POINT2
C : 50
POINT3
D : 50
POINT4
E : 50
POINT5
F : 50
POINT6
G : 50
POINT7
H : 50
POINT8
I : 50
POINT9
J : 50
POINT10
K : 50
POINT11
L : 50
POINT12
EXECUTE
OK
67-26
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the reference scanner target value setting of the printer engine auto
density adjustment.
The correction value is saved and the reference value is registered.
Operation/Procedure
The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted.
Section
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.
Item
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Target value table

select
Default value
DEF1
DEF1 mode setting

DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 mode setting
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-26
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ

TARGET TBL
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
67-28
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value

registration of the printer engine auto
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-28
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE
1/1
67-27
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
YES
ARE YOU SURE?
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value

registration of the printer engine auto density adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NO
EXECUTE
67-30
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform delivery setting of the main

unit calibration data and the process correction data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
1)

touch panel.
2)
Press [SETUP] key.
Section
3)
Place the self print patch outputted with SIM 67-25 on the
glass table, and press [EXECUTE] key on the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
Sampling is started.
1)
2)
Press [OK] key. (The setting content is saved.)
4)
Press [OK] key.
Item
The target value is saved.

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Point B target value

Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Background sampling value
TEST
A:
A:
91,
#C
#G: 28935,
#H:
#L: 169731,
2944, #D:
54344,
3227,
#I: 86968,
(0:YES
1:NO)
1
0
OK
CLOSE
67-31

#B:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-30
BRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
Default value
1
0: Inhibit
1: Allow
#E:
5822, #F:
#J: 122678,
8600
Purpose
#K: 151198
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.

#M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
Section
Operation/Procedure
SETUP
1/1
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The printer calibration value is cleared.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-31
TEST
Default value
SCREEN1 - 9
SCREEN10, 11
(KCMY)
(K)
128
105
128
95
128
82
128
70
128
64
128
57
128
62
128
75
Item
PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR
YES
ARE YOU SURE?
NO
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
EXECUTE
67-32
Purpose
Default
value
0
SCREEN9
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item
COLOR
(0: YES 1: NO)
Screen select for each object allow

Screen select for each object inhibit
Color select for each object allow
Color select for each object inhibit
A:
0
0
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
SCREEN10
SCREEN11
MODE SETTING (OBJECT)

0
Content
4bit_LOW (photo)
4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
1bit_LOW (photo)
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
4bit_CAD
Mono (600 x 600)
Mono (1200 x 600)
Toner save
1bit_LOW (Photo)
Toner save
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
Toner save Mono
(600 x 600)
Toner save Mono
(1200 x 600)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
TEST
A:
Monochrome
high speed
55
62
70
cpm cpm cpm
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-32
TEST
Color middle
speed
41cpm
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SCREEN4
SCREEN5
SCREEN6
SCREEN7
SCREEN8
Section
SCREEN
(0: YES 1: NO)
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
<Items selectable with SCREEN>
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the screen/color select

function setting for each object.
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
P PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)

B:
COLOR(0:YES 1:NO)
A:
128
0
255
A : 128
POINT1
B : 128
POINT2
C : 128
POINT3
D : 128
POINT4
E : 128
POINT5
F : 128
POINT6
G : 128
POINT7
H : 128
POINT8
I : 128
POINT9
J : 128
POINT10
K : 128
POINT11
L : 128
POINT12
OK
67-33
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the gamma correction (for

PCL) between printer screens.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

touch panel.
2)
Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
3)
4)
5)
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
SCREEN
OK
67-33
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform gamma correction (for

GDI) between printer screens.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default value
SCREEN1 - 9
SCREEN10, 11
(KCMY)
(K)
128
127
128
125
128
124
128
124
128
122
128
120
128
114

touch panel.
2)
Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
3)
4)
5)
Item
A
B
C
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
SCREEN
1, 3
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
128
128
128
Default value
SCREEN 2
K
C
M
128
128
128
128
128
128
127
127
128
Y
128
127
127
Item
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
SCREEN
1, 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Default value
SCREEN 2
K
C
M
127
128
128
127
127
126
127
126
127
123
124
124
119
122
122
111
116
117
112
113
112
106
108
115
110
113
110
120
112
117
110
119
120
110
119
121
TEST
Y
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
A:
128
0
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SIMULATION NO.67-33
PPRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)
255
A : 128
POINT1
B : 128
POINT2
C : 128
POINT3
D : 128
POINT4
E : 128
POINT5
F : 128
POINT6
G : 128
POINT7
H : 128
POINT8
I : 128
POINT9
J : 128
POINT10
K : 128
POINT11
L : 128
POINT12
SCREEN
OK
1bit Photo
1bit Graphic
1bit Mono
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1)

A. Soft switch list
SW
No.
1
Bit
No.
1-8
Operation
settings
Change from the image

send screen to the copy
screen
1: Change over
0: Do not change over
2-5
Operation
settings
Image quality priority

selection (standard image
quality setting)
Ordinary lettering
Small lettering
Fine
Very fine
Small lettering, medium
tone
Fine, medium tone
Very fine, medium tone
1: Apply
0000
0001
0010
0011
0101
System
settings
1
2, 3
4
5-8
SW selection and function
Country code
Operation
settings
7, 8
3
Item
Image quality setting when

saving (FAX)
Not used
Initial value
1 North America
0 * For codes of
the other
1
countries, refer
1
to the page of
0
SIM 66-2
1
setting.
0
1
"1": Change over
(North America)
"0": Do not change
over (Other country)
0 Ordinary lettering
0
0
0
0110
0111
0: Do not apply
Do not apply
1: Hold
0: Do not hold
0
0
0
Do not hold
00
01
10
11
1
0
TONE
0: Setting
Setting
Operation
settings
FAX initial
setting
Received data printing hold

(FAX/Internet Fax)
Tone/Pulse initial setting
(Dial call signal setting)
FAX initial
setting
FAX initial
setting
Auto startup mode
10PPS (Pulese)
20PPS
TONE
Same action as initial
value
1: Release
Pause time setting

(between dials)
Binary input
Setting range 1 to 15 seconds (1 second intervals)
Remarks
"0100": 4 seconds
(South Africa)
"0010": 2 seconds
(Other country)
When set to "0000,"

the default value is
set.
SW
No.
4
Bit
No.
1, 2
System
settings
FAX initial
setting
3, 4
FAX initial
setting
Call sound volume
5, 6
FAX initial
setting
Line monitor volume setting
7, 8
FAX initial
setting
Volume of the transmission

completion sound (Volume
of the successful
transmission sound)
1, 2
FAX initial
setting
3, 4
FAX initial
setting
Volume of the
communication error
of the transmission and
reception error sound)
Volume of the reception
of the reception completion
sound)
5, 6
FAX initial
setting
Tone of the successful

transmission sound
7, 8
FAX initial
setting
Tone of the transmission

error sound
1, 2
FAX initial
setting
Tone of the reception sound
3-5
FAX initial
setting
Setting of the successful

transmission sound time
6-8
FAX initial
setting
Setting of the reception

sound time
FAX initial
setting
2, 3
FAX initial
setting
Setting of the time of the

transmission/reception error
sound
Communication results
sheet print settings (for
ordinary transmission)
<FAX only>
4, 5
FAX initial
setting
Setting of the
communication results
sheet printing (at times of
broadcast transmission)
6, 7
FAX initial
setting
Communication results
sheet print setting (when
receiving) <FAX only>
FAX initial
setting
Report output (when

receiving confidential
communications)
<FAX only>
Item
Speaker volume when onhook (Speaker volume
during DTMF sending)

Small
Medium
Large
No sound
Small
Medium
Large
No sound
Small
Medium
Large
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
No sound
Small
Medium
Large
No sound
Small
Medium
Large
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
No sound
Small
Medium
Large
Pattern 1 (550Hz)
Pattern 2 (750Hz)
Pattern 3 (1000Hz)
Pattern 4 (1700Hz)
Pattern 1 (550Hz)
Pattern 2 (750Hz)
Pattern 3 (1000Hz)
Pattern 4 (1700Hz)
Pattern 1 (550Hz)
Pattern 2 (750Hz)
Pattern 3 (1000Hz)
Pattern 4 (1700Hz)
2.0 seconds
2.5 seconds
3.0 seconds
3.5 seconds
4.0 seconds
2.0 seconds
2.5 seconds
3.0 seconds
3.5 seconds
4.0 seconds
1: Every 0.7 seconds
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
000
001
010
011
100
000
001
010
011
100
0: Every 0.3 seconds
Do not print
Always print
At times of transmission
failure
Do not print
Always print
Failed transmission
address
Do not print
Always print
At times of error
1: Do not print
Initial value
1
0
Medium
1
0
Medium
"00": No sound
(U.K./France/
Germany/Rusia)
"10": Medium
(Other country)
1 Medium
0
1
0
Medium
1
0
Medium
1
0
Pattern 3
(1000Hz)
1
0
Pattern 3
(1000Hz)
1
0
Pattern 3
(1000Hz)
0
1
0
3.0 seconds
0
1
0
3.0 seconds
Every 0.3 seconds
00
01
10
1
0
At times of
transmission
failure
00
01
10
0
1
Always print
00
01
10
0: Print
0
0
Do not print
Print
Remarks
SW
No.
8
Bit
No.
1, 2
System
settings
FAX initial
setting
FAX initial
setting
4-8
FAX initial
setting
1-6
FAX initial
setting
FAX initial
setting
FAX initial
setting
10
1-8
11
1-4
12
13
Item
Print document contents
when transmitting (results
sheet) <FAX only>
Initial value
Remarks
Do not print
Always print
At times of error
1: Yes
00
01
10
0: No
1
0
At times of error
No
Trigger printing of
200 entries.
Setting range
Binary input
00 to 23
2-digit input
0 hour
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
Printing of the
communication record
sheet at a designated time
(minutes)
Setting range
Binary input
00 to 59
2-digit input
0 minute
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
1: Output
0: Do not output
Do not output
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX initial
setting
Printing of the
ECM (valid except during
V.34: reflected in the V.21
DIS/DCS/DTC)
Remote changeover
number setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Setting range
Binary input
Upper 4 bits 0 - F
Lower 4 bits 0 - F
*=A
#=B
5*
FAX initial
setting
Distinctive ring (DRD

setting)
OFF
STANDARD
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Pattern 5
ON (Australia)
ON (New Zealand)
ON (Hong Kong)
0000
0001
1000
0100
1100
0010
1010
0110
1110
1001
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Automatic printing of the

record sheet when memory
is full
Printing of the
(hours)
5-8
Not used
1, 2
Not used
3, 4
FAX initial
setting
PBX setting
(Germany and France only)
5-8
FAX initial
setting
ID (number) setting
<Input the 1st digit when
dial inputting and dialing>
1-4
FAX initial
setting
ID (number) setting 2
<Input the 2nd digit when
5-8
FAX initial
setting
IID (number) setting 3

<Input the 3rd digit when
OFF
00
Flash
01
ID (number)
10
Binary input
Setting range
0 to 15
When 10 -15 is selected, the default value of "0"
is set.
Binary input
Setting range
0 to 15
When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use
numbers with those digits.
"-" when 13 is set.
Binary input
Setting range
0 to 15
When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use
numbers with those digits.
"-" when 13 is set.
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
ECM is on during
communication in
the V.34 mode.
When the value of
C - F is set, the
default value of "5"
is set.
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Enable when ID is
set in "PBX setting."
Not used
Enable when ID is
1
1
0
1
Not used
Enable when ID is
SW
No.
14
Bit
No.
1
System
settings
FAX initial
setting
2-8
15
1-8
16
1-8
17
17
Adjustment
value
Item
External telephone
connection
Not used
1: Yes
0: No
Signal sending level
Binary input
Setting range
0 to 26
When the set value is 27 - 255, it is regarded as 26.
The send level to the line is virtually the set value.
Max. send level limitation:
China: 0dBm
Australia, New Zealand, Taiwan: -10dBm (11 or
less)
Europe: -10dBm (9 or less)
Indonesia: -5 to -13dBm
Singapore: -6dBm
India: -3dBm or less
Middle East, Slovakia, Other3: No limitation for the
standards
Rusia: -11dBm
Not used
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
transmission
setting
Initial value
1
Remarks
Yes
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
"00001010": -10dBm
(North America/China/
Singapore/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Middle
East/Other3)
"00001011": -11dBm
(Australia/New
Zealand/India/Taiwan/
Rusia)
"00001001": -9dBm
(Other country)
When set over the

max. send level, the
max. value of the
destination is used.
(For North America
and China, there is
no limitation on the
max. send level.)
Automatic reduced
transmission
1: Normal
0: Reduction
"00000000": North America/Taiwan/

Middle East/Other3
"00010000": China/Hong Kong
"00110000": India
"01010000": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100000": Singapore/South Africa
"10100000": Australia/Rusia
"10000000": Other country
0 Reduction
Rotated transmission
selection (A4 o A4R)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
selection (B5R o B5)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
selection (A5R o A5)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
selection
(8.5 x 11 o 8.5 x 11R)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
selection (16K o 16KR)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
selection
(5.5 x 8.5R o 5.5 x 8.5)
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
FAX
transmission
setting
Page number printing
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
SW
No.
18
Bit
No.
1
5-8
19
20
20
Item
Designation of date and

source printing position
1: Upper side of a
document (in send data)
Quick online/Memory
transmission changeover
(quick online transmission)
Designation of date and
source printing
1: Memory transmission
0: Outside of a
document (outside send
data)
0: Quick online
transmission
Initial value
0
Outside of a
document
Quick online
transmission
1: Not apply
0: Apply
Apply
Re-call permitted when

busy
1: Re-call permitted
when busy
0: Re-call prohibited
when busy
Permitted
Number of re-calls when

busy
Binary input
Setting range
North America: 1 to 14
Australia/New Zealand/Singapore: 1 to 9
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden: 1 to 10
Indonesia: 1 to 5
China: 1 to 3
Other country: 1 to 15
Number of recalls
Set value x once
Binary input
Setting range
Indonesia/Taiwan: 4 to 15
Re-call interval
Set value x 1 minute
Binary input
Setting range
North America/Australia/New Zealand: Once only
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden/Indonesia: 1 to 5
China: 1 to 3
Malaysia/India: 1 to 9
Number of recalls
Set value x once
0
0
1
0
2 times
1-4
FAX
transmission
setting
Interval between re-calls

when busy
5-8
FAX
transmission
setting
Number of re-calls at times

of communication error
1-4
FAX
transmission
setting
Re-call interval at times of

communication error
Binary input
Setting range
Indonesia: 4 to 15 minutes
Other country: 1 to 15 minutes
Re-call interval
Set value x 1 minute
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
reception
setting
FAX
reception
setting
Re-call permitted at times of

communication error
1: Re-call permitted at
times of communication
error
1: Discard
0: Re-call prohibited at
times of communication
error
0: Reduction
Reduction
Setting to reduce and

discard when printing
A3-11 x 17 (reduced
printing setting when
receiving A3)
Reduced print setting when
receiving letters
1: Discard
0: Reduction
Discard
1: Discard
0: Reduction
Discard
Setting of the number of

automatic reception calls
Binary input
Setting range
Europe/Indonesia/Thailand: 0 to 9 times
Australia/New Zealand: 2 to 4 times
Other country: 0 to 15 times
0
0
1
0
2 times
Double-faced printing of
received data (double-faced
reception setting)
Setting of received data
print conditions
1: Double-faced printing
permitted
0: Double-faced printing
prohibited
Double-faced
printing prohibited
Equal magnification/
Reduction permitted
Division prohibited/
Reduction prohibited
Division permitted
value
1: Receipt of designated
number is refused (valid)
00
01
Equal
magnification/
Reduction
permitted
21
System
settings
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
transmission
setting
FAX
transmission
setting
1-4
6, 7
FAX
reception
setting
FAX
reception
setting
FAX
reception
setting
FAX
reception
setting
FAX
reception
setting
Automatic reduced printing

to fixed sizes
Designated number
reception refusal setting
(FAX)
"0100": 4 minutes
(Indonesia/Taiwan)
"0011": 3 minutes
(Other country)
"0010": 2 times
(China/Singapore/
Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/
Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan)
"0001": 1 time
(Other country)
"0011": 3 minutes
(North America/
Australia/New
Zealand)
"0100": 4 minutes
(Indonesia)
"0001": 1 minute
(Other country)
1 Permitted
10
11
0: Receipt of designated
number is not refused
(invalid)
Receipt of
designated
number is not
refused (invalid)
Remarks
For North America,

the sender is
always specified.
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
When in reduction,
94% for all.
If 0 is set, the call

sound will not be
sounded.
(However, this does
not include the
nighttime FAX
mode.)
SW
No.
22
Bit
No.
1
System
settings
FAX
reception
setting
(*)
Device
setting
Device
setting
4, 5
6, 7
FAX
reception
setting
8
23
23
Staple position
Selection of delivered sheet

size
Valid/Invalid setting of FAX

A4, letter threshold
Setting for changing over to
automatic reception during
manual reception
Initial value
1: Right tray
0: Center tray
1: Right tray
0: Finisher tray
1: Lower tray
0: Upper tray
Upper tray
1: Yes
0: No
No
Rear 1 point
Front 1 point
Center 2 points
value
A4 or A3
(8.5 x 11 or 11 x 17)
B5 or B4
(8.5 x 11 or 8.5 x 14)
A4 (8.5 x 11)
A4R (8.5 x 11R)
1: Invalid
00
01
10
11
0
0
Rear 1 point
00
A4 or A3 (8.5 x 11
or 11 x 17)
01
10
11
0: Valid
Valid
1: Permitted
(changeover)
0: Prohibited (do not

changeover)
Prohibited
Finisher tray
FAX
reception
setting
2-6
FAX
reception
setting
Setting of the number of

calls for changing over from
manual to automatic
reception (Selection setting
from manual reception to
automatic reception)
Binary input
1 to 9 times
Setting range
1 time intervals
The number of calls for changing
Set value + 1
0
1
0
0
0
9 times
Polling
protection
setting
Polling protection
1: Do not protect
0: Protect
Protect
Switch to sorting in order of

numbers on the address list
Receiver off-hook (External
telephone)
1: Registered number
order
1: Warns off-hook state
of the external
telephone.
0: Search number order
2-5
Not used
6
7, 8
0: Does not warn offhook state of the

external telephone.
(*)
Scope of line sound monitor
1: All
Volume setting of call sound

(large)
Volume level 9
Volume level 11
Volume level 13
Volume level 15
0: Until NSF signal send/

receive
00
01
10
11
Remarks
Center tray
8
24
Item
FAX delivery tray setting
(without finisher attached)
(with finisher attached)
(Upper/lower setting when
the 4K finisher is installed)
Staple setting
Search number
order
"0": Does not warn offhook state of the
external telephone.
(North America/
Australia/New
Zealand/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1": Warns off-hook
state of the external
telephone.
(Other country)
1
0
0
0
0 Until NSF signal
send/receive
1 Volume level 13
0
The number of calls

is set in "Setting of
the number of calls
for changing over
from manual to
automatic
reception."
Function setting for
"Setting for
changing over to
automatic reception
during manual
reception"
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
Functions only in
France.
Limited by the TEL/

LIU PWB.
Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
SW
No.
25
26
Bit
No.
1, 2
System
settings
(*)
3, 4
(*)
Initial value
Remarks

(medium)
Item
Volume level 3
Volume level 5
Volume level 7
Volume level 9
00
01
10
11
0
1
Volume level 5

(small)
Volume level 0
(no sound)
Volume level 1
Volume level 2
Volume level 3
Volume level 9
Volume level 11
Volume level 13
Volume level 15
Volume level 5
Volume level 7
Volume level 9
Volume level11
Volume level 1
Volume level 3
Volume level 5
Volume level 7
00
Volume level 2
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
1: Changeover enable
for call-out/call-in
0: Changeover enable
only for call-in
5, 6
(*)
Volume setting of line

monitor sound (large)
7, 8
(*)

monitor sound (medium)
1, 2
(*)

monitor sound (small)
3
4
Not used
Remote changeover
permitted
5-7
Setting of call time (T0 timer

setting) in automatic
transmission
External telephone setting

when no sound is set
SW
No.
27
Bit
No.
1-8
System
settings
28
29
1-8
1-8
Not used
Not used
30
1-8
Not used
Item
External telephone off-hook
detection time
Setting range <Binary input>

(Rusia) 30 seconds to 35 seconds:
5 seconds intervals
(China) 30 seconds to 45 seconds
(Other country) 30 seconds to 60 seconds:
15 seconds intervals
1: No sound priority
0: Priority on external
telephone send
1
1
Volume level 15
Line Monitor sound

When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
1
1
Volume level11
Line Monitor sound

When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
1
0
Volume level 5
Line Monitor sound

When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
Only for call-in
North America: This

SW is ignored and
changeover is
enabled for call-out/
call-in.
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
0
0
"001": 35 seconds
(Rusia)
"001": 45 seconds
(Other country)

Setting range
Binary input
0ms to 2550ms
10ms intervals
Priority on
external telephone
send
Initial value
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
300ms
Remarks
SW
No.
31
Bit
No.
1-4
5
32
33
35
Item
Not used
1: Print
6-8
Document content print

when sending (PC-Fax
(Internet Fax) report table)
Not used
1-4
T1 timer setting
Setting range
Binary input
30 to 105 seconds
5 seconds intervals
5-8
Not used
1, 2
T4 timer setting
Timer during automatic
operation
3 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
6 seconds
00
01
10
11
1: North American
format
0: Follows the date

format setting.
1: 25 seconds
0: 13 seconds
V.27ter
2400bps
V.29
9600bps
V.27ter
4800bps
V.29
7200bps
V.33
14400bps
V.17
14400bps
V.33
12000bps
V.17
14400bps
V.17
14400bps
V.17
9600bps
V.17
12000bps
V.17
7200bps
V.17
14400bps
V.17
14400bps
V.17
14400bps
V.17
14400bps
Not fixed
V.29-9600bps
V.27ter-4800bps
V.17-14400bps
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
00
01
10
11
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
MMR/MR/MH
MR/MH
MH
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
MMR/MR/MH
MR/MH
MH
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
3
4
34
System
settings
5
6-8
Not used
Selection of date and
transmission source print
language <Format>
EOL detection timer
Not used
1, 2
Not used
3-6
Modem transmission speed

(Other than V.34) (DCS)
7, 8
Fixing of modem speed

during reception (Other than
V.34) (DIS)
1, 2
Coding capacity during

(V.34 communication)
(reflected in DIS/DCS/DTC)
3, 4
Coding capacity during

(other than V.34
communication) (reflected
in DIS/DCS/DTC)
Not used
5, 6
7, 8
Image capacity when

polling (Reflected in DTC)
Very fine
Fine
Small letters
Ordinary lettering
0: Not print
00
01
10
11
Initial value
Remarks
"1100": France/Germany
0 Not print
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
40 seconds
3 seconds
+1.5 seconds at
times of manual
operation
Follows the date

format setting.
0 13 seconds
"010": North America
"011": Taiwan
"100": Thailand/Rusia/South Africa
0
0
1 V.17 14400bps
Setting in
communication
0
other than V.34
0
0
0
0
Not fixed
0
0
JBIG/MMR/MR/
MH
0
0
JBIG/MMR/MR/
MH
1
1
0
0
Very fine
Setting in
communication
other than V.34
Max .speed in
reception
SW
No.
36
Bit
No.
1-7
System
settings
Item
Not used
Confirmation of DIS
reception when sending
1: Twice
0: Once for NFS

reception, twice for DIS
reception
37
1-8
Not used
38
1, 2
Protocol monitor
3
4
5
6
7, 8
Line monitor display

EEPROM access prohibited
Not used
SDT signal detection
Timer setting (V.21-FSK)
between flag-adrs
3-6
Echo countermeasure (CED

tone sending interval) when
receiving
Echo countermeasure
(setting of hold time
between DIS reception and
sending of signal) when
transmitting
Not used
7, 8
RTN sending line error rate
1
2, 3
CSI sending
CED signal sending time
4
5, 6
CED/ANSam detection time

Waiting time for start of
CED/ANSam sending
7, 8
Not used
1, 2
Start of CNG sending
0.5 seconds
1.0 second
1.5 seconds
2.0 seconds
00
01
10
11
3
4-8
Time between DCS-TCF

Not used
1: 150ms
0: 75ms
39
40
41
No
Yes
Only at times of error
1: Yes
1: Access prohibited
00
10
11
0: No
0: Access permitted
1: Yes
6 seconds
20 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
1: 500ms
0: No
00
01
10
11
0: 75ms
1: 800ms
0: 500ms
6line
12line
60line
120line
1: No
3 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
No
00
01
10
11
0: Yes
00
01
10
11
1: 1000ms
2.25 seconds
3 seconds
4 seconds
0: 500ms
00
01
10
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Once for NFS

reception, twice
for DIS reception
Remarks
Enable for other

than V.34
No
0
0
0
0
0
1
No
Access permitted
75ms
500ms
Enable for other

than V.34
60line
Number of error
lines in the STD
standard
0
0
0
1
1
0
No
20 seconds
0
0
0
Yes
3 seconds
0
0
0
500ms
2.25 seconds
0
0
"11": 2.0 seconds
(North America/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"00": 0.5 seconds
(Other country)
0 75ms
0
1
0
0
0
Enable for other

than V.34
Setting for the

ANSam signal is
performed using a
separate SW 51-7,
8 (V.8 mode
ANSam signal
sending time).
SW
No.
42
Bit
No.
1, 2
3
4
5-8
43
2
3
4
5, 6
44
8
1
2
3
4
5-8
45
2
3, 4
46
System
settings
Item
RCP sending count
RTC EOL sending count

F.A.S.T function

3 times
6 times
9 times
12 times
1: 12 times
1: Yes
00
01
10
11
0: 6 times
0: No
Not used
V.34 mode function

(including polling when
calling)
V.34 mode function (on call
arrival)
V.34 mode function at times
of manual communication
Primary channel return
mode setting
External telephone off-hook
detection time when
simulated voltage is applied
Reversion from the energy
saving state (excluding
preheat) when the external
telephone is off-hook
Not used
Echo suppressor tone
setting No. 1
setting No. 2
setting No. 3
setting No. 4
Not used
Error handling when

transmission and receiving
RTN
Reception gain changeover
when receiving
Transmission cable
amplitude equalizer
Initial value
0
0
3 times
0
0
6 times
No
V.34 valid
1: V.34 invalid
0: V.34 valid
0
1
1
1
0
1: V.34 invalid
0: V.34 valid
V.34 valid
1: V.34 invalid
0: V.34 valid
V.34 valid
1: PPh
0: Sh
PPh
48ms
96ms
200ms
300ms
1: Revert
00
01
10
11
0: Do not revert
0
1
96ms
Revert
1: Without V33
0: With V33
0
0
With V33
1: Without V17
0: With V17
With V17
1: Without V29
0: With V29
Without V29
1: Without V27
0: With V27
With V27
1: Do not recognize error
0: Recognize errors
0
1
1
1
0
Recognize errors
1: EYE-Q check only
0: "0" Reception & EYEQ check

00
01
10
11
0dB
4dB
8dB
12dB
5-8
Not used
1-4
V.34 mode transmission

speed
Transmission speed = 2400(bps) x N

Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps)
2400 (bps) when N=0
33600 (bps) when N=15
5-8
V.34 mode receiving speed
Receiving speed = 2400(bps) x N

Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps)
2400 (bps) when N=0
33600 (bps) when N=15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
Remarks
Valid only in North

America.
"0" Reception &

EYE-Q
0dB
33600(bps)
When set to 2400

bps, "Symbol Rate"
for V.34 send must
be set to Disable.
33600(bps)
When set to 2400

bps, V.34 Symbol
Rate Mask (when
reception) must be
also changed.
SW
No.
47
Bit
No.
1
6
7
8
48
1-4
System
settings
Item
3429 symbol rate
transmission enable during
V.34 transmission
Symbol rate 3200 high
carrier transmission enable
during V.34 transmission
Symbol rate 3200 low
Symbol rate 3000 high
Symbol rate 3000 low
Not used
Symbol rate 2800 enable
Symbol rate 2743 enable
V.34 Symbol Rate Mask
(when receiving)
5-8
Not used
49
1-5
Not used
49
50
enable
0: disable
1: enable
enable
0: disable
1: enable
enable
0: disable
1: enable
enable
0: disable
1: enable
enable
0: disable
1: enable
1
1
enable
0: disable
1: enable
enable
2400
2400
2800/2400
3000/2800/2400
3200/3000/2800/2400
3429/3200/3000/2800/
2400
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0
1
0
1
3429/3200/3000/
2800/2400
For outside the set

range, the default
value is used.
Do not correspond
FAX address
display limit
(displayed up to the
16th digit from the
front)
This only functions
when dial tone
detection is OFF.
0: Do not correspond
7, 8
Dial call waiting time
3.5 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
6 seconds
00
01
10
11
1-7
Not used
1: 1 second
0: 1.5 seconds
1-4
5, 6
Not used
7, 8
V.8 mode ANSam signal

sending time
Remarks
1: Correspond
Dial tone ON detection time

(during continuous
detection)
Time for prohibition of
waiting at both speeds after
sending CFR/MCF
Initial value
1: enable
PIN code correspondence
51

0: disable
Binary input
200ms intervals
Setting range
200 to 2800ms
1600ms when "0000" is set.
0ms when "1111" is set.
3 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
6 seconds
00
01
10
11
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
"01": 4 seconds
(U.K./Finland/Norway/
Denmark/
Netherlands/Italy/New
Zealand/Slovakia/
South Africa/Spain/
Portuguese/
Luxemburg/Belgium/
Czech/Hungary/
Greece/Poland)
"00": 3.5 seconds
(Other country)
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0 1.5 seconds
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1600ms
4 seconds
Enable for other

than V.34
SW
No.
52
53
53
Bit
No.
1-4
Item
Lower limit of dial tone ON/

OFF detection time (during
intermittent detection)
Setting range
40ms to 490ms
40 + N x 30
5-8
Upper limit of dial tone ON/

OFF detection time (during
intermittent detection)
Setting range
400ms to 1900ms
400 + N x 100
1, 2
Not used
Line current detection at

times of dial calling
1: No
0: Yes
Dial tone detection
1: Yes
0: No
Dial tone monitoring time
1: 17 seconds
0: 10 seconds
CNG detection when calling

FAX
DT/BT detection level
1: CNG detection ON
0: CNG detection OFF
-43dB
-35dB
-33dB
-30dB
Modem fixed
(About 308Hz to 517Hz)
420Hz to 680Hz
360Hz to 440Hz
245Hz to 650Hz
00
01
10
11
00
7, 8
54
System
settings
1, 2
DT/BT detection frequency

range setting
01
10
11
3
4, 5
Busy tone detection

Busy tone detection interval
1: No
2 pulse
3 pulse
4 pulse
6 pulse
0: Yes
00
01
10
11
6, 7
DP dial pulse count

handling
NORMAL
(Pulse=DIAL, 10=0)
EXTEND
(Pulse=DIAL+1)
REVERSE
(Pulse=10-DIAL)
00
01
10
Not used
Initial value
"0010": 100ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"0001": 70ms
(Other country)
"0011": 700ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1000": 1200ms
(Other country)
0
0
"1": No
(North America/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"0": Yes
(Other country)
"0": No (Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/
Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1": Yes
(Other country)
"1": 17 seconds
(Germany/
Switcherland/Austria)
"0": 10 seconds
(Other country)
0 OFF
0
0
"00": Modem fixed

(Thailand/India)
"01": 420Hz to 680Hz
(China)
"10": 360Hz to 440Hz
(Indonesia/Malaysia/
Middle East/Other3/
Rusia)
"11": 245Hz to 650Hz
(Other country)
0 Yes
"00": 2 pulse (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"01": 3 pulse
(Other country)
"01": EXTEND
(Sweden)
"10": REVERSE
(New Zealand)
"00": NORMAL
(Other country)
0
-43dB
Remarks
This is only valid
during intermittent
DT detection.
This is only valid

during intermittent
DT detection.
For collision
aversion
DT, BT common
For CTR21: 245Hz

to 650Hz
SW
No.
55
56
57
SW
No.
58
59
Bit
No.
1-8
1-4
System
settings
Adjustment
value
Item
Not used
Make time (10PPS) setting

Setting range
Binary input
29 to 44ms
1ms intervals
5-8
Adjustment
value
Break time setting (10PPS)
Setting range
Binary input
56 to 71ms
1ms intervals
1-4
Adjustment
value
Minimum pause time

(10PPS) setting
Setting range
Binary input
800ms to 950ms
10ms intervals
5-8
Adjustment
value
Minimum pause time

(20PPS) setting
Setting range
Binary input
450ms to 600ms
10ms intervals
Bit
No.
1-4
System
settings
Adjustment
value
5-8
Item
Make time (20PPS) setting
Setting range
Binary input
9 to 24ms
1ms intervals
Adjustment
value
Break time setting (20PPS)
Setting range
Binary input
26 to 41ms
1ms intervals
1-4
Adjustment
value
Setting of DTMF send level

(high group)
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 15dB
1dB intervals
5-8
Adjustment
value
Setting of DTMF send level

(low group)
High group - Low group:
level difference
-2.0dB
-1.5dB
-1.0dB
-0.5dB
0.0dB
0.5dB
1.0dB
1.5dB
2.0dB
2.5dB
3.0dB
3.5dB
4.0dB
4.5dB
5.0dB
5.5dB
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Initial value
0
"0100": 33ms
(Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0110": 35ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1000": 37ms
(Australia)
"1001": 38ms
(China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"1011": 40ms
(Other country)
"0110": 62ms
(China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"0111": 63ms
(Australia)
"1001": 65ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1011": 67ms
(Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0100": 60ms
(Other country)
"0001": 810ms
(France)
"0000": 800ms
(Other country)
0 450ms
0
0
0
Initial value
"1010": 19ms (China/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"1000": 17ms
(Other country)
"0101": 31ms (China/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"0111": 33ms
(Other country)
"0011": 3dB
(Other3/Rusia)
"0101": 5dB
(North America)
"0110": 6dB
(New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/
Philippine)
"1000": 8dB
(Australia/Indonesia/
Hong Kong/Middle
East/South Africa)
"1001": 9dB (India)
"0111": 7dB
(Other country)
"1000": 2.0dB
(New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3/Rusia/
South Africa)
"1001": 2.5dB
(North America)
"1010": 3.0dB
(Other country)
Remarks
Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
Remarks
Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
SW
No.
60
61
Bit
No.
1-8
1-8
62
1-5
63
64
System
settings
Adjustment
value
Item
Not used
Setting of DTMF minimum
pause time
DTMF signal send time

Setting range
Binary input
50 to 255ms
1ms intervals
Setting range
Binary input
70 to 310ms
10ms intervals
Not used
DPMUTE control
1: ON
0: OFF
Busy tone OFF nondetection time
1: 300ms
0: 100ms
1, 2
Lower limit of busy tone ON

detection time
250ms
140ms
450ms
350ms
00
01
10
11
3, 4
Upper limit of busy tone ON

detection time
750ms
650ms
1000ms
2850ms
00
01
10
11
5, 6
Lower limit of busy tone

OFF detection time
250ms
140ms
450ms
350ms
00
01
10
11
7, 8
Upper limit of busy tone

OFF detection time
750ms
650ms
1000ms
2850ms
00
01
10
11
1-4
Not used
5-8
Call signal OFF nondetection time
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 1500ms
100ms intervals
Initial value
Remarks
0
0 120ms
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0 110ms
1
0
1
1
"0": North America/Australia/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"1": Other country
0 OFF
Functions only in
Australia, New
Zealand, U.K.,
France, Germany,
Sweden.
0 100ms
Make shorter than
the "busy tone OFF
detection time."
"00": 250ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
"10": 1000ms
(Australia/India)
"11": 2850ms
(Singapore/South
Africa)
"00": 750ms
(Other country)
"00": 250ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
"10": 1000ms
(Singapore/India/
South Africa)
"00": 750ms
(Other country)
0
0
0
0
"0110": 600ms (North
America/Australia/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1010": 1000ms
(New Zealand)
"0100": 400ms
(Other country)
SW
No.
65
Bit
No.
1-4
System
settings
Item
Initial value
Lower limit of call signal ON

time
Setting range
Binary input
150ms to 300ms
10ms intervals
5-8
Upper limit of call signal ON

time
Setting range
Binary input
3000ms to 4500ms
100ms intervals
1-4
Lower limit of call signal

OFF time
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 1500ms
100ms intervals
5, 6
Upper limit of call signal

OFF time
6.5 seconds
10 seconds
15 seconds
20 seconds
00
01
10
11
"0010": 170ms
(Australia)
"0000": 150ms
(Other country)
0 3000ms
0
0
0
0 700ms
1
1
1
"01": 10 seconds
(Sweden/Indonesia)
"00": 6.5 seconds
(Other country)
7, 8
Not used
67
1-8
Not used
68
1-8
Not used
69
70
1-8
1-4
Not used
Not used
Execute
66
5
6
7, 8
71
1, 2
Reception/
forwarding
setting
Manual calibration setting

when sending
Manual calibration setting
when a signal arrives
Not used
1: Not execute
0: Execute
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Not execute
0: Execute
Execute
Reception mode setting
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Answerphone
connection
Very fine
Fine
When small
Ordinary lettering
By loaded cassette
A4
B4 (B4, A4)
A3 (A3, B4, A4)
0
0
0
0
Automatic
reception
3, 4
Image capacity when

receiving
(Reflect in DIS, Do not
reflect in DTC)
5, 6
Designation of reception
size (indicating the width of
reception capacity)
7, 8
Not used
00
01
10
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
0
Very fine
0
0
By loaded
cassette
0
0
Remarks
When set to "0000,"

set.
Setting can be
made even without
the external
telephone.
SW
No.
72
Bit
No.
1
2
Printing of transmitted
document contents at times
of F code communication
<FAX only>
4
5
Not used
Designation of rotation
direction when printing on
both sides and the rear side
Selection of error page
output when error occurs
during FAX reception
Selection of re-send page at
times of error
8
1
2
Relay data output

Not used
F code communication error
handling
F code password
transmission setting when
the other party's machine
has no password capacity
Remaining receivable
memory
Setting of received
document output when
receiving
4
73
74
Initial value
1: Output
0: Do not output
Do not output
1: Output
0: Do not output
Do not output
1: Print
0: Do not print
Do not print
1: Vertical binding
0: Horizontal binding
0
0
Horizontal binding
1: Do not output the

error page
0: Output the error page
Output the error

page
1: All pages
0: Error page and

onwards
Error page and

onwards
1: No
0: Yes
Yes
1: Do not re-send
0: Re-send
0
0
0
1: Send with password
0: Disconnect with DCN
Disconnect with
DCN
1: 64KB
0: 128KB
128KB
1: Output 1 page at a
time
0: Save and output en

masse following
completion of reception
Save and output

en masse
following
completion of
reception
6, 7
Not used
8
1-4
Rotated printing
Magnification setting in
automatic reduction
1: Prohibited
Setting range
Binary input
0: Permitted
85% to 100%
N x 1% + 85%
1: Priority to data width
0: Priority to data length
1: Offset or staple
0: No offset or No staple
7, 8
Determination of sub-scan
length (determination
setting when selecting the
page)
Setting of protocol monitor
print when setting offset
staple
Not used
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1-8
1-8
Not used
Not used
75
76
Item
Report output (when
cancelled)
Report output (when
refusing reception)
<FAX only>
73
System
settings
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Re-send
Permitted
90%
Priority to data
length
No offset or No
staple
Remarks
Internet Fax is set

by means of
SW155-8.
Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.
The "Document
contents printing
(results sheet) at
times of
transmission"
setting takes
priority.
The F code is
compulsorily resent
to all pages.
Only when the

remote machine
function is enable.
SW
No.
77
Bit
No.
1
System
settings
Item
Initial value
1: B4 width (B4, A4)
0: A3 width (A3, B4, A4)
1: The set values are

saved
0: The set values are not

saved
1: Error sound
0: No error sound
No error sound
Re-transmission at times of
no response from the other
party
Not used
1: Do not re-call
0: Re-call
Re-call
Setting to refuse reception

at times of manual
reception (FAX)
1: Specified number
reception rejection
0: Specified number
reception ignoring (OFF)
TSI judgment setting (no

signal or all space) when
refusing reception from
designated numbers
1: Reception will be
refused
permitted
Reception will be
permitted
TSI judgment setting (No

numbers and no space can
be used)
refused
permitted
Reception will be
permitted
4
5, 6
Not used
Number of dial call pages at
times of quick online
transmission
00
01
10
11
0: Priority on LTR/A4
reduction rate
8
1-8
Paper selection when

reception printing (LTR/A4)
Not used
Not used
1 page
1 page
2 pages
3 pages
1: Priority on LTR
1-8
Not used
82
1-8
Not used
83
1-8
Not used
2
3
6-8
78
79
|
80
81
Operation
settings
Setting of the reception

width of 11 x 17 sheet
Not used
Saving the setting contents
for a certain period after
completion of scanning
Setting of communication
error sound when there is
no response from the other
party in FAX reception
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Remarks
A3 width
The set values are

not saved
Specified number
reception ignoring
Valid in cases
except when the
communication
error completion
sound setting is
OFF.
Only valid in cases

where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
Only valid in cases
where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
Only valid in cases
where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
1 page
Priority on LTR/A4
reduction rate
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
"00000100": North America/China/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
"01100100": Australia
"00000000": North America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa
SW
No.
84
Bit
No.
1-8
85
1-5
Reception gain correction
6-8
Not used
1-4
Not used
5-8
Flag detection byte count
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 15byte
1byte intervals
1, 2
Minimum flag count

between frames
2-flag
3-flag
4-flag
5-flag
00
01
10
11
1: Silicon DAA-RGDT
signal
1: 1700Hz
1: 1700Hz
0x20
0x40
0x58
0x7f
0x20
0x40
0x58
0x7f
0: Ring detection circuit
86
87
3
4
88
89
Item
Not used
Not used
Ring detection signal select
5
6
7, 8
V.17 carrier frequency

V.33 carrier frequency
V17/V33/V29/V27terTCF
reception judgment EQM
threshold values
1, 2
Primary channel foul back

EQM threshold value at
times of V.34 reception
3-8
Not used
1-4
Symbol speed selection

threshold 1 (Allowable
range for telephone line
characteristics distortion
level)
Symbol speed selection
threshold 2 (Minimum S/N
allowable range level)
5-8
90
System
settings
Setting range
Binary input
0 (+6.0dBm) to 24 (-6.0dBm)
-0.5dBm intervals
0: 1800Hz
0: 1800Hz
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
Setting range
0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm)
Binary input
0, 1, 2: -6dBm
3 to 13: 1dBm intervals
14: 5dBm
15: 6dBm
Setting range
0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm)
Binary input
0, 1, 2: -6dBm
3 to 13: 1dBm intervals
14: 5dBm
15: 6dBm
1-4
Primary channel
communication speed
selection threshold value
Setting range
Binary input
0 (-8dB) to 15 (+7dB)
1dBm intervals
5-8
High speed CD OFF fixing

time
Setting range
Binary input
0 (150ms) to 15 (1650ms)
100ms intervals
Initial value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
Remarks
0.0dBm
4byte
2-flag
Ring detection
circuit
1800Hz
1800Hz
0x58
0x58
-3.0dBm
1 0.0dBm
0
0
0
1 0.0dBm
0
0
0
"0000": 150ms
(North America/
Australia/Norway/
Switcherland/Austria/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"0010": 350ms
(Other country)
When set to "0000,"

set.
SW
No.
91
Bit
No.
1, 2
System
settings
Item
LVCS monitoring cycle
3-8
Not used
1-4
External connection volume
5-8
Not used
93
|
94
95
1-8
Not used
1-8
Not used
96
97
1-8
1-8
Not used
Not used
98
1-5
Not used
92
Setting range
00
01
10
11
0: 0dBm
0 to 8: -3.0dBm intervals
15: f (mute)
Initial value
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Remarks
20ms
-12.0dBm
Remote selection
sound
0
0
0
0
0
Setting of timeout
monitoring between frames
System
settings

0ms (Do not monitor)
10ms
20ms
30ms
SW
No.
98
Bit
No.
7, 8
99
100
1-8
1-8
Not used
CNG detection completion
time
101
|
108
1-8
Not used
0: Monitor
Item
Modem lightning protection
measures
1: Do not monitor

0 second
20 seconds
30 seconds
40 seconds
00
01
10
11
Setting range
0: Unlimited
1 to 255 seconds
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Monitor
Initial value
"00": 0 second
(North America/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3/Rusia)
"01": 20 second
(Other country)
0
0 45 seconds
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
Remarks
SW
No.
109
Bit
No.
1-8
System
settings
110
1-8
Not used
111
1-8
Not used
112
1-8
Not used
113
1-8
Not used
114
115
1-8
1-8
Not used
Not used
116
1-8
Not used
117
1-8
Not used
118
1-8
Not used
119
1-8
Not used
Item
Not used
Initial value
Remarks
"10001010": U.K./France/Germany/Rusia
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
"10010000": South Africa
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
"00001010": North America/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Middle East/Other3
"00001011": Australia/New Zealand/India/
Taiwan/Rusia
"00000010": North America/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3
"00010010": China/Hong Kong
"00110010": India
"01010010": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100010": Singapore/South Africa
"10100010": Australia/Rusia
"00001011": North America/Indonesia/
Philippine/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"00101011": Australia/New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/India/
Hong Kong
SW
No.
120
Bit
No.
1-8
System
settings
121
1-8
Not used
122
1-8
Not used
123
1-8
Not used
124
1-8
Not used
125
126
1-8
1-8
Not used
Not used
127
1-8
Not used
128
1-8
Not used
129
1-8
Not used
130
1-8
Not used
131
1-8
Not used
132
1-8
Not used
Item
Not used
Initial value
Remarks
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
"00111000": Other3/Rusia
"01011001": North America
"01101000": New Zealand/China/Singapore/
Thailand/Philippine
"01111000": Malaysia/Taiwan
"10001000": Indonesia/Hong Kong/
Middle East/South Africa
"10011000": India
"01001011": Malaysia/Taiwan/South Africa
"01101001": New Zealand/India
"10010110": China/Singapore/Thailand/Hong
Kong
"00010000": France
"10100101": China/Thailand/Hong Kong
0
"00000000": North America/New Zealand/
China/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3
"00000010": India
"00000011": Australia/Singapore/
South Africa
"00000100": China/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Hong Kong
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00001010": New Zealand
"00100100": Singapore/India/South Africa
"01000110": Rusia
"01110100": Sweden/Indonesia
"00000000": Australia/China/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00000010": Rusia
"00010000": North America/Singapore
"00110010": Sweden
"01000000": New Zealand
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
SW
No.
133
Bit
No.
1-8
System
settings
134
1-8
Not used
135
1-8
Not used
136
1-8
Not used
137
1-8
Not used
138
1-8
Not used
139
1-8
Not used
140
1-8
Not used
141
1-8
Not used
Item
Not used
Initial value
Remarks
"00000100": North America/China/Thailand/

Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Norway/Switcherland/Austria/New Zealand/
China/Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
SW
No.
142
Bit
No.
1-8
143
|
144
145
1-8
Not used
1-8
Not used
1-8
Not used
146
|
153
154
System
settings
Addition of Content-XCIAJWNETFAX field (in

internet Fax send)
Nighttime FAX mode setting
<when Internet Fax
reception is not set>
Internet Fax
reception
setting
Internet Fax
reception
setting
Internet Fax
reception
setting
8
155
1-6
Initial value
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0: Do not add field
Do not add
1: Do not enter the

nighttime FAX mode
0: Enter the nighttime

FAX mode
Enter the
nighttime FAX
mode
1: Do not enter the

pseudo-nighttime mode
(enter the nighttime
mode)
1: Print the main text of
mails
0: Enter the pseudonighttime mode (do not

enter the nighttime
mode)
0: Do not print mail
letters
Enter the pseudonighttime mode
Do not print
1: Discard
0: Reduce
Discard
1: Discard
0: Reduce
Discard
1: Print the main text of

mails
0: Do not print mail

letters
Do not print
Resolution type of internet

Fax
Not used
1: mm type
0: inch type
inch type
Selection of the Internet Fax

date and transmission
source print language
<format>
Report output (when
reception is refused)
<Internet Fax only>
1: North American
format
0: Follows the date

format setting.
1: Output
0: Do not output
Processing at times of mail

reception (when the
Content-X-CIAJWNETFAX
field is not yet received)
Setting of reduced printing
when receiving A3 by
Internet Fax
Setting of reduced printing
when receiving letters by
Internet Fax
Setting of text printing when
receiving mails without
attached files
Remarks
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Add IGNORE
Pseudo-nighttime mode
setting <when Internet Fax
reception is set>
Item
Not used
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
For internet Fax

reception setting
YES, refer to
SW154-3.
For internet Fax
reception setting
NO, refer to
SW154-2.
Exclude confirmed
sent mails
When in reduction,
94% for all.
Print process only

for mail text without
an attached file
(Remains Error for
the communication
result.)
Follows the date

format setting.
Do not output
FAX is set by
means of SW72-2.
Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.
SW
No.
156
Bit
No.
1
System
settings
4-7
8
157
1-5
(*)
7, 8
(*)
158
1-8
159
1
2
7
8
160
161
1-8
1-6
162
|
170
8
1-8
Item
Display setting at times of
NW trouble
Job log memory at times of
successive communication

0: Display trouble
Display trouble
1: Treat as 1 successive
communication
0: Treat each
communication as 1
Valid/Invalid setting of
Internet Fax A4, letter
threshold
Not used
1: Invalid
0: Valid
Treat each
communication as
1
Invalid
Setting of mail reception

method
Not used
1: SMTP
0: POP3
0
0
1
0
0
POP3
Setting of transmitted data

upper limit value (FTP/
desktop/shared folder)
Transmitted data upper limit
(FTP/desktop/shared folder)
1: ON
0: OFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
OFF
50Mbyte
150Mbyte
300Mbyte
00
01
10
Not used
(WEB)
Control
setting
(WEB)
Control
setting
(WEB)
Control
setting
(WEB)
Control
setting
(WEB)
Control
setting
Initial value
1: Do not display trouble
0
1
150Mbyte
1: Valid
0: Invalid
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Prohibition of forwarded
table registration
1: Prohibited
0: Permitted
Permitted
Prohibition of forwarded
table correction
1: Prohibited
0: Permitted
Permitted
Prohibition of forwarding
permission revision
1: Prohibited
0: Permitted
Permitted
Received data print

conditions in user transfer
1: Print on error
0: Always print
Print on error
1: Print on error
0: Always print
0
1
Print on error
Not used
Received data E-mail
forwarding
Not used
Received data print
conditions at Administrator
transmission
Not used
Not used
Pseudo nighttime setting

<External accumulation
mode> Only for OSA
supporting farm
Not used
Not used
1: Do not enter the

pseudo-nighttime mode
(enter the nighttime
mode)
0: Enter the pseudonighttime mode (do not

enter the nighttime
mode)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(*): Change can be made in the system setting for theMX-5500N/6200N/7000N only.
Invalid
Enter the pseudonighttime mode
Remarks
MX-7000N
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
C. Self diag operation and related work flow
1. Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
A. Function and purpose
The machine always monitors its own state.

When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
displays the trouble message.
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
nearly expired or is expired.
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD.
1)
Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a

trouble.)
2)
The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is

stopped on detection of a trouble.)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
3)
By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be

quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically

cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.
4)
Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows

to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)
Monitors the machine

conditions.
Detects/analyzes
the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1
User
Serviceman
Class 2
Other
Warning
Trouble
Other
Warning of troubles which can be recovered by

the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life
expiration, etc.)
Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance,
etc.)
Warning to the user, not a machine trouble

(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Warning
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
The content is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot the cause.
Repair
Cancel the selfdiagnostic message with

the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state
MX-7000N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime.
YES
Replace or supply
the consumable part.
NO
D. Breakdown sequence
(1)
Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Judgment
block
HDD trouble
SCU communication
trouble
PCU communication
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall
Printer port system trouble
E7 (03)
E7 (80), A0-02
E7 (90), A0-01
L8-20
U1 (01)
F9 (00)
L4-30
U
* 14
{
{
Controller fan motor

trouble
Connection trouble (MFP
detection)
Serial number
discrepancy
Memory error (included
not installed the expansion
RAM)
HDD registration data sum
error
Image memory trouble,
decode error
Personal counter notinstalled trouble
Network error
* 13
E7 (60 65),
A0 (10 12, 20)
U2-30
E7 (00, 01, 05,

06, 09)
PC---
Not displayed.
(Only the
message for
each trouble is
displayed.)
E7 (20, 28, 29),
L6 (10)
E7 (50), A0 (21)
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
Operatable
but send
NG
* 10
* 10
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
U3
U3
U3
Paper feed tray 2 trouble
F3-22
U3
U3
U3
F3-32
U3
U3
U3
F3-42
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
Staple trouble
U6 (09, 20 24,
51)
F1 (10)
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
After-process trouble
F1 (excluding 10)
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
Inserter trouble (except for

communication trouble)
Other troubles
Process control trouble
(PCU detection)
F1 (61, 62)
U5
U5
U5
U5
U5
U5
U5
EE (EL, EU, EC)

F2 (39, 44, 45,
49 53, 58, 78)
{
{
* 12
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
*9
* 10
U3
* 10
U3
* 10
U3
* 10
U3
* 10
U3
* 10
U4
* 10
U4
* 10
U5
* 10
{
{
C1 (01, 02),
C4 (00, 01),
F2 (02, 04, 05,
40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5,
H7 (10 12, 14),
L4 (excluding L430), L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91)
E7 (21), F2 (41
43, 65 67, 71
73, 75 77)
F3-12
FAX board trouble
Laser trouble
Connection trouble (PCU
detection)
PCU section troubles
(motor, fusing, etc.)
PCU color system

troubles
MFP
Trouble code
F6
U2 (00, 05, 10,

11, 22, 23, 24,
25)
U2 (50)
PCU
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
{
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
{
{
U1
Notification
to FAST
host
U1
(North
America
only)
Kind of trouble
Scan
push
{
FAX
print
Print
List
print
U1
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Kind of trouble
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU color system
troubles
Document control trouble
EEPROM system
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading,
etc.)
DSPF trouble
DSPF back surface CCD
troubles (shading, etc.)
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled,
Judgment
block
SCU
Trouble code
E7 (70, 75),
A0 (22)
UC (02)
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
FAX
print
Print
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1, L3
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7 (10, 11, 14)
U5
E6 (10, 11, 14)
U6
U7
U6
U7
U6
U7
U6
U7
U6
U7
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
MFP
F2 (80 87, 90)
PCU
F2 (92 94)
: Operation disabled
U 1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.

U 3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
U 5: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the inserter connection paper exit port.
U 6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
U 7: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the single surface scan mode.
* 9: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
* 12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 13: When FIERY option is installed, PCL will not operate. (Machine specifications) (Exclusive)
* 14: Only FIERY option list print (self print) is disabled.
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The display is not turned off. Machine/Button)
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the trouble memory unconditionally.
(Sim26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.
(2)
Power ON trouble detection sequence.
When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
* For A0 and E7 troubles (connection troubles), only the connection trouble information is saved, and they are not regarded as save troubles.
(There is no way to delete the communication trouble information.) (Detected every time when the power is turned ON.)
MFP event
manager
Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6 trouble check

Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFPcnt.
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
When the power is turned on,

check is made in each block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

(To the corresponding
block)
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode
cancel)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel command
Trouble cancel status is communicated.
2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
A0
01
02
10
11
12
20
21
22
C1
01
02
C4
00
01
CE
00
01
02
03
04
E6
E7
05
06
07
08
10
11
14
00
01
03
04
05
Trouble code content

PCU ROM abnormality
SCU ROM abnormality
Controller ROM error
IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)
IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
Machine level error (CTL detection)
Machine level error (PCU detection)
Machine level error (SCU detection)
Charger cleaner trouble
Charger cleaner motor lock
PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high voltage output trouble
PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner trouble
Communication error other than CE-01 08
Network controller trouble
Not-specified mail/FTP server error
Communication error in image send
FTP server account name or authentication password input
error
FTP server directory input error
POP3 server access error
POP3 server authentication check error
POP3 server timeout error
Back-face shading trouble (Black correction) (DSPF)
Shading trouble (White correction) (DSPF)
Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF)
System memory access error
System data trouble
HDD trouble
HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only)
Local memory access error
Remarks
The trouble
code is not
displayed,
but only the
message for
each trouble
is displayed.
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
E7
06
09
10
11
14
20
21
28
29
50
60
61
62
65
70
75
80
90
EE
EC
EL
EU
F1
00
03
08
10
15
19
20
21
22
23
30
31
32
33
34
37
38
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
60
F2
61
62
02
04
05
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
49

Decode error trouble: Compression decode error
(A compression file cannot decompressed.)
Local memory combination error
Shading trouble (Black correction)
Shading trouble (White correction)
SCAN-ASIC trouble
LSU BD detection trouble
LSU LD deterioration trouble
LSU control ASIC connection abnormality
LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
Engine connection trouble
Controller connection trouble (Engine detection)
Controller connection trouble (Engine)
Controller connection trouble (Scanner)
PWB information sum error (Controller detection)
Scanner connection trouble
PWB information sum error (Scanner detection)
Communication trouble between the MFP and the scanner
(MFP detection)
Communication trouble between the MFP and the PCU
(MFP detection)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level for
every rotation is other than 128 r 10.)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (Overtoner abnormality)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner
abnormality)
Finisher communication trouble (Machine side detection)
Finisher oscillation motor trouble
Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
Finisher staple motor abnormality
Finisher tray lift motor abnormality
Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality
Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality
Finisher interface fan motor abnormality
Finisher rear edge assist motor trouble
Shutter trouble
Communication trouble between the finisher and the saddle
Finisher folding motor trouble
Communication trouble between the finisher and the punch
unit
Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Finisher punch motor trouble
Finisher backup RAM trouble
Finisher punch backup RAM trouble
Positioning plate motor trouble
Guide motor trouble
Side alignment motor trouble
Stitch motor rear trouble
Stitch motor front trouble
Paper pushing motor trouble
Finisher incompatibility trouble
Sensor connector connection trouble
Micro SW trouble
Communication trouble between the finisher and the
inserter
Inserter EEPROM trouble
Inserter reverse sensor trouble
Toner supply abnormality (K2)
Toner cartridge improper (K2)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2)
Process thermistor trouble
Toner empty sensor abnormality (K)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (C)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (M)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y)
Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt
surface reflection ratio abnormality)
Color exclusive image density sensor trouble (Calibration
plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
LSU thermistor trouble
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
FAX
Supply
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
F2
50
51
52
53
58
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
F3
F6
92
93
94
12
22
32
42
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
F9
00
H2
00
01
02
03
H3
04
05
00
01
02
04
05
H4
00

K phase sensor sensing trouble
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C)
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M)
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y)
Process humidity sensor trouble
Toner supply abnormality (K)
Toner supply abnormality (C)
Toner supply abnormality (M)
Toner supply abnormality (Y)
Toner cartridge improper (K)
Toner cartridge improper (C)
Toner cartridge improper (M)
Toner cartridge improper (Y)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
Half tone process control 1st patch reference value trouble
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value trouble
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)
High-density process control density correction error (C)
High-density process control density correction error (M)
High-density process control density correction error (Y)
Tray 1 lift-up trouble
Communication trouble between the MFP and the FAX
FAX board EEPROM read/write error
FAX MODEM operation trouble
Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX
soft switch
Access error to power controller on the FAX board (FAX
detection)
FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB destination
information and the machine destination information.
Communication trouble between the controller and the
printer controller (FIERY option)
Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2) of the non-contact
thermistor
Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open
(TH1_AD1)
External heating thermistor open (TH_EX1)
Fusing external heating thermistor open (TH_EX2)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble
(TH_US)
External heating thermistor high temperature trouble
(TH_EX1)
Fusing external thermistor high temperature trouble
(TH_EX2)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Refer to FAX manual for details
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
H4
01
02
04
H5
H7
30
01
10
11
12
14
L1
L3
L4
L6
L8
PC
U1
U2
00
00
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
12
13
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
10
01
02
20
-01
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
U5
U6
25
30
50
80
81
90
91
00
16
30
31
09
20
21
22

Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble
(TH_US)
External heating thermistor fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_EX1)
Detection thermistor input abnormality (TH_UM)
5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
Low temperature detection during the temperature control
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_UM)
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_LM)
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_US)
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_EX1)
Mirror feed trouble
Mirror return trouble
Paper feed motor lock trouble
Fusing motor lock trouble
Developing motor trouble (BK)
Developing motor trouble (CL)
Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble
Waste toner motor lock
Resist motor lock
Secondary transfer separation trouble
Fusing external heating separation trouble
Controller fan motor trouble
Paper exit cooling fan F lock
Power cooling fan 1 lock
LSU cooling fan trouble
Fusing exhaust fan lock
Fusing suction fan lock
Charger cooling fan lock
Machine ventilation fan center lock
Machine ventilation fan right lock
Ozone fan 1 lock
Ozone fan 2 lock
Ozone fan 3 lock
Paper exit cooling fan center lock
Polygon motor lock detection
No full wave signal
Full wave signal width abnormality
Power controller communication trouble
Personal counter not installed
Battery trouble
EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection)
HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data discrepancy
SRAM user authentication index check sum error
EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection)
SRAM memory check sum error
MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check sum
error
SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum
error
Flash memory user authentication counter check sum error
Serial number data discrepancy (MFP l PCU)
HDD section individual data check sum error (MFP)
EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection)
Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection)
EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection)
Adjustment value check sum error (PCU detection)
SPF communication trouble
SPF fan motor trouble
SPF tray lift-up trouble
SPF tray lift-down trouble
LCC lift motor trouble
LCC communication trouble
LCC transport motor trouble
LCC 24V power abnormality
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Option
Electricity
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
U6
23
24
51
UC
02
20
21

LCC tray descending trouble (reverse winding detection)
LCC tray lock detection trouble
LCC incompatibility trouble
CPT-ASIC trouble
Document control module trouble
DOCC (Document Control) PWB not-detected (DSK model
only)
3. Details of trouble code

A0-01
Check and
remedy
A0-02
Trouble
detection
PCU ROM content trouble

MFP
Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to
power OFF, etc.
Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware.
SCU ROM abnormality
Check and
remedy
A0-10
Check and
remedy
SFU combination error in the controller

MFP
SFU upgrade was not properly made when
upgrading the firmware.
Controller firmware upgrade
IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Combination error between CTL and PCU

MFP
Combination error between CTL and PCU
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
PCU.
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
A0-20
Combination error between CTL and SCU

MFP
Combination error between CTL and SCU
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
SCU.
Machine level error (CTL detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Combination error between the machine

production/remodeling and the firmware
SCU
Check the combination between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware.
The charger cleaner does not complete shift

operation during the specified time.
PCU
Charger unit trouble
Check the charger unit
RE sensor, HP sensor, charger cleaner motor, and
PCU PWB troubles, harness connection trouble
1) Check the sensor, the motor, and the PCU
PWB.
2) Check the harness connection between the
sensor, the motor and the PCU PWB.
Charger cleaner motor lock
IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
Charger cleaner trouble
Trouble content
A0-12
Supply
Machine level error (SCU detection)
Section
Case 1 Cause
C1-02
FAX
Machine level error (PCU detection)
Section
Case 1 Cause
C1-01
Controller ROM error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
A0-11
SCU ROM content trouble

MFP
Some part of SFU is not upgraded during
upgrading of the firmware.
Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware.
Electricity
Trouble content
A0-22
Option
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Mechanism
PCU
PCU
PCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
A0-21
PCU ROM abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Remarks
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the charger cleaner motor is rotating, an

excess motor current over the specified level is
detected.
PCU
Charger cleaner motor trouble
Check the charger cleaner motor
PCU PWB trouble, harness connection trouble
1) Check the PCU PWB.
2) Check harness connection between the
motor and the PCU PWB.

MFP
C4-00
PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high

voltage output trouble
CE-02
Not-specified mail/FTP server error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 4 Cause
Check and
remedy
C4-01
PTC high voltage PWB trouble

Replace the PTC high voltage PWB.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 4 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 5 Cause
Check and
remedy
Connector and harness connection trouble

Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Shifting the PTC cleaner is not completed within

the specified time.
PCU
Cleaner mechanism trouble
Check the cleaner mechanism.
HP sensor trouble
Replace the HP sensor.
Cleaner motor trouble
Replace the cleaner motor.
Case 3
CE-03

harness.
Another communication error occurs.

MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble

MFP
Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
1) Check the network controller and its
peripheral circuit.
2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the
NIC version.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
The specified server does not respond during

image send.
MFP
connected.
SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
server for any trouble.
FTP server account name or

authentication password input error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Network controller trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB

server are not found
MFP
connected.
Network setup trouble
1) Check that the connected network supports
TCP/IP protocol.
2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as
the destination is properly set.
3) When the above address is described with
the Hostname, check that the DNS server is
properly set or not.
SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
server for any trouble.
Communication error in image send
Trouble content
Case 3
CE-01
Cause
Check and
remedy
CE-04
PCU PWB trouble

Replace the PCU PWB.
Communication error other than

CE-01 08
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB trouble

PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner

trouble
Trouble content
CE-00
A trouble signal is detected during PTC high

voltage output.
PCU
Charger wire breakage
Check the charger unit.
Check and
remedy
The entered FTP server account name or the

authentication password is invalid.
The entered SMB server log-in name or the
password is invalid.
MFP
connected.
The FTP server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Check to insure that the FTP server account name
registered as the destination or the password for
the account is correct.
The SMB server account name registered as the
incorrect.
Check to insure that the SMB server account name
registered as the destination or the password for
the account is correct.
CE-05
FTP server directory input error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
The entered FTP server directory is invalid.

The entered SMB server folder is invalid.
MFP
connected.
The FTP server account name registered as the
incorrect.
Check to insure that there exits the FTP server
directory registered as the destination.
The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for it is incorrect.
Check to insure that there exists the SMB server
folder registered as the destination.
E6-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
E6-11
CE-06
POP3 server access error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
CE-07
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
The entered POP3 server account name or the

authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server
authentication check error)
MFP
connected.
The POP3 server account name or the password
registered for the account is incorrect.
Check to insure that the POP3 server account
name or the password for the account is correct.
POP3 server timeout error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
The specified mail server (POP3) does not

respond. (POP3 server timeout error)
MFP
connected.
POP3 server trouble
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
E6-14
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy

lamp is on.
SCU
Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble
copy lamp unit.
CCD unit abnormality
Check the CCD unit.
DSPF PWB abnormality
Check the DSPF PWB.
Written register value cannot be read correctly

SCU
Check the DSPF PWB.
System memory access error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3

Check the DSPF PWB.
Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-00
CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy

lamp is turned off.
SCU
CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.

(DSPF)
Trouble content
Case 5
POP3 server authentication check

error
Trouble content
CE-08
The specified mail server (POP3) is not found.

(POP3 server access error)
MFP
connected.
Network setup error
1) Check that the connected network supports
TCP/IP protocol.
2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3
server address is correctly set.
3) If the above address is described in
Hostname, check to insure that the DNS
server is correctly set.
POP3 server trouble
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
Back-face shading trouble (Black

correction) (DSPF)
Cause
Check and
remedy
System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot

be guaranteed.)
Access to system memory cannot be made.
MFP
Expansion memory installation error
Check installation of the system expansion
memory.
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
Dirt on the memory pin
Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system memory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs.
(Combination of system memory (Slot 1, Slot 2)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
System memory
Slot 2
Slot 1
(Inside)
(Outside)
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
E7-01
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
E7-04
Soft
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
When turning
on the power
Since the
machine is not
booted, the
trouble display is
not made.
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
MFP data trouble occurs.

MFP
MFP image transfer trouble
1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt
PWB connector.
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Case 2
Hard
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Case 4
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 5
E7-09
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when

booting.
MFP
HDD-ASIC abnormality
Check installation of the HDD-ASIC on the MFPcnt
PWB.
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Dirt on local memory pin

Clean the local memory pin with alcohol.
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2) Replace the local memory.
Decode error trouble: Compression

decode error (A compression file
cannot decompressed.)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
MFPcnt PWB trouble

HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only)
Local memory cannot be accessed.

MFP
Local memory installation abnormality
Check the installing state of the local memory.
* Combination where local memory Slot operate normally (Refer to

E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
Case 2
HDD connection trouble

File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken)
MFP
The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt
PWB
1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt
PWB.
2) Check connection of the harness of the
MFPcnt PWB.
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/
to the HDD.
The HDD does not work properly.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
System data trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-03
Operation guarantee
E7-05
A decode error occurs when forming an image.

MFP
Compression data abnormality
1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI
bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
other cases, check the installation of the
MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
HDD connection abnormality
Check the HDD connection.
Data are garbled in image compression/send.
1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
other cases, check the installation of the
MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
MFPcnt PWB abnormality
Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
Local memory combination error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Combination error of installation of local slot

memory
MFP
DIMM of other than 1GB is installed to the slot.
Check the combination of installed DIMM.
* When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not

performed properly is used.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Local memory
Slot 4
256MB
512MB
1GB
1GB or more
Operation guarantee
Hard
Soft
{
{
When turning on
the power
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-10
Shading trouble (Black correction)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-11
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 4
Case 5
E7-14
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-20
SCU PWB abnormality

Check the SCU PWB.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-28
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-29
LSU BD signal is not detected.

PCU
Disconnection or improper connection of harness
and connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt
PWB
Check connection of the harness of each PWB
inside the LSU.
1) Optical axis shift
2) BK laser deterioration, power reduction
3) BD PWB trouble
1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
2) Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB.
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the
above 1) to 2), replace the LSU.
Check and
remedy
E7-50
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in

LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
PCU
Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB,
the resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit,
and the LSU-ASIC itself.
Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Engine connection trouble
Trouble content
Case 2
Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB

and the LSU control ASIC
PCU
Communication connector connection trouble
between the PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB
(interface PWB), or harness trouble
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB), or
check the harness.
PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB)
trouble
Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB
(interface PWB).
LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
Section
Case 1 Cause
Written register value cannot be read correctly

SCU
SCU PWB abnormality
Check the SCU PWB.
The color laser does not light up normally.

PCU
Disconnection or improper connection of harness
and connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check connection of the harness of each PWB
inside the LSU.
Y/M/C laser deterioration
1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the
above 1) to 2), replace the LSU.
LSU control ASIC connection

abnormality
Trouble content
LSU BD detection trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
CCD white reference plate scan level abnormality

when the copy lamp is on.
SCU
CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble
copy lamp unit.
Check the CCD unit.
SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
LSU LD deterioration trouble
SCU PWB abnormality

Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Case 3
CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy

lamp is turned off.
SCU
CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.
E7-21
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Unknown PWB identification information is

detected in the PCU PWB.
PCU
A PWB which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is connected.
1) Replace the PCU PWB.
2) Replace the LSU PWB.
A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is used.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU PWB connection trouble
Check the LSU PWB connection.
LSU PWB trouble
Replace the LSU PWB.
E7-60
Controller connection trouble (Engine

detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-61
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Controller connection trouble

Compatibility trouble between the controller and
the engine
MFP
Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the
engine
Check the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller
PWB and the engine.

(Scanner)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-65
A firmware which is not compatible with the

machine specifications is applied.

(Engine)
Trouble content
E7-62
Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the

MFPcnt PWB.
MFP
A PWB which is not compatible with the machine
Replace the controller PWB.

Compatibility trouble between the controller and
the scanners
MFP
Combination trouble between the controller PWB
and the scanner
Replace the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller
PWB and the scanner.
PWB information sum error

(Controller detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
EEPROM PWB information sum error

MFP
1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to electrical noises
E7-75
PWB information sum error (Scanner

detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-80
Communication trouble between the

MFP and the scanner (MFP detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-90
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Scanner connection trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Unknown PWB identification information is

detected in the SCU PWB.
SCU
SCU PWB trouble
Replace the SCU PWB.
A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
Communication establishment error/Framing/

Parity/Protocol error
MFP
PCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother
board
Check grounding of the machine.
EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble

(The sample level for every rotation is
other than 128 r 10.)
Trouble content
E7-70

MFP
SCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check the connector connection between the SCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check the harness between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother
board
Check grounding of the machine.

MFP and the PCU (MFP detection)
Trouble content
Case 3
EEPROM PWB information sum error

SCU
Replace the scanner control PWB.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the automatic development adjustment is

executed, the sample level for each rotation is not
128 r 10.
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory,
only display>
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto developer
adjustment.
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble

(Overtoner abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The sample level is 76 or below, or the control

voltage is 208 or above.
only display>
PCU
adjustment.
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble

(Under-toner abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-00
Finisher communication trouble

(Machine side detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
The sample level is 178 or above, or the control

voltage is 51 or below.
only display>
PCU
adjustment.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Communication line test error when turning on the

power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Communication error with the finisher
PCU
Malfunction due to electrical noises
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
PCU finisher connector or harness connection
error or disconnection
Check the connector and harness in the
communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-15
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Check and
remedy
F1-20
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-08
Oscillation motor operation abnormality

PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor
(FSWM).
Lift motor trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift
motor (FTLM).
Interlock switch (black bar-shape switch under the
upper tray) operation
Check that there is nothing on the interlock switch.
If there is, remove it.
Finisher pre-alignment motor

abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Pre-alignment motor trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the prealignment motor (FFJM).
Finisher after-alignment motor

abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Control (PCU) PWB trouble

Finisher oscillation motor trouble
Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-19
Staple operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor (FFSM).
Finisher tray lift motor abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-21
F1-03
Finisher staple motor abnormality
After-alignment motor trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the afteralignment motor (FRJM).
Finisher interface fan motor

abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Interface transport fan motor trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor
(FJFM).
Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Stapler shift motor operation abnormality

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor (FSM).
F1-22
Finisher rear edge assist motor

trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-23
Rear edge assist motor operation trouble

PCU
Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear
edge assist motor.
F1-32
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Shutter trouble
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-30

finisher and the saddle
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-31
Shutter operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
paper exit motor.
Case 4
F1-33
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
F1-34
Check and
remedy
Sensor input value abnormality

PCU
Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the
bookbinding position sensor (FFPD).
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-37

Replace the control (PCU) PWB
Punch shift motor operation abnormality

PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
shift motor (FPSM).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).
Punch motor operation abnormality

PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
motor (FPNW).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).
Finisher backup RAM trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-38
Connector/harness connection error or

disconnection between the finisher and the punch
unit
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Finisher punch motor trouble
Finisher folding motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Finisher and punch unit communication error

PCU
Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Communication error between the finisher and the

saddle unit
PCU
Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error.
Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and the harness between the finisher
and the saddle unit.
communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Saddle control PWB
trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the
saddle control PWB.

finisher and the punch unit
Backup RAM data garbled

PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Finisher punch backup RAM trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Punch unit backup RAM data garbled

PCU
Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Replace the punch control PWB.
F1-41
Positioning plate motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-42
Guide motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-43
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Side alignment motor operation trouble

PCU
alignment motor.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-52
Check and
remedy
Rear stitch motor operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear
stitch motor.
Stitch motor front trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-61
F1-46
Micro SW operation trouble

PCU
Sensor trouble, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port
cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover
open/close sensor.

finisher and the inserter
Trouble content
Front stitch motor operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the front
stitch motor.
Sensor operation trouble

PCU
control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the guide HP
sensor, the paper pushing plate HP sensor, and
the paper pushing plate lead edge sensor.
Micro SW trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-60
Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-5500N/

6200N/7000N
PCU
Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is
incompatible with MX-5500N/6200N/7000N is
detected.
Connect the MX-FNX3/MX-FNX4.
Stitch motor rear trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-45
Trouble content
F1-51
Guide motor operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the guide
motor.
Finisher incompatibility trouble
Side alignment motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-44
Positioning plate motor operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
positioning plate motor.
F1-50
Communication error between the finisher and the

inserter
PCU
Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error.
connector and the harness between the finisher
and the inserter. Finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line. Replace the finisher control
PWB. Replace the inserter control PWB.
Inserter EEPROM trouble
Paper pushing motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Paper pushing motor operation trouble

PCU
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
pushing motor.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
EEPROM trouble
PCU
EEPROM trouble, finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
Replace the inserter control PWB.
F1-62
Inserter reverse sensor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-02
Toner supply abnormality (K2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-04
Toner end with the remaining quantity of 25% or

more.
The toner supply time exceeds 5 times as much as
the specified time.
PCU
Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to
the main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
1) Check the toner density sensor output.
(SIM25-1)
2) Check that the toner transport pipe is not
clogged between the toner cartridge and the
developing unit. Replace the toner cartridge
(CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement
3) If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM)
does not clear the trouble, check the
developing unit.
Toner cartridge improper (K2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-05
Sensor adjustment failure

PCU
control PWB trouble, inserter control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port
cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover
open/close sensor.
Replace the inserter control PWB.
Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents

when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is
detected.
PCU
An improper cartridge is inserted.
Toner cartridge trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2)
F2-39
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-40
Toner empty sensor abnormality (K)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
F2-41
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
F2-42
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
CRUM cannot be read or written.

PCU
connector and the harness between the PCU and
the toner cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
CRUM trouble
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
PCU PWB trouble
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample

level 25 or less or 231 or above.
PCU
The connector is not installed.
Check the connection of the connector harness to
the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
empty sensor.
Connector harness trouble
Check the harness disconnection.
Cartridge trouble
Toner empty sensor abnormality (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause

PCU
empty sensor.
Toner empty sensor abnormality (C)
Trouble content
Case 2
Process thermistor open

PCU
Process thermistor harness connection trouble
Check the connection of the harness and
connector of the process thermistor.
Check the connection of the harness and
connector of the process thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB.
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
empty sensor.
Cartridge trouble
F2-43
Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
empty sensor.
Cartridge trouble
F2-49
LSU thermistor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-50
K phase sensor sensing trouble
Trouble content
F2-44
Black exclusive image density sensor

trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-45
The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image

density sensor before starting the process control,
and adjust the sensor gain so that the output is
kept at a certain level. However, the output is not
within the specified range though the senor gain is
adjusted.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
operation trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed,
check the sensor, the harness and the calibration
plate solenoid operation for any trouble. If the
adjustment is completed, check the transfer belt
surface state.
Color exclusive image density sensor

trouble (Calibration plate surface
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The calibration plate surface is scanned by the

image density sensor before starting the process
control, and adjust the sensor gain so that the
output is kept at a certain level. However, the
output is not within the certain level though the
senor gain is adjusted.
PCU
sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
check the sensor and the harness operation for
any trouble. If the adjustment is completed, check
the calibration plate solenoid operation.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-51
Detection is made by interruption of light in the

sensor section of the projection rib on the drum
drive gear to control the BK drum phase. The
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase
control cannot be made.
PCU
Check the sensor connector connection.
Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or
installation trouble
Check for dirt on the sensor or check the
installation state.
Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor
trouble
If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
transmission of light.)
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
The detection temperature is out of the range of

-28qC to 78qC.
PCU
LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
Check the connection of the LSU thermistor
harness and connector.
LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Replace the LSU thermistor. Replace the PCU
PWB.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

drive gear to control the color drum (C) phase. The
PCU
installation state.
trouble
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_C" to check interruption or
F2-52
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-53
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-58
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check and
remedy

drive gear to control the color drum (Y) phase. The
PCU
installation state.
trouble
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_Y" to check interruption or
F2-65
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Process humidity sensor open

PCU
Process humidity sensor harness connection
trouble
Check the harness and connector connection of
the process humidity sensor.
Check the process humidity sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB.
F2-66
Cause
Check and
remedy

more.
the specified time.
PCU
section.
the main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
(SIM25-1)
(CRUM) if necessary.
developing unit.
Toner supply abnormality (M)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2

more.
the specified time.
PCU
section.
the main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
(SIM25-1)
(CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement
developing unit.
Toner supply abnormality (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2

installation state.
trouble
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_M" to check interruption or
Toner supply abnormality (K)
CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Case 3

drive gear to control the color drum (M) phase. The
PCU
F2-64
Cause
Check and
remedy

more.
the specified time.
PCU
section.
the main PWB.
(SIM25-1)
developing unit.
F2-67
Toner supply abnormality (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
F2-70
Cause
Check and
remedy

more.
the specified time.
PCU
section.
the main PWB.
(SIM25-1)
developing unit.
F2-74
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
F2-75
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

detected.
PCU
Case 2
Case 3

Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
CRUM trouble
Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)
Toner cartridge improper (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

detected.
PCU
Toner cartridge improper (M)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-73

PCU
CRUM trouble
Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F2-76
F2-72
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Toner cartridge improper (K)
Trouble content
F2-71
Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)

detected.
PCU
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
F2-77
Case 2
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

detected.
PCU
Case 3

Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Toner cartridge improper (Y)
Trouble content
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
CRUM trouble
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

PCU
CRUM trouble
F2-78
Registration exclusive image density

sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface
F2-82
Half tone process control 1st patch

reference value trouble (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-80

reference value trouble (K)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-81
The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image

density sensor before starting the registration, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at
a certain level. However, the output is not within
the specified range though the senor gain is
adjusted.
PCU
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
operation trouble
Check the sensor and the harness. Check the
calibration plate solenoid operation and the
transfer belt surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image
sensor exclusively used for registration, replace
the transfer belt, replace the calibration plate
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to
the check result.
The low-density rising point or the high-density

saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation
formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print
result when executing the half tone process control
in BK.
MFP
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer
belt cleaning trouble
check the sensor and the harness. If the
adjustment is completed, check the drum surface
state and the belt surface state.

reference value trouble (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

in C.
MFP
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-83

reference value trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-84

in M.
MFP

in Y.
MFP
Half tone process control 2nd patch

reference value trouble (K)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The low-density section output is greater than the

middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
PWM value) from the second step patch print
in BK.
MFP
F2-85

reference value trouble (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-86

in C.
MFP

reference value trouble (M)
F2-92
High-density process control density

correction error (C)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-93

correction error (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-87

in M.
MFP

reference value trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

in Y.
MFP
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-94
The patch density value is not in the range of the

density correction reference density value (STD
value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit
bias voltage when executing the high density
process control.
PCU
trouble between PCU PWB and image density
sensor, dirt on image density sensor, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment.
2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check
the drum surface state, the belt surface state,
etc.

process control.
PCU
cleaning trouble
harnesses.
etc.

correction error (Y)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

process control.
PCU
cleaning trouble
harnesses.
etc.
F3-12
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
F3-22
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F3-32
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F3-42
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
T2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
T2LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of T2LUD.
Tray 2 lift-up motor trouble
Check the lift-up unit.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
H2-00
LUD3 does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
LUD3 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of LUD3.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause

H2-01
LUD4 does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
LUD4 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of LUD4.
Check and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Thermistor open
PCU
Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H2-03
MFPcnt PWB trouble, printer controller PWB

trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Repair or replace the
printer controller PWB.
After completion of check, turn OFF/ON the
machine and the printer controller.
Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-02
A communication error is detected during initial

establishment or after establishment of
communication with the controller (FIERY option).
MFP
Printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable trouble
Check the printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable.
Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2)

of the non-contact thermistor
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2

Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
T1LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
T1LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of T1LUD.

controller and the printer controller
(FIERY option)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
F9-00
Thermistor open
PCU
Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH1_AD1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
source trouble
H2-04
External heating thermistor open

(TH_EX1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H2-05
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
H3-00
Thermistor open
PCU
Fusing section connector and harness connection
trouble
thermistor to the PCU PWB.
Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds

the specified level.
PCU
section connector connection error, AC power
source trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater
lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and
the harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input
circuit section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control
circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing section high temperature

trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H3-04

PCU
source trouble
lamp.
the harness.
circuit section.
circuit.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H3-05
The external heating thermistor temperature

exceeds the specified temperature.
PCU
source trouble
1) Use Sim44-14 to check if the thermistor
(TH_EX1) shows an abnormal temperature. If
the display is normal, use Sim5-2 to check
the blinking operation of the heater lamp.
a) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor
and the harness.
circuit section.
b) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check
the AC PWB and the control PWB lamp
control circuit.
Fusing external thermistor high

temperature trouble (TH_EX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2

PCU
source trouble
lamp.
the harness.
circuit section.
circuit.
External heating thermistor high

temperature trouble (TH_EX1)
Trouble content
Fusing section high temperature

trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
H3-01
Sub thermistor fusing section high

temperature trouble (TH_US)
Fusing external heating thermistor

open (TH_EX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Thermistor open
PCU
source trouble
H3-02
Cause
Check and
remedy
It is detected that the fusing temperature exceeds

the specified temperature.
PCU
Fusing section connector and harness connection
trouble
thermistor to the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.
H4-00
Fusing section low temperature

trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H4-01
Fusing section low temperature

trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H4-02
The temperature does not reach the specified level

within the specified time after turning on the power
relay.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source
trouble, interlock switch trouble
lamp.
the harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC
PWB and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.

relay.
PCU
lamp.
the harness.
section.
Sub thermistor fusing section low

temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

relay.
PCU
lamp.
the harness.
section.
H4-04
External heating thermistor fusing

section low temperature trouble
(TH_EX1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H4-30
Detection thermistor input

abnormality (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
H5-01
Case 3
TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the

specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
5 minutes after HL_UM is turned on.
PCU
HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble,
harness trouble, PCU PWB trouble
lamp.
the harness.
section.
5 continuous detection of POD1 notreached jam
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
When the power relay is turned ON after supplying

power, the set temperature is not reached within
the specified time.
PCU
lamp.
the harness.
section.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam

PCU
The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam
paper remains.)
Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding,
etc.)
POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection
trouble
Check the POD1 sensor harness.
Fusing unit installation trouble
Check the fusing unit installation.
H7-10
Low temperature detection during the

temperature control reset operation
after stopping the alarm in a JOB
(HL_UM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
H7-11
When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is

not reached within the specified time.
* Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls
below the specified level in a print JOB, printing
is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is
reset.
PCU
harness.
Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp
trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source
Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp.
Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the
heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB.

(HL_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
H7-12

reset.
PCU
harness.

(HL_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy

reset.
PCU
harness.
H7-14

(HL_EX1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L1-00
Mirror feed trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
L3-00
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming

up or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
detected within 1sec.
PCU
Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and paper feed motor,
control circuit trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor
operation. Check the harness and the connector
between the PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.
Fusing motor lock trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Mirror return is not completed within the specified

time.
SCU
Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Paper feed motor lock trouble
Trouble content
L4-03
Mirror feed is not completed within the specified

time.
SCU
Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Mirror return trouble
Trouble content
L4-02

reset.
PCU
harness.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of

the fusing motor.
PCU
Harness connection trouble between the PCU
PWB and the fusing motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fusing motor.
Fusing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.
L4-04
Developing motor trouble (BK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-05
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Developing motor trouble (CL)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-06
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
L4-08
Cause
Check and
remedy
When separating the primary transfer belt unit,

change in the separation position sensor
characteristics is not detected within the specified
time.
PCU
PWB and the separation position sensor
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
separation position sensor.
The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch
operation trouble
Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation.
Check to insure that the sensor is interrupted from
lighting when the belt is separated.
The primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Install the primary transfer belt unit.
Waste toner motor lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2

the developing motor.
PCU
PWB and the developing motor.
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
developing motor.
Transfer belt separation position

sensor trouble
Trouble content
Case 2

the developing motor.
PCU
PWB and the developing motor.
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
developing motor.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy

the waste toner motor.
PCU
PWB and the waste toner motor.
PCU PWB and the waste toner motor.
Waste toner motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste
toner motor.
L4-09
Resist motor lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-12
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Secondary transfer separation trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
L4-13
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
L4-30
When the secondary transfer unit is separated, the

separation sensor status change is not detected
within the specified time.
PCU
harness.
Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
trouble, separation sensor trouble
Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
separation motor and the separation sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Fusing external heating separation

trouble
Trouble content
Case 3
When the resist motor is rotation, the motor lock

signal is detected.
PCU
PWB and the resist motor
PCU PWB and the resist motor.
Resist motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the resist
motor.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
When the fusing external heating unit is separated,

the separation sensor status change is not
detected within the specified time.
PCU
harness.
Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
trouble, separation sensor trouble
Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
separation motor and the separation sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Controller fan motor trouble
Trouble content
1)
2)
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
The motor lock signal is detected during

rotation of the controller fan motor.
The motor lock signal is detected during
rotation of the HDD fan motor.
MFP
Fan motor trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
motor.
Harness connection trouble between the mother
PWB and the fan motor.
mother PWB and the fan motor.
Control circuit trouble
Mother PWB trouble.
Replace the mother PWB.
L4-31
Paper exit cooling fan F lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-32
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-34
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan

operation signal is not detected within the specified
time.
PCU
Fan connector disconnection
LSU PWB and the fan.
Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
rotating.
If the trouble is not canceled, replace the LSU fan
and the LSU cnt PWB.
Fusing exhaust fan lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-36
When the power cooling fan 1 is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
Power cooling fan 1 connector disconnection
PCU PWB and the fan.
Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
rotating.
LSU cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
L4-35
When the paper exit cooling fan F is operated, the

fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
PCU
Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
rotating.
When the fusing exhaust fan is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
rotating.
Fusing suction fan lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the fusing suction fan is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
rotating.
L4-37
Charger cooling fan lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-38
Machine ventilation fan center lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-39
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
When the machine ventilation fan right is operated,

the fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
PCU
rotating.
Ozone fan 1 lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-41
When the machine ventilation fan center is

operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
within the specified time.
PCU
rotating.
Machine ventilation fan right lock
Trouble content
L4-40
When the charger cooling fan is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
rotating.
When the ozone fan 1 is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
rotating.
Ozone fan 2 lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy

time.
PCU
rotating.
L4-42
Ozone fan 3 lock
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-43
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
L8-01
When the power cooling fan 2 is operated, the fan

time.
PCU
rotating.
Polygon motor lock detection
Trouble content
Case 2
When the paper exit cooling fan center is operated,

the fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
PCU
rotating.
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal

is not outputted, and the lock signal is checked
after 15 sec from starting rotation of the polygon
motor and it is judged that the polygon motor does
not rotate properly.
PCU
Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU
inside harness, or breakage
Check connection of the harness and the
connector.
Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
Replace the LSUcnt PWB. Replace the LSU.
No full wave signal
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
No full wave signal is detected.

PCU
Harness trouble
Check connection of the harness and the
connector.
Power unit trouble
Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble
Full wave signal width abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
L8-20
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
The full wave signal is judged as frequency

abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as
65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
PCU
Harness trouble
Check the harness and the connector connection.
Power unit trouble
Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble
Power controller communication

trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
L6-10

time.
PCU
rotating.
Paper exit cooling fan center lock
Trouble content
L4-44
L8-02
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
PC---

MFP
Connector connection trouble between the mother
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin
breakage
Check the connector connection between the
mother board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check
grounding of the machine.
Mother PWB trouble
Replace the mother PWB.
Mother PWB jumper error
Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side.
Personal counter not installed
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U1-01
Battery trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-00
The personal counter is not installed.

MFP
The personal counter is not installed.
Install the personal counter.
Backup SRAM battery voltage fall

MFP
1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or
above.
EEPROM read/write error

(MFP detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
EEPROM device read/write error

MFP
EEPROM device trouble
Replace the EEPROM device.
EEPROM device contact failure
Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
Device access error due to electrical noises
U2-05
HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data
discrepancy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-10
SRAM user authentication index

check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-11
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-22
Counter information check sum error on the

EEPROM
MFP
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
MFPC section SRAM memory

individual data check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-24
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-25
MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error

MFP
SRAM trouble
1) Initialize the communication management
table registered in SRAM and the FAX soft
switch.
2) Since the registered contents have been
deleted, register them again.
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble

Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM

MFP
1) SRAM trouble
2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Flash memory user authentication

counter check sum error
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-30
MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data

check sum error (Communication management
table, sender registration data, etc.)
MFP
SRAM trouble
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents
automatically.
SRAM memory user authentication

counter check sum error
Trouble content
SRAM memory check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
User index information (basic data of user

authentication) check sum error on the SRAM
MFP
1) SRAM trouble
2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
EEPROM check sum error

(MFP detection)
Trouble content
Case 2
A HDD or SRAM memory for user authentication

different from that used before turn off the power is
installed.
MFP
HDD replacement or SRAM memory replacement
Initialize the authentication information with SIM16,
and import the backup data (exported data by
device cloning) if any.
U2-23
Check sum error of the user authentication counter

on FLASH
MFP
Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to
electrical noises
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the
user counter and save the normal sum value.
Serial number data discrepancy

(MFP l PCU)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
The serial number stored in the PCU differs from

that stored in the MFP.
MFP
EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt
PWB is replaced.
1) Check that EEPROM is properly set.
2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is
inserted to the newly installed PWB.
U2-50
HDD section individual data check

sum error (MFP)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-80
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-81
1) EEPROM version error

2) Write error to EEPROM
SCU
EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is
not initialized
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
values, use the simulation to save the counter/
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Adjustment value check sum error

(SCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble


(SCU detection)
Trouble content
Case 2
MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error

(One-touch, group, program, etc.)
MFP
Write/read error to/from HDD
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents
automatically.
3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the
HDD.
Cause
Check and
remedy
EEPROM (SCU) check sum error

SCU
EEPROM trouble
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
U2-90

(PCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-91
Adjustment value check sum error

(PCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-00
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
U5-16
EEPROM (PCU) check sum error

PCU
EEPROM trouble.
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB.
SPF communication trouble
Trouble content
Case 3
EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM

PCU
EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which
is not initialized.
Installation of 64KBit EEPROM
Check to insure that 256KBit EEPROM is installed.
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB. Use
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Communication error between the SCU and the

DSPF, communication line test error after turning
on the power or canceling the exclusive simulation
SCU
Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON.
Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection
Check the connector and the harness of the
communication line.
Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DSPF PWB trouble
Replace the control (SCU) PWB. Replace the
DSPF PWB.
SPF fan motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy

the fan.
SCU
Fan motor trouble, harness of the fan motor
related, circuit trouble
Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
Check harness, connector and fan motor related
circuit.
U5-30
SPF tray lift-up trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-31
SPF tray lift-down trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-09
Lift-down trouble (STLD does not turn OFF within

the specified time.)
SCU
STUD/STLD trouble
Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
LCC lift motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-20
Lift-up trouble is detected 5 times continuously.

(STUD does not turn ON within the specified time.)
SCU
STUD/STLD trouble
Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
The encoder input value is not changed in

0.2sec (1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later)
after rotation of the motor.
The motor is rotated for 24sec (LCX2)/48sec
(LCX3) or more.
PCU
Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear
breakage, lift motor trouble
Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the
trouble.
LCC communication trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
LCC communication error. Communication line test

error after turning ON the power or canceling the
exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model
codes discrepancy error
PCU
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control
(PCU) PWB trouble, malfunction due to electrical
noises
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble.
Check the connector and the harness of the
communication line.
U6-23
LCC tray descending trouble

(reverse winding detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-24
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
LCC transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-22
After passing 1 sec from turning ON the motor, the

lock state of the motor lock signal is detected
continuously for 1 sec.
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an
overcurrent to the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Malfunction of the LCC tray lock mechanism is

detected.
PCU
Tray lock mechanism trouble
Check the tray lock mechanism.
harness.
Tray lock detection sensor trouble, LCC control
PWB trouble
Replace the tray lock detection sensor and the
LCC control PWB.
LCC incompatibility trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible

with the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series.
PCU
Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with
the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series is detected.
Connect the MX-LCX2/MX-LCX3.
UC-02 CPT-ASIC trouble

Trouble content
U6-21

harness.
Reverse winding detection SW-ON, reverse
winding detection SW trouble, LCC control PWB
trouble
Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC
control PWB.
LCC tray lock detection trouble
Trouble content
U6-51
Reverse winding of the LCC tray wire is detected.

PCU
Reverse winding of the wire
Check the wire.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not

operate normally.)
SCU
1) CPT-ASIC abnormality
2) SCU PWB abnormality
Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the
trouble still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the
CPT-ASIC.
LCC 24V power abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.

PCU
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power
unit trouble
Check the connector and the harness of the power
line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
PWB is of 24V.
UC-20 Document control module trouble

Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Communication error between SCU and DOCC

Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
SCU
Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
communication line.
Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
trouble.
UC-21 DOCC (Document Control) PWB

not-detected (DSK model only)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
When the data security kit ROM (BOOT, PROG1,

2) is installed, the DOCC PWB is not detected.
SCU
Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
communication line.
Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
DOCC PWB not-installed
Install the DOCC PWB.
MX-7000N
[9]
MAINTENANCE
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Maintenance system table

: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
Unit name
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
Color supply
Drum
peripheral
Developing
section
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (CL)
Cleaner blade (CL)
Charging unit (CL)
Side seal F/R (CL)
Toner reception seal (CL)
Cleaning brush (BK)
Discharge lamp (K)
Sub blade
Waste toner box
Developer (K)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter (BK)
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (CL)
DV side seal F/R (CL)
Toner filter (CL)
Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y)
Bias pin/Connector
Unit name
LSU
Transfer
section
Part name
Dust proof glass

Cleaning base
Primary transfer belt
Transfer sub blade
Transfer cleaning blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer drive roller
Primary transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary belt drive roller
Secondary belt tension roller
Secondary belt follower roller
Secondary drive idle gear
PTC cleaner
PTC cleaner B
Charger wire
Transfer idle roller
Cleaner seal
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
User replacement for every toner empty

(or the specified traveling distance).
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
MX-7000N MAINTENANCE 9 1
Remark
Remark
Unit name
Fusing
section
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Shaft earth sections

(Conduction grease)
Belts
Sensors (Process control/
Resist sensors)
Sensors
Part name
Lower heat roller

Lower roller bearing
Separation pawl SP
External thermistor main
External thermistor sub
Lower thermistor
Slider ring
External heating roller
External heating belt
External heating bearing
External heating collar
External heating SP
Gears
Paper guides
Web unit
Upper heat roller
Fusing gear
Upper roller bearing
Unit name
Filters
Paper feed
section
Transport
section/
Paper exit
reverse
section
Drive
section
Image
quality/
Others
Part name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Dust filter
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Paper dust cleaner unit
Discharge brush
Transport paper guides
Gears
Gears (Grease)
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts (300K)
Mechanical
parts (200K)
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
Remark
Lower heat roller

unit (Excludes the
heater lamp)

(Excludes the
heater lamp)
Specified positions
Upper heat roller

unit (Excludes the
heater lamp)
Remark
Replacement
reference
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
200K or 1 year
of use
100K or 1 year
of use
Manual paper feed:
100K or 1 year
of use
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
Unit name
Optical
section
DSPF
Part name
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD
Table glass/SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/Drive wire
Paper feed Paper feed
section/
roller
Transport
Pickup roller
section
Separation
roller
No. 1 resist
roller
Transport roller
1 (PS front)
No. 2 resist
roller (PS)
Platen roller
Transport roller
2 (after first
scanning)
Transport roller
3 (after second
scanning)
Paper exit roller
Discharge
brush
Torque limiter
(for separation)
No. 1 scanning
plate
No. 2 scanning
section,
scanning glass
No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass
Optical
Mirror
section
Lens/CCD
Scanner lamp/
Reflector
Others
OC mat
Drive
Gears
section
Belts
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark
Specified positions
(Specified positions)
UKOG-0299FCZZ
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
No.
Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
calling
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (CL)
Cleaner blade (CL)
Charging unit (CL)
Side seal F/R (CL)
Cleaning brush (BK)
Discharge lamp (K)
Sub blade
Waste toner box
When
Monochrome supply
Color supply
Mechanical parts
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
Remark
8
9
13
6
5
11
10
1
8
2
3
12
7
14
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replacement consumable parts and other parts for maintaining the performance.
As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with

SIM22-1 according to each drum rotations.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
[REASON]
100 (%) - 550 (K rotations)/ 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's operation scene and other conditions which varies every day, the PM
cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Drum counter
B/W
Full color
3000K pages 100K pages
Drum
Definition of drum life end
Number of rotations of drum

B/W
Full color
840K rotations 840K rotations
Drum Life
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
350
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by the number of

sheets of output because racing is increased in the tandem engine
by the mixing ratio of black and color outputs or when black output
is made in the color mode in ACS. For the reference of product
quality, wear is specified by the drum rotations. The rotation of the
MX-5500/MX-6200/MX-7000 series drum rotation is 840K.
Black Drum
300
Color Drum
Drum Life
250
The drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This is
because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the drum.
When the print quantity of one job is less than 6, the number of
rotations for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below,
therefore, the drum life quantity varies for each print quantity of one
job.
200
150
100
50
0
0
Number of multi print quantity (Unit: sheet)
B. LSU
No.
1
2
Part name
Dust proof glass

Cleaning base
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
1
1
1
Remark
C. Developing section
No.
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Developer (K)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter (BK)
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (CL)
Toner filter (CL)
13
Bias pin/Connector
Monochrome supply
Color supply
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
Remark
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
10
6,7,8
11
1
13
13
13
4
13
5
10
2
3
13
12
D. Transfer section
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Transfer sub blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
PTC cleaner
PTC cleaner B
Charger wire
Cleaner seal
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark
22
3
9
22
15
14
10
7
18
21
20
19
21
12
13
16
2
2
2
11
6
17
E. Fusing section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name
Lower heat roller

Separation pawl SP
Lower thermistor
Slider ring
External heating roller
External heating belt
External heating bearing
External heating collar
External heating SP
Gears
Paper guides
Web unit
Upper heat roller
Fusing gear
Mechanical parts
(300K)
Mechanical parts
(200K)
10
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
15
13
14
14
Remark

(Excludes the heater lamp)

Specified positions

10
4
4
When
calling
16
16 16
16
2
1
5
15
13
14
11
17
5
12
5
20
21
3
17
18
6
3
19
21
17
F. Optical section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/Drive wire
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
2
1
1
5
3
1
Remark
Specified positions
G. Filters
No.
1
2
3
4
Part name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Dust filter
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
3
4
1
2
H. Paper feed section

No.
Part name
1
2
3
Paper pickup roller

Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
2
1
3
2
4
1
2
3
3
2
4
3
Remark
Replacement reference
200K or 1 year of use
Manual paper feed:
I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section

No.
1
2
3
4
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name

Transport rollers
Paper dust cleaner unit
Discharge brush
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Mechanical parts
Remark
4
4
4
2
1
3
2
J. Drive section
No.
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Gears (Grease)
Shaft earth sections

(Conduction grease)
Belts
Remark
When checking, apply to

the necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
K. Image quality/Others
No.
Part name
Sensors
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
L. DSPF
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Paper feed
section/
Transport
section
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Optical
section
19
20
Others
Drive
section
21
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation roller
No. 1 resist roller
Transport roller 1
(PS front)
No. 2 resist roller
(PS)
Platen roller
Transport roller 2
(after first scanning)
Transport roller 3
(after second
scanning)
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush
Torque limiter (for
separation)
No. 1 scanning
plate
No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass
Mirror
Lens/CCD
Scanner lamp/
Reflector
OC mat
Gears
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Belts
Remark
UKOG-0299FCZZ
4
1
12
5
2
3
6
7
13
8
9
10
11
19
17
17
18
21
21
14
20
16
21
15
3. Other related items
e. Developer related
A. Maintenance timing display

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
messages and the counters is shown blow.
(1)
Code
Content
VK
Developer life end (K) print counter: 300K or

the accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
Developer life end (C) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
Developer life end (M) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
Developer life end (Y) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
VC
(Maintenance timing) (Frameless)

VM
a. Maintenance related
VY
Code
Content
TA
The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90%

of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to
Print Enable.
The maintenance counters (color) reaches
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM2638 is set to Print Enable.
The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM211, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
(2)
Enable
Content
TA
The maintenance counters (total) reaches the

set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
AA
Primary transfer belt life end: 300K

Secondary transfer belt life end: 300K
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary

and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit,
days of use of the transfer unit) clear).
Code
Content
FK1
FK2
FK3
Fusing upper heat roller life end: 200K

Fusing lower/external heat roller life end: 300K
Fusing web life end: 200K
(3)
DM
DY
Disable
[Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
Code
Content
Waste toner full
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
d. Drum related
DC
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing

unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
DK
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
c. Fusing unit related
Code
Enable
[Maintenance timing] (Framed)
Code
b. Transfer unit
TK1
TK2
Enable
a. Maintenance related
CA
Content
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Content
Drum life end (K) print counter: 300K or the
accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
Drum life end (C) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
Drum life end (M) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
Drum life end (Y) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum

counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the drum) clear).
MX-7000N
[10]
ROM VERSION-UP
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
Firmware types
A. Cases where version-up is required

ROM version-up is required in the following cases:
1)
When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
2)
When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
3)
When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
4)
When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be

repaired.
Machine
Flash ROM
ALL
ICU(BOOT)
Option
ICU(MAIN)
IMG-ASIC
SCU
PCU
DSPF
FAX
4K FINISHER
SADDLE UNIT
INSERTER
A3 LCC
A4 LCC
B. Notes for version-up

(1)
Relationship between each ROM and version-up
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with

ROMs installed in the other PWBs including options.
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the
machine.
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware

There are following methods of downloading of the firmware.
1)
Firmware download using media
2)
Firmware download using FTP
3)
Firmware download using Web page
Contents
Includes all contents shown below.
ANIME
CONFIG
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
COLOR PROFILE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
ICU(MAIN)
IMAGE DATA
SCU(MAIN)
PCU(MAIN)
DSPF(MAIN)
FAX OPTION(MAIN)
4KFIN(MAIN)
SADDLE(MAIN)
INSERTER(MAIN)
A3LCC(MAIN)
A4LCC(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using media
Media
Adapter
Firmware.
USB Host
Firmware.
Firmware.
USB Memor y
Firmware.sfu
(1)
The machine recognizes the

media and automatically executes
processing.
Firmware update from USB memory device
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00/**********/
If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open

the folder.
FILE1
FILE2
FILE3
FILE4
Secure Jumpdrive will not work.

Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load
the firmware onto it.
1)
Insert the USB memory device into the main unit.
2)
Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be

updated. The screen transfers to the update screen.
..
(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected)

* The number of button changes depending on the number of
the file in the USB memory device inserted.
MX-7000N ROM VERSION-UP 10 1
1/1
3)
Current version number and the version number to be updated

will be shown for each firmware respectively.
6)
Following key-codes will be changed;

NOW o CURRENT
At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:

"COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
The Imager will reboot at this time.
TEST
NEXT o UPDATED TO
SIMULATION NO.49-01
CLOSE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
COMPLETE : PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CONFIG
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00
ICU(MAIN)
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
ICU(BOOTM)
CURRENT 09.00.00.00
OK
ICU(BOOTS)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
LANGUAGE
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
GRAPHIC
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
SLIST
CURRENT 09.00.00.00
PCU(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
PCU(MAIN)
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
DESK(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
DESK(MAIN)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
A4LCC(BOOT)
ARE YOU SURE?
ALL
4)
YES
NO
7)
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the

upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the
imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can
"rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emupdate.sfu
EXECUTE
1/3
Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will

be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE]
are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
* Press the selected button again to release the selection.
* Press [ALL] button to select all items.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
Power on the imager
The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
When finished, the display will read "update completed"
Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
firmware has upgraded successfully.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.49-01
CONFIG
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
ERROR
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
ICUM,PCU,SCU
ICU(BOOTM)
CURRENT 09.00.00.00
ICU(BOOTS)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
LANGUAGE
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
GRAPHIC
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
SLIST
CURRENT 09.00.00.00
PCU(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
PCU(MAIN)
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
DESK(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.00.00.00
DESK(MAIN)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
A4LCC(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.01.00.00
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
OK
1/3
Press [EXECUTE] button. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]

becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
TEST
CLOSE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
ALL
5)
Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has

upgraded successfully.
SIMULATION NO.49-01
CLOSE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
COMPLETEPLEASE TURN MAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
S
E
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS!
B. Firmware download using FTP

Machine 3
Machine 1
10.36.112.84
10.36.112.83
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52
10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
C. Firmware download using Web page

A Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update
the firmware.
4)
Update procedure
1)
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A

special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click

the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
MX-7000N
Close the browser and open again to display latest information. will be displayed.
5)
3)
Update is completed with the above procedures.
After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the
firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place,
Firmware Update, now processing... appears.
POFM_U
POM
TFD2
PO_TMP
HL_EX2
TH_LM
MX-7000N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1
TFD_R
APPD2
MPFS
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPFD
TH/HUD_M
MPGS
MPUC
MPLD1
RD I/F
PWB
ADML
ADMH
CFM
WTM
MPED
MPWD
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
DSW_ADU
POD3
ADUGS
APPD1
THPS
TURM
PPD1
PFM
LCCM
DTBFM
FUFM_F
FUFM_R
FEXD
FEXM
FUM
DSW_FU
DHPD_K
DVKM
DM_K
BLTCL_R
BLTCL
DL_K
LSS
T2LUM
T1LUM
TANDEM
SENSOR
PWB
T2PED/ LUD
TANDEM
SENSOR
PWB
T1PED/ LUD
T1PFC
T2PFC
TANCL
CLUM1
TANSET
T2SPD
T1SPD
T1PPD2
T1PPD1
T2PUS
T1PUS
CPFM
TRC1/2
CLUM2
TCS_C
DL_C
DHPD_C
DM_C
T1PPD
PSFM1/2
2TC
MC
TBLTC
C3PWD
C3PUS
C3LUM
SIZE DETECT
PWB
C3SS1- 4
C3SPD
CPED3
CLUD3
C3PFD
PAPER FEED 3
UNIT
PTC
DV_C UNIT
TANDEM PAPER FEED UNIT
LSS_BK
TNFD
TBBOX
DVK Driver
PWB
HTCS_K
TCS_K
CCMD
CCHP
PTCM
CCM
BTM
PCSS
REGS_R
REGS_F
PCS
REGIST SENSOR UNIT
K PROCESS
DRIVE UNIT
DV_K UNIT
PHTM_K2
PHTM_K1
DSW_R
PTCM HP
DSW_D
VTOD
DSW_FL
PNC
OPTION
C4PUS
C4LUM
SIZE DETECT
PWB
C4SS1- 4
C4SPD
CPED2
CLUD2
C4PFD
PAPER FEED
4UNIT
LPPD
VFM_C
OZFM1/2/3
DV_M UNIT
TCS_M
DL_M
DHPD_M
DM_M
COLOR PROCESS
DRIVE UNIT
AC IN
HL
PWB
MSW
1TC
VFM_R
DV_Y UNIT
TCS_Y
DL_Y
DHPD_Y
DM_Y
SPPD5
SPOM
SRRBC
SPPD4
SPFM
STRC
SPPD3
SPUM
STRRBC
SPPD2
AC
PWB
Sub DCPS
Main DCPS
PCU
PWB
TM_K2
DVCRUM_K2
DHSW
WH
PWB
MFPC
PWB
DOCC
PWB
Standards : Only Japan
A3/A4 LCC
COINVENDER
DH1/2
PAPER
CASSETTE
CPUFM
AC IN
AC TAPP
UNIT
PUNCH UNIT
INSERTER
EFI
ROCD
SOCD
STLD
OCSW
MIM
ORS_LED
PNC
DSPF DRIVER
PWB
STMPS
OPTION
LSU CNT
PWB
LSU UNIT
DHS1/2
LVDS
PWB
POWER SW
PWB
INVERTER
PWB
PGM
LD_Y
PWB
LD_M
PWB
LD_C
PWB
2BLD_K
PWB
OPE
PWB
CCD
PWB
SCOV
SPLS2
SPLS1
DSPFcntPWB
OPERATION UNIT
OPTION
AUDITOR
OPTION
SPRANDOM
OPTION OPTION
Only Japan
DCPS
for FIN
FAX
SCNC
PWB
HTM_Y
TM_Y
DVCRUM_Y
HTCS_Y
HDDFM
4K (SADDLE)
FIN
LSUSS
MHPS
CCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
CARD
READER
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT
HTM_M
TM_M
DVCRUM_M
HTCS_M
HDD
DH_LCC
HTM_C
OPTION
HTCS_C
TM_C
DVCRUM_C
OPTION
MOTHER
PWB
OPTION
DRIVER
PWB
HTM_K1
TM_K1
DVCRUM_K1
SPPD1
SLUM
STUD
TONER_Y UNIT
SPFC
STRRC
TONER_K2 UNIT TONER_K1 UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT
SPOD
SPFFAN
SRRC
DSPF UNIT
BD_K
PWB
TH2_LSU
TH1_LSU
ORS_PD
Color LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
SPED2
SPED1
MX-7000N
[11]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
RIGHT DOOR UNIT
RRC2
LPFC
MPUC
RRM
RRC
PS FEED UNIT
PPD2
HL_EX1
TH_EX2
POD1
HL_US
HL_LM
TH_EX1
HL_UM
TH_US
TH_UM
WEB_INL/END
FUSER UNIT
POFM_F
POD2
TFD
PAPER OUT UNIT
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
B. MFP controller PWB

I2C (Ch.0)
IDE bus
SO-DIMM
DIMM4
IDE
ASIC
DDR bus 2
SYSAD bus
32bits width
VIDEOIF
SCAN OUT IF
I2C (Ch.0)
EEPROM
256Kbits
Piano
SW
USB
DEV
USB
HOST
I2C (Ch.1)
PCI bus 1
EFI connector
CPLD
LVDS
LSUIF
ICU
ASIC
SCAN IN IF
IMG
ASIC
IF
ASIC
USB-H
VBUS
SW
PCU,SCN
UART
FLASH
IO
EXPAND
USB-D
IMG-A Bus
(Auto Color)
FLASH IF
LOCAL bus
(LSI bus)
Expansion
PCI connector
CPLD
IMG-B Bus
(Area separation)
SYSTEM
ASIC
Control
signals
OPE IF
UART
SDR
SDR
SDRAM
LAN
JACK
LAN
EEPROM
2Kbits
RIC
(RS232C)
SRAM
Ether
MAC
MicroWire
RS232C
Transmitter
UART
FAX
(OPT)
LVDSIC
385/386/047/048
PCI bus 2
DDR bus 1
64bits width
IMG-C Bus
(Image process)
SO-DIMM
DIMM1
SO-DIMM
DIMM2
DDR bus 3
64bits width
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus)
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
RTC
FLASH
Mem. x2
100pinDIMM Socket
Battery
ENGINE IF
connector
DDR
SDRAMx2
UART
for Debug
SO-DIMM
DIMM3
ATA
connector
CPU
RM7965A
-900
UART
UART
To
MFPC
Via
Mother
LSU
IC2
Spread
Spectrum
FW
IC107
Unbuffered
Inverter
DC Power
Supply
UART
UART
LCC
FINISHER
Optional
X1
Xtal
19.6608MHz
IC3
RESETIC
IC1
CPU
H8S/2373
IC9/IC27
DFF
LCX574
HV
MC / TC2 unit
/ PTC unit
Fuser unit
HL control
UM / LM / US
TBBOX
Sensor Input
(RRC) / (T1PUS) / (T2PUS)

(C3PFC) / (MPGS) / (C4PFC)
(TRC1 - 2) / (MPUC) / (ADUGS)
(T2PFC) / (T1PFC) / (LPFC)
(FPCL2) / (RRC2) / (FPCL1)
(C3PUS) / (C4PUS) / (MFPS)
IC71/IC72/IC82
Analog
MUX x 3
Temp/Hum sensor (TH_M/HUD_M)

LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU/TH2_LSU)
DV detector (DVTYP_C/M/Y/K1/K2)
Fuser Thermistor (TH_UM/LM/US/EX1/EX2)
Paper Out Thermistor (PO_TMP)
Drum Mark Sensor (DMS)
Analog Input
Sensor Input
(PPD2)
Sensor Input
Toner Detector (TCS_K/C/M/Y)

Process Cont. sensor (PCS_K/CL)
Resist sensor (REGS_F/R)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD)
Analog Input
(DSW_ADU) / (TFD3) / (MPLD)

(MTOP1 - 2) / (MPED)
MUX
HC151
RD I/F PWB
(POFM_LD1 - 3) / (OZFM_LD1 - 3)
(FUFM_R_FD) / (FUFM_F_LD)
(VFM_C_LD) / (VFM_R_LD)
(PSFM_LD1 - 2)
IC29/IC30
MUX
HC151x2
FAN Lock Detect
CRUM
(CRUM_C/M/Y/K1/K2)
Load Control Output
DC Motor
2nd Belt Release Motor
(TURM)
Charger Cleaner Motor

(CCM) / (PTCM)
HV
TC1 unit
IC11
PMC ASIC
(WEB_M)
Fuser Cleaning Motor
Syncronous Motor
(HL_UM/LM/US/EX)
IC70
D/A Conv
(TCS/REGS cont)
I2C Bus
IC7
I/O ASIC
IC4/IC8
SRAM
(1Mbit x 2)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
Flash Write Protect
IC6
EEPROM
(256kbit)
Load Control Output

Coin vendor
(Optional)
(PNC_K/CL)
Load output
Mechanical
Counter
(Optional)
CLOCK
DATABus[15:0]
AddressBus[21:0]
I2C Bus
EX
3-wired serial
DM CLK/ BTM CLK
Load control Output
Toner Motor
(TN_C/M/Y/K1/K2)
AND Gate
VHCT08 x 4
Synchronous Motor
Toner Hopper Motor
(HTM_K/C/M/Y)
(T1LUM) / (T2LUM)
(C3LUM) / (C4LUM)
Driver PWB
Tray Lift Up Motor
DC Motor
Syncronous Motor
IC83/84/86/87/88
DVK Driver PWB
(PHTM_K1)
(PHTM_K2)
Synchronous Motor
Toner Hopper Motor
(CV_CLCOPY/COPY)
Sensor Input
COIN VENDOR
(Optional)
Discharge Lamp
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
PS Fan (PSFM1 - 2)
Ozone Fan (OZFM1 - 3)
Pout Fan (POFM_F/U)
Fuser Fan (FUFM_F/R/DTBFM)
Ventilation Fan (VFM_C/R)
FAN Motor Control
(PPD1 - 3) / (DSW_R/D/FU/FL) / (BELT_HP)

(C3PED) / (C4PED) / (TFD) / (CCHP)
(FPD_CL/BK) / (C3PFD) / (POD1) / (TBLTB)
(APPD1 - 2) / (TBLTC) / (C3SS1 - 4)
(C4SS1 - 4) / (T1PPD1 - 2) / (LPPD) / (T2LUD)
(T1LUD) / (C4SPD) / (C4LUD) / (C4PFD)
(VTOD) / (C3SPD) / (C3LUD) / (MPFD)
(DHPD_K/C/M/Y) / (T2PPD) / (TANSET)
(T2PED) / (T1PED) / (T2SPD) / (T1SPD)
Sensor Input
(PCSS) / (MPFS) / (TANCL)

(LSS_CL) / (BLTCL_R)
(BLTCL) / (LSS_BK)
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVKM)
DV Motor CL (DVCM)
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
Resist Motor (RRM)
Fuser Motor (FUM)
Waste Toner Motor (WTM)
(DVK_CH) / (CCM_ROT)
(PTCM_ROT/HP)
(TNFD) / (HTCS_K/C/M/Y)
(FUEXD) / (WEB_INL/END)
Sensor Input
Pout Motor (POM)

ADU Motor (ADML/(ADMH)
PSF Motor (PFM)
Drum Motor BK (DM_K)
Drum Motor CL (DM_C/M/Y)
Belt Motor (BTM)
LCC Motor (LCCM)
Fuser Release Motor (FUEXM)
Stepping Motor Control
C. PCU PWB
RSPF Unit
MHPS
LVDS
RSPF FEED
MOTOR
LAMP UN
SCANNER
MOTOR
PANEL PWB
INVERTER PWB
LCD
LVDS Driver
30bit
PHOTO
SENSOR
LVDS Receiver
30bit
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
SCNcntPWB
LVDS
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
LVDS Receiver
4bit *2
With AFE & LVDS
CCD PWB
RGB10bit*3
CLUTCH
STMP UN
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SRAM
1Mbit
/CS2
CPU
H8S/2373
EEPROM
32Kbit
I2C
FlashROM <Socket>
8Mbit
/CS0
(/CS0 RESERVE)
RGB8bit*3
XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
SCAN ASIC
/CS3
SDRAM BUS
SDRAM
128Mbit
IO ASIC
/CS5
LVDS
24bit BUS
BUFFER
RGB8bit*3
CPT ASIC
/CS4
24bit BUS
BUFFER
RGB8bit*3
LVDS Receiver
28bit
DSPF Memory PWB
LVDS Driver
28bit
LVDS
LVDS
LVDS Driver
28bit
DSPFcnt PWB
Original detection
(Light emitting)
Original detection
(Light receiving)
OCSW
AUDITOR
CARD READER
<Engine/Controller>
(MFP PWB)
Mother PWB
DOCC PWB
D. Scanner control PWB
D[15:8]
uPD65946GJ
PMC ASIC
DSR_LCC
DTR_LCC
RxD_LCC
TxD_LCC
DSR_FIN
DTR_FIN
RxD_FIN
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
PCU
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
LSUASIC
PIC
CPU
H8/3687
FAX
(Optional)
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
CPU
I/O M30843FWGP
TxD
RxD
SCK
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
CPU
SH7706
LCC
(Optional)
FINISHER
(Optional)
LSU
O.C
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
DTR_SCAN
D[15:8]
O.C.
O.C.
CPU
H8S/2373
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.D.
P.D.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)-
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)-
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
DSR_SCAN
P.D.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
SCN Cnt
CPU
H8S/2320
I/O ASIC
uPD65892GC
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)-
DSPF Cnt
New
ASIC
O.C
Schmit Inv.
A[4:0]
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
TxD
RxD
Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD
RxD4
TxD4
RxD2
TxD_FIN
SCK_LSU
RSV_DAT
TRANS_DAT
PCU_DTR
PCU_DSR
nPCU_TxD
O.C.
TxD
RxD
I/O
A[4:0]
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD2
SCK1
RxD1
TxD1
I/Oport
I/Oport
RxD0
TxD
TxD_SCAN
O.C.
RxD_SCAN
P.D.
P.D.
nPCU_RxD
RxD
P.U.
P.D.
TxD0
TxD
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
P.U.
RxD
P.U.
I/O
P.U.
RxD
P.D.
DOCC
(Optional)
PIC
P.U.
O.C
O.C
O.C
P.U.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
Mother
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
FAX2CS_CTS
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
FAX2D_CTS
FAX2D_RTS
FAX2CS_RxD
FAX2CS_TxD
FAX2D_RxD
FAX2D_TxD
REQ_PIC
CLR_PIC
nRxD_PIC
nTxD_PIC
CTS_SCN
RTS_SCN
nRxD_SCN
nTxD_SCN
FAX2CS_RTS
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
LVDS
MFPC
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CTS[8]
RTS[8]
CTS[7]
RTS[7]
RxD[8]
TxD[8]
RxD[7]
TxD[7]
MFPC
I/F ASIC
REQ[PIC]
CLR[PIC]
RxD[PIC]
TxD[PIC]
CTS[2]
RTS[2]
RxD[2]
TxD[2]
RTS[1]
CTS[1]
TxD[1]
RxD[1]
E. Serial communication
6.3A
24V2
6.3A
24V1
DR-DCPS
5V2
DSW-FL
(Front door lower)
DRIVER
PWB
INT24V1
LCCM
ADUL
ADUH
DM_Y
DM_C
24V2
DSW-R
(Right door)
POM
BTM
DM_M
DM_K
INT24V1
AC PWB
INT24V2
INT24V1in
24VDSW-FL
INT24V1in
5V2
/INTcnt
INT24V2
INT24V_TM
INT24V1in
PCU PWB
INT24V1
PTC PWB
1TC PWB
DL_K PWB
PSM
FUM
PTCCM
LD Y
LD C
HL_LM
HL_UM
LC M
HL_EX2
MC PWB
2TC PWB
WTM
DVCM
CCM
FEXM
LSUSS BK
TM_C
AC
HLPR
TM_K2
LSUSS CL
TM_Y
TM_M
HL PWB
LSU PWB
TM_K1
AC
INT5V
LD_BK
HL_EX1
HL_US
LSUSS CL
interrupts
laser beams.
LSUSS BK
interrupts
laser beams.
F. Interlock
AC IN
WH-SW
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
20A/250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
A2
VR3
NC
NO
WH PWB
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
A1
no-mounting
18W
10W
LCC
10W
Cassette
Tandem
SCN
F3
LCC
(OPTION)
Main unit
SCN unit
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
VR2
nomounting
WH-N
T2
T1
HL PWB
HL_UM
SSR1
TS_UM
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TD1
MAIN POWER SW
1
HLOUT_UM
L2
L1
T2
T1
HL_US
FUSING UNIT
T8AH/250V
F103
SSR2
TS_US
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TD2
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
F301
DC MAIN POWER SUPPLY
D102
~
HLOUT_US
AC PWB
+
T2
T1
HL_LM
TD3
Z101
TS_LM
drawer
SSR3
AC120V 15A
AC240V 10A
/HL_PR
INT24V1
FW
Generating
Circuit
T1AH/250V
F101
N/F
F102
HL_EX1
HLOUT_LM
AC120V-TBD A
AC240V-TBD A
TD4
HL_EX2
TS_EX1
T2
T1
RL51
F2
SSR4
T5AH/250V
F1
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TS_EX2
N/F
SQ61
HLOUT_EX
RY1
RY-CNT
+5Vo
FW
Generating
Circuit
F61
T2AH/250V
RC101
+
-
DC SUB POWER SUPPLY

Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
G. AC power line diagram (100V series)
AC IN
WH-SW
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
T10AH/250V
F2
T10AH/250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
AC PWB
RY1
A2
VR3
NC
NO
WH PWB
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION)
A1
no-mounting
18W
10W
LCC
10W
Cassette
Tandem
SCN
VR2
nomounting
LCC
(OPTION)
Main unit
SCN unit
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
T2
T1
HL PWB
T2.0AH/250V
F4
HL_UM
TS_UM
4
SSR1
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TD1
MAIN POWER SW
1
HLOUT_UM
L2
L1
T2
T1
TS_US
SSR2
F2
+3.3V
+5V2
+12V2
+38V1+38V3
Voltage
Generation
RL1
T3.15AH/250V
NR2
F3
T5AH/250V
FUSING UNIT
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TD2
HL_US
DCCNT
+5V1
FW
Generating
Circuit
Voltage
Generation
+12V1
+5V1
HLOUT_US
T2
T1
TS_LM
drawer
SSR3
NR1
AC120V 15A
AC240V 10A
/HL_PR
INT24V1
N/F
TD3
HL_LM
N/F
HLOUT_LM
HL_EX1
T8AH/250V
no-mounting
F1
MSW detection circuit
DC MAIN POWER SUPPLY
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TD4
HL_EX2
TS_EX1
T2
T1
SSR4
RL51
T5AH/250V
F2
T5AH/250V
F1
AC125V 15A
AC250V 10A
TS_EX2
N/F
SQ61
HLOUT_EX
RY-CNT
+5Vo
FW
Generating
Circuit
F61
T2AH/250V
RC101
+
-
DC SUB POWER SUPPLY

Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
H. AC power line diagram (200V series)
DM_Y
6.3A
6.3A
DM_M
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
DC POWER
PWB
DM_C
5V
12V
24V5
3.3V
5V
24V3
24V4
GND1
GND2
24V1
5V
24V7
P-GND
24V2
5V
24V6
P-GND
DM_K
HL(US)
BTM
ADML
24V2
D-GND
INT24V2
INT24V1in
P-GND
24V2
P-GND
HL(LM)
OPTION
FINISER
LCCM
AC PWB
5V
24V6
P-GND
POM
HL(UM)
24V2
ADMH
24V2
P-GND
N_HL(EX)
N_HL(LM)
N_HL(UM)
N_HL(SU)
HL PWB
L-HL_U
L-HL_LM
LCC
CONTROL PWB
OPTION
DSW-FL
(Front door lower)
5V
24V7
P-GND
HL(EX2)
24V2
D-GND
3.3V
5V
24V3
24V4
GND1
GND2
24V1
INT24V1
D-GND
D-GND
Return harnes
(Front door upper)
INT24V2
P-GND
RRM
INT24V2
INT24V1in
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
D-GND
5V
INT24V2
P-GND
Fusing motor
RD I/F PWB
WTM
CPFM
PTC PWB
5V
24V4
P-GND
D-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
2TC PWB
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
MC PWB
1TC PWB
DRIVER PWB
DSW-R
(Right door)
HL(EX1)
PFM
INT24V1
PCU PWB
/INTcnt
5V
5V
12V
24V5
5V
24V3
P-GND
5V
24V3
D-GND
INT24V2
24V3
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
24V4
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5V
INT5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
24V3
P-GMD
MOTHER PWB
5V
GND
3.3V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V5
P-GND
5V
12V
D-GND
DOCC
PWB
OPTION
MFP PWB
5V
12V
D-GND
T1S PWB
HDD PWB
OPTION
FAX UN
OPTION
EXTEND PCI
OPTION
EFI
MHPS
OPTONN
CARD READER
DHPD Y
LD Y PWB
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HDD FAN
SUB POWER
PWB
OPTION
COIN VENDOR
MFP FAN
3.3V
5V
12V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
LSU FAN
DHPD M
Polygon motor
24V1
P-GND
BD PWB(K)
LD M PWB
LD BK PWB
24V
P-GND
5V3
D-GND
LD C PWB
DHPD C
D-GND
DVK DRIVER PWB
External variable
motor
Mother FAN
DVCM
DVKM
DHPD K
LSU PWB
INT5V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V5
P-GND
5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
SCNcnt PWB

PWB
T2S PWB
24V
3.3V
5V
12V
GND
5V
D-GND
24V
3.3V
24V
P-GND
3.3V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V
GND
PGND
24V
PGND
CL inverter PWB
CCD PWB
OCSW
ORS LED PWB
LVDS-CD PWB
MFP OPE-J PWB
DSPF CNT PWB
SPFM transport motor
FAN
SULM lift-up motor
SPUM paper feed

motor
24V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
GND
5V
24V
AGND
PGND
SGND
24V_SPFM
24V_TR
PGND
24V_TR
24V_SPUM
LCD INV PWB
LCD UN
ORS PD PWB
DSPF CCD PWB
DSPF DRIVER
PWB
I. DC power line diagram (100V/200V series)
DM_Y
6.3A
6.3A
DM_M
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
6.3A
DC POWER
PWB
DM_C
5V
12V
24V5
GND1
GND2
3.3V
5V
24V3
24V4
5V
24V1
P-GND
24V2
5V
24V6
P-GND
DM_K
HL(US)
BTM
ADML
HL(LM)
24V2
D-GND
INT24V2
INT24V1in
P-GND
24V2
P-GND
FINISER
LCCM
OPTION
AC PWB
5V
24V6
P-GND
POM
HL(UM)
24V2
ADMH
24V2
P-GND
L-HL_U
L-HL_LM
N_HL(EX)
N_HL(LM)
N_HL(UM)
N_HL(SU)
HL PWB
LCC CONTROL
PWB
DSW-FL
OPTION
(Front door lower)
5V
24V1
P-GND
HL(EX2)
24V2
D-GND
3.3V
5V
24V3
24V4
GND1
GND2
D-GND
INT24V1
D-GND
Return harness
(Front door upper)
INT24V2
P-GND
RRM
INT24V2
INT24V1in
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
D-GND
5V
INT24V2
P-GND
Fusing motor
RD I/F PWB
WTM
CPFM
PTC PWB
5V
24V4
P-GND
D-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
2TC PWB
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
MC PWB
1TC PWB
DRIVER PWB
DSW-R
(Right door)
HL(EX1)
PFM
INT24V1
PCU PWB
/INTcnt
5V
5V
12V
24V5
5V
24V3
P-GND
5V
24V3
D-GND
INT24V2
24V3
INT24V2
P-GND
5V
24V4
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5V
INT5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
24V3
P-GMD
MOTHER PWB
LSU FAN
24V1
P-GND
5V
GND
3.3V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V5
P-GND
5V
12V
D-GND
DOCC
PWB
MFP PWB
OPTION
3.3V
5V
12V
D-GND
MFP FAN
5V
12V
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
T1S PWB
HDD PWB
OPTION
FAX UN
OPTION
EXTEND PCI
OPTION
EFI
MHPS
OPTONN
CARD READER
DHPD Y
LD Y PWB
3.3V
D-GND
HDD FAN
SUB POWER
PWB
OPTIOON
COIN VENDOR
DHPD M
Polygon motor
BD PWB(K)
LD M PWB
LD BK PWB
24V
P-GND
5V3
D-GND
LD C PWB
DHPD C
D-GND
12V
DVK DRIVER PWB
External variable
motor
Mother FAN
DVCM
DVKM
DHPD K
LSU PWB
D-GND
INT5V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V5
P-GND
5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
SCNcnt PWB
T2S PWB
24V
3.3V
5V
12V
GND
5V
D-GND
24V
3.3V
24V
P-GND
3.3V
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
24V
GND
PGND
24V
PGND
CL inverter PWB
CCD PWB
OCSW
ORS LED PWB
LVDS-CD PWB
MFP OPE-J PWB
DSPF CNT PWB
SPFM transport motor
FAN
SULM lift-up motor
24V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
3.3V
5V
12V
GND
5V
24V
AGND
PGND
SGND
24V_SPFM
24V_TR
PGND
24V_TR
SPUM paper feed motor 24V_SPUM
LCD INV PWB
LCD UN
ORS PD PWB
DSPF CCD PWB
DSPF DRIVER
PWB
J. DC power line diagram (120V series)
6.3A
24V7
6.3A
24V6
6.3A
24V5
6.3A
24V3
6.3A
24V2
6.3A
24V1
DR-DCPS
6.3A
24V4
INSERTER
LCC
Mother PWB
DSW-FL
( Front door lower)
24V2
TA7291 circuit
DRIVER
PWB
INT24V1
SCNcnt
PWB
ORSLED
MM
DSPF
INV
CL
24V2
INT24V1
AUDITER
PHTMK
HTMY
HTMC
LCCM
ADML
ADMH
DMY
DMC
DSW-R
(Right door)
WEBM
HTMM
HTMK
PSFM
POM
BTM
DMM
DMBK
AC PWB
24VDSW-FL
INT24V1in
INT24V2
INT24V1in
Return harness
for except Japan
(Front door upper)
PCU PWB
/INTcnt
24V3
INT24V2
INT24V_TM
INT24V1in
DVKM
Coin vender
DL_C,M,Y
DCFM1,2
POFM1 - 3
LUM1 - 4
Mechanical counter 1,2
Clutch, solenoid
OZFM1 - 3
Toner concentration sensor
HV PWB
DSW-FD
(Front door upper)
INT24V_TM
LSU PWB
WTM
DVCM
CCM
TMC
TMK2
FPCL1,2
PSM
FUM
DL_K
TMY
TMM
TMK1
HL PWB
HLPR
PFM
K. DC24V distribution drawing
BK
WH
BK
BK
CD)
1
3
CN4
1
WH-N(CS_WH)
WH-L(CS_WH)
4
2
WH-N(TAN_WH)
5
WH-L(TAN_WH)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN3
WH-N(LCC)
WH-L(LCC)
B2P3-VH
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
1
WH-L(SCAN)
3
B2P3VH-BL
WH PWB
CN1
WH-L
1
WH-N
3
B2P3-VH-R
CN5
D-GND
1
24V2
3
B03B-PH-K-R
L_WH
PS-187
PS-187
L_WH
(WH harness
HL PWB
FPS-250
L_HL
N_HL
FPS-187
WH_SW
(WH harness
WH
BK
ELP
1
2
ELR
1
2
WH
BK
ELP
1
2
To P23
LCC heater
RD
GY
BK
WH
WH
BK
WH
BK
Tandem heater
Cassette heater
ELR
WH
2
BK
1
: common)
ELR
WH
2
BK
1
(AC-DC harness CD)
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
D-GND
4
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW-Lout
3
NC
2
MSW-Nout
1
CN3(B03P-VL-R)
MSW-Lin
1
NC
2
MSW-Nin
3
CN4(B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
N_DC
4
(SCN-WH harness
CD) ELR
WH
1
BK
2
ELR
12
4
ELP
2
1
AC_PWB
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
3
N_HL
CN1(B03P-VL)
1
L_IN
2
NC
3
N_IN
CN6(B2P3-VH-R)
1
N_WH
3
L_WH
(AC harness CD)

ELR
WH
2
BK
1
GY
RD
(AC harness CD)
BK
WH
WH
BK
(AC cord: common)
MSW
(AC-DC harness CD)
(AC-DC harness CD)
MSW-Nin (RD)
MSW-Lin (RD)
MSW-Nout (WH)
(MSW harness CD)

MSW-Lout (WH)
CN_1 (B2P3-VH)
1
L_DC
3
N_DC
CN8(B6P-VH)
1
+38V1
2
GND1
3
+38V2
4
GND1
5
+38V3
6
GND1
DCPS
1
2
3
4
CN5(B4P-VH)
+12V2
GND2
+12V2
GND2
CN7(B2P-VH)
+3.3V
GND2
1
2
CN6(B10P-VH)
+5V2
1
GND2
2
+5V2
3
GND2
4
+5V2
5
GND2
6
+5V2
7
GND2
8
+5V2
9
GND2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN4(B7P-VH)
+24V5
GND1
+24V6
GND1
+24V7
GND1
(NC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN3(B9P-VH)
+24V1
GND1
+24V2
GND1
+24V3
GND1
+24V4
GND1
FW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN_3(B10P-VH)
5VL
5VL
GND
GND
5VO
GND
FW
FW
RY_CNT
OFF_CNT
CN2(B8P-VH)
Output ON at Open
/DCCNT
/MSW-MON
CN_AC (B2P3-VH)
GND2
BK
1
L_DC
+5V1
WH
3
N_DC
GND2
+12V1
GND2
+12V1
SUB DCPS
CN_2 (B3P4-VH)
1
L_RY
WH
4
N_RY
BK
BK
WH
OR
GY
BL
BL
BL
GY
BL
GY
PL
RD
GY
RD
GY
RD
GY
RD
GY
RD
GY
RD
GY
RD
PL
BL
BR
BL
BL
GY
GY
BL
GY
BR
BR
LB
PL
LCC
INSERTER
LCC
INSERTER (2 pcs.)
INSERTER (2 pcs.)
LCC
Page2
SM-6pin
FW
RY_CNT
OFF_CNT
DC_CNT1
D-GND
AWG conversion
DSW-FL
P
3
4
5
1
(Lower main harness CD)
R
3
4
5
1
GY
RD
GY
RD
PL
BR
BL
GY
OR
GY
RD
GY
GY
BR
LB
PL
BR
GY
PL
BL
PL
BL
BL
BL
GY
GY
BL
GY
RD
PCU PWB
3
P-GND
5
24V3
4
P-GND
6
24V4
7
12V
12
FW
8
5V2
9
D-GND
10
3.3V
11
D-GND
B12B-XL
CN1
1
24VDSW-FL
2
P-GND
NEW MOTHER PWB
CN12(B12B-XL)
2
5VL
3
5VL
1
D-GND
6
D-GND
4
5VO
7
D-GND
10
24V5
12
P-GND
9
12VHD
8
5VHD
11
12VN
5
5VN
CN13
1
FW
2
RY_CNT
3
OFF_CNT
4
DC_CNT1
5
DC_CNT2
6
3.3V
7
D-GND
B08B-PNDZS-1
2. Actual wiring chart
A. Power supply section (100V/200V series) (1/31)
BK
WH
BK
BK
1
3
CN4
1
WH-N(CS_WH)
WH-L(CS_WH)
4
WH-N(TAN_WH)
2
5
WH-L(TAN_WH)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN3
WH-N(LCC)
WH-L(LCC)
B2P3-VH
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
1
WH-L(SCAN)
3
B2P3VH-BL
WH PWB
WH-L
WH-N
B2P3-VH-R
CN1
1
3
CD)
CN5
D-GND
1
24V2
3
B03B-PH-K-R
L_WH
PS-187
PS-187
L_WH
(WH harness
HL PWB
FPS-250
L_HL
N_HL
FPS-187
AC_PWB
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
3
N_HL
WH_SW
BK
WH
WH
BK
CN1(B03P-VL)
1
L_IN
2
NC
3
N_IN
CN6(B2P3-VH-R)
1
N_WH
3
L_WH
(WH harness
ELP
1
2
ELR
1
2
WH
BK
ELP
1
2
To P23
LCC heater
MSW
RY
CJ-PSun
CN6(B03B-PASK-1)
1
DCCNT1
3
DCCNT2
CN1(B2P3-VH-B)
3
L_DC
1
N_DC
SUB DCPS
CN_2 (B3P4-VH)
1
L_RY
4
N_RY
CN_1 (B2P3-VH)
1
L_DC
3
N_DC
CN2(B5P-VH-B)
D-GND
2
5VL
4
CN4(B6P-VH-B)
5VN
1
5VN
2
5VN
3
5VN
4
D-GND
5
D-GND
6
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
P-GND
5
P-GND
6
P-GND
7
P-GND
8
CN8(B7P-VH-B)
24V1
1
24V1
2
24V2
3
24V3
4
24V3
5
24V4
6
24V5
7
CN_3(B10P-VH)
5VL
5VL
GND
GND
5VO
GND
FW
FW
RY_CNT
OFF_CNT
CN3(B03P-VH-B)
3.3V
1
D-GND
3
BK
WH
BK
WH
BK
WH
ELR
2
1
(AC-DC harness CD)
(AC-DC harness CD)
MSW-Nin (RD)
MSW-Lin (RD)
MSW-Nout (WH)
(AC harness 120 CD)

MSW-Lout (WH)
CN5(B04P-VH-B)
12V
1
12V
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
Tandem heater
Cassette heater
WH
BK
WH
BK
RD
GY
BK
WH
WH
BK
WH
BK
: common)
ELR
2
1
(AC-DC harness CD)
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
D-GND
4
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW-Lout
3
NC
2
MSW-Nout
1
CN3(B03P-VL-R)
MSW-Lin
1
NC
2
MSW-Nin
3
CN4(B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
N_DC
4
(SCN-WH harness
WH
BK
CD)
ELR
WH
1
BK
2
ELR
12
4
(AC harness 120 CD)

ELR
ELP
2
2
1
1
WH
BK
GY
RD
(AC harness 120 CD)
(AC cord)
INSERTER
LCC
INSERTER (2 pcs.)
LCC
DSW-FL
INSERTER (2 pcs.)
LCC
To P2
BL
BL
GY
GY
BL
GY
BR
BR
LB
PL
(DC inteface harness CD)

R
EL-2pin
1
D-GND
2
5VL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
1
2
(Lower main harness 120V CD)
RD
GY
GY
GY
RD
RD
PL
BL
GY
OR
GY
BR
GY
BR
LB
PL
BL
BL
GY
GY
BL
GY
BL
BL
PL
RD
PL
GY
PCU PWB
CN1
1
24VDSW-FL
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
P-GND
5
24V3
6
24V4
7
12V
8
5V2
9
D-GND
10
3.3V
11
D-GND
12
FW
B12B-XL
NEW MOTHER PWB
CN12(B12B-XL)
2
5VL
3
5VL
1
D-GND
6
D-GND
4
5VO
7
D-GND
5
5VN
8
5VHD
9
12VHD
10
24V5
11
12VN
12
P-GND
CN13
1
FW
2
RY_CNT
3
OFF_CNT
4
DC_CNT1
5
DC_CNT2
6
3.3V
7
D-GND
B08B-PNDZS-1
B. Power supply section (120V series) (2/31)
PTC HP detection
1
PTCM_HP
D-GND
2
179228-2
TBLTB
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73P
179228-3
Transfer separation sensor BK
TC Electrode un
Right door section
DSW_R
INT24V1in
2
24V(DSW_FL)
1
PS-187-2V
PHNR-02-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
PTCM_HP
D-GND
2
1
(Transfer belt separation harness BK CD)
(PTC guide UN harness CD)

BR
BR
1
GY
GY
2
RD
RD
Front toner bottle section

DSW_FU
INT24V2
1
INT24V_TM
2
PS-187-2V
BR
GY
BR
GY
BL
BR
GY
SM-5P N
TBLTB
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
PTCM_HP
D-GND
3
4
P
1
2
BR
GY
BL
BR
GY

AC PWB
coil
DRIVER PWB
(120V series)
CJ-DCPS
(Japan/200V series)
DR-DCPS
(MSW harness CD)

RD
RD
P
1
2
3
4
5
P
2
1
4
3
1
2
5
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
CN10
INT24V1
INT24V1
P-GND
P-GND
5VNPD
B5P-VH
CN8
P-GND
INT24V1in
INT24V2
P-GND
/INT_CNT
24V2
24V2
B7P-VH-B
6
3
CN8
24V1
24V2
B07P-VH
1
3
2
1
3
CN3
24V1
24V2
B9P-VH
CN2
24V2
P-GND
5VN
B3P-VH
R
2
1
EL6P
24V(DSW_FL)
24V1
GY
RD
RD
GY
BR
RD
RD
RD
GY
BL
RD
RD
GY
GY
BL
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
3
4
P
1
2
Norht America and Europe

Front toner bottle section
DSW_FU
(HL relay harness CD)
RD
INT24V2
1
RD
INT24V_TM
2
PS-187-2V
P
EL2P
R
RD
RD
1
INT24V1in
1
RD
RD
2
INT24V1in
2
(IL return harness CD)
Front door section

DSW_FL
24V(DSW_FL)
2
24V1
1
PS-187-2V
R
1
2
3
4
5
RD
RD
(HL relay harness JP CD)

RD
RD
Japan and Agency
3
4
R
1
2
RD
RD
RD
RD
INT24V1in
INT24V1in
EL4P
INT24V2
INT24V_TM
P
6
SM-6pin
R
5VN
6
AWG conversion
(Upper main harness CD)
RD
GY
GY
BL
RD
RD
GY
BR
RD
BL
RD
BR
GY
BR
GY
BL
RD
RD
RD
RD
CN2
1
2
3
5
8
4
6
7
9
CN4
40
to TNmotor
INT24V1
INT24V1
P-GND
P-GND
5VNPD
INT24V1in
INT24V2
P-GND
/INT_CNT
B9P-VH
5VN
DR-PCU PWB
CN15
14
TBLTB
16
D-GND
18
5VNPD(LED)
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN18
22
PTCM_HP
24
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN1
1
24V(DSW_FL)
B12B-XL
CN16
3
INT24V1in
1
24V(DSW_FL)
B2P3-VH
CN11
1
INT24V2
3
INT24V_TM
B2P3-VH
C. Interlock section (3/31)
HL_LM
HL_US
HL_UM
BK
#187
WH
BK
#187
D-GND
1
POD1
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71L3
PHR-3
POD1
TH_LM
Contact
2
1
TH_LM
D-GND
4
5
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
PHNR-4-H +BU04P-TR-P-H
4
TH_EX1
1
3
D-GND
2
TH_EX1
Contact
2
TH_EX2
3
1
D-GND
4
(WEB harness CD)
2
TH_LM
1
1
D-GND
2
WH
WH
TH_EX2
Contact
N-HL_EX
N-HL_LM
L-HL_LM
N-HL_US
L-HL_U
N-HL_UM
2
4
D-GND
POD1
5VNPD
Drawer RWZ
TH_UM
D-GND
A-10
A-9
B-9
B-5
B-4
TH_LM
D-GND
TH_EX2
D-GND
TH_EX1
D-GND
TH_US
D-GND
TH1_AD2
TH1_AD1
D-GND
WEB_END
D-GND
WEB_INL
A-6
A-5
A-2
A-1
A-4
A-3
A-8
A-7
B-3
B-2
B-1
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-1
B-5
B-6
A-1
A-2
A-5
A-6
A-9
A-10
A-7
A-8
A-3
A-4
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-2
B-3
B-4
View from Fuser unit side
Fuser unit I/F Drawer
WH
5 WEB_END 1
WH
4
2
D-GND
WH
3 WEB_INL
3
#187
2
TH_US
1
1
D-GND
2
TS
#187
#187
WH
TH_US
Contact
BK
WH
BL
BK
#187
(WEB harness CD)
TS
#187
#187
WH
WH
BK
WH
BK
WH
(Fusing harness CD)
WH
WH
WH
#187
BK
#187
WH
#187
BK
WH
#187
BK
#187
BK
WH
3 TH1_AD2 1
2 TH1_AD1 2
1
D-GND
3
WEB-END
HL_EX2
TH_UM
Non-contact
475W
HL_EX1
475W
#187
#187
THERMOSTAT
#187
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
#187
#187
BK
YL R/P
#187
#250
#187
BK
(TS-HL_LOW harness: common) YL R/P
450W
550W
400W
#250
#250
950W
1400W
WEB
motor
WH 950W
WH 450W
BK
WH 400W
BK
WH 550W
GY
BR
GY
LB
GY
BR
GY
PK
GY
PL
GY
PL
LB
GY
PK
GY
BR
A1
B9 A2
B8 A3
B7 A4
B6 A5
B5 A6
B4 A7
B3 A8
B2 A9
B1 A10
#250
SM-2pin_N
WEBM_a
WEBM_b
Fuser unit I/F Drawer
R
1
2
View from Body side
2
5
3
4
BR
LB
BR
PK
PL
PL
LB
GY
PK
GY
BR
TH2_AD2
TH2_AD1
TH1_AD2
TH1_AD1
D-GND
19
20
2
4
6
TH_UM
POD1
5VNPD
TH_LM
TH_EX2
TH_EX1
13
15
12
16
14
TH_US
WEB_END
D-GND
WEB_INL
10
BK
BK
WH
WH
WH
WH
13
15
12
16
14
10
19
20
2
4
6
9
7
11
1
3
5
BR
LB
BR
PK
PL
PL
LB
GY
PK
GY
BR

DF1B-20P
S
BR
WEBM_a
17
PL
WEBM_b
18
9
7
11
1
3
5

P
BR
17
PL
18
DF11-8DP-SP1
P
1
2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
(TS-HL_UM harness CD)

(TS-HL_US harness CD)
TH_LM
TH_EX2
TH_EX1
TH_US
TH2_AD2
TH2_AD1
TH1_AD2
TH1_AD1
D-GND
8
TH_UM
CN13
36
POD1
38
5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
12
16
14
10
13
15
2
4
6
CN12
9
WEB_END
7
D-GND
11
WEB_INL
CN8
10
WEBM_a
12
WEBM_b
B12B-PNDZS-1
L-HL_LM
FPS-250
CN2
2
L-HL_U
1
N-HL_EX
S02B-VT
CN1
1
N-HL_UM
5
N-HL_US
3
N-HL_LM
B3P5-VH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DR-PCU PWB
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN10
13
/HLPR
11
HLout_EX
9
HLout_LM
7
HLout_US
5
HLout_UM
3
D-GND
1
INT24V1
B40B-PNDZS-1
DRIVER PWB
CN4
INT24V1
D-GND
HLout_UM
HLout_US
HLout_LM
HLout_EX
/HLPR
B07B-PASK
HL PWB
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
GY
RD
RD
GY
BR
PK
LB
PL
BR
D. Fusing unit section (4/31)
ZHR-3
3
2
1
Fusing motor
INT24V2
P-GND
/FUM_CK
/FUM_D
FUM_LD
N.C
N.C
B7B-PH-K-S
1
2
4
5
6
3
7
External variable
motor
Bottle cooling fan

BTFM
Fusing duct fan

FUFM_F
(Sirocco)
OJ-4506-N23
D-GND
FEXD
5VNPD
External variable sensor
RD
GY
LB
PK
BR
SM-6pin_N
FEXM_/B
FEXM_B
FEXM_/A
FEXM_A
INT24V2
N,C
P
1
3
2
4
5
6
BL
BR
YL
RD
WH
GY
RD
R
1
2
3
PA-3pin
FUFM_F
NC
P-GND
P
1
2
3
RD
PL
GY
LB
SM-4p
FUFM_F
/POFM_CNT2
P-GND
FUFM_F_LD
P
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
SM-4p
FUFM_R
FUFM_R_LD
P-GND
/FUFM_CNT
R
1
3
2
4
5
6
R
1
4
3
2
(Bottle FAN harness)
(HL relay harness)
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
FUFM_F
P
1
4
3
2
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
Fusing duct fan

FUFM_R(80)
P
1
2
3
4
SM-4p
FUFM_F
/POFM_CNT2
P-GND
FUFM_F_LD
(HL relay harness)
RD
PL
GY
LB
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
(HL relay harness)

R
RD
1
PL
2
GY
3
LB
4
FEXM_/B
FEXM_B
FEXM_/A
FEXM_A
INT24V2
/POFM_CNT2
13
15
19
17
21
23
FUFM_F
FUFM_F_LD
P-GND
DF1B-32P
D-GND
FEXD
5VNPD
7
9
11
P
1
3
5
(Upper main harness)
15
19
17
21
23
13
7
9
11
S
1
3
5
RD
GY
LB
PK
BR
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
PL
RD
LB
GY
GY
PK
BL
RD
LB
GY
POFM_CNT2
FEXM_/B
FEXM_B
FEXM_/A
FEXM_A
INT24V2
1
INT24V2
5
P-GND
7
/FUM_CK
9
/FUM_D
11
FUM_LD
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN14
13
15
17
19
3
CN12
FUFM_F
1
FUFM_F_LD
3
5
P-GND
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN10
14
/FUFM_CNT
B40B-PNDZS-1
28
D-GND
30
FEXD
32
5VNPD
D-GND(/FUFM_CNT)
34
B40B-PNDZS-1
10
CN13
2
FUFM_R
4
FUFM_R_LD
6
P-GND
DR-PCU PWB
E. Fusing drive unit section (5/31)
BL
PL
GY
5VNPD
1
LB
POD2
2
GY
D-GND
3
LG248NL1 2-179228-3
Paper exit detection BL
5VNPD
1
TFD
2
D-GND
3
LG248NL1
179228-3
Main unit paper exit

full detection
Paper exit
motor
BR
PL
GY
PK
BR
PL
GY
LB
1
4
6
3
2
5
PK
BR
PL
LB
RD
RD
Temperature sensor CN1

PO_TMP
3
D-GND
4
S4B-PH-K-S
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
R
POM_A
POM_/A
POM_/B
POM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3
SM-4p
POFM
/POFM_CNT1
P-GND
POFM_F_LD
SM-4p
POFM
/POFM_CNT2
P-GND
POFM_U_LD
SM-4p
BR
GY
(Paper exit UN harness CD)
DF11-4DP-SP1
DF11-8DP-SP2
(Paper exit UN harness CD)
3
1
2
4
POFM
POFM
POFM
POFM
Paper exit
cooling fan
POFM_U (60)
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
4
P
4
8
6
2
1
3
5
7
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PK
BR
PL
LB
RD
RD
BL
LB
GY
BR
BL
PL
PL
BR
PL
GY
LB
PK
6
8
10
12
14
16
17
2
4
18
13
15
11
P
1
3
5
7
9
POM_A
POM_/A
POM_/B
POM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
PO_TMP
5VNPD
TFD
/POFM_CNT2
DF1B-18p
POFM
/POFM_CNT1
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
6
8
10
12
14
16
17
2
4
18
13
15
11
S
1
3
5
7
9
DF11-4DP-SP1
BL
LB
GY
BR
5VNPD
TFD
6
5VNPD
8
POD2
10
D-GND
12
PO-TMP
B40B-PNDZS-1
2
4
POFM
/POFM_CNT1
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
POFM_LD3
/POFM_CNT2
(Upper main harness CD) CN4

PK
PK
1
POM_A
BR
BR
2
POM_/A
PL
PL
3
POM_/B
LB
LB
4
POM_B
RD
RD
5
INT24V1
RD
RD
6
INT24V1
B12B-PASK-1
BL
LB
GY
BR

BL
BL
PL
PL
p,4

CN15
BR
BR
1
PL
PL
3
GY
GY
5
LB
LB
7
PK
PK
9
11
PL
PL
13
3
2
1
CNT2
CNT2
CNT2
Paper exit
cooling fan
POFM_F (80)
DRIVER PWB
DR-PCU PWB
F. Paper exit unit section (6/31)
3
2
1
Temperature/humidity
5VN
1
HUD_M
2
D-GND
3
TH_M
4
ZHR-4
BL
BR
GY
PK
Extension
PL
MTOP2
1
GY
D-GND
2
BL
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
5VN
MPWS
D-GND
BL
PK
GY
BL
PK
GY
7
8
9
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H
BR
4
MPLD1
6
GY
5
D-GND
5
BL
6
5VNPD(LED)
4
BR
GY
BL
Reduction
LB
MTOP1
1
GY
D-GND
2
BL
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
Width detection
5VN
3
MPWS
2
D-GND
1
PHNR-3
Length detection 1
MPLD1
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
GY
GY
GY
BL
BR
GY
PK
BL
LB
BL
PL
BL
PK
BL
BR
: common)
DF11-8DP-SP1
5VNPD(LED)
10
10
9
11
11
5VN
4
12
HUD_M
3
13
D-GND
2
14
TH_M
1
MTOP1
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP2
5VN
MPWS
GY
GY
GY
LB
GY
BL
PL
GY
BL
PK
GY
BL
PK
GY
BL
BL
BR
GY
PK
BL
LB
BL
PL
BL
PK
BL
(Right door harness CD)

LB
14
BL
13
BR
12
5VNPD(LED)
HPLD2
5VLED8
MPLD1
5
6
1
2
3
8
APPD2
1
7
D-GND
2
6
5VNPD(LED)
3
3
APPD1
1
2
D-GND
2
1
5VNPD(LED)
3
: common) (Manual feed tray harness
(ADU transport 2 relay harness CD)
(ADU transport 1 relay harness: common)

LB
GY
BL
ADU open/close detection

PL
DSW_ADU
1
GY
D-GND
2
BL
5VN(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
(Manual feed tray harness
ADU transport detection 2

APPD2
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
ADU transport detection 1

APPD1
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
Right paper exit detection

POD3
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
Right full detection

TFD-R
1
D-GND
2
5VN(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
RD
1
24V3
2
PL
2
/ADUGS
1
(Right paper exit UN harness CD)
PL
6
TFD-R
1
GY
5
D-GND
2
BL
4
5VN(LED)
3
PK
3
POD3
4
GY
2
D-GND
5
BL
1
5VNPD(LED)
6
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
APPD1
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
S16B-PHDSS-B
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VN(LED)
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP1
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP2
5VN
MPWS
5VNPD(LED)
HPLD2
5VLED8
MPLD1
28
5VN
29
HUD_M
14
D-GND
31
TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
27
25
24
22
19
20
18
13
15
16
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
6
5VNPD(LED)
10
11
12
7
8
9
CN2
1
TFD-R
2
D-GND
3
5VN(LED)
4
POD3
5
D-GND
6
5VNPD(LED)
MPFD
10
8
9
CN3(2/2)
7
D-GND
5VN(LED)
MPED
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
ADUD3
9
POD3
10
MPFD
11
5VNPD
16
HWPD
13
TH_M
14
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
GY
GY
GY
GY
PK
PK
BL
PL
LB
LB
BL
GY
PK
PL
PL
LB
LB
BR
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PK
PK
BL
PL
LB
LB
RD
PL
GY
BL
GY
PK
PL
PL
LB
LB
BR
21
6
32
7
23
8
27
15
31
30
14
P
9
25
40
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
P-GND
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
QR/P4 40PIN
24V3
/ADUGS
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
21
6
32
7
23
8
27
15
31
30
14
S
9
25
40
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
2
3
5
4
7
6
4
5
PK
PL
RD
GY
BL
Manual paper
feed gate
solenoid
MPFD
/MPGS
24V3
D-GND
5VN(LED)
RD
(Multi upper UN harness: common)
PL
RD
8
24V3
1
PL
7
/MPFS
2
PL
6
MPED
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
P
1
2
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
24V3
/ADUGS
Manual paper
feed take-up
solenoid
PCU PWB
34
24V3
36
/MPGS
38
/MPFS
40
24V3
B40B-PNDZS-1
22
24
26
28
30
32
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
CN15
21
23
P
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
R
RD
1
PL
2
(Multi lower UN harness: common)
Manual paper feed paper entry detection

PK
MPFD
1
GY
D-GND
2
BL
5VN(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
Manual paper feed paper empty detection

1
MPED
2
D-GND
3
5VN(LED)
GP1S73
179228-3
PL
PL
4
/MPGS
2
RD
RD
5
24V3
1
BL
BL
1
5VN(LED)
5
GY
GY
2
D-GND
4
PK
PK
3
MPFD
3
PL
GY
BL
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
RD
PL
PK
RD
PK
PK
BL
PL
LB
LB

RD
PL
GY
BL
GY
PK
PL
PL
LB
LB
BR
R
1
2
RD
PL
PK
RD
PK
PK
BL
PL
LB
LB
RD
PL
GY
BL
GY
PK
PL
PL
LB
LB
BR
DF11-6DP-SP2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VN(LED)
5VN(LED)
5VN(LED)
ADU gate
solenoid
G. Right door section 1/2 (7/31)
ADMH_A
4
ADMH_A/
1
ADMH_B/
3
ADMH_B
6
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
S6B-PH-SM3
ADUH motor
ADML_A
4
ADML_A/
1
ADML_B/
3
ADML_B
6
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
S6B-PH-SM3
ADUL motor
2TC separation detection 1

THPS
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
2TC separation motor

P-GND
1
/TURM_A
2
B2P-PH-K-S
PL
BR
PK
LB
RD
RD
PL
BR
PK
LB
RD
RD
GY
PL
BR
GY
BL
5
P-GND
1
4
/TURM_A
2
3
THPS
3
2
D-GND
4
1
5VNPD(LED)
5
(2TC separation harness CD)

5
P-GND
4
4
/TURM_A
5
THPS
6
3
2
D-GND
7
1
5VNPD(LED)
8
(ADU transport 2 relay harness CD)

GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
PL
BR
PK
LB
RD
RD
PL
BR
PK
LB
RD
RD
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
33
36
38
35
34
37
P
ADMH_A
ADMH_A/
ADMH_B/
ADMH_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
QR/P4 40PIN
ADML_A
ADML_A/
ADML_B/
ADML_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
5VN(LED)
39
5
12
22
11
10
16
P-GND
/TURM_A
THPS
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
THPS2
24
26
27
28
29
13
33
36
38
35
34
37
S
5
12
22
11
10
16
39
24
26
27
28
29
13

PK
PK
LB
LB
PL
PL
BR
BR
RD
RD
RD
RD
ADML_A
ADML_A/
ADML_B/
ADML_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
6
ADMH_A
5
ADMH_A/
4
ADMH_B/
ADMH_B
3
2
INT24V1
1
INT24V1
B12B-PASK-1

PK
PK
12
LB
LB
11
PL
PL
10
BR
BR
9
RD
RD
8
RD
RD
7

4
P-GND
6
/TURM_A
8
THPS
10
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
12
14
THPS2
16
D-GND
18
5VNPD(LED)
B30B-PNDZS-1
DRIVER
PWB
PCU
PWB
H. Right door section 2/2 (8/31)
PTC_UN
SRA-21T-3
RD
RD
RD
RD
SRA-21T-4
WH
(PTC-K harness CD)

SRA-21T-4
RD
Transfer belt un
(TC relay harness Y CD)
(TC relay harness C CD)
(TC relay harness C CD)
(TC relay harness BK CD)
SRA-21T-3
SPS-01T-187
TC-K
SPS-01T-187
TC-C
SPS-01T-187
TC-M
SPS-01T-187
TC-Y
CASE
PS250(WH)
PS250(BK)
PTC
SPS-01T-187
TC-K
SPS-01T-187
TC-C
SPS-01T-187
TC-M
SPS-01T-187
TC-Y
MC-C
MC-M
MC-M
MC-Y
MC-Y
2-TC
CLR
PS-187
PS-187
PS-187
PS-187
PS-187
PS187(BL)
PS187(RD)
Drive UN_BK
SRA-21T-3
BS-K
SRA-21T-3
MC-K
SRA-21T-3
GB-K
Drive UN_CL
PS-187(YL)
1TC-Y
PS-187(RD)
1TC-M
PS-187(BL)
1TC-C
FPS-187(BK)
1TC-K
(Spring)
RD
(Spring)
(2nd TC harness CD)
(2nd TC harness CD)
(MC relay harness: common)
(MC relay harness: BS-Y

common)
RD
(Spring)
GB-M
(MC relay harness:
BS-M
common)
(Spring)
(Spring)
GB-Y
(Spring)

WH
RD
RD
RD
RD
BS-K
PS-250(WH)
MC-K
VHR-2
GB-K
VHR-3
FPS-187(YL)
1TC-Y
FPS-187(RD)
1TC-M
FPS-187(BL)
1TC-C
FPS-187(BK)
1TC-K
BS-C
WH
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
GB-C
(MC-K harness CD)
(MC-K harness CD)
(MC-K harness CD)
(1st TC harness CD)
(1st TC harness CD)
(1st TC harness CD)
(1st TC harness CD)
1
VHR-2
PS187(WH)
PTC
1
VHR-2
PS187(WH)
2-TC
PS-187(WH)
MC-CMY
BS-Y
GB-Y
BS-M
GB-M
BS-C
GB-C
PTC PWB
CASE
2nd TC PWB
CLR
NEW MC PWB
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/PTC_DATA#
3
/PTC_CLK#
4
/PTC_LD#
5
HV_REM
6
PTC_ERR
7
B07B-PASK
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/TC_DATA#
3
/TC_CLK#
4
/TC_LD#
5
/HV_REM#
6
B06B-PASK
CN1
24V3
3
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
P-GND
4
/HV_DATA#
5
/HV_CLK#
6
/HV_LD1#
7
HV_REM#
8
B08B-PASK
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/HV_DATA#
3
/HV_CLK#
4
/HV_LD1#
5
HV_REM#
6
B06B-PASK
NEW 1st TC PWB
RD
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
RD
GY
RD
GY
PK
LB
PL
BR
RD
GY
PK
BR
LB
PL
RD
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY
RD
GY
PK
LB
PL
BR
RD
GY
PK
BR
LB
PL
CN19
INT24V2
8
P-GND
10
/PTC_DATA#
7
/PTC_CLK#
9
/PTC_LD#
11
13
HV_REM
PTC_ERR
15
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN5
1
INT24V2
P-GND
3
/TC_DATA#
5
/TC_CLK#
7
/TC_LD#
6
8
/HV_REM#
B34B-PNDZS-1
CN6
10
24V3
2
P-GND
1
INT24V2
3
P-GND
5
/HV_DATA
7
/HV_CLK
6
/HV_LD1
8
HV_REM#
B40B-PNDZS-1
DR-PCU PWB
CN10
INT24V2
2
P-GND
4
/1TC_DATA#
6
/1TC_CLK#
8
/1TC_LD1#
10
12
HV_REM#
B40B-PNDZS-1
I. High voltage section (9/31)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CRUM_K
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K_CK#
CRM_K_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_K2
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K2_CK#
CRM_K2_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_C
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_C_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_M
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_M_DT#
TSR-04V-K
CRUM_Y
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_Y_CK#
CRM_Y_DT#
TSR-04V-K
Toner motor Y
Toner motor C
GY
BL
PK
BR
(CRUMelay harness CD)
GY
BL
PK
BR
GY
BL
PK
BR
GY
BL
PK
BR
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
(CRUM relay harness CD)

R
1
2
3
4
GY
BL
PK
BR
Toner motor M
p,10
SM4P-N
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_Y_CK#
CRM_Y_DT#
SM4P-N
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_M_DT#
SM4P-N
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_C_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
SM4P-N
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K2_CK#
CRM_K2_DT#
SM4P-N
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K_CK#
CRM_K_DT#
BR
PL
BR
PL
DF11-6DP-SP1(a)
PL
BR
PK
LB
PL
BR
PK
LB
GY
BL
PK
LB
LB
PK
LB
PK
(TM-CRUM harness CD)
BR
PL
BR
PL
BR
PL
LB
PK
DF11-8DP-SP1(b)
GY
BL
PL
BR
GY
BL
PK
LB
GY
BL
PL
BR
GY
BL
PK
LB
GY
BL
PK
LB
LB
PK
BR
PL
DF11-4DP-SP1(c)
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
Toner motor K2
SM2P-N
TM_K1a
TM_K1b
SM2P-N
TM_K2a
TM_K2b
SM2P-N
TM_Ca
TM_Cb
SM2P-N
TM_Ma
TM_Mb
SM2P-N
TM_Ya
TM_Yb
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1

5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
5V3CR
Toner motor K1
21
22
18
20
14
16
10
12
2
4
6
8
17
19
13
15
9
11
5
7
P
1
3
CRM_Y_CK#
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_K2_CK#
CRM_K2_DT#
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K_CK#
CRM_K_DT#
TM_Ya
TM_Yb
TM_Ma
TM_Mb
TM_Ca
TM_Cb
TM_K2a
TM_K2b
DF1B-34DE
TM_K1a
TM_K1b
21
22
18
20
14
16
10
12
2
4
6
8
17
19
13
15
9
11
5
7
S
1
3
PL
BR
PK
LB
PL
BR
PK
LB
GY
BL
PK
LB
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
PL
BR
PK
LB
PL
BR
PK
LB
GY
BL
PK
LB
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
36
34
38
37
32
30
40
39
35
29
33
31
24
26
20
22
27
28
23
25
CN10
19
21
CRM_Y_CK#
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_K2_CK#
CRM_K2_DT#
D-GND
5V3_CRUM
CRM_K_CK#
CRM_K_DT#
TM_Ya
TM_Yb
TM_Ma
TM_Mb
TM_Ca
TM_Cb
TM_K2a
TM_K2b
TM_K1a
TM_K1b
PCU PWB
J. Toner bottle section (10/31)
5VNPD
1
HTCS_Y
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y
5VNPD
1
HTCS_M
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
5VNPD
1
HTCS_C
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
Hopper remaining quantity sensor C
Hopper motor Y
Hopper motor C
BL
PL
GY
BL
PL
GY
BL
PL
GY
(HTCS relay harness CD)
Hopper motor M
R
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_Y
D-GND
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_M
D-GND
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_C
D-GND
SM3P-B
HTM_K1a
HTM_K1b
SM3P-B
HTM_Ca
HTM_Cb
SM3P-B
HTM_Ma
HTM_Mb
SM3P-B
HTM_Ya
HTM_Yb
P
1
2
3
P
1
2
3
P
1
2
3
P
1
3
P
1
3
P
1
3
P
1
3
BL
LB
GY
BL
PL
GY
BL
BR
GY
BR
PL
DF11-4DP-SP1(d)
DF11-4DP-SP1(c)
p,9
LB
PL
BL
BR
BR
PL
LB
PK
LB
PK
BR
PL
BR
PL
BR
PL
BR
PL
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
R
1
3
R
1
3
R
1
3
R
1
3
4
3
2
1

5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
Hopper motor K1
34
32
28
30
24
26
31
33
27
29
P
23
25
HTCS_Y
HTCS_M
5VNPD
HTCS_C
HTM_Ya
HTM_Yb
HTM_Ma
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ca
HTM_Cb
DF1B-34DE
HTM_K1a
HTM_K1b
34
32
28
30
24
26
31
33
27
29
S
23
25
LB
PL
BL
BR
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
BR
PL
LB
PL
BL
BR
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
BR
PL
HTM_Ma
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ca
HTM_Cb
HTM_K1a
HTM_K1b
HTCS_M
5VNPD
HTCS_C
HTCS_Y
18
B40B-PNDZS-1
16
CN10
15
17
2
HTM_Ya
4
HTM_Yb
B12B-PNDZS-1
9
11
5
7
CN8
1
3
PCU PWB
DRIVER PWB
K. Hopper section (11/31)
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_K_B
DM_K_B/
DM_K_A/
DM_K_A
B6B-PH-K-S
INT24V1
INT24V1
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
BTM_A
B6B-XH
PTC cleaner
motor
Charger
cleaner
motor
Phase detection BK
D-GND
1
DHPD_K
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71 PHR-3
Drive un BK
1
2
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
5
4
6
3
1
GY
PK
BL
D-GND
1
5VN
2
/DVKM_D
3
/DVKM_CK
4
DVKM_LD
5
DVKM_GAIN
6
DVKM_CW/CCW
7
B07B-PASK
NEW developing BK
24V4
P-GND
VH-2P
DM_K
Belt M
Belt separation
clutch (normal)
SM-2pin
CCM_a
CCM_b
SM-2pin
PTCM_a
PTCM_b
P
1
2
P
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
Belt separation
clutch (reverse)
LB
PK
LB
PK
RD
BR
RD
PL
1
24V3
2
2
/BLTCL
1
1
24V3
2
2
/BLTCL_R
1
LB
PK
RD
PL
RD
BR
GY
PK
BL
GY
BL
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
GY
BL
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
GY
(Drive UN-BK harness CD)
RD
GY
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
34
31
26
28
22
24
18
20
12
14
16
29
2
4
6
8
10
30
25
27
13
15
17
19
21
23
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
PTCM_a
PTCM_b
CCM_a
CCM_b
24V3
/BLTCL_R
24V3
/BLTCL
D-GND
DHPD_K
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
/DVKM_D
/DVKM_CK
DVKM_LD
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_CW/CCW
24V4
P-GND
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_K_B
DM_K_B/
DM_K_A/
DM_K_A
DF1B-34DE
INT24V1
INT24V1
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
BTM_A
34
31
26
28
22
24
18
20
12
14
16
29
2
4
6
8
10
30
25
27
13
15
17
19
21
23
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
LB
PK
RD
PL
RD
BR
GY
PK
BL
GY
BL
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
RD
GY
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
LB
PK
RD
PL
RD
BR
GY
PK
BL
GY
BL
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
RD
GY
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
24V3
/BLTCL_R
24V3
/BLTCL
D-GND
DHPD_K
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
/DVKM_D
/DVKM_CK
DVKM_LD
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_CW/CCW
24V4
P-GND
CN13
37
D-GND
40
BLT_HP
39
5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN18
25
PTCM_A
27
PTCM_B
B30B-PNDZS-1
33
CCM_a
35
CCM_b
B40B-PNDZS-1
29
31
25
27
19
21
23
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
CN13
1
3
CN5
1
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
3
DM_K_B
4
DM_K_B/
5
DM_K_A/
6
DM_K_A
B13B-PASK-1
CN4
12
INT24V1
11
INT24V1
10
BTM_B
9
BTM_B/
8
BTM_A/
7
BTM_A
B12B-PASK-1
PCU PWB
DRIVER
PWB
L. Process drive K unit section (12/31)
BR
GY
BL
Drive un CL
TBLTC
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73P
179228-3
1
2
3
SM6
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_M_B
DM_M_B/
DM_M_A/
DM_M_A
SM6
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_Y_B
DM_Y_B/
DM_Y_A/
DM_Y_A
R
6
5
3
4
1
2
R
6
5
3
4
1
2
BR
3
TBLTC
GY
2
D-GND
BL
1
5VNPD(LED)
Phase detection CL2(M)

GY
D-GND
1
BR
DHPD_M
2
BL
5VNPD(LED)
3
PHR-3
DM_Y
WH
BK
BL
OR
YL
RD
WH
BK
BL
OR
YL
RD
Transfer separation sensor CL (TC belt separation harness CL CD)
Phase detection CL3(Y)

GY
D-GND
1
PL
DHPD_Y
2
BL
5VNPD(LED)
3
PHR-3
Phase detection CL1(C)

GY
D-GND
1
PK
DHPD_C
2
BL
5VNPD(LED)
3
PHR-3
DM_M
DM_C
SM6
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_C_B
DM_C_B/
DM_C_A/
DM_C_A
R
6
5
3
4
1
2
P
6
5
3
4
1
2
P
6
5
3
4
1
2
P
6
5
3
4
1
2
DV motor CL
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/DVCM_CK
4
/DVCM_D
5
DVCM_LD
6
N.C
3
N.C
7
B7P-PH-K-S
DF11-6DP-SP1(a)
BR
PL
BR
GY
PK
BL
RD
GY
BR
PL
LB
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
GY
BR
PL
LB
(Drive UN-CL harness CD)
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
WH
BK
BL
OR
YL
RD
5VNPD(LED)
18
18
34
32
16
30
14
24
26
28
4
6
8
10
12
25
27
29
31
33
2
13
15
17
19
21
23
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
BL
BR
PL
BL
BR
BL
GY
PK
BL
RD
GY
BR
PL
LB
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
DMCFM
CL drive front sirocco fan
TBLTC
DHPD_Y
5VNPD(LED)
DHPD_M
5VNPD(LED)
D-GND
DHPD_C
5VNPD(LED)
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVCM_CK
/DVCM_D
DVCM_LD
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_Y_B
DM_Y_B/
DM_Y_A/
DM_Y_A
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_M_B
DM_M_B/
DM_M_A/
DM_M_A
DF1B-34DE
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_C_B
DM_C_B/
DM_C_A/
DM_C_A
34
32
16
30
14
24
26
28
4
6
8
10
12
25
27
29
31
33
2
13
15
17
19
21
23
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
P
1
2
3
4
SM4P
DMCFM
/DMCFFM_CNT
P-GND
DMCFM_LD
R
1
2
3
4
BL
BL
BL
BR
PL
BR
GY
PK
BL
RD
GY
BR
PL
LB
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK

RD
BR
GY
LB
DHPD_Y
DHPD_M
D-GND
DHPD_C
5VNPD(LED)
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVCM_CK
/DVCM_D
DVCM_LD
CN15
15
CFM_PTC
17
CFM_PTC_CNT
19
P-GND
20
CFM_PTC_LD
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN18
7
5VNPD(LED)
9
5VNPD(LED)
11
5VNPD(LED)
B30B-PNDZS-1
18
TBLTC
B30B-PNDZS-1
16
14
3
12
5
CN9
2
4
6
8
10
7
INT24V1
8
INT24V1
9
DM_Y_B
10
DM_Y_B/
11
DM_Y_A/
12
DM_Y_A
B14B-PASK-1
CN5
7
INT24V1
8
INT24V1
9
DM_C_B
10
DM_C_B/
11
DM_C_A/
12
DM_C_A
B13B-PASK-1
CN6
1
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
3
DM_M_B
4
DM_M_B/
5
DM_M_A/
6
DM_M_A
PCU PWB
DRIVER PWB
M. Process drive CL unit section (13/31)
1
3
6
4
2
5
24V3
/LPFC
1
2
PS drive un
24V3
/MPUC
2
1
2
1
RD
BR
RD
PL
RD
PL
RD
BR
RD
GY
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
RD
BR
RD
1
24V3
2
BR
2
/RRC
1
(Drive UN-PS harness CD)
1
2
RD
GY
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
PS motor
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/RRM_CK
4
/RRM_D
5
RRM_LD
6
N.C
3
B6P-PH-K-S
PS clutch
PS front motor
PFM_A
4
PFM_A/
1
PFM_B/
3
PFM_B
6
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
B6P-PH-K-S
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
B6B-XH
LCC transport motor
14
16
10
12
13
15
17
2
4
6
8
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
24V3
/LPFC
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
/RRC
INT24V2
P-GND
/RRM_CK
/RRM_D
RRM_LD
DF1B-18DE
PFM_A
PFM_A/
PFM_B/
PFM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
14
16
10
12
13
15
17
2
4
6
8
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
RD
PL
RD
BR
RD
BR
RD
GY
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
(Drive UN-tandem harness CD)

BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
S
17
19
21
23
25
27
P
17
19
21
23
25
27
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
DF1B-28DE
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
RD
PL
RD
BR
RD
BR
RD
GY
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
RD
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
/RRC
INT24V2
P-GND
/RRM_CK
/RRM_D
RRM_LD
22
24V3
24
/LPFC
B30B-PNDZS-1
18
20
CN14
8
10
2
4
12
14
16
CN9
PFM_A
6
5
PFM_A/
PFM_B/
4
3
PFM_B
INT24V1
2
1
INT24V1
B7B-PASK-1
CN1
1
LCCM_A
2
LCCM_A/
3
LCCM_B/
4
LCCM_B
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
B6B-PASK-1
PCU PWB
DRIVER PWB
N. PS drive unit section (14/31)
Stirring motor
Intermediate hopper
Intermediate
hopper motor
R
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
4
PK
PHTM2_B
PHTM2_A
PHTM1_A
PHTM1_B
DVK_CH
DVK_CH_R
#110
(DVK_BS harness CD)
SRA-01T-3.2
7
DVK_FM
8
DVK_FM_LD
6
D-GND
SM9B-GHS-TB
2
3
(DVK motor harness CD)

SM-3pin
P
LB
PHTM_2a
1
NC
PHTM_2b
CN2
2
3
1
9
(DVK motor harness CD)

SM-4pin
P
LB
PHTM_1a
1
PK
PHTM_1b
2
BR
DVK_CH
3
GY
DVK_CH_R
4
P
1
2
3
4
5
GY
SRA-01T-3.2
#110 SRA-01T-3.2
F.G.
DVK Drive PWB
CN1
DVK_CH
1
PHTM_Ka
2
PHTM_Kb
3
FPCL1
4
FPCL2
5
5VNPD
6
24V3
7
D-GND
8
VFM_R
9
DVK_FM_LD
10
D-GND
11
DVK_CH_R
12
SM12B-GHS-TB
SM-5pin
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
HTCS_CH
HTCS_CH
(DVK_BS harness CD)
R
1
2
3
4
5
GY
PK
PK
LB
PK
PK
BR
BL
RD
GY
(DVK harness CD-N)

BL
PL
GY
PK
PK
GY
PK
LB
PK
PK
BR
BL
BL
PL
GY
PK
RD
PL
GY
LB
15
P
4
9
10
14
13
12
1
2
3
11
5
6
7
8
15
S
4
9
10
14
13
12
1
2
3
11
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
S
GY
GY
LB
PK
PK
BR
BL
BL
PL
GY
LB
RD
PL
GY
LB
GY
PL
RD
PK
RD
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-4DP-SP1
DF11-4DP-SP1
PL
BL
(DVK relay harness CD)

GY
D-GND
1
PL
CCMD
2
BL
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
D-GND
QR/P8-20P
D-GND
PHTM_Ka
PHTM_Kb
FPCL1
FPCL2
5VN
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
DVK_CH
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_K
D-GND
CCHP
5VNPD
QR/P8-8P
8
7
6
5
P
3
4
2
Drive UN-BK
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
GND
GND
Intermediate hopper
toner concentration
sensor
(DVK harness CD-N)
DL_K#
24V_DL
3
4
2
4
3
2
1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
RD
PL
GY
LB
PL
RD
GY
PK
(DL harness CD)

RD
4
3
2
1

GND
GND
GND
GND
DV-K un
24V3
2
TCS_K
3
D-GND
4
TSG_K
1
51021-0400

D-GND
1
CCHP
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
DL_K#
S3B-PH-K-S
DL-PWB
24V
Process K un
D-GND
PHTM_Ka
PHTM_Kb
FPCL1
FPCL2
5VN
D-GND
16
20
22
21
2
4
19
CCMD
5VNPD
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
DVK_CH
10
12
14
18
6
8
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_K
D-GND
CCHP
5VNPD
DL_K#
DF1B-22DE
24V_DL
11
13
15
17
5
7
9
S
1
6
8
19
16
20
22
21
2
4
10
12
14
18
11
13
15
17
5
7
9
BL
LB
GY
PL
GY
PK
BR
BL
GY
BL
LB
GY
PL
GY
PK
BR
PK
BR
BL
GY
PK
BR
RD
PL
GY
LB
GY
PL
BL
BR
RD
PL
GY
LB
GY
PL
BL
BR

P
RD
RD
1
FPCL1
FPCL2
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
DVK_CH
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_K
D-GND
CCHP
5VNPD
DL_K#
24V_DL
DRIVER PWB
CN8
6
PHTM_Ka
8
PHTM_Kb
B12B-PNDZS-1
CN18
5
D-GND
3
CCP_ROT
1
5VNPD
B30B-PNDZS-1
20
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
22
24
26
25
27
29
30
17
19
21
23
11
13
15
CN9
7
PCU PWB
O. DV and DL K, C section (15/31)
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
5
6
7
8
RD
PL
GY
BR
DL_M#
53254-0310
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DV-Y un
RD
PL
GY
BR
PK
D-GND
DVTYP_M
5
6
7
8
8
7
5
6
10
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
DL_C#
3
4
6
5
To P4
1
2
3
4
P
OZONE FAN1
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
4
3
2
1
8
7
5
6
10
5VN
D-GND
DVTYP_M
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
DL_M#
7
8
9
10
3
4
6
5
RD
PL
GY
BR
PK
GY
P
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
8
7
5
6
10
SM4P
OZFM1
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
OZFM_LD1
5VN
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
DL_Y#
R
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
3
4
6
5
(DV relay harness: common)

PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
GY
LB
PK
BL
RD
PL
GY
BR
PK
GY
1
LB
2
PK
3
BL
5VN
4
QR/P8-8P
S
WH
To P4
BS-C
(Spring)
SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110
1
2
3
4
P
(DV harness CD)

5
24V3
6
TCS_M
7
D-GND
8
TSG_M
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
3
5VN
4
QR/P8-8P
S
WH
BS-C
(Spring)
DV-M un
SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110
DL-Y
D-GND
1
2
DL_Y#
3
53254-0310
(DV harness CD)
RD
24V3
2
5
24V3
5
PL
TCS_Y
3
6
TCS_Y
6
GY
D-GND
4
7
D-GND
7
BR
TSG_Y
1
8
TSG_Y
8
51021-0400

24V3
2
TCS_M
3
D-GND
4
TSG_M
1
51021-0400
DV-C un
RD
PL
GY
BR
(DV harness CD)

5
6
7
8
(Process duct harness CD)
BL
BL
RD
BR
GY
LB
GY
LB
PK
BL
RD
BR
GY
PL
PK
GY
BL
GY
PL
RD
PK
GY
BR
LB
DF11-8DP-SP1
RD
BR
GY
LB
BL
LB
PL
RD
BR
PK
GY
BL
PL
BR
PK
LB
GY
GY
BR
GY
BR
GY
PK
RD
LB
PL
GY
RD
LB
GY
PK
PL
(DV relay harness: common)

GY
GY
9
D-GND
2
GY
1
4
D-GND
7
LB
3
DVTYP_C
8
2
PK
2
9
3
BL
5VN
4
1
5VN
10
QR/P8-8P
S
WH
BS-C
(Spring)
To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 (BIAS harness A/B: common) SPS-01T-110 (DV relay harness: common)
DL-M
GY
D-GND
1
9
D-GND
2

24V3
2
TCS_C
3
D-GND
4
TSG_C
1
51021-0400
DL_C#
53254-0310
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DL-C
D-GND
20
22
24
26
18
16
14
10
12
OZFM1
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
OZFM_LD1
5VN
DVTYP_Y
TSG_Y
24V3
TCS_Y
DL_Y#
D-GND
5VN
DVTYP_M
TSG_M
24V3
TCS_M
21
23
25
DL_M#
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TSG_C
24V3
TCS_C
DL_C#
DF1B-26DE
D-GND
19
17
15
11
13
5
7
S
1
20
22
24
26
18
16
14
10
12
25
21
23
19
17
15
11
13
5
7
P
1
BR
PL
GY
LB
BL
PK
LB
RD
PL
BR
GY
BL
PK
LB
PL
PK
GY
BL
GY
PK
LB
RD
PL
LB
GY
BR
PL
GY
LB
BL
PK
LB
RD
PL
BR
GY
BL
PK
LB
PL
PK

GY
BL
GY
PK
LB
RD
PL
LB

GY
5VN
DVTYP_Y
TSG_Y
24V3
TCS_Y
DL_Y#
D-GND
5VN
DVTYP_M
TSG_M
24V3
TCS_M
DL_M#
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TSG_C
24V3
TCS_C
DL_C#
D-GND
20
OZFM1
22
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
24
OZFM_LD1
26
B30B-PNDZS-1
18
16
14
10
12
25
21
23
19
17
15
11
13
5
7
CN7
1
PCU PWB
P. DV and DL M, Y section (16/31)
Process
control
sensor UN
PS UN
Process control
shutter solenoid
Resist sensor R
5VNPD
4
3
D-GND
REG_R
2
1
REG_R_LED#
PHR-4
Process control sensor

5VNPD
5
D-GND
4
PCS_K
3
PCS_CL
2
PCS_LED#
1
PHR-5
Resist sensor F
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
REG_F
2
REG_F_LED#
1
PHR-4
BL
GY
BR
PK
BL
GY
LB
PL
PK
BL
GY
LB
PK
PS clutch 2
PS sensor (PPD2)
BL
5VNPD
1
BR
PPD2
2
GY
D-GND
3
GP2A200L
179228-3
PS front sensor (PPD1)

GY
D-GND
2
PL
PPD1
3
BL
5VNPD(LED)
1
QSW-Z0538
PHR-3
2
1
R
2
1
P
BR
RD
BL
GY
BR
PK
BL
GY
LB
PL
PK
BL
GY
LB
PK
2
1
14
15
10
11
12
13
5
6
7
8
9
R
1
2
3
4
Process control sensor UN
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
(Process control sensor UN harness CD)
PS UN
1
2
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/RRC2
24V
14
15
16
17
18
12V
DMS
DMS_LED
10
11
12
13
5
6
7
8
9
P
1
2
3
4
/PCSS
24V3
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_R
REG_R_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
SM18P
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_F
REG_F_LED#
(PS UN harness CD)
BR
RD
PL
BR
LB
PL
BR
LB
BL
GY
BR
PK
BL
GY
LB
PL
PK
BL
GY
LB
PK
/RRC2
24V3
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
PK
RD
BL
GY
PL
LB
BL
GY
LB
PK
BR
BL
GY
BR
PL
7
8
3
2
1
PHNR-8-H
BU08P-TR-P-H
6
D-GND
PPD1
5
4
5VNPD(LED)
BR
RD
BL
BR
GY
GY
PL
BL
25
27
29
28
30
20
22
24
26
10
12
14
16
18
P
2
4
6
8
2
1
6
7
8
3
4
5
12V
DMS
DMS_LED
/PCSS
24V3
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_R
REG_R_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
DF1B-32P
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_F
REG_F_LED#
LB
RD
BL
LB
GY
GY
PK
BL
25
27
29
28
30
20
22
24
26
10
12
14
16
18
S
2
4
6
8
PL
BR
LB
PK
RD
BL
GY
PL
LB
BL
GY
LB
PK
BR
8
10
18
2
4
6
9
11
13
15
17
/PCSS
24V3
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_R
REG_R_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
PK
RD
BL
GY
PL
LB
BL
GY
LB
PK
BR

P
DF1B-18DE
BL
BL
1
5VNPD
GY
GY
3
D-GND
BR
BR
5
REG_F
PL
PL
7
REG_F_LED#
8
10
18
2
4
6
9
11
13
15
17
S
1
3
5
7
LB
RD
BL
LB
GY
GY
PK
BL
PK
RD
BL
GY
PK
BR
BL
GY
BR
PL
LB
PL
BR
LB
PK
RD
BL
GY
PK
BR
BL
GY
BR
PL
LB

BL
BL
GY
GY
LB
LB
PK
PK
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD(LED)
5VNPD
D-GND
REG_R
REG_R_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
CN18
13
12V
17
DMS
15
DMS_LED
B30B-PNDZS-1
36
/PCSS
35
24V3
B40B-PNDZS-1
29
30
31
32
23
24
25
26
27
CN8
5VNPD
19
20
D-GND
21
REG_F
22 REG_F_LED#
DR-PCU PWB
29
/RRC2
30
24V3
B30B-PNDZS-1
28
25
27
21
23
26
Q. Resist sensor and process control sensor section (17/31)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LD C PWB
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
S10B-PH-K-S
LD M PWB
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
S10B-PH-K-S
LD Y PWB
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
S10B-PH-K-S
LD BK PWB(2BEAM)
+5V_LD
1
D-GND
2
Vref_K1
3
/LDOFF
4
D-GND
5
DATA+_K1
6
7
DATA-_K1
D-GND
8
9
DATA+_K2
DATA-_K2
10
/SH_K1
11
LDERR
14
/SH_K2
12
15
LDCHK
Vref_K2
13
SM15B-GHB-TB
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
BL
GY
LB
BR
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
PL
PK
BR
LB
PK
(LSU-LD harness CD)
(LSU-LD harness CD)
(LSU-LD harness CD)
(LSU-LD harness CD)
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
GY
BL
BR
PK
WH
PK
SH
PL
LB
BR
BL
GY
LB
BR
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
PL
PK
BR
LB
PK
CN4
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
CN4
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
CN4
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
10
9
CN1
1
2
8
7
3
4
6
14
16
18
5
9
15
10
20
11
12
13
17
19
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
A
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
A
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
A
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
B20B-PNDZS-1
+5V_LD
B
D-GND
VREF_K
nENB_K
D-GND
DT_K+
DT_KD-GND
DT_K2+
DT_K2nSH_K
nLDERR_K
nSH_K2
LDCHK_K
VREF_K2
TH2_1
D-GND
+5V
nSHB_K
nSHB_K2
LSU PWB
BL
GY
PL
GY
CN2
B03B-PASK-1
24V1
1
n FANRDY
2
P-GND
3
CN8
B08B-PASK-1
6
nBREAK
nPOLY_CK
5
nPOLY_LOCK
4
nPOLY_START
3
P-GND
2
1
24V
LB
PL
PK
BR
GY
RD
CN8
B08B-PASK-1
PK
TH2_2
8
GY
D-GND
7
B07B-PASK-1
5V3
4
3
D-GND
2
n BD
1
D-GND
CN6
CN6 B07B-PASK-1
PL
TH1
6
GY
5
D-GND
(Polygon motor harness CD)
(Polygon motor harness CD)
(LSU-LD harness CD)
(LSU-LD harness CD)
LB
PL
PK
BR
GY
RD
PK
GY
BL
GY
PL
GY
PL
GY
LSU FAN
Polygon motor
1
BRAKE
B
CLOCK
2
3
LOCK
4
START/STOP
5
GND
24V
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
LSU thermistor 2
TH2
3
C
4
D-GND
S4B-PH-K-S
BD PWB(K)
1
5V3
J
2
D-GND
3
n BD
4
D-GND
B4P-PH-K-R
LSU thermistor 1
TH1
3
4
D-GND
S4B-PH-K-S
R. LSU section (internal connection) (18/31)
LSU PWB
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
N.C
N.C
S24B-PADSS-1
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
PK
WH
SH
GY
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
BR
PL
PK
LB
BR
PL
PK
LB
BL
GY
BR
GY
PL
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
PK
LB
CN5
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GY
OR
GY
BL
RD
GY
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PADSS-1
INT5V
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
n TRANS_DATA
D-GND
n RSV_DAT
LSUASIC_RST
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V3
P-GND
S6B-XA
LSU shutter
solenoid CL
INT24V2
/LSS_CL
SM2P-N
1
2
R
RD
PL
BL
GY
BR
GY
PL
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
PK
LB
GY
OR
GY
BL
RD
GY
RD
PL
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
PK
WH
SH
GY
PK
WH
SH
SH
PK
WH
BR
PL
PK
LB
BR
PL
PK
LB
The shortest communication line connection
1
2
P
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V3
P-GND
INT24V2
/LSS_CL
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
CH0_N
32
CH0_P
31
D-GND
30
D-GND
29
CH1_N
28
CH1_P
27
CH2_N
26
CH2_P
25
D-GND
24
D-GND
23
CLCLK_N
22
21
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
20
CH3_P
19
D-GND
18
17
D-GND
16
ECLK_LSU_N
15
ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
14
D-GND
13
HSYNC_LSU_P
12
HSYNC_LSU_N
11
B32B-PNDZS-1
CN6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
INT5V
2
D-GND
4
n SCK_LSU
3
D-GND
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
D-GND
8
n RSV_DAT
7
LSUASIC_RST
9
n TRANS_RST
10
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
11
12
LSUTH2
B40B-PNDZS-1
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN8
39
40
MOTHER PWB
PCU PWB
S. LSU section (external connection) (19/31)
1
2
LSU shutter
solenoid BK
1
2
P
INT24V2
/LSS_BK
SM2P-B
1
2
R
2
1
R
RD
BR
RD
PL
RD
1
24V3
2
BR
2
/T1PFC
1
Tray 1
paper feed
clutch
24V3
/T2PUS
SM2P-N
RD
1
24V3
2
PK
2
/T2PFC
1
Tray 2
paper feed
clutch
1
2
P
RD
1
24V3
2
LB
2
/TANCL
1
Tandem
transport
clutch
Tray 2 pick-up
solenoid
RD
1
24V3
2
PL
2
1
/TRC1
LB
PK
BR
GY
BL
BR
PL
RD
GY
Vertical
transport
upper clutch
D-GND
1
5VN
2
/CPFM_D
3
/CPFM_CK
4
CPFM_LD
5
CPFM_GAIN
6
CPFM_CW/CCW
7
B07B-PASK
24V4
P-GND
VH-2P
(Drive unit tandem harness CD)
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
NEW paper feed motor
24V3
/TRC1
/TANCL
/T2PFC
/T1PFC
/T2PUS
INT24V2
/LSS_BK
10
12
14
18
20
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
DF1B-28DE
24V4
P-GND
4
6
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
S
1
3
18
20
14
12
10
4
6
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
P
1
3
RD
BR
RD
BR
PK
LB
PL
BR
RD
PK
GY
BL
BR
PL
LB
PK
GY
/T1PFC
/T2PFC
/TANCL
24V3
/TRC1
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
24V4
P-GND
CN8
37
INT24V2
38
/LSS_BK
B40B-PNDZS-1
14
/T2PUS
B40B-PNDZS-1
12
10
4
6
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
CN4
1
3
DR-PCU PWB
T. Tandem drive unit section (20/31)
1
2
3
4
PAP-04V
Tray 1 paper remaining

quantity detection
D-GND
1
T1SPD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
Tray 2 paper remaining

quantity detection
D-GND
1
T2SPD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
T1S PWB
5VNPD
D-GND
T1LUD
T1PED
Tray 1 paper pass sensor 1

BL
1
5VN
LB
2
T1PPD1
GY
D-GND
3
GP2A200L
179228-3
Tray 1 paper pass sensor 2

BL
1
5VNPD
PK
T1PPD2
2
GY
D-GND
3
GP2A200L
179228-3
BL
GY
PK
BR
Tray 1
pickup solenoid
(Tandem 2 sensor harness CD)
(Tandem transport harness CD)

BL
PK
GY
BL
LB
GY
(Tandem 1 sensor harness CD)
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
R
1
2
3
4
P
1
2
SM-10P-N
5VNPD
D-GND
T1LUD
T1PED
D-GND
T2SPD
5VNPD
D-GND
T1SPD
5VNPD
SM-6P-N
5VNPD
T1PPD2
D-GND
5VN
T1PPD1
D-GND
SM-4P-N
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
SM-2PIN
24V3
/T1PUS
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
1
2
3
4
BL
GY
BR
PL
GY
LB
BL
GY
PK
BL
BL
PK
GY
BL
LB
GY
BL
GY
PK
BR
R
1
2
RD
PL
(Cassette size harness R CD)

D-GND
1
TANSET
2
5VN
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
(Paper feed drive harness CD)

P
DF1B-34DE
32
TANSET
34
5VN
S
32
34
GY
PK
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
BL
LB
PL
BL
GY
PK
BR
BR
BL
GY
PK
BR
Tray 1 lift-up motor

1
P-GND
/T1LUM
2
B2P-PH-K-S
23
25
21
T1SPD
21
24V3
/T1PUS
19
T2SPD
19
23
25
15
17
T1LUD
T1PED
11
13
5VN
T1PPD1
11
13
15
17
S
1
3
5
7
T1PPD2
DF1B-26DE
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
P
1
3
5
7
D-4(p,22)
BL
GY
PK
BR
Tray 2 lift-up motor

P-GND
1
/T2LUM
2
B2P-PH-K-S
DF11-8DP-SP1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
PAP-04V
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
T2S PWB
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
T1SPD
T2SPD
T1LUD
T1PED
5VN
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
P-GND
/T2LUM
DR-PCU PWB
CN3
32
TANSET
34
5VN
B34B-PNDZS-1
15
P-GND
17
/T1LUM
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
11
13
31
24V3
33
/T1PUS
B34B-PNDZS-1
29
27
23
25
19
21
17
CN5
9
11
13
15
U. Tandem tray section (21/31)
CS
paper feed
1
2
CS4 lift-up motor

P-GND
/C4LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
CS4 paper size detection

D-GND
2
C4SS1
3
C4SS2
4
C4SS3
5
C4SS4
6
S6P-PH-K-S
CS3 paper size detection

D-GND
2
3
C3SS1
4
C3SS2
C3SS3
5
C3SS4
6
S6P-PH-K-S
CS4 remaining quantity

1
D-GND
C4SPD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
CS3 remaining quantity

D-GND
1
2
C3SPD
3
5VNPD
GP1A71
PHR-3
1
2
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY
PL
BL
GY
BR
BL
GY
PK
GY
LB
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CS3 lift-up motor

P-GND
/C3LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
(Cassette size harness F CD)
PHNR-14-H+BU14P-TR-K-S
D-GND
14
1
2
C3SPD
13
3
5VNPD
12
C4SPD
11
4
5
5VNPD
10
6
C3SS1
9
8
7
C3SS2
8
C3SS3
7
9
6
C3SS4
10
C4SS1
5
11
4
C4SS2
3
12
C4SS3
2
C4SS4
13
14
1
(Cassette size harness R CD)
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
P
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
DF1B-26DE
D-GND
C3SPD
5VNPD
C4SPD
5VNPD
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
S
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
BR
PL
LB
PK
BR
PL
BR
PL
LB
PK
LB
PK
BR
GY
LB
GY
PK
CN5
10
D-GND
12
C3SPD
14
5VNPD
16
C4SPD
18
5VNPD
20
C3SS1
22
C3SS2
24
C3SS3
26
C3SS4
28
C4SS1
30
C4SS2
C4SS3
32
C4SS4
34
B34B-PNDZS-1
CN6
12
P-GND
14
/C3LUM
16
P-GND
18
/C4LUM
B40B-PNDZS-1
PCU PWB
V. CS3/4 drive unit section (22/31)
4CS
paper
feed
UN
3CS
paper
feed
UN
Vertical
transport
lower clutch
3
2
1
R
1
/TRC2
2
2
24V3
1
CS4 paper
feed clutch
PK
RD
2
1
E-4
RD
PK
3
2
1
P
GY
LB
BL
GY
BR
BL
GY
PL
BL
RD
PK
LB
GY
OR
GY
LB
BL
GY
BR
BL
GY
PL
BL
RD
PK
PL
GY
BL
PL
RD
E-6
1
/C4PFC
2
2
24V3
1
1
/C3PFC
2
2
24V3
1
1
2
PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H
+24V
C4PUS
GY
BR
BL
RD
PK
C3PWD
D-GND
VREF
SM3pin_N
2
1
(Paper feed UN harness CD)
CS4 lift-up detection

D-GND
1
C4LUD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
CS4
pickup solenoid
CS4 paper empty detection

GY
D-GND
1
PL
C4PED
2
BL
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
CS3 paper
feed clutch
1
2
PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H
+24V
C3PUS
(CPWS harness CD)

BR
GY
OR
CS4 paper entry detection

GY
D-GND
3
LB
C4PFD
2
BL
5VN
1
GP2A200L
179228-3
CS3 width detection

C3PWD
2
GND
1
VREF
3
Slide volume
CS3
pickup solenoid
CS3 paper empty detection

GY
D-GND
1
PL
C3PED
2
BL
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
GY
BR
BL
(Paper feed UN harness CD)
CS3 paper entry detection

GY
D-GND
3
LB
C3PFD
2
BL
5VN
1
GP2A200L
179228-3
CS3 lift-up detection

D-GND
1
C3LUD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
(LPPD harness CD)
LCC paper entry detection

LPPD
2
D-GND
3
5VN
1
GP2A200L
179228-3
BR
RD
6
5
4
12
11
10
9
8
7
3
2
1
E-5
PHNR-12-H +
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
7
C4PFD
8
5VN
9
D-GND
1
C4LUD
2
5VNPD
3
D-GND
4
C4PED
5
5VNPD
6
+24V
10
C4PUS
11
12
A-7
GY
PK
BL
GY
BR
BL
GY
PL
BL
RD
LB
GY
LB
BL
GY
PK
BL
GY
BR
BL
RD
PL
C-6
E-3
C-5
D-3
B-5
D-2
A-8
C-3
E-2
C-2
A-6
B-4
A-5
A-4
A-3
B-3
PL
1
3
LPPD
GY
2
2
D-GND
BL
3
1
5VN
6
D-GND
7
5
C3PFD
8
4
5VN
9
12
D-GND
1
11
C3LUD
2
10
5VNPD
3
9
D-GND
4
8
C3PED
5
7
5VNPD
6
3
+24V
10
2
C3PUS
11
1
12
A-2
B-2
BR
1
T1PPD
3
GY
2
D-GND
2
BL
3
5VN
1
N.C
C4PFD
C4LUD
C4PED
24V3
C4PUS
/C3PFC
/C4PFC
/TRC2
C3PUS
C3PWD
VREF
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
LPPD
D-GND
DF1B-34
T1PPD
D-GND
5VN
5VNPD
25
27
29
31
33
6
8
10
19
21
23
13
15
17
11
1
S
9
3
5
7
PK
BR
PL
RD
LB
PK
BR
PL
PL
LB
OR
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY
p,20
p,23
DF11-6DP-SP1 (E)
DF11-8DP-SP1 (D)
PK
BR
PL
RD
LB
PK
BR
PL
PL
LB
OR
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY

BR
BR
GY
GY
BL
BL
BL
BL
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
25
27
29
31
33
6
8
10
19
21
23
13
15
17
11
1
P
9
3
5
7
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
p,23
LB
PK
BR
PL
PK
BR
PL
PL
LB
OR
LB
PK
BR
PL
GY
BR
GY
BL
DF11-8DP-SP1 (C)
E-1
D-1
A-1
B-1
C-1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
6
5
4
3
2
1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
PL
GY
BL
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
(T1PPD harness CD)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
Tray 1 transport sensor

T1PPD
2
D-GND
3
5VN
1
GP2A200L
179228-3
C3PUS
C3PWD
VREF
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
LPPD
D-GND
T1PPD
D-GND
5VN
5VNPD
25
C4PFD
27
C4LUD
29
C4PED
31
24V3
33
C4PUS
6
/C3PFC
8
/C4PFC
10
/TRC2
B34B-PNDZS-1
PCU PWB
19
21
23
13
15
17
11
1
CN3
9
3
5
7
W. CS3/4 paper feed and transport section (23/31)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(LCC OPTION)
WH
LCC CONTROL
PWB
BK charger
cleaner fan
Front lower door detection

GY
D-GND
1
PL
DSW_D
2
BL
5V3
3
GP1A71L3
PHR-3
WTM (Inner lothar)

/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5V3
P-GND
INT24V2
S8B-ZR-SM4
PA-3pin
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
1
2
CN-A
NC
4
TXD_LCC
7
RXD_LCC
8
9
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
10
RES_LCC
11
NC
3
5
5VN
6
D-GND
24V4
1
P-GND
2
/TRC_LCC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
PAP
1
2
3
F.G.
GY
BR
BL
F.G.
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
PALR
1
2
3
Vertical transport
open/close detection
D-GND
1
VTOD
2
5V3
3
GP1A71L3
PHR-3
(WTM relay harness CD)

P
SM-7pin
BR
1
/WTM_LD
BL
2
/WTM_CW
PL
3
/WTM_CLK
LB
4
/WTM_D
BL
5
5V3
GY
6
P-GND
RD
7
INT24V2
1
2
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
12
5
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
P
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
F-GND
EL 12PIN
NC
NC
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
EL 15PIN
RD
LB
GY
GY
BR
BL
GY
PL
BL
(WTM harness CD)
8
10
12
15
17
19
2
4
6
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
4
12
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R
F.G.
BK
WH
Y/G
LB
PL
BR
PK
BR
GY
BL
GY
RD
GY
PK
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
D-GND
VTOD
5V3
D-GND
DSW_D
5V3
DF1B-20DE
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5V3
P-GND
INT24V2
RD
LB
GY
GY
BR
BL
GY
PL
BL
LB
BL
PL
BR
BL
GY
RD
3
1
B-8(p,22)
B-7(p,22)
D-6(p,22)
D-5(p,22)
CN3
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
B03P-VH
WH PWB
B-6(p,22)
(WH harness CD)

BK
WH
F.G.
8
10
12
15
17
19
2
4
6
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
24
26
28
22
20
4
2
P
12
14
16
18
24
26
28
22
20
4
2
S
12
14
16
18
BL
BL
BL
PL
BR
GY
RD

D-GND
2
TBBOX
3
5VNPD(LED)
1
QSW-Z0538 PHR-3

GY
D-GND
1
PK
TNFD
2
BL
5VNPD
3
GP1A71L3
PHR-3
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
DSW_D
VTOD
P-GND
INT24V2
DF1B-34DE
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
BL
RD
GY
GY
PK
LB
PL
BR
PK
BR
PK
PL
BR
GY
RD
PL
BR
LB
DSW_D
VTOD
P-GND
INT24V2
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
GND
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
CN4
3
GY
BL
CN8
2
CN6
7
CN4
5
6
5VN
B6P-VH
P-GND
B8P-VH
24V1
B7P-VH
5VN
B10P-VH
24V7
P-GND
B7P-VH
36
D-GND
38
/TRC_LCC
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN4
33
35
37
39
34
CN8
34
D-GND
5VNPD
33
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
9
D-GND
19
TBBOX
20
5VNPD(LED)
B40B-PNDZS-1
24
CFM
26
CFM_LD
P-GND
28
30
TNFD
B34B-PNDZS-1
22
20
4
2
CN3
12
14
16
18
CN5
2
CN7
8
(Lower main harness 120V_CD)

RD

LB
PK
PL
BR
PK
CJ-DC PWB
(120V series)
DR-DC PWB
(Japan / 200V series)
DR-PCU PWB
X. LCC and waste toner section (24/31)
MOTHER
PWB
CN2
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
9
n_POF_PCU
7
n_FAX_LED
14
n_DSR_PCU
8
PCU_RXD
10
D-GND
15
n_DTR_PCU
4
TXD_PCU
6
5VNPDin
11
5VNPDin
13
n_RES_MPFC_PCU
5
PCU_RES
12
n_FWP_PCU
3
D-GND
16
B16B-PNDZS-1
GY
GY
GY
BR
BR
PL
PL
GY
LB
LB
BL
BL
PK
BR
BR
GY
CN4
17
D-GND
19
D-GND
21
D-GND
23
n_POF_PCU
25
n_FAX_LED
27
n_DSR_PCU
29
PCU_RXD
31
D-GND
18
n_DTR_PCU
20
TXD_PCU
22
5VNPDin
24
5VNPDin
26
n_RES_MPFC_PCU
28
PCU_RES
30
n_FWP_PCU
32
D-GND
B40B-PNDZS-1
PCU
PWB

TX24-60R-LT-H1
SOCKET1
P-GND
HTMY_1
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2
WEB_M1
WEB_M2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_A
ADMH_/A
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
ADML_/A
PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
LCCM_/A
LCCM_CNT
5VN
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN
DMM_EN
BTM_CLK
POM_A
POM_/A
/POM_CNT
D-GND
P-GND
HTMM_1
HTMM_2
HTMC_1
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
HTMK_2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_B
ADMH_/B
/ADML_CNT
ADML_B
ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
LCCM_B
LCCM_/B
5VN
DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN
DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT
BTM_EN
POM_B
POM_/B
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
TX-25-60P-LT-H1
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
2
HTMY_1
3
HTMY_2
4
PHTMK_1
5
PHTMK_2
6
WEB_M1
7
WEB_M2
8
5VN
9
P-GND
10
N,C
11
D-GND
12
ADMH_A
13
ADMH_/A
14
/ADMH_CNT
15
ADML_A
16
ADML_/A
17
PSFM_CLK
18
LCCM_A
19
LCCM_/A
20
LCCM_CNT
21
5VN
22
DRMCL_CLK
23
/DRMCL_CNT
24
DMK_EN
25
DMM_EN
26
BTM_CLK
27
POM_A
28
POM_/A
29
/POM_CNT
30
D-GND
31
P-GND
32
HTMM_1
33
HTMM_2
34
HTMC_1
35
HTMC_2
36
HTMK_1
37
HTMK_2
38
5VN
39
P-GND
40
N,C
41
D-GND
42
ADMH_B
43
ADMH_/B
44
/ADML_CNT
45
ADML_B
46
ADML_/B
47
PSFM_CNT
48
PSFM_EN
49
LCCM_B
50
LCCM_/B
51
5VN
52
DMK_CLK
53
/DMK_CNT
54
DMC_EN
55
DMY_EN
56
/BTM_CNT
57
BTM_EN
58
POM_B
59
POM_/B
60
D-GND
DRIVER PWB
Y. Between the PCU, the Mother and the Motor drive section (25/31)
(ACDC harness CD)
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)
PHDR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
PL
1
PSFM2
3
LB
2
PSFM_LD2
2
GY
3
P-GND
1
Power source
FAN2
FINISHER
PHDR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
PK
1
PSFM1
3
BR
2
PSFM_LD1
2
GY
3
P-GND
1
Power source
FAN1
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

INSERTOR
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
Mother FAN
OZONE
FAN3
OZONE
FAN2
SM4P
MFPFM
MFPFM_CNT
P-GND
MFPFM_LD
P
1
2
3
4
OVFM3
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
CN
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
4
5
6
SM6P
OVFM3
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
SM4P
OVFM3
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
OZFM_LD3
P
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
SM4P
OZFM2
/OZFM_CNT
P-GND
OZFM_LD2
P
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
P
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V6
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V6
P-GND
EL 12PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
RSV_IO_OUT
DF1B18DE
24V3
F.G.
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
RD
BL
GY
GY
GY
RD
GY
PK
PL
BR
GY
LB
PL
PK
PL
GY
BR
14
BL
GY
RD
BL
RD
GY
GY
PK
BR
PL
LB
PK
PL
LB
GY
PK
BR
GY
LB

P
RD
12
14
S
12
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
PSFM2
PSFM_LD2
P-GND
PSFM1
PSFM_LD1
P-GND
CN8
1
24V6
B7P-VH-B
CN7
7
P-GND
B8P-VH-B
CN4
2
5VN
B6P-VH-B
CN4
3
24V6
4
GND1
B7P-VH-B
CN6
5
5V2
B10P-VH-B
40
D-GND
B40B-PNDZ-S
35
37
39
36
38
30
32
34
CN6
29
31
33
CN19
16
RSV_PMC
14
/FUFM_CNT
1
/RSV_in1
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN13
20
24V3
CN18
29
RSV_IO_OUT
B30B-PNDZS-1
22
OVFM3
24
/OZFM_CNT
26
P-GND
28
OZFM_LD3
B40B-PNDZ-S
CN6
21
OZFM2
23
/OZFM_CNT
25
P-GND
27
OZFM_LD2
CJ-DC PWB
(120V series)
DR-DC PWB
(Japan / 200V series)
DR-PCU PWB
Z. Inserter and outlet fan section (26/31)
CARD
READER
(OPTION)
CARD
READER
(OPTION)
MECHANICAL
COUNTER
(OPTION)
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM6P
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
Mechanical counter 2
24V3
1
/PNC_C
2
179228-2
Mechanical counter 1
24V3
1
/PNC_B
2
179228-2
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
RD
PL
RD
LB
Table relay harness CD
SMR-04
1
2
3
4
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
SMP-04
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
TO AUDITER
SM-6pin
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
(MSW harness CD)
P
3
4
5
6
R
3
4
5
6
PNC harness
BR
LB
PK
PL
BL
GY
RD
LB
RD
PL
SCN-mother harness CD
EL-6P
24V3
/PNC_B
24V3
/PNC_C
TO COIN VENDOR
(OPTION)
CN131
1
n A_PNC
2
n A_COPY
3
n A_CA
4
n A_READY
5
n A_AUD
6
5V
7
D-GND
8
24V
9
D-GND
10
n A_TC
11
24V
12
PNC-a
13
D-GND
B13P-PH-K-S
CN145
1
/C_CARD
2
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
/C_DATA
5
5V
6
D-GND
B6P-PH-K-R
CN7
27
24V3
29
/PNC_B
28
24V3
30
/PNC_C
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN16
1
24V3
2
P-GND
3
/CV_COPY
4
/CV_COUNT
5
/CV_START
6
/CV_CA
7
/CV_CLCOPY
8
/CV_COLOR1
9
/CV_STAPLE
10
/CV_COLOR0
11
/CV_DUPLEX
12
5V3
13
/CV_SIZE0
14
/CV_SIZE1
15
/CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZ-1
SCN-cnt PWB
PCU PWB
AA.Option section (27/31)
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
GY
F-GND
ORS LED PWB
EH
1
2
3
Document detection light emitting

side harness: common
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
OCSW
BL
GY
LB
RD
PL
LB
MOTHER PWB
B30B-PHDSS-B
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN19
CN146
B12B-PHDSS-B
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN5
CN143
CN130
B15P-PH-K-S
B15P-PH-K-S
501190-2017(MOLEX)
CN3
B6P-VH
CN144
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
AGND
AGND
CCD_CPCCD_CP+
AGND
CCD_RS+
CCD_RSAGND
CCD_CLK2CCD_CLK2+
AGND
CCD_CLK1+
CCD_CLK1AGND
AD_MCLKAD_MCLK+
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTAGND
AGND
A12V
AGND
A5V
AGND
A3.3V
/LVDS_STBY
/RES_CCDAD
AD_SCLK
AD_WRSO
AD_SEN
AD_RDSI
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_BLKCLP
CCD_SH
AGND
SH_OUT+
SH_OUTAGND
CN147
SCNcnt PWB
501190-4017(MOLEX)
CN11
CN138 B6P-VH-R
P^GND
24V1
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
CN136
1
5VEXT
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
3
1
2
4
5
6
CN148
GY
RD
PL
BL
OR
GY
Ndetect
D-GND
nDET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
GY
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
BR
BR
PK
GR
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
GY
PL
GY
BL
GY
OR
BR
PK
BR
PK
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
BR
GY
BR
PK
GY
CCD-F harness 1
:common
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
CCD-F harness 1:
common
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
BR
PK
GY
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
AGND
AGND
CCD_CPCCD_CP+
AGND
CCD_RS+
CCD_RSAGND
CCD_CLK2CCD_CLK2+
AGND
CCD_CLK1+
CCD_CLK1AGND
AD_MCLKAD_MCLK+
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTAGND
AGND
A12V
AGND
A5V
AGND
A3.3V
/LVDS_STBY
/RES_CCDAD
AD_SCLK
AD_WRSO
AD_SEN
AD_RDSI
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_BLKCLP
CCD_SH
AGND
SH_OUT+
SH_OUTAGND
AGND
TC+
TCAGND
TB+
TBAGND
TA+
TAAGND
AGND
TE+
TEAGND
TD+
TDAGND
TCLK+
TCLKAGND
Inverter PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
P^GND
24V1
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LB
PL
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
GY
BL
LB
PL
LB
PL
PL
LB
PL
LB
PL
LB
PL
LB
GY
1 n INFO_LED
3 CN_CHK_OUT
5
D-GND
7 LCD_CLK+
9 LCD_CLK11
D-GND
13 LCD_DATA2+
15 LCD_DATA217
D-GND
19 LCD_DATA1+
21 LCD_DATA123
D-GND
25 LCD_DATA0+
27 LCD_DATA029 CN_CHK_IN
2
5VO
4 n WU_LED
6 n POW_LED
8
n WU_KEY
10 n PWR_SW
12
NC
14 n POF_SCN
16 n RES_MPFC_SCN
18 RES_SCN
20 n RTS_SCN
22
TXD_SCN
24 n CTS_SCN
26 RXD_SCN
28 n FWP_SCN
30
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
AGND
TC+
TCAGND
TB+
TBAGND
TA+
TAAGND
AGND
TE+
TEAGND
TD+
TDAGND
TCLK+
TCLKAGND
SCN-LAMP
FFC: common
P-GND
P-GND
LAMP
24V
24V
501190-2017(MOLEX)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
n INFO_LED
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2+
LCD_DATA2D-GND
LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA1D-GND
LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA0CN_CHK_IN
5VO
n WU_LED
n POW_LED
n WU_KEY
n PWR_SW
NC
n POF_SCN
n RES_MPFC_SCN
RES_SCN
n RTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN
RXD_SCN
n FWP_SCN
D-GND
PK
GY
LB
PK
BR
GY
GY
1 SCANDATA02 SCANDATA0+
3
D-GND
6
D-GND
9
D-GND
10 SCANCLKOUT11 SCANCLKOUT+
12
D-GND
15
D-GND
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Ndetect
D-GND
nDET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
WH
PK
SH
WH
PK
SH
WH
PK
SH
WH
PK
SH
WH
PK
SH
1
2
3
4
5
P-GND
P-GND
LAMP
24V
24V
501190-4017(MOLEX)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
4
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
CCD PWB
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_ANC
RXD_ANC
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND

1
2
CN137
MIRROR
MOTOR
B15P-PH-K-S
MHPS
D-GND
5V
EH
CN134 PH
3
2
1
MHPS
Document Control PWB
When DOCC PWB is installed
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B CN3
SCNcntPWB
CN146
SCNcntPWB
CN143
CL
BR
GY
BL
MHPS harness: common
OPTION
AB.Scanner section 1/2 (28/31)
TO DSPF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
P-GND
P-GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V_EXT
AVCC
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN142
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
P-GND
P-GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V_EXT
AVCC
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
CN125
1
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
2
LCD_CLK+
3
LCD_CLK4
D-GND
5
LCD_DAT2+
6
LCD_DAT27
8
D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
9
LCD_DAT110
D-GND
11
LCD_DAT0+
12
LCD_DAT013
D-GND
14
15
DISP
3.3V_EXT
16
17
TP1418
VCONT
18
AVCC
19
20
SC_TEMP
21
P-GND
24V_EXT
22
TP1449
23
/CCFT1
24
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
25
X2CN
26
Y2CN
27
X1CN
28
Y1CN
29
D-GND
30
SLW30S-1C7
SCN-CNT PWB
CN135
D-GND
1
3.3V
2
3
5V3
4
D-GND
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
/F2
15
/F3
16
/BZR
17
D-GND
18
n PWRSW
19
n WU_KEY
20
21
n INFO_LED
POW_LED
22
WU_LED
23
D-GND
24
25
5V2
26
D-GND
SLW26S-1C7
LVDS FFC CD
MFP OPE FFC CD

LVDS-CD PWB
CN1
D-GND
30
29
CN_CHK_OUT
28
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
25
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT224
23
D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
22
LCD_DAT121
20
D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
19
LCD_DAT018
17
D-GND
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
14
NC
VCONT
13
12
AVCC
11
SC_TEMP
P-GND
10
9
24V_EXT
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
6
5
X2CN
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
2
Y1CN
D-GND
1
52271-3079(MOLEX)
CN1
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
11
/F3
10
/BZR
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
7
n WU_KEY
6
n INFO_LED
5
POW_LED
4
WU_LED
3
D-GND
2
5V2
1
D-GND
52610-2671(MOLEX)
CN2
/CCFT
1
D-GND
2
24V
3
SM03B-PASS-1-TB
CN3
D-GND
1
YD
2
LP
3
CP
4
D-GND
5
VCONT
6
DISPout
7
3.3V
8
9
3.3V
3.3V
10
11
D-GND
D-GND
12
D0
13
D1
14
D2
15
D3
16
D4
17
D5
18
D6
19
D7
20
D-GND
21
D-GND
22
52435-2271(MOLEX)
CN4
/YL(Y1)
1
XH(X1)
2
YH(Y2)
3
/XL(X2)
4
52271-0469(MOLEX)
MFP OPE
PWB CD
CN3
n PWRSW
1
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
BM03B-PASS-TB
CN2
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
5
PD
D-GND
6
BM06B-PASS-TB
LCD-INV harness CD
BR
BR
BR
LCD-FFC CD
PSW harness CD
BR
GY
GY
ORS-PD harness CD
BR
LB
PL
BL
PK
GY
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
ORS PD PWB
/CCFT
D-GND
24V
S03B-PASK-2
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CCFT+
/CCFT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CCFT+
/CCFT
LCD INV PWB CD
CN1
3
2
1
LCD UN
VSS
YD
LP
XCK
VSS
Vcon
DISP
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
D0
D1
D2
D3
D 4
D 5
D 6
D 7
VSS
VSS
FH12-22S-0.5SH(55) (HIR
Touch panel
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PH
n PWRSW
3
D-GND
2
D-GND
1
POWER SW PWB
PH
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
1
2
CN3
1
2
BACK LIGHT
AC.Scanner section 2/2 (29/31)
HDD
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
IDE_CBLID_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IDE_DD7
IDE_DD8
IDE_DD6
IDE_DD9
IDE_DD5
IDE_DD10
IDE_DD4
IDE_DD11
IDE_DD3
IDE_DD12
IDE_DD2
IDE_DD13
IDE_DD1
IDE_DD14
IDE_DD0
IDE_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
(SCN-mother harness CD)
CN5
1 IDE_RST_N
2
D-GND
3 IDE_DD7
4 IDE_DD8
5 IDE_DD6
6 IDE_DD9
7 IDE_DD5
8 IDE_DD10
9 IDE_DD4
10 IDE_DD11
11 IDE_DD3
12 IDE_DD12
13 IDE_DD2
14 IDE_DD13
15 IDE_DD1
16 IDE_DD14
17 IDE_DD0
18 IDE_DD15
19
D-GND
20
KEY
21 IDE_DMARQ
22
D-GND
23 IDE_DIOW_N
24
D-GND
25 IDE_DIOR_N
26
D-GND
27 IDE_IORDY_N
28
D-GND
29 IDE_DMACK_N
30
D-GND
31 IDE_INTRQ
32 ICCS10
33 IDE_DA1
34 IDE_CBLID_N
35 IDE_DA0
36 IDE_DA2
37 IDE_CS0
38 IDE_CS1
39 IDE_DASP_N
40
D-GND
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
LAN
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
RS232C
MFP PWB
USB-B
USB-A
SCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
SCANCLKOUT-
SCANCLKOUT+
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
PICVPPON
nANTI_INST
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3-
CN26
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
HSYNC_LSU_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
LAN
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
RSV
RSV
RXD_SCN
nCTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
CN18
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
RS232C
CN9
USB1.1 (HOST)
CN8
USB2.0 (DEVICE)
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
12V
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
4
HDDFM_LD
1
3
D-GND
2
HDDFM_PWM
3
2
1
12V
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+
TXCT
NC
NC
CT
RX+
RX-
PAP-04V-F
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
MFP
FAN
HDD
FAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
PICVPPON
nANTI_INST
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUTSCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
12V
CPUFM_PWM
D-GND
CPUFM_LD
CN17
12V
HDDFM_PWM
D-GND
HDDFM_LD
CN15
12V
1
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
5VN
2
B4P-VH
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
RSV
RSV
RXD_SCN
nCTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
Mother PWB
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
AD.MFP section 1/2 (30/31)

CN22
MFPC PWB
FX8C-60S-SV5
CN19
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
FAXD_TXD_N
5
n CNCT_FAX
6
FAXD_TXD_P
7
n MSW_MON
8
FAXCS_TXD_P
9
n RES_FAX
10
FAXCS_TXD_N
11
D-GND
12
FAXD_RXD_N
13
n RES_MFP
14
FAXD_RXD_P
15
n FAX_WUP
16
FAXCS_RXD_P
17
n PLED
18
FAXCS_RXD_N
19
D-GND
20
n FAXD_RTS
21
D-GND
22
n FAXD_CTS
23
FLVPP
24
n FAXCS_RTS
25
5VO
26
n FAXCS_CTS
27
12V
28
3.3V
29
3.3V
30
D-GND
31
D-GND
32
B32B-PHDSS-B
EXTEND PCI
1
5V_IN
2
5V_IN
3
5V_IN
4
D-GND
5
D-GND
6
D-GND
7
D-GND
8
PCI1_EXT
9
n PCI1_RST
10 PCI1_INTA_PU
11
EXT_REQ
12
EXT_GNT
13 PCI1MAC_AD30
14 PCI1MAC_AD31
15 PCI1MAC_AD28
16 PCI1MAC_AD29
17 PCI1MAC_AD26
18 PCI1MAC_AD27
19 PCI1MAC_AD24
20 PCI1MAC_AD25
21 PCI1MAC_AD23
22 PCI1MAC_CBE3
23 PCI1MAC_AD21
24 PCI1MAC_AD22
25 PCI1MAC_AD19
26 PCI1MAC_AD20
27 PCI1MAC_AD17
28 PCI1MAC_AD18
29 PCI1MAC_CBE2
30 PCI1MAC_AD16
31 PCI1MAC_AD14
32 PCI1MAC_AD15
33 PCI1MAC_AD12
34 PCI1MAC_AD13
35 PCI1MAC_AD10
36 PCI1MAC_AD11
37 PCI1MAC_AD8
38 PCI1MAC_AD9
39 PCI1MAC_AD7
40 PCI1MAC_CBE1
41 PCI1MAC_AD5
42 PCI1MAC_AD6
43 PCI1MAC_AD3
44 PCI1MAC_AD4
45 PCI1MAC_AD1
46 PCI1MAC_AD2
47 PCI1MAC_CBE0
48 PCI1MAC_AD0
49
D-GND
50 PCI1MAC_IDSEL
51 PCI1MAC_PAR
52 PCI1MAC_FRAME
53 PCI1MAC_IRDY
54 PCI1MAC_TRDY
55 PCI1MAC_DVSEL
56
PCI_STOP
57
PCI1_SERR
58
PCI1_PERR
59
D-GND
60
D-GND
EFI (OPTION)
CN20
1
3.3V
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
D-GND
5 SA_VIDEO_CLKI
6
D-GND
7 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_I
8
D-GND
9 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_K_I
10
D-GND
11 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_C_I
12
D-GND
13 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_M_I
14
D-GND
15 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_Y_I
16
D-GND
17 VIDEO_DAT_KO
18 VIDEO_DAT_K1
19 VIDEO_DAT_K2
20 VIDEO_DAT_K3
21 VIDEO_DAT_K4
22 VIDEO_DAT_K5
23
D-GND
24 VIDEO_DAT_CO
25 VIDEO_DAT_C1
26 VIDEO_DAT_C2
27 VIDEO_DAT_C3
28 VIDEO_DAT_C4
29 VIDEO_DAT_C5
30
D-GND
31 VIDEO_DAT_MO
32 VIDEO_DAT_M1
33 VIDEO_DAT_M2
34 VIDEO_DAT_M3
35 VIDEO_DAT_M4
36 VIDEO_DAT_M5
37
D-GND
38 VIDEO_DAT_YO
39 VIDEO_DAT_Y1
40 VIDEO_DAT_Y2
41 VIDEO_DAT_Y3
42 VIDEO_DAT_Y4
43 VIDEO_DAT_Y5
44 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_O
45
D-GND
46
EF_CLK_IN
47
D-GND
48 GPI_nEF_DETECT
49 ENG_RDY(O,OC)
50 PRTC_RDY(I,OC)
PRT_RTS(O)
51
52
PRT_TXD(O)
53
PRT_CTS(I)
PRT_RXD(I)
54
3.3V
55
56
PON_PRTC(I)
57
n WU_EF
58 n PD_PRTCIF(O)
59
D-GND
60
D-GND
FX8C-60S-SV5
FAX UN
(OPTION)
AE.MFP section 2/2 (31/31)
3. Signal list
Signal name
ADUGS
ADUH
ADUL
APPD1
Name [Type]
ADU gate solenoid
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADU1 motor upper
[Stepping motor]
ADU2 motor lower
[Stepping motor]
ADU transport path
detector 1 [Photo interrupter]
APPD2
ADU transport path

detector 2 [Photo interrupter]
BLTCL
Belt separation clutch

(Normal)
[Electromagnetic clutch]
(Reverse)
[Stepping motor]
(Lift HP detection)
[Photo interrupter]
Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 3) [Brush motor]
Tray 3 paper detector
[Photo interrupter]
Tray 3 paper entry detector
[Reflection type sensor]
Paper pickup solenoid
(Tray 3)
Tray 3 width detector
[Volume resistor]
detector [Photo interrupter]
Tray 3 rear edge detector 1
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
Tray 4 upper limit detector
(Lift HP detection)
[Photo interrupter]
(Tray 4) [Brush motor]
Tray 4 paper detector
[Photo interrupter]
BLTCL_R
BTM
C3LUD
C3LUM
C3PED
C3PFC
C3PFD
C3PUS
C3PWD
C3SPD
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
C4LUD
C4LUM
C4PED
C4PFC
C4PFD
C4PUS
C4SPD
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
Tray 4 paper entry detector

(Tray 4)
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
[Tact switch]
Function/Operation
Controls the ADU gate.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
ON
OFF
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN15
23
PCU
Driver
Driver
CN7
CN7
Pass
CN15
6, 5, 4,
3
12, 11,
10, 9
37
Pass
CN15
39
PCU
ON
OFF
CN13
27
PCU
ON
OFF
CN13
31
PCU
Drives the transfer belt.
CN4
Driver
Detects the upper limit of the

tray 3.
Upper limit
CN3
7, 8, 9,
10
15
Drives the paper tray lift.
Stop
Drive
CN6
14
PCU
Detects paper in the tray 3.

Controls ON/OFF of the paper
feed roller in the tray 3 paper
feed section.
Detects paper pass in the tray
3.
YES
NO
CN3
17
PCU
ON
OFF
CN3
PCU
Pass
CN3
13
PCU
ON
OFF
CN3
19
PCU
CN3
21
PCU
Remained
CN5
12
PCU
CN5
20
PCU
CN5
22
PCU
CN5
24
PCU
CN5
26
PCU
Upper limit
CN3
27
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN6
18
PCU
Detects paper presence in

tray 4.
feed roller in the tray 4 paper
feed section.
Detects paper pass in the tray
4.
(Tray 4)
YES
NO
CN3
29
PCU
ON
OFF
CN3
PCU
Pass
CN3
25
PCU
ON
OFF
CN3
33
PCU
Remained
CN5
16
PCU
CN5
28
PCU
CN5
30
PCU
CN5
32
PCU
CN5
34
PCU
Detects paper pass in the

upstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
Detects paper pass in the
midstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
Controls separation of the
primary transfer belt.
Controls separation of the
primary transfer belt.

(Tray 3)
Detects the paper width in the
tray 3.
Detects the remaining
quantity of paper in the tray 3.
Detects insertion of the tray
by detecting either of rear
edges 1 - 4 of the tray 3.
Detects the paper size in the
tray 3.
Detects the upper limit of tray

4.

quantity of paper in the tray 3.
Detects insertion of the tray
by detecting either of rear
edges 1 - 4 of the tray 4.
Detects the paper size in the
tray 4.
NOTE
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Drives with
4-phase signals.
PCU
Drives with
4-phase signals.
PCU
Analog
detection
Refer to A-(1)
Tray 3.
Refer to A-(2)
Tray 4.
Signal name
Name [Type]
Function/Operation
Charger cleaner HP detector

[Photo interrupter]
[Brush motor]
Detects the charger cleaner

position (in the process unit).
Cleans the main charger.
CFM
CFM_LD
CCM rotation detector

[Photo interrupter]
Charger cooling fan motor
CFM lock detector
Detects the RPM of the

charger cleaner.
Exhausts ozone.
Detects the CFM lock.
CLI
Scanner lamp[Xenon lamp]
CPUFM
CPUFM_PWM
CPFM_CK
Controller cooling fan motor

control
lock
Paper feed motor
[DC brushless motor]
Paper feed motor control
Radiates lights onto a

document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
Cools the control PWB.
Controls the controller cooling
fan motor RPM.
Detects the controller cooling
fan motor lock.
Drives the paper feed section.
CPFM_LD
Paper feed motor lock
CSDH
DHS1
Cassette dehumidifying
heater
Clear all signal [Coin vendor]
Copy enable signal (Color)
[Coin vendor]
Copy enable signal
(Monochrome) [Coin vendor]
Count-up signal
[Coin vendor]
Print count identification
signal (Duplex mode)
[Coin Vendor]
Paper size detection 0
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
Staple mode signal
[Coin vendor]
Copy start signal
[Coin vendor]
C phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
K phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
M phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Y phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Scanner heater
DL_C
Discharge lamp (C) [LED]
DL_K
Discharge lamp (K)
DL_M
Discharge lamp (M) [LED]
DL_Y
Discharge lamp (Y) [LED]
DM_C
Drum motor C
[Stepping motor]
Drum motor K
[Stepping motor]
Drum motor M
[Stepping motor]
Drum motor Y
[Stepping motor]
CCHP
CCM
CCM_ROT
CPUFM_LD
CPFM_D
CV_CA
CV_CLCOPY
CV_COPY
CV_COUNT
CV_DUPLEX
CV_SIZE0
CV_SIZE1
CV_SIZE2
CV_SIZE3
CV_STAPLE
CV_START
DHPD_C
DHPD_K
DHPD_M
DHPD_Y
DM_K
DM_M
DM_Y
Connector level
"L"
"H"
HOME
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN9
13
PCU
CN13
33, 35
PCU
CN18
23
PCU
Stop
-
CN3
CN3
24
26
PCU
PCU
ON
Drive
Lock
detected
OFF
CN130
SCU
Stop
-
Drive
-
CN13
CN13
1
2
Mother
Mother
CN13
Mother
Drive
Lock
detected
Stop
CN4
PCU
CN4
11
PCU
Lock
detected
CN4
13
PCU
Clear
Copy
Enable
Copy
Enable
Count UP
CN17
CN17
6
7
PCU
PCU
CN17
PCU
CN17
PCU
DUPLEX
CN17
11
PCU
Paper size 0
CN17
13
PCU
Paper size 1
CN17
14
PCU
Paper size 2
CN17
15
PCU
Paper size 3
CN17
16
PCU
STAPLE
CN17
PCU
Start
CN17
PCU
Detects C phase.
Reference
CN9
12
PCU
Detects K phase.
Reference
CN13
21
PCU
Detects M phase.
Reference
CN9
14
PCU
Detects Y phase.
Reference
CN9
16
PCU
OFF
ON
CN7
PCU
OFF
ON
CN9
PCU
OFF
ON
CN7
19
PCU
OFF
ON
CN7
PCU
CN5
Driver
CN5
CN6
CN6
9, 10,
11, 12
3, 4, 5,
6
3, 4, 5,
6
9, 10,
11, 12
Controls the paper feed motor

RPM.
Detects the paper feed motor
lock.
Dehumidifies paper.
Clean all
Copy enable (Color)
Coy enable (Monochrome)
Count-up
Identifies the print count.
(Duplex mode)
Identifies presence of the

staple mode.
Copy start status
Keeps the heat in the scanner

unit.
Discharges the
photoconductor.
Discharges the
photoconductor.
Discharges the
photoconductor.
Discharges the
photoconductor.
Drives the cyan
photoconductor unit.
Drives the black
Drives the magenta
Drives the yellow
Driver
Driver
Driver
NOTE
Normal/reverse
rotation with
2-phase.
RPM detection
PWM drive
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Signal name
Name [Type]
DSPF COPY
LUMP
DSPF Copy lamp

[Xenon lamp]
DSW_ADU

detection [Photo interrupter]
Right lower door open/close
sensor [Photo interrupter]
Front door lower open/close
switch [Micro switch]
Front door upper open/close
switch [Micro switch]
[Micro switch]
Developing drive motor CL
control
lock
Developing drive motor K
DSW_D
DSW-FL
DSW-FU
DSW-R
DVCM_D
DVCM_CK
DVCM_LD
DVKM_D
DVKM_CK
DVKM_LD
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_CW/
CCW
FUEXD

control
lock
gain
rotating direction
External variable sensor
[Photo interrupter]
FEXM

[Stepping motor]
FUFM_F
FUFM_F_LD
Fusing cooling fan/ Toner

bottle cooling fan
Fusing cooling fan lock
FUFM_R
FUFM_CNT
Fusing duct fan

Fusing duct fan control
FUFM_CNT2
Fusing cooling fan control
FUFM_R_LD
Fusing duct fan lock
FUM_D
FUM_CK
Fusing motor
Fusing motor control signal
FUM_LD
Fusing motor lock
HDDFM
HDDFM_PWM

control
HDD cooling fan motor lock
HDDFM_LD
HL_EX
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
Heater lamp [Halogen lamp]

Lower heater lamp
[Halogen lamp]
[Halogen lamp]
[Halogen lamp]
Hopper remaining quantity
sensor C [Oscillation sensor]
sensor K [Oscillation sensor]
Function/Operation
Radiates the lights onto a
document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
Detects open/close of the
duplex (ADU) cover.
right lower door.
front door lower.
front door upper.
right door.
Drives the developing section
(CL).
Controls the developing drive
motor CL RPM.
Detects the developing drive
motor CL lock.
Drives the developing section
(K). / Drives the primary
transfer belt separation.
Controls the developing drive
motor K RPM.
Detects the developing drive
motor K lock.
gain.
rotating direction
Detects the position of the
separation mechanism of the
external heater of the fusing
section.
Separates the external
heating roller of the fusing
unit.
Cools the fusing unit./ Cools
the toner bottle.
Detects the fusing cooling fan
lock.
Controls the fusing duct fan
RPM.
Controls the fusing cooling
fan RPM.
Detects the fusing duct fan
lock.
Drives the fusing unit.
Controls the fusing motor
RPM.
Detects the fusing motor lock.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Open
Close
CN2
RD I/F
Open
Close
CN3
22
PCU
Open
Close
CN11
PCU
Open
Close
CN1
PCU
Open
Close
CN2
PCU
Drive
Stop
CN9
PCU
CN9
PCU
CN9
10
PCU
Drive
Lock
detected
Stop
CN13
PCU
CN13
11
PCU
Lock
detected
High speed
CN13
13
PCU
CN13
15
PCU
CCW
CN13
17
PCU
Reference
CN13
30
PCU
CN14
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN12
3, 13,
15, 17,
19
1
PCU
CN12
PCU
Stop
-
Lock
detected
Drive
-
CN13
CN10
2
14
PCU
PCU
CN13
10
PCU
CN13
PCU
Stop
Lock
detected
Drive
CN14
PCU
CN14
PCU
Lock
detected
Drive
-
CN14
11
PCU
CN17
CN17
1
2
Mother
Mother
Low
speed
CW
Cools the HDD.

Controls the HDD cooling fan
motor RPM.
Detects the HDD cooling fan
motor lock.
Heats the external roller.
Heats the lower heat roller.
Stop
-
Heats the upper heat roller

(main).
(sub).
quantity of toner in the toner
hopper.
hopper.
CN17
Mother
OFF
OFF
Lock
detected
ON
ON
CN10
CN10
11
9
PCU
PCU
OFF
ON
CN10
PCU
OFF
ON
CN10
PCU
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Small
Remaining
quantity
Small
CN10
17
PCU
CN9
27
PCU
NOTE
PWM drive
PWM drive
Drives with
4-phase signals.
PWM drive
PWM drive
PWM drive
Signal name
Name [Type]
HTCS_M

sensor M [Oscillation sensor]
HTCS_Y

sensor Y [Oscillation sensor]
HTM_C
Hopper motor C
[Synchronous motor]
Hopper motor K
[Synchronous motor]
Hopper motor M
[Synchronous motor]
Hopper motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
sensor [Temperature/
Humidity sensor]
LCC Transport motor
[Stepping motor]
HTM_K
HTM_M
HTM_Y
HUD_M/TH_M
LCCM
LPFC
LPPD
LSS_BK
LSS_CL
LSUFM
nFANRDY
MHPS
MIM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
MPGS
MPLD1
MPUC
MPWS
LCC paper entry sensor

[Reflection sensor]
LSU cooling fan motor lock
Scanner home position
sensor [Photo interrupter]
Scanner motor
[Stepping motor]
Manual paper presence
Manual paper entry detection
[Photo interrupter]
(Manual paper feed)
Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Manual feed paper length
OZFM1
OZFM2
OZFM3
OZFM_CNT
Manual paper feed tray

paper width detector
[Volume resistor]
Manual paper feed tray pullout position detector 1
[Photo interrupter]
[Photo interrupter]
Original cover SW
[Photo interrupter]
Ozone fan motor 1
Ozone fan motor 2
Ozone fan motor 3
Ozone fan motor control 1
OZFM_CNT2
Ozone fan motor control 2
OZFM_LD1
Ozone fan motor 1 lock
OZFM_LD2
OZFM_LD3
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
Function/Operation
hopper.
hopper.
Transports toner.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Remaining Remaining
quantity
quantity
Large
Small
Remaining Remaining
quantity
quantity
Small
Large
-
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN10
16
PCU
CN10
18
PCU
CN8
5, 7
Driver
NOTE
Drives with
2-phase signals.
Drives with
2-phase signals.
Drives with
2-phase signals.
Drives with
2-phase signals.
Analog
detection
Transports toner.
CN8
6, 8
Driver
Transports toner.
CN8
9, 11
Driver
Transports toner.
CN8
2, 4
Driver
Detects the temperature and

the humidity.
CN15
30, 32
PCU
Drives the LCC transport

roller.
feed roller in the LCC paper
feed section.
Detects paper entry from the
LCC.
Opens and closes the LSU
(BK) shutter.
Opens and closes the LSU
(CL) shutter.
Detects the LSU cooling fan
motor lock.
Detects the scanner home
position.
Scanner (reading) section
CN1
Driver
ON
OFF
CN14
1, 2, 3,
4
24
Pass
CN3
11
PCU
ON
OFF
CN8
38
PCU
ON
OFF
CN8
40
PCU
Stop
-
CN2
CN2
1
2
LSU
LSU
CN134
SCU
Drive
Lock
detected
Home
position
-
CN137
SCU
YES
NO
CN3
1, 2, 3,
4
7
RD I/F
Pass
CN15
24
PCU
Pickup
CN15
38
PCU
ON
OFF
CN15
36
PCU
Detects the paper length of

the manual paper feed tray.
feed roller in the manual
paper feed section.
Detects the width of paper in
Detection
CN3
16
RD I/F
ON
OFF
CN14
20
PCU
CN15
28
PCU
Detects the pull-out position

(storing position) of paper in
Detects the pull-out position
(storing position) of paper in
Document size detection
trigger
Exhausts ozone.
Exhausts ozone.
Exhausts ozone.
Controls the ozone fan motor
1 and 2 RPM.
Controls the ozone fan motor
3 RPM.
Detects the ozone fan motor 1
lock.
lock.
lock.
Storing
position
CN3
25
RD I/F
Puling out
position
CN3
22
RD I/F
Close
Open
CN136
SCU
Stop
Stop
Stop
-
Drive
Drive
Drive
-
CN 7
CN 6
CN 6
CN7
20
21
22
22, 23
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PWM drive
CN19
16
PCU
PWM drive
Lock
detected
Lock
detected
Lock
detected
CN7
26
PCU
CN6
27
PCU
CN6
28
PCU
Detects paper in the manual

paper feed tray.
Detects paper entry from the
manual paper feed tray.
(manual paper feed)
Controls open/close of the
manual feed gate.
Drives with
4-phase signals.
PCU
Analog
detection
Signal name
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
PCSS
PFM
PHTM_K1
PHTM_K2
PNC_B
PNC_C
PO_TMP
POD1
POD2
POD3
POFM
POFM_CNT1
Name [Type]
Function/Operation

[Toner density sensor]
Process control shutter
solenoid
[Stepping motor]
Intermediate hopper motor 1
[Synchronous motor]
Intermediate hopper motor 2
[Synchronous motor]
Personal counter signal B
Personal counter signal C
Paper exit temperature
detection
[Temperature sensor]
Fusing rear detection
[Photo interrupter]
[Photo interrupter]
Right tray paper exit
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side/ Center)
(F side) control
Detects the toner patch

density.
Opens and closes the shutter
of the process control and the
register sensor.
POFM_CNT2

(Center) control
POFM_F_LD
POLY_CL

(F side) lock
(Center) lock
Polygon motor
Polygon motor control
POLY_LOCK
Polygon motor lock
BRAKE
POM
Polygon motor brake

Paper exit motor
[Stepping motor]
Resist front detection (PPD1)
[Photo interrupter]
Resist detection (PPD2)
lock
lock
PTC cleaner motor
[Brush motor]
POFM_U_LD
POLY_START
PPD1
PPD2
PSFM1
PSFM2
PSFM1_LD
PSFM2_LD
PTCM
PTCM_HP
REG R
REG_F
RRC
RRC2
RRM_D
RRM_CK
RRM_LD
SCOV
Connector level
"L"
"H"
-
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN8
25, 26
PCU
NOTE
Analog
detection
Open
Close
CN8
36
PCU
CN9
Driver
Transports toner.
CN2
3, 4, 5,
6
2, 3
Transports toner.
CN2
4, 5
Outputs the count UP signal.

Outputs the count UP signal.
Detects the temperature.
Count UP
Count UP
-
CN7
CN7
CN15
29
30
12
DVK_
Driver
DVK_
Driver
PCU
PCU
PCU
Detects paper from the fusing

section.
Detects paper exit.
Pass
CN13
36
PCU
Pass
CN15
PCU
Detects paper exit to the right

tray.
Pass
CN15
22
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN15
PCU
Controls the paper exit

cooling fan motor (F side)
RPM.
Controls the paper exit
cooling fan motor (center)
RPM.
Detects the paper exit cooling
fan motor (F side) lock.
Detects the paper exit cooling
fan motor (center) lock.
Scans laser beams.
CN15
PCU
PWM drive
CN15
13
PCU
PWM drive
CN15
PCU
CN15
PCU
Drive
Lock
detected
Lock
detected
Stop
CN8
LSU
CN8
LSU
CN8
LSU
Break
-
Lock
detected
-
CN8
CN4
LSU
Driver
Pass
CN14
6
1, 2, 3,
4
23
Pass
CN14
25
PCU
Stop
Stop
-
CN6
CN6
CN6
29
30
31
PCU
PCU
PCU
CN6
32
PCU
Drive
Drive
Lock
detected
Lock
detected
-
CN18
25, 27
PCU
HOME
CN18
22
PCU
CN8
CN8
21
PCU
ON
OFF
CN14
10
PCU
ON
OFF
CN14
29
PCU
Drive
Stop
CN14
14
PCU
Lock
detected
CN14
CN14
12
16
PCU
PCU
Controls the polygon motor

RPM.
Detects the polygon motor
lock.
Polygon motor brake
Detects paper in front of the
resist roller.
Detects paper at the rear of
the resist roller.
Detects the power cooling fan
motor 1 lock.
Detects the power cooling fan
motor 2 lock.
Cleans the PTC.
PTC unit inside sensor

[Leaf switch]
Resist sensor PWB R
Resist sensor PWB F
PS clutch
PS clutch 2
PC motor
PS motor control
PS motor lock
Detects the home position of

the PTC cleaner.
(R side).
(F side).
Controls ON/OFF of the resist
roller.
Resist roller braking
Controls the PS motor RPM.

Detects the PS motor lock.
DSPF upper door open/close

sensor [Transmission type]

upper door.
Open
Drives with
4-phase signals.
Analog
detection
Drives with
4-phase signals.
PCU
PCU
SCU
Normal/reverse
rotation with
2-phase.
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
PWM drive
Signal name
Name [Type]
Function/Operation
DSPF lower door open/close

sensor [Micro switch]
DSPF lift-up motor
[PM stepper motor]
[Transmission type]

lower door.
Lifts up or moves down the
paper feed tray.
DSPF unit.
DSPF document.
SPED2
DSPF document empty

Detects document in the

paper feed tray.
SPFC

[Hybrid stepper motor]
DSPF document length
detection short sensor
[Transmission type]
detection long sensor
[Transmission type]
[Transmission type]

feed section roller.
Cools the motor and the
clutch.
SLCOV
SLUM
SOCD
SPED1
SPFFAN
SPFM
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPOD
SPOM
SPPD1

[PM stepper motor]
[Transmission type]
Detects the length of

document in the paper feed
tray.
Detects the length of
tray.
Detects paper exit.
Detects paper pass.

[Transmission type]
Detects paper pass.
SPPD3

[Transmission type]
Detects paper pass.
SPPD4

[Transmission type]
Detects paper pass.
SPPD5

[Transmission type]
Detects paper pass.
SPRDMD
DSPF document random

Detects the paper size in

random paper feed.
SPUM

[Hybrid stepper motor]
DSPF document width
sensor [Volume resistor]
Drives the paper feed section

roller and the transport roller.
Detects the width of
tray.
No. 2 resist roller braking
SRRBC
SRRC
STLD
STRC
STRRBC
STRRC
STUD
T1LUD
DSPF No. 2 resist roller

brake clutch
clutch
DSPF paper feed tray lower
limit sensor
[Transmission type]
brake clutch
clutch [Electromagnetic
clutch]
DSPF paper feed tray upper
limit sensor
[Transmission type]
[Photo interrupter]
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
SCU
SCU
Open
SCU
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SCU
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPPD2
SPWS
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Open
SCU
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
SCU
Controls ON/OFF of No. 2

resist roller.
SCU
Detects the lower limit of the

paper feed tray.
Lower limit
SCU
Controls ON/OFF of the

transport roller 1.
No. 1 resist roller braking
SCU
SCU
Controls ON/OFF of No. 1

resist roller.
SCU

paper feed tray.
Upper limit
Detects lift-up of the tandem

tray 1.
Upper limit
SCU
CN5
23
PCU
NOTE
Signal name
T1PED
T1LUM
T1PFC
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
T1PUS
T1SPD
T2LUD
T2PED
T2LUM
T2PFC
T2PPD
T2PUS
T2SPD
Name [Type]
[Photo interrupter]
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
Tandem tray 1 paper feed
clutch
Tandem tray 1 transport
sensor 1
sensor 2
(Tandem tray 1)
Tandem tray 1 paper
remaining quantity detector
[Photo interrupter]
[Photo interrupter]
[Photo interrupter]
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
clutch
detection
(Tandem tray 2)
Tandem tray 2 paper
quantity detector [Photo
interrupter]
TANCL

TANDH
Tandem tray dehumidifying

heater
Tandem tray installation
[Photo interrupter]
Transfer belt separation
sensor BK [Photo interrupter]
sensor Cl [Photo interrupter]
Toner density detection C
(ATC) [Permeable sensor]
Toner density detection K
Toner density detection M
Toner density detection Y
Main unit paper exit full
Right tray paper exit full
Contact thermistor EX1
(External 1)
Contact thermistor EX2
(External 2)
Contact thermistor (Lower
main)
Manual feed temperature
detection
TANSET
TBBOX
TBLTB
TBLTC
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD
TFD_R
TH_EX1
TH_EX2
TH_LM
TH_M
Function/Operation
Detects paper in the tandem
tray 1.

feed tray in the tandem tray 1
paper feed section.
Detects paper entry of
tandem tray 1.
Detects the tandem tray 1
paper pass in the transport
roller.
(Tandem tray 1)
quantity of paper in the
tandem tray 1.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Paper NO Paper YES
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN5
25
PCU
Stop
UP
CN6
17
PCU
ON
OFF
CN4
12
PCU
Pass
CN5
21
PCU
Pass
CN5
17
PCU
ON
OFF
CN5
33
PCU
CN5
29
PCU
CN5
13
PCU
Detects the tandem tray 2 liftup.

Detects paper in the tandem
tray 2.
Drives the paper feed tray lift.
Upper limit
Remaining
quantity
66% or
less
-
Paper NO
Paper YES
CN5
15
PCU
Stop
UP
CN6
13
PCU

feed roller in the tandem tray
2 paper feed section.
Detects paper pass from the
tandem tray 2.
ON
OFF
CN4
10
PCU
Pass
CN3
PCU

(Tandem tray 2)
ON
OFF
CN5
14
PCU

quantity of paper in the
tandem tray 2.
CN5
27
PCU
CN4
PCU

transport roller in the tandem
tray section.
Dehumidifies paper.
ON
Remaining
quantity
66% or
less
OFF
Detects insertion and removal

of the tandem tray.
Detects installation of the
waste toner box.
Detects the transfer belt
separation BK.
Detects the transfer belt
separation CL.
Detects the toner density (C).
Pull our
Insertion
CN3
32
PCU
NO
Install
CN8
28
PCU
BK position
CN15
PCU
CL
position
-
CN9
18
PCU
CN7
PCU
Detects the toner density (K).
CN9
19
PCU
Detects the toner density (M).
CN7
23
PCU
Detects the toner density (Y).
CN7
12
PCU
Full
CN15
PCU
Full
CN2
RD I/F
CN12
14
PCU
CN12
16
PCU
CN12
12
PCU
CN15
30
PCU
Detects the full state of the

face-down paper exit tray.
Detects the full state of the
right tray paper exit.
Detects the temperature of
the heat roller.
the heat roller.
the heat roller.
the manual feed tray and its
peripheral sections.
NOTE
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Signal name
TH_UM
TH_US
TH1
TH1_AD1/AD2
TH2
THPS
TM_C
Name [Type]
Contact thermistor UM
(Upper Main)
Contact thermistor US
(Upper Sub)
LSU thermistor 1
Non-contact thermistor
(Upper Main)
LSU thermistor 2
Secondary transfer
separation drive sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Toner motor C
[Synchronous motor]
TM_K1
Toner motor K1
[Synchronous motor]
TM_K2
Toner motor K2
[Synchronous motor]
TM_M
Toner motor M
[Synchronous motor]
TM_Y
Toner motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
TNFD

[Photo interrupter]
Vertical transport clutch
upper
Vertical transport clutch
lower
Secondary transfer
separation drive motor
[Brush motor]
Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Center)
fan motor (Center) lock
TRC1
TRC2
TURM
VFM_C
VFM_C_LD
VFM_R
VFM_R_CNT

fan motor (Right)
fan motor (Right) control
VFM_R_LD

fan motor (Right) lock
VTOD
Right transport unit open/

close sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Web end sensor
[Mechanical switch]
Web presence detection
[Mechanical switch]
[Synchronous motor]
Dehumidifying heater SW
[Seesaw switch]
WEB_END
WEB_INL
WEBM
WH_SW
WTM_D
WTM_CLK
WTM_LD

Waste toner drive motor lock
Function/Operation
the heat roller.
the heat roller.
the LSU.
the heat roller.
the LSU.
Detects separation of
secondary transfer.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
-
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN12
PCU
NOTE
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
CN12
10
PCU
CN8
11
PCU
CN12
16/2
PCU
CN8
12
PCU
Contact
CN18
PCU
CN10
27, 28
PCU
Drives with
2-phase signals.
CN10
23, 25
PCU
Drives with
2-phase signals.
CN10
19, 21
PCU
Drives with
2-phase signals.
CN10
20, 22
PCU
Drives with
2-phase signals.
CN10
24, 26
PCU
Drives with
2-phase signals.
Full
CN3
30
PCU
ON
OFF
CN4
PCU

vertical transport roller.
ON
OFF
CN3
10
PCU
Performs separation in the

secondary transfer.
Stop
Separation/
Contact
CN18
PCU
Exhausts air from the

machine.
Detects the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (center)
lock.
Exhausts air from the
machine.
Controls the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (right)
RPM.
Detects the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (right)
lock.
right transport unit.
Drive
Stop
CN19
PCU
Lock
detected
CN18
29
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN15
15
PCU
CN15
17
PCU
Lock
detected
CN15
20
PCU
Open
Close
CN3
20
PCU
END
Detection
YES
CN12
PCU
NO
CN12
11
PCU
CN8
10, 12
Driver
Drive
Stop
CN3
18
PCU
CN3
16
PCU
Lock
detected
CN3
12
PCU
Transports toner from the

toner cartridge to the
developing unit.
developing unit.
developing unit.
developing unit.
developing unit.
Detects the full state of waste
toner.
vertical transport roller.
Detects the web end.

Detects presence of the web.
Drives the fusing web
cleaning paper.
power of the dehumidifying
heater.
Stirs waste toner.
Controls the waste toner drive
motor RPM.
Detects the waste toner drive
motor lock.
PWM drive
Drives with
2-phase signals.
PWM drive
A. Combination of cassette paper size detection SW pattern and volume detection width
* SW numbers 1 o 4: When viewed from the front.
(1)
Tray 3
(2)
a. AB series
a. AB series
C3 Rear edge detection SW
A3W
A3
A4
A4R
B4
B5
B5R
A5R
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
Tray notinstalled
SS1
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
SS2
L
L
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
SS3
H
L
H
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
H
L
SS4
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
H
H
L
L
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
MIN
MAX
299
309
291
303
291
303
204
216
251
263
251
263
176
188
142.5
154.5
273.4
285.4
209.9
221.9
209.9
221.9
273.4
285.4
209.9
221.9
-
b. Inch series
A3W
A3
A4
A4R
B4
B5
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
Tray notinstalled
Tray 4
SS1
H
H
L
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
SS2
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
H
SS3
H
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
H
SS4
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
MIN
MAX
299
309
291
303
291
303
204
216
251
263
251
263
273.4
285.4
209.9
221.9
209.9
221.9
273.4
285.4
209.9
221.9
178.1
190.1
133.7
145.7
-
A3W
A3
A4
A4R
B4
B5
B5R
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11R
Tray not-installed
A3W
A3
A4
A4R
A5R
8.5 x 13
8K
16K
16KR
Tray notinstalled
SS1
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
SS2
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
SS3
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
SS4
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
H
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
MIN
MAX
299
309
291
303
291
303
204
216
142.5
154.5
209.9
221.9
264
276
264
276
264
276
189
201
189
201
-

SS2
SS3
L
H
L
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
H
L
H
H
SS4
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
SS1
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
H

SS2
SS3
L
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
SS4
L
H
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
H
SS1
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H

SS2
SS3
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
H
SS4
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
H
b. Inch series
A3W
A4R
B5
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
Tray notinstalled
c. China series
A3W
A3
A4R
8.5 x 13
8K
16K
16KR
c. China series
SS1
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
Tray notinstalled
MX-7000N
[12]
OTHERS
(3)
Operation settings
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. System settings (Administrator)

A. Login
(1)
When user authentication is not enabled
1)
Press [Admin Password] key.
2)
Press [Password] text box and enter the administrator password.
3)
Press [OK] key.
(2)
When user authentication is enabled
a. When user authentication is by login name and password

(and e-mail address)
1)
Press [Admin Login] key.
2)
Press [Password] key, and enter the administrator password.
3)
Press [OK] key.
b. Login by user number

1)
Press [Admin Login] key, and enter the administrator password.
B. System settings (Administrator) list

(1)
User control
Setting item
zUser Authentication Setting
XUser Authentication
XAuthentication Method Setting
XDevice Account Mode Setting

zOther Settings
XActions when the Limit of Pages for
Output Jobs
XThe Number of User Name Displayed
Setting on Operation Panel
XA Warning when Login Fails
XDisabling of Printing by Invalid User
XDefault Network Authentication Server
Setting
XUser Information Print
zUser List
zPage Limit Group List
zAuthority Group List
zFavorite Operation Group List *
XFavorite Operation Group Registration *
XHome Screen List *
zUser Count
Factory default setting

Disabled
Authenticate a User by
Login Name and
Password
Disabled
Job is Stopped when the
Limit of Pages is Reached
12
Middle
Disabled
60 sec.
Disabled
6 sec.
American English
Disabled
Disabled
0.0 sec.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
File
Quick File
Address Review
File
Quick File
Following the System

Settings
*2: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.

*3: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*4: When the application integration module is installed.
(4)
Energy save
Setting item
zToner Save Mode
XPrint
XCopy
zAuto Power Shut-Off
zAuto Power Shut-Off Timer
zPreheat Mode Setting
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system
settings in the Web pages.
Disabled
Disabled
*: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in

the Web pages.
(2)
Setting item
zOther Settings
XKeys Touch Sound
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point
XAuto Clear Setting
Cancel Auto Clear Timer
XMessage Time Setting
XDisplay Language Setting
XDisabling of Job Priority Operation
XDisabling of Bypass Printing
XKey Operation Setting
Disable Auto Key Repeat
XDisabling of Clock Adjustment
XDisabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
zCustomize Key Setting *1
XCopy
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
XScan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
XInternet Fax *2
(Same as Scan)
XFax *3
(Same as Scan)
XUSB Memory Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
XData Entry *4
(Same as Scan)
zHome Screen Settings *1
zDisplay Pattern Setting

Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
90 min.
15 min.
Device control
Setting item
zOther Settings
XOriginal Feeding Mode
XSaddle Stitch Position Adjust *1
XAuto Paper Selection Setting
XTandem Connection Setting
IP Address of Slave Machine
Port Number
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
XDetect Standard in Auto Color Mode
XAuto Switching of Finisher Trays
XRegistration Adjustment
XOptimization of a Hard Disk
XClear All Job Log Data
zOriginal Size Detector Setting
XOriginal Detection Size Combination
XCancel Detection at Document Glass
zDisabling of Devices
XDisabling of Document Feeder
XDisabling of Duplex
XDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette *2
XDisabling of Tray Setting
XDisabling of Finisher *3
XDisabling of Inserter *4
XDisabling of Offset
MX-7000N OTHERS 12 1

All Disabled
0.0 mm
Plain Paper
0.0.0.0
50001
Disabled
Disabled
3
Enabled
Inch-1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Setting item
XDisabling of Stapler *3
XDisabling of Punch *5
XDisabling of Color Mode *6
zFusing Control Settings

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
16 - 24 lbs. (60 - 90g/m2)
*1: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

*2: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*3: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*4: When an inserter is installed.
*5: When a punch module is installed.
*6: When a color-related problem has occurred.
(5)
Copy function settings
Setting item
zInitial Status Settings
XColor Mode
XPaper Tray
XExposure Type
XCopy Ratio
X2-Sided Copy
XOutput
zOther Settings
XCopy Exposure Adjustment
Color
Black & White
XRotation Copy Setting
XAdd or Change Extra Preset Ratios
XSetting a Maximum Number of Copies
XInitial Margin Shift Setting
Side 1
Side 2
XErase Width Adjustment
Edge Clearance Width
Center Clearance Width
XCard Shot Settings
Original Size
Fit to Page
XAutomatic Saddle Stitch *
XInitial Tab Copy Setting
XDisabling Deletion of Job Programs
XDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
XDisabling of Auto Paper Selection
XAuto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
XB/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for
Document Feeder
XB/W Quick Scan from Document Glass
zColor Adjustments
XInitial Color Balance Setting
XAuto Color Calibration

Full Color
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Auto
100%
1-Side to 1-Side
5
5
Enabled
999
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Disabled
Enabled
1/2"
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Factory default state

DHCP
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled

Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
3
3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
60 sec.
Enabled
Auto
Enabled
Auto
Switch at End of Job
Image send settings
Setting item
zOperation Settings
XOther Settings
Default Display Settings
Network settings
Setting item
zIP Address Setting
zEnable TCP/IP
zEnable NetWare
zEnable EtherTalk
zEnable NetBEUI
zReset the NIC
zPing Command
Printer settings
Setting item
zDefault Settings
XProhibit Notice Page Printing
XProhibit Test Page Printing
XA4/Letter Size Auto Change
XPrint Density Level
Color
Black & White
XBypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in
Bypass Tray
Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Paper Select
X Job Spool Queuing
zInterface Settings
XHexadecimal Dump Mode
XI/O Timeout
XEnable USB Port
XUSB Port Emulation Switching
XEnable Network Port
XNetwork Port Emulation Switching
XPort Switching Method
zAuto Color Calibration
(8)
*: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(6)
(7)
Hold settings for a while after

scanning has been completed
Switch Automatically to Copy
Mode Screen
Initial Resolution Setting
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored
Scan
Internet Fax *1
Fax *2
Default Exposure Settings
Original Image Type
Moir Reduction
Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
Scan Complete Sound Setting
The Number of File Name/Subject/
Body Keys Displayed Setting
The Number of Direct Address Keys
Displayed Setting
Disable Switching of Display Order
Hold Setting for Received Data Print
XSettings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disable Registering Destination on
Web Page *3
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tool *3
XSettings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send
Mode
Disable Selection From Address
Book
Disable Direct Entry
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Transmission *1
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *2
zScan Settings
XOther Settings
Scan (fax when fax is

installed)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
200 X 200 dpi
200 X 100 dpi
Standard
Auto
Text
Disabled
Disabled
Middle
12
10
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Setting item
Default Sender Set
Default Color Mode Settings
Black & White
Color Mode
Disable Change of B/W Setting in
Auto Mode
Initial File Format Setting
File Type
Black & White
Color/Grayscale
Specified Pages per File
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Black & White
Color/Grayscale
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)
Maximum Size of Data Attachments
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)
Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Display Bcc Address on the Job
Status Screen
Disable Scan Function
USB Memory Scan
PC Scan
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
XDefault Address Setting
zInternet Fax Settings *1
XInternet Fax Default Settings
Internet Fax Own Name and Address
Set
Auto Wake Up Print
Compression Setting
Speaker Volume Setting
Receive Signal
Communication Error Signal
Original Print on Transaction Report
Mono 2
Auto, Grayscale
Disabled
PDF
MMR (G4)
Medium
Disabled
MH (G3)
Medium
Unlimited
Unlimited
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
MH (G3)
Middle
Middle
Print Out Error Report
Only
Transaction Report Print Select Setting

Single Sending
Print Out Error Report
Only
Broadcasting
Print Out All Report
Receiving
No Printed Report
Activity Report Print Select Setting
Auto Print at Memory Full
Disabled
Print Daily at Designated Time
Disabled
Body Text Print Select Setting
Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disabled
XInternet Fax Send Settings
Internet Fax Reception Report On/Off Disabled
Setting
Internet Fax Reception Report
1 hour
Request Timeout Setting
Number of Resend Times at
2
Reception Error
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited
Rotation Sending Setting
All Enabled
Printing Page Number at Receiver
Enabled
XInternet Fax Receive Settings
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Enabled
Duplex Reception Setting
Disabled
Set Address for Data Forwarding
A3 RX Reduce
Disabled
POP3 Communication Timeout
60 sec.
Setting
Reception Check Interval Setting
5 min.
Internet Fax Output Setting
XAnti Junk Mail/Domain Name Setting
All Invalid
(9)
Document filing settings
Setting item
zOther Settings
XDefault Mode Settings
XSort Method Setting
XAdministrator Authority Setting
Delete File
Delete Folder
XDelete All Quick Files
Delete
Delete quick files at power up
(protected files excluded)
XDefault Color Mode Settings
Color
Black & White
XDefault Exposure Settings
Original Image Type
Moir Reduction
XInitial Resolution Settings
XColor Data Compression Ratio Setting
XDefault Output Tray
XScan Complete Sound Setting
XDisable Stamp for Reprinting
XBatch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
zDocument Output Options
XPrint
Copy
Print
Scan Send
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet
Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Scan to HDD
XScan Send
Copy
Scan Send
Fax)
Scan to HDD
XInternet Fax Send *1
Copy
Scan Send
Fax)
Scan to HDD
XFax Send *2
Copy
Scan Send
Fax)
Scan to HDD

Sharing Mode
Date
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Mono 2
Auto
Text
Disabled
600 x 600 dpi
Medium
Middle
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(10) List print (Administrator)

Setting item
zAdministrator Settings List
zImage Sending Activity Report
zData Receive/Forward List
zWeb Settings List *1
zMetadata Set List *2
*1: When network connection is enabled.
*2: When the application integration module is installed.

(11) Security settings

Setting item
zSetting of SSL
XHTTPS
XIPP-SSL
XFTPS
XSMTP-SSL
XPOP3-SSL
XLevel of Encryption
*1: When a large capacity tray is installed.

zUser Control
XDisabling of Printing by Invalid User
zOperation Settings
XCancel Auto Clear Timer
XDisabling of Job Priority Operation
XDisabling of Bypass Printing
XDisable Auto Key Repeat
XDisabling of Clock Adjustment
XDisabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
zDevice Control
XDisabling of Document Feeder
XDisabling of Duplex
XDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette *1
XDisabling of Tray Setting
XDisabling of Finisher *2
XDisabling of Inserter *3
XDisabling of Offset
XDisabling of Stapler *2
XDisabling of Punch *4
XDisabling of Color Mode *5
XDisabling of Master Machine Mode
XDisabling of Slave Machine Mode
zCopy Function Settings
XDisabling Deletion of Job Programs
XDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
XDisabling of Auto Paper Selection
zPrinter Settings
XProhibit Notice Page Printing
XProhibit Test Page Printing
XExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper
Select
zImage Send Settings
XOther Disabling
Disable Switching of Display Order
Disable Scan Function
USB Memory Scan
PC Scan
XSettings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disable Registering Destination on
Web Page *6
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tools *6
XSettings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send
Mode
Disable Selection from Address Book
Disable Direct Entry
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Transmission *7
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *8
zDocument Filing Settings
XDisable Stamp for Reprinting
XBatch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
*5: When a color-related problem has occurred.

(13) Change Administrator password

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
*3: When an inserter is installed.

*4: When a punch module is installed.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
(12) Enable/disable settings

Setting item
*2: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
Setting item
User
Administrator
Factory default account

users
admin
Factory default password

users
admin
(14) Product key

Setting item
zPS3 Expansion Kit
zInternet Fax Expansion Kit
zE-mail Alert and Status
zApplication Integration Module
zSerial Number
* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the

peripheral devices installed.
(15) Initialize and/or store settings

Setting item
zRestore Factory Defaults
zStore Current Configuration
zRestore Configuration
2. Paper JAM code

A. JAM cause code list
(1)
PCU JAM cause
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
TRAY1
CPFD1_S1
CPFD1_N2
CPFD1_N3
CPFD1_N4
CPFD1_S2
CPFD1_S3
CPFD1_S4
TRAY2
CPFD2_N3
CPFD2_N4
CPFD2_S2
CPFD2_S3
CPFD2_S4
PPD1_N1
PPD1_N2
PPD1_N3
PPD1_N4
PPD1_NM
PPD1_NL
PPD1_NA
PPD1_S1
PPD1_S2
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SM
PPD1_SL
PPD1_SA
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N2
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Tray 1 paper feed JAM (T1PPD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Tray 2 paper feed JAM (T2PPD not-reached JAM)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Code
PPD2_N3
PPD2_N4
PPD2_NM
PPD2_NL
PPD2_NA
PPD2_S1
PPD2_S2
PPD2_S3
PPD2_S4
PPD2_SM
PPD2_SL
PPD2_SA
PPD2_PRI
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
APPD1_N
APPD1_S
APPD2_N
APPD2_S
TRAY3
DPFD1_N4
DPFD1_S3
DPFD1_S4
TRAY4
DPFD2_S4
MFT
MPFD_S
LCC
LPFD_SL
SIZE_ILG
MTR_ILG
FJPID_N
FJPID_S
FJPOD_N
FJPOD_S
FED_N
FED_S
FFPD_N
FFPD_S
FEXIT_S
FSTPL
FPNCH
FDOP
FIN_TIME
TREG_SEN_N
TREG_SEN_S
THI_SEN_N
THI_SEN_S
REG_SEN_N
REG_SEN_S
TIM_SEN_N
TIM_SEN_S
HI_SEN_NI
HI_SEN_NP
HI_SEN_S
H_SEN_NF
H_SEN_NB
H_SEN_SF
Code content
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2 remaining JAM
Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached
JAM)
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached
JAM)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD notreached)
MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Size illegal JAM
Motor driver trouble JAM
Interface transport inlet sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport inlet sensor remaining JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
Finisher inlet sensor not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet sensor remaining JAM
Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle remaining JAM
Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
Staple JAM
Punch JAM
Finisher door open
Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
Inserter tab sheet resist sensor not-reached JAM
Inserter tab sheet resist sensor remaining JAM
Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor remaining JAM
Inserter resist sensor not-reached JAM
Inserter resist sensor remaining JAM
Inserter timing sensor not-reached JAM
Inserter timing sensor remaining JAM
Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when
feeding with the inserter)
Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when
feeding with the main unit)
Inserter paper exit sensor remaining JAM
Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
discharging from the reverse path)
Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
Code
H_SEN_SB
TBH_SEN_NF
TBH_SEN_NB
TBH_SEN_SF
TBH_SEN_SB
FHS_N
FHS_S
FSFS_N
FSFS_S
FSHS_N
FSHS_S
INS_EJCT
T1PPD1_S1
T1PPD2_N1
T1PPD2_S1
T2PPD_N3
T2PPD_N4
T2PPD_S2
T2PPD_S3
T2PPD_S4
C3PFD_N4
C3PFD_S3
C3PFD_S4
C4PFD_S4
LPPD_NL
LPPD_SL
(2)
Code content
Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
discharging from the reverse path)
Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
(when entering the reverse path)
Inserter tab paper sheet reverse sensor not-reached
JAM (when discharging from the reverse path)
(when entering the reverse path)
(when discharging from the reverse path)
Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
Finisher saddle transport not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle transport remaining JAM
Finisher saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle paper exit remaining JAM
Inserter not-delivered JAM
T1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed paper)
T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
paper)
paper)
LPPD not-reached JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
LPPD remaining JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
SCU JAM cause
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
SPPD1_N
SPPD1_S
SPPD2_N
SPPD2_S
SPPD3_N
SPPD3_S
SPPD4_N
SPPD4_S
SPPD5_N
SPPD5_S
SPOD_N
SPOD_S
SPRDMD_S
SPSD_SCN
SPPD2_NR
SPPD2_SR
ICU_REQ
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD remaining JAM
Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU factor stop JAM
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only

A. Outline
The Hidden Page for Serviceman Only is the web page used for a
serviceman to backup user data and system setup data of the
machine.
The backup data can be imported to another machine, and a profile
and fonts can be added from the web page.
B. Operating procedure
1)
Boot the browser.
2)
Enter "***.***.*** (IP address)/service_login.html" to the

address column of the browser, and press ENTER key.
3)
Enter the password, and log in.

Password: service
1)
2)
3)
* The password can be changed optionally.

1)
Select "Password Setting" on the menu bar.
2)
Enter a new password.
3)
Enter the new password again on the reconfirmation column.
4)
Press [Submit] button.
2)
1)
3)
4)
(1)
Font/Form Download
a. Font Download
1)
5)
2)
3)
4)
1)
Select "Font/Form Download" on the menu bar.
b. Deleting downloaded fonts
2)
Select "Resource Type" in the pull-down menu.

(Example: Font/Form of PCL/PostScript, macro, etc.)
1)
Select fonts to be deleted from the lists of the downloaded

fonts, and click [Delete] button.
3)
Click [Browse] button and select font files.
2)
4)
Click [Download] button, and the selected fonts are downloaded to the HDD.
The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and

the selected fonts are deleted.
3)
To initialize all the resources, press the initial button.
5)
The list of the downloaded fonts and the use rate (%) of the
HDD are displayed.
4)
The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and

all the downloaded files are deleted.
(2)
Output Profile Settings
1)
4)
2)
3)
1)
Select "Output Profile Settings" on the menu bar.
**Reference**
2)
Click [Browse] button and select an output profile.
3)
Click [Add] button to add an output profile.
1. The difference between the output A profile and the output B

profile is:
4)
The added profile is displayed on the list, and the newly added
file becomes the default.
(If no file is added, the file registered when shipping serves as
the default.)
Output profile A: Photo/CAD

Output profile B: Standard/Graphic
2. When the PS option is installed, the output C profile/Pantone
table setting can be made. (The setting procedure is the same.)
(3)
Device Cloning
a. Backup
1)
Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar.
b. Import
2)
Select an item to be backed up.
1)
Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar.
3)
Press [Execute] button to execute backup.

(File name: *****.bin)
2)
Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup

file (file name: *****.bin).
3)
Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
(4)
Filing Data Backup
a. Backup
2)
1)
3)
4)
1)
Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar.
b. Import
2)
Select one of the radio buttons of the storage space for a file to
be exported.
(Main Folder/Quick File Folder/Custom Folder)
1)
Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar.
2)
Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup

file (File name: *****.bin).
3)
The index/number of display can be changed with the pulldown menu to specify the retrieval condition.
3)
Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
4)
Press [Execute] button to execute backup.

(File name: *****.bin)
(5)
Jog Log
a. Save Job Log
2)
1)
1)
Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.
2)
Click [Save] button to execute backup of the job log.

(File name: *****.csv)
b. View Job Log

1)
Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.
2)
Click "View Job Log."
3)
Click [Show] button, and the job log is displayed on the

browser.
3)
MX-7000N
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
(1)
Front cabinet
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Parts
1. Disassembly and assembly
Front cabinet
A. Cabinet
Parts
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Rear cabinet lower
Upper cabinet rear cover
Upper cabinet left
Upper cabinet right
Left cabinet
Right lower door
Right cabinet rear
Right cabinet lower
LCC lower cabinet
Front cabinet upper
Operation panel base plate
Frame cover R
Right lower door cover
Upper cabinet rear
Toner cover
Paper exit tray
Paper exit rear
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
Page
A- 1
A- 2
a
A- 2
A- 2
AAAA-
3
3
4
4
A- 5
AAAA-
1)
Open the front cabinet (A).
5
6
7
8
s
m
q
f
2)
a
l
Remove the bands (B). Remove the hinges (C), and remove
the front cabinet (A).
n
j
h
p
d
a
A
r
e
b
g
c
MX-7000N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1
(2)
Rear cabinet, Rear cabinet lower
(3)
Parts
b
c
Rear cabinet
Rear cabinet lower
Parts
b
1)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the upper cabinet rear
cover (B).
* When installing, engage the pawls (C).
1)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cabinet (B).
A
d B
(4)
Upper cabinet left, Upper cabinet right

Parts
e
f
Upper cabinet left

Upper cabinet right
B b
2)
Loosen the screws (C). Remove the screws (D). Remove the
rear cabinet lower (E).
c E
D
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the (3) Upper
cabinet rear cover.)
2)
Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the [C] DSPF SECTION)
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the [D]
SCANNER SECTION.)
4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the (12) Upper cabinet rear.)
5)
Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
B
C
A
6)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cabinet left (D)
and the upper cabinet right (E).
3)
Pull out the handles (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the left cabinet (E).
* When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the rear side.
D e
C
E f
F
(5)
E
g
Left cabinet
Parts
g
(6)
Left cabinet
Right lower door

Parts
h
Right lower door
h
1)
Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).

1)
B
A
2)
Open the front cabinet (B).

2)
Open the right lower door (C).
3)
Remove the resin ring (D), and remove the right lower door
(C).
(8)
Right cabinet lower, LCC lower cabinet

Parts
j
k
Right cabinet lower

LCC lower cabinet
k
j
C
h
(7)
1)
Remove the right lower door. (Refer to the "(6) Right lower
door".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCC cover F (B) and
the LCC cover R (C).
* When installing, be careful to difference of the shapes.
Right cabinet rear

Parts
i
Right cabinet rear
i
B
A
1)
Remove the screw (A). Push down the right cabinet rear. Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the right cabinet rear (B) so
that slide to the front side.
3)
Remove the screws (D). Remove the right cabinet lower (E).
* When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the lower side.
j E
l
B
4)
Remove the screws (G), and remove the LCC lower cabinet
(H).
H k
G
(9)
Front cabinet upper, Operation panel base plate

l
m
4)
Remove the screws (E). Disengage the pawls (F), and remove
the operation panel base plate (G).
Parts
Front cabinet upper
Operation panel base plate
G m
m
E
1)
* When installing, engage the pawls (F) to the holes (H) of the
scanner unit, fix with the screws (E) while supporting from
lower direction for engaging the pawls (F).
F
H
B
A
E
2)
Open the toner cover (C).
(10) Frame cover R

Parts
Frame cover R
3)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the front cabinet upper
(E).
1)
Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "(9) Front cabinet upper, operation panel base plate".)
2)
3)
Turn the blue screw (B) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (C).
7)
Remove the screw (J), and remove the knob (K). Remove the
screws (L), and remove the frame cover R (M).
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary transfer belt.
M n
B
J
K
4)
Remove the screw (D). Hold the drum fixing knob (E) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
fixing knob (E).
(11) Right lower door cover

Parts
o
Right lower door cover
F
o
5)
1)
Pull out the fixing cover (G).
A
G
6)
Loosen the screws (H), and open the process section cover (I).
2)
Open the right lower door (B).
I
H
H
B
3)
(12) Upper cabinet rear
Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (C).
Parts
p
Upper cabinet rear
4)
Pull out the paper feed tray (D).
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "(3) Upper
cabinet rear cover".)
2)
Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION")
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "[D]
SCANNER SECTION".)
4)
Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screw (B), and

remove the earth wire (C).
D
C
5)
5)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the right lower door cover
(F).
Remove the screws (D), lift the upper cabinet rear (E), and disconnect the connector (F).
* When installing, engage the pawl (G) of the upper cabinet
rear to the upper cabinet right (H).
F o
E
E p
G
H
(13) Toner cover, Paper exit tray, Paper exit tray rear
4)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the paper exit tray (F).
Parts
q
r
s
Toner cover
Paper exit tray
Paper exit tray rear
E
r
s
r
E
5)
1)
Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the "[K]

TONER SUPPLY SECTION".)
2)
Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the toner cover (B).
Remove the screws (G), and remove the paper exit tray rear
(H).
s H
G
A
G
B q
3)
Remove the paper arm (C), and remove the paper exit full
detection actuator (D).
C
D
CN125
1
CN_CHK_OUT
2
LCD_CLK+
3
LCD_CLK4
D-GND
5
LCD_DAT2+
6
LCD_DAT27
8
D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
9
LCD_DAT110
D-GND
11
LCD_DAT0+
12
LCD_DAT013
D-GND
14
DISP
15
3.3V_EXT
16
TP1418
17
VCONT
18
AVCC
19
20
SC_TEMP
21
P-GND
24V_EXT
22
TP1449
23
/CCFT1
24
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
25
26
X2CN
27
Y2CN
28
X1CN
Y1CN
29
D-GND
30
SLW30S-1C7
D-GND
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCN-CNT
PWB
MX-7000N OPERATION PANEL B 1
Name
Original cover SW
Operaton panel power supply switch
Function/Operation
Trigger for document size detection
Turns ON or OFF the main DC power supply
Name
Touch panel
LCD module
LCD backlight
LVDS PWB
LCD INV PWB
MFP OPE-JPWB
Document detection light collector PWB
Function/Operation
Executes the various adjustments and the setting operation
Displays the various menu and information
Backlight for LCD
Outputs the display signal for LCD
Drives the backlight that outputs the display signal for LCD
Outputs the key operation signal
Emits light for document size detection
Outputs the document size detection signal
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
PDSEL0
1
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
BM06B-PASS-TB
1
2
3
3
2
1
MFP OPE
PWB
CN3
1
n PWRSW
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
BM03B-PASS-TB
S02(8.0)B-BHS CN2
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT
2
S02(8.0)B-BHS CN3
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT
2
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
F-GND
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
n PWRSW
D-GND
D-GND
LCD INV
PWB CD
CN136
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
/CCFT
2
D-GND
1
24V
S03B-PASK-2
CN1
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
LVDS-CD
PWB
CN1
26
D-GND
3.3V
25
24
5VN
D-GND
23
22
PD
21
PDSEL0
20
PDSEL1
19
PDSEL2
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
14
/F0
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
9
D-GND
n PWRSW
8
7 n WU_KEY
6 n INFO_LED
POW_LED
5
4
WU_LED
D-GND
3
5V2
2
D-GND
1
52610-2671(MOLEX)
VSS
YD
LP
XCK
VSS
Vcon
DISP
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
VSS
VSS
LCD UN
FH12-22S-0.5SH(55) (HIROSE)
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MX-7000N
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
CN135
D-GND
1
3.3V
2
3
5V3
4
D-GND
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
7
8
PDSEL2
/KEYIN
9
SEG0
10
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
/F2
15
/F3
16
/BZR
17
18
D-GND
n PWRSW
19
20
n WU_KEY
21
n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5V2
26
D-GND
SLW26S-1C7
CN4
/YL(Y1)
1
XH(X1)
2
CN1
YH(Y2)
3
30
D-GND
/XL(X2)
4
29 CN_CHK_OUT
28
LCD_CLK+ 52271-0469(MOLEX)
27
LCD_CLKCN3
26
D-GND
1
D-GND
25 LCD_DAT2+
YD
2
24 LCD_DAT2LP
3
23
D-GND
CP
4
22 LCD_DAT1+
D-GND
5
21 LCD_DAT1VCONT
6
20
D-GND
DISPout
7
19 LCD_DAT0+
3.3V
8
18 LCD_DAT03.3V
9
D-GND
17
3.3V
10
DISP
16
D-GND
11
3.3V_EXT
15
D-GND
12
14
NC
D0
13
VCONT
13
D1
14
AVCC
12
D2
15
11
SC_TEMP
D3
16
P-GND
10
D4
17
9
24V_EXT
D5
18
NC
8
D6
19
7
/CCFT1
D7
20
6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
D-GND
21
X2CN
5
D-GND
22
4
Y2CN
52435-2271(MOLEX)
X1CN
3
2
Y1CN
D-GND
1
CN2
52271-3079(MOLEX)
/CCFT
1
D-GND
2
24V
3
SM03B-PASS-1-TB
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
OCSW
1
6
2
PWRSW
2. Operational descriptions
(1)
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-J PWB, the
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
Operation panel unit

Unit
1
The MFP OPE-J PWB is connected to the document detection light

collector PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.

A. Operation panel unit
1
Unit
Parts
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
POWER_SW_PWB
MFP OPE-JPWB
a
b
c
d
e
f
Page
B- 3
B- 3
B- 3
B- 4
B- 4
B- 4
1)
Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and
the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the screw (A) and the earth wire (B). Disconnect the
connector (C). Remove the screws (D).
D
D
1-b
1-a
1-c
D
D
1-d
A
1
1-f
1-e
3)
Raise the operation panel unit (E) upright. Disconnect the flat
cables (F).
E 1
a. LCD INV PWB, LVDS PWB

Unit
a
b
b. LCD module
Parts
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
Unit
Parts
c
LCD module
1-b
1-a
1-c
1)
OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation

panel unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and disconnect the connectors (B)

and the flat cables (C), and remove the LCD INV PWB (D) and
LVDS PWB (E).
1)
OUTFIT".)
2)

panel unit".)
3)
Disconnect the connectors (A) and the flat cables (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the LCD holder (D).
A
1-b E
A
A
A
C
D 1-a
4)
Remove the LCD module (E). Remove the flat cable (F).
E 1-c
c. Touch panel
d. POWER_SW_PWB, MFP OPE-JPWB
Unit
Parts
d
Touch panel
Unit
e
f
Parts
POWER_SW_PWB
MFP OPE-J PWB
1-f
1-e
1-d
1)
OUTFIT".)
1)
OUTFIT".)
2)

panel unit".)
2)

panel unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCD unit (B).
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
the POWER_SW_PWB (C).
B
A
A
A
C 1-e
4)
4)
Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E) and the
mylar (F). Remove the MFP OPE-J PWB (G).
Disconnect the flat cable (C), and remove the touch panel (D).
B
F
E
D
E
E
G 1-f
D 1-d
1
SCOV
SPWS
SPFC
SPPD1
SPED1
SLUM
STUD
SPRDMD
4
SPED2
STLD
SPLS1
SPLS2
MX-7000N DSPF SECTION C 1

1
2
3
1
2
3
D_SPLS2
SGND
5V(sensor)
175487-3
SPUM
D_SPLS1
SGND
5V(sensor)
175487-3
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
3
1 VAREF
2
2 D_SPWS
1
3 AGND
HNR-03-H
175487-3
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_SOCV
3
2
1
3
2
1
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_SPED1
175487-3
3
2
1
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_STUD
175487-3
PHR-3
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
8
9
7
4
5
6
CN1
D_SPLS1
SGND
5V(sensor)
D_SPLS2
SGND
5V(sensor)
VAREF
D_SPWS
AGND
B9B-PH-K-S
CN5
1 D_SLUM/B
2 D_SLUM/A
3 D_SLUMB
4 D_SLUMA
5 24V_TR
5B-PH-K-S
CN7
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA
5 24V_SPUM
6 24V_SPUM
6B-PH-K-S
SGND
/D_SPFC
24V_TR
5V(sensor)
D_SPPD1
SGND
5V(sensor)
D_RANDOM
SGND
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_STUD
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_SPED1
5V(sensor)
SGND
D_SOCV
B18B-PHDSS-B
N4
18
16
15
13
14
17
11
12
4
9
3
10
7
2
8
5
1
6
C N3
D_SPUM_VREF 1
D_SPFM_VREF 2
D_SPOM_VREF1 3
D_SPOM_VREF2 4
D_SELA
5
D_SELB
6
D_SELC
7
D_SELOUT
8
VAREF
9
D_SPWS
10
AGND
11
D_SPFC
12
D_SRRC
13
D_SRRBC
14
D_SPFM_M1
15
D_SPFM_M2
16
D_SPFM_CLK 17
D_SPFM_DIREC 18
D_STRRC
19
D_STRRBC
20
D_STMPS
21
/D_STRC
22
5V
23
SGND
24
B 24B-PHDSS-B
CN6
5V
1
SGND
2
D_SPFFAN
3
SGND
4
D_SPPD1
5
D_RANDOM
6
D_SOCV
7
D_SPOD
8
D_SPUM_INA
9
D_SPUM_IN/A 10
D_SPUM_INB
11
D_SPUM_IN/B 12
D_SLUMA
13
D_SULM/A
14
D_SLUMB
15
D_SLUM/B
16
D_SPOM_ENA 17
D_SPOM_STEP 18
D_SPOM_MODE 19
D_SPOM_DIR 20
24V
21
PGND
22
24V
23
PGND
24
24V
25
PGND
26
B26B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER PWB
5V(sensor)
D_RANDOM
SGND
PHR-3
5V(sensor)
D_SPPD1
SGND
PHNR-03-H
N2
4 D_SPED2
1 SGND
3 5V(sensor)
6 D_STLD
2 SGND
5 5V(sensor)
8 D_SPOD
9 SGND
7 5V(sensor)
10 NC( SGND )
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN610
1 D_SPUM_VREF
2 D_SPFM_VREF
3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPOM_VREF2
5 D_SELA
6 D_SELB
7 D_SELC
8 D_SELOUT
9 VAREF
10 D_SPWS
11 AGND
12 D_SPFC
13 D_SRRC
14 D_SRRBC
15 D_SPFM_M1
16 D_SPFM_M2
17 D_SPFM_CLK
18 D_SPFM_DIREC
19 D_STRRC
20 D_STRRBC
21 D_STMPS
22 /D_STRC
23 5V
24 SGND
B 24B-PHDSS-B
CN 609
1 5V
2 SGND
3 D_SPFFAN
4 SGND
5 D_SPPD1
6 D_RANDOM
7 D_SOCV
8 D_SPOD
9 D_SPU M_INA
10 D_SPU M_IN/A
11 D_SPU M_INB
12 D_SPU M_IN/B
13 D_SLUMA
14 D_SULM/A
15 D_SLUMB
16 D_SLUM/B
17 D_SPOM_ENA
18 D_SPOM_STEP
19 D_SPOM_MODE
20 D_SPOM_DIR
21 24V
22 PGND
23 24V
24 PGND
25 24V
26 PGND
B 26B-PHDSS-B
MX-7000N
[C]
DSPF SECTION
VAREF
D_SPWS
AGND
1
2
3
1
2
3
2 /D_SPFC
1
1 24V_TR
2
175487-3
D_STLD
SGND
5V(sensor)
175487-3
D_SPED2
SGND
5V(sensor)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
A. Paper feed section
DSPF CNT PWB
Signal
SCOV
SLUM
SPED1
SPED2
SPFC
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPPD1
SPRDMD
SPUM
SPWS
STLD
STUD
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
DSPF upper door open/close sensor
DSPF lift-up motor
DSPF document upper limit sensor
DSPF document length detection short
sensor
DSPF document length detection long
sensor
DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor
DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor
Name
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Function/Operation
Detects open/close of upper door
Lifts up/down the paper feed tray
Detects the upper limit of the document
Detects the existing of document on the paper feed tray
Controls the ON/OFF of the roller on the paper feed section
Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
Detects pass of the paper
Detects paper size at the random paper feed
Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
Detects width of document on the paper feed tray
Detects the lower limit of the paper feed tray
Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray
Function/Operation
Picks up the document, and transports to the paper feed roller.
Executes the document feed operation
Separates a document to prevent double-feed
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed
Signal
SPPD2
SPUM
STRC
STRRBC
STRRC
No.
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
PHNR-03-H
3
24V_TR
2
1 /D_STRRBC
PHNR-02-H
2
24V_TR
1 /D_STRRC
SMR-02V-N
1 24V_TR
2 /D_STRC
SMP-0
DRIVER PWB
CN7
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA
5 24V_SPUM
6 24V_SPUM
B6B-PH-K-S
CN9
22 NC
21 NC
16 NC
15 NC
18 /D_STRC
14 24V_TR
27 24V_TR
25 PGND
28 FAN_LOCK
26 NC(FAN_PWM)
12 24V_TR
20 /D_SRRC
10 24V_TR
9 /D_SRRBC
24 24V_SPF
23 24V_SPF
17 D_SPFMA
11 D_SPFM/B
19 D_SPFM
13 D_SPFM/A
8 24V_TR
7 /D_STRRC
6 24V_TR
5 /D_STRRBC
4 24V_TR
3 /D_STMP
2 D_STSET
1 SGND
B28B-PHDSS-B
C N3
D_SPUM_VREF 1
D_SPFM_VREF 2
D_SPOM_VREF1 3
D_SPOM_VREF2 4
D_SELA
5
D_SELB
6
D_SELC
7
D_SELOUT
8
VAREF
9
D_SPWS
10
AGND
11
D_SPFC
12
D_SRRC
13
D_SRRBC
14
D_SPFM_M1
15
D_SPFM_M2
16
D_SPFM_CLK 17
D_SPFM_DIREC 18
D_STRRC
19
D_STRRBC
20
D_STMPS
21
/D_STRC
22
5V
23
SGND
24
B 24B-PHDSS-B
CN6
5V
1
SGND
2
D_SPFFAN
3
SGND
4
D_SPPD1
5
D_RANDOM
6
D_SOCV
7
D_SPOD
8
D_SPUM_INA
9
D_SPUM_IN/A
10
D_SPUM_INB
11
D_SPUM_IN/B
12
D_SLUMA
13
D_SULM/A
14
D_SLUMB
15
D_SLUM/B
16
D_SPOM_ENA
17
D_SPOM_ STEP 18
D_SPO M_ MODE 19
D_SPOM_DIR 20
24V
21
PGND
22
24V
23
PGND
24
24V
25
26
PGND
B26B-PHDSS-B
CN610
1 D_SPUM_VREF
2 D_SPFM_VREF
3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPOM_VREF2
5 D_SELA
6 D_SELB
7 D_SELC
8 D_SELOUT
9 VAREF
10 D_SPWS
11 AGND
12 D_SPFC
13 D_SRRC
14 D_SRRBC
15 D_SPFM_M1
16 D_SPFM_M2
17 D_SPFM_CLK
18 D_SPFM_DIREC
19 D_STRRC
20 D_STRRBC
21 D_STMPS
22 /D_STRC
23 5V
24 SGND
B 24B-PHDSS-B
CN 609
1 5V
2 SGND
3 D_SPFFAN
4 SGND
5 D_SPPD1
6 D_RANDOM
7 D_SOCV
8 D_SPOD
9 D_SPU M_INA
10 D_SPU M_IN/A
11 D_SPU M_INB
12 D_SPU M_IN/B
13 D_SLUMA
14 D_SULM/A
15 D_SLUMB
16 D_SLUM/B
17 D_SPO M_ENA
18 D_SPOM_ STEP
19 D_SPO M_ MODE
20 D_SPO M_ DIR
21 24V
22 PGND
23 24V
24 PGND
25 24V
26 PGND
B 26B-PHDSS-B
B. Upper transport section
DSPF CNT PWB

CN608
D_SOCD
13
GND
16
7
5V
D_ROCD
18
GND
17
5V
8
GND
1
D_SPPD2
9
5V
3
GND
2
D_SPPD3
11
5V
4
GND
14
D_SPPD4
10
5
5V
GND
15
D_SPPD5
12
6
5V
STRRC
SPPD2
Name
DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
Function/Operation
Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 1
Brakes the No.1 resist roller
Controls the ON/OFF of the No.1 resist roller
Name
No.1 resist roller (Drive)
Transport roller (Drive)
Function/Operation
Resists paper transporting
Transports the paper from the No.1 resist roller to the No.2 resist roller
1
2
3
SGND
D_SPPD2
5V
B3B-PH-K-S
STRC
STRRBC
SPUM
C. Lower transport section
DRIVER PWB
3
4
1
2
3
SGND
D_SPPD4
5V
B3B-PH-K-S
SGND
D_SPPD3
5V
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
SGND
D_SPPD5
5V
B3B-PH-K-S
Name
Platen roller
Function/Operation
Synchronizes the edge of document and the scanning start point
Applies a pressure to paper to prevent variation of paper
Transports the paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3
Transports the paper from the transport roller 3 to the paper exit roller
4
2
SMP-0 6 V-N C
1
2
3
3
2
1
SPPD5
1
2
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-03-H
1
2
3
SMR-0 6V-N
D_SPF M/B
D_SPF M/A
D_SPFM B
D_SPF MA
24V_SPF M
24V_SPF M
/D_SRRBC
24V_TR
PHNR-03-H
SGND
D_SPPD5
5V
SPPD4
C N9
/D_STMP
24V_TR
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
SRRC
SGND
D_STSET
/D_STRRBC
24V_TR
20
12
26
/D_STRRC
24V_TR
28
25
13
19
11
17
23
24
/D_SRRC
24V_TR
NC( FAN _PWM)
27
14
9
10
FAN_LOCK
PGND
18
15
/D_SRRBC
24V_TR
24V_TR
24V_TR
D_SPF M/A
D_SPFM B
D_SPF M/B
D_SPF MA
24V_SPF M
24V_SPF M
/D_STRC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
16
21
22
B28B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 D_SPO M_ MODE
20 D_SPO M_ DIR
21 24V
CN608
D_SOCD
13
GND
16
5V
7
D_ROCD
18
GND
17
5V
8
GND
1
D_SPPD2
9
5V
3
GND
2
D_SPPD3
11
5V
4
GND
14
D_SPPD4
10
5V
5
GND
15
D_SPPD5
12
5V
6
B18B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
SPPD3
1
NC
NC
NC
CN6
5V
SGND
D_SPFFAN
SGND
D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_ SPU M_INA
D_ SPU M_IN/A
D_ SPU M_INB
D_ SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B
D_ SPO M_ENA
D_ SPO M_STEP
19
20
21
22 PGND
23 24V
24 P GND
25 24V
26 PGND
B26 B-PHDSS-B
CN 609
5V
SGND
D_SPFFAN
SGND
D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPOM_MODE
D_ SPO M_ DIR
24V
22
23
24
25
26
CN 610
1 D_SPUM_VREF
2 D_SPFM_VREF
3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPOM_VREF2
5 D_SELA
6 D_SELB
7 D_SELC
8 D_SELOUT
9 VAREF
10 D_SPWS
11 AGND
12 D_SPFC
13 D_SRRC
14 D_SRRBC
15 D_SPFM_M1
16 D_SPFM_M2
17 D_SPFM_CLK
18 D_SPFM_DIREC
19 D_STRRC
20 D_STRRBC
21 D_STMPS
22 /D_STRC
23 5V
24 SGND
B 24 B-PHDSS-B
PGND
24V
PGND
24V
P GND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B
C N3
D_SPUM_VREF
1
D_SPFM_VREF
2
D_SPOM_VREF1
3
4
D_SPOM_VREF2
D_SELA
5
D_SELB
6
D_SELC
7
D_SELOUT
8
VAREF
9
D_SPWS
10
AGND
11
D_SPFC
12
D_SRRC
13
D_SRRBC
14
D_SPFM_M1
15
D_SPFM_M2
16
D_SPFM_CLK
17
D_SPFM_DIREC
18
D_STRRC
19
D_STRRBC
20
D_STMPS
21
/D_STRC
22
5V
23
SGND
24
B 24B-PHDSS-B
Function/Operation
Drives the transport roller
Brakes the No.2 resist roller
Controls the ON/OFF of the No.2 resist roller
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Signal
SPFM
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SRRBC
SRRC
SRRBC
DSPF CNT PWB
SPFM
D. Optical section
DSPF COPY LUMP

3
DSPF CNT
PWB
CN130
24V
24V
LAMP
PGND
PGND
5597-05CPB7F
Signal
DSPF COPY
LUMP
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
DSPF copy lamp
Function/Operation
Radiates the light to the document for CCD to read the image
Name
Reflector
Mirror
Lens
DSPF CCD PWB
1
2
3
4
5
Function/Operation
Condenses the copy lamp light
Inducts the document image into the lens
Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal
2
1
PGND
PGND
CL-INV-R
5
4
3
2
1
24V
24V
LAMP
PGND
PGND
E. Paper exit section
DSPF CNT PWB

CN6
CN8
SPOM
5V
SGND
SGND
D_SPFFAN
D_SPFFAN
SGND
SGND
D_SPPD1
D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM
D_RANDOM
D_SOCV
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A
10
10
D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB
11
11
D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B
12
12
D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA
13
13
D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A
14
14
D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB
15
15
D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B
16
16
D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA
17
17
D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP
18
18
D_SPO M_STEP
D_SPO M_ MODE
19
19
D_SPO M_ MODE
20
20
D_SPO M_DIR
D_SPOM/B
D_SPOM/A
24V
21
21
24V
D_SPOMB
PGND
22
22
PGND
D_SPOMA
24V
23
23
24V
PGND
24
24
PGND
24V
25
25
24V
PGND
26
26
PGND
DRIVER
PWB
CN2
SPOD
D_SPO M_ DIR
4B-PH-K-S
B 26 B-PHDSS-B
CN3
CN610
D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF
D_SPOM_VREF1
D_SPOM_VREF1
D_SPED2
D_SPOM_VREF2
D_SPOM_VREF2
SGND
D_SELA
D_SELA
5V()
D_SELB
D_SELB
D_STLD
D_SELC
D_SELC
SGND
D_SELOUT
D_SELOUT
5V()
VAREF
VAREF
D_SPOD
D_SPWS
10
10
D_SPWS
SGND
SGND
AGND
11
11
AGND
5V()
5V()
D_SPFC
12
12
D_SPFC
N C( SGND )
D_SRRC
13
13
D_SRRC
D_SRRBC
14
14
D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_M1
15
15
D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_M2
16
16
D_SPFM_M2
D_SPFM_CLK
17
17
D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC
18
18
D_SPFM_DIREC
D_STRRC
19
19
D_STRRC
D_STRRBC
20
20
D_STRRBC
D_STMPS
21
21
D_STMPS
/D_STRC
22
22
/D_STRC
5V
23
23
5V
SGND
24
24
SGND
10
B10B-PHDSS-B
B24 B-PHDSS-B
No.
1
B26 B-PHDSS-B
D_SPOD
175487-3
Signal
SPOD
SPOM
CN 609
5V
Name
Detects the paper that discharged

Drives the paper exit roller
Function/Operation
Name
Paper exit roller (Drive)
Paper is discharged
Function/Operation
B 24 B-PHDSS-B
A. Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected by the DSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document size
AB series
Inch series
A5
B5
11" 8.5"
A4
B5R
A4R
8.5" 13"
B4
A3
11" 17"
8.5" 5.5"
11" 8.5"
A4
11" 8.5"R
8.5" 13"
8.5" 14"
A3
11" 17"
Document length sensor

SPLS1
SPLS2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
B. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control. An electromagnetic brake is provided for
each transport roller in order to reduce loads to the motor in comparison with a mechanical brake.
Transport speed 314mm/s Letter single-surface transport
Copy key ON
SPFFAN
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor

OFF at 500ms after SPCD of the last paper
SPUM
SPFM
Timer from ON
SPFC
Timer from ON
SPFC
STRRC
DSPF No.1 resist roller cluch
STRRBC
SPRDMD
DSPF random sensor 1
SPPD1
SPPD2
STRC
SPPD3
DSPF paper pass sensor
ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

OFF at 69.4ms after SPPD2_OFF
11.8mm
12.3mm
SRRC
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON

(SIM adjustment)
OFF at 11.8mm (38ms) after SPPD3 OFF
SRRBC
ON simultaneously with SPPD3 ON

OFF at 10ms before SRRC ON
SPPD4
SPPD5
37.6mm
Scanning start at 37.6mm (120ms) from

SPPD4 ON (SIM adjustment)
OC scanner scanning
39.3mm
Built-in scanner scanning
Scanning start at 39.3mm (125ms) from

SPPD5 ON (SIM adjustment)
SPOD
SPOM
Reduces the speed simultaneously with SPOD OFF,

reduces the speed up to 1855PPS in 15.7mm.
(Common to each paper size)

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Section
Exterior section
Paper feed section
Upper transport section
Lower transport section
Optical section
Paper exit section
Drive section
Others
Page
C- 8
C -11
C -17
C -19
C -25
C -31
C -32
C -35
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "[A]

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
Remove the screw (E). Disengage the pawl (F), and pass the
cover (G) under the harness (H), and remove it.
A. Exterior section
Unit
DSPF unit
D
a
b
c
d
Parts
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Paper feed cover
Upper door
Page
C- 9
C- 9
C -10
C -10
F
H
G
1-b
1-d
3)
Loosen the screws (I), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(J).
1-c
I
1-a
(1)
DSPF unit
Unit
1
DSPF unit
4)
Open the DSPF unit (K) to put it straight up, and remove the
screws (L).
5)
Slide the DSPF unit (K) to the rear side, and fit the step screw
(M) with the key hole (N) of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
2)
Disengage the pawls (C, D, E, F), and remove the front cabinet
(G).
K 1
C
E
G 1-a
M
N
b. Rear cabinet
a. Front cabinet
Unit
DSPF unit
Unit
DSPF unit
Parts
b
Parts
a
1-b
Front cabinet
1)
Open the upper door (A).
1-a
1)
Rear cabinet
Open the upper door (A), and remove the screw (B).
2)
Remove the screws (B). Disengage the pawls (C, D), and
remove the rear cabinet (E).
2)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper feed cover (C).
D
B
C
B
C 1-c
B
E 1-b
c. Paper feed cover
Unit
DSPF unit
d. Upper door
c
Parts
Paper feed cover
Unit
DSPF unit
Parts
d
Upper door
1-d
1-c
1)
Open the upper door (A).
1)
Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "a. Front cabinet".)
2)
Remove the spring (A). Disengage the pawl (B), and remove
the pressure release axis holder (C). Remove the screw (D),
and remove the pressure release link lever (E).
C
E
A
B
D
3)
Remove the resin E-ring (F), and remove the upper door (G).
(1)
Paper feed tray unit

Unit
1
G 1-d
1
B. Paper feed section

Unit
1
Paper feed
tray unit

detection short sensor
detection long sensor
DSPF document width
sensor
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
DSPF paper feed tray upper
limit sensor
sensor
DSPF upper door open/
close sensor
DSPF document random
sensor
a
b
c
/CKPVG
PCPEG
Parts
Paper feed
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Parts
a
b
c
d
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Page
C -11
1)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
"A. Exterior section".)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B), and

remove the paper feed tray unit (C).
{
{
C -12
C -13
C -14
C 1
B
Mainte
nance
{
Page
C -15
C -15
C -16
a. DSPF document length detection short sensor, DSPF

document length detection long sensor
Unit
2-h
2-f
a
b
2-e
2-c
Parts
short sensor
long sensor
2-d
2-b
2
2-g
b
d
1-b
a
2-a
c
1-a
1-b
1-a
1
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper feed
tray unit".)
1-c
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B).
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
4)
Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the DSPF document length detection short sensor (D) and the DSPF document length detection long sensor (E).
4)
Remove the screw (D), and remove the rotation tray shaft (E).
Remove the paper feed rotation tray (F).
D 1-a
E 1-b
E
C
5)
b. DSPF document width sensor
Unit
Disconnect the connector (G). Disengage the pawl (H), and

remove the DSPF document width sensor (I).
Parts
I
H
1-c
1)
2)
tray unit".)
(2)
Paper feed unit
a. Pickup roller, paper feed roller

Unit
Unit
Paper feed unit

2
Paper feed unit
Mainte
nance
{
{
Parts
a
b
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
2-b 2-a
1)
Remove the front cabinet, the rear cabinet, and the paper feed
cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A). Open the wire saddle (B).

Remove the snap band (C).
1)
Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)
Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
C
A
3)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the paper feed unit (E).
3)
Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the pickup roller holder
(D). Remove the pickup roller (E) from the pickup roller holder
(D).
C
E 2-a
E 2
4)
Remove the paper feed roller (F).
4)
F 2-b
Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the DSPF paper

feed tray upper limit sensor (E), the DSPF document upper
limit sensor (F), the DSPF upper door open/close sensor (G),
the DSPF paper pass sensor 1 (H), and the DSPF document
random sensor (I).
G 2-e
2-f H
D
D
2-g I
b. DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor, DSPF document

upper limit sensor, DSPF upper door open/close sensor,
DSPF paper pass sensor 1, DSPF document random
sensor
Unit
Paper feed unit
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
DSPF paper feed tray upper limit
sensor
DSPF document upper limit sensor
DSPF upper door open/close sensor
2-c E
F 2-d
c. DSPF paper feed clutch
Unit
Paper feed unit
Parts
2-e
2-f
2-h
2-g
2-d
2-c
1)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)
Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(2) Paper feed
unit".)
3)

remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (C).
1)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)
unit".)
3)
cover (B).
A
B
C
A
4)
Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and

remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (E).
2)
cover (B).
5)
Remove the E-ring (F) and the bearing (G). Lift the paper feed
roller shaft (H) diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed
clutch (I).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is engaged with the plate.
A
3)
Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper feed PG lower
cover (D).
H
I
2-h
C
G
F
D
(3)
4)
Separation rolloer
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
a
Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the reverse pressure

release lever (F). Remove the separation roller (G).
Separation roller
G a
F
E
1)
Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
(4)
Torque limiter
7)
Mainte
nance
Parts
b
Torque limiter
Remove the screws (F), and remove the separation roller supporting plate (G) and the bearing (H). Remove the roller shaft
(I), and remove the torque limiter (J).
H
G
b
F
J
(5)
1)
2)
unit".)
3)
Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper
transport section")
4)
Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section.")
5)
Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
(idle) (B).
DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor, DSPF

document empty sensor
c
d
Parts
c
d
B
1)
2)
tray unit".)
3)
Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the DSPF paper

feed tray lower limit sensor (B) and the DSPF document empty
sensor (C).
A
6)
Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E).
A
C
C d
C
D
B c
C. Upper transport section

Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f

2)
Mainte
nance
Page
C -17
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B),

and remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is

engaged with the plate.
C -17
C -18
C -18
a
C
b D
d
b
a
c
e
f
A
(2)

c
Parts
(1)
DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1

resist roller clutch
a
b
Parts
b
a
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the snap band (B).
Remove the resin E-ring (C), and remove the DSPF transport
roller clutch (D).

D c
B
1)
(3)
6)
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
d
Remove the resin E-ring (F) and the bearing (G), and remove
the No.1 resist roller (drive) (H).
H
d
G
F
7)
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed section".)
3)
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(1) DSPF
No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch".)
4)
(idle) (B).
Remove the E-ring (I) and the bearing (J) from the No.1 resist
roller (drive) (H).
H d
(4)
DSPF paper pass sensor 2, Transport roller 1

(drive)
Mainte
nance
Parts
e
f

A
5)
Remove the screws (C), lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
C
C
E
C
D
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper

(B).
D. Lower transport section

Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
B
A
Platen roller
No. 1 scanning plate
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
{
Page
C -19
C -20
C -20
C -22
C -24
A
g
3)
d
c
Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DSPF paper

pass sensor 2 (D).
a
h
b
i
j
D e
C
4)
Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2)

DSPF transport roller clutch".)
5)
Remove the E-ring (E), the washer (F), the spring (G), the collar (H), the polyslider (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the belt
(K), the pulley (L), and the bearing (M), and remove the transport roller 1 (drive) (N).
Platen roller, No.1 scanning plate

Parts
a
b
Platen roller
Mainte
nance
{
{
(1)
F
6)
Remove the E-ring (O) and the bearing (P) from the transport
roller 1 (drive) (N).
P
O
1)
2)
Open the DSPF unit (A).
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B)

and remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
the DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (D).

D d
c C
A
B
2)
Clean the platen rollers (B) and the No.1 scanning plate (C).
(3)
DSPF paper pass sensor 3, DSPF paper pass

sensor 4, No.2 resist roller (Drive)
a
B
e
f
g
C b
a
B
(2)
Mainte
nance
Parts
DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2

resist roller clutch
c
d
Parts
d
c
1)
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
door. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2)

(B).
B
A
1)
3)
Loosen the screws (C), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(D). Open the DSPF unit (E).
7)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the PS front PG (M).
E
M
L
D
4)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the left rear lower cabinet
(G).
8)
Remove the screw (N), and disconnect the connector (O), and
remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 3 (P).
O
5)
Remove the resin E-ring (H), and remove the PS knob (I).
9)
Remove the screws (Q), and remove the lift-up PG (R).
I
H
Q
R
6)
Remove the screws (J), and remove the PS outer PG (K).
Q
J
10) Remove the screw (S), and remove the spring (T). Remove
the belt (U), and disengage the pawls (V), and remove the
platen roller (W).
W
T
U
V
11) Disconnect the connector (X) and remove the screw (Y).
Remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 4 (Z).
(4)
DSPF paper pass sensor 5, Transport roller 2

(Drive)
Mainte
nance
Parts
h
i

Y
Z
h
12) Remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch and the
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2) DSPF No.2
resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch".)
13) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "G. Drive
section".)
14) Remove the E-ring (a), the washer (b), the spring (c), the collar
(d), the polyslider (e), the bearing (f), and the bering (g).
1)
e
d
2)
Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others.)
3)
Loosen the screw (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(B). Open the DSPF unit (C).
C
15) Loosen the screw (h). Loosen the belt (i) tension. Tighten the
screw (h). Slide the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j). Remove the
pulley (k), the E-ring (l), the bearing (m), and the bearing (n).
Remove the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j).
i
h
4)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the lift-up PG (E).
D
E
5)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the lower door (H).
10) Disconnect the connectors (N). Remove the screws (O), and
remove the control PWB unit (P).
F
G
N
N
P
6)
Remove the screws (I). Remove the transport PG lower (J).

Disconnect the connector (K).
11) Loosen the screw (Q), and loosen the belt (R) tension. Tighten
the screw (Q). Remove the belt (R). Remove the E-ring (S)
and the pulley (T).
I
R
I
K
12) Remove the E-ring (U). Slide the bearing (V). Remove the
transport roller 2 (drive) (W). Remove the bearing (X), the resin
E-ring (Y), and the spring pin (Z) from the transport roller 2
(drive) (W).
7)
Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the DSPF paper

pass sensor 5 (M).
M h
W
Z
Y
X
U
8)
Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove
transport section".)
9)
Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section".)
(5)
Transport roller 3 (drive)
7)
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
j
Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and

remove the control PWB unit (H).
F
G
F
G
8)
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed section".)
3)
4)
5)
(idle) (B).
Loosen the screw (I), and loosen the belt (J) tension. Tighten
the screw (I). Remove the belt (J).
I
J
9)
Remove the resin E-ring (K) and the bearing (L). Remove the
transport roller 3 (drive) (M). Remove the E-ring (N), the pulley
(O), the spring pin (P), and the bearing (Q) from the transport
roller 3 (drive) (M).
j M
L
A
6)
C
C
E
C
D
Q
O
Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
E. Optical section
Unit
1
Lamp unit
Optical unit
3)
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
{
{
Parts
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
Scanning glass
DSPF copy lamp
Reflector
Lens
CCD
CCD unit
Mirror
Mainte
nance
Parts
a
b

White reference glass
Page
C -26
A
C -28
C -29
Page
C -29
C -30
4)
2-d
2-c 2-b 2-a
Disconnect the connector (B) from DSPF CL inverter PWB (A).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the intersecting point plate
(D). Remove the lower door (E).
C
D
a
E
2
1
1-b
1-c
1-a
(1)
Lamp unit
Unit
1
5)
Lamp unit
Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the white reference plate (H).
F
1
G
H
1)
2)
Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others".)
6)
Remove the screw (I), and remove the scanning section cover
(J). Remove the screws (K), and remove the lamp unit (L).
2)
Open the lower door (B).
B
K
I
3)
Remove the cleaner (C).
a. Scanning glass, DSPF copy lamp, Reflector

Unit
1
Lamp unit
Parts
a
b
c
Scanning glass
DSPF copy lamp
Reflector
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
1-b
1-a
4)
Use the cleaner (C) to clean the scanning glass (surface) (D).
1-c
1)
1-a
5)
6)
7)
Remove the lamp unit. (Refer to the "(1) Lamp unit".)
8)
Remove the screw (E), and remove the DSPF copy lamp (F).
(2)
Optical unit
Unit
2
1-b
Optical unit
9)
Clean the scanning glass (back surface) (G).
1-a G
1)
2)
3)
4)

(B).
10) Remove the screws (H), and remove the reflector (I).
H
I
1-c
H
A
5)
Remove the screw (C), and remove the harness cover (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E).
* When installing, arrange the harness (F) so that it is placed
in the lower position than the rib height.
F
E
6)
Remove the step screw (G), and remove the screws (H), and
remove the optical fixing plate (I). Remove the optical unit (J).
6)
Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the lens cover (G).
G
F
H
2
7)
Clean the lens (H) and the CCD (I).
a. Lens, CCD
Unit
2
Mainte
nance
{
{
Parts
Optical unit
a
b
2-b
Lens
CCD
2-b
2-a
H 2-a
b. CCD unit
Unit
Optical unit
Parts
c
CCD unit
2-c
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the optical unit. (Refer to the "(2) Optical unit".)
5)
Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B). Remove the
dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove the
dark box (E).
D
E
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B), and remove
the dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the dark box (E).
5)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the mirror base cover (B).
D
E
A
B
C
6)
6)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the CCD unit (G).
Clean the mirrors (C).
2-d C
F
2-c G
C 2-d
(3)
c. Mirror
Parts
Unit
Optical unit
Parts
d
Mainte
nance
Mirror
2-d
a
1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and

remove the control PWB unit (C).
(4)

Parts
b
A
B
A
C
3)
Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).

Remove the inverter PWB guide (F).
b
1)
D
F
4)
Remove the screws (G), and remove the DSPF CL inverter

PWB (H).
2)
Open the lower door (B).
B
H a
Mainte
nance
{
3)
(1)
Remove the cleaner (C).
Discharge brush
Mainte
nance
Parts
a
Discharge brush
4)
Use the cleaner (C) to clean the white reference glass (D).
D b
C
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed
section".)
3)
Remove the discharge brush (A).

* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attachment reference.
F. Paper exit section

Parts
a
b
c
Discharge brush
Paper exit roller (drive)
Mainte
nance
Page
C -31
C -31
C -32
(2)

b
Parts
b
1)
2)
section".)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the DSPF paper

exit sensor (B).
b B
G. Drive section
1
Unit
Drive unit
Drive transport unit
a
b
c
a
Parts
DSPF lift-up motor
Parts
Page
C -35
(3)
Page
C -33
C -33
C -34
C -34
2-a

Mainte
nance
{
Parts
c
1-c 1-b
(1)
1-a
Drive unit
Unit
1
Drive unit
1)
2)
section".)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the resin E-rings (A), the gear (B), the bearing (C),
and the paper exit roller (drive) (D).
B
A
D c
1)
2)
3)
Disconnect the connectors (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the snap band (C).
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper feed
motor (D).
B
B
D 1-a
A
C
4)
Remove the screw (D), and remove the drive unit (E).
D
D
b. DSPF paper exit motor
1 E
1
Unit
Drive unit
Parts
D
1-b
a. DSPF paper feed motor
Unit
Drive unit
Parts
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper exit
motor (D).
1-b
D
C
B
1-a
A
C
1)
c. DSPF lift-up motor

Unit
Drive unit
4)
Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts tension (B).
Tighten the screws (A).
Parts
DSPF lift-up motor
A
A
1-c
B
5)

remove the drive transport unit (E).
D
C
2 E
1)
2)

remove the DSPF lift-up motor (C).
C 1-c
A
a. DSPF transport motor
B
2
(2)
Unit
Parts

Unit
2
2-a
2
1)
2)
Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts (B) tension.
Tighten the screw (A).
B
B
1)
2)
Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and the
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch and the DSPF transport roller
clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper transport section".)
3)
Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "(3) DSPF
cooling fan motor".)
3)
Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the screws (D).

Remove the DSPF transport motor (E).
H. Others
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
OC mat
DSPF lower door open/close sensor
DSPF driver PWB
DSPF flash PWB
DSPF control PWB
D
2-a
(3)
Page
C -35
C -36
C -36
C -37
C -37
C -37

a
Parts
b c
a
(1)
OC mat
Parts
a
1)
2)
remove the DSPF cooling fan motor (C).
OC mat
C a
A
a
1)
Mainte
nance
{
2)
Remove the OC mat (B) from the left edge.
2)
Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the screw (B).

Remove the open/close sensor holder (C). Remove the DSPF
open/close sensor (D) from the open/close sensor holder (C).
C
b
D
a B
A
B
* When installing, place the OC mat (B) on the document table to

fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit (C).
(3)

Parts
(2)

Parts
c
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B).

Remove the lower door open/close sensor holder (C). Remove
the DSPF lower door open/close sensor (D) from the lower
door open/close sensor holder (C).
C
c D
b
1)
(4)
DSPF driver PWB
1)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the ROM cover (B).
Parts
d
DSPF driver PWB
A
B
2)
1)
2)

remove the DSPF driver PWB (C).
Release the lock (C), and remove the DSPF flash PWB (D).
B
A
D e
A
A
B
(6)
DSPF control PWB
C d
Parts
f
(5)
DSPF control PWB
DSPF flash PWB
Parts
e
DSPF flash PWB
1)
2)
Remove the DSPF flash PWB. (Refer to the "(5) DSPF flash
PWB".)
3)

remove the control PWB unit (C).
A
B
A
C
B
4)
Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).

Remove the control PWB unit (F).
E
E
4. Maintenance
: Check
{ : Clean
: Replace
U : Adjust
: Lubricate
: Shift the position
(Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Paper
feed
section/
Transport
section
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Optical
section
Others
Drive
section
21
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation roller
No. 1 resist roller
Transport roller 1
(PS front)
No. 2 resist roller
(PS)
Platen roller
Transport roller 2
(after No.1 scanning)
Transport roller 3
(after No.2 scanning)
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush
Torque limiter
(for separation)
No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass
Mirror
Lens/CCD
Copy lamp/Reflector
OC mat
Gears
Belts
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
UKOG-0299FCZZ
(specified
positions)
4
1
12
5
2
3
6
7
13
8
9
10
11
19
17
17
18
21
21
14
20
16
21
15
MX-7000N
[D]
SCANNER SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MHPS
5
4
6
3
MIM
7
CLI
501190-4017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN1
501190-2017
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CCD PWB
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
Signal
CLI
MHPS
MIM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
1
2
3
4
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
5
4
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CN134
CN130
CN148
CN147
CN137
SCN-CNT PWB
501190-4017
501190-2017
Name
Scanner lamp
Scanner motor
Function/Operation
Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
Name
Pulley belt
Pulley
Scanner drive wire
Reflector
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD PWB
Idle gear
Function/Operation
Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley
Drives the scanner drive wire
Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
Condenses the copy lamp light
Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror
Inducts the document image into the lens
Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it intot the electric signal
Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt
MX-7000N SCANNER SECTION D 1
A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows:
1)
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the contrast of the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB)
CCD element and converted into image signals (analog).
2)
The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter.
3)
The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
G
R
B. Detail description
(1)
Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner

motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
G
B
(Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2)
Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3)
Image scan/color separation
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the contrast of
the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and converted into image signals (analog).
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements.
(4)
Freen component of
image data
B
Blue component of
image data
Image signal A/D conversion
1)
Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
2)
Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image

process section.
Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
A CCD element has three CCD elements of RGB.
Red component of
image data
CCD PWB
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
3
CCD
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected

to the CCD elements.
IC
R ADC
IC
G ADC
IC
B ADC
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.
Transfer IC
R
(5)
R
G
B
Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing

the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is performed by the image
process technology (software), it is not achieved optically.
(1)
Scanner unit
A. Scanner unit
Unit
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Parts
Scanner unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
Table glass
SPF glass
Lens
CCD
Reflector
Mirror
Scanner lamp
CL inverter PWB
CCD unit
Rails
Drive wire
Drive belt
Scanner motor
Scanner home position
sensor
Original cover SW
Document detection light
collector PWB
Document detection light
emitting PWB
1
Page
D- 4
D- 5
D- 5
1
D- 6
D- 7
D- 7
D- 7
D- 8
D- 8
D- 8
D- 9
1-j
1-b
Scanner unit
1-q
1)

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
Table glass, SPF glass.)
4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet left, the
upper cabinet right, the front cabinet upper, and the operation
panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5)
Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERATION PANEL".)
6)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the snap band (D), the mylar
sheet (E), and remove the harnesses (G) from edge saddles
(F).
C
1-j
D
1-p
1
1-a
1-n
1-k
1-f
1-e
1-h
1-o
1-k
B
A
1-m
1-g
1-f
1-c
1-l
1-d
1-i
7)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the support plate (I). Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the snap band (K).
a. Table glass, SPF glass

Unit
1
Scanner unit
a
b
Table glass
SPF glass
Mainte
nance
{
{
1-a
1-b
Parts
I
I
H
H
1)
8)
Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and
remove the air outlet duct (N).
Loosen the screws (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(B).
M
B
2)
L
9)
Remove the screws (O), and remove the scanner unit (P).
Open the DSPF unit (C).
O
P 1
3)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the glass holder (E).
Remove the table glass (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the SPF glass (H).
3)
Clean the lens (E) and the CCD (F).
F 1-d
D
D
G
G
E
E 1-c
c. Reflector, Mirror, Scanner lamp, CL inverter PWB
F 1-a
1-b H
Unit
1
Scanner unit
b. Lens, CCD
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
{
Parts
Scanner unit
c
d
Lens
CCD
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
Parts
e
f
g
h
Reflector
Mirror
Scanner lamp
CL inverter PWB
1-f
1-e
1-h
1-g
1-f
1-c
1)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "a.
Table glass, SPF glass".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Remove the lens cover (D).
1)
2)
Clean the reflector (A) and mirror (B).
1-d
A
1-e
A
C
A
D
B 1-f
3)
Shift the lamp unit (C) to the right. Loosen the screw (D), and
remove the wire (E).
7)
Remove the screws (M) and mirror spring (N), and remove the
CL inverter PWB (O).
C
E
O
1-h
4)
Lift the lamp unit (F) by rotating it. Remove the harness holder
(G), flat cable (H), and remove the lamp unit (F).
d. CCD unit
H
1
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
i
CCD unit
G
F
5)
Clean the mirror (I).
1-i
1-f
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the
screws (E), and remove the CCD unit (F).
E
6)
Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screw (K), and
remove the scanner lamp (L).
1-i
F
L 1-g
C
D
e. Rails
2)
Unit
Mainte
nance
Parts
Scanner unit
Check the drive wires (A) and drive belt (B).
Rails
A 1-k
1-l
B
1-j
1-j
1)
2)
Apply grease on each rail (A).
1-k A
* Install the drive wire in the order of alphabetical shown in the
figure below. Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the winding pulley. The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
A 1-j
A
G
F
1-j
E
A
C
1-j
A
G
10 9 8 1
1-j A
F
E
1 8 9 10
B
A
C
f. Drive wire, Drive belt

Unit
1
Scanner unit
Mainte
nance
Parts
k
l
Drive wire
Drive belt
g. Scanner motor
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
Scanner motor
1-m
1-k
1-l
1-k
1)
1)

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
remove the scanner motor (C).
i. Original cover SW
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
Original cover SW
C 1-m
1-o
h. Scanner home position sensor
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
1)

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
remove the original cover SW (C).
1-n
1-o
C
B
1)

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
remove the scanner home position sensor (C).
j. Document detection light collector PWB
1-n
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
Document detection light collector PWB
C
B
A
1-p
1)
Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and the
operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERATION PANEL SECTION".)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the protection sheet

(B). Remove the screws (C), and remove the document detection light collector PWB (D).
6)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the cover (D). Remove
the document detection light emitting PWB (E).
E 1-q
D 1-p
A
C
C
C
C
k. Document detection light emitting PWB
1
1
Unit
Scanner unit
Parts
1-q
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the [A]

EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
Table glass, SPF glass.)
4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
5)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the light emitting unit (B).
4. Maintenance
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the main
power source (the power switch inside the front cabinet) and confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
: Check { : Clean : Replace U : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Mirror/lends/reflector/CCD
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
2
1
1
5
3
1
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
Specified position
MX-7000N
[E]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
40
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
CN1
5VN
1
2
D-GND
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
ADUD3
9
POD3
10
MPFD
11
5VNPD
16
HWPD
13
14
TH_M
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
21
6
32
7
23
8
27
15
31
30
14
P
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
CN15
40
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
21
6
32
7
23
8
27
15
31
30
14
S
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
P-GND
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
QR/P4 40PIN
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
22
24
26
28
30
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
CN14
24V3
/MPUC
18
20
10
12
24V3
/MPUC
10
12
2
1
24V3
/MPUC
1
2
B30B-PNDZS-1
PCU
PWB
CN4
24V4
P-GND
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
34
24V3
36
/MPGS
/MPFS
38
B40B-PNDZS-1
40
24V3
B40B-PNDZS-1
1
3
P
1
3
DF1B-28DE
24V4
P-GND
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
5
D-GND
7
5VN
9
/CPFM_D
11
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
13
15 CPFM_GAIN
2 CPFM_CW/CCW
S
1
3
1
2
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24V4
P-GND
VH-2P
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK
CPFM
LCCM
RIGHT
DOOR
I/F PWB
MPUC
CN1
LCCM_A
1
LCCM_A/
2
LCCM_B/
3
LCCM_B
4
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
B6B-PASK-1
P
17
19
21
23
25
27
DF1B-28DE
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
S
17
19
21
23
25
27
1
3
6
4
2
5
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
B6B-XH
DRIVER
PWB
MPFD
5
MPFS
HUD_M/TH_M
MPED
1 D_GND
3 D_GND
5 D_GND
2 5VN(LED
4 5VN(LED
6 5VN(LED
DF11-6DP-SP2
D-GND
5VN(LED)
MPFD
8
9
10
CN3(1/2)
MPLD1
16
5VNPD(LED)
5VN
MPWS
MTOP2
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP1
5VNPD(LED)
5
4
D-GND
5VN(LED)
4
5
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
7
6
MPFD
12
MPLD1
3
18
11 5VNPD(LED)
19
20
10
9
5
6
22
24
25
27
5VN
28
29
HUD_M
D-GND
14
31
TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
4
3
2
1
5VN
MPWS
MTOP2
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP1
5VNPD(LED)
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
/MPGS
2
4
5
24V3
1
1
5VN(LED) 5
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
6
MPLD1
4
5
D-GND
5
4 5VNPD(LED) 6
3
2
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
5VN
MPWS
D-GND
7
8
9
MPWS
MPGS
1
MPED
2
D-GND
3 5VN(LED)
GP1S73 179228-3
R
SM2P
P
2
/MPGS
2
1
24V3
1
1
MPLD1
2
D-GND
3 5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73
179228-3
3
5VN
2
MPWS
1
D-GND
PHNR-3
MTOP2
1
D-GND
2
3
5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73
179228-3
MTOP1
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
1
5VN
2
HUD_M
3
D-GND
4
TH_M
ZHR-4
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
CN3(2/2)
7
24V3
1
8
7
/MPFS
2
MPED
3
6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
MPED
3 5VN(LED)
2
D-GND
1
MPFD
GP1S73 179228-3
R
SM2P
P
1
24V3
1
2
/MPFS
2
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-7000N MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION E 1
MTOP2
MPLD1
MTOP1
Signal
CPFM
HUD_M/TH_M
LCCM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
Name
Paper feed motor
Temperature/humidity sensors
LCC transport motor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
detector 2
Function/Operation
Detects temperature/humidity
Drives the LCC transport motor
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Manual paper feed tray paper entry detection
Controls the paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section
Separates paper to prevent double feed
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed
tray)
Torque limiter
MPGS
MPLD1
MPUC
MPWS
MTOP1
MTOP2
No.
1
2
3
Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close

Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF
Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
double feed
Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. Transports
paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8
The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and
separates the top paper. Paper which had been separated is fed to
the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.
ON/OFF of the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller are
controlled of by the manual paper feed clutch.
Then, paper is transported to the resist roller by the manual paper
transport roller.
A
B
Unit
Manual paper feed tray unit
Manual paper feed unit
Page
E- 3
E- 6
A. Manual paper feed tray unit

1
Unit
Manual paper feed
tray unit
a
b
c
d
e
Parts
sensors
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Manual feed paper length
detector
1
1-d
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-e
Page
E- 4
E- 5
(1)

1
3)
Unit
Remove the screw (E), and remove the lock pawl (F) and the
lever (G). Remove the screw (H), and disengage the pawl (I),
and remove the cabinet (J).
1
I
E
J
1)
F
4)
Remove the screw (K), and remove the slide rail (L).
B
A
K
2)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the cabinet (D).
5)
Remove the screws (M). Remove the screw (N), and remove
the inner cover (O).
C
D
M
O
C
N
M
6)
Remove the screws (P), and remove the cabinet (Q).
a. Temperature/humidity sensors, Manual paper feed tray

pull-out position detector 2, Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1, Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Unit
Manual paper feed
tray unit
Parts
Temperature/humidity sensors
detector 2
detector 1
Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
a
b
P
c
d
1-a
7)
1-d
1-b
1-c
Remove the shaft (R). Remove the screws (S), and remove
the manual paper feed tray unit (T).
S
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Manual paper feed tray unit".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the cover (B).
1 T
S
8)
Remove the cover (U), and disconnect the connector (V).
B
3)
Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and disconnect the connector (G).
C
E
G
E
4)
Remove the temperature/humidity sensor (H), the manual

paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 (I), the manual
paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 (J). Disconnect the
connectors (K).
3)
H 1-a
Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and disconnect the connector (G).
E
K
1-b I
1-c J
F
5)
Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector (L).
Disconnect the connector (M).
L 1-d
G
E
4)
Remove the screw (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
I
b. Manual feed paper length detector
Unit
Manual paper feed
tray unit
Parts
5)
Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the manual feed

paper length detector (K).
1-e
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
2)
A
A
K 1-e
B. Manual paper feed unit

Unit
1
Parts
Manual
paper feed
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Paper pickup roller (Manual

paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (Manual
paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual
paper feed tray)
Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Manual feed paper entry
detection
Torque limiter
Manual feed paper empty
detection
(Manual paper feed)
Mainte
nance
{
Page
a. Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray), Paper feed

roller (Manual paper feed tray), Separation roller (Manual
paper feed tray)
E- 6
Unit
1
Manual paper feed

unit
a
b
E- 7
E- 7
E- 8
E- 8
E- 9
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
Paper pickup roller

(Manual paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
{
{
1-b
1-a
1-c
1-e
1-b
1-f
1-i
1-h
1)
Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B).
1-g
A
1-a
1-c
1
1-d
B
(1)

Unit
1
2)
Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the paper pickup roller
(Manual paper feed tray) (D), the paper feed roller (Manual
paper feed tray) (E).
C
1-b E
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the manual paper feed
unit (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
D 1-a
A
A
C
A
1 B
A
3)
Open the cover (F). Disengage the pawl (G), and remove the
separation roller (manual paper feed tray) (H).
c. Transport roller 16 (Drive), Manual feed paper entry

detection
Unit
G
1
Parts
Manual paper feed

unit
e
f

Manual feed paper entry
detection
Mainte
nance
{
1-e
1-c H
1-f
b. Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Unit
Manual paper feed
unit
Parts
1)
2)
Remove the manual paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Manual
paper feed unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B).
Remove the spring (C).
A
B
A
1-d
1)
2)
paper feed unit".)
3)
Remove the spring (C).
4)
B
A
Remove the E-ring (D), and remove the collar (E), the gear (F),
the parallel pin (G), the E-rings (H), and the bearings (I).
Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive) (J).
1-e J
H
C
G
E
4)
Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the manual paper feed
gate solenoid (E). Disconnect the connector (F).
E 1-d
D
5)
Remove the screw (K), and remove the sensor mounting plate
(L). Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the manual
feed paper entry detection (N).
5)
Remove the E-ring (H). Shift the shaft (I), and remove the
torque limiter (J).
J 1-g
1-f N
e. Manual feed paper empty detection

d. Torque limiter
1
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Manual paper feed

unit
Torque limiter
Unit
Manual paper feed
unit
Parts
Manual feed paper empty detection
1-h
1-g
1)
2)
paper feed unit".)
3)
Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Transport roller 16 (Drive), Manual paper entry detection".)
4)
Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
1)
2)
paper feed unit".)
3)
Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B) and the
screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
G
F
E
C
F
B
4)
Remove the screw (E), and remove the sensor mounting plate
(F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual
feed paper empty detection (H).
A
F
1-h H
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Unit
Manual paper feed
unit
6)
Remove the paper guide unit (K).
Parts
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
1-i
7)
1)
2)
paper feed unit".)
3)
Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Transport roller 16 (Drive), manual feed paper entry detection".)
4)
Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
Remove the spring (L). Remove the screws (M), and remove
the support plate (N).
M
N
G
F
E
C
F
8)
Remove the screws (O), and remove the paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) (P).
A
E
F
5)
1-i
D
C
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I), and

remove the support plate (J).
O
J
9)
Remove the spring (Q), and remove the solenoid arm (R).
Remove the pin (S), and remove the solenoid plunger (T).
I
S
I
R
T 1-i
4. Maintenance
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Part name
Paper pickup roller

Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Each transport roller
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
1
2
5
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
5
1
2
3
4
PAP-04V
PHR-3
1
2
3
SM-10P-N
5VNPD
D-GND
T1LUD
T1PED
D-GND
T2SPD
5VNPD
D-GND
T1SPD
5VNPD
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T1PUS
T1SPD
3
5
T2LUD
T2PED
T2SPD
TANSET
MX-7000N TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION F 1

T2LUM
T1PFC
CPFM
T1LUD
T1PED
T1LUM
T2PUS
T2PFC
1
2
3
1 24V3
4 24V3
5 24V3
6 24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
TANSET
5VN
/T2PUS
14
1
32
34
14
12
10
D-GND
TANSET
5VN
DF1B-34DE
/T1PFC
12
/T2PFC
10
1
4
GP1A71 PHR-3
1
24V3
2
2
/T2PUS
1
1
24V3
2
2
/T1PFC
1
1
24V3
2
2
/T2PFC
1
D-GND
5
5VN
7
/CPFM_D
9
/CPFM_CK
11
CPFM_LD
13
CPFM_GAIN 15
CPFM_CW/CCW2
24V3
4
/TRC1
6
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
P
1
3
1
2
1
2
DF1B-28DE
24V4
P-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
1
5VNPD
2
5VNPD
5
5VNPD
6
5VNPD
5VNPD
7
S
1
3
P-GND
/T2LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
P-GND
/T1LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
24V3
/T1PUS
T1SPD
21
23
25
19
T2SPD
19
1
32
34
23
25
21
15
17
T1LUD
T1PED
15
17
S
1
3
5
7
DF1B-26DE
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
P
1
3
5
7
24V3
/T1PUS
T1SPD
24V4
P-GND
/T2PUS
/T1PFC
/T2PFC
D-GND
TANSET
5VN
B34B-PNDZS-1
CN3
1
32
34
B40B-PNDZS-1
14
12
10
5
D-GND
7
5VN
9
/CPFM_D
11
/CPFM_CK
13
CPFM_LD
15
CPFM_GAIN
2 CPFM_CW/CCW
4
24V3
6
/TRC1
CN4
1
3
15 P-GND
17 /T1LUM
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
11 P-GND
13 /T2LUM
B34B-PNDZS-1
31
33
29
T1LUD
T1PED
T2SPD
23
25
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
27
CN5
9
11
13
15
PCU PWB
D-GND
1
5VN
2
/CPFM_D
3
/CPFM_CK
4
CPFM_LD
5
CPFM_GAIN
6
CPFM_CW/CCW
7
B07B-PASK
1
2
R
1
2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
SM-2PIN
24V3
/T1PUS
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
1
2
3
4
MX-7000N
[F]
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
24V4
P-GND
VH-2P
P
1
2
SM-4P-N
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
R
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
GP1A71
D-GND
T1SPD
5VNPD
1
2
3
4
PAP-04V
D-GND
1
T2SPD
2
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
5VNPD
D-GND
T1LUD
T1PED
5VNPD
D-GND
T2LUD
T2PED
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit
D=GND
D=GND
Signal
CPFM
T1LUD
T1LUM
T1PED
T1PFC
T1PUS
T1SPD
Name
Paper feed motor
Tandem tray 1 upper limit detection
Tandem tray 1 paper empty detection
Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity
detector
Tandem tray 2 upper limit detection
Tandem tray 2 paper empty detection
Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity
detector
Function/Operation
Detects upper limit of tandem tray 1
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 1
Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 1
Controls the paper pickup
Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 1
Function/Operation
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
Name
Paper pickup roller
(Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Lift wire
T2LUD
T2LUM
T2PED
T2PFC
T2PUS
T2SPD
TANSET
No.
1
2
3
Detects upper limit of tandem tray 2

Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 2
Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 2
Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 2
Detects the installation state of tandem tray

Separates paper to prevent Double Feed
double feed
Transmits the paper tray lift-up motor power to the paper feed tray
C3PUS
C3PWD
VREF
C4PFD
C4LUD
C4PED
24V3
C4PUS
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
C3PUS 19
C3PWD 21
VREF 23
C4PFD 25
C4LUD 27
C4PED 29
24V3
31
C4PUS 33
B34B-PNDZS-1
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
2
1
PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H
1
+24V
C4PUS
2
D-GND
C4PED
5VNPD
PHR-3
D-GND
C4PFD
5VN
179228-3
D-GND
C4LUD
5VNPD
PHR-3
Slide Volume
C3PWD
GND
VREF
3
2
1
GP2A200L
1
2
3
GP1A71
1
2
3
GP1A71
2
1
3
3
D-GND
2
C3PFD
1
5VN
GP2A200L 179228-3
D-GND
1
2
C3LUD
5VNPD
3
GP1A71
PHR-3
D-GND
1
2
C3PED
3
5VNPD
GP1A71
PHR-3
PHNR-2-H
BU2P-TR-P-H
2
+24V
1
1
C3PUS
2
12
7
S6P-PH-K-S
6 C4SS4
5 C4SS3
4 C4SS2
3 C4SS1
2 D-GND
S6P-PH-K-S
6 C3SS4
5 C3SS3
4 C3SS2
3 C3SS1
2 D-GND
PHR-3 GP1A71
3 5VNPD
2 C4SPD
1 D-GND
PHR-3 GP1A71
3 5VNPD
2 C3SPD
1 D-GND
PHNR-12-H
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
C4PFD
5
5VN
4
D-GND
12
C4LUD
11
5VNPD
10
D-GND
9
C4PED
8
5VNPD
7
+24V
3
2
C4PUS
1
3 C3PWD 3
2 D-GND
2
1
1
VREF
P SM3pin_N R
7
D-GND
6
8
5
C3PFD
9
5VN
4
1
D-GND 12
2
C3LUD 11
3
5VNPD 10
9
4
D-GND
8
5
C3PED
5VNPD
7
6
10
+24V
3
2
11 C3PUS
1
12
14
1
2 C4SS4 13
3 C4SS3 12
4 C4SS2 11
5 C4SS1 10
6 C3SS4 9
7 C3SS3 8
8 C3SS2 7
9 C3SS1 6
10 5VNPD 5
11 C4SPD 4
12 5VNPD 3
13 C3SPD 2
14 D-GND 1
PHNR-14-H+BU14P-TR-K-S
25
27
29
31
33
19
21
23
P
13
15
17
C3PUS
C3LUD
C3PED
1
2
3
C4PFC
C3PFD
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
10
C3PWD
C4PED
1 2
3
C4LUD
12
5
C4SS3
PCU PWB
CN5
C4SS4
34
C4SS3
32
C4SS2
30
C4SS1
28
C3SS4
26
24
C3SS3
C3SS2
22
C3SS1
20
5VNPD
18
16
C4SPD
5VNPD
14
C3SPD
12
D-GND
10
B34B-PNDZS-1
26 C4SS4 26
24 C4SS3 24
22 C4SS2 22
20 C4SS1 20
18 C3SS4 18
16 C3SS3 16
14 C3SS2 14
12 C3SS1 12
10 5VNPD 10
8 C4SPD 8
6 5VNPD 6
4 C3SPD 4
2 D-GND 2
S DF1B-26DE P
DF1B-34
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
S
13
15
17
CN3
C3PFD 13
C3LUD 15
C3PED 17
2
1
1
2
1
2
P
6
8
10
DF1B-34
/C3PFC
/C4PFC
/TRC2
P-GND
24V4
3
1
3
1
DF1B-28DE
P
CPFM_CW/CCW 2
CPFM_GAIN
15
CPFM_LD
13
/CPFM_CK 11
/CPFM_D
9
5VN
7
D-GND
5
S
2
15
13
11
9
7
5
S
6
8
10
P-GND
24V4
CN6
12
P-GND
14
/C3LUM
16
P-GND
18
/C4LUM
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN3
6 /C3PFC
8 /C4PFC
10 /TRC2
B34B-PNDZS-1
3
1
CN4
2 CPFM_CW/CCW
15
CPFM_GAIN
13
CPFM_LD
11
/CPFM_CK
9
/CPFM_D
7
5VN
5
D-GND
PCU PWB
B2P-PH-K-S
P-GND
/C3LUM
B2P-PH-K-S
P-GND
/C4LUM
1
/TRC2
2
2
24V3
1
/C4PFC
2
1
24V3
1
2
2
1
/C3PFC
1
2
24V3
P-GND
24V4
VH-2P
CPFM_CW/CCW 7
CPFM_GAIN
6
CPFM_LD
5
/CPFM_CK
4
/CPFM_D
3
5VN
2
D-GND
1
B07B-PASK
B. Tray paper feed unit
CPFM
C3PFC
C3LUM
4
C4LUM
TRC2
9
C3SPD
11
C4PUS
C4PFD
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS4
9
C4SPD
11
10
Signal
C3LUD
C3LUM
C3PED
C3PFC
C3PFD
C3PUS
C3PWD
C3SPD
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3
C3SS4
C4LUD
C4LUM
C4PED
C4PFC
C4PFD
C4PUS
C4SPD
C4SS1
C4SS2
C4SS3
C4SS4
CPFM
TRC2
No.
1
Name
Tray 3 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 3 paper width detection
Tray 3 remaining quantity detection
Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Paper feed motor
Name
Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper
feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed
tray)
Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed
tray)
Torque limiter
5
6
7
8
9

Paper size detection plate
10
11
12
Lift plate
Regulation plate
Rear end plate
2
3
Function/Operation
Detects upper limit of tray 3
Drives the paper tray lift plate
Detects the paper empty of tray 3
Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 3
Detects paper entry from tray 3
Detects paper width of tray 3
Detects remaining quantity of tray 3
Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 3 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Detects paper size of tray 3
Detects upper limit of tray 4
Drives the paper tray lift plate
Detects the paper empty of tray 4
Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 4
Detects the paper entry from tray 4
Detects remaining quantity of tray 4
Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 4 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Detects paper size of tray 4.
Controls the transport roller 1, 2, transport roller 3, 4 ON/OFF.
Function/Operation
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
Separates paper to prevent double feed
double feed
Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2
Transports the paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4
Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4
Transports the paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5
The rear edge detection detects the paper size, by changing position to synchronizing with the
rear end plate.
Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
Regulates short side direction of the paper
Regulates long side direction of the paper
B. Tray paper feed
A. Tandem paper feed
(1)
(1)
Paper size of each paper feed tray
The paper feed tray 1 is used exclusively for A4, 11 x 8.5, or B5

paper size.
The paper feed tray 2 is used for A4 (11 x 8.5) paper size.
(2)
1)
2)
Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
Paper feed operation

When copy/print operation is started, the motors (CPFM) and
the clutch (T1PFC) are turned on to turn on the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates and falls
the take-up roller to pick up paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(2)
Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch

are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
timing to feed paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
prevent against double feed of paper.
(3)
Remaining paper detection
Remaining paper detection is performed according to four

stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.
(4)
Remaining paper detection method
The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the

number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and changes
in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
CPED
Detects remaining paper
(empty sensor)
by the paper empty sensor
Turn plate
Remaining paper
Not detects the paper
detection actuator
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
2)
Unit
Tandem paper feed tray unit
Tray paper feed unit
Others
A
B
C
Page
F- 6
F -11
F -18
Remove the screws (A), and remove the stopper (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the tandem paper feed tray unit
(D).
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit

Unit
1
Tandem
paper feed
tray unit
Parts
a
d
e
f
Paper pickup roller

(Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (Tandem
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed
tray)
Separation roller (Tandem
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed
tray)
Torque limiter
Lift wire (Rear)
Lift wire (Front)
Mainte
nance
{
C
F- 6
F- 7
F- 8
F- 8
F -10
C
D 1
a. Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray),
Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Unit
1-a
1-d
1-b
1-c
Parts
Tandem paper feed

tray unit
a
b
1-e
Page
Paper pickup roller (Tandem

No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (Tandem
1-a
1-b
1-d
1-c
1-f
1-b
1-a
(1)
1-b
1-a
Unit
1)
A
1
1)
Remove the right lower door and right lower door cover. (Refer
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT).
Mainte
nance
{
{
2)
Disengage the pawls (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
Raise the tandem paper feed PG unit (D). Disengage the pawl
(E), and remove the paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
paper feed tray) (F), the paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No.
2 paper feed tray) (G).
1-a F
B
E
1-b G
3)
Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the separation roller (E).
D
D
b. Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)

Unit
1
Parts
Tandem paper feed

tray unit
Separation roller (Tandem

Mainte
nance
{
1-c
1-c
E 1-c
4)
c. Torque limiter
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Tandem paper feed

tray unit
Remove the torque limiter (F).
Torque limiter
1-d
F 1-d
d. Lift wire (Rear)
Unit
Tandem paper feed
tray unit
Parts
Lift wire (Rear)
1-d
1-e
1)
2)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
1)
Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
(Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Tandem paper feed tray unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the cassette positioning

plate (B).
B
3)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the separation roller unit
(E).
D
E
4)
Remove the E-ring (C). Slide the pulley (D) to rear side, turn it
clockwise to loosen the wires (E).
7)
Remove the wires (L).

* When installing, pass the wire through clamp (M).
1-e L
1-e
L
M
1-e
L
L
1-e
5)
Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the wires (E).
* When installing the pulley, turn it counterclockwise, and fit

the shaft hole (O) of pulley and the T form pin (N) position on
the shaft, insert it.
F
E
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is silver (G), and red (H). L side is blue (I), and red (J).
N
O
I
G
H
6)
Remove the resin E-rings (K).
K
K
K
5)
e. Lift wire (Front)
Unit
Tandem paper feed
tray unit
Disengage the pawls (G), and remove the wires (F).
Parts
Lift wire (Front)
G
F
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is silver (H), and red (I). L side is blue (J), and red (K).
1-f
1)
to the EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
3)
Remove the screws (A) and washers (B), and remove the front
cabinet (C).
J
H
K
A
B
6)
Remove the resin E-rings (L).
B
B
C
B
4)
Remove the E-ring (D). Slide the pulley (E) to front side, turn it
counterclockwise to loosen the wire (F).
D
E
7)
Remove the wires (M).

* When installing, pass the wires (M) through clamp (N).
1-f M
M 1-f
1-f
M
N
1-f
M
* When installing the pulley, turn it clockwise, and fit the shaft
hole (P) of pulley and the T form pin (O) position on the
shaft, insert it.
(1)

Unit
1
1
O
1)
Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION.)
3)
Reomve the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
B. Tray paper feed unit

Unit
1
Parts
Tray paper
feed unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Paper pickup roller (No. 3 /

No. 4 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 3 /
Separation roller (No. 3 /
Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)
Torque limiter
Paper empty detection
Upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection)
Entry detection
Mainte
nance
{
Page
F -12
{
{
F -12
F -13
F -13
F -14
F -15
F -16
F -17
4)
1-g
Remove the screws (C), and remove the supporting point

lower (D) and the paper guides (E).
1-j
1-a
1-f
E
D
1-b
1-e
1-d
1-h
1
1-i
1-c
C
D
5)

remove the tray paper feed unit (H). Remove the screws (I)
from tray paper feed unit (H), and remove the fixing plate (J).
1)
Remove the paper feed tray (A).
H 1
2)
Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
1 H
B
J
I
a. Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray), Paper

feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)
Unit
1
Parts
a
b
Paper pickup roller (No. 3 /

Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No.
4 paper feed tray)
3)
Mainte
nance
{
Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the paper pickup roller
(No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (E) and paper feed roller (No. 3
/ No. 4 paper feed tray) (F).
1-a
1-a E
F 1-b
b. Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)

Unit
1-b
Parts
c
Separation roller (No. 3 / No.

4 paper feed tray)
1-c
Mainte
nance
{
1)
4)
Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C),
and the parallel pin (D). Remove the E-ring (E), and remove
the bearing (F).
F
E
D
C
B
A
2)
Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the separation roller (No.
3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (C).
5)
Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H), the Ering (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the transport roller 2, 4
(Dirve) (K).
C 1-c
K 1-d
c. Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)

Unit
1
Parts
d
Mainte
nance
{
d. Torque limiter
Unit
1
1-d
Parts
e
Torque limiter
Mainte
nance
1-e
1)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION.)
3)
Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tray paper
feed unit".)
1)
2)
3)
feed unit".)
4)
Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), the Ering (D), and the bearing (E). Remove the screws (F), and
remove the paper guide unit (G).
7)
C B
Slide the separation shaft (P), and remove the bearing (Q).
Remove the separation shaft (P).
G
F
F
Q
P
8)
5)
Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the coupling (S). Remove
the separation shaft (T), and remove the torque limiter (U).
Remove the spring (H). Remove the screws (I), and remove
the support plate (J). Remove the spring (K) and separation
pressure release plate (L).
I
I
J
H
K
U 1-e
e. Paper empty detection, Upper limit detection (Lift HP

detection)
6)
Unit
Disengage the pawl (M), and remove the separation roller (N).
Remove the E-ring (O).
f
g
Parts
Paper empty detection
Upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
1-g
1-f
1)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHTOCONDUCTOR SETCTION.)
3)
feed unit".)
4)
Remove the transport roller 2, 4 (Drive). (Refer to the "c.

Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)".)
5)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper guide (B).
f. Entry detection
Unit
Parts
Entry detection
6)
Remove the screws (C) and the screws (D), and remove the
support plate (E).
1-h
C
D
D
C
C
D
1)
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
3)
feed unit".)
4)

5)
E
7)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper empty detection (G) and the upper limit detection (Lift HP detection (H)).
Disconnect the connectors (I).
H 1-g
1-f G
6)
support plate (E).
C
D
D
C
C
D
7)
Remove the screw (F) and paper entry detection unit (G). Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I) and paper
entry detection (J).
6)
support plate (E).
C
D
F
C
G
1-h J
E
7)
Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G), the pulley
(H), and the parallel pin (I). Remove the E-ring (J), and remove
the bearing (K).
g. Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
J
I
H
G
F
8)
Remove the screw (L), and remove the earth plate (M), the Ering (N), and the bearing (O). Remove the transport roller 1, 3
(Drive) (P).
1-i
1)
2)
3)
feed unit".)
4)

5)
1-i
N
M
L
h. Paper pickup solenoid
Unit
7)
Parts
Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the screws (G), and
remove the paper pickup solenoid unit (H).
* When installing, arrange so that the arm (I) is under the
take-up holder (J).
1-j
J
I
1)
Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
3)
feed unit".)
4)

5)
8)
Remove the screws (K), and remove the paper pickup solenoid (L).
* When installing, check to insure that the solenoid pin (M) is
engaged with the arm (N).
B
N
1-j
A
K
6)
support plate (E).
C
D
D
C
C
D
C. Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
3)
Parts
Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1)
Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2)
Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1)
Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detector
Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detector
C3SS PWB
C4SS PWB
Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),

and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2) unit
(G).
Page
F -17
F -17
F -19
G
E
F -20
F -20
F -20
F -21
F -21
c
g
e
a
f
d
k
l
b
h
i
j
F
4)
Disengage the pawls (H), and remove the coupling (I) and
spring (J) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2)
(K).
I
H
a b K
(2)
(1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2)

c
a
b
Parts
Parts
a
b
1)
Remove the rear cabinet and rear cabinet lower. (Refer to the
"[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C),
and the parallel pin (D).
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
* When removal of the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray

2), this procedure is required.
B
A
3)
Disconnect the connector (C). Disengage the pawls (D), and

remove the duct (E).
6)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the mounting plate unit
(M) from the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) (N).
* When installing, pass the shaft (O) through into the arm (P).
D
O
P
C
D
L
L
E
M
D
4)
c N

remove the ozone duct (H).
(3)
Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2)

d
e
Pa rts
H
d
G
F
G
5)
Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and

remove the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) unit (K).
1)
Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
([A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
3)
remove the tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2) (C).
K
C d
C e
J
J
C
I
B
A
(4)
Tandem tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity

detection
f
g
(5)

h
Parts
Parts
h
f
1)
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
3)
Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B).

Remove the harness (D) from the wire saddles (C), and
remove the lock arm unit (E).
1)
2)
A
B
B
C
3)
A
D
4)
Remove the tandem tray installation detection (C). Disconnect

the connector (D) from tandem tray installation detection (C).
Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the tandem tray 1

paper remaining quantity detector (G) and the tandem tray 2
paper remaining quantity detector (H).
C h
F
f G
H g
(6)
Tray 3, 4 remaining quantity detection

i
j
Parts
i
j
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector (B). Remove the screw (C), and

remove the holder (D).
A
D
B
2)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D), and remove the tray 3, 4 remaining quantity
detection (E).
3)
Disengage the pawls (E), and remove the C3SS, C4SS PWB
unit (F). Remove the springs (G) from the C3SS, C4SS PWB
(H).
B
k
E
(7)
l H
E
C3SS, C4SS PWB

Parts
k
l
C3SS PWB
C4SS PWB
(8)

Parts
k
m
m
1)
1)
2)
3)
Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Tray paper
feed unit".)
4)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the width detection unit
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
B
C
A
5)
Remove the spring (D). Disengage the pawl (E), and remove
the paper width detection mounting base (F).
E
D
6)
Remove the width detection arm (G). Remove the screw (H),
and remove the tray 3 width detection (I).
* When installing the width detection arm (G), engage to the
projection (J) of tray 3 width detection (I).
m I
J
4. Maintenance
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Paper pickup roller

Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
3
2
4
1
2
4
4
5
3
2
4
5
3
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
MX-7000N
[G]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
T1PPD2
1
2
No.
1
2
Name
Paper feed motor
Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
Function/Operation
Detects entry of the paper from the tandem tray 1
Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 1
Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 12 and 13
Name
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 13
MX-7000N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G 1
3
P-GND
1
24V4
B40B-PNDZS-1
3
1
P
P-GND
24V4
DF1B-28DE
2
1
T1PPD1
Signal
CPFM
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
TANCL
9
7
5
2
15
13
11
9
7
5
VH-2P
P-GND
24V4
SM-6P-N
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VN
D-GND
T1PPD2
5VNPD
D-GND
T1PPD1
5
4
3
2
1
B07B-PASK
CPFM
GP2A200L 179228-3
3
D-GND
2
T1PPD2
1
5VNPD
GP2A200L 179228-3
3
D-GND
2
T1PPD1
1
5VN
TANCL
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
5VN
D-GND
1
3
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
2
/TANCL
1
1
24V3
2
DF11-6DP-SP1
1
24V3
24V3
3
DF11-8DP-SP1
5VNPD
1
5VNPD
3
3
1
S
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
5VN
D-GND
2
15
13
11
9
7
5
2
15
13
11
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
5VN
D-GND
8
4
/TANCL
24V3
8
4
D-GND
5VNPD
3
1
8
4
CN4
/TANCL
24V3
PCU PWB
D-GND
5VNPD
T1PPD2
B34B-PNDZS-1
11
9
T1PPD2
9
3
1
17
T1PPD1
5VN
13
11
13
11
21
19
T1PPD1
5VN
A. Paper pass unit
B. Vertical transport unit
24V4
P-GND
VH-2P
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK
1
2
S
1
3
DF1B-28DE
24V4
P-GND
P
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
D-GND
5VN
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
24V3
/TRC1
4
6
24V3
24V3
2
1
CPFM
24V4
P-GND
5
D-GND
7
5VN
9
/CPFM_D
11
/CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
13
15
CPFM_GAIN
2
CPFM_CW/CCW
B40B-PNDZS-1
4
6
24V3
/TRC1
DF11-6DP-SP1
1
24V3
2
/TRC1
1
2
CN4
1
3
TRC1
PCU PWB
T2PPD
DSW_D
2
1
T2PPD
3
2
D-GND
2
3
5VN
1
P
9
3
5
Signal
CPFM
T2PPD
TRC1
DSW-D
No.
1
2
DF1B -34
T2PPD
D-GND
5VN
179228-3
S
9
3
5
CN3
9
3
5
T2PPD
D-GND
5VN
5VN
5VN
2
1
B34B-PNDZS-1
2
D=GND
D=GND
1
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
GP2A200L
2
3
1
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
T2PPD
D-GND
5VN
Name
Paper feed motor
Tandem tray 2 paper presence detector
Right lower door open/close detection
Function/Operation
Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 2
Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 5, 6
Detects open/close of the right lower door
Name
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 7
Signal
CPFM
LCCM
LPFC
LPPD
No.
1
2

24V3
22
24
/LPFC
B30B-PNDZS-1
14
16
2
24V3
/LPFC
Name
Paper feed motor
LCC transport motor
LCC paper entry detection sensor
Function/Operation
Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller of LCC transport section
Detects entry of the paper from the LCC
Name
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the LCC to the transport roller 15
17
19
21
23
25
27
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
DF1B-28DE
14
16
11
3
5
LPPD
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN1
TX24-60R-LT-H1
11
3
5
LPPD
D-GND
5VN
DF1B-28DE
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
17
19
21
23
25
27
2
1
5VN
3
5VN
1
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
DRIVER PWB
B6B-PASK-1
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
PCU PWB
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
HTMY_1
2
3
HTMY_2
4
PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2
5
6
WEB_M1
7
WEB_M2
8
5VN
P-GND
9
N,C
10
11
D-GND
ADMH_A
12
ADMH_/A
13
14
/ADMH_CNT
15
ADML_A
ADML_/A
16
17
PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
18
19
LCCM_/A
20
LCCM_CNT
21
5VN
22
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
23
DMK_EN
24
DMM_EN
25
BTM_CLK
26
POM_A
27
POM_/A
28
29
/POM_CNT
D-GND
30
P-GND
31
HTMM_1
32
HTMM_2
33
HTMC_1
34
HTMC_2
35
HTMK_1
36
HTMK_2
37
5VN
38
P-GND
39
40
N,C
D-GND
41
ADMH_B
42
43
ADMH_/B
44
/ADML_CNT
45
ADML_B
46
ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT
47
PSFM_EN
48
LCCM_B
49
LCCM_/B
50
51
5VN
52
DMK_CLK
53
/DMK_CNT
54
DMC_EN
DMY_EN
55
56
/BTM_CNT
57
BTM_EN
58
POM_B
59
POM_/B
60
D-GND
CN3
LPPD
11
D-GND
3
5VN
5
B34B-PNDZS-1
3
1
P-GND
24V4
9
7
5
3
1
2
15
13
11
9
7
5
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
5VN
D-GND
2
15
13
11
3
D=GND
1
D=GND
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
TX-25-60P-LT-H1
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
HTMY_1
2
3
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
4
PHTMK_2
5
WEB_M1
6
WEB_M2
7
5VN
8
9
P-GND
10
N,C
D-GND
11
ADMH_A
12
ADMH_/A
13
14
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
15
ADML_/A
16
17
PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
18
LCCM_/A
19
LCCM_CNT
20
5VN
21
DRMCL_CLK
22
/DRMCL_CNT
23
DMK_EN
24
DMM_EN
25
26
BTM_CLK
27
POM_A
POM_/A
28
/POM_CNT
29
D-GND
30
P-GND
31
HTMM_1
32
HTMM_2
33
HTMC_1
34
35
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
36
HTMK_2
37
5VN
38
P-GND
39
N,C
40
D-GND
41
ADMH_B
42
ADMH_/B
43
/ADML_CNT
44
ADML_B
45
ADML_/B
46
PSFM_CNT
47
PSFM_EN
48
LCCM_B
49
LCCM_/B
50
5VN
51
DMK_CLK
52
/DMK_CNT
53
DMC_EN
54
DMY_EN
55
/BTM_CNT
56
BTM_EN
57
POM_B
58
POM_/B
59
D-GND
60
3
1
P-GND
24V4
B40B-PNDZS-1
2
15
13
11
9
7
5
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
D_MFPC/
5VN
D-GND
24V3
/LPFC
3
2
1
1
3
6
4
2
5
1
2
LPPD
D-GND
5VN
B6B-XH
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
1
2
3
VH-2P
P-GND
24V4
B07B-PASK
CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
5VN
D-GND
2
3
1
179228-3
LPPD
D-GND
5VN
GP2A200L
C. LCC transport unit
LCCM
CPFM
LPFC
PCU PWB
Signal
LCCM
Name
LCC transport motor
No.
1
Name
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the transport roller 6 and 13 to the transport roller 8
Function/Operation

B6B-PASK-1
DRIVER PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
DF1B-28DE
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
P
17
19
21
23
25
27
CN1
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
TX-25-60P-LT-H1
TX24-60R-LT-H1
P-GND
HTMY_1
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2
WEB_M1
WEB_M2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_A
ADMH_/A
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
ADML_/A
PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
LCCM_/A
LCCM_CNT
5VN
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN
DMM_EN
BTM_CLK
POM_A
POM_/A
/POM_CNT
D-GND
P-GND
HTMM_1
HTMM_2
HTMC_1
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
HTMK_2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_B
ADMH_/B
/ADML_CNT
ADML_B
ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
LCCM_B
LCCM_/B
5VN
DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN
DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT
BTM_EN
POM_B
POM_/B
D-GND
SOCKET1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
HTMY_1
2
HTMY_2
3
PHTMK_1
4
5
PHTMK_2
WEB_M1
6
WEB_M2
7
8
5VN
P-GND
9
N,C
10
11
D-GND
ADMH_A
12
ADMH_/A
13
14
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
15
ADML_/A
16
PSFM_CLK
17
LCCM_A
18
19
LCCM_/A
20
LCCM_CNT
5VN
21
22
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
23
DMK_EN
24
25
DMM_EN
BTM_CLK
26
27
POM_A
POM_/A
28
/POM_CNT
29
D-GND
30
P-GND
31
HTMM_1
32
HTMM_2
33
HTMC_1
34
35
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
36
HTMK_2
37
5VN
38
P-GND
39
N,C
40
41
D-GND
ADMH_B
42
ADMH_/B
43
44
/ADML_CNT
45
ADML_B
46
ADML_/B
47
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
48
LCCM_B
49
50
LCCM_/B
5VN
51
DMK_CLK
52
/DMK_CNT
53
DMC_EN
54
55
DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT
56
57
BTM_EN
POM_B
58
POM_/B
59
60
D-GND
S
17
19
21
23
25
27
B6B-XH
1
2
3
4
5
6
LCCM_A
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
LCCM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
D. PS lower unit
LCCM
E. PS unit
DRIVER
PWB
PFM_A
4
PFM_A/
1
PFM_B/
3
6
PFM_B
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
B6P-PH-K-S
1
24V3
2
2
/RRC
1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/RRM_CK 4
/RRM_D
5
6
RRM_LD
N.C
3
B6P-PH-K-S
PFM
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
DF1B-18DE
PFM_A
PFM_A/
PFM_B/
PFM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
24V3
/RRC
13
15
CN14
8
10
17
2
4
6
8
INT24V2
P-GND
/RRM_CK
/RRM_D
RRM_LD
17
2
4
6
8
2
4
12
14
16
CN9
6
PFM_A
PFM_A/
5
PFM_B/
4
PFM_B
3
2
INT24V1
1
INT24V1
B7B-PASK-1
24V3
/RRC
INT24V2
P-GND
/RRM_CK
/RRM_D
RRM_LD
B30B-PNDZS-1
RRC
RRM
PCU PWB
RRC2
3
2
PPD2
PPD1
2
1
Signal
PFM
PPD1
PPD2
RRC
RRC2
RRM
No.
1
2
3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
24V
/RRC2
1
2
PHNR-8-H
BU08P-TR-P-H
8
24V3
/RRC2
7
D-GND
3
PPD2
2
5VNPD
1
179228-3
GP2A200L
1
2
3
5VNPD(LED)
PPD1
D-GND
QSW-Z0538
4
5
6
1
3
2
PHR-3
D-GND
PPD2
5VNPD
5VNPD(LED)
PPD1
D-GND
CN14
1
2
30
29
24V3
/RRC2
8
7
6
27
25
28
D-GND
PPD2
5VNPD
5
4
3
5VNPD(LED)
26
PPD1
23
21
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
Name
Resist pre-detection
Resist detection
PS clutch
PS clutch 2
PS motor
Function/Operation
Detects the paper of the resist roller front
Detects the paper of the resist roller front
Controls the ON/OFF of the resist roller
Brakes the resist roller
Drives the resist roller
Name
Function/Operation
Transports the paper to the resist roller.
Transports the paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative
relations between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport power of the transport
roller
3)
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers.
remove the paper pass unit (C).
ON/OFF of each transport roller is controlled of by the paper transport clutch.
C 1
The resist roller controls the relative positions of transported paper

and the transfer image.
The resist roller is driven by the transport motor.
The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

A
B
C
D
E
F
Unit
Paper pass unit
Vertical transport unit
LCC transport unit
PS lower unit
PS unit
Others
Page
G- 6
G- 8
G -11
G -14
G -15
G -19
a. Transport roller 12 (Drive)

Unit
1
Paper pass unit
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
a
A. Paper pass unit

Unit
1
Paper pass
unit
Parts
a
b
c
d

detector 1
detector 2
1-a
Mainte
nance
{
{
Page
G- 8
1-a
G- 6
G- 7
G- 7
1-c
1-b
1-d
1)
Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and the right
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "[F]
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION".)
3)
Remove the paper pass unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper pass
unit".)
4)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove the
screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the earth plate
(E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
(1)
Paper pass unit
D
Unit
1
Paper pass unit
1)
2)
5)
Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the
transport roller 12 (Drive) (H).
5)
Remove the screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
the earth plate (E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
F
H 1-a
E
C
G
F
6)
b. Transport roller 13 (Drive)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
Paper pass unit
Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the
transport roller 13 (Drive) (H).
F
G
1-b
H
G
1-b
1)
Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and right lower
door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
3)
unit".)
4)
c. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
Unit
Paper pass unit
Parts
1-c
1)
2)
3)
unit".)
4)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the tandem tray 1 transport detector 1 (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
B. Vertical transport unit

Unit
Vertical
transport unit
Parts
a
b
c
d
1-c
B

detector
Right door open/close
detection sensor
Mainte
nance
{
{
Page
G- 9
G- 9
G -10
G -11
1-c
1-b
1
d. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2
Unit
Paper pass unit
Parts
1-d
1-a
(1)
1-d
Unit
1
1)
2)
3)
unit".)
4)
5)
1)
right lower door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the waste toner bottle. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION.)
3)
Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the tandem tray 1 transport detector 2 (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
B
C
D 1-d
4)
Release the lock (C), and open the right door unit (D).
4)
Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), and
the gear collar (D). Remove the E-rings (E), and remove the
bearing (F).
E
D
C
B
A
5)
Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),

and remove the vertical transport unit (G).
5)
Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H).
Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 5 (Drive) (K).
G 1
K 1-a
I
H
G

Unit
1
b. Transport roller 6 (Drive)

Parts
Mainte
nance
{
Unit
1
Parts
b
Mainte
nance
{
1-b
1-a
1)
right door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. ([J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION.)
3)
Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical

transport unit".)
1)
2)
3)

transport unit".)
4)
5)
c. Tandem tray 2 transport detector

Unit
Parts
Tandem tray 2 transport detector
1-c
Remove the E-ring (C), the gear (D), the parallel pin (E), and
the gear collar (F). Remove the E-rings (G), and remove the
bearing (H).
H
G
1)
2)
3)

transport unit".)
4)
F
E
D
C
A
B
A
6)
Remove the screw (I), and remove the earth plate (J). Remove
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L). Remove the transport roller 6 (Drive) (M).
5)
1-b M
Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screw (D), and

remove the tandem tray 2 transport detector (E).
K L
I
E 1-c
d. Right lower door open/close detection sensor
Unit
Parts
Right lower door open/close detection
sensor
C. LCC transport unit

Unit
1
LCC
transport unit
Parts
a
b
c

LCC paper entry detection
sensor
Mainte
nance
{
{
Page
G -12
G -12
G -13
1-b
1-c
1)
Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
3)

transport unit".)
4)
Remove the right lower door open/close detection sensor (A).
1-a
1-c
(1)
LCC transport unit

Unit
1
LCC transport unit
A 1-d
1)
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
B
A
3)

remove the earth wire (E) and LCC transport unit (F).
4)
bearing (H).
F 1
D
D
E
5)
the transport roller 14 (Dirve) (K).
C
K 1-a

Unit
1
Parts
LCC transport unit
Mainte
nance
{
J
I
b. Transport roller 15 (Dirve)

Unit
1-a
1
1)
2)
Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) LCC transport unit".)
3)
Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B).
LCC transport unit
Parts
b
Mainte
nance
{
1-b
A
B
1)
2)
3)
Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B).
c. LCC paper entry detection sensor
Unit
LCC transport unit
Parts
LCC paper entry detection sensor
B
A
4)
bearing (H).
1-c
1)
2)
3)
A
A
H
G
F
5)
the transport roller 15 (Dirve) (K).
4)
Remove the screws (C) and the earth wire (D), and remove the
support plate (E).
C
K 1-b
E
D
J
I
5)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the LCC paper entry
detection sensor (G). Disconnect the connector (H).
5)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the PS lower unit (B).
F
G
1 B
D. PS lower unit
Unit
1
PS lower unit

Parts
Mainte
nance
{
Page
G -14
Unit
1
PS lower unit
Parts
a
Mainte
nance
{
1-a
1-a
(1)
PS lower unit
Unit
1
1)
Remove the right lower door , the right cabinet lower, and the
2)
Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC transport unit".)
3)
Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Others.)
PS lower unit
4)
Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
5)
Remove the PS lower unit. (Refer to the D. PS lower unit.)
6)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth plate (B) and
supporting point holder (C). Remove the paper guide (D).
D
1)
2)
Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC transport unit".)
3)
4)
Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
A
C
7)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the support plate (F).
E. PS unit
Unit
1
PS unit
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
Resist detection
PS clutch 2
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
Page
G -16
G -17
G -17
G -18
G -18
G -19
1-c
1-a
8)
1-e
Remove the screws (G) and screws (H), and remove the paper
guide (I).
1-f
1-d
1-b
(1)
PS unit
Unit
1
9)
PS unit
Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the earth plate (K).
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
1)
2)
K
M
L
10) Remove the E-ring (N), the gear (O), the parallel pin (P), the
gear collar (Q). Remove the E-rings (R), and remove the bearing (S). Remove the transport roller 7 (Drive) (T).
B
A
T 1-a
3)
a. Resist detection
Remove the screw (C), and remove the cover (D).

* When installing, engage the pawl (E) to the frame.
Unit
PS unit
Parts
Resist detection
C
1-a
4)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the harness cover (G).
1)
2)
Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the stay (B).
A
A
A
A
A
A
5)
Disconnect the connector (H) and the snap band (I). Remove
the screw (J), and remove the PS unit (K).
4)
K 1
Remove the screw (C), and remove the resist detection (D).
Disconnect the connector (E).
D 1-a
b. Resist pre-detection
Unit
PS unit
c. Resist roller (Drive)
Parts
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
PS unit
1-c
1-b
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).

Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop

projection is engaged with the rib of the holder.
A
A
A
A
A
C
A
A
C
4)
Remove the screw (C), and the remove the mounting plate
(D). Disconnect the connector (E), and resist pre-detection (F).
C
4)
Remove the screw (E), and remove the earth spring (F).
Remove the screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove
the E-ring (I), and the gear (J), and the parallel pin (K).
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
E
F
1-b
H
L
K
J
5)
Remove the E-ring (N) and the gear (O). Remove the E-ring
(P) and bearing (Q), and remove the resist roller (Drive) (R).
4)
Remove the screw (E), and the earth spring (F). Remove the
screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove the E-ring (I)
and the bearing (J).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
E
F
R 1-c
J
I
H
Q
P
O
N
5)
d. Transport roller 8 (Drive)

Parts
Unit
1
PS unit
Remove the E-ring (K), and remove the gear (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), and remove the bearing (N). Remove the transport
roller 8 (Dirve) (O).
Mainte
nance
{
1-d
O
1-d
e. Resist roller (Idle)
1)
2)
3)
Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).

Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
Unit
1
Parts
PS unit
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop

projection is engaged with the rib of the holder.
Mainte
nance
{
1-e
D
C
A
1)
2)
3)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A) and the E-ring (B), and remove
the PS clutch 2 (C).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is engaged with the rib of the holder.
A
A
A
A
A
C 1-f
A
A
B
4)
Clean the resist roller (Idle) (C).
A
C 1-e
F. Others
Parts
a
Paper dust removal cleaner
Mainte
nance
{
Page
G -19
f. PS clutch 2
Unit
PS unit
Parts
f
PS clutch 2
1-f
(1)
1)

1)
2)
2)
Remove the paper dust removal cleaner (B), and clean the
paper dust.
a
B
4. Maintenance
No.
1
2
3
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Part name

When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
(P/G No. : [48]-10)

(P/G No. : [48]-11)
(P/G No. : [48]-12)
2
1
2
MX-7000N DUPLEX SECTION H 1
9
25
21
6
32
7
23
8
40
22
24
26
28
30
32
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
PCU PWB
S
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
DRIVER PWB
21
6
32
7
23
8
40
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
F-GND
24V3
/ADUGS
9
25
P
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
QR/P4 40PIN
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
ADUD3
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
16
13
14
15
ADMH_A
ADMH_A/
ADMH_B/
ADMH_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3
7
8
9
TFD-R
1
D-GND
2
5VN(LED)
3
POD3
4
D-GND
5
5VNPD(LED)
6
S16B-PHDSS-B
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VN(LED)
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
6
5VNPD(LED)
S32B-PHDSS-B
CN2
APPD1
10
D-GND
11
5VNPD(LED)
12
4
1
3
6
2
5
33
36
38
35
34
37
P
ADML_A
ADML_A/
ADML_B/
ADML_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
S6B-PH-SM3
TFD-R
D-GND
5VN(LED)
POD3
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
APPD1
2
D-GND
1
5VNPD(LED)
1
2
3
1
APPD2
8
2
D-GND
7
3
5VNPD(LED)
6
APPD2
CN15
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
ADMH_A
ADMH_A/
ADMH_B/
ADMH_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
QR/P4 40PIN
33
36
38
35
34
37
S
ADMH_A
6
ADMH_A/
5
ADMH_B/
4
ADMH_B
3
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
1
B12B-PASK-1
4
1
3
6
2
5
5
12
22
11
10
16
APPD2
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD(LED)
3
GP1S73
179228-3
1
APPD1
2
D-GND
3
5VNPD(LED)
179228-3
GP1S73
1
DSW_ADU
2
D-GND
3
5VN(LED)
179228-3
GP1S73
1
TFD-R
2
D-GND
3
5VN(LED)
GP1S73
179228-3
1
POD3
2
D-GND
3
5VNPD(LED)
179228-3
GP1S73
2
1
24V3
1
2
/ADUGS
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
ADML_A
ADML_A/
ADML_B/
ADML_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
5
12
22
11
10
16
TFD_R
CN7
12
11
10
9
8
7
ADML_A
ADML_A/
ADML_B/
ADML_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
21
24V3
23
/ADUGS
B40B-PNDZS-1
P-GND
HTMY_1
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
PHTMK_2
WEB_M1
WEB_M2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_A
ADMH_/A
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
ADML_/A
PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
LCCM_/A
LCCM_CNT
5VN
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN
DMM_EN
BTM_CLK
POM_A
POM_/A
/POM_CNT
D-GND
P-GND
HTMM_1
HTMM_2
HTMC_1
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
HTMK_2
5VN
P-GND
N,C
D-GND
ADMH_B
ADMH_/B
/ADML_CNT
ADML_B
ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
LCCM_B
LCCM_/B
5VN
DMK_CLK
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN
DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT
BTM_EN
POM_B
POM_/B
D-GND
[H] DUPLEX SECTION
TX-25-60P-LT-H1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
SOCKET1
TX24-60R-LT-H1
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
2
HTMY_1
3
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
4
PHTMK_2
5
WEB_M1
6
7
WEB_M2
5VN
8
P-GND
9
N,C
10
11
D-GND
ADMH_A
12
ADMH_/A
13
14
/ADMH_CNT
ADML_A
15
ADML_/A
16
PSFM_CLK
17
18
LCCM_A
19
LCCM_/A
20
LCCM_CNT
21
5VN
22
DRMCL_CLK
23
/DRMCL_CNT
24
DMK_EN
DMM_EN
25
BTM_CLK
26
27
POM_A
28
POM_/A
29
/POM_CNT
30
D-GND
P-GND
31
HTMM_1
32
33
HTMM_2
HTMC_1
34
35
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
36
37
HTMK_2
38
5VN
39
P-GND
N,C
40
D-GND
41
42
ADMH_B
ADMH_/B
43
/ADML_CNT
44
ADML_B
45
ADML_/B
46
47
PSFM_CNT
PSFM_EN
48
49
LCCM_B
50
LCCM_/B
5VN
51
DMK_CLK
52
/DMK_CNT
53
DMC_EN
54
55
DMY_EN
/BTM_CNT
56
57
BTM_EN
POM_B
58
POM_/B
59
60
D-GND
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
3
ADMH
POD3
ADUGS
4
DSW_ADU
APPD1
1
ADML
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB
Signal
ADMH
ADML
ADUGS
APPD1
APPD2
DSW_ADU
POD3
TFD_R
Name
ADU motor upper
ADU motor lower
ADU gate solenoid
ADU transport pass detection 1
Function/Operation
Drives the duplex (ADU) section
Controls the right paper exit gate
Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close
Detects the paper exit into the right tray
Detects the right tray paper exit full
No.
1
2
3
Name
4
5

ADU reverse gate
Function/Operation
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 17 to the transport roller 11.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 16.
Transports the paper transported from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2
/ Transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section
Ejects the paper to the right tray
Switching the paper path route which transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section or ejects
the paper to the right paper tray.
When transporting the paper to the duplex (ADU) section, executes switchback for switching the
paper transport route.
Paper which had been sent from the fusing section is sent to the
paper exit roller 1 from the transport roller 13 that is driven by the
ADU motor upper.
At that time, paper passes under the gate guide.
After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the
specified time, it is rotated reversely.
The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely, paper is transported
to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes the right side of
the ADU gate guide by its own weight.
The transport roller 10 and the transport roller 11 that are driven
by the ADU motor lower transport the paper to the duplex paper
feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported to the inside of the machine again.

A. Right door unit
Unit
1
Right door
unit
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
RD I/F PWB
ADU motor upper
ADU motor lower
Right tray paper exit full
detection
Right tray paper exit
detection
Discharge brush
ADU transport pass
detection 1
ADU transport pass
detection 2
detection
ADU gate solenoid
Mainte
nance
1-f
Page
HHHH-
1-e
3
4
5
6
1-d
1-b
1-l
1-j
1-a
H- 7
H- 8
H- 9
H- 9
{
{
{
{
H -10
H -11
H -12
H -13
H -14
H -15
1-f
1-o
1-k
1-i
1-c
1-m
1-g
1
1-n
1-h
(1)
Right door unit
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the right door unit (B).
Unit
1
Right door unit
B 1
E
E
E
1)
a. RD I/F PWB
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
a
RD I/F PWB
1-a
B
A
2)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the front cover (D).
1)
C
D
B
C
2)
Remove the screw (C), and remove the slide rail (D).
b. ADU motor upper
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
ADU motor upper
1-b
C
D
3)
Remove the screws (E). Remove the screw (F), and remove
the inner cover (G).
E
G
1)
F
E
4)

remove the RD I/F PWB (J).
1-a
J
B
A
I
2)
H
H
C
D
3)
c. ADU motor lower
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
ADU motor lower
E
G
F
E
4)
1-c
Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
1)
H
I
5)
Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the the screws (K),
and remove the ADU motor upper (L).
B
A
L 1-b
2)
Remove the screws (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the inner cover (E).
C
E
D
C
3)
Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the the screws (G),
and remove the ADU motor lower unit (H).
1)
H
G
B
G
F
G
4)
Remove the screws (I), and remove the ADU motor lower (J).
2)
1-c
J
C
E
I
D
I
C
d. Right tray paper exit full deteciton, Right tray paper exit
detection
Unit
Right door unit
d
e
1-d
Parts
3)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
1-e
F
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
J
5)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the cover (M). Remove
the screws (N), and remove the cover (O).
e. Discharge brush
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
Discharge brush
N
O
N
1-f
L
L
M
6)
Disconnect the connectors (P), and remove the screws (Q),

and remove the right tray paper exit full detection unit (R) and
right tray paper exit detection unit (S).
Q
S
Q
P
1)
Relese the lock (A), open the right door unit (B).
P
R
7)
Remove the right tray paper full detection (U) and right tray
paper exit detection (V) from the sensor mounting plate (T).
1-e
V
1-d
U
B
A
2)
C
E
D
C
3)
f. ADU transport pass detection 1
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
1-g
F
4)
Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the screws (I), the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
J
1)
H
B
5)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the cabinet (M).
L
2)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the reverse PG unit (D).
L
L
C
M
6)
Check the discharge brush (N).
3)
Remove the screw (E). Remove the ADU transport path detection unit (F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the
ADU transport path detection 1 (H).
N 1-f
1-g
H
F
E
g. ADU transport pass detection 2
Unit
Right door unit
4)
Parts
Remove the screw (G), and remove the ADU transport path
detection unit (H). Disconnect the connector (I), and remove
the ADU transport path detection 2 (J).
1-h
J
h. ADU transport open/close detection
1-h
1)
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
1-i
B
A
2)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
1)
C
B
C
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F).
Remove the springs (G).
E
E
E
E
2)
1)
C
B
E
A
D
C
2)
3)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the ADU transport open/
close detection unit (G). Disconnect the connector (H), and
remove the ADU transport open/close detection (I).
C
F
D
H
G
I
3)
1-i
i. ADU gate solenoid
Unit
Right door unit
Parts
ADU gate solenoid
E
G
F
1-j
E
4)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
H
I
5)
Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screws (K), and
remove the ADU motor upper unit (L).
j. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
Right door unit
K
K
K
J
6)
1-k
Disconnect the connector (M) and remove the screws (N), and
the ADU gate solenid unit (O).
N
7)
1)
Remove the ADU gate solenoid. (Refer to the "i. ADU gate
solenoid".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cover (B).
Remove the screws (P), and remove the ADU gate solenoid
(Q).
Q 1-j
A
P
A
3)
Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D) and the
screws (E). Remove the right paper exit unit (F).
D
E
4)
Remove the screws (G), and remove the front cover (H).
k. Transport roller 17 (Drive)

Unit
1
Parts
Right door unit
Mainte
nance
{
H
G
1-l
G
5)
Remove the screw (I), and remove the bearing plate (J).
Remove the E-ring (K), the gear (L), the parallel pin (M), the Ering (N), and the bearing (O).
6)
1)
Remove the screw (P), and remove the earth plate (Q).
Remove the E-ring (R) and the bearing (S), and remove the
paper exit roller 2 (Drive) (T).
1-k
T
2)
E
D
C
3)
Remove the screw (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
7)
Remove the belt (Q). Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the
pulley (S), the parallel pin (T), the E-ring (U), and the bearing
(V).
V
F
F
8)
4)
Remove the E-rings (W), and remove the pulleys (X), the parallel pins (Y), and the belt (Z).
Disconnect the connector (H). remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
J
Z
Y
H
9)
5)
Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the bearing (b). Remove
the transport roller 17 (Drive) (c).
Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and
remove the ADU motor upper unit (N).
1-l
c
a
N
b
M
l. Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Unit
L
1
6)
Right door unit
Remove the screws (O), and remove the front cover (P).
P
O
1-m
Parts
m
Mainte
nance
{
1)
5)
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L).
B
A
6)
2)
Remove the E-ring (M), and remove the pulley (N), the parallel
pin (O), and the belt (P).
P
C
E
N
D
O
7)
3)
Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
the transport roller 10 (Drive) (S).
1-m
S
Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G).
Q
R
F
m. Transport roller 11 (Drive)
G
Unit
1
Right door unit
Parts
n
4)
Open the open/close door (H).
1-n
Mainte
nance
{
1)
5)
the E-ring (K), and remove the pulley (L), the belt (M), the parallel pin (N), the E-ring (O), and the bearing (P).
B
A
P
N
M
L
2)
6)
C
E
1-n
S
D
R
3)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G).
n. Right paper exit gate
Unit
Right door unit
F
G
4)
1-o
Open the open/close door (H).
Parts
1)
5)
Remove the E-ring (L), and slide the bearing (M). Remove the
right paper exit gate (N), and remove the bearings (M).
1-o
N
M
B
L
A
2)
C
E
D
C
3)
F
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and

screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
I
J
4. Maintenance
{ : Check : Clean : Replace U : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position
No.
1
2
Part name

Discharge brush
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
MX-7000N
[i]
LSU SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
PCU PWB
1
2
P
13
INT24V2
/LSS_BK
SM2P-B
1
2
R
18
INT24V2
20
/LSS_BK
S DF1B-28DE
18
20
P
1
2
P
1
2
R
INT24V2
/LSS_CL
SM2P-N
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V3
P-GND
S6B-XA
13
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN5
1
2
4
3
n TRANS_DATA
5
D-GND
6
n RSV_DAT
8
LSUASIC_RST 7
9
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT 10
11
LSUTH1
12
LSUTH2
INT5V
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
LSS_CL
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PADSS-1
LSS_BK
B08B-PASK-1
nBREAK
nPOLY_CK
nPOLY_LOCK
nPOLY_START
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
B03B-PASK-1
24V1
1
n FANRDY
2
3
P-GND
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HSYNC_LSU_P 21
HSYNC_LSU_N 22
N.C
23
N.C
24
S24B-PADSS-1
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
B08B-PASK-1
3
4
TH2
D-GND
S4B-PH-K-S
12
TH2
LSUFM
CN2
PGM
6
7
11 10
5
4
TH1
LSU PWB
5V3
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
B4P-PH-K-R
CN6
6
5
CN6
4
3
2
1
B07B-PASK-1
TH1
D-GND
B07B-PASK-1
5V3
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
1
2
3
4
CN4
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
3
TH1
4
D-GND
S4B-PH-K-S
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
S10B-PH-K-S
CN4
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN4
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
10
9
B34B-PNDZS-1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
S10B-PH-K-S
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
CN1
1
2
8
7
3
4
6
14
16
18
5
9
15
10
20
11
12
13
17
19
B20B-PNDZS-1
+5V_LD
D-GND
VREF_K
nENB_K
D-GND
DT_K+
DT_KD-GND
DT_K2+
DT_K2nSH_K
nLDERR_K
nSH_K2
LDCHK_K
VREF_K2
TH2_1
D-GND
+5V
nSHB_K
nSHB_K2
1
+5V_LD
2
D-GND
3
Vref_K1
4
/LDOFF
5
D-GND
6
DATA+_K1
7
DATA-_K1
8
D-GND
9
DATA+_K2
10
DATA-_K2
11
/SH_K1
14
LDERR
12
/SH_K2
15
LDCHK
13
Vref_K2
SM15B-GHB-TB
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TH2_2
D-GND
BRAKE
CLOCK
LOCK
START/STOP
GND
24V
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
S10B-PH-K-S
P-GND
24V
CN8
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN8
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MX-7000N LSU SECTION i 1
CN8
37
38
INT24V2
39
40
INT24V2
/LSS_CL
13
14
15
16
17
18
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V3
P-GND
/LSS_BK
INT5V
1
2
D-GND
4
n SCK_LSU
3
D-GND
5 n TRANS_DATA
6
D-GND
8
n RSV_DAT
7
LSUASIC_RST
9
n TRANS_RST
10 JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
11
LSUTH2
12
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
32
CH0_N
31
CH0_P
30
D-GND
29
D-GND
CH1_N
28
27
CH1_P
26
CH2_N
25
CH2_P
24
D-GND
23
D-GND
22
CLCLK_N
21
CLCLK_P
20
CH3_N
19
CH3_P
18
D-GND
D-GND
17
16 ECLK_LSU_N
15 ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
14
D-GND
13
12 HSYNC_LSU_P
11 HSYNC_LSU_N
B32B-PNDZS-1
MOTHER
PWB
Signal
LSS_BK
LSS_CL
LSUFM
PGM
TH1
TH2
Name
Polygon mirror motor
LSU therminstor 1
LSU therminstor 2
Function/Operation
Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (BK)
Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (CL)
Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name
LD PWB (K)
LD PWB (C)
LD PWB (M)
LD PWB (Y)
Cylindrical lens
fT lens 1
fT lens 2
Reflection mirror
Cylindrical lens
Collective lens for BD
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
Function/Operation
13
OPC drum
Measures the temperature in LSU.
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
Collects the laser beams, and focuses it.

Secures the path for laser beams.
Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
Condenses the laser beam to the BD PWB.
Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the
PCU PWB control signal and image data.
Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
A. Outline
(2)
Scan system
(3)
polygon motor
Converts the image data (has been sent by way of PCU from the
image processing circuit) to laser beam, and irradiates to the OPC
drum surface.
The LSU unit is composed of the primary system (including optical
elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror
which assures the optical path) and the scan system (which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path).
By the once scanning, black laser LD sends two laser beams of
BK1 and BK2 at same time for high-speed print.
The interval in the sub-scanning direction of two laser beams is
42.3 P, also interval at image surface is 70 P. The interval in the
paper feed direction of two laser beams is 70 P by electrically controlled.
Since interval of the laser beams is adjusted at shipping, adjustment about that is not required at the later.
B. Composition
(1)
Model
Model of 55 sheets
Model of 62 sheets
Model of 70 sheets
Primary system
Number
of mirror
surface
7 surfaces
Rotating speed
Color :
Monochrome :
35028 rpm
30371 rpm
Color :
Monochrome :
35028 rpm
35939 rpm
Bearing
AIR
C. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width:
Resolution:
Beam diameter:
Laser power:
LD wavelength:
307 mm
600 dpi
Main scan = 50 to 65 Pm, Sub scan = 60 to 75 Pm
Max. 0.8 mW
770 to 800 nm
D. Serial label
1)
Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the left plate (B).
There is the LSU serial label on the LSU fan side.
A
MODEL LSU CD UN 70
00000000
MODEL LSU CD UN 62
00000000
MODEL LSU CD UN 50
00000000
3)
Unit is different in each model of 55 or 62 or 70 sheets.

Unit
A
B
Page
i- 3
i- 7
LSU
Others
Parts
LSU
a
b
c
d
e
f
Dust-proof glass
LSU CNT PWB
Polygon motor
LSU thermistor 2
LSU thermistor 1
Mainte
nance
{
Loosen the screws (C), and remove the screw (D). Remove
the screw (E), and remove the fixing plate (F). Remove the
snap band (G), and disconnect the connectors (H) and shift it
to the rear side, and remove the LSU (I) so that slide it to rear
side.
* When installing, insert the shaft (J) to cut-out portion of the
skew adjuster (K).
* After installing the LSU, be sure to check the condition of
skew image. Carry out the adjustment according to necessity.
A. LSU
Unit
Page
iiii-
3
4
5
5
C
E
1
i- 6
1-b
1-e
1-a
1-a
1-f
a. Dust-proof glass
1-c
1-d
Unit
1-a
1
(1)
LSU
LSU
Dust-proof glass
Mainte
nance
{
1-a
1-a
Unit
1
Parts
1-a
LSU
1-a
1
1)
6)
* When the cleaning base became extremely dirty, replace it.

(Don't cleaning use dirty cleaning base other dustproof
glasses.)
2)
Clean all the cleaning holes (D) (4-positions) on the dustproof

glass.
Remove the claning rod (B).
1-a D
b. LSU CNT PWB
Unit
1
LSU
Parts
LSU CNT PWB
1-b
3)
Check the dirt of the cleaning base (C) (tip of the cleaning rod).
* When cleaning base is dirty, replace it. (Refer to the "B. Others".)
1)
4)
Insert the cleaning rod (B) in the hole which cleaning is

required so that the cleaning base is made downward slowly.
Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B).
Remove the cover (C).
* When installing the cover (C), engage the pawls (D) to cover
lower (E). At this time be careful it bite the wire.
B
A
B
D
D
5)
Insert the cleaning rod (B) all the way and slide it back and
forth a few times for cleaning.
4)
Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the screws (G)

and the screw (H), and remove the LSU CNT PWB (I).
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).

* When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image
not fully etc.) may occur.
* When installing, first of all install the screw (H).

* When installing, engage the PWB to the pawl (J).
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
G
F
H
1-b I
J
c. LSU cooling fan motor
Unit
1
LSU
5)
Parts
Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the molt (J), and

remove the LSU cooling fan motor (K).
* When installing, point at the direction of outside with the
arrow (L).
1-c
J
K
J
I
1-c
I
1)
Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT)
2)
3)
d. Polygon motor, LSU thermistor 2
Unit
1
LSU
d
e
Parts
Polygon motor
LSU thermistor 2
1-e
A
B
D
D
E
1-d
C
1)
2)
3)
6)
Loosen the screw (N), and remove the LSU thermistor 2 (O).
Disconnect the connector (P).
* When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
inside the LSU.
A
B
D
D
E
C
O 1-e
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).

* When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image
not fully etc.) may occur.
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
e. LSU thermistor 1
Unit
1
LSU
Parts
LSU thermistor 1
F
G
1-f
5)
Disconnect the connector (I), and remove the screws (J), and
remove the polygon motor (K). Disconnect the connector (L).
* When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
inside the LSU.
* Don't touch the cover glass surface (M) of polygon motor.
1)
2)
Remove the LSU. (Refer to the (1) LSU.)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B) and
cover (C).
1-d
K
4)
Remove the screw (D), and remove the LSU thermistor 1 (E).
Disconnect the connector (F).
3)
remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL unit (C).
* When installing, insert the U-cut part (D) of solenoid arm to
the shaft (E).
E
C
1-f E
D
F
B
A
B. Others
Mainte
nance
Parts
a
b
c

Cleaning base
4)
Page

remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL (H).
* When installing, hook the solenoid pin (I) to the solenoid arm
(J).
i- 7
i- 7
i- 9
H a
a
b
c
J
(1)
Parts
a
(2)

b
Parts
1)
2)

1)
2)
5)

remove the LSU shutter solenoid BK uint (K).
* When installing, engage the shutter drive shaft (L) to the
solenoid arm (M).
B
M
I
L
A
6)
3)
Disconnect the connector (N), and remove the snap band (O).
Remove the screws (P), and remove the mounting plate (Q).
* When installing, engage the spring (R) to the groove (S) of
the mounting plate and the groove (T) of the solenoid arm.
Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D).

* Check to confirm that has not come in contact with the harness etc.
Q
T
D
R
C
O
N
C
4)
Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F). Disengage the pawl (G), and remove the duct (H).
7)
Disengage the pawl (U), and remove the LSU shutter solenoid
BK (V).
F
H
V b
G
(3)
Cleaning base
4)
Mainte
nance
Parts
c
Open the cover (D), and pull out the cleaning base (E) for
replacement.
Cleaning base
5)
1)
Attach the new cleaning base (F) to the mounting hole with fitting to the pawl.
A
F
2)
Remove the cleaning rod (B).
3)
Remove the dirty cleaning base (C).
c C
4. Maintenance
No.
1
2
Part name
Dust-proof glass
Cleaning base
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
1
1
1
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
(P/G No. : [2]-50)
(P/G No. : [49]-40)
MC
MC
3
1
2
3
D-GND
DL_M#
53254-0310
D-GND
GB
GB
24V
2
INT24V1
INT24V1
SM6
DM_C_A
DM_C_A/
DM_C_B/
DM_C_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
SM6
5
6
R
2
1
4
3
5
6
R
GB
GB
DL_K
MC
MC
MX-7000N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION J 1

4
6
1
3
5
2
2
1
4
3
5
6
P
2
1
4
3
5
6
P
2
1
4
3
5
6
P
DM_K_A
DM_K_A/
DM_K_B/
DM_K_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
DF1B-34DE
23
21
19
CCMD
23
21
19
17
15
13
9
7
5
3
1
P
11
DM_M_A
DM_M_A/
5
4
DM_M_B/
3
DM_M_B
2
INT24V1
1
INT24V1
CN6
B13B-PASK-1
12
DM_C_A
11
DM_C_A/
10
DM_C_B/
9
DM_C_B
8
INT24V1
7
INT24V1
CN5
B13B-PASK-1
DM_K_A
6
DM_K_A/
5
4
DM_K_B/
3
DM_K_B
2
INT24V1
1
INT24V1
CN5
B14B-PASK-1
12
DM_Y_A
11
DM_Y_A/
DM_Y_B/
10
9
DM_Y_B
INT24V1
8
INT24V1
7
GB
17
15
13
DM_C_A
DM_C_A/
DM_C_B/
DM_C_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
DF1B-34DE
23
21
19
17
15
13
DM_M_A
DM_M_A/
DM_M_B/
DM_M_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
S
2
33
31
29
27
25
DM_Y_A
DM_Y_A/
DM_Y_B/
DM_Y_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
2
33
31
29
27
25
D-GND
CCP_ROT
5VNPD
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN18
5
3
1
CN13
33
CCM_a
35
CCM_b
B40B-PNDZS-1
24V3
P-GND
1
INT24V2
3
P-GND
5
/HV_DATA
7
/HV_CLK
6
/HV_LD1
8
HV_REM#
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
10
2
B6B-PH-K-S
DM_K_A
DM_K_A/
DM_K_B/
DM_K_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
DM_Y_A
DM_Y_A/
DM_Y_B/
DM_Y_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
SM6
DM_M_A
DM_M_A/
DM_M_B/
DM_M_B
MC PWB
2
1
4
3
5
6
R
2
1
4
3
6
8
CCMD
5VNPD
DF1B-22DE P
6
8
DL_K#
24V_DL
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN9
7
MX-7000N
[J]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
S DF1B-34DE P
26
26
CCM_a
CCM_b
28
28
DL_Y#
D-GND
DL_M#
D-GND
DL_C#
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
19
17
CN7
1
VHR-2
GB-K
CN1
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
DL_K#
DF1B-22DE P
24V_DL
1
6
8
D-GND
19
17
DL_Y#
DL_M#
D-GND
DL_C#
DF1B-26DE P
D-GND
1
PCU
PWB
GB-C
GB-M
GB-Y
S
1
24V3
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B08B-PASK
DL_K#
PS-187(WH)
MC-CMY
4
2
1
24V_DL
4
2
10
19
DL_Y#
DL_M#
9
D-GND
2
10
9
D-GND
2
17
S
1
DL_C#
10
9
D-GND
2
PS-250(WH)
MC-K
DL_K#
3
S3B-PH-K-S
DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_Y#
53254-0310
1
3
D-GND
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
A. OPC drum unit
2
2
GB
MC
DL_K
MC
MC
DRIVER
PWB
DM_Y
DM_M
DM_C
DL_Y
DL_M
DM_K
DL_C
CCM
Signal
CCM
CCMD
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
DM_C
DM_K
DM_M
DM_Y
GB
MC
No.
1
2
Name
Discharge lamp (C)
Discharge lamp (K)
Discharge lamp (M)
Discharge lamp (Y)
Drum motor_C
Drum motor_K
Drum motor_M
Drum motor_Y
Grid
Charge unit
Name
OPC drum
Cleaning blade
Function/Operation
Cleans the charge unit
Detects rotation of the charger cleaner motor
Discharging the OPC drum
Drives the OPC drum unit

The OPC drum surface potential is controlled
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images are formed
Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5V3
P-GND
INT24V2
S8B-ZR-SM4
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PAP
1
2
3
SM-7pin
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5V3
P-GND
INT24V2
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
DF1B-20DE
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5V3
P-GND
INT24V2
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
PA-3pin
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
PALR
1
2
3
8
10
12
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
8
10
12
6
5VN
1
5VN
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
B. Waste toner section
CN5
2
P
12
14
16
18
5
4
2
24
26
28
DF1B- 34DE
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5VN
P-GND
INT24V2
CFM
CFM_LD
P-GND
GND
S
12
14
16
18
5
4
2
CN3
12
14
16
18
5
4
2
24
26
28
24
CFM
26
CFM_LD
28
P-GND
TNFD
30
B34B-PNDZS-1
/WTM_LD
/WTM_CW
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
5VN
P-GND
INT24V2
PCU
PWB
1
WTM
2
CFM
TBBOX
Signal
CFM
TBBOX
TNFD
WTM
No.
1
2
3
4
TNFD
D-GND
2
TBBOX
3
5VNPD(LED)
1
QSW-Z0538
PHR-3
D-GND
TNFD
5VNPD
GP1A71L3
1
2
3
PHR-3
Name
Charger air inlet fan motor
Function/Operation
Sends air to the charge unit of OPC drum unit (BK)
Detects the installation state of the waste toner box
Detects the waste toner full
Stirs waste toner
Name
Waste toner transport screw
Waste toner transport pipe
Waste toner transport screw
Waste toner box
Function/Operation
Transports the waste toner to the transport pipe
Transports the waste toner to the waste toner box
Transports the waste toner from the waste toner pipe to the waste toner box
Receives waste toner when copying or printing, and collects it
CN6
9
D-GND
19
TBBOX
20
5VNPD(LED)
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN8
34
D-GND
33
5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
3)
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge unit.

The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1)
After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge

unit.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
High voltage unit
Screen grid
Main corona unit
The charge unit is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage
applied to the screen grid.
2)
Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
4)
The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
lens
Laser lights
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. At the same time, negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum
layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC

drum surface.
a. Drum (CL)
Unit
A
B
C
Page
J- 5
J- 7
J -12
OPC drum unit (CL)

OPC drum unit (BK)
Waste toner section
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
OPC drum unit (CL)
Drum (CL)
A. OPC drum unit (CL)

Unit
1
OPC drum
unit (CL)
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Drum (CL)
Charge unit
Side seal F (CL)
Side seal R (CL)
Cleaner blade (CL)
Toner mixing sheet
Mainte
nance
1-a
Page
J- 5
J- 6
J- 6
1-e
1-a
1-f
1-d
1-c
1-b
1)
Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
2)
Remove the OPC drum unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) OPC durm
unit (CL)".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the fixing shaft (B).
1-g
1
B
A
(1)
OPC durm unit (CL)

Unit
1
OPC drum unit (CL)
4)
Slide the drum (CL) to the front side, and lift the OPC drum
rear side (C), and remove the drum (CL) (D) from the hole in
the front section.
* When installing, apply stearin acid to the drum (CL) surface
(E).
1)
2)
Hold the lock lever (A), and pull out OPC drum unit (CL) gently,
and remove OPC drum unit (CL) (B) while supporting the lower
section with both hands.
D 1-a
C
B 1
A
E
b. Charge unit (CL)
6)
Unit
1
Parts
OPC drum unit (CL)
Charge unit (CL)
Mainte
nance
Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the cover (F). Remove
the Charge unit (G).
* When installing the cover (F), be careful so that the other
side of the side with the pawl doesn't separate.
1-b
G
1-b
A
1)
2)
unit (CL)".)
3)
Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".)
4)
c. Side seal F (CL), Side seal R (CL), Toner reception seal

(CL), Cleaner blade (CL), Toner mixing sheet
Unit
1
Parts
OPC drum unit (CL)
A
B
c
d
e
f
g
Side seal F (CL)

Side seal R (CL)
Cleaner blade (CL)
Toner mixing sheet
Mainte
nance
1-e
1-f
1-d
5)
1-c
Remove the lock pawl (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the
MC cleaner shaft (D).
C
D
1-g
1)
2)
unit (CL)".)
3)
Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".)
4)
Remove the Charge unit. (Refer to the "b. Charge unit".)
5)
Remove the side seal F (CL) (A), the side seal R (CL) (B), and
the toner reception seal (CL) (C).
C 1-e
1-c A
B 1-d
* When attaching, position it within the specified range shown

from the reference line in the figure below.
B. OPC drum unit (BK)

Unit
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
OPC drum
unit (BK)
0 - 0.3mm
Reference
line
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
6)
Charge unit (BK)

Drum (BK)
Side seal F (BK)
Side seal R (BK)
Discharge lamp (K)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Cleaning brush (BK)
Charger cleaner HP
detection
Sub blade
Mainte
nance
Reference line
J- 8
J- 8
J- 9
J -10
J -11
J -12
1-d
0 - 0.3mm
Page
1-b
Remove the screws (D), and remove the cleaner blade (CL)
(E) and the toner mixing sheet (F).
* When installing screw (D), install the screw to the hole
shown with mark of arrow in the order of numeral (1, 2, 3)
mark.
1-i
1-g
1-c
3
D
2
1-e
1-f
1-a
(1)
1-h
OPC drum unit (BK)

Unit
OPC drum unit (BK)
1-f E
1-g F
1)
Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
2)
Remove the Charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
(BK)".)
3)
Hold the handle part, and remove the OPC drum unit (BK) (A).
A
1
a. Charge unit (BK)
b. Drum (BK), Side seal F (BK), Side seal R (BK), Discharge

lamp (K)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
OPC drum unit (BK)
Charge unit (BK)
Unit
1
Parts
OPC drum unit (BK)
b
c
d
e
Drum (BK)
Side seal F (BK)
Side seal R (BK)
Discharge lamp (K)
Mainte
nance
1-d
1-b
1-a
1-c
1)
1-e
1)
2)
Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Chaege unit
(BK)".)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) OPC drum
unit (BK)".)
4)
Remove the screws (A), and open the frame (B).
A
B
2)
Open the cover (B) of the charge unit (BK). Loosen the screw
(C), and remove the Charge unit (BK) (D).
5)
D
1-a
Remove the drum unit (BK) (C).
B
C
6)
Remove the blue screws (D), and remove the flange (E).
Remove the drum (BK) (F).
8)
Lift up the knob (J), and disengage the pawl (K). Remove the
shading cover (L).
* When installing, engage the pawl (M) of the shading cover
to the frame.
M
K
F
1-b
L
9)
* (Concerning OPC layer separating)

With the rotational friction, OPC layer in end of both sides of
the OPC drum may be separated.
Disconnect the connector (N). Remove the discharge lamp (O)

(B).
If the print image is normal, the OPC drum can be continuing

use, replacement is not required.
* When installing the new OPC drum, be careful so that there
is the lot No. side (G) in upper side, insert the hand into the
OPC drum, and install.
N
1-e
Be careful not to touch the photo-surface of the OPC drum.
G
c. Cleaner blade (BK)
Unit
1
7)
OPC drum unit (BK)
Parts
f
Cleaner blade (BK)
Mainte
nance
Check condition of the side seal F (BK) (H) and the side seal R
(BK) (I).
* If replacement is required, paste it along the reference line.
1-d
I
Reference line
Reference
line
1-c
H
1-f
Reference line
Reference
line
1)
2)
Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
(BK)".)
3)
unit (BK)".)
4)
* When installing, be careful not to cover the molt (J) with the
cleaner blade (K).
A
B
5)
J
d. Cleaning brush (BK)
Unit
1
OPC drum unit (CL)
Parts
g
Mainte
nance
Cleaning brush (BK)
6)
Lift up the knob (D), and disengage the pawl (E). Remove the
shading cover (F).
* When installing, engage the pawls (G) of the shading cover
to the frame.
1-g
G
E
7)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the cleaning blade (BK)
(I).
1)
2)
Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
3)
unit (BK)".)
4)
H
H
1-f
A
H
5)
Remove the screw (C), and remove the collar (D) and the
spring (E). Remove the screws (F), and remove the dirve plate
(G).
e. Charger cleaner HP detection
Unit
OPC drum unit (BK)
Parts
C
E
6)
1-h
Remove the fixing block (H), and remove the cleaning brush
unit (BK) (I).
1)
2)
Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
3)
unit (BK)".)
4)
Remove the screw (A), and charger cleaner HP detection unit

(B).
7)
Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the coupling (K) and the
bearing (L) from the cleaning brush (BK) (M).
1-g
M
5)
Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the charger cleaner

HP detection (D).
D 1-h
K
L
C
f. Sub blade
6)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
OPC drum unit (BK)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the sub blade (E).
Sub blade
D
1-i E
D
D
1-i
C. Waste toner section
Parts
1)
Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the [L] DEVELOPPING SECTION.)
2)
Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the a. Charger unit

(BK).)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) OPC drum
unit (BK).)
4)
a
b
c
d
Waste toner box

Mainte
nance
Page
J -12
J -13
J -13
J -13
d
a
c
b
B
(1)
Waste toner box

Parts
a
5)
Waste toner box
Mainte
nance
1)
Open the right cabinet lower (A).
4)
Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the waste toner full
detection (E).
b
E
A
D
2)
Remove the waste tnoer box (B).
(3)

c
Parts
a B
(2)

b
Parts
1)
Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet lower. (Refer to
the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the waste toner box
sensor (B).
b
B c
1)
2)
Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)
3)
Remove the spring (A). Remove the screws (B), and remove
the rail (C).
A
(4)

d
Parts
d
A
C
B
1)
Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)
2)
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
3)
Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the [G] PAPER

TRANSPORT SECTION.)
4)
Remove the front cabinet upper and the frame cover R. (Refer
5)
Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the E-ring (B), and

remove the gear (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
waste toner drive unit (E).
E
D
A
B
6)
Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the E-ring (G), the

polyslider (H), and the bearing (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the drive mounting plate (K).
H
G
J
7)
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the gears (M). Remove the
screws (N), and remove the waste toner drive motor (O).
* When installing, fit the triangle mark (P) of the drive mounting plate to the connector (Q) position, and install it.
d O
N
Q
L
N
M
4. Maintenance
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Drum (BK)
Cleaning blade (BK)
Side seal F, R (BK)
Charge unit (BK)
Drum (CL)
Cleaning blade (CL)
Charge unit (CL)
Side seal F, R (CL)
Toner mixing sheet
11
12
13
14
Cleaning brush (BK)

Discharge lamp (K)
Sub blade
Waste toner box
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Color supply
When
calling
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No. : [36]-40)
(P/G No. : [35]-41)
(P/G No. : [34]-11)
(P/G No. : [34]-2)
(P/G No. : [34]-62)
(P/G No. : [36]-17)
8
9
13
11
6
5
10
1
8
2
3
12
7
14
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replacement consumable parts which are required for maintaining the performance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason]
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's operation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
[Life end definition of a OPC drum ]
When the OPC drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100%
black output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by rotations
because racing is increased in the tandem engine by the mixing
ratio of black and color outputs or when black output is made in the
color mode in ACS. For the reference of product quality, wear is
specified by the OPC drum rotations. The rotation of the MX-5500/
MX-6200/MX-7000 series OPC drum rotation is 840K.
The OPC drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This
is because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the OPC
drum.
When the print quantity of one job is 5 or less, the number of rotations for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below,
therefore, the OPC drum life quantity varies for each print quantity
of one job.
"Life meter" can be checked with SIM22-1 according to each OPC
drum rotations as the OPC drum life.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the OPC drum with
the entire OPC drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) 550 (K rotations) / 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
Number of ratations
of OPC drum
B/W
Full color
OPC drum counter

OPC
Drum
B/W
Full color
300K pages
100K pages
840K rotations
840K rotations
OPC drum Life

350
Black OPC drum
300
Color OPC drum

250
200
150
100
50
0
0
Number of sheets of one print job
MX-7000N
[K]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
TM_Yb
TM_Ya
SM2P-N
TM_Mb
TM_Ma
SM2P-N
TM_Cb
TM_Ca
SM2P-N
TM_K1b
TM_K1a
SM2P-N
TM_K2b
TM_K2a
SM2P-N
2
1
P
2
1
P
2
1
P
2
1
P
2
1
P
SM-4p
1
2
3
4
FUFM_F
/POFM_CNT2
P-GND
FUFM_F_LD
1
2
3
4
7
9
11
13
/POFM_CNT2
2
1
R
2
1
R
2
1
R
2
1
R
2
1
R
TM_Y
TM_M
TM_C
TM_K1
19
17
TM_Yb
TM_Ya
19
17
15
13
TM_Mb
TM_Ma
11
9
TM_Cb
TM_Ca
3
1
7
5
P
26
24
TM_Yb
TM_Ya
15
13
22
20
TM_Mb
TM_Ma
11
9
28
27
TM_Cb
TM_Ca
TM_K1b
TM_K1a
3
1
21
19
TM_K1b
TM_K1a
TM_K2b
TM_K2a
DF1B-34DE
7
5
S
25
23
CN10
DF1B-32P
FUFM_F
FUFM_F_LD
P-GND
7
9
11
CN12
1
3
5
13
B16B-PNDZS-1
CN13
10
POFM_CNT2
TM_K2b
TM_K2a
TM_K2
R
1
2
3
PA-3pin
FUFM_F
NC
P-GND
P
1
2
3
FUFM_F
FUFM_F_LD
P-GND
B40B-PNDZS-1
DTBFM
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
HTM_Y
HTM_M
HTM_C
HTM_K
R
3
1
R
3
1
SM3P-B
HTM_Yb
HTM_Ya
P
3
1
P
26
24
DF1B-34DE
HTM_Yb
HTM_Ya
S
26
24
CN8
4
2
HTM_Yb
HTM_Ya
SM3P-B
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ma
P
3
1
33
31
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ma
33
31
11
9
HTM_Mb
HTM_Ma
R
3
1
SM3P-B
HTM_Cb
HTM_Ca
P
3
1
29
27
HTM_Cb
HTM_Ca
29
27
7
5
HTM_Cb
HTM_Ca
R
3
1
SM3P-B
HTM_K1b
HTM_K1a
P
3
1
25
23
HTM_K1b
HTM_K1a
25
23
3
HTM_K1b
1
HTM_K1a
B12B-PNDZS-1
HTCS_Y
DRIVER
PWB
HTCS_M
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
PCU PWB
5VNPD
1
HTCS_C
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
5VNPD
1
HTCS_M
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
5VNPD
1
HTCS_Y
2
D-GND
3
DF3-3S-2C
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
HRS
1
2
3
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_C
D-GND
1
2
3
30
HTCS_C
30
CN10
17
HTCS_C
R
1
2
3
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_M
D-GND
P
1
2
3
32
HTCS_M
32
16
HTCS_M
R
1
2
3
SM-3Pin_N
5VNPD
HTCS_Y
D-GND
P
1
2
3
34
HTCS_Y
34
18
HTCS_Y
B40B-PNDZS-1
1
2
3
SMR-03
1
1
2
2
3
3
SMP-03
S
1
2
3
P
MX-7000N TONER SUPPLY SECTION K 1
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
QR/P8-20P
1
2
3
10
12
14
S
DF1B-22DE
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
10
12
14
CN9
25
27
29
5VNPD
HTCS_K
D-GND
B30B-PNDZS-1
Signal
DTBFM
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
HTCS_M
HTCS_Y
HTM_C
HTM_K
HTM_M
HTM_Y
TM_C
TM_K1
TM_K2
TM_M
TM_Y
Name
Hopper remaining sensor C
Hopper remaining sensor K
Hopper remaining sensor M
Hopper remaining sensor Y
Hopper motor C
Hopper motor K
Hopper motor M
Hopper motor Y
Toner motor C
Toner motor K1
Toner motor K2
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Function/Operation
Cools the toner cartridge
Detects toner remaining quantity
Transports the toner
Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
2)
Remove the old toner cartridge (B).
A. Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a
compact toner bottle size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit
detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner
hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper
inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copying is not immediately suspended because toner inside the toner
hopper is used.
1 B

A
B
Unit
Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y)
Others
Page
K- 2
K- 3
3)
Shake the new toner cartridge (C) a few times.
A. Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y)

1
Unit
Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y)
Maintenance
User
replacement
1
* Do not put the toner cartridge upright.
(1)
1)
Toner cartridges
Open the toner cover (A).
4)
B. Others
Install the new toner cartridge (D).

* Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge. Keep holding the
cartridge and completely insert it.
a
b
Parts
Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y)
Page
K- 3
K- 4
a
D
(1)
5)
Insert the cartridge securely until it locks.

a
Parts
* Be sure to install the color cartridges to their proper positions. Avoid installation to a different color position.
6)
BK1
1)
Remove the toner cartridge. (Refer to the "[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION".)
2)
Remove the developement unit (CL) and the developement

unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPEMENT SECTION".)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit, and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
4)
Remove the paper exit tray, the paper exit tray rear, and the
rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide fixture (B).
BK2
Close the toner cover (E).
A
B
6)
(2)
Disconnect the connectors (C).

Parts
7)
Remove the screws (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove
the toner transport unit (C) (F), the toner transport unit (M) (G),
and the toner transport unit (Y) (H).
1)
Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the [K]

TONER SUPPLY SECTION.)
2)
Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT.)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B) and the
washers (C), and remove the bottle cooling fan motor (D).
* When installing, the label (E) side is upward.
B
H
E
E
A
D b
D
8)

remove the hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y) (K).
I
J
a K
4. Maintenance
No.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Part name
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
25
23
21
11
TSG_M
TCS_M
24V3
D-GND
TSG_C
TCS_C
24V3
25
23
21
11
7
5
25
23
21
11
7
5
PCU PWB
MX-7000N DEVELOPING SECTION L 1
3
1
CN9
10
DVCM_LD
8
/DVCM_D
6
/DVCM_CK
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
B30B-PNDZS-1
B40B-PNDZS-1
P-GND
24V4
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_LD
/DVKM_CK
/DVKM_D
5VN
D-GND
12
10
8
6
4
27
25
30
10
8
6
4
2
29
BS-C
DVCM_LD
/DVCM_D
/DVCM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
24V4
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_LD
/DVKM_CK
/DVKM_D
5VN
D-GND
12
10
8
6
4
27
25
30
10
8
6
4
2
29
BS-Y
DVKM_CW/CCW
MC PWB
DVKM_CW/CCW
GND
BS-M
VHR-3
BS-K
7
3
6
5
4
2
1
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B07B-PASK
B7P-PH-K-S
N.C
N.C
DVCM_LD
/DVCM_D
/DVCM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
VH-2P
P-GND
24V4
DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_LD
/DVKM_CK
/DVKM_D
5VN
D-GND
DVKM_CW/CCW
CN13
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
HV_REM#
/HV_LD1
/HV_CLK
/HV_DATA
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
24V3
B08B-PASK
CN1
8
7
6
5
4
1
2
3
51021-0400
TSG_K
D-GND
TCS_K
24V3
PTMH_1
CN6
1
4
3
2
MX-7000N
[L]
DEVELOPING SECTION
8
HV_REM#
6
/HV_LD1
7
/HV_CLK
5
/HV_DATA
3
P-GND
1
INT24V2
2
P-GND
10
24V3
B40B-PNDZS-1
8
7
6
5
TSG_K
D-GND
TCS_K
24V3
8
7
6
5
B30B-PNDZS-1
17
15
13
11
23
21
19
17
TSG_K
D-GND
TCS_K
24V3
17
15
13
11
CN9
22
24
26
P
4
9
10
14
13
12
GND
QR/P8-20P
D-GND
PHTM_Ka
PHTM_Kb
FPCL1
FPCL2
5VN
R
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
4
BS_Y
3
TCS_M
TSG_K
D-GND
TCS_K
24V3
DRIVER
PWB
FPCL1
FPCL2
5VN
6
4
2
GND
1
DF11-8DP-SP1
GND
S
4
9
10
14
13
12
PHTM_2a
NC
PHTM_2b
PHTM_1a
PHTM_1b
DVK_CH
DVK_CH_R
SM-3pin
SM-4pin
51021-0400
TSG_C
D-GND
TCS_C
24V3
51021-0400
TSG_M
D-GND
TCS_M
24V3
51021-0400
TSG_Y
D-GND
TCS_Y
24V3
P
1
2
3
P
1
2
3
4
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
16
20
22
21
2
4
PHTM2_A
5
PHTM2_B
SM9B-GHS-TB
CN2
2
3
1
9
PHTM_A
PHTM_B
DVK_CH
DVK_CH_R
P
8
7
6
5
P
8
7
6
5
P
8
7
6
5
TCS_Y
S DF1B-22DE
D-GND
16
20 PHTM_Ka
22 PHTM_Kb
21
FPCL1
2
FPCL2
4
5VN
QR/P8-8P
S
8
7
6
5
5
TSG_C
6
6
D-GND
5
4
TCS_C
7
3
24V3
8
CN1
1
DVK_CH
2
PHTM_Ka
3
PHTM_Kb
4
FPCL1
5
FPCL2
6
5VNPD
7
24V3
8
D-GND
9
VFM_R
10
DVK_FM_LD
11
D-GND
12
DVK_CH_R
SM12B-GHS-TB
QR/P8-8P
TSG_M
D-GND
TCS_M
24V3
S
8
7
6
5
5
TSG_M
6
6
D-GND
5
4
TCS_M
7
3
24V3
8
TSG_C
D-GND
TCS_C
24V3
TSG_Y
D-GND
TCS_Y
24V3
QR/P8-8P
S
8
7
6
5
5
TSG_Y
6
6
D-GND
5
4
TCS_Y
7
3
24V3
8
8
PHTM_Kb
6
PHTM_Ka
B12B-PNDZS-1
CN2
12
10
TCS_Y
24V3
14
TSG_Y
12
10
12
10
P DF1B-26DE
14
CN7
14
B30B-PNDZS-1
TCS_C
24V3
TSG_C
D-GND
TCS_M
24V3
TSG_M
TCS_Y
24V3
TSG_Y
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
DVCM
3
DVKM
2
3
BS_M
TCS_C
BS_C
3
BS_K
TCS_K
PTMH_2
1
DVK DRIVER PWB
Signal
BS_C
BS_K
BS_M
BS_Y
DVCM
DVKM
PTMH_1
PTMH_2
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Developer bias (C)
Developer bias (K)
Developer bias (M)
Developer bias (Y)
Developer drive motor_CL
Developer drive motor_K
Stirring motor
Toner density sensor (C) (ATC)
Toner density sensor (K) (ATC)
Toner density sensor (M) (ATC)
Toner density sensor (Y) (ATC)
Name
Developer roller
Stirring roller
Toner filter
DVK DRIVER PWB
Function/Operation
Developer bias
Drives the development section (CL)
Drives the developement section (K) /Drives the separating operations of the primary transfer belt
Transports the toner
Stirs the toner
Detects the toner density in the developing unit
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images
Stirring developer
Prevents dispersing of toner
Controls the toner stirring motor
Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible
images by toner.
Unit
Development unit (CL)
Development unit (BK)
A
B
Page
L- 2
L- 6
A. Development unit (CL)

Unit
1
Development
unit (CL)
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
Developer (C/M/Y)
DV seal (CL)
DV side seal F (CL)
DV side seal R (CL)
Toner density sensor (ATC)
Toner filter (CL)
Mainte
nance
1-f
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively

charged due to mechanical friction.
1-b
1-c
1
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the

OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
1-a
(1)

Unit
1
L- 4
L- 5
L- 5
L- 5
1-d
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC

component) is applied to the developing roller.
Page
1-e
1)
5)
Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process
section.
I
H
H
2)
6)
Loosen the screw (J).
C
J
3)
fixing knob (E).
7)
Pinch the knob (K), and remove the development unit (CL) (L).
F
E
4)
a. Developer (C/M/Y)
4)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Development unit
(CL)
Take out the old developer (D), and infuse the developer (E).
Developer (C/M/Y)
D
1-a
1-a
1)
Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Development unit (CL)".)
2)
Remove the screws (A).
A
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with {).
* [Important information]
(Note for cleaning the development unit)
If the development unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower

with much developer in the development unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this,
note the following items.
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface when transporting developer or removing foreign material
from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet
roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
3)
Pinch the part of (B), and remove the cover (C) in the arrow
direction.
* (When cleaning the development unit with an air blower [duct])

Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the
unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side
cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with
an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile
clip connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored
bar.)
the magnet roller

rear side cored bar
* After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
c. Toner density sensor C/ M/ Y (ATC)
Unit
Development unit
(CL)
Parts
Toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC)
b. DV seal (CL), DV side seal F (CL), DV side seal R (CL)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Development unit
(CL)
b
c
d
DV seal (CL)
DV side seal F (CL)
DV side seal R (CL)
1-e
1-d
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide (B). Remove
the screws (C), and disconnect the connector (D), and remove
the toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC) (E) and mylar (F).
1-b
1-c
* When pasting the mylar, paste it along the reference line.
A
B
1)
2)
Remove the DV seal (CL) (A), the DV side seal F (CL) (B), and
the DV side seal R (CL) (C).
B
1-c
1-b A
1-e
1-d
C
0 - 0.3mm
referance
0 - 0.5mm
reference
d. Toner filter (CL)

* Attach the DV seal (CL) (D) and DV side seal F (CL) (E) and
DV side seal R (CL) (F) along the reference line.
Unit
1
0 - 0.2mm
Development unit
(CL)
Parts
f
Toner filter (CL)
0 - 0.3mm
1-f
D
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Mainte
nance
1)
2)
Remove the cover (A), and remove the toner filter (CL) (B).
1)
A
A
B 1-f
2)
B. Development unit (BK)

Unit
1
Development
unit (BK)
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Developer (K)
Toner density detection K
(ATC)
DVK DRIVER PWB
Toner filter (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
DV seal (BK)
Stirring motor (BK)
Mainte
nance
1-c
Page
L- 7
L- 8
L- 9
L -10
L -10
L -11
L -11
3)
L -12
L -12
fixing knob (E).
1-d
1-a
1-g
1-h
F
1-e
1-i
1-j
1-f
1-b
1
4)
(1)

Unit
1
5)
section.
1)
Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Development unit (BK)".)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the toner hopper unit (B).
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
(C) of the MG roller unit.
I
H
A
B
6)
Loosen the screw (J).
C
3)
Disconnect the connector (D) on front side and the connector

(E) on rear side.
D
7)
Hold the knob and remove the development unit (BK) (K).
K
1
a. Developer (K)
Unit
1
Parts
Development unit
(BK)
Developer (K)
Mainte
nance
4)
Remove the DV discharge plate (F).
1-a
F
5)
Take out the old developer (K) (G).
9)
Shake the development unit (N) horizontally a few times.
N
G 1-a
b. Toner density detection K (ATC)
6)
While rotating the MG roller knob (H), infuse the developer (K)
(I).
Unit
Development unit
(BK)
Parts
Toner density detection K (ATC)
7)
1-b
Install the DV discharge plate (J).
1)
Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop

ment unit (BK)".)
2)
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
(C) of the MG roller unit.
8)
Engage the pawls (K) to the toner hopper unit (L), and install it,
and fix with the screws (M).
M
L
3)
Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector

(E) on rear side.
c. DVK DIRVER PWB
Unit
Development unit
(BK)
Parts
DVK DRIVER PWB
1-c
D
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the DV cover (B).

* When installing, engage the pawls (C) of the cover to the
pawls (D) of the DV_BOX.
A
A
* Before the following procedure executing, be sure to take
out the developer (K).
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the ATC sheet (G).
Remove the screws (H), and remove the toner density sensor
K (I). Disconnect the connector (J).
C
F
F
D
H
3)
Remove the DVK DRIVER PWB (E). Disconnect the connectors (F).
J
I
1-b
F
F
1-c
d. Hopper remaining sensor K
Unit
Development unit
(BK)
2)
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to pawls (C)
of the MG roller unit.
Parts
A
B
1-d
C
3)
1)
Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Development unit (BK).)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the hopper remaining sensor K
(D). Disconnect the connector (E).
Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector

(E) on rear side.
* When installing, arrange the snap band (F) so that there is in

the upper side of the projection (G), then engage the harness (H) to cut-out portion of the projection (G).
D 1-d
H
H
C
A
B
A
e. Intermediate hopper motor
Unit
Development unit
(BK)
Parts
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the intermediate hopper

motor unit (G).
1-e
F
1)
5)
Remove the gear (H). Remove the harness from the clamp (I).
Remove the screws (J), and remove the intermediate hopper
motor (K).
g. DV side seal F (BK), DV side seal R (BK)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Development unit
(BK)
g
h
DV side seal F (BK)

DV side seal R (BK)
H
J
K
1-e
1-g
J
I
1-h
f. Toner filter (BK)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Development unit
(BK)
Toner filter (BK)
1)
2)
Remove the DV side seal F (BK) (A), and remove the DV side
seal R (BK) (B).
* When attaching, position it within the specified range.
B 1-h
1-g
A
1-f
0 - 0.5mm
1)
2)
Remove the toner filter (A).

* Push the sheet into the hole (C) of development unit (BK)
until the edge (trapezoidal shape side) of the sheet (B) is
passing the hole, and exiting.
1-g
A
0 - 0.5mm
1-f
A
B
0 - 0.5mm
1-h
B
0 - 0.5mm
h. DV seal
i. Stirring motor
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Development unit
(BK)
DV seal (BK)
Unit
Development unit
(BK)
Parts
j
Stirring motor
1-j
1-i
1)
1)
Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Development unit (BK).)
2)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B).
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the pawl (B) and front
cover (C).
B
3)
Remove the DV seal (C).
* When attaching, position it within the specified range.

3)
Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and

remove the stirring motor (F) and gear (G).
0 - 0.5mm
Reference
D
C
1-i C
F 1-j
E
4. Maintenance
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Developer (K)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter (BK)
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (CL)
11
12
Toner filter (CL)

Bias terminal/connector
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Color supply
When
calling
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No. : [32]-46)
(P/G No. : [32]-65)
(P/G No. : [32]-59)
(P/G No. : [32]-63)
(P/G No. : [31]-49)

DV side seal F
(P/G No. : [31]-28),
DV side seal R
(P/G No. : [31]-37)
(P/G No. : [30]-2)
10
6,7,8
11
1
12
12
12
4
12
5
10
2
3
12
MX-7000N
[M]
TRANSFER SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
CN4
INT24V1
12
INT24V1
11
10
BTM_B
BTM_B/
9
BTM_A/
8
7
BTM_A
B12B-PASK-1
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
DF1B-34DE
INT24V1
INT24V1
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
BTM_A
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
DF1B-34DE
PTCM_a
PTCM_b
34
31
2
5
4
6
3
1
B6B-XH
INT24V1
INT24V1
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
BTM_A
R
1
2
SM-2pin
PTCM_a
PTCM_b
DRIVER
PWB
CN18
PTCM_A
PTCM_B
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN13
D-GND
5VN
/DVKM_D
/DVKM_CK
DVKM_LD
DVKM_GAIN
25
27
34
31
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
29
2
4
6
8
10
30
DVKM_CW/CCW
P
24
DF1B-34DE
D-GND
S
24
TBLTC
18
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN18
5VNPD(LED)
7
5VNPD(LED)
9
5VNPD(LED)
11
B30B-PNDZS-1
34
TBLTC
34
18
5VNPD(LED)
18
CN15
14
TBLTB
16
D-GND
18
5VNPD(LED)
B40B-PNDZS-1
P
1
2
3
29
2
4
6
8
10
30
1
D-GND
2
5VN
3
/DVKM_D
4
/DVKM_CK
5
DVKM_LD
6
DVKM_GAIN
7
DVKM_CW/CCW
B07B-PASK
2
1
3
D-GND 1
D-GND 5
DF11-6DP-SP1(a)
DVKM_CW/CCW
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN9
D-GND
3
D-GND
5VN
/DVKM_D
/DVKM_CK
DVKM_LD
DVKM_GAIN
SM-3P N
TBLTB
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
R
1
2
3
P
1
2
TBLTC
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
2
3
1
1
TBLTC
2
D-GND
3
5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73P
179228-3
1
TBLTB
2
D-GND
3 5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73P 179228-3
DVKM
8
TBLTC
BTM
1
PTCM
TBLTB
3
4
PCU PWB
2
4
6
12
10
TURM
13
14
11
CN18
PTCM_HP
22
D-GND
24
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN18
P-GND
/TURM_A
THPS
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
4
6
8
10
12
B30B-PNDZS-1
Signal
BTM
DVKM
4
5
PTCM_HP
D-GND
4
5
2
1
PTCM_HP
D-GND
1
2
1
PTCM_HP
2
D-GND
179228-2
PHNR-02-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
24
26
27
28
29
P-GND
/TURM_A
THPS
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
24
26
27
28
29
QR/P4 40PIN
4
5
6
7
8
P-GND
/TURM_A
THPS
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
5
4
3
2
1
Name
Transfer drive motor_K
1
2
3
4
5
P-GND
/TURM_A
THPS
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
THPS
PTCM_HP
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
P-GND
/TURM_A
B2P-PH-K-S
1
THPS
2
D-GND
3
5VNPD(LED)
GP1S73
179228-3
Function/Operation
Drives the tranfer belt
Drives the development section (K) / Drives separation operation of primary transfer belt
MX-7000N TRANSFER SECTION M 1
Signal
PTCM
PTCM_HP
TBLTB
TBLTC
THPS
TURM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
PTC cleaner motor
Sensor inside the PTC unit
Secondary transfer separation drive
sensor
Secondary transfer separation drive motor
Function/Operation
Drives the PTC cleaner
Detects home position of the PTC cleaner
Detects primary transfer separation (BK)
Detects primary transfer separation (CL)
Detects secondary transfer separation
Name
Primary transfer follower roller
Y auxiliary roller
Registration backup roller
Cleaning brush
Secondary belt dirve roller
PTC unit
PTC cleaner
Function/Operation
Transfers toner on the OPC drum forms toner images on the belt.
Drives primary transfer belt
Drives primary transfer belt
Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt
Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y primary transfer roller
Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
Cleans the back surface of the primary transfer belt
Cleans the frontal surface of the primary transfer belt
Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper
Drives secondary transfer belt
Drives secondary transfer belt
Applies a proper tension to the secondary transfer belt
Imposes negative charges
Clean the PTC unit
Drives separation operation of the secondary transfer
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage are applied to the primary transfer
roller, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary
transfer belt surface, toner images on the primary transfer belt are
transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
Also performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black
contact by the roller separation sensor (TBLTC, TBLTB) and the
separation detection arm.
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
C. Transfer belt separation

Transfer belt is separated by the transfer separation motor.
The transfer belt is in contact with the OPC drum except for the following cases.
PTC
DRUM
[Case where the transfer belt is not contact with the OPC drum]
B. Primary transfer roller separation mechanism

and content
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When executing process control (to prevent against breakage of

toner patch on the OPC drum)
When a jam occurs (Protection of the OPC drum, right door
open/close)
When the roller separation clutch (BLTCL) is turned ON, the transfer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
Only black contact

(1)
Unit
Primary transfer unit
Secondary transfer unit
PTC unit
Secondary transfer separation drive unit
Others
A
B
C
D
E

Unit
Page
M- 3
M- 9
M -12
M -14
M -16
A. Primary transfer unit

Unit
1
Parts
Primary
transfer unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n

Y auxiliary roller
roller
Belt drive gear
Tension roller
Cleaning brush
Cleaner seal
Transfer sub blade
Cleaning brush
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Page
M- 4
M- 6
M- 6
M- 7
M- 7
M- 7
M- 8
M- 8
1)
Open the front cover (A).
1-k
1-l
1-i
1-n
1-k
2)
1-m
1-e
1
1-a
1-d
1-h
1-c
B
1-g
3)
1-b
1-g
1-f
fixing knob (E).
1-j
F
E
4)
* When installing, check to insure that guide rail (O) of the primary transfer unit is in the rail (N) of main unit side, and
push into the primary transfer unit (M).
5)
section.
a. Primary transfer belt
Unit
1
6)
Mainte
nance
Parts
a
Release the lock (J), and open the right door unit (K).
1-a
K
J
7)
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Primary

transfer unit".)
2)
Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45

degrees, and remove it.
Loosen the screws (L). Remove the primary transfer unit (M).
1 M
B
A
L
45
3)
7)
Fold the transfer frame cleaner unit side (O), and remove the
primary transfer belt (P).
* When working, front side is made downward to prevent
damage of the primary transfer belt (P). When removing,
pinch the belt upper edge (rear side) (Q), be sure to don't
touch the surface.
* Install so that the lot number (R) side of the belt inside is
front side.
4)
Remove the screw (E), and disengage the pawl (F), and
remove the guide rail (G).
P
1-a
O
F
* Apply starting powder

5)
Remove the screw (H), and remove the guide (I).
a)
Apply the Kynar powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to whole of

belt surface evenly.
b)
Rub the Kynar that applied to the belt into the belt gently. (Cover the whole surface.)
* When installing, check that the shaft (J) is in the cut-out portion (K) of the guide.
6)
Remove the screws (L), and slide the plates (M). Remove the
fixing bearing (N).
M
M
L
L
L
b. Y auxiliary roller, Primary transfer follower roller, Primary

transfer roller
Unit
1
b
c
d
Remove the primary transfer roller units (D).
Mainte
nance
{
{
Parts
5)
Y auxiliary roller
roller
1-e
1-d
D
6)
1-c
1-f
Remove the bearing (E), the collar (F), and bearings (G) from
primary transfer roller (H).
1-b
1)

transfer unit".)
2)
Remove the primary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Primary

transfer belt".)
3)
Clean the Y auxiliary roller (A) and the primary transfer follower roller (B).
* Clean with alcohol. When installing, alcohol must be volatilized completely.
1-d
c. Belt drive gear
* Prevent dust or dirt being put.

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
e
Belt drive gear
A 1-b
1-c
4)
1-e
Remove the screws (C).
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary

transfer unit.)
2)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the belt drive gear (B).
* When installing, be sure to install the parallel pin (C).
1-e
A
d. Primary transfer drive roller

Unit
1
3)
Parts
Mainte
nance
{
Clean the transfer idle roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
1-g
1-h
B
1-g
f. Cleaning brush
Unit
1-f
1
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary

transfer unit.)
2)

transfer belt".)
3)
Clean the primary transfer drive roller (A).
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
Cleaning brush
1-i

1-f
1)

transfer unit".)
2)

transfer belt".)
3)
Clean the cleaning brush (A).
e. Transfer idle roller, tension roller

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
{
Parts
g
h

Tension roller
1-i
1-h
1-g
1-g
1)

transfer unit".)
2)

transfer belt".)
g. Resist backup roller

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
1)

transfer unit".)
2)
Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45

degrees, and remove it.
B
A
1-j
45
1)

transfer unit".)
2)

transfer belt".)
3)
Clean the resist backup roller (A).

3)
Check the cleaner seal (C).

* When replacing is required, paste it along the reference line.
1-k
1-k
A
1-j
0.2mm - 0.7mm
h. Cleaner seal, Transfer sub blade, transfer cleaning blade,

cleaning brush
Unit
1
Parts
k
l
m
n
Cleaner seal
Transfer sub blade
Cleaning brush
1-l
0.2mm - 0.7mm
reference
line
Mainte
nance
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
reference line
4)
1-n
reference line
Remove the screws (D), and remove the transfer sub blade (E)
and transfer cleaning blade (F).
1-k
1-k
D
D
1-l
E
1-m
D
F
D
1-m
5)
Remove the screw (G), and remove the cover (H), the shutter
(I), and the spring (J).
B. Secondary transfer unit

Unit
1
Secondary
transfer unit
J
6)
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
Secondary transfer idle

gear
Secondary belt follwer roller
Secondary drive belt
Secondary belt dirve roller
Secondary belt tension
roller
Mainte
nance
{
{
M-10
M-11
M-11
M-11
Remove the screws (K), and remove the plate (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), the bearing (N), and the screws (O), and remove
the pipe (P) and the plate (Q).
1-c
1-e
1-a
Page
K
1-f
N M
1-b
1-d
P
7)
(1)
Unit
Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the bearing (S). Remove
the E-ring (T), the gear (U), and the bearing (V), and remove
the cleaning brush (W).

1
1-n
W
R
S
1)
B
A
2)
Push the plate (C) slightly, and release the lock (D). Rotate the
secondary transfer unit (E) and remove it.
2)
Remove the screws (A) and remove the plate (B), and remove
the secondary drive idle gear (C). Remove the bearing (D) and
the belt (E). Remove the polyslider (F), the pulley (G), the
polyslider (H), the bearing (I), and the parallel pin (J). Remove
the spring (K) and the plate (L).
J
I
H G
E
F
D
B
K
3)
1-a C
Remove the screws (M), and remove the frame (N).
D
M
a. Secondary drive idle gear, Secondary belt follower roller,

Unit
1
Secondary transfer
unit
Parts
a
b
c

Mainte
nance
M
4)
Remove the frame (O) and the bearing (P), and remove the
secondary belt follower roller (Q) and bearing (R).
1-c
1-a
1-b
Q 1-b
1)
Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Secondary transfer unit".)
5)
Remove the secondary transfer belt (S).
S 1-c
b. Secondary transfer roller

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Secondary transfer
unit
1)
2)
Remove the secondary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Secondary transfer idle gear, secondary belt follower roller, secondary
transfer belt".)
3)
Remove the C-ring (A). Remove the secondary belt drive roller
(B). Remove the C-ring (C), the parallel pin (D), and bearings
(E) from the secondary belt drive roller (B).
D
C
E
B 1-e
A
1-d
1)
2)
transfer belt".)
3)
Disenage the pawl (A), and remove the bearing (B) on the front
side, the bearing (C), and the spring (D). Remove the seconrary transfer roller (E), and remove the bearing (F) and the
bearing (G).
d. Secondary belt tension roller

Unit
1
Secondary transfer
unit
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
f
1-f
E 1-d
C
c. Secondary belt drive roller

Unit
1
Parts
Secondary transfer
unit
Mainte
nance
{
1)
2)
transfer belt".)
3)
Remove the bearings (A) and springs (B), and remove the secondary belt tension roller (C).
1-e
A
A
B
C 1-f
C. PTC unit
3)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
PTC unit
a
b
c
PTC cleaner B
PTC cleaner
Charger wire
Page
Remove the screw (C). Hold the drum fixing knob (D) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (E). Remove the drum
fixing knob (D).
M -13
M -13
D
1-b
1-c
4)
Pull out the fixing cover (F).
1-a
(1)
PTC unit
F
Parts
PTC unit
5)
Loosen the screws (G), and open the cover (H) of the process
section.
H
1)
Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the [G]

PAPER TRANSFER SECTION.)
2)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (B).
G
G
6)
Remove the screw (I), and pull out the PTC unit (J) straight.
A
I
* When installing, be careful to prevent damage of the primary

transfer belt where right side (K) of the PTC unit is a cause.
4)
* When installing, check that rails (L) is engaged.
Disenage the pawl (D). Remove the PTC cleaner B (E), and
remove the PTC cleaner (F).
* When installing, check that the charger wire (G) is positioned to center of the cleaner pad (H).
* When installing the PTC cleaner B (E), be sure to check that
the pawl (D) and the pawl (I) of the PTC cleaner (F) is
engaged.
* When removing or installing, be careful that the charger wire

(G) hang up the lower side (J) of the PTC cleaner (F).
L
H
G
1-b
F
L
1-a
E
a. PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner

Unit
1
PTC unit
Mainte
nance
Parts
a
b
PTC cleaner B
PTC cleaner
b. Charger wire
Unit
1
1-b
PTC unit
Parts
c
Charger wire
Mainte
nance
1-a
1)

PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2)
Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
3)
After disengaging the pawl (A), disengage the pawl (B).

Remove the holder cover (C).
1-c
1)

PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2)
Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
3)
Remove the PTC cleaner B and PTC cleaner. (Refer to the a.

PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner.)
4)
Remove the spring (B) from the pawl (A). Remove the round
terminal (D) from the pawl (C). Remove the charger wire (E).
Remove the spring (B) form the round terminal (F).
2)
* When installing, hold the round terminal (D). Don't touch the
wire directly.
* When installing, be careful to dirt of the wire and don't put oil
etc., and be sure to prevent the wire bending or twisting.
B
D
E
1-c
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F)
and springs (G).
G
A
F
B
E
D. Secondary transfer separating drive unit
Unit
PTC unit
a
b
Parts
Secondary transfer
separation motor
Secondary transfer
separation drive sensor
E
Page
M -15
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage

the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
M -15
1-a
5)
1-b
(1)
Secondary transfer separating drive unit

1
1)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the secondary transfer

separation drive unit (M).
M 1
Parts
Secondary transfer drive unit
B
A
4)
a. Secondary transfer separation motor
Unit
Secondary transfer
separating drive unit

remove the secondary transfer separation motor unit (J).
Parts
Secondary transfer separation motor
1-a
I
5)
1)
Disengage the pawls (K), and remove the coupling (M) and
spring (N) from the secondary transfer separation motor (L).
M
K
B
A
1-a
b. Secondary tansfer separation drive sensor

2)
1
Unit
Secondary transfer
separating drive unit
Parts
Secondary transfer separation drive
sensor
C
C
3)
and springs (G).
1-b
1)
E
B
E
E
2)
E. Others
a
b
Parts
Sensor inside the PTC unit
Page
M -16
M-17
C
3)
and springs (G).
(1)

a
Parts
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage

the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "A. Primary

transfer unit".)
2)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT")
3)
5)
Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the secondary separation drive sensor (M).
1-b M
L
4)
(2)
Disconnect the connectors (C).
Sensor inside PTC unit

Parts
b
Sensor inside PTC unit
5)
Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screw (E), and disengage the pawls (F), and remove the electrode holder (G).
G
E
6)
1)
Remove the paper dust removal cleaner and the PS unit.

(Refer to the "[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION".)
2)
Remove the charge unit. (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTER SECTION".)
3)
Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L]

DEVELOPING UNIT".)
4)
Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTER SECTION".)
5)
Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the sensor inside PTC
unit (B), and disconnect the connector (C).
Remove the transfer belt separation BK detection (H).
b B
H a
C
A
* When installing, be careful to the sensor tilting to the front
side.
4. Maintenance
No.
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Part name
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
1
2

Mechanical
parts
Transfer sub blade
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Belt drive gear
Primary ransfer follower roller
Tension roller
Cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
PTC cleaner
PTC cleaner B
Charger wire
Cleaner seal
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No. : [38]-12)
(P/G No. : [38]-31)
(P/G No. : [40]-35)
(P/G No. : [39]-19)
(P/G No. : [39]-34)
(P/G No. : [39]-19)
(P/G No. : [38]-9)
(P/G No. : [43]-37)

(P/G No. : [43]-15)
(P/G No. : [43]-30)

(P/G No. : [41]-29)
(P/G No. : [41]-30)
(P/G No. : [41]-5)
22
9
1
22
14
10
7
18
21
20
12
13
19
21
16
2
2
2
11
2
15
17
PCSS
Signal
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
PCSS
REG_F
REG_R
Name

Registration sensor PWB F
Registration sensor PWB R
R
1
2
REG_R
PCS_CL/PCS_K
REG_F
Detects the toner patch density
Function/Operation
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
Detects the shift of registration image
MX-7000N PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION N 1

PHR-4
1
REG_F_LED#
REG_F
2
D-GND
3
5VNPD
4
4
3
2
1
R
9
8
7
6
5
REG_R
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_R_LED#
PHR-5
PCS_LED#
1
2
PCS_CL
PCS_K
3
D-GND
4
5VNPD
5
15
14
13
12
11
10
P
1
2
1
2
3
4
PHR-4
SM2P
24V3
/PCSS
D-GND
5VNPD
SM18P
REG_F_LED#
REG_F
D-GND
5VNPD
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
REG_R_LED#
REG_R
D-GND
5VNPD
24V3
/PCSS
4
3
2
1
P
9
8
7
6
5
13
12
11
10
15
14
8
6
4
2
16
14
12
10
18
26
24
22
20
30
28
REG_F
D-GND
5VNPD
DF1B-32P
REG_F_LED#
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_R_LED#
REG_R
D-GND
5VNPD
24V3
/PCSS
8
6
4
2
S
18
16
14
12
10
26
24
22
20
30
28
7
5
3
1
P
17
15
13
11
9
6
4
2
18
10
8
REG_F_LED#
REG_F
D-GND
5VNPD
DF1B-18DE
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_R
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_R_LED#
24V3
/PCSS
7
5
3
1
S
17
15
13
11
9
6
4
2
18
10
8
PCU PWB
22
21
20
19
CN8
27
26
25
24
23
32
31
30
29
REG_F
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_F_LED#
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
REG_R_LED#
REG_R
D-GND
5VNPD
B40B-PNDZS-1
35
24V3
36
/PCSS
MX-7000N
5GTXKEG/CPWCNSENSOR SECTION
[N]
PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
A. Process control sensor control
A. Process control registration sensor unit
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color

(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
Unit
1
Process
control
registration
sensor unit
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
Parts
a
b
c
d
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter

solenoid (PCSS).
Process control sensor

PWB
Registration PWB F
Registration PWB R
Process control shutter
solenoid
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
Page
N- 3
N- 3
B. Registration sensor control

The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REG_F) and the
R side (REG_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.
1-d
1
1-c
1-a
1-b
(1)
Process control registration sensor unit

Unit
Process control registration sensor unit
1)

2)
3)
Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
4)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANSFER SECTION.)
5)
Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
6)

remove the process control registration sensor unit (C).
b. Process control shutter solenoid
Unit
Process control
registration sensor
unit
Parts
1-d
1 C
A
a. Process control sensor PWB, Registration sensor PWB F,

Unit
1
Parts
Process control
registration sensor
unit
a
b
c

Registration sensor PWB F
Mainte
nance
{
{
{
1-c
1)

2)
3)
Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
4)
Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANSFER SECTION.)
5)

OUTFIT".)
6)
Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to

the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit".)
7)

remove the process control shutter solenoid (C) so that it lift up
from the connector side.
* When installing, hook cut-out portion (D) of the shutter move
plate to the process control shutter solenoid.
1-a
A
1-b
1)
Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to

the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit)");
2)
Push up the shutters (A), and clean the process control sensor
PWB (B), the registration sensor PWB F (C), and the registration sensor PWB R (D) .
C 1-d
D
C
1-c
D
1-b
1-a
4. Maintenance
No.
Part name
Sensors
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
2
TH_LM
1
1
D-GND
2
4
1
TH_EX1
2
3
D-GND
TH_EX2
3
2
1
4
D-GND
1
2
TH_US
2
1
D-GND
3
TH1_AD2 1
2
TH1_AD1 2
D-GND
1
3
WEBM_a
WEBM_b
1
2
2
1
4
5
D-GND 1
POD1 2
5VNPD 3
GP1A71L3 PHR-3
TH_LM
D-GND
5 WEB_END 1
4
D-GND 2
3 WEB_INL 3
1
2
R SM-2pin_N P
L-HL_U
N-HL_US
L-HL_LM
N-HL_LM
N-HL_EX
3
4
5
6
D-GND
D-GND
POD1
5VNPD
A-9
B-9
B-5
B-4
A-2
B-1
B-5
B-6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
6
HL_US
R
WEB_END
TH_EX1
TS_EX
TH_EX2
TH_UM
HL_EX
TS_UM
4
HL_UM
TS_US
HL_LM
TH_LM
MX-7000N FUSING SECTION O 1

R
WEB_INL
TS_LM
FEXM
TS_EX
TH_US
FEXM_/B
FEXM_B
FEXM_/A
FEXM_A
INT24V2
N,C
1
3
2
4
5
6
1
3
2
4
5
6
SM-6pin_N R
1
FUFM_F
1
2 /POFM_CNT2 2
3
P-GND
3
4 FUFM_F_LD 4
DF1B-32P
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
P
DF1B-32P
POD1
5VNPD
13
15
15
19
17
21
23
S
15
19
17
21
23
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/FUM_CK 4
/FUM_D
5
FUM_LD 6
N.C
3
N.C
7
B7B-PH-K-S
FEXM_/B
FEXM_B
FEXM_/A
FEXM_A
INT24V2
DF18-32P
13 /POFM_CNT2 13
7
FUFM_F
7
9 FUFM_F_LD 9
11
P-GND
11
13
15
FUFM_F
FUFM_F_LD
P-GND
POD1
5VNPD
1
INT24V2
5
P-GND
7
/FUM_CK
9
/FUM_D
11
FUM_LD
B30B-PNDZS-1
CN14
13 FEXM_/B
15
FEXM_B
17 FEXM_/A
19
FEXM_A
3
INT24V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN10
13
/HLPR
HLout_EX 11
HLout_LM 9
HLout_US 7
HLout_UM 5
3
D-GND
1
INT24V1
B40B-PNDZS-1
DRIVER
PWB
CN4
INT24V1
D-GND
HLout_UM
HLout_US
HLout_LM
HLout_EX
/HLPR
B07B-PASK
HL PWB
PCU PWB
B40B-PNDZS-1
10 POFM_CNT2
CN13
36
38
B16B-PNDZS-1
1
3
5
TH_LM
TH_UM
TH_UM
TH_EX2
12
TH_LM
16
12
16
TH_EX2
16
TH_US
TH_EX1
10
14
TH2_AD2
TH2_AD1
TH1_AD2
TH1_AD1
D-GND
WEB_END
D-GND
WEB_INL
13
15
2
4
6
9
7
11
CN12
CN8
10
WEBM_a
12
WEBM_b
B12B-PNDZS-1
14
12
10
TH_US
TH_EX1
19
20
2
4
6
TH2_AD2
TH2_AD1
TH1_AD2
TH1_AD1
D-GND
19
20
2
4
6
14
WEB_END 9
7
D-GND
WEB_INL 11
9
7
11
10
DF1B-20P S
WEBM_a 17
WEBM_b 18
P
17
18
L-HL_LM
FPS-250
CN1
1
N-HL_UM
5
N-HL_US
3
N-HL_LM
B3P5-VH
CN2
2
L-HL_U
N-HL_EX
1
S02B-VT
MX-7000N
[O]
FUSING SECTION
1
FUFM_F
1
2 /POFM_CNT2 2
3
P-GND
3
4 FUFM_F_LD 4
DF1B-32P
TH_UM
A-10
A-5
A-6
A-1
A-9
A-10
TH_LM
D-GND
A-2
A-1
A-3
A-4
A-7
A-8
TH_EX2
D-GND
A-4
A-3
B-7
B-8
B-9
A-6
A-5
TH_US
D-GND
TH_EX1
D-GND
A-8
A-7
B-3 TH1_AD2
B-2 TH1_AD1
B-1 D-GND
B-8 WEB_END B-2

B-3
B-7 D-GND
B-6 WEB_INL B-4
4
5
N-HL_UM
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
DF11-8DP-SP1
POD1
WEBM
7
FCFM
FUM
Signal
FCFM
FEXM
FUM
HL_EX
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
POD1
TH_EX1
TH_EX2
TH_LM
TH_UM
TH_US
TS_EX
TS_LM
TS_UM
TS_US
WEB_END
WEB_INL
WEBM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Fusing cooling fan
Fusing motor
Lower heater lamp
Lower thermistor
External thermostat
Lower thermostat
Web end sensor
Web installation detection
Function/Operation
Cools the fusing unit
Separates the external heat roller of the fusing unit
Drives the fusing unit
Heats the external heat roller
Heats the lower heat roller
Detects the paper from the fusing unit
Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
Controls surface temperature of the lower heat roller
Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
Prevents the external heat roller overheating
Prevents the lower heat roller overheating
Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
Detects end of the web
Detects installation of the web unit
Drives the fusing web cleaning paper
Name
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
External heat roller
Web unit
Function/Operation
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the upper heat roller.
Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the lower heat roller.
Supports temperature control of the upper heat roller.
Clean the upper heat roller
Transports paper from the upper/lower heat rollers to the paper exit roller 1
A. Fusing unit drive
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
PCU
FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is provided in the upper and lower heat rollers and
the external heat roller. It heats paper up and down.
This is because necessary to heat from left/right/above/below for
fusing four layers of toner on paper.
The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
C. Fusing operation
This is because of the following reasons:
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat

rollers to be fused on paper.
1)
To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity

for paper.
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly

actual colors of document images.
2)
The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without deformation to fuse on paper.
3)
An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multilayer

toner.
The external heat roller roller has the following functions.

1)
Helps fusing and keeps the fusing temperature under special

conditions.
D. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
of the upper heat roller, at the center of the lower heat roller, and at
the center and the edges of the external heat roller.
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
The fusing temperature is switched according to the paper type
selected.
* For the fusing temperature set value, refer to SIM43-1 in [7] SIMULATIONS.

Unit
A
B
1-c
1-E
1-G 1-E
1-d
1-n
1-y
1-z
1-F
Page
O- 3
O -20
Fusing unit
Others
A. Fusing unit
1-i
Unit
1
Fusing unit
1-o
1-n
1-m
1-B
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Lower thermostat
Lower thermistor
External heat SP
Slider ring
External heat bearing
External heat collar
External heat belt
Fusing gear
Upper heat roller
Lower heater lamp
Lower heat roller
Discharge brush
Upper separation pawl SP
Lower separation pawl SP
Web unit
Mainte
nance
1-F
Page
1-m
O- 4
1-y
1-o
O- 5
1-j
1-u
1-q
1-D
O- 6
1-D
1-r
O- 7
O- 8
O- 8
1-v
O- 9
O -10
1-C
1-g
1-C
1-w
1-C
1-v
1-k
O -12
1-a
1-b
1-p
1-l
O -14
1-p
1-x
O -16
O -16
O -17
O -18
1-s
1-h
1-t
O -19
1-f
1-e
1-A
(1)
Fusing unit
3)
Hold the part of green felts (E), and remove the fusing unit (F).
Unit
1
Fusing unit
F 1
* CAUTION. HOT
When removing the fusing unit, because the fusing unit is high
temperature, remove after it cools enough.
1)
* When working, open the right door unit enough.
a. External thermostat main, External thermostat sub
Unit
Fusing unit
a
b
Parts
B
1-a
2)
1-b
Remove the screws (C), and pull out the fusing unit (D).
1)
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing unit".)
2)
Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawls
(C) of the upper cover.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrodes (D), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
b. External thermistor main, External thermistor sub

Unit
1
Fusing unit
c
d

1-c
1-d
Mainte
nance
Parts
D
B
1)
2)
remove it.
C
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the upper cover (F).
A
F
E
4)
Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G).

Remove the screws (I), and remove the external thermostat
main (J), the external thermostat sub (K), and the washers (L).
1-b K
1-a
J
3)
G
H
G
E
4)
Remove the screw (G), and remove the clamp (H). Disconnect
the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove the
mounting plates (K). Remove the screws (L), and remove the
external thermistor main (M) and the external thermistor sub
(N).
2)
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl
A
N
M 1-c
1-d
J
K
D
K
B
I
G
C
c. Upper thermostat main, Upper thermostat sub
Unit
Fusing unit
e
f
3)
Parts
F
E
E
E
1-f 1-e
1)
4)
Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G).

Remove the screws (I) and the washers (J), and remove the
thermostat main (K) and the thermostat sub (L). Remove the
washers (M).
2)
remove it.
K 1-e
1-f
L
D
A
C
D
M
B
D
B
M
d. upper thermistor sub
Unit
1
Fusing unit
Parts
g
Mainte
nance
C
3)
F
E
E
1-g
E
4)
1)
Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and

remove the upper thermistor sub (I).
H 1-g
4)
e. Upper thermistor main
Unit
Fusing unit
Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and

remove the upper thermistor main (I).
Parts
1-h
1-h
f. Lower thermostat, Lower thermistor
1)
2)
remove it.
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
i
j
Lower thermostat
Lower thermistor
A
B
1-i
1-j
D
B
1)
2)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect
the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
C
3)
E
B
F
E
D
D
E
E
3)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G).
g. Fusing rear detection
Unit
Fusing unit
Parts
1-k
F
F
4)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
H
I
1)
2)
cover R (E).
H
C
H
5)
Disconnect the connectors (K) by releasing each locks (J).

Remove the screws (L) and the washers (M), and remove the
lower thermostat (N). Disconnect the connector (O), and
remove the screw (P), and remove the fusing lower thermistor
(Q).
3)
1-i
N
Q
1-j
Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the fusing rear

detection (G).
* When installing, apply thread locking material.
1-k
G
F
M
J
L
M
h. Heater lamp external, External heat SP, Slider ring, External

heat bearing, External heat collar, External heat belt,
Unit
1
l
m
n
o
p
q

External heat SP
Slider ring
External heat belt
Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cover (D).
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
3)
D
C
C
C
1-n
1-q
1-n
4)
1-m
1-r
Remove the screw (E), and remove the cover (F). Disconnect
the connector (G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the
cover R (I).
1-o
1-m
1-p
1-l
1-o
1-p
1)
2)
remove it.
H
5)
Remove the screws (J), and remove the cover F (K).
K
B
J
B
6)
Remove the screws (L), and remove the clamps (M). Disconnect the connectors (N) with release each locks (O).
* When installing, be careful to the wiring.
9)
Remove the external heat springs (Z). Remove the E-rings (a),
and remove the slider rings (b), the lever F (c), and the lever R
(d).
Remove the slider rings (e) from the lever F (c) and lever R (d).
1-m
L
M
1-n
b
1-n
b
L
7)
Remove the screws (P) and the lamp holders (Q). Remove the
heater lamps external (R).
* When installing the heater lamp external (R), voltage notation side (S) is the rear side.
1-l
R
1-o h
h 1-o
1-l R
8)
1-n e
10) Remove the screws (f), and remove the external heat roller
unit (g). Remove the external heat bearings (h).
P
P
e 1-n
Remove the screw (T) and the clamp (U), and disconnect the
connectors (V). Remove the screws (W), and remove the
external heat roller unit (X) from the shaft (Y).
11) Remove the external heat collars (i), and the external heat belt
(j) from the external heat rollers (k).
i 1-p
W
V
1-r k
X
j 1-q
1-p i
V
Y
k 1-r
i. Heater lamp upper sub, Heater lamp upper main, Fusing

gear, Upper roller bearing , Upper heat roller
Unit
1
Parts
Fusing unit
s
t
u
v
w

Fusing gear
Upper heat roller
3)
cover R (E).
Mainte
nance
E
B
1-u
1-v
D
D
1-v
4)
1-s
1-t
1-w
1)
2)
Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the

pressure.
F
5)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the clamps (I). Disconnect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and remove
the lamp holders (L).
A
L
L
I
H
K
J
K
J
6)
Remove the heater lamp upper sub (M) and the heater lamp
upper main (N).
9)
Remove the screws (W), and open the fusing upper unit (X).
* When installing the heater lamp upper sub (M) and heater
lamp upper main (N), the red harnesses (O) is the rear side.
W
O
X
O
1-s M
W
1-t
7)
N
10) Remove the upper heat roller unit (Y).
* Don't touch the heat roller surface.
Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrodes (S), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
Y
P
Q
S
11) Remove the roller stoppers (Z), and remove the fusing gear (a)
and the fusing gear F (b). Remove the roller stoppers (c), and
remove the upper roller bearings (d) from the upper heat roller
(e).
R
8)
1-u
a
Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and

remove the paper guide (V).
Z
e 1-w
1-v
d
U
U
d 1-v
j. Lower heater lamp, Lower roller bearing, Lower heat roller

Unit
1
x
y
z
Remove the screws (G), and remove the cover F (H).
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
4)
Lower heater lamp

Lower heat roller
1-y
G
5)
1-y
Remove the screws (I), and remove the lower cover (J).
1-x
I
1-z
J
1)
2)
Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the

pressure.
I
6)
Disconnect the connectors (K). Remove the screws (L), and

remove the lamp holders (M).
K
A
A
3)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the
cover R (F).
L
L
D
7)
Remove the lower heater lamp (N).

* Install so that the red harness (O) is in the rear side.
F
C
1-x N
O
E
E
8)
Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and
remove it.
10) Open the paper guide (W). Remove the springs (X).
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrodes (S), and check that the electrode is contacted.
X
P
Q
W
11) Remove the screws (Y), and open the fusing lower unit (Z).
S
Y
Q
R
9)
Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and

remove the paper guide (V).
12) Remove the lower heat roller unit (a).

* Don't touch the heat roller surface.
a
U
U
13) Remove the roller stoppers (b), and remove the lower roller
bearings (c). Remove the roller stoppers (d) from lower heat
roller (e).
1-y c
1-z e
d
1-y
b
k. Discharge brush
4)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
Dischrge brush
H
I
H
H
5)
Remove the screws (J), and remove the paper guide (K).
1-A
J
1)
2)
cover R (E).
6)
Check the discharge brush (L).

* When replacing is required, attach it based on reference line
as bend part end of the frame.
Reference
line
B
1-A
L
20mm 0.5mm
D
3)
l. Transport roller 9 (Drive)

Unit
1
Fusing unit
Parts
B
Mainte
nance
{
1- B
1)
2)
cover R (E).
6)
Remove the screw (O), and remove the earth plate (P).
1-B S
E
B
P
O
m. Upper separation pawl, Upper separation pawl SP
D
3)
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
C
D

Upper separation pawl SP
1-D
F
F
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I), and

remove the sensor unit (J).
1-C
1)
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)
2)
remove it.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode

(D), and check that the electrode is contacted.
A
I
B
A
5)
Remove the E-ring (K). Lift the actuator (L), and remove the
gear (M) and the bearing (N).
L
D
N
B
K
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the separation pawl holders (F). Disengage the upper separation pawls (G), and
remove the upper separation pawl SPs (H).
3)
F
E
H 1-D
H 1-D
F
4)
1-C G
I
n. Lower separation pawl, Lower separation pawl SP
Unit
1
Fusing unit
E
F
Mainte
nance
Parts
Lower separation pawl SP
H
5)
1-F
Open the paper guide (J). Remove the springs (K).
1-E
1)
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)
2)
cover R (E).
J
6)
Remove the screw (L), and remove the mounting plate (M).
Remove the paper guide (N).
E
B
N
D
7)
Remove the lower separation pawl units (O). Disengage the

lower separation pawl SPs (Q) from the lower separation
pawls (P).
3)
Remove the screw (E), and remove the bearing (F).
E
F
1-E P
Q
4)
1-F
Remove the wind-up side (G) of web unit. Remove the collar
(H).
o. Web unit
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Fusing unit
Web unit
1-G
5)
Remove the springs (I) and the bearings (J). Remove the roller
(K).
1)
2)
remove it.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode

(D), and check that the electrode is contacted.
J
J
A
6)
Pull out the shafts (L) from rear side.

* When installing, be careful to the installing direction of the
shafts. First of all, insert the side where the tip of the shaft
each is steps.
D
B
L
L
C
7)
Remove the web unit (M). Remove the collar (N) and the break
rubber (O).
(1)
Parts
* When installing the collar (N) and the break rubber (O), prevent damage of the web unit (M), install to other side of red
line (P).
Fusing cooling fan

a
Fusing cooling fan
N
O
1-G M
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
* When installing, hang the web unit to the shafts (Q) and the
roller (R), and arrange as shown below.
Q
A
Q
A
B. Others
A
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
Fusing cooling fan

Fusing motor
Fusing air outlet fan
Page
O -20
O -21
O -21
O -22
O -23
3)
Remove the snap bands (C). Remove the harness (E) from the
wire saddles (D).
e
a
b
d
C
E
4)
Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and

remove the fusing cooling fan unit (H).
2)
H
B
G
A
B
F
F
5)
Remove the screws (I), and remove the fusing cooling fan (J).
3)

remove the fusing motor (E).
I
b E
J a
C
D
(2)
Fusing motor
(3)
Parts
b
Fusing motor
Parts
c
1)
1)
2)
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)
3)
Remove the fusing cooling fan. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing cooling fan".)
4)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the drive unit (B).
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the harness (C)

from the clamps (B).
B
B
A
5)

remove the external variable motor unit (E).
A
4)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing web cleaning
motor unit (E).
C
D
E
D
6)
Remove the screws (F). Slide the gear part (G), and remove
the external variable motor (H).
5)
Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G). Remove the
screws (H), and remove the fusing web cleaning motor (I).
d I
H c
(4)

d
Parts
1)
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)
2)
Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
(5)

Parts
e
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2)
Remove the paper exit filter. (Refer to the [S] FAN, FILTER
SECTION.)
3)

remove the blanket (C).
C
C
B
B
A
4)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing air outlet fan
(E).
* When installing, label side (F) of the fusing air outlet fan is
the blanket side, and according to the projection (G), install
it.
e E
4. Maintenance
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
(300K)
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
When
calling
Lower heat roller
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Separation pawl SP
Lower thermistor
Slider ring
11
12
External heat belt
13
14
15
External heat SP
16
Gears etc.
17
18
19
20
21
Paper guides etc.

Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Web unit
Upper heat roller
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
22
Fusing gear
23
Upper heat roller bearing
Mechanical
parts
(200K)
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.
Lower heat
: [54]-15)
roller unit
(without the
(P/G No.
heater lamp)
: [54]-14)
(P/G No.: [51]-28)
(P/G No.: [54]-3)
(P/G No.: [54]-2)
(P/G No.: [53]-18)
(P/G No.: [52]-10)
(P/G No.: [52]-10)
(P/G No.: [54]-37)
(P/G No.
External
: [52]-30)
heat unit
(without the
(P/G No.
heater lamp)
: [52]-18)
(P/G No.
: [52]-23)
(P/G No.
: [52]-15)
(P/G No.
: [52]-17)
(P/G No.
: [52]-22)
Apply to specified
positions
(P/G No.: [51]-13)

(P/G No.
Upper heat
: [53[-37)
roller unit
(without the
(P/G No.
heater lamp)
: [53]-34)
(P/G No.
: [53]-36)
10
18 4
4
10
14
15
13
14
16
16 16
16
2
1
5
15
13
14
17
5
5
2
12
5
11
22
23
3
6
17
20
19
3
21
23
17
MX-7000N
[P]
PAPER EXIT SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
HTMY_1
2
HTMY_2
3
PHTMK_1
4
5
PHTMK_2
WEB_M1
6
7
WEB_M2
8
5VN
9
P-GND
10
N,C
11
D-GND
ADMH_A
12
ADMH_/A
13
/ADMH_CNT
14
ADML_A
15
ADML_/A
16
PSFM_CLK
17
18
LCCM_A
19
LCCM_/A
20
LCCM_CNT
21
5VN
DRMCL_CLK
22
/DRMCL_CNT
23
DMK_EN
24
25
DMM_EN
26
BTM_CLK
27
POM_A
POM_/A
28
/POM_CNT
29
30
D-GND
31
P-GND
32
HTMM_1
33
HTMM_2
34
HTMC_1
35
HTMC_2
HTMK_1
36
37
HTMK_2
38
5VN
39
P-GND
N,C
40
41
D-GND
ADMH_B
42
43
ADMH_/B
44
/ADML_CNT
45
ADML_B
46
ADML_/B
PSFM_CNT
47
48
PSFM_EN
LCCM_B
49
LCCM_/B
50
5VN
51
DMK_CLK
52
53
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN
54
55
DMY_EN
56
/BTM_CNT
BTM_EN
57
POM_B
58
59
POM_/B
D-GND
60
CN1
PO_TMP
D-GND
PO_TMP
3
4
S4B-PH-K-S
POFM_U
POM
TFD
POFM_F
POD2
TX24-60R-LT-H1
PCU PWB
LG248NL1
2-179228-3
D-GND
3
POD2
2
5VNPD
1
LG248NL1
179228-3
D-GND
3
TFD
2
1
5VNPD
P
4
3
2
1
P
4
3
2
1
P
SM-4p
R
POFM_U_LD 4
P-GND
3
/POFM_CNT2 2
POFM
1
SM-4p
R
POFM_F_LD 4
P-GND
3
/POFM_CNT1 2
POFM
1
SM-4p
R
POM_A
1
POM_/A
4
POM_/B
6
POM_B
3
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
S6B-PH-SM3
Signal
PO_TMP
POD2
POFM_F
POFM_U
POM
TFD
No.
1
Name
Paper exit temperature detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center)
Paper exit motor
Paper exit full detection (Main unit)
Name
DF1B-18p
18
4
2
17
PO_TMP
D-GND
POD2
5VNPD
18
4
2
17
18
10
8
6
PO_TMP
D-GND
POD2
5VNPD
15
13
TFD
5VNPD
15
13
4
2
TFD
5VNPD
11
/POFM_CNT2
11
9
7
5
3
1
POFM_LD2
POFM_LD1
P-GND
/POFM_CNT1
POFM
9
7
5
3
1
6
8
10
12
14
16
POM_A
POM_/A
POM_/B
POM_B
INT24V1
INT24V1
6
8
10
12
14
16
CN15
TX-25-60P-LT-H1
DRIVER
PWB
13 /POFM_CNT2
11 POFM_LD3
9
POFM_LD2
7
POFM_LD1
P-GND
5
3 /POFM_CNT1
1
POFM
B40B-PNDZS-1
Function/Operation
Detects the temperature
Detects the exit paper
Drives the paper exit roller
Detects face-down paper exit tray full
Function/Operation
Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray.
/ Paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
MX-7000N PAPER EXIT SECTION P 1
SOCKET1
1
P-GND
2
HTMY_1
HTMY_2
3
4
PHTMK_1
5
PHTMK_2
6
WEB_M1
7
WEB_M2
8
5VN
9
P-GND
N,C
10
11
D-GND
12
ADMH_A
13
ADMH_/A
14 /ADMH_CNT
15
ADML_A
16
ADML_/A
17
PSFM_CLK
18
LCCM_A
LCCM_/A
19
20
LCCM_CNT
21
5VN
22
DRMCL_CLK
/DRMCL_CNT
23
DMK_EN
24
DMM_EN
25
BTM_CLK
26
27
POM_A
28
POM_/A
29 /POM_CNT
30
D-GND
31
P-GND
32
HTMM_1
HTMM_2
33
HTMC_1
34
HTMC_2
35
HTMK_1
36
HTMK_2
37
38
5VN
P-GND
39
40
N,C
D-GND
41
ADMH_B
42
43
ADMH_/B
44 /ADML_CNT
45
ADML_B
46
ADML_/B
47
PSFM_CNT
48
PSFM_EN
49
LCCM_B
LCCM_/B
50
5VN
51
DMK_CLK
52
53
/DMK_CNT
DMC_EN
54
55
DMY_EN
56 /BTM_CNT
BTM_EN
57
58
POM_B
POM_/B
59
60
D-GND
CN4
1
POM_A
2
POM_/A
3
POM_/B
4
POM_B
INT24V1
5
6
INT24V1
B12B-PASK-1
2)
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the transport roller 9 which is driven by the fusing motor and to the paper
exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
Remove the paper holding arm (A), and remove the paper exit
full detection actuator (B).
When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the

paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit motor is reversely rotated,
and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and the right
paper exit gate, and discharged to the right tray.

A. Paper exit unit
Unit
1
Mainte
nance
Parts
Paper exit
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Paper exit motor

(F side)
(Center)
Paper exit full detection
(Main unit)
Paper exit temperature
detection PWB
Discharge brush
Page
P- 3
P- 3
P- 4
P- 4
P- 5
P- 5
3)
Remove the screws (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
the cover (E).
D
E
1-d
1-e
1-h
1-g
1-h
4)
1-f

remove the paper exit unit (H).
1-a
1
1 H
1-c
1-b
(1)
Paper exit unit

1
Paper exit unit
1)
Unit
Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SECTION".)
a. Paper exit drive motor

Unit
Paper exit unit
1)
Parts
Paper exit motor
2)
Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper exit unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the fan cover (B).
A
1-a
A
A
B
1)
2)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B) and
the paper exit motor (C).
4)
Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the paper exit

cooling fan motor (F side) (D) and the paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center) (E).
* When installing, attach the fan motor (F side) (D) so that the
label surface is upper, and attach the fan motor (center) (E)
so that label surface is bottom. At each install be careful to
direction of the harnesses.
1-a C
B
C
C
D 1-b
B
1-c E
b. Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side), Paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center)
Unit
Paper exit unit
b
c
Parts
Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center)
1-c
1-b
c. Paper exit full detection (Main unit), Paper exit detection
Unit
Paper exit unit
d
e
Parts
Paper exit full detection (Main unit)
d. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)

Unit
1
Mainte
nance
{
Parts
Paper exit unit
1-e
1-d
1-f
1)
1)
2)
3)
2)
3)

remove the bearing (B). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
A
D
4)
Remove the screw (C), and remove the mounting plate (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the paper exit full
detection (Main unit) (F), and the paper exit detection (G).
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper guide unit (G).
F
C
G 1-e
E
G
F
1-d
5)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the earth plate (I).
Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the bearing (K). Remove
the E-ring (L), and remove the belt (M), the pulley (N), the parallel pin (O). Remove the paper exit roller 1 (Drive) (P).
3)
J
H
1-f
P
A
H
L
O
4)
e. Paper exit temperature detection PWB
Unit
Paper exit unit
Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper exit temperature
detection PWB (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
Parts
Paper exit temperature detection PWB
C
1-g
D
1-g
f. Discharge brush
1)
2)
Unit
1
Parts
Paper exit unit
Discharge brush
Mainte
nance
1-h
1)
2)
3)

remove the bearing (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
D
E
D
C
B
A
D
4)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the fan cover (G).
F
F
5)
Remove the earth tapes (H). Check the discharge brushes (I).
* When pasting, fit the reference line.
0.5
0.5
0
0.5
0.5
1-h
1-h
I
I
H
4. Maintenance
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
[Q] DRIVE SECTION
(1)
Main drive unit (CL)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MX-7000N
Unit
Unit
Main drive unit (BK)
Toner transport drive unit
PS drive unit
Tandem drive unit
Multistage drive unit
A
B
C
D
E
F
Page
Q- 1
Q- 4
Q -11
Q -16
Q -21
Q -28
A. Main drive unit (CL)

1
Unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Parts
Developement drive
motor_CL
Drum motor_Y
Drum motor_M
Drum motor_C
Y phase detection
M phase detection
C phase detection
detection sensor CL
Page
Q- 2
1)
2)
Q- 3
Q- 3
Q- 4
1-b
1-c
1-a
1
1-h
A
3)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D) and (E).
* When installing, check to confirm that has not come in contact with the harness etc.
1-e
* When installing, the order of the installation is the flywheel

(E), the flywheel (D). (Equipping the mark to each color.)
1-f
1-d 1-g
MX-7000N DRIVE SECTION Q 1
4)
Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the harness (H) from

the wire saddles (G). Remove the screws (I), and remove the
main drive unit (CL) (J).
2)
B
I
A
A
G
H G
F
3)

1
J
a. Developement drive motor_CL
Unit
Parts
Developement dirve motor_CL
1-a
4)

remove the developement dirve motor_CL (H).
G
H 1-a
1)
b. Drum motor_Y, Drum motor_M, Drum motor_C
Unit
b
c
d
4)
Parts
Drum motor_Y
Drum motor_M
Drum motor_C
Disconnect the connectors (G). Remove the screws (H), and

remove the drum motors (I) of each color.
* Be careful to wiring of harnesses.
H
H
I 1-b
I 1-d
1-b
1-c I
1-c
1-d
H
1)
2)
G
G
c. Y phase detection, M phase detection, C phase detection
Unit
e
f
g
Parts
Y phase detection
M phase detection
C phase detection
3)
1-e
1-f
1-g
Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel
(E), and the flywheel (F).
1)
2)

The flywheel (F) is out of the order.
F
E
3)
Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel
(E).
3)
Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the transfer belt

separation sensor CL (B).
B 1-h
B. Main drive unit (BK)
E
4)
Unit
Parts
Developement drive motor_K
Developement drive motor
Drum motor_K
(normal)
(reverse)
K phase detection
PTC cleaner motor
a
b
c
d
Remove the screws (F), and remove the phase detections (G)
of each color. Disconnect the connectors (H).
e
f
g
h
i
F
G
Page
Q- 6
Q- 7
Q- 7
Q- 8
Q- 9
Q -10
Q -10
H
1-d
1-a
1-e
1
1-g G
1-f G
1-e G
1-b
d. Transfer belt separation sensor CL
Unit
1-i
1-g
Parts
(1)
1-h
1-f
1-c

Unit
1-h
1)
2)
Remove the main drive unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (CL)".)
1)
2)
6)
section.
I
H
H
3)
7)
Loosen the screw (J), pull out slightly the developement unit
(BK) (K) and the OPC drum unit (BK) (L).
B
J
4)
fixing knob (E).
8)
Remove the screws (M), and open the control box (N).
D
N
F
E
N
5)
9)
a. Developement drive motor_K
Remove the screws (O), and remove the flywheel (P).

Unit
Parts
Developement drive motor_K
1-a
O
1)
2)
O
10) Disconnect the connectors (Q).
Q
A
Q
A
11) Disconnect the connectors (R), and the connectors (S).
Remove the screws (T), and remove the main drive unit (BK)
(U).
* When connecting the connectors (S), refer to the mark (V)
and connect it.
3)

R
C
1 U
S
4)
Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screws (F). Disengage the pawl (G) of PWB supporter, and remove the developement drive motor_K (H).
3)

G
E
1-a
H
F
F
F
C
4)
b. Developement drive motor
Unit
Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and

remove the transfer drive motor (G).
Parts
Developement drive motor
G 1-b
E
F
1-b
F
1)
2)
c. Drum motor_K
Unit
Parts
Drum motor_K
1-c
1)
2)
d. Belt separation clutch (normal), Belt separation clutch

(reverse)
Unit
d
e
Parts
Belt separation clutch (normal)
Belt separation clutch (reverse)
1-d
1-e
1)
2)
B
3)

D
A
C
C
4)
Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and

remove the drum drive motor_K (G).
3)

G 1-c
D
F
C
F
4)
Remove the E-ring (E), and remove the separation drive gear
(F) and the parallel pin (G).
2)
5)
Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the harness from the

wire saddles (I). Remove the belt separation clutch (normal)
(J) and the belt separation clutch (reverse) (K).
H
I
3)
1-d

J
I
D
K 1-e
e. K phase detection
Unit
Parts
K phase detection
C
4)
Remove the screw (E). Remove the mounting plate (F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the K phase detection
(H).
1-f
F
1)
1-f
H
G
f. Charger cleaner motor, CCM rotation detection
Unit
g
h
g. PTC cleaner motor
Parts
Unit
Parts
PTC cleaner motor
1-i
1-g
1-h
1)
1)
2)
Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Main drive
unit (BK).)
2)
Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (BK)".)
3)
Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the harness (C) from

the pawls (B) of the motor fixing plate. Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the motor fixing
plate (F). Disconnect the connector (G).
3)
Remove the transfer drive motor. (Refer to the "b. Transfer

dirve motor".)
4)
Remove the drum drive motor_K. (Refer to the "c. Drum drive
motor_K".)
5)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the terminal (white harness) (B) and the terminal (red harness) (C).
* When installing, refer the mark (D) of the mounting plate,

arrange the terminals.
B
C
B
D
A
F
A
4)
Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the drive gear (I), the
charger cleaner motor (J), and the CCM rotation detection (K).
6)
Remove the screw (E), and remove the PTC electrode mounting plate (F).
J 1-g
I
K 1-h
F
7)
Disconnect the connector (G). Insert the screwdriver to the

holes (H), and remove the screws (I). Remove the electrode
mounting plate unit (J).
(1)

Unit
* When installing, fit the positioning pins (K).
I
1
I
H
J
8)
Remove the harness (L) from the pawls (M). Remove the
screws (N), and remove the PTC cleaner motor (O).
1)

2)

unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
4)
5)
Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
O
1-i
N
C. Toner transport drive unit
1
Unit
Toner transport drive
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Toner motor K1
Toner motor K2
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Hopper motor K
Hopper motor C
Hopper motor M
Hopper motor Y
Page
Q -13
Q -14
D
D
6)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
1-e
1-d
1-c
1-b
1-a
1
1-i
1-h
1-g
F
1-f
7)
Disconnect the connectors (H).
10) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the harness (R) from
the wire saddles (Q).
Q
R
8)
Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L),
and the toner transport unit Y (M).
11) Remove the screws (S), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(T).
T
S
12) Remove the screws (U), and remove the toner transport drive
unit (V).
U
V 1
I
9)
Remove the screws (N), and open the control box (O).
a. Toner motor
7)
Unit
unit
a
b
c
d
e
Remove the screws (C), and open the control box (D).
Parts
Toner motor K 1
Toner motor K 2
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
1-c
1-b
1-a
1-e
1-d
1)

2)
Remove the developement unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and
the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING
SECTION".)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), charge unit (BK), and the
SECTION".)
4)
Remove the paper exit tray and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
5)
Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (A),

release the lock.
8)
Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the harness (G) from

the wire saddles (F).
F
G
9)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(I).
I
H
H
6)
Remove the couplings (B).
B
H
10) Disconnect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the toner motors (L) of each color.
5)
Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
C
E
1-b
1-a
L
L 1-d
L 1-c
1-e
L
A
B
J
D
D
K
6)
b. Hopper motor
Unit
unit
f
g
h
i
Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
Parts
Hopper motor K
Hopper motor C
Hopper motor M
Hopper motor Y
F
1-i
1-h
1-g
1-f
1)

2)

unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
3)
Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the
SECTION".)
4)
7)
Disconnect the connectors (H).
8)
Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L),
and the toner transport unit Y (M).
11) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
remove the guide (R). Remove the gears (S).
* When installing, be careful it bite the wire.
P
P
S
P
S
R
R
J
J
12) Remove the screws (T), and open the control box (U).
I
9)
Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (N),

release the lock.
U
N
T
10) Remove the couplings (O).
13) Disconnect the connectors (V). Remove the harness (X) from
the wire saddles (W).
W
X
14) Remove the screws (Y), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(Z).
D. PS drive unit
Unit
PS drive unit
Z
Y
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
LCC transport motor
PS motor
PS clutch
Torque limiter
Page
Q -18
Q -18
Q -18
Q -19
Q -20
Q -20
1-d
Y
15) Disconnect the connector (a). Remove the screws (b), and
remove the hopper motors (c) of each color.
1-a
1-c
1-b
1-g
1-e
1-f
c
1-g
c
c 1-h
1-f
c 1-i
(1)
PS drive unit
Unit
1
PS drive unit
1)
2)
5)
Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
6)
Remove the resin ring (N). Remove the pulley sheet (O), the
belt (P), and the pulley (Q), and remove the parallel pin (R).
R
Q
3)

P
7)
Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
S
C
4)
S
E
F
8)
Disconnect the connectors (U), and remove the screws (V),

and remove the PS drive unit (W).
W 1
a. PS front transport motor
Unit
PS drive unit
b. LCC transport motor

Parts
Unit
PS drive unit
Parts
LCC transport motor
1-a
1-b
1)
the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS dirve unit.)
3)
remove the PS front transport motor (C).
1)
2)
Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS drive unit.)
3)

remove the LCC transport motor (C).
C 1-b
C 1-a
B
B
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pulley (F) puts on the belt (D).
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pulley (F) puts on the belt (D).
E
D
E
D
F
F
c. PS motor
Unit
PS drive unit
Parts
c
PS motor
1-c
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
F
G
F
4)
3)
Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the PS clutch unit

(I).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
to the wiring of the harness.

remove the PS motor (E).
1-c E
5)
Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the PS clutch (K).
C
J
d. PS clutch
Unit
PS drive unit
Parts
d
PS clutch
1-d
1-d K
1)
2)
Remove the PS dirve unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS drive unit".)
e. Manual paper feed clutch
Unit
PS drive unit
5)
Parts
Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual paper

feed clutch unit (H).
H
G
1-e
1)
2)
3)
Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C),
and the collars (D).
6)
A
B
Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the manual paper feed
clutch (J).
D
I
B
C
C
B
D
C
1-e J
f. LCC transport clutch
4)
Unit
PS drive unit
Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F).
f
g
Parts
Torque limiter
E
E
1-f
1-g
1)
2)
3)
Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C),
and the collars (D).
A
B
6)
Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the LCC transport clutch
(J).
D
B
C
C
B
D
C
J 1-f
7)
Remove the E-rings (K), and remove the torque limiter (L).
K
4)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F).
E
E
L 1- g
E. Tandem drive unit

5)
Remove the torque limiter unit (G). Disconnect the connector

(H), and remove the LCC transport clutch unit (I).
Unit
Tandem drive unit

a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
Paper feed motor
clutch
clutch
(Tandem tray 2)
Page
Q -23
Q -23
Q -24
Q -25
Q -26
Q -27
1-b
1-c
I
1-f
1
1-a
1-d
1-e
(1)
Tandem drive unit
4)
Unit
1
Tandem drive unit
E
F
H
1)
2)
G
5)
Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
B
M
L
K
6)
3)
Remove the resin ring (N), and remove the pulley sheet (O),
the belt (P), the pulley (Q), and the parallel pin (R).

R
Q
D
7)
Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
S
T
8)
Remove the resin ring (U), remove the pulley (V), the belt (W),
the parallel pin (X), and the pulley sheet (Y). Remove the
screws (Z), and remove the support plate (a).
a. Paper feed motor
Unit
Tandem drive unit
Parts
Paper feed motor
Y
X
W
V
U
1-a
9)
Disconnect the connector (b). Remove the harness (d) from

the wire saddle (c). Remove the screws (e), and remove the
inner ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (f).
1)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Disengage the pawl (C) of the PWB supporter, and remove the
paper feed motor (D).
D 1-a
C
b
d
10) Disconnect the connectors (g). Remove the screws (h), and
remove the tandem drive unit (i).
b. Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
Unit
Tandem drive unit
Parts
1-b
1
i
1)
2)
Remove the tandem drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tandem drive
unit".)
3)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the
spring (C).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screws
(A).
c. Tandem tray transport clutch
Unit
Tandem drive unit
Parts
1-c
B
C
4)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E).
1)
2)
unit".)
3)
spring (C).
(A).
E
F
5)
Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the tandem tray 1

paper feed clutch unit (I).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper.
4)
Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E).
I
F
D
E
F
G
6)
Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the tandem tray 1 paper
feed clutch (K).
K 1-b
5)
Remove the bearing (H) and the belt (I).
3)
spring (C).
(A).
B
C
6)
Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the tandem tray

transport clutch unit (K).
K
4)
Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
(F), and the parallel pins (G).
D
E
F
G
7)
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the tandem tray transport
clutch (M).
L
5)

remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L).
M 1-c
d. Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
Unit
Tandem drive unit
K
K
Parts
1-d
1)
2)
unit".)
6)
Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the tandem tray 2

paper feed clutch unit (N).
3)
Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
pin (C), and the belt (D).
A
N
M
B
C
7)
Remove the E-ring (O), and remove the tandem tray 2 paper
feed clutch (P)
4)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the couplings (F) and the
spring (G).
(A).
F
G
P 1-d
e. Vertical transport clutch upper
Unit
Tandem drive unit
Parts
5)
Remove the E-rings (H), and remove the collars (I), the gears
(J), and the parallel pins (K).
H
I
J
1-e
K
1)
2)
unit".)
J
K
6)
Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and

remove the support plate (N). Remove the screws (O), and
remove the frame (P).
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)

Unit
Tandem drive unit
Parts
O
O
1-f
7)
Disconnect the connector (Q), and remove the vertical transport clutch upper unit (R).
1)
2)
unit".)
3)
spring (C).

(A).
R
Q
B
C
8)
Remove the E-rings (S), and remove the vertical transport

clutch upper (T).
4)
Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
(F), and the parallel pins (G).
S
D
E
F
G
T 1-e
F
G
5)

remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L).
F. Multistage drive unit

Unit
a
b
K
K
c
d
e
Parts
(Tray 3)
(Tray 4)
Page
Q -29
Q -29
Q -30
Q -31
1
6)
1-c
Remove the screws (M), and remove the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) unit (N).
1-a
M
M
1-d
1-e
1-b
N
(1)
7)

Unit
Remove the screws (O), and remove the mounting plate unit
(P) from the paper pickup solenoid (Ttandem tray 2) (Q).
* When installing, insert the shaft (R) in the arm (S).
R
S
1
O
O
1)
P
1-f Q
2)
Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the belt
(C), the parallel pin (D), and the pulley sheet (E). Remove the
screws (F), remove the support plate (G).
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B),

and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray3, 4) units (C).
E
D
C
B
A
G
F
B
C
A
3)
Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the screws (I), and

remove the multistage drive unit (J).
1 J
B
3)
Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the coupling (E) and the
spring (F) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3, 4) (G).
H
H
H
D
H
a. Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3), Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 4)
Unit
a
b
1-a
1-b
Parts
b. Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Unit
Parts
1-a
1-c
1-b
1)
1)
2)
Remove the multistage drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Multistage

drive unit".)
3)
Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F).
c. Tray 4 paper feed clutch
Unit
1-d
1)
2)

drive unit".)
3)
Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F).
A
4)
Parts
Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 3 paper


4)
5)
Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the tray 3 paper feed
clutch (J).
Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 4 paper

I
I
G
1-c J
5)
Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the tray 4 paper feed clutch
(J).
J 1-d
4)
Remove the E-rings (F), and remove the collars (G), the gears
(H), and the parallel pins (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the frame (K).
d. Vertical transport clutch lower
Unit
Parts
5)
Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the vertical transport clutch lower unit (M).
1-e
1)
2)

drive unit".)
3)
Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
pin (C), the belt (D), and the pulley sheet (E).
A
B
6)
Remove the E-ring (N), and remove the bearing (O). Remove
the E-ring (P), and remove the vertical transport clutch lower
(Q).
C
P
Q 1-e
N
2. Maintenance
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Gears (grease)
Earth portion of each

shaft
(Conduction Grease)
Belts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
When chacking, apply to
the necessary positions.
(UKOG-0307FCZZ)
When chacking, apply to
the necessary positions.
(UKOG-0012QCZZ)
MX-7000N
[R]
PWB SECTION
(1)
SUB power PWB
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Parts
SUB power PWB
A. PWB
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
Parts
SUB power PWB
AC power PWB
DC power PWB
1 TC PWB
HL PWB
DRIVER PWB
PCU PWB
Mother PWB
MFP cnt PWB
MC PWB
2 TC PWB
HDD
DSPF memory PWB
Scanner control PWB
PTC PWB
Page
R- 1
R- 1
R- 2
R- 3
R- 3
R- 4
R- 4
R- 4
R- 5
R- 6
R- 6
R- 6
R- 7
1)
2)

remove the SUB power PWB (C).
R- 8
C a
m
B
n
d
g
f
j
i
(2)
AC power PWB
Parts
b
AC power PWB
a
1)
MX-7000N PWB SECTION R 1
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and

the screws (C), and remove the AC power PWB (D).
3)
Remove the snap bands (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the cord mounting plate (C).
* Be careful to the difference between the size of the screws

(B) and the size of screws (C).
b
A
D
B
A
C
B
B
B
(3)
DC power PWB
4)
Parts
Remove the screws (D), and remove the power supply unit
(E).
DC power PWB
D
D
E
D
1)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A).
D
5)
Remove the snap bands (F), and disconnect the connector

(G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the AC power unit
(I).
A
G
200V
I
120V
6)
Remove the screws (J), and disconnect the connector (K).

Remove the DC power PWB (L).
200V
3)
Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and

remove the 1 TC PWB (E).
J
J
L c
120V
J
J
d E
J
J
D
(5)
Parts
L c
(4)
HL PWB
e
HL PWB
1 TC PWB
Parts
d
1 TC PWB
e
d
1)
2)
1)
2)
B
A
B
A
3)
Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and

remove the HL PWB (E).
(7)
PCU PWB
Parts
g
PCU PWB
g
D
E e
D
1)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and

the connector (C), and remove the PCU PWB (D).
D
(6)
DRIVER PWB
D g
Parts
f
DRIVER PWB
B
B
C
B
f
B
(8)
1)
2)
Parts
h

disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DRIVER PWB
(D).
Mother PWB
Mother PWB
D f
h
B
C
1)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the Mother PWB (D).
D h
3)
Pull out the control box (G) until the position in which the connector (F) is seen. Pull the sheet (H), and remove the connector (F).
F
B
G
C
H
B
B
(9)
* When installing, check that the harness (I) is put on the

mylar (J).
MFP cnt PWB

Parts
i
* Check that the harness is not twisting, hanging down, etc.
MFP cnt PWB
J
i
I
1)
Remove the right cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
2)
Remove the screws (A). Raise the finger hooks (B), and pull
out the control box (D) until the position in which the clamp (C)
is seen. Remove the harness (E) from the clamp (C).
4)
Remove the screws (K), and remove the MFP cnt PWB (L).
K
K
K
A
D
B
L i
K
A
(10) MC PWB
4)
Parts
Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screw (G), and

remove the earth wire (H).
Mainte
nance
MC PWB
H
F
G
F
j
F
F
1)
2)
5)
Remove the screws (I). Disengage the pawls (J), and remove
the MC PWB (K).
(11) 2 TC PWB
Parts
3)
2 TC PWB

1)
2)

remove the 2 TC PWB (C).
(13) DSPF memory PWB, Scanner control PWB

Parts
m
n
k C
DSPF memory PWB

Scanner control PWB
A
B
B
m
n
B
(12) HDD
Parts
l
1)

EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the snap bands (B).

Remove the screws (C), and remove the scanner control PWB
unit (D).
HDD
D
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
D
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the DSPF memory PWB
(F).
A
B
D
A
3)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the angles (G) from the
HDD (F).
* Since the HDD is weak in shock, handle it carefully. For
example, avoid hitting the corner, dropping, or other shocks.
G
m F
4)
Remove the screws (G), and remove the mounting plates (H).
Remove the screws (I), and remove the scanner control PWB
(J).
G
H
H
I
I
I
J n
(14) PTC PWB
Parts
o
PTC PWB
1)
2)

remove the PTC PWB (C).
o C
A
B
B
MX-7000N
[S]
FAN, FILTER SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
(1)
Unit
A
B
Fan motor
Filter
Page
S- 1
S- 7

a
Parts
A. Fan motor
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Ozone fan motor 3
Ozone fan motor 2
Ozone fan motor 1
Inner ventilation fan motor (center)
Inner ventilation fan motor (right)
Page
S- 1
S- 2
S- 2
S- 3
SSSS-
4
5
5
6
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and open the controller box (B).
B
b
i
g
a
f
d
e
h
3)
Peel off the mylar (C). Disconnect the connector (D), and
remove the screws (E). Remove the contrller cooling fan motor
(F).
* When installing, the label side is upward.
F a
MX-7000N FAN, FILTER SECTION S 1
(2)
(3)
Parts
b
Parts
1)
2)
Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
1)
2)
Disconnect the connectors (A).
C
D
200V
A
B
D
A
3)
120V
Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the harness from the

wire saddle (F). Remove the screws (G), and remove the HDD
cooling fan motor (H).
* When installing, the label side is inward.
3)
Remove the snap bands (B). Remove the screws (C), and
remove the cord mounting plate (D).
b H
G
G
E
4)
Remove the screws (E), and remove the power supply unit (F).
2)
E
E
B
F
A
E
E
5)
Disconnect the connectors (G), and remove the snap bands

(H). Remove the screws (I), and remove the power cooling fan
motor (J).
* When installing, the label side is positioned on the inside.
3)

H
J c
C
D
I
c J
I
(4)
Ozone fan motor 3, Ozone fan motor 2
Parts
d
e
Ozone fan motor 3

Ozone fan motor 2
D
4)

G
d
e
1)
G
F
G
5)
Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the duct (J).
2)
* When installing, hook the duct (J) to the washer (K).
K
I
J
A
6)
Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and

remove the washer (N). Remove the ozone fan motor 3 (O).
Disconnect the connector (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
remove the ozone fan motor 2 (R).
3)

M
N
O d
E
R e
(5)
Ozone fan motor 1
D
Parts
Ozone fan motor 1
4)
Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and

G
f
1)
G
F
G
5)

remove the ozone fan motor 1 (K).
(7)

h
Parts
f K
J
h
J
(6)

Parts
g
1)
2)
Charger air inlet motor
B
g
A
B
1)
Remove the frame cover R. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
2)

remove the charger air inlet fan motor (C).
C g
B
3)
Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the herness (E) from

the clamp (D). Remove the screws (F), and remove the inner
ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (G).
A
G
C
E
4)
Remove the screws (H), and remove the inner ventilation fan
motor (Center) (I).
3)
Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
* When installing, direct the label face (J) to the mounting

plate side, and position the harness (L) in mark (K) side.
h I
4)
K
(8)
Close the control box (E).

i
Parts
i
5)
1)
2)
Remove the screw (F), and push the part (G), disengage the
pawl (H). Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the inner ventilation fan motor (Right) unit (J).
F
H
B
J
A
I
G
6)
Remove the screws (K), and remove the inner ventilation fan
motor (Right) (L).
1)
Remove the filter cover (A), and remove the ozone filters (B).
B a
A
K
L i
B a
(2)
Ozone filter
B. Filter
Mainte
nance
Parts
Parts
a
b
c
d
Ozone filter
Ozone filter
Dust filter
Paper exit filter
Mainte
nance
Page
SSSS-
Ozone filter
7
7
8
8
b
d
c
a
b
1)
Remove the rear cabinet and rear lower cabinet. (Refer to the
2)
Remove the screws (A). Pull out the cover (B), and remove the
ozone filter (C).
C b
(1)
Ozone filter
Parts
a
Ozone filter
Mainte
nance
(3)
Dust filter
(4)
Mainte
nance
Parts
c
Dust filter
Mainte
nance
Parts
d
Paper exit filter
1)
Paper exit filter
1)
Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the filter cover (B).
Remove the paper exit filter (C).
A
B
A
d C
B
2)
Remove the holder (C). Remove the dust filter (D).
c D
2. Maintenance
No.
Part name
Ozone filter
2
3
Paper exit filter

Dust filter
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
2
3
1
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
(P/G No. : [65]-22)
(P/G No. : [65]-24)
(P/G No. : [55]-50)
MX-7000N
[T]
SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
2)
A. Sensor, switch
a
b
c
d
e
Parts
Main switch
Right transport unit open/close detection sensor
Page
T- 1
T- 2
T- 3
T- 3
T- 4
A
d
a
3)
Disconnect the connector (C).
c
e
(1)

a
Parts
4)
Release the lock (D), and open the right door unit (E).
E
D
1)
MX-7000N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION T 1
5)
Remove the screws (F), and remove the holder (G).
3)
Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Remove the
screw (D), and remove the left cabinet lower (E). Remove the
screw (F), and remove the rail cover (G).
* When installing, engage the pawl (H) to hole of the frame.
* Install so that the rib (I) of the left cabinet lower is positioned
inside than adjuster cover (J).
H
H
E
C
6)
Remove the screw (H), and remove the right door open/close
switch (I).
H
D
E
F
I
J
I
a
4)
Remove the screws (K), and remove the frame cover (L).
L
(2)
Main switch
Parts
b
Main switch
K
5)
Remove the screw (M), and remove the cover (N). Remove
the screws (O), and remove the main switch unit (P).
* When installing, engage the pawl (Q) to the main unit (P).
* When installing, pinch the pawl (R) to the frame (S).
1)
Romove the front cabinet left. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL

OUTFIT".)
2)
Pull out the paper feed tray (A).
O
P
S
Q
R
N
M
6)
Disconnect the connectors (T). Disengage the pawls (U), and

remove the main switch (V).
3)
Remove the screws (B), and remove the frame cover (C).
C
b V
U
U
T
B
T
4)
(3)
Remove the screw (D), and remove the front door lower open/
close switch (E). Disconnect the connectors (F).

c
Parts
E c
(4)

d
Parts
1)
Romove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2)
Pull out the tandem paper feed tray (A).
1)

2)

OUTFIT".)
3)
Remove the screw (A), and remove the switch cover (B).
B
A
4)
Remove the screws (C), and remove the front door upper
open/close switch unit (D).
3)
remove the mounting plate (C). Remove the right transport unit
open/close detection sensor (D).
C
A
D
5)
D e
Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screw (F), and

remove the front door upper open/close switch (G).
G d
(5)

e
Parts
1)
2)
Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to "[F] Tray
paper feed section".)
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT

solder is about 220C, which
is about
40C higher
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
XXXX
BYSHARP
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature
components.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
ALLofRIGHTS
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
in a retrieval
orfile
transmitted
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored
during soldering
work,system,
clean and
the tip within
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
* Applicable for model that uses battery.
COPYRIGHT 2005 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 and Internet
Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
re
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2005 December Printed in Japan

Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX5500 6200 7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .F-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . J-1

For how to unpacking and installation,

[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G-1

[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . .K-1

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING

DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT

[D] SCANNER SECTION

[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION

[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE

[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION

[H] DUPLEX SECTION

[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION

[L] DEVELOPING SECTION

[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR

[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION

[Q] DRIVE SECTION

SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION

This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.

It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.

Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.

WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious

A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a

Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

1. Precautions for servicing

When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,

There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an

There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective

When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to

It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

It may cause an electric shock.

3. Note for installing site

Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.

Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.

When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink

The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to

Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,

Place of much vibrations

11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to

2. Warning for servicing

Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal

Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage

Poorly ventilated place

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,